Kiratpur, Itarsi - MP State Livestock and Poultry … Document For Design, Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of Automatic Cattle Feed Plant of Capacity 100 KeyMTPD expandable

Tender Document For Design, Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of Automatic Cattle Feed

Plant of Capacity 100 MTPD expandable to 200 MTPD at Kiratpur, Itarsi On Total Turn Key Basis

Page 1 of 430

Tender

For

Design, Supply, Erection, Testing &

Commissioning

Of

Automatic Cattle Feed Plant

Of

Capacity100 MTPD Expandable to 200 MTPD At

Kiratpur, Itarsi

On

Total Turn Key Basis

for

The Madhya Pradesh State Livestock And Poultry Development

Corporation, Bhopal

Tender Notice No. : MPLPDC/CFP/Itarsi/2014-15

Date : 22-08-2014

Rs. 25,000/-



Page 2 of 430

ISSUE LETTER OF TENDER DOCUMENT

FOR

Design, Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of Automatic Cattle Feed Plant of

Capacity 100 MTPD expandable to 200 MTPD at Kiratpur, Itarsi On Total Turn Key Basis.

This tender document set is issued to:

Name of the Tenderer:

Address of the Tenderer:

The fee for this set of tender document is Rs 25,000 /- (Rupees Twenty Five Thousand only)

Date of sale of Tender document vide receipt No .

Managing Director,

(MPLPDC)



Page 3 of 430

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation Main Road No. 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road, Bhopal - 462 003

Phone No.0755-2776086 / 2771274 : Fax : 2776086 Website : www.mplivestock.com

E-mail: [email protected]

No. MPLPDC/CFP/Itarsi/2014-15 Dated: 22.08.2014

TENDER FORM

Sealed tenders are invited from experienced bonafide manufacturers of Cattle Feed Plant and its equipment for “Design,

Supply, Installation, Testing And Commissioning of 100 TPD cattle feed plant (expandable up to 200 TPD) on Turnkey

Basis” at Kiratpur, Itarsi. Tender form with terms and conditions can be obtained from MPLPDC Office by depositing

Cash/Demand Draft of Rs. 25,000/- only (Rs. 500 extra if desired by post) in favour of MPLPDC, Bhopal, payable at

Bhopal up to 3.00 PM on dated 12.09.2014. Further details can be obtained from our website www.mplivestock.com.

Managing Director MPLPDC

1. LAST DATE AND TIME OF

SALE OF TENDER FORM : 12/09/2014 Upto 3:00 PM

2. DATE & TIME OF PRE-BID MEETING : 03/09/2014 AT 4:00AM AT MPLPDC, Bhopal

3. LAST DATE & TIME FOR SUBMISSION

OF DULY FILLED TENDER FORM

(Technical & Financial bid in separate envelopes) : 12/09/2014 Upto 3:00 PM

4. DATE & TIME FOR OPENING OF

THE TENDER (Technical bid only) : 12/09/2014 AT 4:00 PM

5. EMD (to be deposited with the tender in

the technical bid) : Rs.36,00,000/- (Rs. Thirty Six Lakhs only) by

Demand draft only in favour of MPLPDC,

payable at Bhopal.

The detailed terms and conditions of the tender are contained in the Tender document.


Managing Director MPLPDC

Note: The Tender form is also available on web site www.mplivestock.com and may be downloaded from the

website. In case of downloaded document a demand draft of Rs. 25,000/- (Twenty Five Thousand only)

should be enclosed with the tender document.

http://www.mplivestock.com/





Page 4 of 430


Phone No.0755-2776086 / 2771274 : Fax : 2776086 Website : www.mplivestock.com



M/s. ,

,

,

.

Sub: Tender document for “DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING OF 100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO 200

TPD) ON TURNKEY BASIS” AT KIRATPUR, ITARSI, M.P.

.

Ref.: Your request letter No. ___ document.

Dear Sir,

dated for issue of tender

We thank you for evincing interest in the tender floated by us. The tender document along with technical

specification is enclosed which is to be returned duly sealed and signed on each page. We wish to emphasize

few pertinent points concerning the tender:-

1. There is an Eligibility and Qualification Criterion prescribed in the tender document . Tenders from firms

fulfilling the Eligibility and Qualification Criterion will only be considered for price bidding. It is,

therefore, of utmost importance that all documents establishing your eligibility are submitted as per the

check list given. Non receipt of the documents with the tender would be construed as you are

not fulfilling the eligibility criterion and such tenders are liable for no further consideration / evaluation.

2. All the terms & conditions, Special as well as General are important.

3. Each tenderer is required to provide complete address, phone no. etc. against General Condition No.2.8 of

the tender document failing which the tender is liable to be treated as incomplete.

4. The tender must be submitted in three envelopes method as specified in special note i.e. :- (i) The first envelope of part –I : This shall contain “EMD” Demand Draft.

(ii) The Second envelope of part-I – This shall contain :-

A. Sealed & signed complete tender document (except Page No.31 to 39 which is for

PriceBid) along with specifications.

B. Required documents/papers towards eligibility & qualifications criterion. C. All other

requirements as mentioned in the tender document.

(iii) The third envelope (Part-II) This shall contain only Price Bid of the quoted item in the prescribed proforma given in the

tender document. Kindly refer page no 31 to 39 of tender document for quoting rates)

Thanking you, Encl.: As above Yours faithfully,

Managing Director MPLPDC,

Bhopal




Page 5 of 430

TENDER FORM

FOR

“DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF

100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO 200 TPD) ON

TOTAL TURNKEY BASIS”

AT

KIRATPUR, ITARSI.

(District – Hoshangabad)

(Bid to be submitted in Two envelop technical & commercial)

Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation

Main Road No. – 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road, Bhopal – 462003 Phone No. 0755-2771274 : Telefax 0755-2776086

Website : WWW.mplivestock.com

E-mail :[email protected]



Page 6 of 430

Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation

Main Road No. – 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road, Bhopal – 462003 Phone No. 0755-2771274 : Telefax 0755-2776086 : Website : WWW.mplivestock.com

E-mail : [email protected]


TENDER NOTICE

Sealed tenders are invited from experienced bonafide manufacturers of Cattle Feed Plant and its

equipments for “Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of 100 TPD cattle

feed plant (expandable up to 200 TPD) on T otalTurnkey Basis” each at Kiratpur, Itarsi

District- Hoshangabad. Tender form with terms and conditions can be obtained from

MPLPDC, Bhopal by depositing Cash/Demand Draft of Rs.25,000/- only (Rs. 500 extra if

desired by post) in favour of MPLPDC, payable at Bhopal up to 3.00 PM on dated 12.09.2014

Further details can be obtained from our website: www.mplivestock.com

1. LAST DATE AND TIME OF

MD, MPLPDC

SALE OF TENDER FORM : 12/09/2014 Upto 3:00 PM

2. DATE & TIME OF PRE-BID MEETING : 03/09/2014 AT 4:00 PM

AT MPLPDC, Bhopal

3. LAST DATE & TIME FOR SUBMISSION

OF DULY FILLED TENDER FORM

(Technical & Financial bid in separate envelopes) : 12/09/2014 Upto 3:00 PM

4. DATE & TIME FOR OPENING OF

THE TENDER (Technical bid only) : 12/09/2014 AT 4:00 PM

5. EMD (to be deposited with the tender in

the technical bid) : Rs. 36,00,000/- (Rs. Thirty Six

Lakhs only) by Demand draft only in

favour of MPLPDC, payable at

Bhopal.


1. Name and full address of the firm

Submitting the tender (In block letters)

Phone No. ……………………. Mobile No. ……………………. Fax No. …………………………

Email : …………………………………………..

Website : ………………………………………….

Contact Person : ………………………………………….



Page 7 of 430

2. .

3.

Addressed to :

Income tax PAN no. :

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry

Development Corporation Main Road No. 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road,

Bhopal - 462 003

4.

5.

Last 5 years Income Tax clearance :

or returns

Status of tenderer (tick mark only) :

Either in original or photocopy

certificates duly attested are to

enclosed.

Individual/ HUF/ firm/ company (Specify

be

the

6.

Earlier experience in this field (if any) :

details in enclosed section– I) Enclose the document/s.

7.

Name of the person/s authorized to :

negotiate and sign the contract

(Designation / status in the firm)

An attested photocopy of power of

attorney issued by all partners/director

in favor of nominated person to be encl.

8. Before making any change in constitution of the firm will be intimated to the MPLPDC.,

Bhopal for their approval.

9. The tender fee of Rs.25,000/- ( Rs Twenty Five Thousand only ) cash / DD has been

deposited vide cash receipt no. __dated .

10. I / We agree to abide by all the terms & conditions mentioned in the Tender Notice issued by

the Managing Di recto r, MP LP D C , Bho pa l and the other conditions annexed with the

tender form, all the pages of which have been signed by me / us in token of my / our

acceptance of the terms & conditions mentioned therein.

11. The EMD deposited vide demand draft no. dated

issued by bank of Rs. 36,00,000/= (Rs. Thirty Six

Lac only) in favor of M P LP DC , Bho p a l to cover earnest money (No interest will be

payable on EMD).

12. Details of the Bankers:

13. VALIDITY: The validity of offered rate will be 180 days from the date of opening / final

bid (withdrawal of offer with in which by me / us shall to be forfeiture of the EMD).

14. COMPANY PROFILE: The tenderer must enclose their company profile and financial

status (Enclose latest balance sheet, current assets / liabilities, working capital) along with

tender form. It should also include details like location of production unit, make & capacity

of production and service equipments, technical manpower and other facilities available.



Page 8 of 430

Important Notes:

1. Please do not change the format/language and cut/add any items otherwise the

tender would be rejected.

2. Proofs and supporting documents of all the points must be enclosed and filled in the

checklist.

3. Any clarification w.r.t. tender’s terms & conditions can be obtained during

office hours on all working days from this office prior to submission date of tender.

All clarifications can be sought only in written by email, post and fax. Please note

that we need three working days minimum to revert on such queries.

4. All rates quoted must be FOR destination. IF MP VAT / CST / excise is/are

exempted, than exemption certificate (s) is/are to be enclosed.

5. Rates in “Price Bid” as per Annexure-1 shall be written both in words and in figures.

There should not be errors and or overwriting. Correction if any, should be made clearly

and initialed with dates.

6. Tenderer has to submit the Technical Bid and Price Bid Separately in

sealed envelopes super scribing with Technical Bid and Price Bid.

7. EMD and all required enclosures along with duly signed General Terms & Special

Terms & Conditions should be submitted along with “Pre- Qualification

Bid”.

Managing Director, MPLPDC,

Bhopal.



Page 9 of 430

(i)

SPECIAL NOTES – Section - I

1. EARNEST MONEY :

The tenderer is required to submit EMD as mentioned in the tender document in

a separate envelop only in form of Demand Draft in favour of The Madhya

Pradesh Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal

2. BIDS IN TWO PARTS :

Bids are required to be submitted in two parts - Part-I & Part-II as described

below:

2.1 The first part (Part-I) of the bid shall contain 2 separate sealed envelopes. In

one envelope EMD in form of DD/Bankers cheque as specified shall be placed.

This envelope should be super-scribed as “Part-I EMD only”. The second

envelope of the first part shall contain technical bid only. The envelope should

be duly sealed and super-scribed as “Part-I Technical Bid only”. At the time of

the opening of the tender first EMD DD envelope shall be opened and EMD

shall be verified in accordance to tender If EMD DD is not enclosed in a

separate envelope and not found in accordance to tender document

the tender of such party shall be rejected summarily.

Note :- The EMD could also be submitted in form of a Bank Guarantee in the

prescribed format. BGs and DDs shall be acceptable as EMD.

2.2 The second part (Part-II) shall be placed in third separate envelope. It shall

contain financial bid/price bid. The envelope should be duly sealed and

super-scribed as “Part-II Price Bid only”

2.3 After verification of EMD DD deposit Technical bids shall be opened and EMD

details & technical details read out to the bidders representatives. Price bids

shall not be opened immediately. After scrutiny of the technical bids, the

clarifications, if any, will be obtained from the bidders during the technical

discussions. In case it is necessary to obtain revised prices from the bidders the

same shall be done by asking all the concern bidders to submit the revised price

bids in sealed covers, and the earlier price bids will become invalid. In case all

the tenderers submit the price bids on the same day after freezing of technical

requirements the bids shall be opened on the same day. In case one or more of

the eligible tenderers, consequent to technical discussions and technical details

frozen, desire to revise their price bid, they can do so on the same day or at the

most the next working day of the technical discussions and the bids in such event

shall be opened on the next day in the presence of such representative of the

tenderers who wish to be present. Normally one representative of participating

bidder will be allowed. However a bidding company may seek permission for

more personnel.



Page 10 of 430

3. ELIGIBILITY & QUALIFICATION CRITERION:

The information required for Eligibility & Qualification Criterion should be provided

by the tenderer in the Criterion sheet at Page No. (iii) of Special Note and formats

(ii) Prescribed under Section I, Section II (Schedule I and Schedule II), Section III by enclosing order copies, performance certificates and other relevant

documents in support of their version. Incomplete information & documents or

information not furnished in the prescribed formats will make the

tender liable for rejection without any further reference to the tenderer. It

is therefore enjoined upon all tenderers to furnish complete information in the

Prescribed formats with supporting documents in the very first instance.

4. The tenderers are advised to depute their authorized representative for the technical

discussions on the date and time as informed by the MPLPDC. The bids of the

tenderers, who fail to depute their representative as above shall be liable for

rejection.

5. PRE BID CONFERENCE:

Pre bid conference dates as notified in tender document. The tenderers can seek

any clarifications in the Pre-bid conference. As a run up to the pre Bid conference

it is compulsory that all bidders submit their queries at least one week in advance

by email, courier or fax so that replies could be made. Verbal queries during Pre

Bid will not be entertained. It is a must that all correspondence before tenders are

opened is made in a transparent manner by emails, post/courier and/or faxes only.

MPLPDC shall revert back in a minimum of 3 working days and a maximum of 10

working days. All prospective bidders are requested to submit their queries as a

run up to pre bid and also during the Pre bid in written form only. All such

queries and their replies shall be commonly shared with each of the prospective

bidders to ensure total transparency and a level platform to enable all bidders

quote at par. No verbal queries as such, shall be entertained before, during and

after pre bids. Queries of all participants who have bought the tender document

shall only be replied.

6. Technical & Financial Bid Opening:

On 12/09/2014 only technical bids will be opened in front of representatives of

respective bidders. Financial bid of technically qualified bidders will be opened

within 10 days of opening of technical bids and all the tenderers will be informed

accordingly. In case of technical evaluation exceeding 10 days all the tenderers will

be informed accordingly.



Page 11 of 430

(iii)

COMPARATIVE STATEMENT OF ELIGIBILITY & QUALIFICATIONS CRITERION

SPECIAL NOTES – Section - II

Statement/Check List of important documents to be submitted by each tenderer

(Each tenderer is required to fill up the form and enclose the required document failing which the

tender will become liable for no further consideration/evaluation)

Sr.

No. Particulars

Yes or

No

If yes please

indicate page no

1 Power of attorney in the name of designated person

2 Whether manufacturer (Yes/No)

If no, whether manufacturer’s authorization form enclosed as per Section I. 3 Whether experience in past performance on works of similar nature within

the past five years submitted as per Schedule-I of Section-II. (Attach copies of

purchase order and performance certificates)

4 Whether details of current work in hand and other contractual commitments

submitted as per Schedule-II of Section-II. (Attach copies of purchase order)

5 Whether P&L statement and balance sheet and auditor’s report submitted for

last five years.

6 Whether information regarding current litigation submitted.

7 Is the bidder in business of the jobs tendered for a minimum period of five years at

the time of bid opening? (Attach copy of registration of the firm.)

8 What is the bidders annual financial turn over during last five years?

1st preceding year (2013-14) 2nd preceding year (2012-13) 3rd preceding year. ( 2012-11) 5th preceding year. ( 2010-09) 9 Has the bidder completed / having in hand, five projects or above of similar

nature during the last five years.

10 Whether a copy of IT clearance/returns submitted for the previous three years. 11 Whether a copy of valid Sales Tax Registration for the tendered

item submitted.

12 Whether a copy of Sales Tax clearance/returns submitted for the previous five

years

13 Whether Solvency Certificate equal to three months requirement of cash flow

at the peak execution period for the project submitted.

14 Payment terms accepted (Yes/No).

15 Sealed and signed tender document & specifications in original enclosed

(Yes/No).

16 EMD Details:

DD No…………………. dated ………………. For Rs. ……………..

17 BG No. ______________ dated ___________ for Rs. ……………..

issued by Bank ……………………………………………………………… 18 Correspondence address :

Ph. No. ………… Fax No. …..………. Mobile No. .………..……………

Signature of tenderer



Page 12 of 430


Phone No.0755-2776086 / 2771274 : Fax : 2776086 Website : www.mplivestock.com :



INDEX

1. SCHEDULE-I PAGE NO.

1.1 SPECIAL NOTES 9

1.2 ELIGIBILITY & QUALIFICATIONS CRITERION SHEET 10

1.3 SYNOPSIS OF TENDER 14-15

1.4 GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS 16-30

1.5 ANNEXURE – I : Form of Tender for quoting rates.

Part A 31-36 Part B 37-38

1.6 ANNEXURE – II : Form of Bank Guarantee for 30% 40-41

advance payment.

1.7 ANNEXURE – III : Form of agreement required to be 42-44

submitted by the supplier

1.8 ANNEXURE – IV : General terms & conditions which 45-48

will form an integral part of Purchase

Order.

1.9 ANNEXURE – V : Form of Bank Guarantee for Bid Security 49-51

(EMD)

1.10 ANNEXURE – VI : Performa of Bank Guarantee for 52-53

releasing 10% balance payment.

1.11 ANNEXURE – VII : Eligibility & Qualifications Criterion 54-60

2 SCHEDULE – II :

Sub Section – I :

Detailed technical specification.

Project Information

61-150

Sub Section – II : Basis of Design and Design Data

Sub Section – III : Process Flow Description

Sub Section – IV : Technical Data & Information to be Provided by the Bidder

Sub Section – V : Project Management

Sub Section – VI : Scope of Work

3 SCHEDULE – III : General Terms and Conditions of

Erection Testing & Commissioning

151-189

4

SCHEDULE – IV :

Site Layout, Equipment Layout

and Flow Diagram (Separately

Enclosed)

190

5

SCHEDULE – V :

6 SCHEDULE – VI :

General Technical Specifications

of Civil Works

SBC Report (Separately Enclosed)

191-430




Page 13 of 430

7. LAST DATE & TIME OF ISSUE OF TENDER: As per NIT published in

newspaper / Website

8. LAST DATE & TIMEOF RECEIVING TENDER: As per NIT published in

newspaper / Website

9. DATE & TIME OF OPENING TENDERS: As per NIT published in

newspaper / Website

10.

ADDRESS FOR COMMUNICATION :

As given above

11.

PLACE OF OPENING :

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock

and Poultry Development

Corporation,Main Road No. 3,

Kotra Sultanabad Road,

Bhopal - 462 003

12.

TENDER ISSUE TO :

M/s. ,

,

.

Phone : ____________________________

Fax : ___________________________

Email : ____________________________

Contact Person : _______________________

Cell No. : __________________________



Page 14 of 430

SYNOPSIS OF THE TENDER

1.0

2.0

Purchaser :

Contact :


Phone No.0755-2776086 / 2771274 : Fax : 2776086 Website : www.mplivestock.com E-mail: [email protected]

3.0 Job : “Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of 100

TPD cattle feed plant (expandable up to 200 TPD) on TotalTurnkey

Basis” at Kiratpur, Itarsi.

4.0

Exclusions :

Water Hydrants , Environmental Works, Access Roads,

Telephone & Intercom Systems, By-pass protein plant.

5.0 Eligibility : i. The bidder should have completed/ having in hand at least five

projects of similar nature capacity 100 TPD or above cattle feed

plants in the last five years AND

ii. The bidder’s annual financial turnover in the same name and style

during the last f ive years shall not be less than Rs. 25 crores in

each year AND

iii. The bidder should have in house manufacturing setup for the Cattle Feed plant & machineries and their spare parts.

6.0 Completion : Supply, Erection Testing & Commissioning within Twelve months

7.0

Automation :

Automation scope starts from the dumping of Raw material in Raw material godown and till bagging conveyer

8.0 Payment : For Supply of Equipment & Materials:

30% advance against Bank guarantee 60% after supply of equipment and inspection at site.

10% after completion of job & against performance BG

For Civil Works:

30% advance against Bank guarantee

60 % Completion of each progressive section against running bills 10% after completion of job & against performance BG

For Erection & Commissioning:

30% advance against Bank guarantee 60 % after erection, commissioning & completion of trial runs 10% after completion of job & against performance BG

Note :

1. The Bidder should fulfill all three conditions of Point 5.0

2. In case f consortium or JV or SPV being formed, the same should have atleast one member

fulfilling all the conditions on Point No.5.0




Page 15 of 430

9.0 Liquidated damages : 0.5% per week beyond the contract period &

maximum upto 5% of the contract value. For Delays beyond Six months of stipulated time the delay penalty will be 10% of the contract value.

10.0 Bid submission : In Two Parts –

Technical Bid in Envelope No. 1 which shall include

i. Earnest Money deposit in form of DD or BG.

ii. All technical details of equipment to be supplied,

literature, job completion certificates, tax clearance /

returns filed and other documents as per the requirements

given in the tender

iii. All other qualifying documents

Commercial Bid in Envelope No. 2 which shall include

i. Tender Form ( as given on page) giving full details of prices

of supply and erection including all taxes & duties.

ii. Terms and conditions

iii. Price break up of all the equipment to be supplied as per Annexure - I.

Both Envelopes to be placed in separate envelope clearly Indicating Technical bid & Price bid

11.0 Bid validity : 180 days from the date of opening of bids



Page 16 of 430

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS

PREFACE :

Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal hence forth

termed as MPLPDC, invites the sealed competitive bids from the technically & financially

sound individual / HUF / firm / Company for “DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE

UP TO 200 TPD) ON TOTAL TURNKEY BASIS” AT KIRATPUR, ITARSI

The Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development

Corporation reserves the right to reject any or all the tenders in full or part thereof, which in

his opinion justifies such action without further explanation to the tenderers.

SPECIAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF TENDER AND CONTRACT:

1 SUBMISSION OF TENDER:

The tenders should be sent by Registered post with acknowledgement due so as to reach the

Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation,

Main Road No. – 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road, Bhopal – 462003 not later than the time

and date mentioned in the NIT published. Alternatively the tenderers or their agents can

also submit their tenders personally at the office of the Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh

State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation, Main Road No. – 3, Kotra Sultanabad

Road, Bhopal – 462003 and obtain the acknowledgement latest by the time and date mentioned

in the NIT published.

1.1 Technical & Financial bids to be submitted in two separate properly sealed envelopes

marked Technical & Financial as the case may be on the left corner of the envelopes

Tender for “DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION,TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

OF 100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO

200 TPD) ON TURNKEY BASIS” AT KIRATPUR, ITARSI, The technical bids

should contain the DD/BG for EMD and photocopies of work orders executed by

tenderers in the past five year, in absence of which tender should be technically

disqualified. The financial bids should be given in sealed separate envelope and

also marked financial on the envelope. Financial bids shall be opened only after

due evaluation of the technical bids.

1.2 No responsibility shall be taken for premature opening of the tender, which is not

properly addressed and identified.

1.3 The tenderer whose tender is accepted (hereinafter called the supplier/contractor) will

be required to furnish security for the due fulfillment of his contract in the form of a

bank demand draft of 5% of the contracted value (F.O.R. site). This bank Demand Draft

of Nationalized / Scheduled Bank drawn in favour of Managing Director, MPLPDC,

Bhopal is to be submitted within a period of 10 to 15 days from the date of placement of

Purchase Order. The EMD amount shall be adjusted in the aforesaid security. No

interest shall be paid for the security money deposit for the period during which it (the

security money) lies in deposit with the MPLPDC. Both the security and EMD can be

submitted in form of DD and BGs.



Page 17 of 430

In case the contractor/ supplier complete it contractual obligations expect for

performance of equipment for which 10% amount is deducted / retained

while processing payment against supply or erection. The security deposit can be

refund at such point of time as may be decided by the Purchase section at its sole

discretion. The SD could also be relieved on 50% completion of supplies.

All compension or other sums of money payable by the contractor to Madhya Pradesh

State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal under the terms of

this contract may be deducted from, or paid by the sale of a sufficient part of his

security deposit or from any sums which may be due or may become due to contractor

by the Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal

on any account whatsoever, and in the event of his security deposit being reduced by

reason of any such deduction or sale as aforesaid, the contractor shall within ten

days thereafter make good in case endorsed as aforesaid any sum of sums

which may have been deducted from or raised by sale of his security deposit or any

part thereof.

1.4 The counter terms & Conditions will not be accepted and as such no

additions/ deletions or alternation in the tender form should be done. In such case tender

document may be liable to reject.

1.5 The tenderer shall be deemed to have carefully examined the terms & conditions,

specifications, size, make and drawing etc. In case of any doubts as to the meaning of any

portion of these conditions or of the specification, drawing etc. he shall before filling the

tender form and signing the contract, refer to the competent authority and get clarifications.

1.6 The tenderer shall, invariably, furnish complete address of the premises of his office,

godown and workshop together with full name and complete address, telephone no., FAX

no., Mobile no. of the person/s who is to contacted for the purpose.

All correspondence sent on the given address shall be deemed to be properly served.

1.7 The contractor shall not sublet his contract or any substantial part thereof to any other

agency/ person / firm/ establishment.

1.8 The contractor shall have to submit all related formalities in case of firm/ company like

partnership deed / memorandum and articles of association, registration certificate, bank

guarantee, PAN no. etc along with this tender-form. Any change in constitution of the

firm shall be intimated to MPLPDC, Bhopal for approval.

1.9 The tenderer should sign the tender form at each page at the end in token of the acceptance

of all the terms & conditions of the tender.

1.10 The MPLPDC, Bhopal, reserves the right to accept any tender and reject any tender in whole

or part without assigning any reason thereof. Order can be placed for whole or part of the

job to the tenderer at the absolute discretion of the MPLPDC, Bhopal.

1.11 Any discrepancy in filling the tender/ incomplete tender form shall make the tender liable

to be rejected.

1.12 General Terms & Conditions for contract are annexed with the tender document which

forms as integral part of the contract.



Page 18 of 430

2.0 GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS 2.1 The tender thus prepared should be put in properly sealed double cover in two separate

envelopes marking clearly technical bid and financial bid and super scribed giving the

tender reference number and date of opening. The covers should bear address of Madhya

Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Main Road No. 3, Kotra

Sultanabad Road, Bhopal - 462 003 Only one tender should be kept in cover. In case more

than one tender is kept in a cover, all the tenders thus kept shall be liable to be ignored.

2.2 The tender must be submitted in the three envelopes method as specified in special

notes.

2.3 The tender thus prepared should be put in properly sealed cover and super-

scribed giving the tender reference number and date of opening. The covers

should bear address of Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry

Development Corporation, Main Road No. 3, Kotra Sultanabad Road, Bhopal. Only one

tender should be kept in one cover. In case more than one tender is kept in a

cover, all the tenders thus kept shall be liable to be ignored/rejected.

2.4 No responsibility shall be taken for the premature opening of the tender which is not

properly addressed and identified. 2.5 No telegraphic /telephonic/ telex/ Fax tenders shall be considered. However,

any amendment sent by telegram/telex/Fax to the tender already submitted

shall be considered, provided it is received before the due date and time for opening of

the tender and it is confirmed in writing by post.

2.6 LEGAL COMPETENCY OF SIGNING THE TENDER

Individual signing the tender or other documents connected with this tender

must specify whether he signs as:

a) “Sole Proprietor” of the firm or constituted attorney of such proprietor.

b) The partner of the firm, if it is a partnership firm in which case, he must have authority

to refer to arbitration disputes pertaining to business of the partnership either by

virtue of the partnership deed or by holding the power of attorney.

c) Constituted attorney of the firm, if it is a Company.

NOTE:

1) In case of (b) above, a copy of the partnership deed or general power of attorney duly

attested by a notary public should be furnished or any affidavit on stamp paper of all the

partners admitting execution of the partnership deed or the general power of attorney

should be furnished.



Page 19 of 430

2) In case of partnership firms, where no authority to refer disputes concerning to the business of the

partnership has been conferred on any partner, the tender and all other related documents must be signed

by every partner of the firm.

3) A person, signing the tender form or any documents constituting an integral part of the contract, on

behalf of another shall be deemed to warranty that he has authority to bind such other and if, on enquiry

it appears that the person so signing has no authority to do so, the buyer may without prejudice to other

civil remedies, terminate the contract and hold the signatory liable for all costs and damages.

2.7 EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT

2.7.1 Earnest money amounting to Rs. 36,00,000/- (Rupees; Thirty Six Lacs only) must accompany

the tender. The earnest money shall be required to be paid by a crossed demand draft in favour of

Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation,

Bhopal drawn on any scheduled or Nationalized bank in India, payable at Bhopal. The tenders

accompanied by cheques instead of demand draft towards earnest money will not be considered.

Earnest money shall have to be paid according to the items offered by tenderers covering the total

quantity required for all the projects. BG for EMD shall be acceptable in prescribed format

2.7.2 Any tender which is not accompanied by earnest money deposit will be summarily rejected. Earnest

money of unsuccessful tenderer will be returned within 180 clear days from the date of opening of the

tender.

2.7.3 No interest shall be paid for the earnest money deposit for the period during which it (the earnest

money) lies in deposit with the Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development

Corporation, Bhopal. 2.8 The tenderers should state herein the complete address to which the orders, notices and further

correspondence pertaining to the tender and agreements are to be sent. Any correspondence made by

the M P LP D C at the address given herein shall be deemed to have been delivered to the party

notwithstanding that such correspondence may not in fact have been delivered. Any change in the

address thereafter must be notified to the Managing Director, MPLPDC, Bhopal. Any change in

address is to be intimated to MPLPDC, Bhopal and an acknowledgment is to be taken for the same to

be effective. in absence of which, sole responsibility will be of the tenderer.

Address Telegraphic Address ________________________

Phone No./__________________________________

Mobile no.______________________Fax No.________________Email__________________

Name of contact Person :

Cell Phone of Contact Person :_________________________________________________________________

2.9 The tenders received shall be opened on the date and time given in the N.I.T. at the

Office of the Managing Director, MPLPDC, Bhopal. The tenderers or their accredited agents will

be allowed to be present at the time of opening of the tender.



Page 20 of 430

2.10 Negligence on the part of tenderer in preparing the tender confers no right to withdraw the tender

after it has been opened.

2.11 The specifications, conditions, schedules drawing of the tender constitute an integral part of the

tender.

2.12 All tenders in which any of the prescribed conditions are not fulfilled or which have been vitiated by

errors in calculations totaling, or other discrepancies or which contain overwriting in figures or words

or corrections not initialed and dated will be rejected.

2.13 In the place of substantial non conformity with the specifications or if it contains any inadmissible

reservations seen or otherwise, in contravention to the sprit and letter of the tender documents, such

tenders shall be summarily rejected.

All compensation or other sums of money payable by the contractor to MPLPDC under the terms of

this contract may be deducted from, or paid by the sale of a sufficient part of his security deposit or from

any sums which may be due or may become due to the contractor by the MPLPDC on any account

whatsoever, and in the event of his security deposit being reduced by reason of any such deduction or sale as

aforesaid, the contractor shall within ten days thereafter make good in cash endorsed as aforesaid any sum or

sums which may have been deducted from or raised by sale of his security deposit or any part thereof.

2.14 No refund of tender fee is claimable for tenders not accepted or Forms returned or tenders not

submitted.

1.0 SCOPE OF TENDER.

3.1 Supply :

1. The scope of this tender shall include only the design, fabrication, supply, erection, testing &

commissioning of the cattle feed manufacturing plant required for producing

100 Tons per day balanced cattle feed with a provision to expand the plant to 200 TPD. The

equipment shall include mainly intake conveyors, storage bins, auto batching, grinding,

molasses storage tanks, silos, mineral mix plant, molasses mixing, pelleting, bagging, aspiration

systems, air compressor and LT electrical. The scope of the bidder shall necessarily include the

supply as well as erection and commissioning. Any bid for part job will be summarily rejected.

2. The plant will be installed on the fabricated MS structure and covered with the pre- coated sheets

and fitted with lighting and lightening arrestor by the bidder.

3. All the civil works, foundations, water, steam, molasses and electrical power shall also be done by the Tenderer. 4. The Tenderer shall be responsible for developing the conceptual layout and flow

diagram to ensure automatic operation of the plant with minimum investment.

5. Since this will be Turnkey Job it will be the full responsibility of the Tenderer to carry

out all minor works necessary to achieve the rated capacity of the plant even though they might not

have been expressly mentioned in the tender document.

6. All the equipment to be supplied will have to be manufactured as per the standard specifications

adopted by the cattle feed industry in the country.

7. This contract will be “Fixed Rate Contract” and the contractor will have to supply the equipment

and complete the erection and commissioning within the agreed contract value and no escalation of

prices will be allowed. However, for all additional requirement over the mentioned quantities in the

document and schedule of supply a prorate payment will be made. In no case any escalation in

individual item rate as agreed and contracted will be entertained.

8. It is absolutely essential to complete the job of design, fabrication, supply, erection and



Page 21 of 430

commissioning of cattle feed plant within t w e l v e months from the date of signing the contract

and receipt of advance.

9. The tenderer is advised to visit to site so as to apprise himself of actual site condition and quantum

of work involved. Civil work at site already commenced and tenderer should plan with consideration

of actual site condition. All plant related civil works are in the scope of tenderer.

3.1.1 Erection, Testing & Commissioning:

The tenders shall erect/install the equipment in accordance with the General terms &

Conditions, special terms and conditions, specifications stipulated in Schedules of the tender.

4.0 TOTAL TURN – KEY CONTRACT This is a turn - key project. All necessary material which may be required for the successful completion of the project falls in the scope of the work. Cost of installation for any addition or deletion in quantities will be calculated based on the unit prices indicated. If any extra quantities of quoted items are needed then the tenderer shall supply those at the quoted unit price. If any extra item (s), not included in the tender but required for successful completion of the work, the same will be either supplied by the MPLPDC and erected by the tenderer or supplied and erected both by the tenderer at mutually agreed rates considering purchase price, taxes and handling charges etc. Necessary ESI/PF deductions, wherever applicable shall be borne by the tenderer.

The requisite approval form Chief Electrical Inspectorate, Government of M P must be obtained by the

tenderer and the actual payment shall be reimbursed by MPLPDC against production of original

documents.

The tenderers are required to give the price bid for all items section-wise in the same faction as of Part – A

showing the F.O.R. unit rate for supply as well F.O.R. unit rate installation, testing & commissioning as well

the total cost.

In addition to the standers mentioned, all works shall also conform to the requirements of the following for

which necessary certifications of the concerned departments are to be obtained and submitted to the

concerned institution or MPLPDC.

a. Indian Electricity Act and rules framed there under.

b. Fire, Insurance and Regulations Act.

c. Regulations laid down by the Chief Electrical Inspector of the State/State Electricity Board.

d. Regulations laid down by the Chief Inspector of the Factories & Boilers of the State.

e. Regulations laid down under the Explosive Act.

f. Regulations as per Weight and Measure Act.

g. Pollution Control Board of Madhya Pradesh.

h. Bureau of Indian Standards

i. Any other regulations laid down by the local authorities.

Applications under various Acts should be moved through MD, MPLPDC well in advance so that operation

of the plant could be started as per rules and regulations from the day one after handing over the plant.

However, actual fee and other charges deposited with the government authorities will be reimbursed to the

Contractor after production of receipt.



Page 22 of 430

5.0 BID PRICES

5.1 The price should be quoted on the basis of F.O.R. site inclusive of all taxes. All taxes are to be built up in

the financial bid part as on 11/09/2014 and are to be shown separately. Any addition/deletion/variation

in taxation or future taxes leveled by the State or Central Govt. beyond this date shall be borne by

MPLPDC. It should be absolutely clear that any tax applicable as on 11/09/2014 but not

considered by the tenderer while submitting financial bid shall be deemed to have

included in the rate offered by the tenderer.

The bidder shall quote for the total package of Design, Fabrication, Supply, Erection, Testing &

Commissioning on the Turn key basis. The prices quoted under different heads should be grouped as

under.

Supply - Including packing, forwarding, taxes & duties, freight, loading & unloading at site and

insurance etc. Detailed price break and list of equipment as given under Annexure – I should be

submitted in Commercial Bid, i.e. Envelope – 2

Erection & commissioning – Labour charges including service tax should be given for all the equipment

and the steel structure as per the list given under Annexure – I should be submitted in Commercial Bid,

Envelope - 2

Discount if any should also be indicated separately. The bidders‟ separation of price

components as above will be solely for the purpose of facilitating the comparison of bids by the purchaser

and will not in any way limit the purchasers right to contract on any of the terms offered.

5.2 FIXED PRICE:

Prices quoted by the bidder shall be fixed during the bidder‟s performance of the contract and not subject to variation on any account This applies to item rates of all individual items.

5.3 PRICE OF SPARE PARTS:

All the bidders are required to submit the list of spares with rates. In case of brought out

items a list giving full particulars, including available sources and current prices, of all spare parts,

special tools, etc. which are necessary for the proper and continuing functioning of the

plant for a period of two years should be furnished. These prices should be valid, for acceptance by

the purchaser and placement of orders, for one year from the date of bid opening.

5.4 The prices thus quoted by firm, free from all escalations and valid for a period of 180 clear days from

the closing date of the tender.

5.5 All the tenderers should quote for supply of equipment in fully fabricated and

assembled condition. 5.6 BREAK – UP PRICES

All the bidders shall furnish the cost separately for the supply and Installation /commissioning along with detailed cost break-up (item-wise), which will be applicable for progressive payments. Items and works for which no break-up price is furnished by the bidder will not



Page 23 of 430

be paid for by the purchaser when supplied/executed and shall be deemed covered by other break-up prices. Such break up cost should be based on ex-works cost and percentage of ex-works cost should be indicated separately for packing and forwarding, transportation, insurance and other incidental charges, erection and commissioning on percentage basis for each item.

5.7 Sales Tax/Entry Tax :

The Sales Tax, Entry Tax, Surcharge and any other type of taxes prevailing upto date of submission of the rates must be included in the net rate. This however should be shown separately, so

that in the event of any subsequent change in these charges by the Government (State or Central), the

same will be considered for increase/decrease over the net rates. Wherever possible C/D forms shall be

issued to avail concessional rates of the Central/State Tax. The Entry Tax, if applicable, should be

included where the supplier belongs to outside MP and Purchase Order/RAL placed on outside MP. The

tenderer must also indicate the details of Sales Tax Registration and the number allotted to them by

Sales Tax authorities.

5.8 Octroi :

Octroi duty, if applicable at the destination shall be paid extra on all dispatches made from the suppliers works/warehouses to the point of destination.

5.9 Excise Duty :

Excise duty or surcharge prevailing upto the date of submission of the rates must be included in the net

rate. This however, should be shown separately, so that in the event of any subsequent change in these

charges by the Government (State or Central), the same will be considered for increase/decrease over

the net rates. However, the increased excise duty due to change in slab on higher turnover shall be

payable by the tenderer.

5.10 Service Tax:

The Service Tax and Surcharge prevailing upto date of submission of the rates must be included in the

net rate. This however should be shown separately, so that in the event of any subsequent change in these

charges by the Government (State or Central), the same will be considered for increase/decrease over the

net rates.

5.11 Unloading charges at site –

For supply order the price should exclude unloading charges. However for installation contract the price

must include these charges.

5.12 If the price for reasons of change in statutory taxes and duties by Government taking place during the

period of bid finalisation or during the normal delivery period envisaged in the Purchase

Order/Contract.

6.0 (a) The material/equipment/machinery offered must be securely packed at the cost of the suppliers to

withstand tough handling enroute by road/rail/air. Packing should be provided with

protective lining to avoid damage to the surface of the packing and the items packed inside.

(b)Marking

Each package delivered under this tender shall be marked by the suppliers at their own expenses.



Page 24 of 430

Such markings shall be distinct and should bear the following:

(i) Name of the supplier.

(ii) Details of Items in the package.

(iii) Weight gross, net and tare.

(iv) Name and address of the consignees as mentioned in the Purchase Order.

Marking shall be carried out with such a material as may be considered necessary as regards

quickness of drying, fastness and indelibility.

7.0 Insurance :-

The supplier shall arrange insurance coverage, according to the dispatch instructions issued by

MPLPDC, Bhopal and the supplier should cover all dispatches. However, to avoid any complications

that may arise at the time of settlement of claims by the underwriters for the transit losses it is

proposed that the insurance coverage shall be arranged by the supplier as under :

(a) The insurance coverage shall have to be arranged commencing from their

warehouse/works to the warehouse of the buyer (All Transit risks).

(b) Suppliers are requested to take insurance with any Nationalised Insurance

Company.

(c) The cover provided by the insurance shall be in such amount so as to allow complete

replacement for any item lost or damaged.

8.0 Guarantee :-

The supply of equipment as well as installation, if entrusted shall have to be carried out by the supplier to

the entire satisfaction of the buyer. The supplier shall also guarantee to repair/replace

without any extra cost, the items or parts there of if found defective due to defective design,

workmanship or substandard material brought to the attention within 12 calendar months from the date

of satisfactory commissioning or within 24 months from the date of receipt of material at site, whichever

is earlier. If it is necessary to send the defective equipment or parts thereof for repair/replacement the

cost of loading, unloading, repacking and transportation from the site to works and back to site shall

have to be borne by the supplier. The guarantee however does not cover any damage resulting from

normal wear and tear or improper attendance or mishandling of the equipment by the buyer/his

authorised representatives.

The contractor shall have to guarantee the complete installation for satisfactory performance for a

minimum period of one year from the date of commissioning of the plant. Any defect arising

out of faulty erection/installation or use of substandard material or workmanship shall have to be rectified

by the contractor at his own cost.

8.1 Warranty :

All the suppliers shall provide a warranty for a minimum period of 12 months from the date of

commissioning of the equipment for the satisfactory performance of the equipment supplied to the

designed/rated/installed capacity or any other norms fixed by the buyer. Also, they should provide a

warranty for the period as stated above to the effect that supplier shall alone be responsible for all the



Page 25 of 430

litigations/disputes /claims and other legal complications that may arise in connection with the patent

rights design rights and the rights of ownership of the materials.

8.2 Right to operate & use unsatisfactory material or equipment :

If after delivery, acceptance and installations and within the guarantee period, the operation of use of

materials or equipment proves to be unsatisfactory to the buyer, he shall have the right to continue to

operate or use such materials or equipment until rectifications of defect, errors or omissions by repair or

by partial replacement can be made without interfering with the buyer’s operation.

9.0 Terms of Payment :

Following terms of payment would be applicable to this order subject to supplier/ contractor having

furnished security deposit for 5% of the F.O.R. order value for the due fulfillment of this contract in

form of cash/DD/BG in accordance with the Clause No.1.3 of the tender document. In case

the contractor/supplier completes its contractual obligations before 12 months the cash/DD/BG deposit

can be refunded before 12 months at the sole discretion of MPLPDC before aforesaid period of 12 months.

9.1 For supply of material :-

30% of the ex-works order value (Contract Value) shall be paid on acceptance of the order subject to the

supplier furnishing a Bank Guarantee valid for 12 calendar months from the date of guarantee for an

equivalent amount from a scheduled or Nationalised Bank in the enclosed proforma given at

Annexure-II. The Bank Guarantee can be released by MPLPDC once the advance is fully

recovered/adjusted. The execution of agreement in the format at Annexure- III is also a precondition for

clearing advance.

60% (90% in case of the supplier/contractor who has not taken advance) on safe receipt of the

equipment ordered at site but not later than 45 days from the date of receipt of the equipment at site.

The 10% of the FOR site value shall be paid within 12 calendar months from the date of

commissioning or 24 months from the date of receipt of the same at site, whichever is earlier.

However the balance 10% will also be released, if so desired by the supplier, provided

the supplier furnishes a Bank Guarantee from a Scheduled or Nationalised Bank for the 10% value valid

for a period of 12 calendar months from the date of issue of Bank Guarantee in the proforma

enclosed.

Payment terms shall remain the same for all progressive supplies. Supplier shall be paid for each

Consignment / Lot / Invoice after safe receipt of material at site. For all civil works the payments will be

made on prorate basis as per each progressive activity. 30% Advance against civil works value shall be

paid and 60% of each works value shall be paid and 60% of each running bill be paid. Balance 10% shall

be paid on completion of each respective activity

9.2 For Erection :-

90% on submission of progressive bills duly certified by the authorised consultant /

representatives/Site Engineer of MPLPDC and balance 10% within 12 months from satisfactory

commissioning of the equipment. However, the balance 10% will also be released, if so desired by the

supplier, provided the supplier furnishes a Bank Guarantee from a Scheduled or Nationalised Bank for

the 10% value valid for a period of 12 calendar months from the date of issue of Bank Guarantee in

the proforma enclosed.



Page 26 of 430

10.0 DELIVERY SCHEDULE OF ITEMS

(a) Bidders should submit a detailed item wise delivery schedule keeping in view the

completion period of the contract. Such items shall be grouped under monthly

delivery schedule with total value of such items. This will facilitate for ensuring the cash flow

requirement for the project. This shall help clearing timely payment for each progressive supply.

(b) The delivery time given in the contract is to be adhered to strictly. For this purpose the supplier has

to inform MPLPDC the progress made towards fabrication of the items ordered from time to time

during the delivery period. The supplier has to maintain good progress of work during the delivery

period the supplier has to so as to deliver the items ordered in time. It is essential that MPLPDC is

informed of the quantified progress made by the supplier by Registered Post once after 1/3rd

of

delivery time elapses and again after 2/3rd

of delivery time elapses. In case MPLPDC does not

receive such progress reports it will presume that the work has not been taken up by the supplier in

the right earnest and that MPLPDC in such a situation will be at liberty to withdraw the work order

and forfeit the earnest money as well as security deposit simultaneously. The supplier is therefore

advised strictly to follow this essential condition of the contract.

(c) It may be noted that delay/time taken in release of advance payment whether for reasons of

supplier not furnishing the Bank Guarantee exactly in the proforma given in this tender document

or any other reasons whatsoever, will not affect the delivery period. Similarly delay in

execution of the agreement will also not affect the delivery period. The tenderer is therefore

advised to take note of this important condition. The successful tenderer should therefore take

immediate action for execution of agreement and submission of bank guarantee of advance, if desired,

within 10 to 15 days of placement of purchase order. It normally takes 30 days to release the

advance, subject to submission of B.G. as per our format.

(d) In case of failure by supplier in making deliveries within the time specified, the

MPLPDC may procure the materials supplies and services from any other sources and hold

the suppliers responsible for any losses occurred thereby. Further the MPLPDC reserves the

right to terminate the services of such suppliers in such case without assigning any reasons thereof.

(e) In case supplier fails to supply machinery/equipment in delivery period, interest at the rate of 12%

per annum will be charged on the advance amount from the date by which delivery fails due to the

actual date of supply unless an extension in delivery period is mutually agreed to by the supplier and

MPLPDC,

11.0 Completion of work :

The entire job of “DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING OF 100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO

200 TPD) ON TURNKEY BASIS” AT KIRATPUR, ITARSI.

is to be completed within 12 months from the date of issuing the work order.

It may be noted that delay/time taken in release of advance payment whether for reasons of

supplier not furnishing the Bank Guarantee exactly in the proforma given in this tender document or

any other reasons whatsoever, will not affect the completion period. Similarly delay in execution of

the agreement will also not affect the completion period. The tenderer is therefore advised to take



Page 27 of 430

note of this important condition. The successful tenderer should therefore take immediate action for

execution of agreement and submission of bank guarantee of advance, if desired, within 10 to 15 days

of placement of purchase order.

In case of failure by contractor in completing the job within the time specified, the MPLPDC Will

have liberty to get the job completed from any other sources and hold the contractor responsible for

any losses occurred thereby. Further the MPLPDC reserves the right to terminate the services of

such contractor in such case without assigning any reasons thereof.

12.0 Compensation for delay :

Clause 1: The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the tender shall be strictly observed by the

contractor and shall be reckoned from the 15th

day after the date of written order to commence the work as given to the contractor. The work shall throughout the stipulated period of the contract be proceeded with all due diligence, time being deemed to be the essence of the contract on the part of the contractor and the contractor shall pay as compensation an amount equal to half percent or such smaller amount as the Managing Director, MPLPDC, Bhopal. (whose decision shall be final) may decide on the tendered amount for every week that the work remains un-commenced or unfinished after the proper date subject to a maximum of 5% of the net value of the accepted order which remains unexecuted or partially executed.

Clause 2: The Managing Director, MPLPDC. may without prejudice to his right against the contractor in

respect of any delay or inferior workmanship or otherwise or any claims for damage in respect of

any breaches of the contract and without prejudice to any rights or remedies under any provisions of

this contract or otherwise and whether the date for completion has or has not elapsed by notice in

writing absolutely determine the contract in any of the following cases :-

(i) If the contractor having been given by the Officer-in-charge or authorized representative, a notice in

writing to rectify, reconstruct or replace any defective work or that the work is being performed in an

inefficient or otherwise improper or unworkman like manner shall omit to comply with the requirements

of such notice for a period of seven days thereafter or if the contractor shall delay or suspend the

execution of the work so that either in the judgment of the Officer-in-charge or authorized

Engineer (which shall be final and binding) he will be unable to secure completion or he has

already failed to complete the work by that date.

(ii) If the contractor being a company shall pass a resolution or the court shall make an order that the

company shall be wound up or if a receiver or a manager on behalf of a creditor shall be appointed or

if circumstance shall arise which entitle the court or creditor to appoint a receiver or a manager or which

entitle the court to make a winding up order.

(iii) If the contractor commits breach of any of the terms and conditions of the contract.

(iv) If the contractor commits any acts mentioned in clause 19 hereof. When the contractor has made

himself liable for action under any of the cases aforesaid, the Managing Director, MPLPDC shall

have powers:-



Page 28 of 430

a. To determine or rescind the contract as aforesaid (of which termination or rescission notice in writing to

the contractor under the hand of the Managing Director, MPLPDC shall be conclusive evidence).

Upon such determination or rescission the full security Deposit of the contractor calculated on the

tendered amount shall be liable to be forfeited and shall absolutely be at the disposal of Madhya Pradesh

State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation.

b. To employ labour paid by the Federation and to supply materials to carry out the work or any part of

the work debiting the contractor with the cost of the labour and the price of the materials (of the amount

of which cost and price certified by the Officer-in-charge shall be final and conclusive) and crediting

him with the value of the work done in all respects in the same manner and at the same rates as if it

has been carried out by the contractor under the terms of his contract. The certificate of the

Officer-in-charge as to the value of work done shall be final and conclusive against the contractor

provided always that action under the sub-clause shall only be taken after giving notice in writing to

the contractor. Provided also that if the expenses incurred by the Federation are less than the amount

payable to the contractor at his agreement rates, the difference shall not be payable to the contractor.

c. After giving notice to the contractors on measure up the work of the contractor and to take such part

there of as shall be unexecuted out of his hands and to give it to another contractor to complete in

which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the sum which would have been paid to

the original contractor if the whole work had been executed by him (of the amount of which excess, the

certificate in writing of the Officer- in-charge shall be final and conclusive) shall be borne and paid by

the original contractor and may be deducted from any money due to him by Madhya Pradesh State

Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation under this contract or on any other account

whatsoever or from his security deposit or the proceeds of sales thereof or a sufficient part thereof as

the case may be.

In the event of any one or more of the above courses as may be deemed best suited to the interest of

the Federation being adopted by the Managing Director, Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry

Development Corporation, the contractor shall have no claim to compensation for any

loss sustained by him by reason of his having purchased or procured by him by reason of his having

purchased or procured any materials or entered into any engagements, or made any advances on

account of or with a view to execution of the work or the performance of the contract. And in case

action is taken under any of the provisions aforesaid, the contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be

paid any sum for any work there for actually performed under this contract unless and until the

Officer-in-charge has certified in writing the performance of such work and the value payable in respect

thereof and he shall only be entitled to be paid the value as certified.

Contractor remains liable to pay compensation if action not taken under Clause 3.Clause 3

:-

In any case in which any of the powers conferred by Clause 3 hereof shall have become exercisable

and the same shall have not been exercised, the non-exercise thereof shall not constitute waiver of

any of the conditions hereof, and such power shall notwithstanding be exercisable in the event of any

future case of default the contractor for which by any clause or clauses hereof he is declared the

contractor for which by any clause or clauses hereof he is declared liable to pay compensation

amounting to the whole of his security deposit and the liability of the contractor for past and future

compensation shall remain unaffected



Page 29 of 430

13.0 Force Majeure Clause :-

The terms and conditions mutually agreed shall be subject to the Force Majeure Clause. Neither the supplier

nor the buyer shall be considered in default in performance of its obligations hereunder, if such

performance is prevented or delayed because of war, hostilities, revolutions, civil commotion, strike,

epidemic, accident, fire, wind, flood, earthquake or because of any law, order, proclamation, regulation, or

ordinance of any Government or any act of God or any other cause whether of similar or dissimilar nature,

beyond the reasonable control of the party affected should one or both of the parties be prevented from

fulfilling his/their contractual obligations by a state of Force Majeure lasting continuously for a period of

six months, the two parties should consult with each other regarding the future

implementation of the agreement/purchase order. In such events the cost escalations incurred by the

tenderer shall be payable by MPLPDC at actuals subject to submission of necessary proofs, documents,

evidences etc.

14.0 Settlement of disputes :

In the event of any dispute in the interpretation of the terms of this agreement/ Purchase Order or

difference of opinion between the parties on any point in the Purchase Order arising out of, or in

connection with the agreement/accepted purchase order or with regard to performance of any obligations

hereunder by the either party, the parties hereto shall use their best efforts to settle such disputes or

difference of opinion amicable by mutual negotiations.

In case, no agreement is reached between the two parties in respect of or concerning any of the provisions

herein contained or arising out of this supply order/ tender/ agreement as to the rights, liabilities or duties

of the said parties hereunder or as to the recovery of any amount, the same shall be referred to the Sole

Arbitrator M.D., MPLPDC who in turn may refer the dispute to any officer of MPLPDC for adjudication.

The arbitration shall be in accordance to the law of Arbitration & Conciliation Act, 1996. The decision

of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.

All the disputes pertaining to the said contract shall vest to the jurisdiction of Courts at Bhopal.

15.0 Right to Acceptance:

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation. Does not pledge itself to accept the

lowest or any tender and reserves to itself the right to accept the whole or any part of the tender or portion of

the quantity offered. The tenderer is at liberty to tender for whole or any portion or to state in the tender

that the rates quoted shall apply only if the entire quantity is taken from them.

16.0 IMPORTANT NOTES :

16.1 TIMELY DELIVERY, OF SPECIFIED QUALITY OF MATERIAL, PLANT & MACHINERY SATISFYING

ALL DESIGN AND FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS ORDERED, IS THE ESSENCE OF THE

CONTRACT. THEREFORE, FAILURE TO DELIVER IN TIME OR NOT CONFORMING TO PRESCRIBED

SPECIFICATIONS & QUALITY WILL MAKE THE SUPPLIER LIABLE FOR BLACKLISTING THE

FIRM AND THEREBY DEBARRING THE SUPPLIER FROM PARTICIPATION IN FUTURE

TENDERS BYMPLPDC & OTHER AFFILIATED UNITS. AS FOR THE PRESENT



Page 30 of 430

CONTRACT PENALTIES, COMPENSATION AND OTHER PROVISIONS AS GIVEN IN THE

TENDER DOCUMENT SHALL BE INVOKED ON FAILURE OF THE PARTY.

16.2 MPLPDC and milk unions shall have the fullest liberty to notify the defaulting firm to

Business/Trade Associations/Public Sector undertakings/autonomous bodies and the like about the

default and breach of contract committed by a firm giving out names of the partners of the firm. A

register is intended to be maintained for such defaulting firms and their partners.

16.3 MPLPDC will not consider the tender of such firms who has earlier been

debarred/censured/black listed or even those firms who have on their role key

employees/ key executives/ proprietors/ partners of another already debarred/censured/ black listed

firms in one or the other capacity.

16.4 All the tenderers without fail, should furnish full technical details about tendered project.

1.1 The quantities mentioned in the tender are tentative and the actual quantities to be procured

may vary upward or downward suiting to the actual requirements. All such variations from

schedule of supply shall be payable at actual.

18.0 Supplier will execute agreement on non-judicial stamp paper of Rs.100/- (Rupees One

Hundred only) before 30% advance can be released to him. Format of the agreement is given

at Annexure-III.

19.0 If the Managing Director shall at any time, and for any reasons whatever, think any portion

of the work should not be executed or should be withdrawn from the contractor he may, by

notice in writing to that effect, require the contractor not to execute the portion of the work

specified in the notice or may withdraw from the contractor the portion of the work so

specified and the contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation by reason of such

portion of the work having been executed by him, and the value (i.e. cost at tendered rates) of

the portion of work so omitted or withdrawn shall in cases where the contractor has for any

reason already received payment for it or in the cases of lump-sum contracts be deducted from

any sum them due or thereafter to become due under the contract or otherwise against or from

the security deposit or the proceeds of sale thereof.

20.0 No term or condition in addition to those mentioned above will be agreed to.



Page 31 of 430

CFF – Kiratpur, Itarsi, District – Hoshangabad Annexure – I (Part – A) Form of Tender for Price for

(TO BE SUMITTED IN FINANCIAL BID ENVELOPE)

Time & Date of Opening of Tender:

Description of Goods :

S.No. Particulars Amount (Rs.) Remarks, if any.

1. Design & supply charges for 100 TPD Cattle Feed Plant (Expandable upto 200 TPD equipment and utilities as per the technical specification & drawings enclosed. (Total of Part I and II)

2. Total cost of all Civil works as per specification and SOQ (Total of Part III)

3. Packing & forwarding charges

4. Excise Duty @

5. Sales Tax (RST/CST/VAT) @ (see note no.1given below)

6. Entry Tax if any @

7. Transportation including Insurance charges

8. Any other charges (if any)

9. Total FOR site price (1 to 7)

10.

Installation, testing & commissioning charges for 100 TPD Cattle Feed Plant (Expandable upto

200 TPD equipment and utilities as per t he

technical specification & drawings enclosed.

11. Service Tax @

12. Total FOR Unit Price (9 to 10)

13. Total Net FOR Unit Price for supply, installation & commissioning (1 to 12) (in figures and in words)

Total of Part I, II and III

Toatl

*The FOR rates indicated at sr. no. 8, 11 & 12 includes all duties & taxes even if not

Explicitly mentioned here but in vogue/applicable at the time furnishing rates.

Note :

(i) Tenderer should indicate clearly whether the sales tax mentioned above is against any concessional form. In

case the concessional form is not provided, the rate of tax should be mentioned.

(ii) Price negotiations shall be discouraged bidders should therefore quote their most competitive rates (with

conformity to the specifications and commercial stipulations given in the tender) in the very instance least

they run the risk of losing out in absence of negotiations.

(iii) The rate must be written both in words and figures. There should be no erasures and or over writings,

corrections, if any, should be made clearly and initiated with date. In case if there is variation

observed in the rates in between words & figures, the lowest rate shall be considered.

(iv) The conditional offer which affect the rate of the quoted item shall be liable for rejection even the

quoted rate is lowest.

(Signed & sealed by the Tenderer in token of acceptance of above)



Page 32 of 430

CFF – Kiratpur, Itarsi, District – Hoshangabad Annexure – I (Part – A)

PART 1. : DESIGN, FABRICATION, SUPPLY OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS, FOR 100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO 200 TPD) ON TURNKEY BASIS.

LIST OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT

S.

No. Description Capacity/Size

(cm=Cubic Meter)

Quantity Unit Price

Rs. Amount

Rs.

1 RAW MATERIALS INTAKE EQUIPMENT

1.01 INTAKE CHAIN CONVEYOR IN RMG

WITH PNEUMATIC SLIDE GATES

30TPH 30RM

2

1.02 DUMPING HOPPERS FOR INTAKE

CONVEYORS IN RMG

2 M x 1 M

10

1.03 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR DUMP HOPPERS

IN RMG

--

10

1.04 ELEVATOR FOR BATCH PRE-MIXER 10 TPH 1

1.05 HOPPER ABOVE BATCH MIXER WITH

PN. GATE

1 MT

1

1.06 BATCH MIXER FOR PREMIX DUTY WITH

PNEUMATIC OUTLET GATE

1 MT

1

1.07 HOPPER BELOW BATCH MIXER 1 MT 1

1.08 ELECTRONIC PLATFORM WEIGHSCALE 200 KGS 2

1.09

PORTABLE BAG STACK CONVEYORS 250 BAGS/HR;

10 M

1

1.10 INTAKE BUCKET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 2

1.11 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR INTAKE ELEVATORS

--

2

1.12 CASCADE MAGNET 30 TPH 2

1.13 JUTE TWINE REMOVER 30 TPH 2

1.14 CROSS CONVEYOR 30 TPH 1 1.15 DISTRIBUTION CONVEYORS 30 TPH 1

2 BATCHING EQUIPMENT

2.01 PROPORTIONATE BIN WITH OUTLET GATE

20 MT

12

2.02 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR PROPORTIONATE BINS

1 SET

2.03 GRAVITY FEEDERS FOR BIN DISCHARGE

AND /OR 12 12

2.04 CONVRYOR FOR BIN DISCHARGE 250 MM 12

2.05 BATCH WEIGH HOPPER ( MAJOR

INGREDIENTS)

2 MT

1



Page 33 of 430

2.06 BATCH WEIGH HOPPER(MINOR INGREDIENTS) 1 MT 1

2.07 PNEUMATIC GATE BELOW WEIGH HOPPER

--

2

2.08 SURGE HOPPER BELOW BATCH WEIGHER

--

2

2.09 BATCH CHAIN CONVEYOR 30 TPH 1

2.10 BATCH BUCKET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

2.11 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR BATCH

ELEVATOR

--

1

3 GRINDING, MIXING EQUIPMENT

3.01 GRINDING BIN WITH PN. GATE 2 MT 2

3.02 FEEDER ABOVE HAMMER MILL 10 TPH 2

3.03 HAMMER MILL WITH 6 or 8 MM SIEVE 10 TPH 2

3.04 HOPPER BELOW HAMMER MILLS -- 2

3.05 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR HAMMER MILLS -- 2

3.06 BIN ABOVE BATCH MIXER 2 MT 2

3.07 PNEUMATIC GATE ABOVE BATCH

MIXER

--

1 SET

3.08 BATCH MIXER ( RIBBON TYPE) 2 MT 1

3.09 PNEUMATIC GATE BELOW BATCH MIXER

--

1 SET


3.11 CONVEYOR BELOW MIXER 30 TPH 1

3.12 MIXED FEED ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

3.13 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR MIXED FEED ELEVATOR --

1

1

4 PELLETTING EQUIPMENT

4.01 MIXED FEED TRANSFER ELEVATOR WITH OUTLET CASCAD MAGNET.

30 TPH

1

4.02 PELLETING BIN WITH BIN ACTIVATOR 10 MT 1

4.03 VARIABLE SPEED LOSS IN WEIGHT

FEEDER WITH HOPPER

10 TPH

1

4.04 PELLET MILL WITH CONDITIONER AND

MOLASSES MIXER

7 TPH

1

4.05 ROTARY AIR LOCK FOR PELLET COOLER 7 TPH 1

4.06 COUNTER CURRENT PELLET COOLER 7 TPH 1

4.07 PELLET COOLER CYCLONE (SS 304) WITH PN.HAMMERS.

--

1

4.08 ROTARY AIR LOCK FOR CYCLONE (SS ) 7 TPH 1

4.09 PELLET COOLER FAN -- 1

4.10 ASPIRATION DUCTING FOR PELLET

COOLER (SS 304)

--

1 SETS

4.11 PELLET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

4.12 PELLET SIEVE 10 TPH 1

4.13 SPARE MOTOR FOR PALLET MILL -- 1

4.14 SPARE MOTOR FOR CYCLONE BLOWER -- 1



Page 34 of 430

5 MOLASSES STORAGE / HANDLING EQUIPMENT

5.01 Molasses Storage Tank 800 MT 2

5.02 MOLASSES UNLOADING TANK (WITH

HOSE)

5.03 MOLASSES UNLOADING PUMP (1 Working + 1 Standby)

15 KLPH

2

5.04 MOLASSES PRE-HEATER 1 1

5.05 MOLASSES FEEDING PUMP (1 Working + 1 Standby)

3 KLPH

2

5.06 MOLASSES FLOW METER 3 KLPH 1

5.07 MOLASSES PIPING, CONTROL

VALVES,FITTINGS

--

1 LOT

6 BAGGING EQUIPMENT

6.01 BAGGING BIN (SS) 10 MT 2

6.02 PNEUMATIC SLIDE GATE -- 2

6.03

AUTOMATIC ,WEIGHING,FILLING, STITCHING MACHINE WITH CONVEYOR & CONTROLLER

250

BAGS/HR

1 SET.

6.04

FINISHED PRODUCT BELT CONVEYOR. 250 BAGS /

HR; 25 M

1 SET

6.05 PORTABLE BAG STICHING MACHINE -- 2

6.06 ELECTRONIC WEIGH SCALE 200 KG 2

6.07

PORTABLE BAG STACK CONVEYOR 250 BAGS /

HR;10 M

1

7 FEED MILL HOUSING

7.01 MS STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR MAIN

PLANT AND PIPE BRIDGE

300 MT

Approx.

7.02 MILD STEEL CHEQUERED PLATE

PLATFORM,TRENCH COVERS ETC 60 MT

Approx.

7.03 WINDOWS (REQUIRED QUANTITY) As per Design

7.04 ROOF SHEETING (REQUIRED QUANTITY) As per Design 0

7.05 CLADDING SHEETS(REQUIREDQUANTITY) As per Design 0

7.06 LIGHT FITTINGS & LAMPS ( MAIN PLANT)

--

50 SETS

8 PRODUCT PIPING/ ACCESSORIES

8.01 PRODUCT PIPING/DUCTING, FLEX. CONNECTIONS

--

1 LOT

8.02 SMALL HOPPERS/TRANSITION PIECE -- 1 LOT

8.03 PNEUMATIC GATES FOR PROP. BINS FILLING

--

1 LOT

8.04 PNEUMATIC PIPE FLAPS -- 4

8.05 SIGHT GLASS FOR AIR LOCK -- 2 SETS

9 AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT

9.01 LOAD CELL WITH WEIGHING SYSTEM FOR

BATCH WEIGHER EACH

2 MT; 1 MT

1 SET

9.02 LOAD CELL FOR LOSS-IN-WEIGHT FEEDER

--

2 SETS.



Page 35 of 430

9.03 PROGRAM SOFTWARE FOR THE ENTIRE PLANT

--

1 SET

9.04 PLC PANEL , HMI , SENSORS,

COMMUNICATION & DATA CABLES

--

1 LOT.

9.05 MIMIC PANEL, COMPUTER FOR CONTROL ROOM

--

1 SET

9.06 COMPUTER FURNITURE (MODULAR) -- 1 LOT

9.07 UPS FOR CONTROLS & PLC -- 1 SET

9.08 COMPUTER WITH MIS OF PLANT

INFORMATION IN ENGG. OFFICE

--

1 SET

9.09 INSTRUMENT EARTHING ( CU PLATE) FOR

PLC LOT PANEL ETC

--

1

9.10 SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT FOR

CONTROL ROOM

--

1 SET.

SERVICE EQUIPMENTS

10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (LT)

10.01 MAIN LT PANEL COMPLETE HT SUBSTATION

WITH VCBs, TRANSFORMER OF 750KVA (33KV

TO 415V) ETC.

10.02 MCC FOR MAIN PLANT -- 1

10.03 REMOTE PANELS FOR FEED MILL EQPTS

--

1 LOT

10.04 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION PANEL --

1

10.05 MCC FOR RAW MATERIAL INTAKE,

BOILER , PUMP HOUSE & MOLASSES

UNLOADING TANK

--

1each

10.06 POWER CABLES -- 1 LOT

10.07 CONTROL & SIGNAL CABLES -- 1 LOT

10.8 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES (CABLE TRAYS, GI CONDUITS, CABLE GLANDS, CABLE LUGS, ISOLATORS, PUSH BUTTONS,

RUBBER MATS,FUSE PULLER, RUBBER

GLOVES ETC)

--

1 LOT

10.9 IN MAIN PLANT BUILDING – LIGHTING

PANEL, LIGHTING DBS, CONDUITS ,SET

WIRING, EMERGENCY LIGHTS FOR

CONTROL ROOM (Excluding RMG & FPG)

--

1

10.10 EARTH PITS AND NETWORK FOR PANELS, DB ETC

--

1 LOT



Page 36 of 430

Note:- The above list of equipment is as per preliminary design of the plant. The final list of

equipment & their individual capacity may vary as per detailed engineering of the bidder to

achieve the MINIMUM rated capacity of 100 TPD and further provision for expansion of capacity

up to 200 TPD. It is required to keep a provision for adding of all the equipments that will be needed

in future for achieving a capacity of 200 TPD on 20 hrs per day of working. All suitable structure,

cables and relevant works for the same are required to be done in first phase along with ordered

execution. It is also required that the design be made on a basis that capacity can be increased to 200

TPD in future without any shut down needed in running plant of first 100 TPD. However capacities

mentioned above for individual equipment cannot be increased to achieve overall plant capacity.

10.11

LIGHTENING ARRESTOR WITH CU

EARTH CONDUCTOR, GI EARTH PITS,

AVIATION LIGHTS

--

1 SET

11 STEAM DISTRIBUTION & CONDENSATE RECOVERY

11.01

COMPLETE OIL FIRED STEAM GENERATION UNIT WITH FO TANK, CHIMNEY, WATER SOFTNER ETC. WITH CAPACITY OF MINIMUM 100O Kg/hr AT OPERATING PRESSURE OF 10.5 Kg/cm². LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPES WITH

INSULATION LOT & CLADDING, VALVES,

FITTINGS, FLOW CONTROLLERS

--

1

11.02 CONDENSATE RECOVERY SYSTEM -- 1 SET

11.03 CONDENSATE PIPES, VALVES, AND FITTINGS --

--

1 LOT

12 COMPRESSED AIR GENERATION & HANDLING EQUIPMENT

12.01 AIR COMPRESSOR (SCREW) PNEU.

FLAPS, GATES, ASPIRATION UNITS

60 CUM/HR

2

12.02 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER 60 CUM/HR 1

12.03 AIR RECEIVER WITH AUTO DRAIN 1000 LITRE 1

12.04 COMPRESSED AIR PIPES, VALVES ,FITTINGS -- 1 LOT

12.05 Mineral Mixture Plant 1 LOT

13.01 Complete installation and supply of 16m x 3m Weigh Bridge with capacity of 80 MT x 1. Erection, testing & commissioning of equipment as per the above list.

1 LOT

1

13.02 Complete DG of 500 KVA with enclosure, panels, cables etc x 1. Erection & commissioning of steel structure sheeting and internal lighting etc.

1 LOT

1

Total of Part – I.

14

ERECTION & COMMISSIONING

Total of Part – II.

Total of Part – I & II. (In figures)

Total of Part – I & II. (In words)



Page 37 of 430

PART – III SOQ OF MAJOR CIVIL WORKS ANNEXURE-1. (PART –B)

SOQ for CIVIL WORKS

S.

No. Item/Description/Field Qty Rate Value Remarks

Civil Works SOQ

1

Land/Site Development ( Approximate Land Assumed to be

4 -5 Acres ) for the plant site only. Includes all cutting,

filling and levelling. Landscaping needs to be done but

development of garden and plantation is not in scope of the

tender. The Contour plan and SBC report is enclosed with

the tender documents.

1

2 Internal road development and hard parks etc. Total road

construction will be as per layout enclosed and final

drawings submitted by the tenderer.

1

3

Raw Material Warehouse of minimum 30x75 meters and

expandable up to 30 x 150 in future. All on PEB with scope

from marking, excavation, foundations, plinth works, Grade

Slab ( RCC ) and complete PEB of minimum 7000 mm side

wall height. Kindly refer enclosed drawings.

1

4

Finished Product Ware House of minimum 30 x 30 meters

and expandable up to 30 x 60 meters in future. All on PEB

with scope from marking, excavation, foundations, plinth

works, Grade Slab ( RCC ) and complete PEB of minimum

7000 mm side wall height. Kindly refer enclosed drawings.

1

5

Utilities and Services Block for Plant and other Amenities.

Needed in PEB for housing of Boilers, Transformers, DGs,

PCC panels, APFC panels, Compressors etc. Sizing as per

detailed design and drawings of the tenderer.

1

6 Foundation Block for Plant Tower and Related Items 1

7 Various Foundations ( Including for Boiler, Chimney,

Weigh Bridge, Transformer etc ) 1

8

Admin Block Building ( To be for a staff of 20 persons ).

Could be Made with G +2 Design including space for

laboratory. Bare Building Only and With Basic Furnishing,

illumination, fans, toilets etc.

1



Page 38 of 430

9

Workers Block Building ( To be for labours and Working

Staff Residential for 10 Staff and 40 Laboures ). Bare

Building Only with basic furnishing, illumination, fans,

toilets etc.

1

10

Miscellaneous Works like Times office, Security Office,

Engineering Stores, Work shop. HT / LT yard and

Substation, Weigh bridge office, Compressed Air Section

etc.

1

11 Provisions for Future Godowns, Silo System, Cleaning

Section, Molasses tank, By Pass Protein Plant etc. 1

Total Of Civil Works Block (Part III)

Note : 1. All the details mentioned here are minimum requirement and is clear with tentative

layout attached with this document.

2. The tenderer is required to make detailed drawings and designs which shall be in accordance with all standards and makes mentioned in the tender. These will be vetted and suitably amended, if needed by consulting architect. As such, price considerations have to be in accordance.

3. All civil works shall be carried out only after approval by appointed architect.

4. Should the site condition require the actual requirement and specifications could be changed by appointed architect. This will be then paid on pro rata basis.



Page 39 of 430

ANNEXURE-I (Part – C)

PROPOSED SITE AT VILLAGE KIRATPUR, ITARSI FORM OF TENDER FOR PRICE

(TO BE SUBMITTED IN FINANCIAL BID ENVELOPE)

Time & Date of opening of Tender :

Description of goods :

S.No. Particulars Amount (Rs.) Remarks, if any.

1. Design & supply charges for 100 TPD Cattle Feed Plant (Expandable upto 200 TPD equipment and utilities as per the technical specification & drawings enclosed. (Total of Part I and II)

2. Total Cost of all civil works as per specifications and SOQ (Total of Part III)

3. Packing & forwarding charges

4. Excise Duty @

5. Sales Tax (CST/VAT) @ (see note no.1given below)

6. Entry Tax if any @

7. Transportation including Insurance charges

8. Any other charges (if any)

9. Total FOR site price (1 to 7)

10. Installation, testing & commissioning charges for 100 TPD Cattle Feed Plant (Expandable upto

200 TPD equipment and utilities as per

the technical specification & drawings enclosed.

11. Service Tax @

12. Total FOR Unit Price (9 to 10)

13. Total Net FOR Unit Price for supply, installation & commissioning (1 to 12) (in figures and in words)

Total of Part I, II and III

*The FOR rates indicated at sr. no. 8, 11 & 12 includes all duties & taxes even if not

explicitly mentioned here but in vogue/applicable at the time furnishing rates.

Note :

(v) Tenderer should indicate clearly whether the sales tax mentioned above is against any concessional

form. In case the concessional form is not provided, the rate of tax should be mentioned.

(vi) Price negotiations shall be discouraged bidders should therefore quote their most competitive rates

(with conformity to the specifications and commercial stipulations given in the tender) in the very

instance least they run the risk of losing out in absence of negotiations.

(vii) The rate must be written both in words and figures. There should be no erasures and or

over writings, corrections, if any, should be made clearly and initiated with date. In case if

there is variation observed in the rates in between words & figures, the lowest rate shall be

considered.

(viii) The conditional offer which affect the rate of the quoted item shall be liable for rejection even

the quoted rate is lowest.

(Signed & sealed by the tenderer

in token of acceptance of above)



Page 40 of 430

ANNEXURE-II

(Form of Bank Guarantee against 30% advance sought from the MPLPDC for

supply/erection contracts) 1. In consideration of the _ The Madhya Pradesh Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation, (hereinafter called “The MPLPDC”) having agreed to grant an advance of Rs. (Rupees_ only) to M/s. (hereinafter called the said supplier(s) under the terms and conditions of an agreement /Purchase Order No. dated______________

made between Bh o p a l and M /s . The Madhya Pradesh Live Stock & Poultry Development

Corporation, Bhopal for supply/erection and commissioning (hereinafter called the said

agreement/purchase order) on production of a Bank Guarantee for Rs.

(Rupees only). We (hereinafter

called “The Bank”) do hereby undertake to pay the MPLPDC

an amount not exceeding Rs. (Rupees

______ only) against any loss/damage caused to or suffered or would be caused to

or suffered by the MPLPDC by reasons of any breach by the said supplier(s) or any of the

terms and conditions mentioned in the said agreement/Purchase Order.

2. We (Name of the Bank) do hereby undertake to pay the amount

due and payable under this guarantee without any demur, merely on a demand from the

MPLPDC stating that the amount claimed is due by way of loss or damage caused to or

would be caused to or suffered by the MPLPDC by reasons of any breach by the said

supplier(s) or any of the terms and conditions contained in the said agreement/Purchase Order,

or by reason of the supplier(s), failure to perform the said agreement/purchase order, or by

reasons of the supplier’s failure to perform the said agreement/purchase order. Any such

demand made on the Bank shall be conclusive as regards the amount due and payable by the

Bank under this guarantee. However our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to

an amount not exceeding Rs. (Rupees only).

3. We (Name of the Bank) further agree that the guarantee herein contained

shall remain in full force and effect during the period that would be taken

for the performance of the said agreement/purchase order and that it shall

continue to be enforceable till all the dues of the MPLPDC, under or

by virtue of the said agreement/purchase order have been fully paid and its claims

satisfied or discharged or till the MPLPDC certifies that the terms and conditions of the said

agreement/purchase order have been fully and properly carried out by the said supplier(s)

and accordingly discharge the guarantee unless a demand of claim under this guarantee

made on us in writing on or before _. We shall be discharged from all liabilities

under this guarantee thereafter. 4. We (Name of the Bank) further agree with the MPLPDC that the

MPLPDC shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without affecting in any

manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said

agreement/purchase order to extended the time of performance by the said supplier (s) from

time to time or to postpone for any time or from the time to time any of the power

exercisable by the MPLPDC



Page 41 of 430

against the said supplier(s) and to forbear or endorse any of the terms and conditions relating

to the said agreement/purchase order and we shall not be relived from our liability by reason

of any such variation of extension or for any forbearance, act or omission on the part of the

MPLPDC or any indulgence by the MPLPDC to the said supplier(s) or by any such matter

or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would but for this provision

have effect of so relieving us.

5. We (Name of the Bank) lastly undertake not to revoke this guarantee

during its currency except with the previous consent of the MPLPDC in writing.

6. Notwithstanding anything stated above our liability under this guarantee is restricted to

Rs. ( Rupees only). Our guarantee shall

remain in force until unless a suit or an action to enforce a claim under this guarantee is filed

against us before that date, i.e. on or before all your rights under the said

guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be released and discharged from

all liability there under.

The Bank agrees that the amount hereby guaranteed shall be due and payable to the

MPLPDC on MPLPDC’S serving a notice requiring the payment of the amount and such

notice shall be served on the Bank either by actual delivery thereof to the Bank or by

dispatch thereof to the Bank by registered post at the address of the said Bank. Any notice

sent to the Bank at its address by Registered Post shall be deemed to have

been duly served on the Bank notwithstanding that the notice may not in fact have

been delivered.

NOTWITHSTANDING – anything contained herein :

i) Our liability under this Bank Guarantee shall not exceed

Rs. (Rupees only).

ii) his Bank Guarantee shall be valid upto and,

iii) We are liable to pay the guaranteed amount under this Bank Guarantee only and only if you

serve upon us a written claim or demand in the manner specified above on

or before _______________ .

7. Notwithstanding anything stated above the Bank Guarantee shall be discharged

by the MPLPDC once the advance amount released against the Bank Guarantee along with

interest or penalty if any payable on such advance has been fully recovered/adjusted.

Place :

Date :

Signature & Seal



Page 42 of 430

ANNEXURE – III

AGREEMENT

(On non judicial stamped paper of value Rs.100/-)

1. An agreement made this day of between

M/s. hereinafter called “approved supplier” which

expression shall where the context so admits, be deemed to include his heirs,

successors, executors and administrators of the one part and The Madhya

Pradesh Live S tock & Poul t ry Development Corporat ion (hereinafter

called “ the MPLPDC” which expression shall, where the context so admits, be

deemed to include his successors in office and assigns) of the other part.

2. Whereas the approved supplier has agreed with the MPLPDC for

supply, installation, testing and commissioning of & all those articles set forth

in the supply order/work order issued vide No._ and in the manner set forth

in the aforesaid order.

3(a) And whereas the approved supplier has deposited a sum of Rs. ______ in form

ofDemand Draft as security for the due performance of the agreement.

3(b) And whereas the approved tenderer/supplier has agreed :

(i) to keep the security deposit with the MPLPDC in form of demand draft for an

initial period of 12 months or such extended period so as to cover the period of

performance of contract i.e. supply/erection/commissioning as per

purchase order. In case the contractor/supplier completes its contractual

obligations before 12 months the deposit can be refunded before 12 months at the

sole discretion of MPLPDC before aforesaid period of 12 months.

(ii) that no interest shall be paid by the MPLPDC on the security deposit.

(iii) that in case of breach of any terms & conditions of the aforesaid supply order

of this agreement by the contractor/supplier the amount of security deposit

shall be liable to forfeiture in full or part by the MPLPDC.



Page 43 of 430

NOW THESE PRESENT WITNESS

1. In consideration of the payment to be made by the MPLPDC at the rates setforth in

the aforesaid supply order/work order, the approved supplier will duly supply the

articles setforth/execute the work in the aforesaid supply order/work order and in the

manner setforth and within the period stipulated in the conditions of the tender and

order.

. The conditions of the tender as given in the tender document for

the work, conditions of the aforesaid supply order/work order and

also any subsequent amendment as may be issued by the MPLPDC will be

deemed to be taken as part of this agreement and are binding on the parties

executing this agreement.

2 The MPLPDC do hereby agree that if the approved supplier shall duly supply

the said articles/execute the work in the time and manner aforesaid, observe

and keep

the said terms & conditions, the MPLPDC shall pay or cause to be paid to the

approved supplier, at the time and in manner set forth in the said conditions,

the amount payable for each and every consignment/work executed

on supplier’s raising bills.

3 The mode of payment will be as specified in the supply order/work order.

4. Delivery shall be effected and completed in the manner and time specified in

the supply order.

5. In case the approved supplier fails to deliver the goods/execute the work within

the time specified in the aforesaid supply order/work order, the

conditions of liquidated damages clause and penalty those for late deliveries

as stipulated in the aforesaid tender/supply order/contract shall be enforced.

6. In case of any doubt or question arising on the interpretation pertaining to the supply

order/tender the terms of the contract shall be binding, override and final over the

supply order/tender.

7. If any dispute or difference shall at any time arise between the two parties in

respect of or concerning any of this herein contained or arising out of this

supply order/tender/agreement as to the rights, liabilities or duties of the

said parties hereunder or as to the recovery of any amount, the same shall be

referred to the sole arbitrator M.D., MPLPDC who in turn may refer the

dispute to any officer of MPLPDC for adjudication. The arbitration shall

be in accordance to the law of Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996.

The decision of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the parties.



Page 44 of 430

8. All the disputes pertaining to the said contract shall vest to the jurisdiction of

Courts at Bhopal.

In witness whereof the parties hereto have set their hands on the

day .

SIGNATURE OF THE SIGNATURE FOR AND

ON APPROVED SUPPLIER: BEHALF OF the MPLPDC

:

Supplier Side Witness No.1 MPLPDC Witness No.1

Signature : Signature :

Name :_ Name :_

Address : Address :

_

_

Witness No.2 Witness No.2

Signature : Signature :

Name :_ Name :_

Address : Address :

_

_



Page 45 of 430

ANNEXURE – IV

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation

Main Road3, Kotra-Sultanabad Road, Bhopal - 462 003

General Terms and Conditions form an integral part of Purchase Order

1. INSPECTION :

The equipment under the purview of your supply should be inspected by your own

technical experts at your works and such inspection report could be forwarded to

us in triplicate along with dispatch documents. However, the MPLPDC, reserves

its right of inspection at any stage of fabrication manufacture of the

equipment/material. The final inspection if any case will be carried out at

MPLPDC project site.

You should forward to us the test certificate, wherever applicable, obtained from

the concerned authorities/principal manufacturers either regarding quality or any

other details of the items utilised in the process of manufacture/fabrication.

2. DESPATCH INSTRUCTIONS :

The material are to be dispatched to the project site by the mode of transport

specified in the order under intimation to us. Depending on the type of material,

you shall have to carry out proper packing/creating to avoid breakage in transit.

Other details of dispatch such as marking, consignee a particulars etc. are given

under clause No.4 of this purchase order. For using any mode of transport other

than the specified one prior concurrence from us in writing should be obtained. All

consignments should be dispatched on freight paid basis irrespective of price basis.

In the event of freight paid basis irrespective of price basis. In the event of freight

payable by us, you shall have to obtain our prior approval and produce necessary

documentary evidence in support of your claims. Unless otherwise stated, the

original RR/LR should be sent by registered post directly to the

consignee along with a copy of invoice and two copies of delivery challan/packing

list. 3. INSURANCE :

You shall have to arrange all transit risk insurance on warehouse basis for the items

to be supplied by you. In the cases, where orders are placed on ex-works basis, the

premium shall be paid by us at actual to you against production of documentary

evidence. In the event of any damage to /loss of consignment in transit, it will be

your responsibility to lodge necessary claims with the carriers/underwriters and

pursue them till settlement. Since insurance policy will be taken in our name, if

required, we shall give you necessary authorisation letter, authorising you to lodge

and pursue claims on your behalf with the carriers/underwriters. Also you shall

have to make good the losses/damages occurred in transit by making

replacement/payment to us in the first instance and if claims are settled by the



Page 46 of 430

Under writers and any amounts are released by us, the amount thus realised in

settlement of claims shall be reimbursed to you.

In other words, the prime facie responsibility rests on you for getting compensation

of the damages/losses incurred if any, due to all transit hazards.

In the case, when order is placed on „free delivery at site‟ basis, no insurance

premium will be paid by us. However, in such case also, all transit risk insurance

policy must be taken to safeguard your own interest and to protect the material

against transit hazards.

4. DELIVERY CLAUSE :

The stipulated delivery time given in the order is the essence of this contract. You

must, therefore, strictly adhere to the delivery schedule mentioned in the order.

5. DEMURRAGE :

You shall bear and reimburse to useful demurrage charges, if any paid by reason of

delay on your part in forwarding the original dispatch documents to destination

given in the purchase order.

6. REJECTION :

We reserve the right to reject the goods either in part or full if at the time of

delivery, it is noticed that the goods supplied do not conform to the

specifications/description given in the order. The rejection, if any, will intimated to

you in writing within a reasonable time. You will be liable to repair/replace the

rejected goods within the stipulated time. Till the repair/replacement is done, the

rejected goods shall be lying at your risk, cost and responsibility. If you do not

arrange to repair/replace the rejected goods within a period stipulated by us, we

may dispose of such goods at your risk and in the manner which we think fit. We

shall be entitled to retain the incurred on storage, handling and disposal of the

rejected goods. We shall also be entitled to recover the expenses made by us on

storage land handling of such rejected goods till the goods are removed from our

premises/stores.

7. COMPENSATION FOR DELAY :

The accepted delivery schedule of supply and/or installation shall be governed by the compensation for delay clause as given in the tender. Under the clause, if the

delivery or installation of the equipment is not made by the stipulated date, you

shall have to pay a penalty @ half percent the value of each item per week subject

to a maximum of five percent of the net value of the unexecuted part of the

accepted order. Alternatively in the event of non delivery of the materials or non

completion of installation within the stipulated time, we reserve the right to cancel

the order and procure the material/get installed from any other the order land the

party.



Page 47 of 430

8.0 GUARANTEE :

The supply of equipment as well as installation, if entrusted, shall have to be

carried out by you to the entire satisfaction of

MPLPDC You shall also guarantee to repair/replace without any extra cost, the items or parts

thereof, if found defective due to bad designing, workmanship or substandard

material, within 12 months from the date of commissioning or 24 months from the

date of receipt of material at site whichever is earlier. If it is necessary to send the

defective equipment or parts thereof to your works for repair/replacement, without

forming any precedence the cost of repacking, loading, unloading, transportation

from the site to your works and back to site shall have to be borne by you. The

guarantee however, does not cover any damage resulting from normal wear and

tear or improper attendance or mishandling of the equipment during repair by

personnel other than the supplier or their authorised agents.

9. WARRANTY :

You must provide a warranty for a minimum period of one year from the date of

commissioning of the equipment for satisfactory performance of the

supplied equipment according to the designed/rated/installed capacity or any

other norms fixed by MPLPDC.

10. DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS & MANUALS :

10.1 Prior to commencement of fabrication, you shall have to submit for our approval, two sets of drawings of all the items ordered for supply showing

overall dimensions with typical sections, details of service connection

and their requirement, details of drive units etc. The drawing should also show a

complete bill of material, wherever applicable.

10.2 Three copies of each operation and maintenance manuals and service instructions

along with the drawings showing details of part list, against each item of your

supply should be sent to us. You should also furnish us service requirements like

water (hot water, chilled water and main’s water), electricity, lubricant air etc. for

each equipment, wherever applicable.

10.3 You shall provide a list of spare parts, which will be required for the plants and

equipments supplied by you for atleast two years of normal operation with the

names and the addresses of the manufacturers from whom they can be procured.

The list should contain the code numbers of the parts, which are required to be

procured in addition to the machine number and model etc.

10.4 In case, any documents, drawings are supplied to you by MPLPDC the same must

be treated as confidential, must not be copies, reproduced, transmitted or

disclosed otherwise in whole or part, not duplicated, modified, divulged or

discussed to any third party nor misused in any other way without the consent of

the MPLPDC in writing. All such documents, and drawings shall be the property

of MPLPDC and they must be returned to MPLPDC after done with.



Page 48 of 430

11. SUBMISSION OF BILLS :

Bills in triplicate under registered post, stating therein our purchase order reference

along with necessary inspection certificates from your inspector in respect of the

material supplied and copies of dispatch documents should be sent to our Head

Office. Unless otherwise state, the payment shall be made to you by Crossed

Account Payee Cheque by post according to the terms of payment mentioned in

the Purchase Order.

12. CANCELLATION OF CONTRACT AND REFUND OF ADVANCES : We shall be free to cancel our order in part or full, in the case of non-delivery of

material/non-completion of installation within the stipulated delivery period or

breach of any one of the clauses mentioned herein. Consequential losses, if any, on

account of our getting installation done or obtaining supplies from alternative

sources besides payment of higher price shall be recovered from you. In the event

of cancellation of the order, you will be liable to refund the advance amount, if

any, to the MPLPDC in full. Suppliers will have no right to forfeit the advance

amount received by them.

13. SUB-CONTRACT :

In the event of awarding sub-contract to any of the parties by you for the manufacture/supply/erection of any parts/spares/components that will be used in the ordered equipment, you must furnish us details about your sub-contractors, their experience, specification etc. The sub-contract can be awarded by you only after obtaining written approval from us. In the event of sub-contract also the prime facie responsibility rests on you regarding quality, quantity, guarantee/warranty of the materials supplied by the sub-contractors.

14. FORCE MAJEURE CLAUSE :

The terms and conditions mutually agreed upon shall be subject to For Majeure Clause. Neither the supplier nor the purchaser shall be considered in default in performance of its obligations hereunder, if such performance is prevented or delayed because of war hostilities, revolution, civil commotion, strike, epidemic, order, proclamation, regulation, or ordinance of any Government or of any act of God or of any other cause whether of similar or dissimilar nature, beyond the reasonable control of the party affected. Should one or both the parties be prevented from fulfilling his/their contractual obligations by

a state of Force Majeure lasting continuously for a period of six months, the two parties should consult each other regarding the future implementation of the contract.

15. ARBITRATION CLAUSE :

For settlement of any dispute arising out of this order, Bhopal

shall be the jurisdiction irrespective of any jurisdiction clause mentioned in your correspondence. The arbitration proceedings shall be governed by the provisions of the Indian Arbitration Act, 1940 and the rules made thereunder or any enactment or statutory modifications thereof for the time being in force subject to condition No.13 of General Terms & Conditions Schedule – I of the tender document.



Page 49 of 430

Annexure –V Form of Bank Guarantee for Bid Security (EMD)

(On Non-Judicial Stamp Paper as per the Stamp Act of Local State Government)

Bank Guarantee Number : Date:

This Deed of Guarantee made this ___Day of 20___ (Two Thousand and ____) by (Name and

the address of the bank ), herein after referred to as the Bank , which shall unless repugnant to

the context and the meaning thereof include its legal representative , successors and assignees and

Madhya Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal (herein after referred to

as the MPLPDC) which expression shall unless repugnant to the context and meaning thereof

include its legal representatives, successors and assignees.

Whereas the MPLPDC has invited Bids for Design, Supply, Erection, Testing & Commissioning of

Automatic Cattle Feed Plant of Capacity 100 MTPD expandable to 200 MTPD at Kiratpur,

Itarsi On Turn Key Basis by the Invitation to bid number MPLPDC/CFP/Itarsi/2014-15 .

AND WHEREAS (Name and Address of the Bidder/Supplier) who having submitted their bids

(hereinafter referred to as the Bidder/Supplier) and have agreed to deposit to the MPLPDC an amount

indicated in the Invitation to bid as per the terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.

AND WHEREAS the MPLPDC is also willing to accept a Bank guarantee in lieu of payment by

demand draft of an amount equivalent to the amount of Bid security required to be deposited by the

Bidder/Supplier to the MPLPDC and the guarantee shall be kept valid for 180 days after the day of

the opening of the bids.

In consideration of the MPLPDC having agreed to consider the Bid proposals having

submitted by the Bidder/Supplier without depositing the amount of Bid security and against this Bank

guarantee, we (name and address of the Bank) hereby undertake and guarantee to make payment to the

MPLPDC the amount of Bid security or any part thereof not deposited by the Bidder/Supplier to the

MPLPDC at any time (time being the essence of the Contract) when the MPLPDC asks for the same

as per the terms and the conditions of the Bidding Document within 180 days from the date of opening

of bids.

The Bank further undertakes not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the previous

consent of the MPLPDC in writing and the guarantee shall be continuous and irrevocable

guarantee up to a sum of Rs _ (Rupees _ only) provided always that any

indulgence or forbearance on the part of the MPLPDC to the said Bidder/Supplier,

with or without the consent of the Bank shall not prejudice or restrict remedies against the bank nor

shall the same in any event be a ground of defence by the Bank against the MPLPDC.

In case the MPLPDC puts forth a demand in writing on the Bank for the payment of amount full or

in part against this bank guarantee, the Bank will consider without demur that such demand by itself is

a conclusive evidence and proof that the Bidder/Supplier has failed in complying with the terms and

conditions stipulated by the MPLPDC in its Bidding Document and payment will be made to the

MPLPDC without raising any disputes regarding the reasons for such failure on the part of the

Bidder/Supplier.

The Bank shall not be discharged or released from this guarantee by any arrangement

between the Bidder/Supplier and the MPLPDC with or without the consent of the

bank or any alterations in the obligations of the parties or by an indulgence, forbearance shown by the

MPLPDC to the Bidder/Supplier.



Page 50 of 430

This guarantee shall be in addition to and without prejudice to any other securities or

remedies which the MPLPDC may have or hereafter possess against the Bidder/Supplier and the

MPLPDC shall be under no obligations to marshal in favour of the Bank any such

securities or fund or asset that the MPLPDC at its absolute discretion may vary,

exchange, renew, modify or refuse to complete or enforce or assign any security or

instrument.


MPLPDC on serving us with a notice before expiry of Bank Guarantee requiring the payment of the

amount and such notice shall be deemed to have been served on the Bank

either by actual delivery thereof to the Bank or by dispatch thereof to the Bank by

Registered Post at the address of the Bank.

In order to give full effect to the provisions of this guarantee the Bank thereby waives all rights

inconsistent with the above provisions and which the Bank might otherwise as a guarantor

be entitled to claim and enforce.

The guarantee shall remain in force until _ and the bank undertakes to renew the Bank

Guarantee provided the Bidder/Supplier before the expiry of Bank Guarantee makes the request.

Notwithstanding anything stated herein before: (i) our liability under this guarantee is

restricted to Rs _ (Rupees _ only) (ii) The Bank Guarantee shall remain in force till _ 20 _ and (iii) The

Bank is liable to pay the guarantee amount or any part thereof under this Bank Guarantee only if

the MPLPDC serves upon the bank a written claim or demand on or before.

Place: SIGNATURE Seal

Code Number.

Note:

Bidder/Suppliers should ensure that the banker before submission of the bank guarantees puts the seal

and code number of signatory.

Stamp paper is not required in case of foreign Bidder/Suppliers.

The value of stamp duty should be as per latest stamp act local state government from where the bank

guarantee issued.



Page 51 of 430

Bank Guarantees from Foreign and Scheduled Banks

Bank Guarantee from all nationalized banks is acceptable. Other than the Nationalized Banks, BGs from shall not be acceptable.



Page 52 of 430

ANNEXURE-VI

(Proforma Bank Guarantee against 10% balance) (On Non-judicial stamp paper) This deed of Guarantee made this ___day of 200 (Two

thousand_ ) by (Name and address of the Bank)

(hereinafter referred to as “The Bank”) which expression shall be here the context or

meaning so requires, includes the successors and assignees of the Bank and the Madhya

Pradesh State Livestock and Poultry Development Corporation, Bhopal, (hereinafter referred to

as “The MPLPDC which expression shall unless repugnant to the context or the meaning

there of include its legal representatives, successors and assignees.

WHEREAS the MPLPDC has placed its purchase order bearing No.

dated (Name and address of the party) (Hereinafter called “The supplier”) for

supply of and WHEREAS the MPLPDC has agreed to pay to the

supplier final 10% of the value of the equipment on submission of a Bank Guarantee of

equal amount, which will be kept valid upto from the date of dispatch/receipt

of material at site.

In consideration of the MPLPDC having agreed to pay to the

supplier Rs. (Rupees only) being the last 10% of

the value of the equipment, we (Name of the Bank) hereby undertake and

guarantee to make repayment to the MPLPDC of the said 10% amount or any part

thereof which does not become payable to the supplier by the MPLPDC in accordance

with the terms and conditions of the said purchase order within _ days from the

date of dispatch/ receipt of material at site. The Bank further undertakes not to revoke

this guarantee during its currency except with the previous consent of the MPLPDC in

writing and this guarantee shall be a continuous and irrevocable

guarantee upto a sum of Rs. _ (Rupees only).

The Bank shall not be discharged or released from this guarantee by any

arrangement between the supplier and the MPLPDC with or without the consent of the

Bank or any alterations in the obligations of the parties or by any

indulgence, forbearance shown by the MPLPDC to the supplier and that the same shall

not prejudice or restrict remedies against the Bank nor shall the same in any event be a

ground of defense by the Bank against the MPLPDC. We _ (Name of the Bank) do

hereby undertake to pay an amount due and payable under this guarantee without any

demur, merely or demand from the MPLPDC stating that the amount claimed is due to

the MPLPDC. In case the MPLPDC puts forth a demand in writing on the Bank for the

payment of the amount in full or in part against this guarantee, the Bank shall consider

that such demand by itself is a conclusive evidence and proof that the supplier has failed

in complying with the terms and conditions stipulated by the MPLPDC without raising

any dispute regarding the reasons for any such lapse/failure on the part or the supplier.



Page 53 of 430

This guarantee shall be in addition to and without prejudice to any other securities or

remedies which the MPLPDC may have or hereafter possess against the

supplier/tenderer and the MPLPDC shall be under no obligation to marshal in favour of

the Bank any such securities or fund or assets that the MPLPDC may be entitled to

receiving or have a claim upon and the MPLPDC at its absolute discretion may vary,

exchange, renew, modify or refuse to complete or enforce or assign any security or

instrument.


MPLPDC on MPLPDC’s serving a notice requiring the payment of the amount and such

notice shall be served on the Bank either by actual delivery thereof to the Bank or by

dispatch thereof to the Bank by registered post at the address of the said Bank. Any notice

set to the Bank at its address by Registered Post shall be deemed to have been duly served

on the Bank notwithstanding that the notice may not in fact have been delivered to the

Bank.

In order to give full effect to the provisions of this guarantee the Bank hereby waives

all rights inconsistent with the above provisions and which the Bank might

otherwise as a guarantor be entitled to claim and enforce.

Notwithstanding anything contained here in before, our liability under this

guarantee is restricted to Rs._ (Rupees _only) and

it shall remain in force until , unless a suit or action is filed against us enforce

such claims, within three months from the aforesaid date, all the MPLPDC’s rights under

this guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities

thereunder.

Place :

Date :

(SIGNATURE)

Seal



Page 54 of 430

ANNEXURE – VII

Eligibility & Qualifications Criterion

1. The bidder shall furnish, as Part-I of its bid, documents establishing the bidder’s

eligibility to bid and its qualifications to perform the contract if its bid is accepted. The

bidder should also give information in the format attached to the bid

document.

2. The documentary evidence of the bidder’s qualification to perform the contract if its bid

is accepted shall establish to the purchaser’s satisfaction:

(a) that in the case of a bidder offering to supply goods under the contract which the bidder

did not manufacture or otherwise produce the bidder has been duly authorized by the

goods manufacturer or producer to supply the goods. The bid shall include Manufacturers

Authorization Form given under Section-I. Offers from other agents, brokers &

middlemen shall not be accepted.

(b) that the bidder has the financial, technical and production capability

necessary to perform the contract. To this end, all bids submitted shall include the

following information under Section – II :

(i) Copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status, place of registration

and principal place of business of the company or firm or partnership etc.

(ii) Power of Attorney or a true copy thereof duly attested by a Gazetted Officer in case an

authorized representative has signed the bid.

(iii) Details of experience and past performance of the bidder (or each party to a joint venture)

on works of similar nature within the past five years, and details of current works in

hand and other contractual commitments shall be submitted as per Schedule-I and

Schedule-II given in Section-II respectively of this bidding document.

(iv) Reports on financial standing of the bidder such as profit and loss statements, balance

sheets and auditor’s report of the past three years, bankers certificates etc.

(v) Information regarding any current litigation in which the bidder is involved.

3. For the purpose of this particular contract, bidders shall meet at least all the following

criteria as minimum:

(a) The bidder should be in business of the jobs tendered for a minimum period of five years

at the time of bid opening in the same name and style.

(b) The bidder’s annual financial turnover in the same name and style during the

Last Five years shall not be less than Rs. 25 crores in each year.



Page 55 of 430

(c) The bidder in the same name and style shall have completed / having in hand, at least five

projects of similar nature or above i.e. cattle feed plant capacity 100 TPD or above.

(d) The bidder shall furnish a copy of the Income Tax Returns and the Income Tax

Clearance Certificates for the previous five years in original certified true copies.

(e) Solvency certificate equal to 3 months requirements of cash flow at the peak execution

period for the project.

(f) Major items of plant and equipment available/installed in the bidders factory premises.

(g) The bidder should have in house manufacturing setup for the Cattle Feed plant &

machineries and their spare parts to ensure proper support of spares and services after

successful execution of the project..

4. Bid submitted by a joint venture of two or more firms as partners shall comply with all

of the following requirements:

(a) the bid and in case of a successful bid, the form of agreement shall be signed so as to be

legally binding on all the partners; This partnership or association or alliance or JV

should have completed / having in hand, in the same form 5 or more successful projects.

(b) one of the partners shall be nominated as being in charge and this authorization shall be

evidenced by submitted a power of attorney signed by legally authorized

Signatories of all the partners;

(c) the partner incharge shall be authorized to incur liabilities and received

instructions for an on behalf of any and all the partners of the joint venture and the entire

execution of the contract including payment shall be done exclusively with the partner

incharge;

(d) all the partners of the joint venture shall be liable jointly and severally for the execution

of the contract in accordance with the contract terms and a relevant

statement to this effect shall be included in the authorization mentioned (b)

above as well as in the form of bid and the form of agreement (in case of the successful

bid) and

(e) a copy of the agreement entered into by the joint venture partners shall be submitted with

the bid;

(f) experience, resources, men and machinery of each party to the joint venture will

be taken into account only to the extent of their participation for performing tasks under

the joint venture agreement.

(g) At least one of the partners in JV should meet the criteria of Minimum mentioned

clause 3 from Sub points a to g.

(h) A newly formed JV or partnership or alliance of any sort will not be eligible for this project

unless they have executed successfully / having in hand, at least 3 similar feed plant

turnkey projects and they meet all the qualification criteria as mentioned below.

5. Documents Establishing Goods –Eligibility and Conformity to Bidding Documents

5.1 The bidder shall furnish as part of its bid, documents establishing the eligibility and

conformity to the bidding documents of all goods and services which the bidder proposes



Page 56 of 430

to supply under the contract.

5.2 The documentary evidence of the goods and services eligibility shall consist of a

statement in the price schedule on the country of origin of the goods and services offered

which shall be confirmed by a certificate of origin issued at the time of shipment.

5.3 The documentary evidence of the goods and services conformity to the bidding

documents may be in the form of literature, drawing and data and shall furnish:

(a) a detailed description of the goods essential technical and performance

characteristics;

(b) a list giving full particulars, including available sources and current prices of all spare

parts, special tools etc. necessary f o r the proper and continuing

functioning of the goods for a period of two years, following commencement of the goods

use by the purchaser ; and

(c) a statement of deviations and exceptions to the provisions of the technical

specifications demonstrating the goods and services substantial responsiveness to those

specifications in the form provided under Section-III.

5.4 The bidder should clearly confirm that all the facilities exist for inspection and shall be

made available to the inspecting authority.

5.5 Pursuant to Clause-5.3(c) above, the bidder shall note that standards for

workmanship, material and equipment, and references to brand names of catalogue

numbers designated by the purchaser in its technical specifications are intended to be

descriptive only and not restrictive. The bidder may substitute alternative

standards, brand names and/or catalogue numbers in its bid, provided that

it demonstrates to the purchaser’s satisfaction that the substitutions are substantially

equivalent or superior to those designated in the technical specifications.



Page 57 of 430

SECTION-I

MANUFACTURERS ’ AUTHORISATION FORM

(Please see Clause 2(a) of Eligibility Criterion)

No. ________Dated ____ To, Madhya Pradesh State Live Stock & Poultry Development Corporation Main Road 3, Kotra – Sultanabad Road, Bhopal – 462 003

Sub : - Tender reference No.____________________

Dear Sir,

We an established and reputable manufacturers of _________ having factories at

and do hereby authorize M/s. (Name and address of Agents) to bid, negotiate and

conclude the contract with you against tender reference No. for the above said goods

manufactured by s.

No company or firm or individual other than M/s. _____ are authorize to bid, negotiate

and conclude the contract in regard to this business against this specific tender.

We hereby extend our full guarantee and warranty for the goods offered for supply against

your tender.

Yours faithfully, (NAME)

for and on behalf of M/s. (Name of Manufacturers)

Note : This letter of authority should be on the Letter Head of the manufacturing concern and should

be signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the manufacturer.



Page 58 of 430

SECTION-II – SCHEDULE-I

(Refer clause No.2(b) of Eligibility Criterion)

Major works successfully completed during the past five years

Sr. Name of Place Contract Name of Value of Time of Date of

No. Work Reference Client work Completion Completion

Note : (1) Indicate plant capacity and major parameters handled.

(2) Completion Certificate from Clients should be enclosed with the bid.

(3) This format may be made in excel and a separate print may be attached.

However, it is requested to the supplier not to change the format.



Page 59 of 430

SECTION-II – SCHEDULE-II

(Refer clause No.2(b) (iii) of Eligibility Criterion)

WORKS IN HAND DURING THE CURRENT FINANCIAL YEAR

Sr. Name Work Name Place Value Completion

No. of work order of client of work Order of Period Date

reference Work Order

Note : (1) Indicate plant capacity and major parameters handled.


However, it is requested to the supplier not to change the format



Page 60 of 430

SECTION –III

TECHNICAL DEVIATION STATEMENT FORM

(Refer Clause 5 of Eligibility Criterion)

The following are the particulars of deviations from the requirements of the

tender specifications :

DEVIATION REMARKS (Including justification)

Signature and seal of the Manufacturer/Bidder

NOTE :

(1) Where there is no deviation, the statement should be returned duly signed with an

Endorsement indicating “No Deviations”. (2) The technical specifications furnished in the bidding document shall prevail over

those of any other document forming a part of our bid, except only to the extent

of deviation furnished in the statement.


However, it is requested to the supplier not to change the format.



Page 61 of 430

SCHEDULE - II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

PROJECT INFORMATION

BASIS OF DESIGN AND DESIGN DATA

(SUB SECTION – 1.)


PROCESS FLOW DESCRIPTION

(SUB SECTION – 3)

TECHNICAL DATA & INFORMATION TO BE

PROVIDED BY THE BIDDER


PROJECT MANAGEMENT


SCOPE OF WORK




Page 62 of 430


PROJECT INFORMATION



Page 63 of 430

Project Information

“DESIGN, SUPPLY, INSTALLATION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 100

TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO 200 TPD) ON TURNKEY

BASIS” AT KIRATPUR, ITARSI.

Introduction

1. A) The scope of this tender shall include only the design, fabrication, supply, erection,

testing & commissioning of the cattle feed manufacturing plant required for

producing

100 Tons per day balanced cattle feed with a provision to expand the plant to 200

TPD. The equipment shall include mainly intake conveyors, storage bins,

auto batching, grinding, molasses storage tanks, mineral mix plant, molasses

mixing, pelleting, bagging, aspiration systems, air compressor and HT &LT

electricals related works. The scope of the bidder shall necessarily include the

supply as well as erection and commissioning. Any bid for part job will be

summarily rejected.

1. B) The tender also includes all necessary Civil Works like construction of foundations,

office blocks, worker’s block, warehouse for raw material & finished products etc.

2. A) The plant will be installed on the fabricated MS structure and covered with the

pre- coated sheets and fitted with lighting and lightening arrestor by the bidder.

2. B) The warehouse will be built on Pre-Engineered building concept.

3. All the civil works, foundations, water, steam, molasses and electrical power shall

also be done by the bidder.

4. The Tenderer shall be responsible for developing the conceptual layout

and flow diagram to ensure automatic operation of the plant with minimum

investment.

5. Since this will be a Total Turnkey Job it will be the full responsibility of the

Tenderer to carry out all minor works necessary to achieve the rated capacity of

the plant even though they might not have been expressly mentioned in the tender

document.

6. All the equipment to be supplied will have to be manufactured as per the standard

specifications adopted by the cattle feed industry in the country.

7. This contract will be “Fixed Rate Contract” and the contractor will have to supply

the equipment and complete the erection and commissioning within the agreed

contract value and no escalation of prices will be allowed. However, for escalations

of mentioned quantity a prorata payment will be made.

8. It is absolutely essential to complete the job of design, fabrication, supply, erection

and commissioning of cattle feed plant within twelve months from the date of

signing the contract and receipt of advance.

9. The tenderer is advised to visit to site so as to apprise himself of actual site

condition and quantum of work involved. Civil work at site s h o u l d b e

p l a n n ed with consideration of actual site condition.



Page 64 of 430

Instructions to Bidder

This section of the bidding document defines the way that bidders are required to structure

the presentation of the technical section of the bids. All technical data are to be provided

in the format given in this section. Any bidder not following the bid format structure or

providing insufficient technical data/information or presenting data that is not in the

required format is liable to be deemed non-responsive. In such a case his/her bid may be

liable for a rejection/non consideration.

Introduction:

The bidder is to take note of the various points listed in the introduction and they are to

describe their technical proposal and systems, which they have applied in designing the

plant. Also to highlight any special technical innovation that the bidder proposes to

include in the plant that will improve the performance, reduce operating costs, reduce

maintenance or improve product quality.

The preamble should commence at the start of the process and work logically through the

process. Any such highlights should be cross referenced with the Bid Schedule, Annexure

and paragraph number to which they apply.

Technical Specification – Schedule – II.

Design Data and Design Basis

This sub-section gives in brief the design basis to be followed and gives the basic design

data like operating/storage capacities and special requirements for major equipment/system,

the typical ingredient types which will be used, required type and quality parameters of the

feed etc.

The bidder is required to follow the Basis of design given in the bidding document, and

indicate clearly where additional processes or alternative processes or equipment are

considered to be necessary or desirable to achieve optimum plant operating efficiency,

optimum product quality etc., within the standards specified, and optimum plant operating

convenience and maintenance. These additional items/sections & processes may be included

as optional.

Process Flow Description

The tentative process description is detailed in this sub-section, which is also shown in the

tentative flow diagram enclosed with the bidding document, the preliminary site plan

indicating the proposed area of the feed plant is also enclosed.

It may please be noted that these drawings are only a tentative one to give an idea of

buildings, process and equipment required. It can be developed further as per the process

flow and equipment layout designed by the bidder to improve the operating flexibility and

efficiency, reducing maintenance, easier expansion in future, less investment etc.

Additional or alternate process or sections must be clearly detailed if proposed.



Page 65 of 430

Technical Information and Data to be provided by the bidder with

Bids

This sub-section specifies the various technical drawings, data and information, which

each bidder has to provide along with their bid, without which the bid shall be considered

incomplete and will be liable for rejection.

Deviations from Technical Requirement

All technical deviations are to be stated. If there is no deviation, nil is to be recorded.

This is mandatory and failure to comply will make the bid liable to be deemed

non-responsive.

Optional Items

Optional items, which the bidder proposes, shall be included in this sub-section. Items that

the bidder includes in this section shall be used if considered during the evaluation to be

essential for the satisfactory operation of the plant and shall not be included in the overall

techno commercial evaluation of the bid. All break-up prices for all such optional items to be

given.

Major responsibilities of Bidder/Purchaser

Responsibilities of bidder: The bidder is required to specifically state his acceptance or

non- acceptance of each clause in this Sub-section. Non- acceptance shall be deemed as a

deviation from the bidding document, and should be mentioned in deviations.

Responsibilities of Purchaser: The bidder is required to state here any additional

responsibilities that they consider to be borne by Purchaser besides those described in the

bidding document.

Project Management

Time Schedule: The bidder is to state the proposed schedule of execution from receipt

of order to commencement of product trials and handing over of the project. Bar Chart or PERT network shall be provided.

Management Team: The bidder is to detail the make-up of the project management team in terms of designation, qualifications and their role /function in accordance with this

section of the bidding document.

The bidder is to ensure that the following sections are fully detailed and quantify the

duration and manpower applied to each:

Commissioning, Product Trials & warranty runs

Training

Standby Technical Supervisory support

Drawings and Documentation In this section, list of drawings enclosed with bidding documents have

been indicated. Drawings and documentation to be submitted by bidders with their bid for

technical evaluation of the bids are explained (technical information and data to be

provided by the bidder). Bidder



Page 66 of 430

to indicate and list out in this section the drawings, data and documents provided for

technical portion of their bid.

Battery Limits

The battery limits of the various utilities and Engineering services are clearly given in this

subsection.

Performance Guarantees

The bidder is to take note of the various performance tests and guarantees stated in this

sub- section and confirm the same being given.

SCOPE OF WORKS

LIST OF EQUIPMENTS TO BE SUPPLIED, INSTALLED &

COMMSSIONED Design & Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning In this section, a consolidated list of all major equipment to be supplied and installed as per Preliminary design of the plant by purchaser are indicated with capacity and quantities.

The bidder has to provide in this section a consolidated list of all major equipment being

supplied and installed as per their design and detailing along with quantity, capacity, size,

length, height etc. of each item. The bidder is required to follow the sequence in their list

as followed in purchaser’s list as far as possible to enable purchaser to compare the bids

for evaluation. New items, if required, can be added section wise by bidder.

Technical Specifications for Feed Milling Equipment

It provides the brief general technical specification of each important feed milling equipment. Lengths, heights, capacities, inlet, outlet, driving motor HP and drive parts etc. may be

worked out by the bidder to meet the overall capacities of section and complete plant as

specified in design data and process flow. It may be noted that specification of the

equipment mentioned in this section is very brief, but the bidders should ensure that all

equipments are designed and manufactured to ensure the best performance of the

individual equipment / system. The technical specifications of equipment are generally

based on a particular design, but bidders can supply equipment, as per their design,

to meet the functional requirement of equipment specified in these technical

specifications.

Technical Specifications for Utilities/Services

This sub-section provides the brief technical specifications for the various utilities / services including supply of its main equipment wherever required. The controlling and

distribution piping network with valves, fittings and all required accessories for utilities

like LP steam, Compressed air up-to each of the equipment where these are required is to

be provided and clearly indicated in the bid. This sub-section also includes brief technical specification of electrical substation, all main

electrical equipment for receiving and distribution of electrical power in the plant and

utilizing it for control and monitoring of equipment / process. Though the prices of motors



Page 67 of 430

and geared Motors etc. may be included with the machines, the specifications of these are

mentioned in this section.

Technical Specifications of Production Block Housing Under this sub-section technical specification of the production block housing steel structure, side and roof sheeting, windows etc. shall be provided.

Technical Specifications for Erection, testing & commissioning

The bidder is to note carefully the specifications in the scope of erection, testing and commissioning.

Technical details to be submitted by the bidder:

Under this section, the bidder has to furnish all the technical details for equipment, items under the scope of supply for technical evaluation of the bid.

Preferred makes of bought out items Multiple makes for the bought items have been

given, category-wise. The bidder may choose the make of the bought items from the list

provided.



Page 68 of 430


BASIS OF DESIGN AND DESIGN DATA



Page 69 of 430

Basis of Design

Design Data and Design basis of Cattle Feed Plant 100 MTPD, expandable to 200 MTPD Cattle

feed would be formulated by using various ingredients such as: Maize, Groundnut De-oiled cake,

De-oiled Rice Bran, Broken Rice, Rice Polish, De-Oiled Cotton Seed Cake, Molasses, mineral

mixture, common salt, urea, Wheat Br. Jawar, Bajra , Gur cake, Gur k., Rape, Ext., mus. cake, soya

DOC, GNEXP, Barley, Dal Chura, D.Wheat, Calcite. etc.

Other Details

Capacity 7 TPH (Minimum) of pelletized feed for milk cattle (100 MTPD minimum with 20 hours

operation)

Size of pellets

4-10 mm diameter & 15 mm long. We may produce high quality cattle feed in 4mm

pellet size.

Formulated

System

Generally manual formulation is done by trial and error & method by combining

various cattle feed ingredients in different proportion by working out crude protein,

crude fat, crude fiber, ash, and energy content. The tenderer should provide software for

least cost formulation. The formulation will be done through the computer on the basis

of least cost formulation. The feed prepared shall be as per BIS standards.

Feed Standards

Proximate Composition of Cattle Feeds of BIS Standards

Type – II Type – I Special Feed for High

Milk Yielders

Crude Protein 20% Min 22% Min 24% Min

Ether Extract 2.5% Min 3% Min 4% Min

AI Ash 4% Max 3% Max 2.5% Max

Fiber 12% Max 7% Max 6% Max

Moisture 11% Max 11% Max 11% Max

ME 2200 Kcal/Kg Min 2500Kcal/Kg Min 3000Kcal/Kg Min

Urea 1% Max 1% Max 1% Max

Salt by Mass 1.5% Max 1.5% Max 1% Max

Calcium by mass 0.5% Min 0.8% Min 1% Min

Phosphorous by mass 0.5% Min 0.8% Min 1% Min

Vitamin A 5000 IU/Kg Min 7000 IU/Kg Min 7000 IU/Kg Min

Vitamin D3 1000 IU/Kg Min 1200 IU/Kg Min 1200 IU/Kg Min

Vitamin E 30 IU/Kg Min 30 IU/Kg 30 IU/Kg Min

Formula for Type II BIS Standard Feed

Ingredients Proportions

Rice Bran 14%

Rice Bran Extn. 42%

Mustard Oil Cake 3%



Page 70 of 430

Mustard de-oiled cake 14%

Wheat/Maize/Barley 5%

Guar Korma 3%

Calcite Powder 1.5%

Urea 1%

Salt 1.5%

Molasses 8%

Malt Sprout 6%

Mineral Mixture 1%

Vitamin AD3 100 gram per ton

Total cost per Qtl. 100%

Typical Feed Formula used in Cattle Feed Plants

(Tentative figures and can change with seasons/costing etc.)

Percentage Basis of Dry Matter

Limit D,R,BRAB 45 Minimum

R,BRAB 11 Minimum

R.KANI 5 Minimum

GUAR C. 14 Minimum

GAUR K. 38 Minimum

RAPE, EXT 10 Minimum

MAIZE 5 Minimum

MOLASSES 5.62 Minimum

CALCITE 1.5 Minimum

MINMIX 1 Minimum

SALT 1.5 Minimum

Note: A premix shall be made for mineral mixture, calcite, common salt, urea, with 2-3%

carrier DORB.

Typical Raw Materials

Maize, Groundnut De-oiled cake, De-oiled Rice Bran, Broken Rice, Rice Polish, De-Oiled

Cotton Seed Cake, Molasses, mineral mixture, common salt, urea, Wheat Br. Jawar, Bajra , Gur

cake, Gur k., Rape, Ext., mus.cake, soya DOC, GNEXP, Barley, Dal Chura, D.Wheat, Calcite.

etc.

Raw Material Storage

Raw Material Storage Description In gunny bags, Roofed Godown

Enough built space is available for powder, oil cakes, DORB & meals etc.

Bulk Storage silo( Future Planning) Capacity 500 MT , Qty. 2 Nos. for DORB / Grain. Average bulk density of solid raw materials 600 KG/CUM to 700 KG/CUM (Grains)

Cleaning, Unloading System (Future Planning) Complete Unloading, Cleaning System of 50 TPH with three trucks at a time & shed



Page 71 of 430

Intake of Raw Materials

Premix batch mixer, horizontal, paddle type capacity (in Raw Material Godown).

Pre-weighed ingredients shall be dumped through a mechanized system of conveyor,

elevator in pre-mixer

1000 Kg – 1 No

Intake line to have PLC operated cascade type magnet, jute twine remover before

feeding to any of the proportionate bin. For feeding to proportionate bins, two sets of

distribution conveyors with PLC operated pneumatic slide gates to be used.

2 line of 30 TPH

Portable bag stack conveyor required for conveying / stacking DORB Bags/Other Material etc. in RMG

1 set of 250 bags/ hr

Cascade Magnet, & Jute twine remover for each intake line. 2 set each of 30

TPH SILO FOR GRAIN/ DORB STORAGE : Design, fabrication, supply , installation and commissioning of DORB Silo System of 1000 MT (2x500 MT)

capacity complete with supporting steel structure and platforms as required for 100

MTPD cattle feed plant as per technical specifications, scope of works, battery

limits etc. (Complete with required conveying system i.e. feeding & transferring

system to the plant)(Note: Only planning is needed. It’s supply and execution may be

done in future )

One Job

Batching

Modular type Steel proportionate bins – (Total 12 Nos.) Level sensors (2 nos.) shall be placed for each of the silos, to give indicative information of

levels and control of the filling and emptying operations. One of the

proportionate bins for premix shall be fabricated with 1 mm thick SS 304

sheet inner lining. All bins shall have manual outlet gates.

12 Bin of 20 MT each.

Outlet Feeders from Proportionate bins. Gravity type & 250 mm screw type

(controlled by common VFD). :

12 Nos.

Automatic Batch weighment in two separate hoppers to get a composite

batch of 2 MT with load cells & display in Control Room & Mimic panel

2 MT Hopper 1 No

1 MT Hopper 1 No

Batch Chain conveyor 30 TPH 1 Set

Batch Elevator (Bucket Type) 30 TPH 1 Set

Grinding & Mixing

100 % Post Grinding ( Entire Batch is ground)

(One working & One Standby)

(8 to 10 TPH) x 2

Maximum grindables in formulation 60%

Bin above Hammer Mill 2MT – 2 No

Feeder for Hammer Mill ( Rotary vane type) (10 TPH) x 2 Nos

Hammer Mill ( Full circle type, Horizontal) with 4 mm Sieve (10 TPH) x 2 Nos

Hopper below Hammer Mill 2 Nos.

Bin above Batch Mixer with outlet gates 2 MT – 1 No

Batch Mixer with inlet & outlet gates 2MT – 1 No

Surge Bin Below Batch Mixer 6 MT, 1 No.



Page 72 of 430

Mixed Feed Chain conveyor 30 TPH – 1 Set

Mixed Feed Elevator (Bucket) 30 TPH – 1 Set

Pelleting

100 % pelleting of Mixed mash feed

Pelleting lines with provision of Second Line for future expansion. 1 lines of 7 TPH

capacity

Bins above Pellet mill 10 MT – 1 No

Loss in weight Feeders for proportioning the Feed & Molasses for a set formulation

10 TPH – 1 No

Pellet Mill with conditioner & Molasses Mixer (Twin Paddle – Adjustable) 7 TPH – 1 No

Rotary Air lock ( SS 304) 7 TPH – 1 No

Pellet Cooler (vertical, Induced draft type) with ambient air 7 TPH – 1 No

SS 304 Cyclone separator for Fines with Aspiration ducting complete with

Sight Glass, Rotary Air Lock

1 set

Pellet Cooler fan (Exhaust type) 1 No

Pellet Feed Transfer conveyor 30 TPH 1 Nos.

Pellet Elevators ( Bucket Type) 30 TPH 1 Nos.

Pellet Sieve 10 TPH – 1 No

Molasses Handling

Molasses Storage Tank 800 MT 02 Nos.

Maximum Molasses to be added in the formulation 10 % Maximum

Molasses Pre-heater (Indirect Type; Horizontal insulated steel tank) 1 Job

Tanker unloading pumps ( Shuttle Block type , Motor with gearbox) (1

working + 1 standby )

15 KLPH – 2 No

Molasses Feed pumps to plant ( Shuttle Block type , Motor with gearbox) -(2

working + 1 standby )

3 KLPH – 3 No

Molasses Flow Meter for flow measurement (PID Controller type) 3 KLPH – 2 Nos

Molasses pipes , valves & fittings (Insulated) 1 Lot

Finished Feed Handling

CYLINDRICAL Bagging bins with 1 mm thick, SS 304 Lining with outlet pneumatic Gates

10 MT 2 Nos.

Automatic Bagging System complete with, filler, weigher, stitching with conveyor machine (with manual bagging system)

250 Bags/Hr set, 1 Set for 70 kg baqs

Bag Capacity (HDPE/Gunny Bags) 50 kg for HDPE &

70 kg for Gunny Bags

Electronic weighing machine check weighers 200 kg 2 No.

Bag conveyor to FPG with wooden slates. 250 bags/hr 1 SET 25 mtrs.

Portable Bag stack conveyor (Working + 1 Standby) 250 Bags/hr 2 sets



Page 73 of 430

Automation

Automation for the main plant shall include controlled operation of electrically driven units,

with sensors / meters etc, with a predetermined logic to produce pellets from dumping of raw

materials in the godown, upto Bagging operation in the production plant. The Automation shall

optimise the power utilization and improve the overall operational efficiency of the plant. The

system also envisages collection of information from various points and shall collate such data to

determine losses, utility consumption/ unit of production and shall generate plant reports with all

necessary data.

Aspiration system with compressed Air generation

Few decentralized, modular type rather than one centralized. All dust producing

equipment / hoppers / bins to be connected to aspiration systems.

Dust collected to be reused.

Automatic compressed air operated compact units.

Feed Mill Housing, platforms, Pipe Bridge, trench covers.

RCC columns foundation including foundation bolts upto plinth, shall be provided by bidder &

steel structure including structural platforms, staircase shall be in bidder's scope.

Separate structure with the Main plant would be required for hammer mills and would be

connected to the main plant structure.

Basement to be avoided to the extent possible. Limited basements or pits can be provided for

elevators legs and Freight/passenger elevators, and trenches for intake conveyors.

Wall cladding and roofing with GALVALUME (AL-ZINC) profile rib sheets. Minimum

thickness of Sheet 0.5 MM

Feed mill housing to have windows, regular industrial staircase, railing, steel chequered plate

flooring and artificial electric lighting. Provision of 1 MT capacity industrial Elevator (Lift) to be

made in the Main plant structure.

Pipe bridge between Boiler house and Main plant shall be executed as per site requirement.

Steam Distribution Condensate recovery

Complete Supply of steam raising system with HP Lines and Low pressure steam piping from

outlet of PRS to Main plant, in Pipe Bridge, for pellet mill conditioner in feed mill, Molasses

pre-heater etc shall be in the scope of work. Condensate generated from Molasses pre-heating

sections shall be returned to Boiler feed water tank.

Electrical Distribution

Electrical Power distribution for plant requirement 3 phase, 415 V, 50 Hz

Electrical panel for Main plant, Raw material Intake Equipments, Molasses, System Equipments, etc.

1 each



Page 74 of 430

APFC panel with capacitors. 1 No.

Power cables for Main plant MCC shall be drawn from LT Panel located in substation room. Raw material intake, shall be drawn from Main Plant MCC.

1 Lot

Power & Control Cables, Signal cables , cable trays 1 Lot

Lighting Distribution Boards, Light fittings, cables 1 Lot

Lightening Arrestor with Earth-pits, Earthing Network 1 Set

Note : In nut shell, entire electrical works starting from 33 KV incomer, substation, transformer onwards till all plant sub sections is in scope of bidder.

Compressed Air Handling System

Generation of Compressed Air & its distribution, to meet requirement of complete plant for

pneumatic cylinders, cleaning and aspiration units is included in the scope.

Screw Air compressor (1 working + 1 standby) 60 CUM/Hr.

Refrigerated Air drier 60 CUM/Hr.

Air Receiver 1000 KL

Compressed Air pipes, valves , fittings including FRL etc.

General Requirements for Equipments

2 Nos. portable filled bag conveyor for mechanised conveying of bags to be provided for

transferring bags from Bagging System to the godown for stacking / upto point of loading in

trucks.

All bolted type drag chain conveyors shall have following:

Maximum linear speed 0.5 meter/second

Minimum cover plate thickness 2 mm

Minimum side plate thickness 4 mm

Minimum bottom plate thickness 4 mm

Minimum intermediate plate thickness 3 mm

All belt bucket elevator with flanged double trough shall have following

Maximum liner belt speed 2 meter/second

Minimum trough plate thickness 2 mm

Minimum head and bottom plate thickness 4 mm

All screw conveyers shall have the following Minimum trough plate thickness 3 mm

Minimum flight screw plate thickness 3 mm

Minimum too cover plate thickness 2 mm

Wear Parts

Following wear parts are to be supplied with the plant and their cost shall be considered in the

technical and financial evaluation: Pellet Mill die 5 Nos Pellet Mill roller Shell 5 sets Hammers for hammer mill 5 sets



Page 75 of 430

Sieve for hammer mill 5 sets Beaters and knives for molasses mixer 5 sets Filter bags for aspiration unit 1 set for each unit Flexible canvass/rubber sleeves 1 set for complete plant Spare Jute twine remover rotor 4 sets

Spare parts

For one year operation of plant, spare parts to be indicated and quoted item wise separately,

as these shall be ordered separately as per the plants requirements.

Future Expansion

Plant to be designed for future expansion up to 200 MTPD capacity.

Civil Works Scope of Supplier

Following shall be arranged by the supplier and is included in scope of supplier.

All building works for offices, godown, roads, service block etc., feed production

block up to plinth, molasses tanks foundation, foundation and building for all utilities

and services.

Fire fighting and detection wherever required.

Workshop m/c and tools for feed plant operation.

Lighting for all buildings except.

Internal Communication system.

All external & Internal illuminations.

Note:

Wherever there is a discrepancy with the technical specification of services utility in

General Terms of Contract – General, Electrical, Mechanical and Installation,

specifications i.e. Schedule – III, its interpretation in this section shall prevail.

The responsibility of design, performance of the proprietary equipment performance of

bought out equipment shall be with the bidder.

Not in Scope of Supplier or Scope Exclusions :- 1) Boundary wall of the area allocated in our 150 Acre plus premises.

2) Plantation of trees and development of garden.

3) Land scaping works with site development.



Page 76 of 430

SUB SECTION – 3

PROCESS FLOW DESCRIPTION



Page 77 of 430

Process Flow Description

Raw Material Intake

All the solid ingredients packed in bags for feed production would be received at the

plant by road. These shall be first weighed at Road Weigh Bridge and then samples will be

drawn for testing for acceptance. Acceptable ingredients in trucks shall then be directed to

either to Raw Material Godown or to Raw Material Silo system for its storage. At the Raw

Material Godown, the bags will be manually unloaded from the Trucks and stacked in the

Godown.

Trucks of DORB / grains / similar raw materials diverted to silo storage system, where

raw materials either in bags or bulk are unloaded manually & then dumped manually (A

provision is needed) in dumping hoppers and conveyed to any one of the bulk storage silos

through a mechanised conveying system.

As per the requirement of production, there are two sets of intake chain conveyors (30

TPH) in the RMG for transferring ingredients to Main production plant. Ingredient bags are

brought manually to various dumping hoppers located suitably in the RMG, where the bags

will be opened manually and contents dumped. One cross conveyor in the RAW MATERIAL

Godown can be use for either pre-mix or RAW MATERIAL, as per requirement.

Ingredients such as salt, urea, and mineral mixture etc are to be added in batch in very

small quantity and hence a premix is prepared. The Mineral Mixture in prepared in a plant

located in the Godown. Pre-weighed quantities of mineral mixture per formulation

for a batch are manually dumped along with a pre-weighed carrier ingredient. Mineral mix

& carrier ingredient is mixed in a 500 Kg batch pre-mixer installed in Godown, installed on

one of the cross conveyors. After mixing, pre-mixed batch is conveyed to the 20 MT storage

Bin.

Main intake conveyors transfer ingredients, to the adjoining Main production plant

through set of elevators. Raw materials from grain/DORB silos are also conveyed to

production block though a mechanised conveying system. At all places the bidder has to leave

a future provision for Silo system.

Ingredients on reaching the production block are directed to proportionate bins for

storage before batching. Before filling proportionate bins, the ingredients shall pass through

Cascade magnet (Hump back) and Jute twine remover, to remove ferrous impurities and other

foreign materials such as stems, jute fibre etc. Two intake lines from RMG & One intake line

from Silo system above proportionate bins, a set of cross conveyors & distribution conveyors

are provided to direct raw materials automatically to a pre-decided proportionate bin. Operation

and selection of Proportionate bin is done from control room through PLC logic. The PLC

system shall also have a provision for future Silo system Batching

Formulae containing various available ingredients in the plant based on least cost to produce a

specific type of balance concentrate feed are made available by quality control officer of the

plant for production. All the major & minor ingredients of these formulae are stored in 16 nos

proportionate bins. Plant is provided with two automatic microprocessor controlled batching

plants, one for major (1 MT) & other for minor (1 MT) ingredients, by which the desired

quantity of each ingredient and premix is discharged from proportionate bins into one main

hopper (for main ingredients) and other small hopper (for minor ingredients) to make



Page 78 of 430

a composite batch of 2 MT (maximum). Once the batch is prepared, it is conveyed

mechanically to a 2 MT Bin above Hammer Mills.

Grinding & Mixing

Ingredients of one batch of 2 MT can be transferred into two Hammer mills from their respective

bins located above. The feeders for the hammer Mills regulates the flow of ingredients to the

Hammer Mill. Permanent magnet in feeder of Hammer mill separates ferrous material from the

ingredients before the batch is ground. Feeders of Hammer mills shall also have provision to

separate big size stone or lump of material in the feed before the batch is ground. In the

Hammer mill, the coarse material is broken into powder till they pass through the sieve of the

grinder. The operation of the Hammer mills and their feeders should be automated

& controlled by a VFD, based on the preset electrical load of the Hammer Mill.

Powdered ingredients are conveyed to the Bin above Batch Mixer. Powdered batch is fed into a

Ribbon type batch mixer through a set of pneumatic gates. Mixing of batch in batch mixer is

done generally for 2 to 3 minutes. Interlocks shall be provided to ensure exclusivity of batches.

Molassing

Molasses is an important source of energy and hence is generally included in the feed

formulation. Molasses is received at plant through road tankers and these after weighment on

Road weigh bridge, it is unloaded through a intermediate underground tank, & pumped to

vertical steel storage tanks. As per the requirement of production, molasses is drawn from the

storage tank by the feed pump. Molasses pumped to the plant, is pre-heated in a molasses pre-

heater before being fed to molasses mixer and feeder conditioners of pellet mills, in a controlled

manner for mixing with feed. The feed from the pelleting bin is drawn by a Loss–in-weight

feeder which regulates the flow of feed to the Pellet Mill. A fixed % of molasses is mixed to the

feed in the Molasses mixer. Molasses is metered before being sprayed within the molasses

mixer (major percentage) as well as in conditioner of pellet mills. Molassing of the feed shall be

automatically controlled (coarse controlled) by the speed of the feeder and fine control of the

molasses shall be done by the field operator, if required.

Pelleting

Feed is converted from mash form to pellet form by pelleting machines. In pellet mill, the

mixed molasses mash after being cooked with steam, is pressed between die & press rolls

resulting into formation of pellets, which are cut to required length by pre-adjusted knife of the

mill. Feeder for pellet mill shall control the feed to the Pellet Mill in the same way as feeder to

the Hammer mill. The pellet Mill shall be controlled for parameters such as constant electrical

load based on amperage of pellet mill and conditioning temperature in conditioner based on

PID loop. Steam controller shall control the steam inlet to the conditioner so as to achieve a

preset cooking temperature. Immediately after discharged from pellet mills, pellets are cooled

in counter current pellet coolers by flow of ambient air across column of pellets through a

suitable capacity Exhaust fan. Cooled pellets from the cooler are directed to the elevator by

gravity. These pellets are directed to respective pellet sieve for separation of crumbles from



Page 79 of 430

pellets. The crumbles from the Pellet sieve is returned to the Pellet Mill conditioner and fines

from the cyclone shall be returned to feeder of pellet Mill for re-pelleting. Good pellets are

directed to any of the two Bagging bins for bagging.

Bagging & Dispatch

Finished product from one of the SS Bagging bins selected weighed, filled in Gunny / HDPE

bags in automatic bagging system, which shall, fill, weigh, & stitch the bags automatically for

a pre-decided quantity. Filled bags are then conveyed to Finished Product Godown on a

finished bag conveyor. From the Finished product Godown, bags are conveyed to the trucks for

dispatch, through manual Bag stack conveyors.

Aspiration System

To minimize the generation of dust in the plant, all dust-generating points are identified and a

few small aspiration systems operating with compressed air and having filters and blower etc.

are provided which serve to a limited area. Aspiration connection is given to all major conveying

equipment. Dust Powder collected by aspiration system is put back to the system for minimizing

product losses.

Services

For supplying electric power to all the equipment, Motor Control Centre (MCC) for Main plant

is installed in the Electrical panel room of the Main plant, to which cables are connected to all

machines, control equipment like PLC panel, Mimic panel and remote control panels. Separate

panels for Raw material intake section & soft-starters shall be supplied to cater to RMG &

DORB load requirements. For operating the plant, the remote control panels / local control

panels shall be provided in each section for intake, grinding, molassing, pelletting and bagging.

For all automatic operations for the running of the plant, a PLC based system shall be provided

in the control room. The PLC and its computer, shall be located in the control room, are used

for automation of the plant operation.

Steam at 10.5 kg/sq.cm is generated in boilers located in the Boiler house. LP Steam is received

at the outlet of PRS and is piped through Pipe Bridge to the pellet mill area, where it is mainly

used to cook the molassed feed, in conditioner of pellet mills at a desired cooking temperature.

Steam line is traced along with the molasses feeding line to the molasses mixer with a common

insulation. All steam/condensate lines, valves & fittings shall be insulated & cladded to prevent

heat loss in piping.

There are number of pneumatic flaps and slide gates in the plant for diverting and controlling

the flow of material as per requirement of plant operation. For operation of these flaps and slide

gates, compressed air generated by Air Compressors, is fed to an Air receiver, before distribution

to various consumption points through pipes. Moisture is removed from compressed air by a

Refrigerated Air dryer before it is received in an Air receiver. Compressed air is also used for

purging operation of jet filters of aspiration systems.



Page 80 of 430

Automation

Objective

Automation for this plant shall be intended to ensure uniform & preset parameters for quality in

production, uninterrupted operation of equipments, optimally run equipments and reduce manual

involvement & errors. PLC with SCADA shall be used to automate various operations by

sequencing the activities of the system, as per flow logic.

Raw Material Intake

The control panel operator with the information of level in proportionate bins in Main plant and

requirement, shall decide, which ingredients are required and information on the requirement

shall be flashed on the operator panel in the RMG/ DORB Godown for loading operation.

Ingredients on reaching the production block are directed to preset proportionate bin for storage

before batching. The operation of cross conveyor, respective distribution conveyor and

pneumatic gate for the proportionate bin shall be activated by the software logic of the PLC

depending on type of ingredient. Interlocks shall be made such that ingredients from different

intake lines do not fall into same distribution conveyor. Each proportionate bin shall have two

level probes to provide feedback on the status of bin and further loading /unloading operations

to the control room operator.

Batching

PLC based batching operation as per formulation arrived by QC officer, shall automatically

prepare batch from the ingredients available in proportionate bins. The outlet feeders (gravity &

screw) from the proportionate bins shall control discharge of all ingredients for a batch through

the software program specific for the recipe. The flow of minor ingredients shall be controlled

through a common VFD for accurate material dosage in the weigh Hopper. Batching is done in

two weigh hoppers, with a set of load cells of 750 Kgs capacity each, to prepare a composite

batch of 2 MT.

Grinding & Mixing

Probes shall be placed on the Grinding bin. Ingredients of one batch of 2 MT can be transferred

into two Hammer mills from their respective bins located above with Low and high level

indications for control of feed to the Hammer Mill Feeder. These feeders control the feed to the

Hammer mill, through a VFD through a PID loop. The current drawn by the respective grinding

hammer mill in turn controls the speed of the feeder. The batch is conveyed mechanically to the

bin above batch mixer. This bin has a low and high level sensor to avoid accidental mixing of

successive batches. The entire batch is mixed in batch mixer with timer controlled operation for

2 to 3 minutes. Interlocks are provided to ensure exclusivity of batches. For this level probes are

placed on the bin above Mixer.

Molassing

After grinding & mixing, the powdered feed is conveyed to pelleting bins. For a particular flow

rate of the Feed, a fixed % of Molasses by weight is measured for blending with the feed in the

Molasses mixer. The Molasses mixer shall be capable of mixing about 10 to 13% by weight of

Molasses to the mixed feed and is controlled by the speed of the loss-in-weight feeder. To



Page 81 of 430

achieve this, a pneumatically /electrically operated control valve for Molasses is installed to

regulate Molasses feed to Mixer & conditioner to control molasses in coarse adjustment. However,

Final correction of Molasses if required can be done by the operator, near pellet mill.

Pelleting

Feeder for pellet mill shall control the feed to the Pellet Mill in the same way as feeder to the

Hammer mill. Pelleting bins, shall have High and Low level probes to control the operations of

the equipments before and after bin. The pellet Mill shall be controlled for parameters such as

constant electrical load based on amperage of pellet mill and conditioning temperature in

conditioner based on PID loop. The temperature of conditioned feed shall be set in the PLC, as

per requirement and the flow of steam regulated through a control valve and temperature sensor

with transmitter. Steam controller shall control the steam inlet to the conditioner so as to achieve

a preset cooking temperature.

Bagging & Dispatch

Pellets from vibro-sieve are directly discharged into any of the two bagging bins, through a set of

pneumatic flaps before being bagged. High and low level probes in this bin shall control the

operation of upstream and downstream equipment. Pellets from the bagging bin are discharged to

Automatic bagging system wherein bags are automatically filled, prefixed quantity of pellets is

filled & stitched in a sequence. PLC shall keep track of the no. of bags bagged for particular

formulae and data shall be used to compile the production figures and in a shift / day/month/year

and overall losses. There should be the provision for Manually Bagging system, in case of any

failure in automatic bagging system.

General Requirement:

The system shall be used to automate and co-ordinate, monitor the plant operations for

production, to ensure smooth and continuous operations.

All idle machinery shall be put off when not in use.

Systematic and regular report generation for shift, day, month, year to be made available.

Various recipes for formulation shall be created as per Least Cost Formula & provision for

changing the recipe from time to time by Quality control officer shall be included feature in the

scope.

Production reports for shift, day, month, year shall be generated and hence loss report shall be

prepared.

Operating loads of Hammer Mill & Pellet Mill motors shall be tracked and recorded. Inputs for Steam flow meter in Boiler house shall be picked up & recorded and consumption of

utility/ton of production shall be calculated.

The density variation with temperature for Molasses along with Flow rate shall together be

computed in the PLC to arrive at the mass of Molasses being fed in the Molasses Mixer.

All hardware for dynamic and static panel, PLC, panels shall be supplied.

PLC for the Main plant shall communicate with the PLC for the silo system. Main PLC shall

receive data and instruction from Silo PLC for loading, unloading/transfer operations.

The control room shall house the PLC panel, Control system for SCADA shall be dust free

& air conditioned. For this a suitable capacity split type air conditioning unit shall be supplied and

installed.



Page 82 of 430

SUB SECTION – 4

TECHNICAL DATA & INFORMATION TO BE

PROVIDED BY THE BIDDER



Page 83 of 430

Technical Data & Information to be Provided by the Bidder

Flow Diagram

This shall be for the complete plant being offered similar to one prepared by purchaser and

attached with bidding document, starting from receipt of material from godown / silos,

production and conveying of finished product to godown. Flow diagram also to include raw

material storage silo system. All sections of feed mill including aspiration, utilities, pre-mix etc.

have to be indicated.

Equipment Layout

The scaled layouts shall be in the form of plans (for each floor), sections and elevations with

major dimensions of the equipment as well as that of the building for production block suggested

by the bidder.

Modular Layout of Production Area

Layout similar to one prepared by purchaser and attached with bidding document shall be

shown in one drawing (plan) the overall relative locations of RMG, FPG, Production Block,

Mineral Mixture Plant, By-pass Protein Plant, Raw Material Storage Silo System, Molasses

Tanks, Boiler House, Electric Sub-station, Engineering Workshop and Store. The design of the

plant building shall take into account of wind loading (maximum as per historical data), seismic

zone of the area.

Services Schematics

For all the services like air, LP steam, Molasses, separate single line schematic diagram

indicating piping with valves, fittings etc., up to utility points to be provided.

Electricals

1. Consolidated List of Motors ( equipment-wise), with drive mechanism, connected KW/HP, RPM

of Motor, Type of Geared motor/Gear box, RPM of driven parts, Full Load amperes of drives

2. Consolidated single line power diagram of electrical installation showing Motor Control

Centres, PLC Control panels, Remote panels, APFC Panel, Electric motors

3. The total capacity of capacitors considered in KVAR for APFC panel for total load and their

quantity and individual ratings.



Page 84 of 430

Equipment

List of equipment (Section-wise) with adequate brief specification of each item including

construction material, critical thickness, length/height/ capacity, drive details, make/model etc.

Additional technical details of following main machine:

Machine / Technical Detail Unit Detail

Pellet mill Die

Inner Diameter mm

Overall width mm

Working width mm

Working Area Sq.mm

Effective length mm

Total Thickness mm

MOC

Expected Life MT

Press Roller shell

Inner Diameter mm

Overall Diameter mm

Pad width mm

Pattern of outside of shell

MOC

Expected life MT

Motor HP

Driven pulley size:

Motor pulley size :

No of belts :

Conditioner

Diameter mm

Length mm

Steam requirement at full capacity Kg/hr

Cooking time at full capacity sec

MOC

Motor HP

Hammer Mill

Screen area sq.m

Size of the beater (LXBXT)

Tip speed m/min

Open screen Area / HP sq.cm

Open screen area %



Page 85 of 430

MOC & No. of beaters in one set no.

Distance between Hammer & screen mm

Expected life of beaters MT

Batch Mixer ( 2 MT & 0.5 MT )

Main body thickness mm

Size L X B x H

Air Cylinder dia and stoke in mm

No. of paddles

RPM after speed reduction rpm

Motor HP

Molasses Mixer

Main body thickness mm

Size L X B x H

No. of paddles

RPM after speed reduction rpm

Motor HP

Mineral mixture plant

Pellet cooler Blower: Air flow rate : cum/hr at static pressure differential

Chain Conveyor

General arrangement drawing of a typical chain conveyor showing thickness of various plates,

detail of wear plates, detail of chain, designed breaking load, chain speed, type of bearing, drive

arrangement, etc.

Bucket Elevator

General arrangement drawing of a typical belt bucket elevator showing thickness of various plates,

size, type and thickness of buckets, size and type of belt, type of bearings, belt speed, drive

arrangements, head and tail pulley etc.

Screw Conveyors

General arrangement drawing of a typical screw conveyor showing thickness of various plates,

size and type of main shaft, pitch of screw, type of bearing, screw speed, drive arrangement,

drive parts etc.

Proportionate Bins and Big Bins / Hoppers

General arrangement drawing of a typical proportionate bin and a big hoppers, molasses tanks,

showing thickness of various plates, height and diameter, flange joints, slops and construction

material, inspection window, sight glass etc.

Feed Mill Housing Structure

General arrangement drawing of elevation and section showing columns, beams, side cladding,

roof cladding, windows, flooring etc.



Page 86 of 430

Approx. quantity of following to be provided for technical evaluation:

Item Quantity Other Details

Structural steel for Main plant, pipe bridge In MT

Chequered plate flooring material In MT

Side cladding In Sq.mts Thickness & profile

Roof Sheeting In Sq.mts Thickness & profile

Windows In Sq.mts

Bidder shall quote for a minimum quantity of 300 MT of Structural steel for plant Main structure,

pipe bridge including platform, trench covers based on which the bids would be assessed.

Automation System and PLC Panel

Details of the Automation scheme, network diagram, type & model of the PLC offered.

Technical detail of Raw material loading in bins, auto-batching, Hammer Mills load

controlling, Molasses dozing, feed conditioning & computer system with a write-up

describing the process controls, type of reports that can be printed and provision for

future expansion. Detail of input/ output ports and other technical details of the PLC

panel & hardware of computer systems.



Page 87 of 430

Make/Model Specific Important Details of Following Equipment/Items – 1

Description Make of Items

1st

Preference 2nd

Preference

Screw Discharger

Chain Conveyors

Screw Discharger

Bucket Elevators

Paddle Batch Mixer

Hammer Mill

Molasses Mixer

Bin Activators

Pellet Mill

Rotary Air-locks

Bagging of Weigher

Bin Discharger

Counter Current Pellet Cooler

Aspiration Filter

Centrifugal Fans

Air-compressors

Air dryer

Molasses Flow meter

Load cells for Weighing System

Computer System

PLC

Software for Plant operations

Electric Motors

Geared Motors

Gearboxes

Molasses Pumps

Motor Control Centre (MCC)

Power and control cable

Pneumatic cylinders and solenoid valves

Structural Steel

Light fittings

Loss-in-weight Feeder

Air Conditioner

Utility Pipes

Condensate rec. system



Page 88 of 430

Make/Model Specific Important Details of Following Equipment/Items – 2

S. No. Name of Items Makes of Items

1st

Preference 2nd

Preference

1 ACB and its relays

2 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)

3 Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)

4 Switch Disconnector Fuse Unit

5 HRC Fuse Links

6 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)

7 Soft-starter

8 Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)

9 Contactors

10 Starter Relays

11 Electronic Timers

12 Push Buttons

13 Indicating Lamps

14 Current Transformers

15 Measuring Instruments

16 PVC Insulated Control wires

17 PVC Insulated Power wires

18 Terminal Blocks

19 Junction Box

20 Power Isolator

21 Power Capacitor

Deviations From Technical Requirement This bidding document provides guidelines for the processes and equipment to be used for the

cattle feed plant and the „Design data and Design basis‟ and „Technical Specifications‟ define the

qualitative parameters and frame work against which equipment will be required to perform. It is

imperative on bidders to provide the fully detailed technical specification of the equipment and

services, which they intend to provide, to fully execute the contract in line with the bidding

document. Items, which deviate from the bidding proposal, shall be as per design specifications of

the bidder and shall be treated as a deviation from the text of this bidding document. Deviated

items should fulfil the minimum performance parameters as specified in this bidding document.

This bidding document does not allow bidders to make exclusions from any part of the bid and an

incomplete list of equipment or an incomplete schedule of service utilities to be provided would be

considered as a non-responsive bid.

Note : The Bidder’s are however allowed to upgrade or upsize equipments should they propose

significant benefits in process and processing costs. All such proposals should be separately

submitted along with relevant technical date and supporting literature. It is at the sole discretion of

MPLPDC to accept the same. There shall not be any extra weightage considered/given for any such

upsizing/up gradation.



Page 89 of 430

Optional Items

There may be items or sections offered as „OPTIONAL‟ by the bidder. The entire system

shall be designed with all provisions to include the optional items in such a way that no

major changes would be required in the system. The specifications of Òptional‟ items

shall be the same as that of similar items in the tender.

The cost of Òptional‟ items shall not be included in the calculation of total bid price for

evaluation. In the event that the optional items are selected by the purchaser for supply,

these shall be in addition to evaluated price. The quoted price for the “optional” item shall

include all incidental costs of installing that item as part of the contract.

Break Up Price

For all items including LOT or SET items, which are detailed in the bidding document,

break- up price whether in Nos., RM or Sq. meters, Kilograms or MT is to be provided.

unless specifically asked under technical information and data, which is meant only for

technical evaluation and not for the commercial evaluation of the bid. The bidding

document will be evaluated on a total lump-sum basis as specified price schedule.



Page 90 of 430

SUB SECTION – V

PROJECT MANAGEMENT



Page 91 of 430

Project Management

Major Responsibilities of Bidder & Purchaser

Major responsibilities of Bidder

1. Developing the process design, complete engineering design supply of all equipment and systems,

ensuring best performance of individual equipment/system, for which bidder shall avail the

assistance of reputed specialists in their respective fields, wherever required, as per the details

given in the bidding document and as per battery limits.

2. Performance and suitability of the total system: Performance tests should be carried out by the

bidder in the presence of and to the satisfaction of Purchaser.

3. Arranging and obtaining approvals from various statutory authorities on behalf of the Purchaser.

The statutory fees shall be reimbursed by the Purchaser on production of receipts.

4. Ensuring satisfactory performance, training of operating staff, stand by services after commissioning

and after sales services of the complete plant supplied and installed.

5. First charge of oil, lubricants and consumables. “First charges” means that these items shall be

replenished whenever and wherever required till the successful completion of product trials.

However, supply of electricity, water, petrol and diesel etc. is not covered in bidder’s scope.

6. Test kits required for establishing performance parameters.

7. Necessary manpower and tools for installation, testing and commissioning

8. Performance guarantees with regards to the following: a. Rated performance of individual equipment and complete system.

b. Product quality standards conforming to the prevailing Standards.

c. Three sets of installation, operation and maintenance manuals of all machines should be

supplied. Two sets should be handed over to Site while handing over the plant to Site

Engineer / Project Authority along with the equipment while the third set is to be handed

Over to the MPLPDC controlling office. As built drawings in soft i.e.in CD (AUTOCAD)

with manuals to be handed over to purchaser.

9. The Bidder shall furnish to the Purchaser, the total load on each of the foundations to enable the

purchaser to design & arrive at the footing/pedestal details.

10. The Bidder shall furnish all equipment details as indicated in Technical Data & information to be

provided by Bidder

11 The bidder shall carry out all civil works and designs as per prevailing standards and applicable

codes. All the civil works related details, designs and drawings shall be provided before execution

to enable MPLPDC to get vetted by its experts.

Major responsibilities of Purchaser

1. Adequate labour force with operators/supervisors and engineers for trial, testing and

commissioning at no charge.

2. Provision of services, Raw material, packaging material etc.



Page 92 of 430

8. Internal telephone system.

9. Engineering personnel to liase with the supplier, Project Manager and the execution team.

10. Provision of personnel for training and on going jobs supervision.

11. Telephone facility on chargeable basis.

12. Permanent water and power supply at the time of testing and commissioning of the plant,

including petrol and diesel etc.

13. Temporary power connection which will be provided only for the purpose of erection.

Project Management

1. The project execution shall be time-bound as per the mutually agreed time

schedule. Supplier shall nominate an experienced project engineer who shall be

responsible for activities of project in office and site. A competent execution team shall be

deputed at site by supplier who shall be stationed at site and adequately

experienced in Project Management of such magnitude and type. The supplier himself shall

arrange all temporary accommodation and site office for its staff at site.

The Project Engineer shall avail assistance wherever required from reputed experts in

various fields who shall be directly responsible for satisfactory execution. The Project

Engineer shall be responsible for overall implementation of the entire project,

from commencement to the final take over of the plant. The services of the Project Engineer

shall be ensured for the day to day operations and coordination to ensure successful and

satisfactory design, procurement, manufacture, inspection, erection, testing and commissioning

of all the equipment/ facilities/systems within the time-bound schedule. He shall be assisted by

a Site Engineer to take care of all site activities.

The Project Engineer and Site Engineer shall attend all technical and review meetings between

various parties involved in the project and ensure implementation of all decisions taken in

the meetings. The Site Engineer shall be responsible for detailed material

accounting at site and management of the store maintained at site.

2. The purchaser shall also nominate a Project In-charge with whom the supplier

shall communicate/coordinate. The purchaser shall also post a Site Engineer at project site for

supervision and coordination with Site Engineer of the supplier. Approval on technical

documentation (with or without specified amendments) shall be given by purchaser within ten

working days after submission. The amendments which are not in the original scope of work or

due to changes in concept, shall be taken-up by the supplier as per mutually agreed rates

(decided either before or after execution), and shall be binding on the supplier.

3. Supplier shall obtain approval for purchase of specific makes of equipment whose makes are

not mentioned in his offer. If two or more makes of the same equipment are mentioned in the

form of alternatives, the supplier shall seek approval for choosing one make over another.

All the detailed design calculations regarding the selection of equipment sizes, system types,

etc. shall be submitted to Purchaser for their specific observation and record whenever asked

for.

4. The supplier’s Project Engineer will provide to the purchaser’s Project In-charge with

monthly progress reports which clearly indicate the actual vis-à-vis planned progress and the

new likely completion date of supply, erection and commissioning of the plant.

5. For indigenous items, the supplier shall invite Purchaser for inspection and preliminary

testing. The inspection may be required at various stages of manufacture/assembly for some

items.



Page 93 of 430

6. Details of documentation to be submitted sha l l be according to the overall project

programme. The Project / Site Engineer of supplier shall be fully authorised to take on the

spot decision with regard to:

a. Modification in layout and execution programme to suit local conditions.

b. To purchase essential materials from local market to avoid delays.

7. For smooth execution of the project, the supplier‟s team of Project Engineer, Site Engineer

and key Personnel shall remain consistent throughout the execution period.

8. After satisfactory erection and testing, competent commissioning team shall be deputed to

establish the performance parameters for a specific period.

Testing & Commissioning

After installation of all equipment and completion of product piping and connection of all

utilities including electrical, all major equipment shall be tested at no load after checking all

alignments. On completion of satisfactory no load test, section-wise testing at no load shall be

carried out. Any defect notice during no load shall be attended to. After testing of all sections

on no load, the plant as a whole shall be tested with raw material for trial run and ultimately

commissioning the complete plant to the satisfaction of purchase/project authority.

Establishing Performance Guarantees

On completion of supply, erection, testing and commissioning of the plant, the plant has to be

operated at full capacity continuously in 3 shifts of 8 hours basis for seven days

to the satisfaction of the Purchaser/Project Authority, to establish performance guarantees

provided by the bidder. However if purchaser/client is unable to provide operating staff for

three shifts, number of days can be increased with mutual discussions.

Performance Guarantees

If the plant or any part thereof does not give the offered process performance, capacities and

consumption guarantees as confirmed in design data and technical data and information, during

the commissioning due to reasons attributable to the supplier, suitable recovery shall be made

by purchaser from supplier’s bill.

Training

Training of plant personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various equipment of the

plant shall form an important component of Project Management. Training shall be imparted by

the bidder for a period of two weeks during which the contractor should guide and train the

staff of the client in operation and maintenance of the plant equipment to achieve the optimum

plant efficiency and product quality. Training should commence during the

testing/ commissioning period and shall include:

1. Familiarization with all major feed milling equipment of all sections of the feed plant and

utilities etc. including the operation of the computer/PLC based auto batch weigher and

other systems.

2. Procedure for attaining the rated output and optimum product quality.



Page 94 of 430

3. Familiarization with the basic principle of Electronic/Electrical control systems, including

faultfinding.

4. Familiarization with start-up procedures, regular maintenance and operational procedures

including dismantling of machine parts, replacement of spares/components,

preventive maintenance etc.

5. Condition monitoring of equipments.

6. Generating production and maintenance log sheets of important equipment and systems.

Training shall be given to all the personnel required to operate the plant, and their immediate

Supervisors/ Engineers.

The training schedule should be proposed by the bidder together with the content of training

programmes, their duration etc.

Standby Services after Commissioning

Once the commissioning and warranty runs are over and the plant is taken over by

Purchaser/Project Authority, the s u p p l i e r s h a l l p r o v i d e t o t h e p l a n t s t a n d b y

t e c h n i c a l supervisory support as follows:

1. For one week after warranty runs in which further training of the

Purchaser/Project Authority's operating staff shall be done and

equipment/system still needing finer adjustment/changes shall be carried out.

2. For two days after 4 months, 8 months and 1 year from warranty runs, to have discussions

with plant staff and assistance to review the correctness of operations /

maintenance procedures and necessary corrections.

3. These visits of the Supplier are other than those covered under guarantee/warranty clause,

which shall be undertaken whenever required separately.

The bidder shall provide drawing/data and technical details with their bid as specified in tender.

After commissioning and during handing over of the plant by Supplier to Purchaser/Project

Authority, the contractor to provide the following:

1. As executed final drawings and technical data of the complete plant for operation, maintenance

and permanent record in soft and hard copies.

2. The final software and source codes of the systems.

3. A consolidated operation and maintenance manual of the complete plant along with operation

and maintenance of each key equipment as provided by manufacturer.



Page 95 of 430

SUB SECTION – VI

SCOPE OF WORK



Page 96 of 430

Scope of Work

List of Major Equipment to be Supplied and Commissioned

The list given below of equipment is as per preliminary design of the plant by

Purchaser. The detail list of equipment & their individual capacity may vary as

per design and detailed engineering by the bidder to achieve the minimum plant‟s

rated capacity of minimum 7 MT/Hr ( 100 TPD for 20 operating hours) or as specified

in design data & battery limits. If required, the bidder can break-up an item

into further detail, but wherever purchaser has indicated quantity as one lot, no

further detail is required. Bidders may add additional items section wise if these are

required as per their detail engineering.

These additional / optional / alternatives items offered by the bidder will be considered

during technical evaluation of the bids and would be subjected to acceptance by the

purchaser.

Schedule of Quantities for Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of Equipment

CFF – Kiratpur, Itarsi, District – Hoshangabad Part – A PART 1. : DESIGN, FABRICATION, SUPPLY OF MAJOR EQUIPMENTS, FOR

100 TPD CATTLE FEED PLANT (EXPANDABLE UP TO 200 TPD) ON TURNKEY BASIS.

LIST OF MAJOR

EQUIPMENT

Sr.

No. Description Capacity/Size

(cm=Cubic Meter)

Quantity Unit Price

Rs. Amount

Rs.

1. RAW MATERIALS INTAKE EQUIPMENT

1.01 INTAKE CHAIN CONVEYOR IN RMG

WITH PNEUMATIC SLIDE GATES

30TPH 30RM

2

1.02 DUMPING HOPPERS FOR INTAKE

CONVEYORS IN RMG

2 M x 1 M

10

1.03 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR DUMP HOPPERS IN RMG

--

10

1.04 ELEVATOR FOR BATCH PRE-MIXER 10 TPH 1

1.05 HOPPER ABOVE BATCH MIXER WITH

PN. GATE

1 MT

1

1.06 BATCH MIXER FOR PREMIX DUTY WITH

PNEUMATIC OUTLET GATE

1 MT

1


1.08 ELECTRONIC PLATFORM WEIGHSCALE 200 KGS 2

1.09

PORTABLE BAG STACK CONVEYORS 250 BAGS/HR;

10 M

1

1.10 INTAKE BUCKET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 2



Page 97 of 430

1.11 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR INTAKE ELEVATORS

--

2

1.12 CASCADE MAGNET 30 TPH 2

1.13 JUTE TWINE REMOVER 30 TPH 2

1.14 CROSS CONVEYOR 30 TPH 1 1.15 DISTRIBUTION CONVEYORS 30 TPH 1

2. BATCHING EQUIPMENT

2.01 PROPORTIONATE BIN WITH OUTLET GATE

20 MT

12

2.02 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR PROPORTIONATE BINS

1 SET

2.03 GRAVITY FEEDERS FOR BIN DISCHARGE

AND /OR 12 12

2.04 CONVRYOR FOR BIN DISCHARGE 250 MM 12

2.05 BATCH WEIGH HOPPER ( MAJOR

INGREDIENTS)

2 MT

1

2.06 BATCH WEIGH HOPPER(MINOR INGREDIENTS) 1 MT 1

2.07 PNEUMATIC GATE BELOW WEIGH HOPPER

--

2

2.08 SURGE HOPPER BELOW BATCH WEIGHER

--

2

2.09 BATCH CHAIN CONVEYOR 30 TPH 1

2.10 BATCH BUCKET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

2.11 ASPIRATION UNITS FOR BATCH

ELEVATOR

--

1

3. GRINDING, MIXING EQUIPMENT

3.01 GRINDING BIN WITH PN. GATE 2 MT 2

3.02 FEEDER ABOVE HAMMER MILL 10 TPH 2

3.03 HAMMER MILL WITH 6 or 8 MM SIEVE 10 TPH 2

3.04 HOPPER BELOW HAMMER MILLS -- 2

3.05 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR HAMMER MILLS -- 2

3.06 BIN ABOVE BATCH MIXER 2 MT 2

3.07 PNEUMATIC GATE ABOVE BATCH MIXER

--

1 SET

3.08 BATCH MIXER ( RIBBON TYPE) 2 MT 1

3.09 PNEUMATIC GATE BELOW BATCH MIXER

--

1 SET


3.11 CONVEYOR BELOW MIXER 30 TPH 1

3.12 MIXED FEED ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

3.13 ASPIRATION UNIT FOR MIXED FEED ELEVATOR --

1

1

4. PELLETTING EQUIPMENT

4.01 MIXED FEED TRANSFER ELEVATOR WITH OUTLET CASCAD MAGNET.

30 TPH

1

4.02 PELLETING BIN WITH BIN ACTIVATOR 10 MT 1

4.03 VARIABLE SPEED LOSS IN WEIGHT

FEEDER WITH HOPPER

10 TPH

1

4.04 PELLET MILL WITH CONDITIONER AND

MOLASSES MIXER

7 TPH

1



Page 98 of 430

4.05 ROTARY AIR LOCK FOR PELLET COOLER 7 TPH 1

4.06 COUNTER CURRENT PELLET COOLER 7 TPH 1

4.07 PELLET COOLER CYCLONE (SS 304) WITH PN.HAMMERS.

--

1

4.08 ROTARY AIR LOCK FOR CYCLONE (SS ) 7 TPH 1

4.09 PELLET COOLER FAN -- 1

4.10 ASPIRATION DUCTING FOR PELLET

COOLER (SS 304)

--

1 SETS

4.11 PELLET ELEVATOR 30 TPH 1

4.12 PELLET SIEVE 10 TPH 1

4.13 SPARE MOTOR FOR PALLET MILL -- 1

4.14 SPARE MOTOR FOR CYCLONE BLOWER -- 1

5 MOLASSES STORAGE / HANDLING EQUIPMENT 5.01 MOLASSES STORAGE TANK 800 MT 2

5.02 MOLASSES UNLOADING TANK (WITH

HOSE)

5.03 MOLASSES UNLOADING PUMP (1 Working + 1 Standby)

15 KLPH

2

5.04 MOLASSES PRE-HEATER 1 1

5.05 MOLASSES FEEDING PUMP (1 Working + 1 Standby)

3 KLPH

2

5.06 MOLASSES FLOW METER 3 KLPH 1

5.07 MOLASSES PIPING, CONTROL VALVES,FITTINGS

--

1 LOT

6 BAGGING EQUIPMENT

6.01 BAGGING BIN (SS) 10 MT 2

6.02 PNEUMATIC SLIDE GATE -- 2

6.03

AUTOMATIC ,WEIGHING,FILLING, STITCHING MACHINE WITH CONVEYOR & CONTROLLER

250 BAGS/HR

1 SET.

6.04

FINISHED PRODUCT BELT CONVEYOR. 250 BAGS / HR;

25 M

1 SET

6.05 PORTABLE BAG STICHING MACHINE -- 2

6.06 ELECTRONIC WEIGH SCALE 200 KG 2

6.07

PORTABLE BAG STACK CONVEYOR 250 BAGS /

HR;10 M

1

7 FEED MILL HOUSING

7.01 MS STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR MAIN

PLANT AND PIPE BRIDGE

300 MT Approx.

7.02 MILD STEEL CHEQUERED PLATE PLATFORM,TRENCH COVERS ETC

60 MT Approx.

7.03 WINDOWS (REQUIRED QUANTITY) As per Design

7.04 ROOF SHEETING (REQUIRED QUANTITY) As per Design 0

7.05 CLADDING

SHEETS(REQUIREDQUANTITY) As per Design 0

7.06 LIGHT FITTINGS & LAMPS ( MAIN PLANT)

--

50 SETS

8 PRODUCT PIPING/ ACCESSORIES

8.01 PRODUCT PIPING/DUCTING, FLEX. CONNECTIONS

--

1 LOT

8.02 SMALL HOPPERS/TRANSITION PIECE -- 1 LOT

8.03 PNEUMATIC GATES FOR PROP. BINS FILLING

--

1 LOT



Page 99 of 430

8.04 PNEUMATIC PIPE FLAPS -- 4

8.05 SIGHT GLASS FOR AIR LOCK -- 2 SETS

9 AUTOMATION EQUIPMENT

9.01 LOAD CELL WITH WEIGHING SYSTEM

FOR BATCH WEIGHER EACH

2 MT; 1 MT

1 SET

9.02 LOAD CELL FOR LOSS-IN-WEIGHT FEEDER

--

2 SETS.

9.03 PROGRAM SOFTWARE FOR THE ENTIRE PLANT

--

1 SET

9.04 PLC PANEL , HMI , SENSORS,

COMMUNICATION & DATA CABLES

--

1 LOT.

9.05 MIMIC PANEL, COMPUTER FOR

CONTROL ROOM

--

1 SET

9.06 COMPUTER FURNITURE (MODULAR) -- 1 LOT

9.07 UPS FOR CONTROLS & PLC -- 1 SET

9.08 COMPUTER WITH MIS OF PLANT

INFORMATION IN ENGG. OFFICE

--

1 SET

9.09 INSTRUMENT EARTHING ( CU PLATE)

FOR PLC LOT PANEL ETC

--

1

9.10 SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNIT

FOR CONTROL ROOM

--

1 SET.

SERVICE EQUIPMENTS

10 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (LT)

10.01 MAIN LT PANEL COMPLETE HT

SUBSTATION WITH VCBs, TRANSFORMER

OF 750KVA (33KV TO 415V) ETC.

10.02 MCC FOR MAIN PLANT -- 1

10.03 REMOTE PANELS FOR FEED MILL EQPTS

--

1 LOT

10.04 AUTOMATIC POWER FACTOR

CORRECTION PANEL --

1

10.05 MCC FOR RAW MATERIAL INTAKE,

BOILER , PUMP HOUSE & MOLASSES

UNLOADING TANK

--

1each

10.06 POWER CABLES -- 1 LOT

10.07 CONTROL & SIGNAL CABLES -- 1 LOT

10.8 ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES (CABLE TRAYS, GI CONDUITS, CABLE GLANDS, CABLE LUGS, ISOLATORS, PUSH

BUTTONS, RUBBER MATS,FUSE

PULLER, RUBBER GLOVES ETC)

--

1 LOT

10.9 IN MAIN PLANT BUILDING – LIGHTING

PANEL, LIGHTING DBS, CONDUITS ,SET

WIRING, EMERGENCY LIGHTS FOR

CONTROL ROOM (Excluding RMG & FPG)

--

1

10.10

Note:- The

above list

of

equipment

is as per

preliminary

EARTH PITS AND NETWORK FOR PANELS, DB ETC

--

1 LOT

10.11 LIGHTENING ARRESTOR WITH CU EARTH CONDUCTOR, GI EARTH PITS, AVIATION LIGHTS

-- 1 SET



Page 100 of 430

Note:- The above list of equipment is as per preliminary design of the plant. The final list of

equipment & their individual capacity may vary as per detailed engineering of the bidder to

achieve the MINIMUM rated capacity of 100 TPD and further provision for expansion of

capacity up to 200 TPD. It is required to keep a provision for adding of all the equipments that

will be needed in future for achieving a capacity of 200 TPD on 20 hrs per day of working. All

suitable structure, cables and relevant works for the same are required to be done in first phase

along with ordered execution. It is also required that the design be made on a basis that capacity

can be increased to 200 TPD in future without any shut down needed in running plant of first

100 TPD. However capacities mentioned above for individual equipment can not be increased to

achieve overall plant capacity.

11 STEAM DISTRIBUTION & CONDENSATE RECOVERY

11.01

COMPLETE OIL FIRED STEAM GENERATION UNIT WITH FO TANK, CHIMNEY, WATER SOFTNER ETC. WITH CAPACITY OF MINIMUM 100O Kg/hr AT OPERATING PRESSURE OF 10.5 Kg/cm². LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPES WITH

INSULATION LOT & CLADDING, VALVES,

FITTINGS, FLOW CONTROLLERS

--

1

11.02 CONDENSATE RECOVERY SYSTEM -- 1 SET

11.03 CONDENSATE PIPES, VALVES, AND FITTINGS --

--

1 LOT

12 COMPRESSED AIR GENERATION & HANDLING EQUIPMENT

12.01 AIR COMPRESSOR (SCREW) PNEU.

FLAPS, GATES, ASPIRATION UNITS

60 CUM/HR

2

12.02 REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER 60 CUM/HR 1

12.03 AIR RECEIVER WITH AUTO DRAIN 1000 LITRE 1

12.04 COMPRESSED AIR PIPES, VALVES ,FITTINGS --

1 LOT

12.05 Mineral Mixture Plant 1 LOT

13.01 Complete installation and supply of 16m x 3m Weigh Bridge with capacity of 80 MT x 1. Erection, testing & commissioning of equipment as per the above list.

1 LOT

1

13.02 Complete DG of 500 KVA with enclosure, panels, cables etc x 1. Erection & commissioning of steel structure sheeting and internal lighting etc.

1 LOT

1

Total of Part – I.

14 ERECTION & COMMISSIONING

Total of Part – II.

Total of Part – I & II. (In figures)

Total of Part – I & II. (In words)



Page 101 of 430

Important Note for Bidder

a. The unit rates to be quoted by bidder shall include Packing & forwarding, insurance,

freight, taxes, Duties etc on FOR site basis.

b. As stated above, this requirement is for design, supply, labour job for installation, testing

and commissioning of Cattle Feed Plant equipments & service equipments, as per schedule

of quantities.

c. All minor works, which may be necessary to achieve the rated capacity of the plant, is

included in the scope of work, though not specifically mentioned.

d. Bidder shall include the cost of all the wear parts indicated at page no. 68.

e. Bidder will have to indicate and quote separately equipment wise spare parts for one-year

operation.

f. All equipments indicated above shall include suitable rated drives.

g. The quantities indicated for intake conveyors are approximate as per attached drawings &

for tender purpose only. However supply & payment shall be made as per site requirement.

Mode of Measurement for Payment

Payment for items shall be aid as below interpretation:

S.

No Description of

Unit of Payment Paid as

1 No./Number Number

2 Set Complete Set as per work scope

3 Lot Lot as per specific clause mentioned in terms of payment

4

Structural steel

Shall be paid on actual weight in MT received for supplies. Final payment of

steel shall be based on theoretical sp. weights of total steel erected in MT

after reconciliation. Loss/ wastages shall be to the account of the bidder.

5

Cladding sheets,

windows

Shall be paid on actual quantity in sq.m received for supplies. Final payment

shall be based on actual measurement of total area of sheets/windows erected

in sq.m after reconciliation. Loss/ wastages shall be to the account of the

bidder.

General Requirements

Feed milling equipment The following may be noted in general with respect to the technical specifications of the supply of Feed milling equipment.

1. Capacities of all machines and hoppers etc. as specified in the tentative list of equipment

to be supplied are based on raw material of 600 gs cum bulk density

unless otherwise specified.

2. All machines are to be provided with motor/geared motor/motor-gear box and drive parts. The term drive parts cover the supply of items as follows:

3. Chain drive: Driving and driven sprockets, required length of simplex/duplex chain with

closing links and key in the driven shaft. All the sprockets should be of MS and flame

hardened.

4. V belt drive: Driving and driven pulleys, required no., type and length of V belts of

polyester reinforced type, key in driven shaft and side rails for motor.

5. Direct coupled drives: Suitable chain type coupling with accessories and key in driven

shaft unless specified otherwise.

6. As per details specified in individual equipments specification / design data.



Page 102 of 430

7. Apart from the above, the supply of steel base frame for motor/geared motor and guard

for drive parts of minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet is also included in drive parts.

8. Packing for flanged joints of machines/hoppers/bins etc. should be felt or rubber

depending on the application. Packing shall be fixed with glue rather than simple grease. If

equipment is being dispatched in dismantled condition, necessary packing materials along

with glue shall be sent separately.

9. Discharging angle of raw material in pipes/transition pieces/hopper bottoms etc., in

general should be min. 55 degree from horizontal for meals and 45 degree for pellet and

grains.

10. All equipment should have suitable provision for inspection, lubrication and maintenance.

11. All equipment in general should have dust-proofing arrangement.

12. All equipment should be supplied with first charge of lubricant (grease/gear oil) etc. either

filled in equipment or supplied loose and to be filled before testing and commissioning.

13. All weld joints for fabricated equipment/hoppers/bins/piping etc. should be ground smooth

from inside to facilitate easy and free flow of material.

14. In detail specification of equipment/hoppers and accessories etc., the

thicknesses of construction material have been specified wherever required. It has to be

noticed that these are the minimum but the supplier may provide these thicknesses more

than these if required by their design/detailing of the equipment.

15. Painting: All bought out standard manufactured equipment may be supplied

as per manufacturer's standard painting practice. However, all fabricated

equipments shall be provided with standard cleaning, degreasing practice before

painting, then primer coating before applying one coat of approved shade of synthetic

enamel paint. Second coat of synthetic enamel paint shall be provided at site after

installation and before commissioning. Supporting steel structure, transition pieces &

piping etc. being fabricated at site should be applied with corrosion resistant zinc

oxide primer before erecting/installing and then applying one coat of synthetic

enamel paint after erection. Approved colour shades for equipments are as follow unless

otherwise specified in equipment specifications or agreed during execution of contract.

However, final decision on colour shade shall be confirmed with the engineer -in-charge

before commencement of painting.

Colour Shades for Equipments

Equipment Approved Colour Shades

Conveyors and elevators

Machines Hoppers Proportionate bins/storage bins Steel structure Manual/ pneumatic flaps Product piping

Aspiration piping

Inspection door of machines/hoppers/bins

Inside of machine/hopper/bins

All supports, stands and frame of machine

All equipments bins in the scope shall be lettered in English (in capital) with black (Description Capacity 6”size) at observable height.



Page 103 of 430

Conveying and Handling System

Chain Conveyors

Chain conveyors are required to transfer all types of solid feed ingredients for the Feed plant

horizontally or at an inclination not exceeding 10 degree. These shall be of dust proof and bolted

design, having steel plate thickness as follow:

Item Description casing bottom minimum 4 mm casing side minimum 4 mm casing partition minimum 3 mm casing top cover minimum 2 mm end plates minimum 8 mm

Note: CHAIN'S LINEAR SPEED NOT TO EXCEED 0.5 M/SEC.

Conveying chain shall be Drag Bush Chain type of sufficient breaking load with special

forged steel & case hardened parts along with special nylon wear pads. Screw type chain

tensioning device, conveying chain wheel of hardened special steel, shaft supported on both

sides in pillow block self aligned ball bearings, exchangeable wear rail of TISCRAL (Wear

resistant Abrasion Resistance Steel Plates) or equivalent material to be provided at trough top &

bottom for chain guide. Cleaning strips of UHMW to be provided after a few links. Spring

loaded safety device at tail end with limit switch for protection of chain against

overloading, necessary inlets & outlets to be provided. Conveyor to be run by horizontal foot

mounted geared motor with chain/direct coupled drive parts etc. as per requirement. Wipers for

the conveyors shall be provided for Distribution conveyors.

Screw Paddle Conveyors

Screw Conveyors are required to convey/distribute all types of solid feed ingredients

horizontally or at inclination (maximum 10 Deg.) for lengths not exceeding 15 M. Maximum

length of screw trough shall not exceed 2.8 M.

These shall be of constant / variable pitch, as per requirement and dust-proof design, having

steel construction, flanged bearing with stuffing boxes, intermediate hanger bearings

with maintenance ¬free, self lubricated special nylon bushes, screw or paddle flights of steel

of uniform / variable pitch welded on screw shaft, necessary inlet & outlet. Overflow flap at

discharge end with limit switch to be provided. Conveyor to be run by foot mounted horizontal

geared motor and chain type direct coupling. Construction detail of various major items shall be

as follows.

Item Construction Details

Trough minimum 3 mm thick MS sheet

Flight minimum 3 mm thick MS sheet

Saddles minimum 5 mm thick MS late

Main shaft Heavy Duty C class MS ERW pipe

End plates minimum 8 mm thick MS late

Top cover minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet



Page 104 of 430

Bucket Elevators

Bucket Elevators are required to convey all solid feed ingredients vertically

at the rated capacity. These shall be of dust-proof design, having steel construction, two leg

bolted trough type, food and oil resistant antistatic belting of PVC - lined fabric, (M-24 grade

3 ply nylon fabric), pressed steel buckets, Elevators boot with two inlets, screw type belt

tightening device and cage type pulley. Elevator head with rubber lagged crown pulley and

wear resistant guide plate. Elevator to be provided with necessary clean out slides, inspection

windows, steel back stop, special bolts for fixing buckets on belt, casing retention frame and

leg spacers. Elevator shall be driven by a foot mounted horizontal geared motor, and chain type

direct coupling drive parts. Elevators shall have provision of mounting Aspiration units.

All Elevators shall be provided with air breather arrangement at suitable locations, to

enable effective air movement

& quick replacement, wherever aspiration units are not specified. Belt speed

sensors for stopping the elevator motor not required.

Construction details of materials shall be as follows:

Item Construction Details

Trough Minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet Buckets Minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet Top Head Minimum 4 mm thick MS plate Cover of Top Head Minimum 2 mm thick MS sheet Bottom Head Minimum 4 mm thick MS plate Foundation Plate Minimum 12 mm thick MS plate

Slat Conveyor

These conveyors are used for transfer of filled bags from production area to finished

product Godown on an inclination up to 10 degree. Conveyor is designed for moving of filled

bags on number of steel slats linked with each other with fabricated steel chain and malleable

cast steel wheels. Conveyor is having steel plate body with stiffeners and steel guide plates

for wheels and pipe railing for bags. 2 Nos. hardened (EN-8) sprockets wheels

with suitable sealed bearings are to be provided at feed end and discharged end to facilitate

movement of chain. MS heavy duty ERW pipes are provided for support of conveyor.

Conveyor is run by horizontal foot mounted electric geared motor with chain-type direct

coupling drive parts. The conveyor shall also have a tilting device, so that the bags can be

directly received by loaders on their backs.

Cascade Type Magnetic Separator

Cascade Magnets are used to effectively remove the ferrous impurities from raw materials

feed flow. The unit is fabricated from stainless steel plates in Diamond shaped chute. On each

section of Diamond shaped chute, a permanent ferrite magnet (with high remanence after

magnetization) is housed in stainless steel 304 enclosure with heavy duty hinges and magnet to

be swing away from the body of chute by pneumatic air cylinder after a pre-determined time

through signal from a PLC. Cleaning cycle of magnet shall be fully automatic. Ferrous

impurities shall be collected in a separate steel hopper and regular material to be guided to a

different chute.



Page 105 of 430

Jute Twine Remover

Jute Twine removers are required as a pre-cleaning machine to remove jute strings, in the

intake section before ingredients are stored in bins. The machine shall consist of MS enclosed

housing with double rotor arrangement with extended spike like attachments to entwine jute

fibre and also break loose lumps. The end plates of the rotor shall be machined 8 mm thick

MS plates with suitable end bearings fitted on the shaft. Both rotors shall be of removable type

with quick opening access door with locking arrangement. The drive shall be of horizontal

foot mounted geared motor mounted on a common base frame with the remover. Main body - 3

mm thick MS sheet

Dumping Hoppers

Hoppers are required in Godown for dumping of ingredients from bags to conveyor

running below.These shall be fabricated from steel plates for sufficient holding capacity, with

removable Galvanized M.S. grill on top. MS angle frame for installation of these hoppers in

RCC opening shall also be supplied with the dumping hoppers. These grills shall be magnetic

and shall attract ferrous materials during dumping operation. Construction detail of dumping

hoppers shall be as follows:

Main body minimum 3 mm thick MS

sheet Grill 15 mm MS square bar

Frame 65 x 65 x 6 mm MS angle

Hoppers and Storage Bins

Bins are required for temporarily storing solid feed ingredients materials as per the

Design data. These shall be fabricated from mild steel plates /profile ribbed steel sheets with

welded/bolted joints wherever required for required holding capacity with stiffening

arrangements. However, main body shall be fabricated from minimum 3 mm thick MS sheets.

Proportionate Bins shall be rectangular /square cross-section, modular type with

bolted segments complete with stiffeners, with air equalizing connections within the bins.

All bins shall have discharge hoppers with inspection window to view ingredient flow. All

bins supplied shall have proximity level sensors (non-contact type) to ensure continuous

operation with feedback indication. All Bins shall have manual discharge gates & suitable

sized Air breathers. SS Lined bins in the Main plant shall be fabricated from 1 mm thick SS

304 sheet. The discharge angle for the Hoppers & Bins shall be 55 Deg (minimum). Air

equalizing duct shall be supplied as a part of scope, between successive bin/hopper and

hopper separated by a pneumatic gate, apart from suitably sized Air breathers, to facilitate air

exchange within & outside the system.

Portable Bag Stack Conveyors

These portable conveyors are used in godown for stacking of filled raw material and finished

bags mechanically or dispatch to trucks rather than manually.

The stacker to be mounted on chassis fabricated from ISMC/C Class heavy duty MS ERW pipe

with castor wheels and pneumatic ADV tyres for easy movement. Delivery height of stacker

shall be adjustable by suitable winch assembly. Stacker shall be fabricated from suitable

MS angle and flats. Bags shall be transferred on MS slats fitted with bushed

chain with K1



Page 106 of 430

attachment and malleable cast steel wheels. Bags shall move on slats with suitable electric

motor, gear box, tyre type flexible coupling between motor and gear box and chain type drive

parts and bearings. Stacker shall be provided with a DOL starter (near the drive) and

copper wiring between this starter and electric motor. Bag stacker shall be complete in all

respect, ready to use. Feeders (MPCB) for the starter shall be located in the relevant MCC.

Pellet Cooler Cyclone

Cyclone for separation of fines from cooling ambient air shall be designed & selected

for most efficient operation suitable for the required Air flow rate for cooling of the pellets. The

Cyclone shall be fabricated from 3 mm thick SS 304 sheet with a fines discharge size of 200

mm & shall have provision for lifting, supporting etc. The cyclone shall have SS pads for 3

nos. pneumatic hammers, at suitable locations in the conical portion, for removal of fines

when necessary & provisions for installing these hammers.

Air Lock

Airlocks are required to air seal the cyclones, pellet Mill cooler & dust collectors etc.

Air lock shall have stainless steel (SS 304) fabricated body. Rotor shall be wane type,

fabricated from stainless steel (SS 304) plate & shall rotate within the housing with very

close tolerance with self-lubricating bearings. Nylon wire cleaning brush shall be provided for

each Airlock. Air locks shall be driven by suitably rated horizontal foot mounted geared motor

and coupling. If function desires, adjustable UHMW wear pads to be used in rotor.

Batch Mixer

Batch mixer is required to improve the homogeneity of a batch consisting of dry solids

e.g. flours, meals and fine powders to achieve a set Co-efficient of Variance.

Provision of vitamin/liquid dozing in the mixer shall be considered while designing the mixer.

The Mixer shall be horizontal, Double Helical design, Ribbon Mixer and shall be designed to

achieve mixing by turning of rotor in the mixing chamber. The Mixer is to be designed to

operate efficiently even for 50% of full capacity filling. The Mixer is to be dust-tight,

single shaft with cylindrical mixing trough, of sturdy steel construction, rotor

supported by two outboard pillow blocks, heavy duty ball bearings and fitted

with sturdy paddles. Quick emptying of the mixer to be ensured through a full length

bottom opening pneumatically operated gate. There should not be any product leakage

through this gate when mixer is being charged. The Mixer is to be complete with Manhole,

safeties, shaft seals, limit switches for gate position, duplex chain drive between gear box and

motor shaft, drive guard, air balancing ducts with above & below hoppers, horizontal foot

mounted geared motor, Air breathers, pneumatic cylinders and solenoid valves etc. Geared

motor shall be coupled through tyre type flexible direct coupling.

Main body: 6 mm thk.MS plate minimum.

Air cylinder: 150 mm diameter ; 150 mm stroke (min)

Control panel for the mixer shall have ammeter, ON-OFF indicative type push buttons for

operation & safeties for related position of pneumatic gates etc.



Page 107 of 430

Batch Mixer for pre mix duty shall be horizontal type with paddle design, based on the average

density of the premix for the rated capacity.

Molasses Mixer

Molasses mixers are required to prepare a homogeneous dispersion of

heated molasses throughout the incoming powdered mixed feed. The Mixer shall be

horizontal in construction with twin intermeshing rotor with paddles in low speed beating

action. All plates touching the feed shall be of AISI 304. Design shall ensure that there is

very little sticking of molasses on inside surface of stator and it can run continuously without

cleaning. For this purpose, the mixer is to be provided with Teflon or equivalent coating on

inside surface of the stator. The design shall ensure that no molasses is dozed, when the

feeder /feeding is stopped. The Mixer shall be complete with 4 nos. of swing type cleaning

doors, all safeties, driving geared motor, direct tyre type coupling arrangement with separate

MS base frame and anti-vibration pads. Rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced

with adjustable SS 304 paddles.

Body thickness: 4 mm thick SS 304 plate (minimum)

Side plate: 8 mm MS plate with 4 mm thick AISI 304 lining.

Pellet Mill

Pellet mills are required for the pelleting of conditioned Molassed feed, by forcing the

feed between rotating die and press rolls.

Pellet Mill shall be vertical type with pulley & "V" belt drive arrangement. Pellet mill to

have the following specific features:

Solidly constructed and welded steel frame for mill.

Die chamber casing in corrosion resistant stainless steel. (AISI 304)

Quick release knife assemblies for regulating the pellets length.

Servicing hoist mounted on the pellet mill to facilitate changing of dies and press rolls.

A shear pin and limit switch device, mounted on the main support shaft, to protect the

mechanical press components, drive belts and main drive motor from overloading.

Die fixing arrangement mounted on the die holder body for quick die changing.

Digital type thermometer with sensor for measuring the temperature of mash feed entering

the mill.

Powerful permanent magnet in pellet mill inlet to eliminate ferrous foreign particles.

Main drive motor (IP 55) of RPM not exceeding 1500 with additional pillow block bearing

and extra shaft for motor.

V belts & pulleys

Anti-vibration mountings.

Die of 8 mm dia. holes.

Distributor for uniform delivery of mash to rolls.

Hand tools for maintenance, adjustable torque wrench and hydraulic press for removing

shells from press rolls.

Feeder and Conditioner

Feeder & conditioners are to be two separate units installed on either side of Molasses

Mixer.



Page 108 of 430

Feeder shall be continuous loss-in-weight type with hopper, load cell etc. The feedback

from load cell of this feeder, shall determine control the dozing of Molasses in the Molasses

Mixer, through the PLC logic and PID controller in Molasses.

Feeder to be driven by an infinitely variable speed motor, variable frequency drive type.

Double conditioner required to condition the mash feed with steam. All

parts of the adjustable twin paddle conditioners coming in contact with the feed are to

be of stainless steel (AISI 304) and the unit should be suitable for direct mounting

over pellet mill. Conditioner to have arrangement for electric heat shield for

body for sanitary feed production.

Conditioners to have arrangement of injecting and mixing steam and molasses

liquids (minimum 3% of each) by the help of adjustable pitch paddles .Design shall be such

that the cooking time of the feed, shall be at least 30 seconds.

Conditioner’s drive motor and drive parts for both conditioners shall be supplied.

Control panel for complete automatic operation and safeties of the pelleting

plant for controlled feed flow, steam injection, molasses, interlocking with

various units, with ammeter, ON-OFF indicator type push buttons for manual operations

etc.

Hammer Mill

Hammer mill shall grind coarse ingredients, such as cereals, oil meals etc, to obtain a

more uniform & desired particle size of the batched ingredients. The design of the Hammer Mill

shall be horizontal & full circle type with bottom discharge. Machine shall grind batched

ingredients, on a single pass and to reduce particle size of desired mesh size, according to the

sieve fitted. The sieve is fitted all around the rotor to give maximum sieving area. The open

screen area shall not be lesser than 1.15 sq.m. The Hammer Mill shall have air assisted system

for efficient removal of ground particles across the sieve. Hammer mill shall be directly coupled

to the drive IP 55 Motor of 2880 rpm. Grinding in hammer mill shall be obtained by mechanical

impact of a set of free swinging rotating “M” type hammers (mounted on rods) on individual

ingredient particle, till it is small enough to pass through the 4.0 mm screen, along with

aspiration air. The screen of the Hammer Mill shall be placed around the grinding chamber

to maximize the screening area. Control panel for complete automatic operation and

safeties of the Hammer Mill to control feeding operation with manual intervention, ammeter,

ON-OFF indicator type push buttons etc.

The machine to have the following general & special features :

Large Hinged Doors for Quick opening & changing /interchanging of Grinding screen &

Reversibility & replacability of hammers.

Directional reversal for grinding shall be possible for increased life of the Hammers.

Long life & dustproof bearings for the Hammer Mill. All protection/safety devices for the

Mill.

Statically & dynamically balanced for Low noise & vibration. The composite

unit of Hammer Mill & Motor shall be mounted on a common base frame

with heavy duty Vibration dampers.

Control panel for automatic controlled operation of hammer mill, its feeder and to ensure

operation safeties.

Design of the screen perforations shall be to maximize the open screen area.



Page 109 of 430

Feeder for Hammer Mill

The Feeder for the Hammer mill shall control the Feeding rate of batched ingredients flowing

across to the Grinding equipment. The design of the feeder shall be rotary, vane type controlled

through a variable speed drive for continuous & controlled feeding of batch material to hammer

mill. The variable speed drive shall be slaved by a Controller in PLC, so that feed to Hammer

mill could be automatically regulated depending upon electric load of hammer mill motor for

most efficient operation for the desired throughput of the mill. The Feeder shall have strong

permanent Ferrite magnet at its inlet to protect the Hammer Mill from iron parts/particles by

separating them, before the batched feed enters the grinding chamber.

Pellet Cooler (Vertical)

Pellet Cooler is required to cool hot and moist pellets by drawing ambient air, immediately after

discharge from Pellet Mills. Pellet cooler shall be vertical box type, bolted construction of

counter current design, using ambient air for cooling. The discharge arrangement shall be of

oscillating top grill with eccentric mechanism.

Product inlet, holding and exhaust place shall be of non-rusting material (SS 304) whereas

collection hopper from mild steel sheets. All interior parts not made of non rusting material

shall have anticorrosion painting. Cooler should be complete with geared

motor, pellet discharger, hinged type inspector door with sight glass, air inlet and discharge

connections, uniform and regular distribution of the air across the complete cross section of

cooler should be ensured to permit optimum utilisation of the air. The pellet discharge from

the cooler shall be automatic based on level sensor. Coolers to have arrangement

for manual and automatic adjustment of discharge rate for pellets, after getting cooled.

Major construction materials shall be as follows:

Top conical pellet inlet and air outlet minimum 2 mm thick SS 304 Box type cooling column minimum 2 mm thick SS 304 Collection hopper below tray minimum 5 mm thick steel plates Stator and rotor of air lock minimum 5 mm thick SS 304 Grill type trays Mild steel plate / flat, hot -dip galvanised

Aspiration Filter Unit

This unit shall be modular in construction & is used for cleaning of dust laden air or the

separation of solids from gas/ solids mixes from connected equipment, in order to recover

materials and clean the exhaust air. Dust laden air enters in aspiration filter and then air escapes

through filter bags and dust is deposited on the outside of filter bags. For removing the dust

retained on the outside of filter bags, high pressure reverse air shocks are provided at regular

intervals to the inside of the filter bags through an automatic electronic/pneumatic control

system for sequential air release for a set of filter bag rows. Dust shall be collected in a bottom

cone and discharged through an airlock.

Aspiration filter to consist of sheet steel bag housing fabricated from minimum 3 mm

thick mild steel sheet with inlet spout and dust collecting cone. Filter to be provided with sheet

steel hinged covers with integral filter-row purge system in IP-65 protection class. Filter bags

to be provided with suitable GI cage and fastening system. It should be ensured that bags and

cages can be easily removed for cleaning in position by special annular brush. The unit to be

complete with electronic/ pneumatic control apparatus having provision for adjustable bag

cleaning cycle



Page 110 of 430

and the length of the cleaning pulses, pressure reducing station for air supply to control

system, steel supporting legs, etc. as per requirement.

Pellet Sieve

Pellet sieve is used to separate pellets from pellet crumbles & fines

through a vibratory mechanism of the sieve and directs pellets & crumbles for further

operations. The sieve shall be mounted on a sturdy MS frame work and shall be of totally

enclosed construction. The sieve shall be of SS 304 MOC. The design considerations of size &

pattern of the perforations on the sieve shall be as per the throughput mentioned in

Design data. Vibrations produced by unbalanced motors attached to the inclined sieve

housing mounted on helical springs shall be designed for quick & efficient separation.

Adjustable moving flap Counter weights shall be used for retaining pellets. The sieve shall

have arrangement for quick opening & replacement of sieves. The Pellet sieve shall be

complete with anti-vibration & canvas cloth joints at inlet & outlet.

Pellet Cooler Fan

Pellet Cooler Fans are required for creating low pressure in Pellet cooler to facilitate

flow of ambient air across pellets and reduce the moisture in pellets before bagging. The

sheet steel construction housing and the SS 304 impeller of the centrifugal fans shall be

mounted on a sturdy steel base. Motor & the Fan shall be mounted on a common structural

steel base frame with heavy-duty vibration dampeners. The impeller to be fitted

with special blades and designed for high-speed service, statically and dynamically

balanced for minimum vibrations. Casing shall be provided with anti-noise coating for silent

operation. Preference shall be given for direct coupled motor drive. Fan shall be selected to

have highest efficiency for the required pressure differential and air throughput. Main body of

centrifugal fans should be made from minimum 3 mm thick mild steel sheet. The selection of

the capacity of the Fan shall be such that, it shall cater to rated capacity of the Pellet Mill.

Stitching Machine (part of automatic bagging system)

These machines are required in feed plant for stitching of gunny/polyester bags after

filling of the finished feed. These shall be mounted on a steel column, completely automatic,

suitable for two-thread double chain stitch and adjustable stitch length. Column shall have

arrangement for fixing sewing head at any height and also for fixing other accessories such as

bag feed-in and labelling device. Machine shall be complete with feed-in device, labelling

device and switch box containing all necessary switching and protecting elements

including conveyor. One sewing head has to be fixed on the vertical steel column and one

loose sewing head to be supplied.

Molasses Handling

Molasses Pre-Heater

Molasses Pre-Heater of suitable capacity is required



Page 111 of 430

Molasses Pumps

These are used for transferring molasses from tanker to vertical storage tanks and for

onward use to mix Molasses with feed in Molasses mixers & conditioners. These CI

construction pumps shall be horizontal, foot mounted, positive displacement (shuttle block

only) with gear box arrangement, capable of handling molasses having viscosity of 2000

seconds red wood 1 at

20 Deg. C. and specific gravity 1.4. Pumps to be complete with common steel frame for pump

& motor, gland packing, coupling and guard, foundation bolt, coupled with gearbox and drive

with TEFC motor IP 55.

For Unloading Molasses: 15 KLPH @ 30 mWc

For Feeding Molasses to plant: 3 KLPH @ 30 mWc

External electrical Heating tape arrangement with temperature controller are required for the

unloading pumps only. GI shroud (18 G) for the unloading and feed pumps are included in the

scope.

Molasses Flow Meter

This is used to measure the total molasses being added in molasses mixers and

conditioner. The flow meter shall be of electro-magnetic induction type, suitable for

measuring the flow of pre-heated molasses having viscosity of 2000 seconds Red wood 1 at

20 Deg. C and specific gravity of 1.4. The Flowmeter shall display the flow rate in digits &

the cumulative quantity, and should be resettable. Necessary air eliminator and other

accessories are to be provided with flowmeter. Electro-magnetic induction type

flowmeter shall be provided with material measuring tube of SS 316 and the liner of

PTFE whereas electrode shall be of HASTELLOY–C or as per standard design of the

manufacturer.

Molasses :

The Purchaser shall provide the underground RCC reservoir, pump house and Molasses storage

steel tanks for storing the liquid molasses received by road tankers and unloaded by gravity to

the reservoir. The bidder‟s scope of works starts from transferring molasses s from the RCC

reservoir to MS molasses storage tanks through pump and then from outlet of molasses storage

tank to stream heated molasses day tanks and from day tanks up to mixers through molasses

feeding pumps with inlet and outlet headers, flow meters, control valves, isolation valves,

filters, non return valves etc. All piping beyond this reservoir for storing, feeding & return

piping for conveying back surplus molasses from mixers to the steel day tank/between the day

tanks is in the bidder‟s scope. Piping for inter transfer of molasses from one molasses storage

tank to other storage tank shall be in bidder‟s scope of works.

Molasses day tank :

This is required for heating and intermediate storage of molasses before feeding to

molasses mixers through loss in weight type feeder or similar arrangement. Molasses day tank

is to be welded type, horizontal and cylindrical shape, plate steel construction and heavy duty

mild steel pipes. For heating of molasses by circulation of steam. Complete tank to be

provided with

50mm glass wool insulation and mild steel sheet 2mm (minimum) thick cladding. Tank to be

complete with inlet, outlet, manholes, steam inlet-outlet, pressure release valve etc. Inside of the



Page 112 of 430

tank to be cleaned by sand blasting and then epoxy painting. All outside surfaces are to be

provided with two coats of head resistance primer prior to insulation. Tank to be preferably

fabricated at site and to be tested with water prior to applying primer.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS : Capacity of tank – 800 MT x 2 Nos. (Molasses specific gravity of 1.4 MT Per Cu.Mtr. Upto

Overflow of tank.

Material of construction – Mild steel structural steel as per IS 2062 Grade A; IS 808 for Rolled

Steel for beams, Channels, Angles, IS 1730 for plates, trips, flats; IS `1239 for MS Pipes.

Tank to be fabricated at project site on foundation.

Molasses storage tank to be welded type, vertical and cylindrical shape, milk steel

structural member like cross bracings, central kind post, circumferential stiffener rings etc.

Each tank to be provided with standard accessories such as staircase, rung ladder (welded

inside the shell), safety railing on top, manholes (at bottom and top), inlet, outlet, air vents

float type level indicators, drain etc. three adjoining tanks to be connected with working

platform on top. Tanks to be fabricated at site on civil foundation (1M above ground),. Civil

foundation shall be provided by the purchaser. After fabrication ,the tanks are to be tested

with water for leakages and then all internal surfaces are to be cleaned by sand blasting and

then provided with epoxy painint. All outside su4rfaces are to be sand blasted and provided

with enamel primer and paint. After testing, all the three tanks to be calibrated.

SCOPE OF SUPPLY Bottom plate : MINIMUM 12MM Thick with lap Joint welding with 75mm Overlap.

VERTICAL SHELL : Bottom 3.00m Min. 12mm thick Intermediate 1.50m Min. 10mm thick

Next 1.50m Min. 8mm thick

Top 3.75m Min. 6mm thick

Double “V” groove welding on both sides.

Roof : Conical type with 5mm thick plates having slope of 5 degree from horizontal.

Tank Accessories :-

Inlet 100mm NB MS “C” class pipe (2 Nos.) with F table flange on roof of the tank. One inlet

to be closed with blind flange and for other, counter flange to be provided.

Manhole in shell near bottom (1 No.) of 600mm dia, made from 12mm thick MS plate and

cover plate from 16mm thick complete with bolts, nuts and packing etc.

Manhole on roof (`1 No.) of 600 mm dia. Made from 8 mm thick plates, complete with flanged

bolted rain hat and wire mesh.

Float type level indicator complete with SS304 float, 14 gauge SS guide wires, pulleys, ss wire

ropes (14 gg) scale with marking in litres after proper calibration.



Page 113 of 430

Air vent at roof (min. 8 Nos.) from minimum 450mm dia and 450mm height with 50x6mm MS

flat, SS wire mesh, rain hat.

Drain near bottom plate (2 Nos.) from 150mm NB MS “C” class pipe complete with flanged

type butterfly valve, blind flange F table, bolts nuts and packing.

Outlet near bottom (2 Nos) from 150mm NB MS “C” class pipe with flanged type butterfly

valve counter flange, H table for one outlet and blind flange of table “H” for 2nd

outlet bolts,

nuts and packing. The provision for 2nd

outlet is meant for electronic level indicator electronic

level indicator is included in the scope of supply.

IMPORTANT NOTES :-

The load details on the foundations shall have to be provided to be purchasers to design the

foundation.

The steel structure for the bulk molasses storage tanks shall be as per the design of the bidder.

The tanks shall be designed for wind load (Heights as per historical records) and for

seismic stability as per seismic zone stability certificate for the tank and structure shall be

submitted by the successful bidder. Design calculations for the structure shall be shared with the

purchaser without any extra cost. Purchaser shall suggest the bidder, for

alteration ,wherever found required.

Silo System

In this silo system, flat bottom silos 4 Nos. Of minimum 500 MT (Only provision is

needed so that the same could be added in future) capacity each of GI corrugated (Imported)

sheet (Min.zinc deposition 450 gm/sq.mtr) bolted type flat bottom with hydraulically operated

serew (imported) for discharging left out materials from bottom of silo, complete with aeration

system and temperature monitoring system for storage of DORB RCC foundation for silo

above ground by purchaser. Each silo to be provided with automatic sampler. Discharge

from each silo to common chain conveyor through pneumatic slide. Additional

emergency gate in the bottom of silos.

All other details of this system for storing DORB shall be similar to that for

grains as mentioned point given below.

This silo system shall be installed in separate location as shown in Production Block Layout

drawing.

FLAT BOTTOM SILOS : 2 Nos. Of minimum 500 MT capacity each of GI corrugated

imported sheet (Min. Zinc deposition 450 gm/sq.mt.) bolted type flat bottom with electrically

operated sweep auger (Imported) for discharging left out materials from bottom

of silo, complete with aeration system and temperature monitoring system for storage of

grains. RCC foundation for silo above ground by purchaser. Each silo to be

provided with automatic sampler. Discharge from each silo to common chain conveyor

through pneumatic slide gate.

Input feeding capacity to silos and discharge capacity from silo to feed mill to be 30 TPH.

Distribution for material for feeding to silos and discharge from silos through chain conveyors



Page 114 of 430

& pneumatic slide gates/flaps. Material discharge from silos to pre-weighing bins of plant

through intake elevator automatically through plant PLC.

Twin rotor jute twine remover and diamond shaped cascade magnet to be provided in intake

line prior to store material in silos. No weighing facility to be provided in silo storage system.

Permanent magnet required in inlet spout of bucket elevator. Provision to be there in system

for recirculation of material mechanically from one silo to other using feeding conveyor and

elevator with a separate discharge conveyor so as to facilitate simultaneous operation of transfer

of material from one silo to production block and recirculation of material from another SILO.

MCC cum mimic panel for the system with necessary earthing grid, pits.

Weigh Scales

Batch Weigher With Hopper

This weigher is required to accurately weigh solid ingredients being

discharged from proportionate bins in a hopper for making a batch. The operation of the

weighing system shall be automated & controlled through the Centralized PLC, to prepare a

predefined composition batch. This weigh shall have a set of load cells on which the batch

weigher hopper is mounted. The load cell for 1 MT weigh hopper for minor ingredients, shall

have load cell capacity of 1 MT. Weigher shall be designed for stationary execution.

Weighing capacity to be as per the design requirement of the plant, load cells capacity to be

approximately 3 times of weighing capacity and digital graduation shall be minimum 0.05%

of the weighing capacity. Load cells shall be completely hermitically sealed type in

dust-proof enclosure. The weigh hopper shall be supported on load cells and

retained in its position by transverse links/stoppers. The indication of weight shall be digitally

displayed on Mimic panel and simultaneously displayed on the monitor of the Control room.

The Central PLC shall arrange to log all the data of batches in shift /day. Air equalizing line

(with flexible connection) from weigh hopper to the hopper below the pneumatic gate shall be

included in the supply scope. Apart from air equalizing duct, air breathers of sufficient quantity

& size shall be supplied to equalize excess pressure.

The weigh hopper to be made of sheet steel minimum 3 mm thick with

necessary steel stiffeners, flexible connection, inspection windows etc. Weigh hopper to have

arrangement for putting standard weights on outside for calibration purpose.

Platform Scales

These are used in feed plants for weighing the bags containing ingredients or for

checking the weight of filled bags. These shall be electronic type with digital indicator for

weight and platform to keep the bags. Minimum capacity - 200 Kgs Platform

size 635 x 560 mm. (minimum)

Automatic Bag Placing, Filling, Weighing, Stitching Machine

These machines shall be used for Automatic bag placing, filling, weighing, and stitching of

finished feed in HDPE bags, as per the rated capacity indicated in the design Data.



Page 115 of 430

The machine shall automatically place bags, fill, weigh & stitch the bags and convey them

towards the Finished Product Godown. This machine shall be fully automatic in its operation

through pneumatic cylinders, sensors, stoppers etc. & shall have a Local & remote display in

monitor, near the central PLC. The Central PLC shall also log no. of bags, weight of bags for

formulations in each shift, day etc. The weighing system shall be load cell operated having

arrangement for dribble and fast filling to achieve high accuracy of filling. Machines shall be

complete in all respects including its own control panel & system for indicating the no. of bags

filled, quantity of material being filled in each bag etc. This shall be nett ware type along with

pneumatic bag closing device.

Miscellaneous

Aspiration Ducts

Ducts are used for interconnecting dust producing centers such as

hoppers/bins/machines etc. with aspiration filters, blowers etc. These also shall help in

pressure equalization between successive bins /hoppers across pn. gate.

MINIMUM SIZE OF ANY PIPE SHALL BE 220 MM (NOMINAL DIA.)

All pipes, pipe accessories such as bends, spout branches, segments, elbows, transition pieces,

Y joints, exhaust pipes and chimney, throttle valves, etc. to be manufactured from sheets.

Minimum thickness of mild steel sheet for pipes shall be 2.5 mm. However, aspiration piping

from pellet cooler to pellet cooler blower via cyclone shall be of SS 304 of minimum 1.25 mm

(18 gauge) thickness.

Sight Glass for Air Lock

FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS : To observe flow of material in product line.

DESIGN REQUIREMENTS : MOC frame -Aluminum; Sight glass - Acrylic

Scope of Supply

Acrylic cylinder of 200 mm height and 200 mm internal diameter and of 6 mm

thickness with chrome plated fixing clamps of 18 gauge plate at top and bottom with felt

packing 5 mm thick. Frame for glass fixing with top and bottom flanges of 10 mm thick

Aluminum, anodized and

15 mm dia. fixing rods with counter-sunk screws with bolts, nuts, washers and felt packing 5

mm thick at top and bottom.

Gravity Spouting

Spouts are used for connecting different machines, hoppers, etc. for

conveying various ingredients and finished feed. These can be in the form of circular pipe

or rectangular/square shape with flanges only, no cufflink is allowed.

MINIMUM SIZE OF ANY CIRCULAR PIPE SHALL BE 300 MM. (NOMINAL DIA.) OR

700 SQ CM FOR RECTANGULAR /SQUARE DUCTS.



Page 116 of 430

All spouting & accessories such as bends, spout branches, segments, elbows, transition

pieces, flaps etc. to be manufactured from minimum 3.15 mm thick mild steel

sheets. Pipes & accessories shall have non-porous & no projection on internal surfaces and

having excellent protection against rust.

Two / Three Way Flaps

Two/ Three way pneumatic flaps are required for diverting the flow of material in a

gravity flow line. Flaps shall be fabricated from sheet steel with inlet & outlet having flanges.

These shall be pneumatic type. Flaps to be complete with inspection windows, limit switches

solenoid valves, pneumatic cylinders (double acting) & operating handles etc. The main body of

flaps should be made from 2.5 mm (minimum) mild steel sheet and solenoid valves suitable for

230 V, 4 ports.

Pneumatic Gates

Pneumatic gates are required for discharging / accumulating solid ingredients in the

hopper/bin/mixer. These shall be pneumatically operated, & shall be complete with

limit switches to indicate the position of the gate to centrally located PLC in control room. For

pneumatic gates suitable size, air cylinder (double acting) & rating solenoid valve shall be

provided. The design of the gates shall be approved by the purchaser before supply. Wherever

required, pneumatic gate shall be provided with slots/stoppers and control mechanism to control

the flow rate of material rather than only open and close.

Automation Equipment &Accessories

Dynamic screen for monitoring and operation with IBM compatible personal computer

(minimum specification given in Appendix) with centralized data and status collection.

Automation system including latest version of PLC, SCADA system for real time control

system, UPS, Remote I/O panels, sensors, limit switches Ethernet cables, signal cables,

Operator’s panel (HMI) for programmed process operation for optimal power utilization

with WINDOWS compatible software.

One additional computer (minimum specification given in Appendix) for Plant in-charge

with IBM compatible personal computer

Laser Printer (HP/Canon) Modular type Furniture for computers/operator (Tables, chairs)

PC Specification

Particulars Minimum Specification

Motherboard Intel original

Processor Intel(R) Core(TM)2 Duo Processor E7500 (2.93GHz, 1066FSB, 3MB)

Operating System Genuine Windows Vista(R) Business 32 bit / equivalent Window 7 OEM

Edition (English) Preloaded Software As per requirement

Hardware Maintenance At least one year on-site support

Monitor 19" inch TFT Monitor

Memory 4 GB DDR2 800 MHz SDRAM Memory

Hard Drive 320 GB SATA 3.0 GB/s Hard Drive with Native Command Queuing

Optical Drive DVD Writer



Page 117 of 430

Video Card Intel GMA 3100 graphics Sound card/Audio Solution

Inbuilt sound card only, speakers not required

Wireless Solution Not required

IEEE 1394 Firewire Not required

Speaker Not required

Keyboard USB entry keyboard

Mouse USB mouse

Others Integrated 10/100/1000 Base Eathernet, Basic System installation, Power

cord, System Drive DVD Kit

Function:

Programmed operation through PLC logic, for Process monitoring, recording of data, report

generation from Raw material dumping in RMG, batching operation, Hammer mill, Pellet mill

operation, bagging upto dispatch to trucks after bagging shall be included.

Inputs from Raw Material silo storage and handling system panel.

Special Note : -

1. All Elevator shall be needed in GI and not painted MS as may be mentioned elsewhere in

the tender documents. We would prefer GI Elevator for a longer life even for all indoor

applications.

2. All the bins at all places like intake, proportionating bins, hammer mill bins, batch mixer

bins etc. are also needed in GI.

3. All chain Conveyors are also needed in GI and not Painted in MS as may be mentioned

elsewhere in this document



Page 118 of 430

Mineral Mixture

The proposed cattle feed plant would have provision of manufacturing various types of

mineral mixtures the can be added directly to the feed as well as sold separately. Ingredients used

for manufacturing mineral mixture are: magnesium oxide, zinc sulphate, ferrous sulphate,

manganese sulphate, copper sulphate, cobalt sulphate, potassium iodide, di-calcium phosphate,

sodium thio-sulphate etc.

Machinery for Mineral Mixture Unit

Dump feeder with elevator of 1 Ton per hour capacity for feeding the raw material to

inlet hopper of Ball Mill Grinder.

Ball Mill Grinding unit: Capacity 750 Kg/hour – 1no.

Ball Mill is an efficient tool for grinding many mineral material in to fine powder. We shall be

going for dry process. Bal Mill (Grinding Mill, Grinder) is made up of feeding part, discharge

parts, gyre parts, transmission parts etc.

It will comprise of Ball Mill Grinder with necessary provision of lifting the material from

Dump Hopper through elevator to the inlet hopper of Grinding Mill with suitable aspiration

system for air assisted & dust free operations complete with high efficiency electric motors of

suitable size.

Elevator of 1T/hour capacity for conveying grinded material in to Mixer complete with motor,

Drive & driven parts.

Mixer: 250 KG per batch

The design of the Mixer should be such so that it should ensure uniform mixing of various

mineral material for ensuring least coefficient of variance. Double ribbon type rotor with

pneumatically operated outlet flap, air cylinder & solenoid valve & air balancing duct. All the

internal contact parts should be of Stainless steel where as outer body should be of MS. The

Mixer should have necessary provision of Inlet, outlet, air aspiration facility. It should be

completed with suitable size energy efficient motor coupled with Gear Box.

Suitable elevator & conveying equipment for storing the mixed minerals in to storage Bin of

500 Kg capacity.

Hopper of 200 Kg capacity with Bagging Machine: For packing Mineral Mixture in various sizes

I.e. 35Kg, 25Kg, 10Kg.

Platform Electronic weighing Scale of 50Kg capacity with digital display -1no

Electronic weighing scale of 5Kg capacity with digital disply-1no.

Packing table with SS top for smaller packing. Heat Sealer

It is proposed to pack 1Kg, 500gram packing manually at the initial stage.



Page 119 of 430

Technical Specifications for Utilities/Services General Requirements

The service pipe headers for steam, Molasses shall be designed for 450 TPD

production capacity. The supply of pipes, valves, fittings and accessories for utilities and services

includes but not limited to that for Molasses, LP steam, condensate, Compressed air. The

following may specially be noted.

For pipe sizing the following flow rates is to be considered.

– LP Steam 25 m/sec ;

– Condensate 2 m/sec – Compressed Air 30m/sec

– Molasses 1 m/ sec All valves for above services are to be flanged type except those below 25 mm. The supply of above service pipes should be inclusive of same quality bends, tees, flanges

and with necessary gaskets, bolts, nuts etc

Flanges/Counter flanges shall be as per BS Tables:

– Table E for LP Steam

– Table D for Condensate – Table F for Molasses – Table E for Compressed Air

The bidder has to refer to the Special conditions of contract for erection of mechanical works for details on Mechanical /Service piping installation and Special conditions

of contract for erection of electrical works for the Electrical installation.

Painting of pipelines with anti corrosive primer and paint of approved shade including,

lettering, marking, flow directions etc., shall be as per the special conditions of contract for

erection of mechanical works

Expansion bend for LP steam line to be provided at every 30 mts straight line piping

complete with Air vent and condensate drain arrangements as per standard practice. Molasses

Molasses Distribution and Molasses Piping

Piping shall be electric arc welded type with MS Class „C‟ ERW pipes (shall conform to

IS 1239) complete with pipes, bends, flanges etc. Molasses supply lines from the outlet

of Molasses Storage tanks upto molasses mixer/ feeder conditioner of pellet mill shall be traced

along with LP steam piping duly insulated with resin bonded mineral wool of minimum 50 mm

thickness complete with 22 SWG Al sheet cladding.

Molasses Valves and Fittings Flanged type Duplex filters before pumps are required. The following type of valves and

fittings for the molasses lines between pump and at molasses utility points is required as per

requirement: Pressure relief valve, Glycerine filled Pressure gauges, Butterfly ball valves, etc shall

be supplied. For accurate dozing of Molasses in the Molasses mixer, pneumatically operated

flow control valve shall receive input form PID controller, based on the Feed rate measured in loss

in weight feeder. By-pass of the pneumatic control valve shall be provided. Pipes shall be rigidly

supported by shoe & guide

Compressed Air

Compressed Air Equipment and Distribution



Page 120 of 430

AIR COMPRESSOR CAPACITY: 60 CUM/HR

This is required for producing compressed air required for operation of pneumatic flaps gates

and aspiration filters of feed mill, etc.

This shall be air-cooled, screw two stage compressor, lubricated type, to generate compressed air

at suitable pressure and required free air delivery. Compressor shall be complete with intake

filters, un-loader, inter cooler between two stage and all standard accessories such as service

valve, safety valve, auto drain valve, pressure gauge, drive motor & drive parts etc.

Compressor shall be provided with a pressure switch for auto operation. The capacity of

receiver shall be sufficient to meet sudden large requirement of compressed air and to avoid

frequent ON/OFF of compressor. For removal of bulk of moisture from receivers, automatic

drain valve with solenoid etc. To be provided.

REFRIGERATED AIR DRYER CAPACITY: 60 CUM/HR

Functional Requirements

Air drier would be required to provide moisture free compressed air for use in various

equipment, controls & instruments.

Design Requirement

The Air Dryer shall be refrigerated type, air cooled type and capable of handling upto 60

CUM/HR (Cubic meter per hour) of air at a maximum pressure of 16 kg/sq cm.

Operating Conditions Desired Maximum Inlet Temperature 35

0C 55

0 C

Ambient Temperature 25 0

C 43 0

C Inlet Pressure 7 bar (gauge) 16 bar (gauge) Pressure Dew Point 3

0 C NIL

Scope of Supply

The Air drier should be provided with the following:

Air inlet connection

Air outlet connection

Refrigerant separator

Pressure dew point meter

Air-drying unit insulating block housing Air-to-Air heat exchanger, air to refrigerant heat

exchanger/evaporator, cyclone condensate separator, liquid separator, refrigerant

distributor, refrigeration injection restrictor, hot gas by-pass.

Condensate trap with automatic discharge

Manual drain valve for condensate & auto drain valve (timer based)

Air cooled condenser

Safety switch, High & Low pressure

Liquid refrigerant dryer

Liquid shut off valve

Liquid refrigerant receiver



Page 121 of 430

Liquid separator

Sight glass with moisture indicator

Refrigerant expansion valve

Refrigerant circuit access connection

Hose, automatic condensate discharge

Air Receiver

Capacity: 1000 litres

Function:

Air receiver shall store compressed air, help equalize pressure variation in pipes, & prevent

short cycle loading and unloading of compressor.

Design Requirement:

Receiver shall be vertical type with dished ends and shall meet the statutory requirement of

pressure vessels. Receiver shall be designed conforming to IS 7983 and the

material of construction shall conform to the relevant IS in Mild steel. The receiver shall be

complete with safety valve, service valves, pressure gauge, fusible plug, hand holes,

drain valve with automatic drain arrangement Timer based) to remove moisture. The air

receiver shall be designed for Design pressure of 12 Kg/sq.cm & should be Hydro-tested at 18

Kg/sq.cm.

Compressed Air Piping and Valves

Air filter cum moisture separator is required to remove moisture, oil fog

lubricator for lubricating and pressure regulator to regulate the pressure. Heavy duty, mild steel

ERW piping “C” class (shall conform to IS 1239), only welded or flanged installation, complete

with SS ball valves, flexible metal braided hoses & brass nipples, 4 port, 3 way Solenoid valves

etc as per requirement. Pipes shall be rigidly supported on CI clamps.

Steam & Condensate

LP Steam Piping

LP steam piping should be non-IBR type and MS „C” class ERW pipes (shall conform to

IS1239), with shoe, guide arrangement shall be used. Expansion bends shall be provided at every

30 m straight line pipe, with Air vent & drain trap arrangement. These lines shall be traces with

Molasses pipelines.

Insulation

Thermal insulation of steam lines with resin-bonded mineral wool in pipe form including

cladding with 22 G Al. Sheet as per IS 737-1900 (amended as on date) should be provided.

Valves & fittings shall also be insulated.

Steam Valves and Fittings

The following shall be provided wherever required between PRS outlet and steam utility

points: Cast steel flanged glandless piston/ball valves with SS working parts, CI strainer with

brass screen, thermodynamic steam traps (for pipelines, headers only), angle needle valve, moisture



Page 122 of 430

separators, safety valves, non return valves (wafer type), dial type pressure gauges etc. Steam trap

assembly shall be complete with by-pass valves. A pneumatically operated steam control valve

shall automatically control the feed rate of steam to the conditioner, regulated by the feedback

received from the temperature sensor in the conditioner. By-pass of the pneumatic control valve

shall be provided. Air vent shall be provided at the highest point in the steam piping & on the

expansion bend, if any. Condensate drain trap assembly on the LP steam shall be located just before

the expansion bend & Pellet mill conditioner.

Condensate Pipes, Valves and Fittings

Type:

ERW MS `C‟ class (shall conform to IS 1239) welded type heavy duty piping with CS body ball

valves, NRVs (wafer) in flange/screwed execution. Supporting: MS shoe, guide, roller support, in

mild steel painted execution generally as per bidding document and meeting with IBR

requirements. Accessories: Pipe sleeves, roller supports, flow measurement at the entry point to

the plant.

Pipe Insulation:

50 mm Thick insulation mineral wool, with 22 G aluminium sheet cladding. Condensate

Recovery system shall consist of pressurized recovery of condensate generated during

preheating of molasses in the shell & tube heat exchanger. The recovery system shall make use of

steam pressure rather than electrically operated arrangement to transfer condensate to Feed water

tank in Boiler House. The specification of condensate piping, valves shall be similar to LP steam.

Electrical Design, Manufacture supplier, erection testing & commissioning of

compartmentalized cubical type Panel Board with incoming feeders, ACB 4 pole

Air Circuit Breaker, Aluminium bus bars design 1600amps with Volt meter, Ammeter, 3

phase energy meter, set of CT‟s, Phase indicating lamps etc. outgoing feeders (a) 4 pole

micro processer based MCCB 800amps with inbuilt release for short circuit, overload

protection for Cattle Feed Plant (b) Boiler House – 4 pole 160amp. MCCB (c) By-pass

Protein Unit, MCCB Unit

200amp (d) 160amps. For weigh bridge (e) Godown lighting (f) External lighting (g) Spare

MCCB 160amps. 3 nos.

LT cables from LT Panel located in the substation room to the Main plant MCC & Raw water

pumps are included in the scope of work. Interconnecting LT power/ Control Cables from

Main plant MCC to Boiler House MCC, Raw material Intake MCC, Silo System, APFC

panel are included in the scope of work.

Standard Motor Control Centre (MCC) for the Main plant for incoming &

outgoing electrical feeders (in cubicles) described in the work scope shall be supplied.

Separate MCC for Silo System equipments, the Raw material loading into proportionate Bins

in the Main plant. This panel shall be suitably located near silo and shall be receive power

from the Main plant MCC

Separate Soft-starter panel for motors above 20 HP, shall draw power from the Main plant

MCC & shall be located in the plant electrical room. VFDs shall also be installed in the

soft-starter panel. This panel shall be located in the Main Plant electrical room.



Page 123 of 430

One MCC in Boiler House for electrical loads in Boiler House for Boilers panel, water softener, Molasses unloading pumps, Air compressor etc is included in the scope. One feeder

of 63 amps shall be provided for welding purpose in the Boiler House MCC.

Outdoor type panel for Raw water pumps near the water pumps is included in the scope.

One number Power Factor Correction panel with capacitor banks to improve PF for Main

plant, Boiler panel with interconnecting cables shall be placed near the Main Plant MCC.

Lighting panel for the Main plant, including Distribution Boards, trays, conduits, Light fittings

are included in the scope. Power for Lighting panel shall be drawn from an outgoing feeder in

the Main lighting panel in Substation room. The lighting loads shall be equally distributed in

three phases.

Remote Push button stations, isolators, junction boxes etc for control, isolation etc included.

The entire Earthing network for the equipments shall be in the scope of work.

One Lightening arrestor for the Main plant with GI earth-pits shall be included in the scope.

MCC/ Electrical panel for the following shall be supplied;

1. LT Panel.

2. Main plant MCC.

3. MCC for Silo System Equipments

4. Soft-starter panel.

5. Boiler House MCC.

6. Panel for Raw Water pumps.

7. APFC panel.

8. Lighting panel for Main plant

Following are the feeder details to be considered for following panels, apart from the electrical

loads in the scope of work for each site S. No Description Feeder detail Qty

Main LT Panel

1

Incoming Feeder

Air Circuit Breaker

1200amps

1 No.

2

Outgoing Feeder

Air Circuit Breaker 800amps 1 No.

Main Plant MCC

1

Boiler House MCC

250 A MCCB

1 No.

2 Welding Feeder 63 A MCCB 1 No.

MCC for Raw material Intake

1

Mineral Mix plant

100 A MCCB

1 No.

2 Raw material silo storage system 200 A MCCB 1 No.

3

Welding Feeder

63 A MCCB

1 No. From Boiler House MCC

1 Softener pump 3 HP DOL starter 1 No.

2 Boiler Control Panel 63 A MCCB 2 Nos.

3

Welding Feeder

63 A MCCB

1 No.

4

Air Compressor

63 A MCCB

1 No.



Page 124 of 430

5

Feeder for Air dryer

6 A DPMCB

1 No. Outdoor panel for Raw water pumps

1

Raw water pumps

7.5 HP DOL starter

2 Nos.

2

Spare Feeder

3 HP DOL starter

2 Nos.

Outdoor type panel for Raw water pumps is to be supplied. Outdoor panel shall have incoming

and outgoing feeders with push buttons for electrical equipment such as motors/pumps, spare

feeders. The bidder shall confirm with the purchaser, the rating of the outgoing feeder for Raw

water pumps, as per actual electrical load requirement.

Boiler House MCC shall have starters for Molasses unloading pumps & electrical heaters for

the unloading pumps. Remote Push button stations for these pumps, shall be provided in Cast

aluminium IP 55 protected housing near these pumps. However, starters for the Molasses feed

pumps (for the plant) shall be located in the Main Plant MCC.

Instruments & Protective Relays to be provided in MCC/Panel as below details;

S. No. Components Incomer Outgoing Feeder

1 RYB LED Indication Lamps YES NO

2 Voltmeter with selector switch YES NO

3 Ammeter with selector switch YES YES

4 Over & under voltage protection YES NO

5 Over Current Protection YES YES

6 Inst. Earth Fault YES NO

7 Energy Meter YES NO

8 ON-OFF LED Indication lamps YES YES

9 Power Factor Meter YES NO

Motor Control Centre (Sheet Steel Enclosure)

Functional Requirement

Panels shall receive, control and distribute electrical power at 440 V, 50 Hz, AC in sheet steel

housing.

Design Requirement and Scope of Supply

Statutory Requirements:

Motor control centre is to be manufactured /assembled as per the latest ISI Specification, Indian

Electricity Rules, including special requirements of concerned State Electricity Inspectorate and

the detailed specification mentioned below.

Housing Details:

The switchboard shall be fabricated using pressed and shaped cold rolled steel sections

structure of adequate thickness. The sheet steel used for panel shall be minimum 14 SWG

sheet except that the partition plates, inter-panel barriers which shall be made of 16 SWG.

The switchboard shall consist of free standing front open able panels arranged to form a

continuous line-up of uniform height. Cold rolled sheets shall be used for doors and front

covers. Front doors shall be hinged type and bus bars and cable alleys covers shall be bolted

type with thumb screws.



Page 125 of 430

Switch Board shall be extensible at both the ends by addition of vertical sections. Ends of

the bus bars shall be suitably drilled for this purpose. Panels at extreme ends shall have

openings, which shall be covered with plates screwed to the panel. The switchboard shall be

provided with integral base frame. The panel base plate/cable gland plate shall be 2.5 mm

thick.

The switchboard shall be totally enclosed, dust, weather and vermin proof. The switchboard

shall conform to degree of protection not less than IP 44. Gaskets of durable material shall

be provided for doors and other openings. Suitable hooks shall be provided for lifting the

boards. These hooks when removed shall suitably plugged in the board.

All hardware shall be corrosion resistant. All joints and connections shall be made by

galvanised zinc passivated or cadmium plated high tensile strength steel bolts and nuts.

Spring washers shall be provided to secure against loosening. The switchboard shall be in cubicle design (each feeder components are

housed in individual cubicle) suitable for indoor installation. Suitable cable & bus bar

alleys shall be provided. In case plant room dimensions prohibit provision of cable/bus

alleys in front, panel depth may be increased suitably to accommodate cables/buses on back

of MCC. All

components of the switchboard shall generally be approachable from front. However, MCC

can be in double front execution also if specifically asked for, or space restriction.

The maximum and minimum operating handle/push button height of any feeder shall be

approximately 1900 mm and 300 mm respectively with reference to panel bottom. The total

height of panel shall generally not exceed 2300 mm. Supporting arrangement for dressing of

power and control cables in cable alleys also shall be provided. Maximum shipping length

of MCC shall be 2500 mm.

Motor HP Cubicle for DOL starter Cubicle for Star-Delta starter Width (mm) Height( mm) Width (mm) Height( mm)

Up to 10 HP 450 275 -- -- 12.5 & 15 HP -- -- 450 550

Note: The size of feeders with soft starters, variable frequency drives (VFD) shall be decided

as per the size of the soft starters, its switching device and the type of connection for the

application.

Current Rating of SFU/MPCB/MCCB

Cubicle for SFU/MPCB/MCCB Width mm Height mm

Upto 63 A 450 275 100 A to 250 A 450 550 400 A and above 500 825

Minimum depth of cubicle for ACB shall be 1000 mm.

Minimum depth of panel shall be 350 mm.

Minimum width of cable and bus bar alleys shall be 300 mm

Painting:



Page 126 of 430

All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased to remove all scales, rust,

grease and dirt. Fabricated panels shall be pickled and treated to remove any trace of acid. The

under- surface shall be prepared by applying a coat of phosphate paint and a coat of yellow

zinc chromate primer. The under surface shall be made free from all imperfections

before undertaking the final coat. After preparation of the under surfaces, the panel shall be

spray painted with two coats of approved shade of po der coating. The finished panels shall be

dried in stoving ovens in dust free atmosphere. Panel finish shall be free from imperfections like

pin holes, orange peels, run-off paint, etc. All unpainted steel parts shall be cadmium plated or

suitably treated to prevent rust, corrosion, etc.

Nameplates:

Nameplates for all incoming and outgoing feeders shall be provided on

doors of each compartment. Nameplates shall be fixed by screws only and not by

adhesives. Engraved nameplates shall preferably be of 3-ply (Black-White-Black)

acrylic sheets or anodized aluminum. Special danger plates shall be provided as per

requirement.

Inside the panels, stickers should be provided for all components giving identification no. as per

detailed wiring diagram.

Bus bar Sizing Connection and Supports

The bus bars shall be made from high conductivity electrolytic aluminum conforming to grade

E91 E of IS 5082. The bus bars and supports shall be capable of withstanding the rated and

short circuit current stated in the single line diagram/feeder details. Minimum size of power bus

bars shall be 200 Amps. rating. Maximum current density permissible for Aluminum bus bars

shall be 0.8 Amps./Sq. mm for bus bar area above 500 Sq. mm & 1.0

Amp/Sq. mm for bus bar area below 500 Sq. mm. An earthing bus bar of minimum 150 Sq. mm

section aluminum shall be provided outside panel at bottom throughout the length of the panel.

Provision shall be made to connect the earthing bus bar to the plant earthing grid at two ends.

All doors shall be earthed using flexible copper connections to the fixed frame of the

switchboard.

Maximum current density permissible for Copper bus bars shall be 1.5 Amps./mm2

The bus bars hall be provided with heat shrinkable PVC insulating sleeves of 1100V grade.

Red, yellow and blue colour shall be used for phase bus bars and black colour shall be used for

neutral bus bars. Joints shall be shrouded suitably. Supports for bus bars shall be made of

suitable size non-hygroscopic and non-inflammable epoxy compound SMC/DMC blocks and

these should be adequate in number so as to avoid any sag in the bus bars.

Minimum clearance between phase to phase shall be 25 mm and that between phase to

neutral/earth shall be 20 mm

Power Connection:

For power interconnection within the panel board:

Copper stranded conductor PVC insulated cables suitable for 1100 volts, of adequate cross

section shall be used. FOR CURRENT RATING ABOVE 63 AMPS

ALUMINIUM BUSBAR STRIPS OF ADEQUATE RATING SHALL BE USED. MINIMUM

SIZE OF COPPER CONDUCTOR TO BE USED SHALL BE 4.0 SQ.MM. Cable lugs/

sockets of suitable size and type shall be used for all interconnections wherever required.

For all Aluminium to Copper connections: - The Copper surface will be silver plated and the

aluminium surface will be properly cleaned and supplied with oxide inhibiting grease.



Page 127 of 430

For all outgoing motor feeders, the suitable size terminal blocks shall be provided in cable

alleys near feeder’s cubicle and wiring upto these from contactors shall be done by panel

supplier. These terminal blocks shall be heavy duty type to withstand high starting currents.

For incoming and outgoing feeders of the MCC, copper/aluminium conductor cable will be

used and hence the panel is to be designed for receiving these and wherever required cable

boxes with bus bar extensions for receiving more no. of cables, shall be provided in panel by

supplier. Removable gland plates of 12 gauge thickness shall be provided on top/ bottom of

panel, for cable entries. Supplier to check with purchaser whether incoming/outgoing cables

are to enter MCC from bottom or top.

To prevent accidental contacts, all interconnecting cables/bus bars and all terminals also shall

be shrouded.

Standard colour code of red, yellow and blue for phases and black for Neutral to be

followed for all bus bars/conductors.

Auxiliary wiring and Terminals:

Wiring for all controls, protection, metering, signaling etc. inside the switchboard shall be

done with 1100 volts grey colour PVC insulated stranded copper conductors. Minimum size

of these conductors shall be 1.5 Sq.mm. CT circuit wiring shall be done with 2.5 Sq.mm.

Control wiring to components fixed on doors shall be flexible type.

The complete panel would be sub-divided into different sections if required by purchaser.

Each cubical shall have its own control circuit with MCB and indication. Terminal block

(Minimum 3-ways) for control wiring shall be provided for each outgoing Motor feeder in its

cubical near cable alley. 10% spare (minimum one) terminals shall always be available in each

terminal block. Control wiring up to these terminal blocks shall be done by supplier.

All control wiring should be provided with necessary cable sockets/lugs at both ends.

Separate cubicle can be provided in the panel to enable termination of multi-core control

cables.

Conductors shall be terminated using compression type lugs. Each termination shall be

identified at both the ends by PVC ferrules. The identification termination numbers should

match with those on drawings.

Control wiring for motor feeders should be such that the "green" light of motor feeder is

"ON" only when control as well as power circuit of feeders is "ON" and it shall have its own

MCB.

For all motor starter feeders, provision for control wiring to remote ON/OFF control is to be

made. The auxiliary wiring for the same shall be brought up to terminal block in the feeder's

cubicle.

Switchgears:

Air Circuit Breakers (ACBs)

These shall be manually operated, fully draw out type, 4 pole type with built-in

microprocessor based programmable protection suitable for 415 V, 50 Hz. supply.

Microprocessor based programmable protection unit shall have settings for overload, short

circuit, instantaneous and earth fault currents with time delay and LED indicators to show

various conditions such as Power ON, Overload, Short-circuit, Instantaneous Earth fault,

Percentage load, Self Diagnostic Test etc. Mechanical spring charging mechanism stored energy

type shall be provided with mechanical indicators to show 'Open', 'Closed', 'Service' & 'Test'



Page 128 of 430

positions. The circuit breaker shall be provided with mechanically operated emergency tripping

device. This device shall be available on the front of the panel. Mechanical interlock shall be

provided such that the ACB feeder cubical door cannot be opened when ACB is "ON". However,

it shall be possible to defeat this interlock for inspection purpose. Trip coil shall work under the

following voltage variation conditions:

Trip coils: 50 % to 130 % of rated voltage

The circuit breaker shall be provided with mechanically operated emergency tripping device. This device shall be available on the front of the panel. The circuit breaker position shall be

indicated electrically. The following indicating colours shall be used:

BREAKER CLOSE RED

BREAKER OPEN GREEN

BREAKER AUTO TRIP AMBER

Note: The air circuit breaker for incoming feeder shall be of 4 pole construction, unless stated

otherwise. It shall also be provided with under voltage coil and single phase protection

relay.



Page 129 of 430

Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCB)

MCCBs shall always be provided with separate operating handle

mechanism with door interlocking. The MCCBs for motor feeders shall be of triple pole

construction arranged for simultaneous three pole manual closing or opening and automatic

instantaneous tripping on short circuits. MCCB used for incoming feeder or for non-motor

outgoing feeder, shall be of 4 pole type. MCCBs shall be provided with adjustable type

tripping device with inverse time characteristics for over load protection. All motor feeders

MCCBs shall be provided with neutral link complete with isolating link.

Closing mechanism shall be quick make, quick break and trip free type. Operating handle shall

give a clear 'ON' 'OFF' & 'TRIP' indication. Control voltage for MCCB shall be 240 volts. The

ratings shall be as specified in feeder details or approved drawings.

Minimum rated breaking capacities shall be as under:

MCCBs up to 100 Amps 135 KA MCCBs above 100 Amps 150 KA

Note: All feeders having MCCB shall be provided with neutral link complete with isolating

link. However, the MCCBs for incoming and non-motor feeders shall be of

4 pole construction, unless stated otherwise.

Motor Protection Circuit Breaker (MPCB)

These shall be used along with conjunction with power contactor as

specified in special requirement of this project/drawings. MPCB shall be selected for

motor protection tripping characteristics, current limiting and shall have low let through energy.

MPCB shall have inbuilt bimetal for overload protection and Electro-magnetic release

for short circuit protection. MPCB shall have adjustable overload settings,

single phase protection & auxiliary switches/contacts for indications, interlocks etc. It

shall comply with latest standard and provide short circuit coordination TYPE “2” in

accordance with IEC 947-4-1 with contactors. The

Contractor and MPCB shall be of same make. MPCB should give indication for ON/OFF and

tripping on fault. The minimum breaking capacity of the MPCB shall be 50 KA. MPCB

shall have door interlocking with cubicle feeder door by suitable extensions.

Switch & fuse switches

Switches or fuse switches shall be load break, heavy duty, air break

having continuous maximum rating type with manual quick make/break mechanism.

Mechanical interlock shall be provided to prevent opening of door in switch „closed‟

position and prevent closing of switch in door „open‟ position. However, it should be possible

to defeat this arrangement for testing purpose.

Fuses

These shall be non-deteriorating HRC cartridge link type with operation indicator which

will be visible without removing fuses for the service. These shall be complete with moulded

phenolic fuse base and cover. The fuse base shall be so located in the modules to permit

insertion of fuse pullers and removal of fuse links without any problem.



Page 130 of 430

Contactors

The rating of the power contactors shall be as required depending upon the feeder

rating indicated in the specifications and as per the table provided in this

specification below. Contactors coils shall be suitable for 240 volts, 50 Hz.

unless otherwise specified. All contactors shall be supplied with minimum 2NO + 2NC

auxiliary contacts. Additional contacts if required for interlocking etc. shall also be

provided. All contactors of motor starters shall be suitable for AC 3 duty unless specified

otherwise. Auxiliary contactors for controls shall have minimum 2NO + 2NC auxiliary

contacts.

Protective Devices

Bimetal overload relays with inbuilt single phase protection shall be adjustable and

self reset type. Alternatively, electronic relay with LCD display and annunciation with trip

reasons may also be provided. Heavy duty starters shall be provided with saturable type

current transformer operated overload relays only, which shall be suitable for motor starting

time of 15-60 seconds. Any other relays, if required for incoming & outgoing feeders shall

be specified in the feeder details.

Timers

The timers shall be continuously adjustable and electronic type, suitable for 240 V, 50

Hz supply. The timers for Star Delta automatic starters shall have time delay of 0 to 60

seconds between changeovers of contacts.

Push Buttons (PBs)

Push buttons shall be complete with actuator and contact block & LED indicator type.

These shall be generally mounted on doors of the cubicles. Colours shall be as follows:

Stop/open/emergency Red Start/close Green

It should have minimum 1 NO + 1NC contacts. Push buttons shall conform to IP-65

protection against dust and water ingress.

Indication Lamps

All outgoing motor feeder shall be provided with „ON‟ indication lamps. For all incoming

and non motor outgoing feeders shall be provided “ON” indication lamps for all three phases.

Colours shall be as under:

Phases Red, Yellow & Blue ON Red OFF Green (Only for ACB Feeder) TRIPPED Yellow (Only for ACB Feeder)

Indication lamps shall be in the form of cluster of high intensity light emitting diodes (LED)

to give bright indication. These lamps shall be of 22.5 mm dia and having operating

voltage of 240 V, AC.



Page 131 of 430

Current Transformers (CTs)

CTs shall be cast resin insulated type. Primary and secondary terminals

shall be marked indelibly. CTs shall preferably be mounted on stationery parts. These

shall be capable of withstanding momentary short circuit and symmetrical short circuit

current for 1 second and shall have a minimum rating of 10 VA. Neutral side of CTs shall

be earthed. Protection CTs shall be of low reactance, accuracy class "SP" and an accuracy

limit factor greater than "10". Instrument CTs shall be of accuracy class "1.0" and accuracy

limit factor less than "5.0". Separate CTs to be provided for protection and metering

purpose.

Measuring Instruments

These shall be of square pattern having approximate dimensions 96 mm x 96 mm,

flush mounting type. Necessary auxiliary instruments like CTs, VTs, etc. are also included

in the scope of supply. All AC meters shall be of Digital type for displaying three phases

reading. Suitable selector switch shall be provided if the digital meter does not have

provision for simultaneous display of three phase readings. Voltmeter shall be

suitable for direct line connection. Voltmeters shall be connected through MCBs only.

General Requirements

All non-motor outgoing feeders shall have ammeter with selector switch to indicate

current in all three phases. Ammeter shall always be CT operated. The following selection

table shall be followed for switches & contactors of motor feeders unless otherwise specified

:

S. No 415 V Motor

rating (HP) Contactors

Rating (amps) MCCB Rating

(amps) MPCB Rating

(amps) Type of Starter

1 Up to 7.5 HP 25 ---- 16 DOL

2 10 & 15 HP 32 ---- 25 STAR-DELTA 3

20 to 25 HP

----

40

----

SOFT STARTER / STAR DELTA

4

30 to 35 HP

----

50

----


5

40 HP

----

63

----


6

45 HP

----

100

----


7

50 to 60 HP

----

100

----


8

65 to 70 HP

----

200

----


9

75 to 90 HP

----

200

----


10

100 to 125 HP

----

250

----


11

150 to 180 HP

----

400

----


12

200 to 250 HP

----

400

----




Page 132 of 430

Special requirements

1. For capacitors, rating of contactors switch shall be double of rated current of capacitor.

2. All motors upto 7.5 HP feeders shall have DOL starter for motors of 10 HP 15 HP shall have

star delta starter, motor feeders above 20 HP shall have soft starters.

3. All motor feeder rating of 20 HP above shall have ammeter with selector switches.

4. Motor feeders upto 15 HP shall be provided with MPCB for feeders 20 HP above shall be

provided with MCCB of specified minimum breaking capacity.

5. If the total operating load on MCC is more than 600 KW, MCC shall have t 0 incoming

feeders with a bus coupler (similar to incoming feeder without protection and metering

provisions). Each incoming feeder shall have independent instrumentation and protection.

6. For incoming feeder of rating up to 600 Amps, MCCB (4 Pole type) and for rating 600

Amps and above ACB (4 Pole type) shall be provided. Each incoming feeders to be

complete with earth leakage relay. For incoming feeder for the Main plant,

a microprocessor based data logger to be provided to indicate and store 3 phase voltages, 3

phase current power factor, energy consumed in Hand VAR etc.

7. For High electrical loads like Batch mixers, Hammer Mills, Pellet Mills, Pellet cooler fans,

capacitors shall be placed in the Main plant MCC shall be directly connected, once the

respective feeder is put ON.

8. If the non motor outgoing feeder rating is 100 Amps and above, MCCB (4 Pole type) shall be

provided.

9. All control wiring in feeders, instrument connections shall be wired through 2

Amp DPMCB.

10. Electrical interlocking shall be provided between various feeders as required by the process or

specified in special requirement for this project or approved drawings.

11. Induction motors (above 10 KW) with 3000 RPM shall require higher rating for MPCB

MCCB, contactors and electronic timers due to very high starting current. MCC supplier to

specially check this requirement from purchaser before preparing the drawings.

12. Feeder details for incoming and outgoing for this project as per battery limit to be worked out

by the supplier as per the design and requirement of the plant.

13. Motors for Hammer Mills pellet Mills with common base frame, the final termination at the

motors end, shall be with copper conductor cable.

14. In addition to the connected load to MCC, at least 10 (rating) spare outgoing feeders complete

with starters shall be provided. These spare feeders shall cover as far as possible more or less

all sizes of starters.

15. VFDs provided in the panel for plant equipment shall be interfaced to the Central PLC

through Ethernet or similar type of communication cable. The VFD shall be dynamically

controlled from the PLC depending on the program and feedback system from field. These

VFD shall have Battery back- up and communication port.

16. Rubber mats, 12 mm thick suitable for 11 V to be provided in front of operating side of

MCC for full length of MCC.

17. All the ma or components of an MCC shall be of same Make

Soft Starter Panel

Panel for Soft-starter shall have specifications similar to that of MCC with suitable sized cubicles

for outgoing feeders. This panel shall have ON, OFF, TRIP indications, with ammeter

and provision for cooling arrangement like fan & louvers. VFDs for feede rs for Pellet Mill and

Hammer mill shall also be installed in this panel. Soft-starters are required for Heavy-duty start

applications for motor ratings above 20 HP & shall be used in conjunction with MCCB (with

tripping arrangement) in a panel feeder. The selection of the soft-starter shall be based on the



Page 133 of 430

application, ambient temperature, no. of start & stops/hr & rating of the motor.

Standard features like Ramp-up time, Ramp-down time, % starting voltage, LED indications

etc shall be available in the unit. For Hammer Mill & Pellet Mill motors, the

soft-starter shall have additional features like adjustable current limiting, thermister

protection for motor, built-in CT & PLC communication port. All soft-starters shall have

electronic overload relay & for motors above 50 HP the starter shall have inbuilt electronic

overload relay with a trip class 30 & fan cooling arrangement. In most cases,

soft-starter shall be in-line connected. However, if required, for specific application,

an inside delta connected soft-starter with suitably rated contactor, can be considered.

Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel With Capacitors

The capacitor requirement shall be calculated considering the overall inductive loads of Main

plant equipments under the scope of supply. Power factor correction for electrical loads of other

associated plants need not be considered. The calculation of capacitor requirement shall be

shared with purchaser and approval of the final requirement shall be taken from purchaser

before supply. This panel shall be located near Main plant MCC & for the design purpose an

initial power factor of 0.8 shall be assumed. CT for PF relay shall be located on the load side of

the incoming feeder of the LT PANEL.

Automatic Power Factor Correction Panel

Automatic Power factor Correction panel is required to continuously measure and monitor the

power factor of a system and switch ON/OFF bank of power capacitors to bring the power

factor of the system to a preset value. This shall be a separate panel which shall receive input

from LT PANEL. The panel is to be fabricated with 14 SWG thick cold-rolled sheet steel

enclosure, indoor type, floor mounted, weather and vermin proof with similar specifications of

a Motor Control Centre with provisions for heat dissipation (louver with mesh) & suitable for

415 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase supply.

It would consist of -

An automatic power factor correction relay, microprocessor based, with

arrangement for sensing the power factor of the inductive load and giving signal to 16

feeders (min) of power capacitors, as per the setting of P. F. and electronic circuit to ensure

that once a capacitor gets cut off, it is not put on at least for a minute. The relay should

automatically manage capacitor banks. The capacitors must be turned "on" and "off' according

to the reactive power required to correct the power factor of the load to the power factor set on

the relay. The relay should have automatic and manual mode of operation with a LED to

indicate the operating mode. The auto/manual function makes it possible to turn the

capacitor banks on and off manually regardless of the line value measured.

APFC panel shall have the following;



Page 134 of 430

Description Unit Required

Suitable rating SF unit/MCCB, contactor, pair of ON/OFF LED indication type push button for each outgoing capacitor feeder

1 set

Flush mounted 96 mm x 96 mm square digital power factor meter having 4 digits LCD or LED display

1 set for the incomer

Selector switch and CT operated digital ammeter of size 96 mm x 96 mm 1 set for the incomer

Selector switch and digital voltmeter of size 96 mm x 96 mm 1 set for the incomer

Auto manual switch and connected circuit to ensure that in manual mode each capacitor can be put ON/OFF manually


Incoming feeder with suitable rating MCCB/ACB to feed power to switchgears of capacitor bank


Suitable 3 phase and neutral bus bars 1 set

Wiring for all above accessories/functions should be complete and ready for use. The

details of each capacitor bank rating, no. of capacitor banks and rating of incoming

switchgear for power factor improvement cubicle shall be as per details given in the data

sheet and schedule of quantities.

Power Capacitors Banks

The power capacitor banks shall be used to improve the power factor of an electrical

system and shall be housed in the power factor correction panel separated from the feeder

cubicle.

Design Requirements

Each basic unit is to be built up with a number of elements. These elements shall be

All Polypropylene film (Super Heavy duty), non-self healing type with low watt loss.

Capacitor element must be completely sealed with epoxy resins to provide maximum

humidity protection and highest insulation. The capacitor elements are to be given adequate

outside insulation and should be put in all welded surface treated MS containers. The outer

surface shall be provided with a coat of protective primer followed by two coats of

synthetic enamel paint of approved shade. These capacitors shall be Non PCB oil

impregnated under high vacuum. The metal case shall be equipped with porcelain bushings

to permit connection between power lines and active capacitors. The unit shall have built-in

internal individual fuses.

Externally each capacitor unit shall have two separate earthing points, name plate confirming to

the requirements of IS-2834 (amended up to date), discharge resistances etc. Each capacitor

should be suitable for operation on 440 V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz AC power supply for 25 KVAR

rating.



Page 135 of 430

Geared Motors & Gear Boxes

Gear Boxes are required for torque transmission & speed reduction for plant equipments. Speed

reduction for machines shall be through geared motors only unless gear boxes have been

specified in individual machine's specification. The geared motor should use helical gears. The

electric motor and helical gear box should be built as one unit. The geared motors gear boxes

shall be selected for minimum 15 start stops per hour, for moderate shock load for continuous

operational requirement with a minimum mechanical service factor of 1.5, without

undue heating of gear oil. The load factor for overhang shall also be considered for gearbox

selection. Geared motors / boxes shall be complete including key in the driven shaft, oil level

indicator, oil filling plug, oil breather and drain plug. Suitable grade gear oil for first charge of

geared motor / boxes should not be filled but should be packed separately in a drum and sent

along with geared motor/boxes. Suitable grade Gear oil for the gear box /geared motor shall be

filled at site before testing. The electric motors used for geared motors / gear boxes should be

TEFC, degree of protection IP¬ 54/55, squirrel cage, induction type, with class 'F' insulation

suitable for 415 V, 50 Hz, 3 phase AC supply. Electric motors performance in general should

confirm to IS-325-1996.

Electric Motors

These are required for driving various machines of the plant. All motors should be TEFC

(Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled), squirrel cage, degree of protection IP-54/55, horizontal foot

mounted, induction type, rated for continuous duty, with class 'F' insulation

suitable for operation on 415 volts (+/_ 5% ), 50 Hz, 3 phase AC supply. All motors to be

supplied shall be "Energy Efficient" type and shall confirm to the latest relevant IS and shall

comply with the following:

1. All poly-phase motors of 0.375 kW or more shall have a minimum acceptable nominal full

load motor efficiency not less than shown in table below or as per the IS 12615 2004 Eft 1

for energy efficient motors.

2. Motor nameplates shall list the nominal full-load motor efficiencies and the full-load power

factor.

3. Certificates shall be obtained and kept on record indicating the motor efficiency. Whenever a

motor is rewound, appropriate measures shall be taken so that the core characteristics of the

motor is not lost due to thermal and mechanical stress during removal of damaged parts. After

rewinding, a new efficiency test shall be performed and a similar record shall be

maintained.



Page 136 of 430

Minimum acceptable nominal full load motor efficiency

(For all poly-phase motors of 0.375 kW or more)

Motor Power Efficiency

KW HP 2 Pole 4 Pole

1.1 1.5 82.2 83.8

1.5 2 84.1 85

2.2 3 85.6 86.4

3 4 86.7 87.4

4 5.5 87.6 88.3

5.5 7.5 88.5 89.2

7.5 10 89.5 90.1

11 15 90.6 91

15 20 91.3 91.8

18.5 25 91.8 92.2

22 30 92.2 92.6

30 40 92.9 93.2

37 50 93.3 93.6

45 60 93.7 93.9

55 75 94 94.2

75 100 94.6 94.7

90 120 95 95

110 150 95 95

132 180 95.3 95.5

160 215 95.5 95.8

180 240 95.5 95.8

200 270 95.8 95.8

All motors to have at least class 'F' insulation. The performance of the motors should

conform to Indian Standard IS-325- 1996. The starting torque of the motors shall be at least 2.5

times of the rated torque. All motors above 60 HP shall be provided with bigger terminal

box to accommodate AI cables. Thermistor shall be provided in motor windings of 60 HP &

above & shall be of two ranges, one being for the warning and the other for tripping the motor if

the fault persists.

Remote Control Panels

These shall be floor/wall-mounted type as per site requirement. These shall be made of

SS 304 housing. Front cover shall be removable type with suitable rubber gaskets to make

them dust, vermin and moisture proof. Degree of protection for housing shall be IP - 54/55.

Each feeder of station shall be provided with nameplate (white bakelite), LED type indication

lamp with pushbuttons i.e. one 'ON' (Green) push button and one 'OFF' (Red) push button with



Page 137 of 430

latch to prevent accidental starting. Green and Red push buttons shall have contact elements

having 1 NO + 1 NC. Heavy duty connector shall be used in RCP for internal wiring.

Indication lamps shall be LED type to give bright indication. Push Buttons shall be indicator

type with LED lamps & shall be of 22.5 mm dia and having operating voltage of 240 V AC.

The panels shall have ammeter for critical equipments to monitor motor load. Localised

control panels to be provided, as per the requirement, near the special machines such

as Pellet mills, Hammer mills, Mixers and Automatic bagging system etc. These can

be floor/wall-mounted type and made from SS 304 sheet with suitable supporting

arrangements. These can be as per the standard design of the manufacturer of the related

machine.

Push Button Stations / Isolators /Junction Boxes etc.

Push button stations and isolators are required for emergency operation of the equipment

and installed near it. All Push buttons shall be indicative type with LED. All DOL started

motors shall have power isolators near the motors and Star-Delta started motors shall have ON

and stay put on type red OFF Push button stations near the motors. Junction boxes are required

on floors near equipment for bringing multi-core control cables up to floor and distribution to

individual control switches such as limit switches, isolators, push buttons, solenoid valve etc.

These push button stations/isolators/junction boxes etc. shall be housed in aluminium cast

housing and to have IP-54/55 protection so that these are robust and no dust could enter into

them.

Mimic Panel

This panel is used for operating the feed mill equipment on manual mode when PLC is

not in operation & not controlled by the remote control panels provided in the individual sections

of the plant, for operating various pneumatic flaps/slide gates and for housing indicator for auto-

batching plant. The complete installation to be shown by a painted multi- colour mimic diagram.

The mimic diagram shall be housed in a SS enclosure & shall have LED indicators for status of

motors, slide gate, level sensors etc. The general specification of this panel would be similar to

that of motor control centre specified elsewhere in the bidding document. All the necessary

operating, indicating and signal elements shall be located on the fixed front panel with desk, in

functional manner so as to facilitate comfort of operation.

Production Block Lighting

Lighting of entire production block (except wherever R.C.C. roof is provided by the

purchaser) is to be carried out by the bidder. Lighting work scope starts from the outlet feeder

of the Main lighting panel in the LT Panel room of the Substation block to the light fittings in

the main plant. The specification of the Lighting panel shall be similar to that of MCC,

excepting that the outgoing feeders shall be with suitable rating TPN MCB for the Distribution

Boards in the Main plant. Lighting shall be carried out as per equipment and general lighting

requirement. Light fittings are to be wired via Distribution Board to a centralised lighting

panel for the main plant in the Electrical room which are to be supplied by the bidder. This

centralized lighting panel shall be cabled to respective Distribution Boards located on

respective floors. Various switchgears such as miniature circuit breakers & earth leakage

circuit breakers etc. of the distribution Board shall be integrated in this Lighting panel. Light

fittings control may be for individual or group of light fittings depending upon the locations

by miniature circuit breakers. For wiring PVC



Page 138 of 430

insulated armoured cable with copper stranded conductor, shall be used for sub-main wiring

upto Distribution Board in each floor. From each Distribution Board to individual fixtures shall

be through Copper point wiring (min 2.5sq.mm) in 25 mm MS conduit to be provided. All

Light fitting shall be Dust & Jet proof, (similar to IDJ 1124 EB of Crompton) with electronic

ballast. Fluorescent tubes of 36 W cool Day light shall be used for the fittings. Emergency

lights for indication of the emergency exits to be provided complete with centralised inverter in

control room. For production block roof, twin obstructers marking light for aviation purpose to

be provided.

On each floor of the production block, one distribution board shall be provided with at

least one 25A universal single phase metallic plug and socket power point in cast

Al. dust proof enclosure. Copper lightning arrestor with connected GI earthing strip and

earthing pits shall be provided for lightening protection of the plant. Separate

earthing system with pits to be provided for industrial power system, computer

systems, lighting system and lightening arrester. Power for Air conditioner with voltage

stabilizer, emergency lights for Control room shall be drawn from nearest lighting

distribution board. Distribution Boards shall be prefabricated type with I6 /18 G

MS sheet housing suitable quantity of MCBs, with suitable nos. of knockouts for incoming

cable & outgoing cables & conduits. The box shall be hinge type with only the MCBs

operating knob visible. These boards shall have 2 mm thick gland plate.

Power Cables (LT)

Power cables for use on 415 V system shall be of 1100 volt grade, copper conductor (upto 50

Sq.mm) & aluminium conductor (above 50 Sq.mm), XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed, armoured

and overall PVC sheathed strictly as per IS : 7098 PART 1/1988. Unarmoured cable shall be

used only for specifically requirements as per directions of Engineer-in-charge. The size of

these cables shall be as per approved erection drawings. NO COPPER CABLE OF SIZE LESS

THAN 2.5 SQ. MM SHALL BE USED. The following selection table shall be followed for

cables of motors unless otherwise specified:

3 Phase 415 V Motor H.P. Direct-on-line Star-Delta Starter

Supply side Motor side Supply side Motor side

Copper Conductor Cable Size : Sq mm

Up to 7.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 X 2.5

10 4 4 4 2 X 2.5

15 6 6 6 2 X 2.5

20 10 10 10 2 X 4

25 16 16 16 2 X 6

30 16 16 16 2 X 6

40 25 25 25 2 X 10

50 35 35 35 2 X 16

Aluminium conductor Cable Size : Sq mm

60 70 70 70 2 X 35

75 95 95 95 2 X 50

100 120 120 120 2 X 70



Page 139 of 430

125 185 185 185 2 X 95

150 240 240 240 2 X 120

180 - - 300 2 X 150

200 - - 2 X 150 2 X150

250 - - 2 X 185 2 X 185

275 - - 2 X 240 2 X 240

300 - - 2 X 240 2 X 240

Note: Cables indicated above in the table shall be only armoured copper conductor cable

for motors 50 HP. For motors rating 60 HP and above, armoured aluminium cable

should be used.

Control Cables

Control cables for use on 415/230 V systems shall be of 1100 V grade, copper conductor,

PVC insulated, PVC sheathed, armoured and overall PVC sheathed, strictly as per IS: 1554

(Part I) - 1988, read with latest revisions, if any. Unarmoured control cable to be

used only if specifically indicated in approved drawings or specially approved by site

in-charge. The size of these cables shall be as per approved erection drawings. NO CABLE

OF SIZE LESS THAN

2.5 SQ. MM SHALL BE USED.

Screened Control Cable for Analogue Signals

These shall be used for carrying out analogue signals. Multi-standard base annealed

copper conductor, PVC insulated, cores colour coded, laid up screened by braiding with ATC

copper wire and finally over all PVC sheathed, complete as per British Standard Code 5308.

Sizes of these cables shall be specified in schedule of quantities/approved drawings.As a

standard practice, these cables shall be of conductor dia 1.0 sq. mm and

number of cores as per requirement. These cables shall be with armouring unless

specified otherwise in schedule of quantities/approved drawings.

Earthing System

Earth Pit

1. Plate type earth electrode with earth pit shall be provided for this work unless otherwise

advised by site engineer due to typical site conditions. Earthing electrode and pit shall be as

per IS: 3043-1987 the latest revision (code of practices for Earthing).

2. For ready reference, sketches for pipe and plate type earth electrode earthing pit have

been shown in the attached sketch no. SK-25. All earth electrodes shall preferably be

driven to a sufficient depth to reach permanent moist soil.

3. Earth pit centre shall be at a minimum distance of 3 M from nearest building, unless

otherwise advised. The minimum 3 M distance shall be maintained between centres of 2

earth pits.

4. Earth electrode for PLC, instrumentation earthing shall be of copper, whereas the same

for all other application (LT MCC /Electrical panels) shall be of GI.

5. Earthing electrodes for Main plant Lighting panel shall be plate type with double earthing.



Page 140 of 430

Earth Bus, Earthing Lead & Earth Wire/Strip

1. All electrical equipment is to be doubly earthed by connecting two-earth strip/

wire conductor from the frame of the equipment to an earthing pit/ main earthing ring. The

earthing ring will be connected via links to several earth electrodes. The cable armoured will be

earthed through the cable glands. Conductor size for connection to various

equipments shall be as specified in the drawing or as instructed by the Engineer-in-charge.

However, the length of the branch leads from equipment to earthing grid/ ring shall not be

more than 10 to 15 meters.

2. All hardware for earthing installation shall be hot dip galvanized. Spring washers shall be

used for all earthing connections of equipment having vibrations. 3. Size of earthing lead/ wire shall be as specified in schedule of quantities/drawings.

Below Table may be considered as general guidelines. 4. However, while deciding type & size of earth lead, the resistance between the earthing system

and the general mass of the earth shall be as per IS code of practice. The earth loop impedance

to any point in the electrical system shall not be in excess of 1.0 ? in Contract to ensure

satisfactory operation of protective devices.

5. G.I. wire/ Copper wire shall be connected to the equipment by providing crimping type

socket/ lug.

6. Wherever earthing strip to be provided in cable tray, it shall be suitably bolted on cable tray and

electrically bonded to the cable tray at regular interval.

7. Excavating & refilling of earth, necessary for laying underground earth bus loops shall be the

responsibility of the Supplier.

8. Wherever earth leads/ strips/ wire are laid in cable trenches, these shall be firmly and suitably

cleared to the walls/ supporting steel structure on which cable is clamped.

9. All LT Electrical panels shall be double earthed i.e. connected to earth pit independently and

earth pit shall have GI earth plate. Earth strips for panels shall be interconnected wherever

possible.

10. Long runs of GI strip shall be connected at each end with lap type welding to ensure

continuity.

Sizing of Earthing Lead Wire

S. No Item Size 1 Control Switches / glands Copper wire 14 SWG 2 Motor / Isolators upto 40 HP Copper wire upto the Cable tray & GI strip 25x3 mm 3 Motor above 40/50 HP upto 125 HP GI strip 40x3 mm 4 Motor above 125 HP GI strip 25x6 mm 5 Switch Board/Motor Control Center GI strip 50x6 mm 6 Earthing main in trenches GI strip 50x6 mm

Other Electrical Items

1. Control circuit junction boxes

2. Cable tray and GI conduits

3. LT Control wires and cables for instrumentation, and interlock along with sensors probes,

limit switches, HG switch etc

4. Cable glands, lugs, route markers

5. Earth pits with electrodes



Page 141 of 430

6. Complete double earthing for all electrical equipment with suitable size earth conductors

7. LT power capacitors for PF correction

8. Rubber mats, fuse puller, hand gloves

The specifications for above items are available in the Special Condition of Contract :

Electrical Section

Special Note :-

1. All Cables are needed to be laid in open on cable rakes and pipe rakes.

This condition overrides any other mention of underground laying elsewhere in the document.

2. All cables shall be XLPE insulation or superior.


3. All Motors shall be confirm to IE – 2 specification only.


4. A Supplier is free to choose starter types of his choice for betterment of the process and

performance. However at any point the makes and specification/ratings cannot be diluted /

compromised.




Page 142 of 430

Technical Specification of Production Block Housing

Structural steel is required to house complete feed mill equipment in the production block

except for exclusion mentioned in the bidding document elsewhere.

All general purpose steel

Shall be conform for physical and chemical composition as per IS 2062 Grade A (of latest

version)

Nominal Dimension of rolled steel

Shall conform to IS 808 for Beams, columns, Channels, Angels

Shall conform to IS 1730 for plates, strips, flats

Shall confirm to IS 3954 for channel sections

Shall conform to IS 1239 for pipes

The Production Block structure shall be bolted/welded type consisting of suitable steel structure

having columns, „I‟ channels, angels, plates, foundation bolts etc. All platforms fabricated from

5 mm thick steel chequered plates, suitably supported to avoid deflection or vibration.

All necessary MS purlins and roof trusses shall be supplied & installed for the sheeting work.

Suitable steel staircase is also required. Necessary MS „B‟ class pipe NB 32 mm railing to be

provided whenever required. Complete steel structure to be painted with two coats of Red-

Oxide Zinc Chromate primer and then 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint. For production block

(main plant) required quantity per unit area of windows to allow natural light and ventilation to

equipments shall be provided with press steel frame, welded mesh for protection from birds and

4 mm minimum thick wired glass. The size, design of windows & colour shall be approved

before supply.

On sided and roof, ALVALUME (AL ZINC) pre-coated profiled rib sheets as per below

specification shall be fixed. Necessary pre-coated Galvalume sheet flashing pieces for

windows, corner pieces shall be fixed to avoid rainwater entry. Profile and colour shade of

sheets shall be approved before supply.

Technical Specification for GALVALUME Colour Coated Roofing / Cladding Sheets

S. No Description Specification 1 Base Metal High Tensile Cold rolled steel AS 1397 2 Al-Zn Alloy

Coating 55 % Aluminium & 43 % Zinc (approx) 1.5 % Silicon (approx); Minimum 150 GSM coating mass ,total of both sides

3 Colour coating 20 microns on top with Silicon Modified Polyester paint & 5 - 7 Micron back-up epoxy coating at Bottom

4 Total Coated thickness

0.50 mm

5 Yield strength 550 Mpa 6 Approx mass per

unit area 4.24 kg /sq.m

7 Approx. Coverage 235 sq.m/ton



Page 143 of 430

8 Fasteners Imported galvanized carbon steel, self-drilling & self-tapping hexagonal head screws of HILTI/ BOSCH)

Note: The make of fasteners should be HILTI /BOSCH with EPDM sealing washers.

Important Notes:

The steel housing shall house all the feed plant equipments required for the pellet production.

The foundation location, layout of plant, load details on the foundations shall have to be

provided to the purchaser to vet the design of the foundation. Foundation bolts for the structure

shall be in the scope of the bidder. The structure for the Main plant shall be of bolted

construction of steel members. The structure housing shall be designed for facilitating future expansion of the

plant by replacing with higher capacity pellet Mills or by adding an additional pelleting line.

The steel structural housing shall be designed using economical sections, so as to reduce the

overall steel requirement, keeping the minimum safety standards as indicated.

The Hammer Mill, Batch Mixer, Pellet Mills, gravity feeder, screw feeder for bin discharger

shall be located in the same platform level. The bidder shall place batch weighers, pellet

coolers, bagging bins such that they are placed in the same platform level. Hence bidder shall

restrict the number of access equipment platforms for equipments to the minimum.

The steel structure framework for housing feed plant equipments shall be designed and checked

by the reputed structural engineer by the bidder. The framework shall be designed for wind load

(highest as per historical records) and for seismic stability as per seismic zone.

Stability certificate for the structure shall be submitted by the successful bidder. Design

calculations for the structure shall be shared with the purchaser and who shall suggest the

bidder, for alteration, wherever found required.

The bidder shall quote for 360 (300 + 60) MT for the plant structure, steel platforms, trench

covers, Pipe Bridge in the bidding document. The bidder shall however economize requirement,

wherever possible without reducing stability of the structure. The steel sheeting work for Main plant shall eliminate unwanted opening and shall be no

leakage into the plant during rains. All unwanted opening in the joint between inclined and

vertical sheets shall be suitably sealed/ closed. Holes on the sheets shall be made only by

drilling and only self tapping fasteners (as described above) shall be used.

To the extent possible cutting of cladding/Roofing sheets shall be avoided and proper selection

of sheet sizes is to be made. If opening are made in the sheets, they shall be properly sealed to

stop bird /dust entry.

Staircase shall be suitably located so that quick approach to working platforms and shall be

1.2m wide with 32 mm pipe hand railing (double braced).

Platforms, railing shall be extended to all working equipment to facilitate inspection, operation

and maintenance.

Windows for the plant shall be located at suitable height above each platform near equipments

for natural ventilation, lighting and for external views. The quantity of windows, design for the

plant shall be approved by the purchaser.

Elevation (all sides) drawings for the plant shall be furnished to the purchaser to decide on the

requirement of windows.

Proper sized sheet canopy or flashing for the windows shall be used to prevent water entry.

The sheet skirting at the lowest level shall be a part of the required of the sheeting.



Page 144 of 430

Technical Specification for Erection, Testing and Commissioning

General technical specification for erection, testing and commissioning is included under special

condition of contract of bidding document. Erection, testing and commissioning is inclusive but not

limited to the following: Positioning of all the feed plant equipment in the approved locations,

including grouting, anchoring etc as per requirement.

Laying of product, aspiration and Service pipelines inclusive of the necessary valves, fittings

etc including the necessary accessories if any.

Anchoring of the pipelines on necessary supports - for all products, aspiration and Service

pipelines.

Insulation of Steam and molasses pipe lines.

Erection/Welding/Grouting into place necessary structural platforms, walkways, handrails etc.,

as per requirement.

Name of all important machines to be written on them after final installation

but before commissioning by a painter. Necessary aero marks and other identification by

painting to be provided on piping as required.

Laying of LT Power cables in conduit pipes, Cable trays, underground (including excavation

etc) as per specifications, including supporting of cable trays/conduits, isolators, junction boxes,

remote push button stations etc. are in scope of tenderer.

Termination of Power cables on MCC and on Motor starters, Capacitors, isolators etc. with

suitable cable glands, lugs etc.

Termination of control cables/sensor wires on RCPs, control panels, limit switches, indicators,

controllers etc

Earthpit installation complete including excavation, installation, refilling etc. Earthing of all electrical equipment with two runs of earth electrode of appropriate size from

earthpits, Panel board trenches etc.

Approval of Electrical installation executed by the bidder by the Electrical Inspectorate of the

state where the plant is located.

Testing and commissioning procedure have been detailed separately as per the „Project

Management‟

Supply of Wear Parts and Spare Parts (TO BE CONFIRMED FOR SUPPLY)

Wear Parts for each site:

Following wear parts are to be supplied with the plant and their cost shall be considered in technical and financial evaluation:

Pellet Mill die 5 Nos Pellet Mill roller Shell 5 sets Hammers for hammer mill 5 sets Sieve for hammer mill 5 sets Beaters and knives for molasses mixer 5 sets Filter bags for aspiration unit 1 set for each unit Flexible canvass/rubber sleeves 1 set for complete plant Spare Jute twine remover rotor 4 sets



Page 145 of 430

Spare parts

For one year operation of plant, the Bidder shall furnish a list of all essential spare parts for items

in the scope with their item rates. Purchaser shall order spare parts separately as per the

plant‟s requirements.

List of preferred Makes of Bought out Items

Description Makes Electronic Weighing Machine

Platform Type METTLER TOLEDO / SARTORIUS / ESSAE TERRAOKE /

JAY INSTRUMENTS/ REIL / ATCO Centrifugal fans ABB / FLAKT WOODS /AEROTECH / DUVENT/ ENGICON

/ RITZ / TLT / NADI / AIR CONTROL Automatic Bag placing, Filling, Weighing, stitching system

IIM /CRONOS RICHARDSON / BOSCH / AVATON/ EEL /TECHNO-WEIGH/ AUTOWEIGH SERVICES/ SARTORIUS

Galvalume steel Pre-coated Profiled sheets

METACOLOUR / ISPAT / INTERARCH/ POLYSTEEL(DENDRO) UNIMETAL /

Soft Starter (Electronic) L&T/ ABB /SIEMENS / ALLEN BRADLEY / DANFOSS Programmable Protection Relay MINILEC VFD ABB / L&T / SIEMENS / ALLEN BRADLEY / DANFOSS /

YASOKAWA Level Transmitter & indicator E&H / ROSEMOUNT Temperature / Pressure Transmitter E&H / ROSEMOUNT RTD RADIX /PYROELETRIC / ALTOP / GIC / TOSHNIWAL PID Controller YOKAGAVA / CHINO / FOXBORO / TATA

HONEYWELL/SIEMENS / ROSEMOUNT Level Switch (float type for liquid &

vibrating fork type for powder) E&H / ROSEMOUNT / P&F / HONEYWELL / TECHROL /

SB ELECTRONICS Vortex / Magnetic Flow meter FORBES MARSHALL / E&H / ROSEMOUNT /

YOKAGAWA / MANAS MICROSYSTEMS Process Control Valve FORBS MARSHALL /SAMSON / ROSEMOUNT Valve SAMSON /DANFOSS / DEMBLA / AVCON / TOSHBRO /

FISHER XOMOX / MASONEILAN Pressure switch / temp switch/

Pressure transmitter / temperature

transmitter / Thermostat

DANFOSS / ALCO / HANSEN / PARKER / E&H/ SWITZER /

CHINO / PYROTECH / ALTOP / GIC/ WIKA / AMERICAN

SPECIALITIES, USA Pressure & Temperature Gauge FIEBIG / H GURU / PRICOL / WAREE / WIKA Dual type Pressure / temp. gauges FIEBIG / H GURU / PRICOL / WARREE Temperature sensors / digital indicator/ controller / recorder

YOKOGAWA / CHINO / TATA HONEYWELL / RADIX / PYROTECH

Energy Monitor L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / ALLEN BRADLEY Voltage / Current / Energy / Power/factor Transducer

RISHABH / ENERCON

PC (Personal Computer) IBM LENEVO/ DELL / ACER/ WIPRO/ COMPAQ/HP PLC System SIEMENS / ALLEN BRADLEY / HONEYWELL/

SCHNEIDER / L&T QUANTUM / EMERSION Printer HP/Canon



Page 146 of 430

Automation System IIM / SIEMENS / ROCKWELL/ TATA HONEYWELL/ INVENSYS / EMERSION/ MELSS / TECHNOWEIGH

Electric Motors ABB / KIRLOSKAR / BHARAT BIJLEE / SIEMENS / NGEF / CROMPTON GREAVES

Air Circuit Breaker L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER MCCB, MPCB L&T / MDS-LEGRAND / SIEMENS / ABB / MERLIN GERIN

/ GE / CROMPTON GREAVES Contactors L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER Starter, Overload Relays L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER Timers (Electronic) L&T / SIEMENS / BCH / GE Fuse Switch Units L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER / C&S/ GE MCBs L&T-HAGER /SIEMENS/ MDS-LEGRAND / GE Push Buttons TEKNIC / ESBEE / SIEMENS / GE / VAISHNO / Indicating Lamps L&T / SIEMENS / VAISHNO / TEKNIC / BINAY Digital Ammeter & Voltmeter L&T /ANERCON / HPL SOCOMEC / MECO Analog Ammeter & Voltmeter RISHABH / IMP / MECO / AE Digital Energy Meter L&T / ENERCON / HPL SOCOMEC / CADEL / AE Analog Energy Meter GEC / UNIVERSAL / HAVE / JAIPUR Power Factor Meter RISHABH / IMP / MECO / AE Current Transformer KAPPA / MECO / AE / IMP / INDCOIL LT Power Cables FINOLEX / FORT GLOSTER / CCI / RPG ASIAN / INCAB /

UNIVERSAL / NICCO LT Copper Control Cables FINOLEX / FORT GLOSTER /CCI / RPG ASIAN / RR

KABELS (UNILAY) / LAPP KABEL Signal & Instrument cable POLYCAB / LAPP KABEL / THERMOPAD Power Capacitors EPCOS / MOMAYA / MEHER / KHATAU JANKAR /

SIEMENS / UNISTAR APFC Relay L&T / BELUKE / EPCOS / PHASITRON / MECO Cable Tray INDIANA / MEK / SUNRISE / SUPER / PILCO Isolating Switches L&T / SIEMENS / ABB / SCHNEIDER / C&S HRC fuses L&T / SIEMENS / EE / C&S IP 55 boxes for motor isolators, push buttons, junction boxes etc.

HENSEL / HANSU

Terminal Blocks WAGO / LAPP INDIA / CONNECT WELL / ELMEX Electronic Load Manager L&T / ENERCON / KRYKARD / Selector Switch L&T / KAYCEE / SALZER / Cable Glands COMET / EX-PROTECTA / DOWELS / LAPP KABEL /

BRACKO Programmable Protection Relay MINILEC Servo Voltage Stabilizer SUVIK / APLAB / NEEL / KRYKARD UPS NUMERIC / EMERSION / APC / HI-REL / DB

ELECTRONICS / APLAB SMF Battery EXIDE / AMCO / YUASA / FURUKAWA / PANASONIC / MS Pipes TATA / JINDAL / KALYANI / MST / ISMT LP Steam / condensate Valves AUDCO / CRESCENT / LEADER / THERMAX / BDK Steam relief valve, traps & strainers SPIRAX / MAZDA / SAMSON / THERMAX Expansion bend for steam line JN MARSHALL / MAZDA Steam Pressure Reducing Valve SPIRAX / MAZDA Air Compressor (Reciprocating) CHICAGO PNEUMATIC / INGERSOLL RAND / ELGI /

KIRLOSKAR / KHOSLA



Page 147 of 430

Refrigerated Air Dryer CHICAGO PNEUMATIC / GEM EQUIPMENTS / SABROE / HIRAS/ INGERSOLL RAND/ ATLAS COPCO

Air lines accessories SHAVO NORGEN / FESTO / AIRMATIC / LEGRIS / NUCON NRV for Air Line FORBES MARSHALL/INTERVALVE / AUDCO / LEADER Air Line valves (Ball) AUDCO/ LEADER/ CRESCENT/ HAWA Auto Drain Valve ULTRA FILTER / ZANDER Molasses Pumps JOHNSON / DELTA / ROTODEL / TUSHACO Duplex filer for molasses line INTERVEST Resin bonded mineral wool ROCKWOOL / LLOYD / UP TWIGA / MINWOOL / Geared Motor / Gear Box PBEGL / POWER MASTER / RADICON/ SHANTHIGEARS /

IC BAUER / BON FIGOLI / EURO DRIVES Structural Steel SAIL / ESSAR / TISCO / RINL / IISCO / JINDAL / EQUIVALENT Air Conditioner (Split) LG/ BLUE STAR/ CARRIER / VOLTAS / HITACHI /

GODREJ Boiler / Stem Raising System THERMAX / FORBES MARSHALL

Weigh Bridge AVERY ONLY

Transformer (HT : 33 KV to 415 V)

COMPTON / ABB / SIEMENS



Page 148 of 430

Battery Limits

Electrical

The bidder‟s scope of works include all the works related to HT & LT electrical

distribution to all the equipment mentioned under the scope of this bidding document, supply

of LT main panel and same to be design with consideration of extended plant capacity from

the outgoing feeders of the Power Control Centre / Main LT panel (in substation), upto all

electrical loads, through panels. Scope includes supply of Main plant MCC, Soft-starter panel

,MCC for Raw material Intake Equipment., Boiler MCC, Raw water pump panel, APFC panel

and their interconnecting cables on trays/pipes/trenches, earthing networks & earth-pits. Cables

to weigh- scales, portable conveyors from relevant MCCs are included in the scope. The

scope includes obtaining approval for electrical installation executed by the

bidder from the Electrical Inspectorate.

Steam

The bidder’s scope of works includes all the equipment, piping, traps assemblies, air

vents etc. for raising and distribution of LP steam from the outlet of PRS,

through LP steam header to all consumption points with condensate recovery system,

necessary piping, valves etc. Obtaining statutory approval, from the local Boiler Inspectorate for

LP steam piping is in the bidder’s scope of works. Any modifications or changes, if suggested

by local Boiler Inspectorate, shall be in the scope of bidder. In nut shell the bidder shall

supply complete steam raising system with Boiler, FO Tanks, Chimney, HP Line, LP Line,

PRS, Insulation etc.

Condensate

All condensate recovered from various sources shall be returned to the Feed water tank

in the Boiler House, through a pressurized recovery system. Bidder‟s scope

shall start from condensate outlet from the molasses pre-heaters (near Pellet mills & near

Molasses storage tanks) to Boiler feed water tank in the boiler house.

Compressed Air

Bidder is required to generate compressed air at required pressure, remove moisture,

store and distribute compressed air to all consumption points in the scope of supply for

cleaning i.e. for all pneumatic flaps / gates operation & air jet filters etc. Drain from the Air

compressor, dryer, receiver shall be taken outside the plant building.

Molasses

Molasses received in tankers shall be unloaded with unloading pumps & directed to any

of the two Molasses storage tank. The bidder's scope of work starts from the outlet of the Road

Tanker upto inlet of Molasses storage tanks and from outlet of Molasses storage Tank upto

Molasses mixers through feed pumps, flow meters, control valves are included in the

bidder's scope. Molasses line from the outlet of Molasses storage Tanks up the plant shall be

insulated & traced with LP steam line.



Page 149 of 430

Silo System [Only Provision Needed]

In this silo system, flat bottom silos 4 Nos. Of minimum 500 MT capacity each of GI

corrugated (Imported) sheet (Min.zinc deposition 450 gm/sq.mtr) bolted type flat bottom with

hydraulically operated serew (imported) for discharging left out materials from bottom of silo,

complete with aeration system and temperature monitoring system for storage of DORB RCC

foundation for silo above ground by purchaser. Each silo to be provided with automatic

sampler. Discharge from each silo to common chain conveyor through

pneumatic slide. Additional emergency gate in the bottom of silos.

All other details of this system for storing DORB shall be similar to that for

grains as mentioned point given below.

This silo system shall be installed in separate location as shown in Production Block Layout

drawing.

Lighting & Earthing System

Electric power, 415 V, 3 phase & neutral shall be made available from Main Lighting

panel located near LT PANEL in the substation room. Cables form this Main

Lighting panel, distribution boards for the Main plant lighting shall be in the scope of the

Bidder. Distribution of lighting within the complete steel structure of production plant area

including supply & installation of light fittings, aviation light with wiring, lightening arrester,

lightening conductor and necessary earth pits & earthing electrodes are in the bidder's scope.

Feed Mill Housing Structure and Civil Works

The bidder shall provide production block foundation and all RCC

works including pedestals up to plinth.

All steel structure of feed mill above plinth including side and roof sheeting, windows etc. in

steel structure is in the bidder‟s scope. The bidder shall optimally design the steel structure &

shall get this cross checked which his structural designer before forwarding the drawing to

purchaser. The purchaser shall in-turn check the design from an approved structural consultant

before clearing the drawing. Any changes so recommended shall be incorporated in the steel

structure for the Main plant. Details of load on foundation for the structure shall be furnished to

the purchaser. This will be used only for the purpose of vetting and final responsibility of all

works shall be bidder’s.

All building works of control room, MCC room, offices and links between

production block and godown will have RCC roof and connected civil work shall be provided

by the bidder. For feed mill structure, enclosure walls up to 2.5 M from plinth shall be

provided by bidder. Trench covers, angle nosing for trenches, platforms, staircase, railing,

ladders, etc as required for equipment approach & maintenance shall be in the scope of the

bidder. All frames, foundation bolts for steel structure and equipments, supports for steel

structure/equipment/piping/cables etc. to be provided by bidder and these shall be grouted by

the bidder once these are fixed/aligned by the bidder. In nut shell all Civil Works shall be in

scope of the bidder.



Page 150 of 430

Equipment

All equipment in Raw Material Godown, Finished Product Godown, Molasses

storage/handling, DORB Storage in Silo/handling & production block to be supplied &

erected by the Bidder. Scope of the bidder starts from the dumping hoppers of intake

conveyor and ends at the outlet of slat conveyor of finished feed. Bidder shall arrange the

inlet to the third cross conveyor (from silo system) above the Proportionate bins. Bypass

protein & Mineral mix plant equipments are not in scope.

Automation

Automation scope starts from the dumping of Raw materials in Raw material Godown

& Silo System till bagging conveyor.

Consumables

All raw materials for production of feed, operating staff for commercial production

shall be provided by purchaser/ project authority. All consumables like Gear oils, lubricants,

packing for flanged joints, flexible joints for vibrating equipments etc. and commissioning

spares required if any, for installation, testing & commissioning till taking over the plant by

the purchaser, shall be provided by bidder and the same after taking over the plant shall be

provided by purchaser / project authority.

Inclusions : [ In Bidder’s Scope ]

Description

1. All Civil works

2. Workshop Tools & Machines

3. Sanitary Installation, Water Disposal

4. Environmental Works, Access Roads,

5. Overhead tank for raw water,

6. Maintenance workshop and furniture for engineering Store,

7. HT Electricals, DG Set

8. Steam generation plant, HP steam piping, PRS,

9. Water Handling equipment, piping, water softener

10. Electronic weighbridge

Exclusions : [ From Bidder’s Scope ]

Description

1. Fire Extinguishers, Water Hydrants etc.,

2. Laboratory Glassware, Chemicals & Equipment,

3. Telephone & Intercom Systems,

4. By-pass protein plant,



Page 151 of 430

SCHEDULE-III

TERMS & CONDITIONS

FOR

ERECTION/TESTING/

COMMISSIONING

OF

CATTLE FEED PLANT &

MACHINERY


Phone No.0755-2776086 / 2771274 : Fax : 2776086

Website : www.mplivestock.com





Page 152 of 430

SCHEDULE-III

GENERAL TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR ERECTION CONTRACT 1.O Material drawings etc. 1.1 All goods or materials shall be erected/supplied under the scope of erection with the

specifications stated herein, and those covered under scope of work.

1.2 All goods or materials supplied or used shall be unused, new and of first quality. Where

foreign or partly foreign goods or material are to be used, this must be specifically stated and

brought to the notice of MPLPDC.

1.3 Wherever necessary or required by MPLPDC, the erector shall furnish the necessary test

and/or inspection certificate etc. from the appropriate authorities as per IBR, IER and other

statutory regulations at no extra cost.

1.4 All remarks, suggestions and modifications as suggested by the authorities mentioned in

1.3 above, shall be carried out by the erector to the entire satisfaction of the referred

authorities and no extra cost shall be payable in this regard to the erector by the MPLPDC.

1.5 The supplier shall furnish the necessary foundation drawings with all pertinent details for each

of the equipment under the purview of the supply along with the sets of drawings for approval.

2.0 Assigning & Subletting :

Assigning or subletting the contract shall not be done by the party unless written permission is obtained from MPLPDC. Written permission if given shall not relieve erector from his obligations under the contract and he shall take full responsibility for all the works carried out by the Sub-vendor.

3.0 Purchase r’s comments :

Erector shall not be relieved of his obligations under the order including but not limited to his warranty obligations stated herein merely by incorporating the purchaser‟s design and

fabrication comments on the goods hereunder. 4.0 Secrecy Clause :

4.1 The technical information, drawings, specifications and other related documents forming part

of purchase order are the property of Purchaser and shall not be used for any other purpose,

except for the execution of the order. All rights, including rights in the event of grant of a

patent and registration of designs are reserved. The technical information, drawings,

specifications, records and other documents shall not be copied, transcribed, traced or

reproduced in any other form or otherwise, in whole or part and/or duplicated, modified,

divulged and/or disclosed to a third party nor misused in any other form

whatsoever without Owner‟s or his collaborators previous consent in writing, except to the

extent required for the execution of this order. This technical information,

drawings,specifications and other related documents shall be returned to owner with all

approved copies and duplicate, if any, immediately after they have been used for

the agreed purpose.

4.2 In the event of any breach of this provision, erector shall indemnify the owner from any loss,



Page 153 of 430

cost or damage or any other claim whatsoever from his collaborator and or any other parties

claiming from or through them or from any other party in respect of such a breach. 5.0 Scope of Contract for Erection :

The erection would comprise of positioning and installing all CFP, miscellaneous and service

equipments under the purview of his supply and those mentioned herein as per the approved

machinery layout drawings. The scope of mechanical erection involves access preparation for

moving of the plant and equipment including their fittings, from the work site godown(s) or

from the place within the site where they have been unloaded, to the place of erection,

decorating, placing on foundation wherever specified or required; erection of pipes

and connections of necessary services to the main or ancillary branch of the service lines, but

all within the battery limits, specified starting up and successful commissioning to get the

specified rated output for each equipment. The installation should be carried out as per the

drawing(s) submitted by the erector and approved by MPLPDC. Necessary Pipes fittings and

valves etc. for interconnecting the equipment would be installed by the erector and it would

generally be done according to the piping layout to be prepared by the erector and approved by

MPLPDC. All the serviced pipes, fittings and valves etc. shall be supplied and installed by

the erector and this should be carried out as per service piping drawings prepared by the erector

and approved by MPLPDC.

All necessary foundation bolts and their grouting on floor, walls, etc. as per

the requirement, are included in the scope of erection & installation. All the supply covered in

this part shall be governed by the same general terms and conditions given in the tender

document against which the offer was made. Further the specifications of the contract are

intended to describe and provide for a finished piece of work. They are intended to be

complementary and what is required by either shall be as if required by all. It is to be

understood and agreed by erector that the work described shall be complete in every details

even though every item necessarily involved is not particularly mentioned herein. Erector shall

be required to provide all Labour materials and equipments necessary for the entire completion

of the work describe and shall not avail himself of any manifesting or unintentional error,

omission or inconsistency that may exist. Erector shall carry out and complete the work in

every respect in accordance with the contract and accordance with the directions and

to the entire satisfaction of MPLPDC and the manufacturer’s

representatives.

6.0 E n gin eer’s Ins tructions :

MPLPDC may in his absolute discretion, from time to time issue further drawings and/or written instructions, details directions and explanations which are collectively referred to as „Engineer’s instructions‟ in regard to :

6.1 Any additional drawings and explanations to exhibit or illustrate details. 6.2 The variation or modifications of the design, quality or quantity of work or the additional or

omissions or substitutions of any works.] 6.3 Any discrepancy in the drawings or between the schedule of quantities

and/or specifications. 6.4 The removal from the site of any material brought thereon by erector and the substitution of

any other material thereof.



Page 154 of 430

6.5 The removal and/or re-execution of any work executed by the erector. 6.6 The dismissal from the work of any persons employed thereupon.

6.7 The opening up for inspection of any work covered up.

6.8 The amending and making good of any defects.

7.0 Right of MPLPDC :

7.1 The various parts of the contract are intended to be complementary to each other but should

any discrepancy appear or any misunderstandings arises as to the interpretations of anything

contained therein, the explanation of MPLPDC shall be final and binding.

7.2 Right to direct work :

7.2.1 MPLPDC shall have the right to direct the manner in which all work under this contract shall

be conducted in so far as it may be necessary to secure the safe and proper progress and

specified quality of the work, all work shall be done and all materials shall be furnished to the

satisfaction and approval of MPLPDC. 7.2.2 Whenever, in the opinion of the MPLPDC, erector has made marked departures from the

schedule of the completion laid down in the agreement or when untoward circumstances force

a such departure from the said schedule, MPLPDC in order to assure the compliance with the

schedule and the provisions of the agreement, shall direct the order, pace and method of

conducting the work, which shall be adhered to by the erector. 7.2.3 If, in the judgment of MPLPDC, it become necessary at any time to accelerate the over all

pace of the plant erection work erector when, ordered and directed by MPLPDC shall cease

work at any particular point and transfer his men to such other point or points and execute such

portion of his work, as may be required, to enable MPLPDC to hasten and properly engage

and carry on their work, all directed by the MPLPDC.

7.2.4 Night work will be permitted only with prior approval of MPLPDC, MPLPDC may also

direct erector to operate extra shifts over and above normal day shift to ensure completion of

contract as scheduled or due to exigent circumstances, if in his opinion, such work is

required.

7.3 Right to order Modifications of Methods & Equipment:

If at any time the erectors methods, materials or equipment appear to MPLPDC to be unsafe,

inefficient or inadequate for securing the safety of workmen or the public, the quality of work

or the rate of progress required, he may order erector to ensure their safety, and increase their

efficiency and adequacy and the erector shall promptly comply with such orders. If at any

time erectors working force and equipment are in the opinion of MPLPDC is inadequate for

securing the necessary progress as herein stipulated erector shall if so directed increase the

working force and equipment to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance

with the schedule of completion. The absence of such demands from MPLPDC shall not

relieve erector of his obligations to secure the quality, the safe conducting of the work and the

rate of progress required by the contract the erector alone shall be and remain liable and

responsible for the safety, efficiency and adequacy of his methods, materials, working force



Page 155 of 430

and equipment, irrespective of whether or not he makes any changes as a result or any order or

orders received from MPLPDC.

8 Changes/ Variation in the work :

8.1 If it becomes necessary or desirable to modify the contract and the specifications therein

contained and the drawings, in a manner not materially affecting the substance thereof, or to

make changes by altering, adding to or deducting from the work, or to add correlated work

not now covered by the contract to the work to be done under his contract MPLPDC may,

without invalidating the contract, direct such changes increase the cost of work and payment

therefore is not covered by the prices bid for the various items, erector shall be reimbursed

for such changes under a supplementary contract. In case such changes shall diminish the cost

of the work, appropriate deductions towards such reduction in cost shall be made from the

contract price.

8.2 Erector when requested in writing by MPLPDC shall perform extra work and furnish extra

material not covered by the specifications but forming an inseparable part of the work

contracted for and shall be paid extra for all such work at rates and terms mutually agreed

upon.

8.3 Extra items, if any, shall be paid on the basis of vouchers of cost of materials and labour

procured by erector. Erector shall be paid 15% of the cost of material and labour towards his

profit, supervision and overhead charges.

8.4 Items not covered by the schedule of quantities but similar in nature to the items already

covered shall be paid for, the rates being worked out on the basis of rates quoted for similar

items.

8.5 The purchaser shall make any variation of the form, quality or quantity of the works or any part

there of that may. In his opinion, be necessary and for that purpose, or if for any other

reason it shall, in his opinion be desirable, he shall have power to order the supplier to do and

the supplier shall do any of the following:

a. Increase or decrease the quantity of any work included in the contract, b.

Omit any such work, c. Change the character or quality or kind of any such work, d. Change the levels, lines, position and dimension of any part of the works, and e. Execute additional work of any kind necessary for the works and no such variation

shall in any way vitiate or invalidate the contract, but the value, if any, of all such

variations shall be taken into account in ascertaining the amount of the contract price.

8.6 The supplier shall make no such variations without an order in writing of the purchaser. 8.7 Provided that no order in writing shall be required for increase or decrease in the quantity

of any work where such increase or decrease is not the result of an order given under this

clause, butis the result of an order given under this clause, but is the result of the quantities

exceeding or being less than those stated in the contract/bill of quantities. Provided also that

if for any such order verbally, the supplier shall comply with such verbal order given by the

purchaser, whether before or after the carrying out of the order, shall be deemed to be an



Page 156 of 430

order in writing within the meaning of this clause. Provided further that if the supplier shall

within seven days confirm in writing to the purchaser and in writing within 14 days, it shall

be deemed to be an order in writing by the purchaser.

8.8 All extra or additional work done or work omitted by order of the purchaser shall be valued

at the rates and prices set out in the contract if in the opinion of the purchaser, the same shall

be applicable. If the contract does not contain any rates or prices applicable to the extra or

additional work, then suitable rates or prices shall be agreed upon between the purchaser and

the supplier. In the event of disagreement the purchaser shall fix such rates or prices as shall,

in his opinion, be reasonable and proper.

8.9 Provided that if the nature or amount of any omission or addition relative to the nature or

amount of the whole of the works or to any part thereof shall be such that, in the opinion of

the contract for any item of the works, is by reason of such omission or addition, rendered

unreasonable or inapplicable, then a suitable rate or price shall be agreed upon between the

purchaser and the supplier. In the event of disagreement the purchaser shall fix such other

rate or price as shall, in his opinion, be reasonable and proper having regard to the

circumstances.

8.10 Provided also that no increase or decrease mentioned above or variation of rate or price shall

be made unless, as soon after the date of the order as is practicable and, in the case of extra or

additional work before the commencement of the work or as soon thereafter as is practicable,

notice shall have been given in writing:

a. By the supplier to the purchaser of his intension to claim extra payment

or a varied rate or price, or

b. By the purchaser to the supplier of is intension to vary a rate or price.

8.11 If, on certified completion of the whole of the works, it shall be found that a reduction or

increase greater than 15 percent of the sum named in the letter of acceptance results from the

aggregate effect of all variation orders but not from any other cause, the amount of the contract

price shall be adjusted by such sum as may be greed between the supplier and the purchaser or,

failing agreement, fixed by the purchaser having regard to all material and relevant factors,

including the suppliers site and general overhead costs of the contract. 8.12 The supplier shall send to the purchasers representative once in every month an account giving

particulars, as full and detailed as possible, of all claims for any additional payment to which

ordered by the supplier may consider himself entitled and of all extra or additional work

ordered by the purchaser which he has executed during the preceding month. 8.13 No final or interim claim for payment for any such work or expense will be considered which

has not been included in such particulars. Provided always that the purchaser shall be entitled

to authorize payment to be made for any such work or expense, notwithstanding the suppliers

failure to comply with this condition, if the supplier has, at the earliest practicable opportunity,

notified the purchaser in writing that he intends to make a claim for such work. 8.14 The work shall be carried out as approved by the purchaser or his

authorized representative/s from time to time, keeping in view the overall schedule of

completion of the project. The suppliers job schedule must not disturb or interfere with

purchasers or the other suppliers schedules of day-to-day work. The purchaser will provide all



Page 157 of 430

reasonable assistance for carrying out the jobs. 8.15 Night work will be permitted only with prior approval of the purchaser. The purchaser may

also direct the supplier to operate extra shifts over and above per schedule.

Adequate lighting wherever required should be provided by the supplier at no extra cost. The

supplier should employ qualified electricians and wiremen for these facilities. 8.16 In-case of suppliers failure to provide these facilities. in case of suppliers failure to provide

these facilities and personnel, the purchaser has the right to arrange such facilities and

personnel and to change the cost thereof to the supplier. 8.17 In order to enable the purchaser to arrange for insurance of all items received at the site

including the items of supply covered under this contract, the supplier shall furnish necessary

details of all the equipment immediately on its receipt at site, to the

purchaser. Any default on the part of the supplier due to which any item does not get covered

under the insurance of the purchaser; the consequential losses shall be charged to the supplier.

8.18 The purchaser shall not be liable for or in respect of any damages or compensation

payable at law in respect or in consequence of any accident or injury to any workman or

other person in the employment of the supplier or any sub-supplier, save and except an

accident or injury resulting from any act or default of the purchaser, his

agents, servants. The supplier shall indemnify and keep indemnified the purchaser against all

such damages and compensation, save and except as aforesaid and against all claims,

proceedings, costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

8.19 The supplier shall ensure against such liability with as insurer during the whole of the time

that any persons are employed by him on the works shall, when required, produced to the

purchaser or purchasers representative such policy of insurance and the receipt for payment of

the current premium. Provided always that, in respect of any persons employed by any

sub-supplier, the suppliers obligations to ensure as aforesaid under this sub-clause shall be

satisfied if the sub-supplier shall have insured against the liability in respect of such persons

in such manner that the purchaser is indemnified under the policy, but the supplier shall

require such sub-supplier to produce to the purchaser or purchasers representatives, when

required such policy of insurance and the receipt for the payment of the current premium

8.20 Whenever proper execution of the work under the contract depends on the jobs carried out by

some other supplier, the supplier should inspect all such erection and installation jobs and

report to the purchaser regarding any defects or discrepancies. The suppliers failure to do so

shall constitute as acceptance of the other suppliers installation/jobs as fit and proper for

reception of suppliers works except those defects which may develop after execution. Supplier

should also report any discrepancy between the executed work and the drawings. The supplier

shall extend all necessary help/cooperation to other suppliers working at the site in the interest

of the work.

8.21 Supplier shall carryout final adjustments of foundations, leveling and dressing of

foundation surfaces, bedding and grouting of anchor bolts, bedplates etc. required for seating

of equipment in proper position. The supplier shall be responsible for the reference lines

and proper alignment of the equipment. However, all civil works like making cutouts in



Page 158 of 430

walls, floors and ceilings for pipelines shall be done by the suppliers.

Adjustment & leveling are to be carried out by the supplier at no extra cost. The purchaser

shall arrange the necessary refilling/repairs of these cutouts and pockets. The supplier should

arrange for laying the supports, cutouts, grouting of bolts, etc. when the civil works are

in progress, so as to avoid refilling/repair works. The purchaser at suppliers costs

shall make the damages occurring to civil and other works good. For fixing of

piping/equipment supports on wall/beams/roof floor etc. preferably anchor bolts shall be used

by the supplier. Drilling of holes for fixing anchor bolts is in the scope of supplier without any

extra cost.

8.22 The supplier shall keep a check on deliveries of the equipment covered in the scope of erection

work and shall advise the purchaser well in advance regarding possible hold- up in suppliers

work due to the likely delay in delivery of such equipment/components to enable him to take

remedial actions.

DUTIES OF THE SUPPLIER VIS-À-VIS THE PURCHASER.

The equipment and the items, if any, to be supplied by the purchaser for erection, testing and

commissioning shall be as listed in the contract.

Besides the utilities/services as specified in battery limits the following

assistance/facilities shall also be provided to the supplier by the purchaser for carrying out

the installation work.

Plant building ready for installation of equipment/items.

Necessary temporary water for carrying out the installation shall be supplied at only one

point within the project site by the purchaser free of charge. All necessary distribution

tapings from this point onwards shall be the suppliers responsibility.

Necessary temporary power is provided by the purchaser, the recovery @1% of total

installation charges will be recovered. However, the supplier shall supply all the items such

as energy meter, switchgear etc. required for getting temporary power.

The details of temporary water and power requirements shall be furnished seven days in

advance by the supplier to enable the purchaser to make timely arrangement.

If the supplier suffers delay and/or incurs costs from failure on the part of the purchaser to

give possession of the civil works in accordance with mutually agreed schedule, the

purchaser shall determine:

Any extension of time to which the supplier is entitled under the contract

The amount of such costs, which shall be added to the contract price, and shall notify the

supplier accordingly.

9 Erector’s Functions :

9.1 Erector shall provide everything necessary for the proper execution of the works,

according to the patent and meaning of the drawings, schedule of quantities and

specifications taken together whether the same may or may not be particularly shown or

described therein provided that the same can reasonably be inferred there from and if the

erector finds any discrepancy therein, he shall immediately and in writing refer the same to

mailto:@1%25



Page 159 of 430

MPLPDC where decision shall be final and binding on all the parties. 9.2 It is not expected that the work under contract will be subcontracted. However, in case erector

desires to subcontract a part of the work in the interest of the project, he shall request in

writing to MPLPDC for approval for the same giving full and complete details regarding

the proposed subcontractor, his experience and the terms of subcontract.

Approval from MPLPDC for subcontracting part of the work shall not relieve the erector

from any of his obligations and responsibilities under this contract. 9.3 Erector shall proceed with the work to be performed under this contract and each and

every part and details thereof, in the best and most workman like manner by engaging

qualified, careful and efficient workers, and do the several parts thereof at such time and in

such order as MPLPDC may direct and finish such work in strict conformance with the plans,

drawing and/or specifications, and any changes, modifications thereof made by MPLPDC.

9.4 The supplier shall provide everything necessary for proper execution of the

works, according to the drawings, schedule of quantities and specifications taken

together whether the same may or may not be particularly shown or described therein,

provided that the same can reasonably be inferred there from and if the

supplier finds any discrepancy therein, supplier shall immediately refer the same to the

purchaser whose decision shall be final and binding on the supplier.

9.5 The supplier shall proceed with the work to be performed under this contract in the best and

workman like manner by engaging qualified and efficient workers and finish the work in strict

conformance with the drawings and specifications and any changes/modifications thereof made

by the purchaser.

9.6 Any work is to be done at place other than the site of the works erector shall obtain the

written permission of MPLPDC for doing so. 10 Unloading, Inspection & Storing :

10.1 Erector shall promptly unload from the carriers all the materials/equipment covered under this

contract. It is the erectors sole responsibility to keep in touch with the MPLPDC and others

to inform himself on the expected date and time or arrival of carriers at site and ensure that

his men aids are available in time to unload the material/equipment and promptly release

the carriers. Any demurrage charges incurred due to the delay in unloading the

materials/equipment and releasing the carriers shall be changed to the erector‟s account.

Erector shall plan in advance his requirements of jacks, cranes, sleepers etc. including those

not specified here in but required to unload the material/equipment promptly and efficiently.

10.2 Unless excluded in the specifications, erector shall safety transport the material/equipment to

the storage area and store the same in systematic manner with tags for

easy identification and retrieval. He shall also maintain all required stores records and furnish

all required reports. If in the opinion of MPLPDC the erector is not taking any action to

unload and transport the material to site. MPLPDC reserves the right to arrange for the same

through alternative agencies, entirely at the cost of the erector. It is further clarified that even

in the event MPLPDC arranges for the unloading, transportation storage space etc. under the

circumstances described above, the liability and responsibility will rest with the erector.



Page 160 of 430

10.3 All materials and equipment received at site, before erector arrives at site, shall

be unloaded and stored by MPLPDC at the risk responsibility and cost of the erector. These

materials shall be handed over to the erector and there upon the erector shall inspect the same

and furnish the receipt to the MPLPDC. The protection safety and security of the material so

taken over shall be the responsibility of the erector until it is handed over to the MPLPDC

after erection and/or commissioning. Any and all the material/equipment covered under the

scope of this contract, received at site after erector arrives at a site shall be unpacked, inspected

and checked and against invoices by the erector. He shall furnish shortage and damages reports

to MPLPDC within a week of the receipt of material and assist the MPLPDC in lodging claims

with the Insurance Companies. In case MPLPDC incurs a loss due to the delay in lodging

insurance claims, which are attributable to erector all such losses shall be deducted from

erector‟s bills. Erector shall repack materials/equipments as required and store the same in an

orderly manner.

10.4 Erector shall also inform MPLPDC in right time regarding the repairs/replacement required

towards the items damages/lost in order to enable the MPLPDC to

arrange for repairs/replacement well in time and avoid delays due to non availability of

equipment and part at the time of their actual need.

10.5 Erector shall arrange for periodical inspection of material equipment in his custody until

taken over by the MPLPDC and shall carry out all protective and preservative measures

thereupon.

10.6 Erector shall also keep a check on the deliveries of the equipment/material covered in his

scope of erection and shall advise MPLPDC well in advance regarding possible hod ups in

his work due to expected delays in delivery of equipment, to enable MPLPDC to expedite the

deliveries and take other remedial action.

11 Other Contrac tors/Erector’s Work :

If any part of Erector‟s work depends, for proper execution, upon the work of any other erector, the erector shall inspect and promptly report to MPLPDC any defect in such work of

other contractors that render it unsuitable for use. Failure to do so shall be deemed as an

acceptance of the other erector‟s work as fit and proper for the erection of his work except as

to defects which may develop in the work of other contractors after the

proper execution of the work. To ensure proper execution of his subsequent work, erector

shall measure work already in place and shall at once report to MPLPDC and discrepancy

between the executed work and the drawings.

12 Supply of Tools, Tackles & Materials :

12.1 For full completion of the work, erector shall at his own expense furnish all necessary erection tools, machine tools, power tools, tackles, hoists, cranes, derricks, cables, slings, skids

scaffolding work benches, tools for rigging, cribbing and blocking, welding

machines and all other associated protective equipment, instruments, appliances, materials and



Page 161 of 430

supplies required for unloading, transporting, storing, erecting, testing and

commissioning all the equipment of the plant that may be required to accomplish the work under

the contract unless otherwise provided for. Adequacy of such tools will be subject to final

determination by MPLPDC.

12.2 Erector shall also furnish all necessary expandable device like anchors, grinding and abrasive

wheels, raw plugs hacksaw blades, tape, dyes, drills, reamers, chisels, files carborundum stones,

oil stones, wire brushes, necessary bamboo scaffolding, ladders wooden planks timers,

sleeper and consumable material like oxygen, acetylene, argon,

lubricating, oils, greases, cleaning fluids, welding rods cylinder oils, graphite powder and

flakes fasteners, gaskets temporary supports stainless steel shims of various thickness as

required, cotton waste, cheese cloth and all other miscellaneous supplies of every kind not

necessarily listed above but required for carrying out the work under contract.

12.3 Erector shall provide all reasonable facilities including tools personnel etc. and ensure

coordination with MPLPDC and erection supervisors of other equipment suppliers to enable

them to carry out all supervision measurements checks etc. in a satisfactory manner.

12.4 Erector shall not dispose off transport or withdraw any tools, tackles, equipments and material

provided by him for the execution of the work without taking prior written approval from

MPLPDC at all times shall have right to refuse permission for disposal, transport or withdraw

all of tools, tackles, equipment and material which in the opinion of MPLPDC will adversely

affect the efficient and expeditious completion of the project.

12.5 Machinery Foundation :

All the civil foundations as per the drawings furnished by the manufactures/suppliers shall be

arranged by supplier and vetted. The erector shall place the equipment on the foundations and

carry out final adjustment of the foundations alignment dressing of foundation

surface, providing and grouting of anchor bolts pockets etc. and set the equipment properly as

per approved layout drawing and manufacture instructions.

12.6 Structural Platform :

Supply of all necessary materials and installation of structural platforms,

structural supports and access arrangement required for the various equipment is included

within the scope of mechanical installation and should be so carried out that all operation can

be easily manoeuvred.

The details and drawings in regard of the platforms shall be worked out/prepared by the

erector and submitted to the MPLPDC for approval. The items should be executed as per the

approval details drawing. The payment will be made on the basis of cost per unit weight as

offered by erector and accepted by MPLPDC.

13 For Erection & Commissioning :

The erector will be required to take a „storage-cum-erection‟ insurance for the items to be

erected and commissioned by him. For this insurance premium shall however

be reimbursed to him by the buyer. In case, the erector is not able to arrange insurance at



Page 162 of 430

reasonable rates acceptable to the buyer, the buyer shall arrange the same on behalf of the

erector. However, in the event of any loss/damage to the equipment during storage or

erection and commissioning, the erector alone shall have to lodge the claims

with underwriters and pursue the same till settlement irrespective of the fact whether the

insurance policy is taken by the erector or arranged by the buyer on his behalf. Further, it shall

be sole responsibility of the erector to make good the losses/damages expeditiously without

any extra cost to the buyer.

14. All the equipment/machineries including motors, pumps, starters, junction

boxes, isolators, and boxes, tanks supporting structures, pipe supports and brackets of MS,

GI, Pipes which are not insulated and all exposed and visible cost Iron parts shall be given a

double coat of anticorrosive primers. MS and GI parts (within the building) should be given

a final coat of paint of approved shade. However, if so instructed by MPLPDC in respect of

certain particular items/equipments, the erect should touch up breaches in the paintings. All

surfaces must be properly cleaned and all scale, dirt and grease should be removed prior to

painting. Spray painting must preferably be used on all the equipment, machineries and

wherever else practicable. Suitable and necessary cleaning/wiping of slight/dial glasses, other

non-metallic parts, flooring, walls and other surfaces which have been spoiled by paint during

painting must also be carried out by the erector. Lettering and other markings, including

capacity and flow direction markings, shall also be carried out by the tenderer on the tanks,

pipe lines, starters, motors, isolators and wherever else necessary as directed and as per the

standard practice of installation. The scope of paining includes a double steel primer under

coat and a top coat of paint of approved shade and quality, wherever possible ISI colour

codes and colour charts must be adhered to. However, the final colour code shall

have to be got approved from MPLPDC and any changes suggested thereby should be

carried out.

15.0 Cleaning Chemicals & Lubricants :

The necessary quantities of cleaning chemicals, make-up lubricants, etc. required for the

installation, commissioning, testing and start-up all the equipments are to be supplied by the

erector free of cost.

16.0 Access preparation :

In case access preparation is required to be made for shifting the equipment the erector shall bring to the notice of MPLPDC, the quantity of work involved for making such a

preparation. Consequently MPLPDC would review the matter in consultation with the erector

and decide the course of action.

17.0 Setting put works, lines & Grades :

17.1 Building, foundation and other civil works shall be provided by MPLPDC unless indicated

otherwise. Erector shall carry out all adjustments of foundations, levels, dressing

of foundation surfaces, bedding and grouting of anchor bolts and bed plate etc. as may be

required for seating of the equipment in proper position. Erector shall be responsible for

obtaining correct reference lines for purposes of fixing the alignment of

various equipments from master bench marks furnished by MPLPDC. Any minor alternation

required in rectifying the anchor bolts pockets, anchor bolts, etc. shall be carried out by



Page 163 of 430

erector at no extra cost. The erector shall supply all the necessary foundation and anchor bolts,

bed plates etc. without any extra cost.

17.2 Erector shall supply, fix and maintain at his cost during the execution of any work, all the

necessary centering, scaffolding, staging, planking, timbering, strutting, shorting pumping,

fencing boarding guarding and lighting by night as well as by day, required not only for the

proper execution and protection of the said work, but also for the protection of the pumping

station and of the safety of any adjacent roads, streets, cellars, vaults ovens, walls, houses,

buildings and all other erections, matters or things. Erector shall take out and remove any or

all such centring, scaffolding, staging, planking timbering, strutting, shorting etc. as occasion

shall require or when ordered to do so and shall fully reinstalled and make good all matters

and things disturbed during execution of the work, to the satisfaction of MPLPDC. Erector

shall be paid no additional amount for the above.

18.0 Erection & Inspection :

18.1 Erector shall prepare a detailed and comprehensive erection schedule for review and approval of MPLPDC‘s site Engineer and supplier’s erection supervisors. This „Approved‟

erection schedule shall form the basis for evaluating the pace of all the erection works to be

performed by erector.

18.2 The schedule shall show approximately the date on which each part of divisions of the work

is expected to begin based on his knowledge of the works of the other contractors and the

date when the work is schedules to be finished. Upon the request of MPLPDC erector should be

prepared to discuss his schedule in relation to the master schedule and shall coordinate his

work with that of the other erectors/contractors as determined by MPLPDC.

18.3 The work so far as it is carried out on MPLPDC’s promised shall be carried out at such time as

MPLPDC may approve consistent with the construction schedule and so as not to interfere

unnecessarily with the conduct of MPLPDC’s business and MPLPDC will give erector

all reasonable assistance for carrying out the work.

18.4 Erector shall revise and up date his erection schedule periodically (at least once every

calendar month) to indicate actual progress of works, in relation to scheduled progress.

Erector shall also submit monthly progress reports indicating progress work

giving scheduled and actual percentage completions, causes for delay etc. as well as such

other reasonable reports MPLPDC may request from time to time.

18.5 Adherence to the instructions of supervisory engineers of manufacturers, where provided by

MPLPDC is compulsory. Erector shall work as per the procedure suggested

by manufacturer and shall complete erection of equipment in such a way so as not to interfere

with or prevent equipment from functioning as intended, as well as to the

entire satisfaction of the manufacturer’s supervisor/ MPLPDC. Erector shall also permit and

provide all facilities for manufacturer’s erection super visors to carry out all checks that they

may wish to and approve any erection procedure and/or final setting and

alignment of components, in order to satisfy themselves that erection has been carried out as

intended by them. This shall, however, in no way relieve erector of his responsibility for

providing adequate and competent supervision and quality workmanship. In case of any



Page 164 of 430

dispute, the decision of the MPLPDC /Manufacturer’s erection supervisor shall be final and

binding on the erector.

18.6 Erector shall haul materials and equipment furnished at MPLPDC‘s storage or unloading areas

to the points where they are to be used, in the construction work, install the

materials and equipment in their final location and classify and store all surplus and auxiliary

parts in a systematic manner in the warehouse, where they can be readily identified

and located when needed at a later date.

18.7 In the execution of the work no person other than erector or his duly

appointed representatives, his subcontractors and their workman shall be allowed to do work

at the site except by the special permission, in writing of MPLPDC or their representatives,

but access to everywhere in the site at all times shall be accorded to MPLPDC

and their representatives and other authorized officials and statutory public authorities.

Nevertheless, erector shall not object to the execution of the work by other

erector/contractor or tradesman whose names shall have been previously communicated in

every facility for the execution of their several functions simultaneously with his own.

18.8 Erector shall carry out the required „minor modification work‟ at site as required to efficiently

complete the work covered in this contract at no extra cost over his contracted sum. However

„minor modifications‟ shall not involve more than 24 man hours per each item of such work.

However, in case of „major modifications‟ which are required to be done on the equipment,

for no fault of erector he shall be compensated on the basis of man day rates. It is the

responsibility of the erector to get the prior approval for such

„major modifications work‟ from MPLPDC before such works are taken up. Erector shall

also get the estimates and the actual time sheets certified by MPLPDC and these certified

time sheets will be the basis for processing his bills for the „Major modifications‟.

18.9 If the work or any portion thereof shall be damaged in any way excepting by the acts of

MPLPDC, or if defects not readily detected on prior inspection and which shall develop

before the final completion and acceptance of the whole work, erector shall forthwith make

good, without compensation, such damage or defects in a manner satisfactory to MPLPDC.

In no case shall defective or imperfect work will be retained.

18.10 Erector at all times shall work in co-ordination with MPLPDC’s engineering staff and after

them all reasonable facilities to become familiar with the erection, operation

and maintenance of the equipments.

18.11 In respect of observation of local rules, administrative orders, working staff and the like,

erector and his personnel shall co-operate with the MPLPDC.

18.12 Erector shall not sell, assign, mortgage, hypothecate or remove equipment or materials which

have been installed or which may be necessary for the completion of the contract without the

consent of MPLPDC in writing.

18.13 Inspection of work :

MPLPDC of any person appointed by them shall have access and right to inspect the work, or any part thereof at all times and places during the progress of the work. The inspection and supervision is for the purpose of assuring MPLPDC that the plans and specifications are



Page 165 of 430

being properly executed and while MPLPDC and their representatives will extend to the

erector all desired assistance in interpreting the plan and specifications, such assistance

shall not relieve erector of any responsibility for the work. Any work which proves faulty

shall be corrected by erector without delay. The fact that MPLPDC or their

representatives have not pointed out faulty work or work which is not in accordance

with plans and specifications shall not relieve the erector from correcting such work as

directed by MPLPDC without additional compensation. MPLPDC their representatives

and the employees shall at all reasonable times have free access to the works and/or to

the workshop factories or other places where materials are being prepared or

constructed or fabricated for the contract and also to any place where the materials are

lying or from where they are being obtained and erector shall give every

facility to MPLPDC and his representative for inspection examination and test

of the materials and workmanship even to the extent of discontinuing portion of the

work temporarily or of uncovering or taking down portion of finished work.

19.0 Protection to Plant :

19.1 Except in case where MPLPDC’s express permission, is applied for and received in

writing no use of MPLPDC’s plant facilities such as cranes, passenger elevator, toilets

showers or machine shop etc. shall be made by erector or his employees.

19.2 MPLPDC shall not be responsible or held liable for any damage to person or properly

consequent upon the use, misuse or failure of any construction tools and equipment used

by erector of any of his subcontractors, even though such constructions

tools and equipment may be furnished rented or loaned to erector or any of this

contractors. The acceptance and/or use of any such constructions tools and equipment

by erector or his subcontractor shall be constructed to mean that erector accepts all

responsibility for and agrees to indemnify and save harmless MPLPDC from any and all

claims for said damages resulting from said use, misuse or failure of such construction

tools and equipments.

19.3 Erector and his subcontractors shall be responsible during work for protection of the work

which has been completed by other contractors/suppliers. Necessary care shall be taken to

see that no damage to the same is caused by his own men during the course of execution

of their work.

19.4 All other work completed or in progress as well as machinery and equipment that are

liable to be damaged by erector’s work shall be protected by erector and such protection

shall remain and be maintained until its removal is directed by MPLPDC.

19.5 Erector shall effectively protect all the works from action of weather and from damages or

defacement and shall cover finished parts wherever required for their through protection.

Face work shall be perfectly clean and free from defects.

19.6 The work shall be carried out to completion without damage to any work and properly

adjacent to the area of his work to whom so ever it may belong, without interference

with the operation of their existing machines or equipment.



Page 166 of 430

19.7 Adequate lighting at and near all the shortage, handling, fabrication, preassembly and

erection sites for properly carrying out the work and for safety and security shall be

provided by erector. Erector should adequately light the work area during night time also.

Erector should also engage adequate electricians/wireman, helpers etc. to carry out and

maintain these lighting facilities. MPLPDC may provide such facilities as he may deem

necessary and charge the cost thereof to the erector. In any case, erector shall be liable for

all damages and consequences arising out of his neglect in this regard.

20.0 Clean up of work site

20.1 All soils, filth or other matter of an offensive nature taken out of any trench, sewer,

drain, cesspool or other place shall not be deposited on the surface, but shall at once be

carted away by the erector from the site of work for suitable and proper disposal.

20.2 Erector shall not store or place the equipment, materials or erection tools on the drive

ways and streets and shall take care that his work in no way restricts or impedes traffic or

passage of men and material. During erection, erector shall, without any

additional payment, at all times, keep the working and storage area used

by him free from accumulation of dust or combustile material, waste materials or

rubbish, to avoid fire hazards and hindrance to other works, of MPLPDC.

20.3 If erector fails to comply with these requirements inspite of written instructions from

MPLPDC, MPLPDC will proceed to clear these areas and the expenses incurred by the

MPLPDC in this regard shall be payable by erector. Erector shall remove

or dispose off in a satisfactory manner all scaffoldings, temporary structures, waste

and debris and leave the premised in a conditions satisfactory to MPLPDC. Any packing

materials received with the equipment shall remain as the property of MPLPDC and may

be used by erector on payment of standard charges to MPLPDC and with prior approval

of MPLPDC. At the completion of his work and before final payment, erector shall

remove and shall restore the site to a neat workman like conditions, at his cost.

21.0 Erector’s Personnel :

Erector shall function as on erection organisation and furnish adequate courteous and competent labour (unskilled, semiskilled and skilled, watchman,

supervisors, and engineers of all classes for the duration of the work to maintain the

rate of erection in accordance with the requirement of the schedule of completion, and

shall be in the work included in the contract at such times as will ensure its completion

as specified and shall complete the same force of all lines and charged, at or before the

time specified for completion. Erector shall make available qualified engineers for

placing the equipment in operation and carrying out the necessary tests and trials.

Conducts required of erector’s men are specified below :

21.1 It is important that erector shall employ men known to be reliable and competent for the

work in general and it shall be requirement of the contract that men used on special

works shall be competent, well trained and trusted employees.



Page 167 of 430

21.2 Erector shall furnish details of the qualifications and experience of his senior supervisors

and engineers assigned to the work including their experience in supervising erection and

commissioning of plant and equipment of comparable capacity.

21.3 Erector shall be personally present or employ at least one competent

representative (whose name shall have previously been communicated in writing to

MPLPDC to supervise the erection of the equipment and carrying out the

work under the contract. This representative shall have full technical

capability and complete administrative and financial powers to expeditiously and

efficiently execute the work under the contract. Erector or his representative or if more

than one be employed, one of the representative shall be present at the site at all times

when work is in progress, and any written orders or instructions which MPLPDC may

give to the said representative of erector shall deemed to have been given to the erector.

He shall maintain an office near/or adjacent to the site of the work, and shall at all

times keep in office a complete set of specifications and drawings. MPLPDC shall

normally communicate directly with the said representative at site.

21.4 Erector’s representative at the site shall be posted and be available at site

within a reasonable time after MPLPDC shall inform erector in writing to the effect.

The service of erector’s representatives shall be made available during the progress of the

work for such periods during the working days as MPLPDC may require.

21.5 When erector or his representative is not present on any part of the work where it may be

desired to give directions in the event of emergencies, orders may be given by MPLPDC

and shall be received and obeyed by the supervisors or foreman who may have charge of

the particular part of the work in reference to which order given. If requested to do so,

MPLPDC shall confirm such orders in writing. Any such instruction, direction or

notices given by MPLPDC shall be held to have been given to the erector.

21.6 Erector shall furnish MPLPDC a fortnightly labour force report showing by

classifications the number of employees engaged in the work. Erector’s

employment records shall include any reasonable information as may be required by

MPLPDC. The erector should also display necessary information as may be required by

statutory regulations.

21.7 None of the erector’s superintendents, supervisors, engineers, or labour may be withdrawn

from the work without the notice given to MPLPDC and further no such withdrawals

shall be made if in the opinion of MPLPDC, it will jeopardise the required pace of

progress and/or the successful completion of the work.

21.8 MPLPDC shall be at liberty to object to any representatives or person or skilled,

semiskilled or unskilled worker employed by the erector in the execution, or otherwise, of

the worker who shall misconduct himself, or be incompetent, or negligent or unsuitable

and erector shall remove the person so objected to upon receipt of notice in writing

from MPLPDC requiring him to do so and shall provide in his place a competent

representative at his own expense within reasonable time.



Page 168 of 430

22.0 Construction, Electric Power & Water :

Electric power and water will be made available for use by MPLPDC free of cost. These supplies will be made, where available at one central point in the site convenient to MPLPDC and all piping for service water to work area shall be furnished, installed and maintained by erector at his own expense. He shall also furnish, install and maintain at his cost the power lines, junction boxes and any other electrical receptacles, apparatus or equipment from the central point of his work area.

23.0 Drawings :

23.1 Within three weeks from the date of receipt of the order, erector shall submit list of

necessary drawings as mentioned in 1.5, that he proposes to submit for

approval, identifying each by a serial number and descriptive, title and giving the

expected date of submission. This list shall be revised and extended, as necessary

during the progress of work.

23.2 Erector shall also submit copies of design calculations, material specification and detailed

drawings as called for in the equipment specifications for MPLPDC review. Erector

must satisfy MPLPDC as to the validity of his design with reference to the requirement of

statutory Code Authorities.

23.3 Drawings submitted for approval shall be signed by responsible representatives of erector

and shall be to any one of the following sizes in accordance with

Indian Standards : A0,

A1, A2, A3, or A4

23.4 All drawings shall show the following particulars in the lower right hand corner in

addition to Vendor’s name :-

a) Name of MPLPDC

b) Project Title

c) Title of Drawing

d) Scale

e) Date of drawing

f) Drawing number

g) Space for MPLPDC drawing number.

23.5 In addition to the information provided on drawings, each drawing shall carry a revision

number, date of revision and brief of revision carried out. Whenever any revision is

carried out, correspondingly revision must be up dated.

23.6 All dimensions on drawings shall be in metric units, unless otherwise, specified.



Page 169 of 430

23.7 Drawings submitted by erector for approval will be checked reviewed by MPLPDC and

comments, if any, on the same will be conveyed to erector. It is the responsibility of the

rector to incorporate correctly all the comments conveyed by MPLPDC on

erector’s drawings. The drawings which are approved with comments are to be

resubmitted to MPLPDC for purpose of records. Such drawings will not be

checked/reviewed by MPLPDC to verify whether all the comments have been incorporated

by the erector. If erector is unable to incorporate certain comments in his drawings, he

shall clearly state in his forwarding letter such non-compliance along with the valid reasons.

23.8 Upon completion of the installation, erector shall make in a neat and accurate manner, a

complete record of all changes and revision to the original design, as installed in the

complete work. Six copies of these drawings shall be submitted to MPLPDC for records

and these becomes the property of MPLPDC.

23.9 Drawings prepared by erector and approved by MPLPDC shall be considered as a part of

the specifications. However, the examination and approval of the drawings by MPLPDC

shall not relieve erector of his responsibility for engineering, design, workmanship and

material under the contract.

23.10 If, at any time before the completion of the work, changes are made necessitating revision

of approved drawings, erector shall make such revision and proceed in the same routine as

for the original approval.

24.0 Inspection Right & Privileges :

24.1 MPLPDC reserves the right to inspect any machinery or material or equipment furnished

or used by erector under the contract, and to project any, which is found defective in

workmanship or otherwise unsuitable for the use and purpose intended, or which is not in

accordance with the intent of the contract.

24.2 Should MPLPDC waive the right to inspect any equipment, such waiver shall not relieve

erector in any way of his obligation under the contract.

24.3 MPLPDC representatives shall be permitted free access to erector’s or his subcontractor’s

shop at all working hours for the purpose of inspecting work at all stages of progress.

24.4 MPLPDC representatives shall be given full assistance in the form of

necessary tools, instruments, equipment and qualified operations to facilitate inspection.

24.5 MPLPDC reserves the right to call for certificate of origin and test certificates for all raw

material and equipment at any stage of manufacture.

24.6 In the event of MPLPDC inspection reveals poor quality of goods MPLPDC shall be at

liberty to specify additional inspection procedures, if required, to ascertain Vendor’s

compliance with the equipment specifications.



Page 170 of 430

24.7 Even though inspection is carried out by MPLPDC or his representatives, such

inspection shall not however, relieve Vendor of all responsibility for

furnishing equipment conforming to the requirements of the contract, nor prejudice any

claim right or privilege which MPLPDC may have because of the use of defective or

unsatisfactory equipment.

24.8 A set of latest prints of the approved drawings shall be kept available by the controller, in

the shop floor for reference of MPLPDC representative during inspection.

25.0 Storage of equipment :

25.1 In general, erector is responsible for the proper storage and maintenance

of all materials/equipments entrusted to him. He shall take all required

steps to carry out frequent inspection of equipment/materials/stores as well as

erected equipments until the same is taken over by the MPLPDC. The following

procedure shall apply for the same.

25.2 Erector’s inspector shall check stored and installed equipments/materials to observe signs

of corrosion, damage to protective coating, to parts, open ends in pipes, vessels and

equipment, insulation resistance of electrical equipment etc. In case open ends are noticed,

he shall immediately get them capped. In case signs of wear damage to protective coating

are noticed, he shall immediately arrange a coat of protective painting. A clean record of

all observations made on equipments, defects noticed shall be promptly communicated to

MPLPDC and his advise taken regarding the repairs/rectification erector shall thereupon

carryout such repairs rectifications at his own cost. In case erector is not competent to

carry out such repairs/rectification, MPLPDC reserves the right to get this done by

other competent agencies at the erectors responsibility and risk and the entire cost for the

same shall be recovered from erectors bill.

25.3 Erector‟s inspectors shall also inspect and provide lubrication to the assembled pumps etc.

The shafts of such equipment shall be periodically rotated to prevent rusting in certain

zones as well as to check freeness of the same.

25.4 Inspectors shall check for any sign of ingress or moisture of rusting in any equipment.

25.5 If the commissioning of the equipment is delayed after installation of the equipment,

erector shall carry out all protective measures suggested by the Manufacturer

MPLPDC during such period.

25.6 Adequate security measures shall be taken by erector to prevent theft and loss of material

entrusted to him by MPLPDC shall carry out periodical inventory of the material

received stored and installed by him and any loss noticed shall be immediately reported

to MPLPDC. A proper record of these inventories shall be maintained by the erector.

25.7 A suitable grease recommended for protection of surface against rusting (refined from

petroleum oil with lanclin mincu, 70 C and water in traces) shall be applied over all

equipment every six months.



Page 171 of 430

25.8 These equipments shall be stored inside a closed shed or in the open depending upon

whether they are of indoor or outdoors design. However, in case of equipment stored in

the open, suitable protective measures including covering with tarpaulin must be carried

out by the erector. The space heaters, where provided in the electrical equipment shall be

kept connected with power supply irrespective of their type of storage. Where space

heaters are not provided adequate heating with bulb is recommended. In LT. motors a low

voltage current flow through the windings is recommended. Frequent checks on insulation

resistance is essential for all electrical equipments. A records of the inspection reports and

megger readings shall be maintained equipment wise. Such records shall be presented to

MPLPDC whenever demanded.

25.9 All the necessary items/goods required for the protection as described above shall be

arranged by the erector and no extra cost is payable in this regard by MPLPDC.

26.0 Deployment of erection team to site and Co-ordination meetings :

The erector shall depute a qualified and experienced engineers together with a adequate

skilled and unskilled labourers for carrying out the installation and commissioning. All

necessary staff shall be at the site till the completion of all works, commissioning/start-up,

trial runs and handling over of the plant. No member of the staff deputed to site shall be

withdrawn unless agreed to by MPLPDC. The erector shall depute a senior personnel to

attend the site co-ordination meeting that would generally be held at the site every month.

The erector shall take necessary action to implement the decision arrived at such meetings

and shall also update the schedule. In case of lag in the progress the erector shall act

suitably to make up for the lag. MPLPDC shall be at liberty to object to any

representative or person or skilled, semiskilled or unskilled worker employed

by the erector in the execution or otherwise of the work, who shall misconduct

himself or be incompetent, or negligent or unsuitable and the erector shall remove the

persons so objected to, upon receipt of notice in writing from MPLPDC requiring him to

do so and shall provide in his place a competent representative at his own expense within

reasonable time.

27.0 Programme of Installation & Commissioning :

The successful erector should submit a scheduled programme for carrying out the work.

The erection schedule should describe the estimated time of installation of each of each

item against each section of the project and should also clarify when each of the item to be

supplied by MPLPDC should be made available to the erector in order to adhere to the

schedule.

The schedule should be so prepared that the erection, commissioning, testing and start-up

is completed in all respect, within 30 days from the date of placement of

order.

MPLPDC shall have the right to direct the manner in which all work covered under the

scope of this contract shall be conducted by the erector in so far as it may be necessary to

secure the safe and proper progress and the specified quality of the work and all work

shall be carried out and all material shall be furnished to the satisfaction and approval of



Page 172 of 430

MPLPDC whenever, in the opinion of MPLPDC, the erector has made departures from

the schedule of completion of work submitted by him and approved by

MPLPDC or when untoward circumstances force a departure from the said schedule

or if in the judgment of MPLPDC, if becomes necessary at any time to accelerate pace

of erection work, then MPLPDC shall direct the order pace and method of conducting

the work and erector shall fully comply with all such directions.

If erector doesn’t comply with the direction as described above or complete the erection

and commissioning by the end of 4th

week after programmed completion, MPLPDC

will operate the penalty clause and shall also have the option to deploy their own

staff/other agencies to complete the job at the erectors risk, responsibility and cost.

It is however, clarified that the above or any such directions from MPLPDC or

abstinence of MPLPDC in deploying their own staff/other agencies as described above

shall not relieve the erector of his obligations to secure the quality, the safe conduction

of work, rate of progress required and adherence to scheduled programme.

IF THE ERECTOR FAILES TO COMPLETE ERECTION IN ALL ASPECTS WITHIN

THE STIPULATED PERIOD & TIME. THE ERECTOR SHALL HAVE

TO PAY RUPES @ ½% PER WEEK AS PENALTY FOR THE PERIOD FOR

WHICH THE WORK REMAINS INCOMPLETE.

28.0 Approvals :

The erector shall obtain the necessary approval of the factory Inspector, Boiler Inspector,

Electrical Inspector weights & Measures Inspector, Explosives Inspector, and any other

state and local authorities as may be required. All the necessary details,

drawings, submission of application and proformas will be furnished by the Erector to

MPLPDC for rectification/signature.

The necessary application duly filled in, together with the prescribed fees

shall be submitted to the authorities by the erector on behalf of the MPLPDC. However

all the actual prescribed fees paid by the erector shall be reimbursed by MPLPDC upon

production of the receipt/vouchers of the above said authorities.

MPLPDC shall, however, extend all possible assistance to the erector for obtaining the

necessary approvals. Nevertheless the ultimate responsibility for obtaining the necessary

approvals lies with the erector.

29.0 Final Drawings & Manuals :

The erector shall, upon completion of the job, submit six complete sets of final drawings towards the equipment layout different pipe lines, cables, conduits, layout drawings and

other necessary drawings. All the drawings must conform to actual executing carried out.



Page 173 of 430

30.0 Progress of Work :

If the erector does not commence/complete the entire job or sections of the job within four weeks from programme schedule of commencement/completion, the MPLPDC shall be free

to deploy their own staff/agencies to commence/complete the job entirely at the risk,

responsibility and cost of the erector.

30.1 Start-up of manufacturer‟s representatives during commissioning/trial runs.

30.2 In the following cases the MPLPDC reserves the right to invite the representative(s) of the

original manufacturer and/or supplier at the cost of the erector for start by help, assistance and

guidance during commissioning and start-up.

a) The erector has no previous experience of commissioning and starting-up of the

similar equipment.

b) The MPLPDC is of the opinion that the erector is incompetent to commission and start-up

of certain specific equipment.

31.0 Commissioning :

The erector shall operate, maintain and give satisfactory trial run of the plant satisfactory for

a period of continuous one month at the rated output. All rectifications

of damages/defects and routine troubles shooting should be carried out by the erector to

achieve aforesaid satisfactory running of the plant. The erector shall incorporate/execute

necessary minor modification during the trial period for maximizing

operational efficiency. The erector should also execute miner modification as may be

suggested by MPLPDC. The erector shall suggest recommended log sheet

proforma for recording necessary operating data and pass it on to MPLPDC in proof of

satisfactory rated output and performance of the equipment/plant.

The commissioning shall also include the following for each equipment :

a) Field disassembly and assembly.

b) Cleaning of lubrication system including chemicals cleaning and passivation wherever

required.

c) Circulation of lubricant to check flow.

d) Cleaning and checking of all the service lines.

e) Checking and commissioning of instruments, equipment and plants, filtering

of transformer, and other oils so that if deteriorated, they shall attain the

required properties/standard, specified tests in this regard must be carried out by

approved authorities and their satisfactory reports submitted to MPLPDC before start-up.

f) Recharging or make-up filling of lubricant oil up to the desired level in the lubrication

system of individual machine.

g) Operation in empty condition to check general operation details wherever required, and

wherever possible.

h) Closed loop dynamic testing with water wherever required.

Operation under load and gradual load increase to attain maximum rated output. j)



Page 174 of 430

Trouble shooting during the trial period.

k) Guarantee of installation. 32.0 Guarantee :

The supply of equipment as well as installation shall have to be carried out by the erector to

the entire satisfaction of the MPLPDC. The erector shall also guarantee to repair/replace,

without any extra cost, the items or parts thereof, if found defective due to bad design,

workmanship or substandard material within 12 months from the date of commissioning or

36 months from the date of receipt of material at site whichever is earlier. If it is necessary

to send the defective equipment or parts thereof for repair/replacement, cost of transportation

including package, insurance etc. from the site to works and back to site shall have to be

borne by the erector. The guarantee does not cover any damage resulting from normal wear

and tear or improper attendance or mishandling of the equipment by the MPLPDC. 33.0 Training of personnel :

Necessary staff as may be deputed by MPLPDC shall be trained by the erector for operating

the plant. The personnel will be associated for the training during the installation, testing,

commissioning and start-up period and training tenure shall be minimum for a period of one

month from the date of commissioning and start-up.

34.0 Outline of the scope of duties of the Contractor Viz-a-viz MPLPDC :

34.1 The equipment and items as specified in purchase order shall be supplied by MPLPDC for

erection, installation, commissioning by the erector.

34.2 Besides the utilities/services as specified in battery limits the following shall also be

provided to the erector by MPLPDC for carrying out the installation/erection.

a) Suitable lockable space for storage of tools, tackles and erection materials (No

accommodation for erectors personnel will be provided under any circumstances) the

security of these materials will be the responsibility of the erector.

b) Plant building ready for installation/erection of all the equipment/items (flooring will

generally be carried out after positioning of main equipment and laying of necessary

conduits).

c) Necessary temporary power for carrying out the installation (the power

shall be supplied at only one point within the dairy site). All necessary tapping from this

point onwards shall be erector‟s responsibility.

d) Temporary water at one point within the site for the water required for testing etc. The

erector shall arrange on his own to tap and transfer the water to the points required

34.3 Prior Information :



Page 175 of 430

a) The details of temporary water and power requirements shall be furnished one month in

advance by the erector to enable MPLPDC to make timely arrangement.

b) Detailed drawings of the required main cut-outs must be supplied by the erector in

advance to MPLPDC to provide the same at the time of civil construction. The cutting in

the walls, floors etc. which are not informed earlier and required for erection work will

be done by the erector and to repair the same will also be the responsibility of the erector.

c) Detailed drawings and other specifications of foundation and any other

special structure must be submitted by the erector within one month after award of

contract to MPLPDC. 35.0 Damage :

If the work or any portion thereof shall be damaged in any way excepting by the acts of

MPLPDC or if defects not readily detected by prior inspection shall develop before the final

completion and acceptance of the whole work. Erector shall forthwith make good, without

compensation, such damage or defects in a manner satisfactory to the MPLPDC. In no case

shall defective or imperfect work be retained.

36.0 Observation of local rules etc.

In respect of observation of local rules, administrative orders, working hours, labour

compensation act, applicable labour laws and the like erector and his personnel shall

strictly abide by the same.

37.0 Stand by manufacturer’s representative :

In the following cases the MPLPDC reserves the right to invite the representative(s) of the

original manufacturer and/or supplier at the cost of erector for stand by them, assistance and

guidance during the commissioning and start-up.

a) The erector has no previous experience of commissioning and start-up of the similar

equipments.

b) The MPLPDC is of the opinion that the erector is not competent to commission and start-

up of certain specific equipment, the opinion of MPLPDC shall be final and binding.

38.0 Inspection & test reports :

The equipment and items supplied under the purview of erector shall be inspected by the

inspector at works and copies of inspection test reports shall be forwarded to MPLPDC.

Terms of payment for erection work :



Page 176 of 430

1) 30% of the order value of acceptance of the order subject to the supplier furnishing

Bank Guarantee from a National Bank or Scheduled Bank in India for an equivalent

amount valid for a period of 12 calendar months.

2) 60% against monthly progress bills duly certified by MPLPDC’s Site

Engineer/In-charge.

3) 10% balance within 12 calendar months from the date of satisfactory commissioning of

the plant or on submission of BG.

40.0 Battery Limits :

The services/utilities will be made available at battery limits specified in

the job description and it will be the erectors responsibility to transmit them to the various

points required in the project. All the necessary fittings tapings, that would be required to

tap the utility at battery limits for onward transmission shall be supplied and installed by the

erector.

41.0 GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION :

41.1 a) The specifications detail the broad guide lines for erection, testing and commissioning

of electrical equipment. The work shall however, at all times be carried out strictly as

per the instructions of MPLPDC and in accordance with latest IER.

b)

The installation would also comprise for the supply laying and inter connecting, cables

form the battery limits of the power supply to the various switchboards controls and

electrical equipments.

c)

The cable of electric power should be of PVC armoured type approved from ISI

unless otherwise specified and with sufficient cross section depending on the feeder.

d)

The cable for control and flexible connection should be unarmoured type with copper

conductors. Wherever required, multicore copper cable should be used.

e)

Wherever necessary drip proof junction boxes and isolators, cable carrying trays,

necessary clamps etc. shall be provided.

f)

Necessary isolators of appropriate sizes are to be provided near the motors as per IER.

All the involved supply included within the scope of electrical

installation and erection should be approved type and make and conform to ISI

standard.

g)

Detailed electrical diagrams and cable layout should be prepared by the

erector according to the specifications and the same should be approved by MPLPDC

before the execution.

41.2 Electrical installation work shall comply with all currently applicable statues, regulations and

safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this

specifications shall be construed to relieve erector of his responsibility.

41.3 Unless otherwise specified installation work shall comply with the requirements of latest



Page 177 of 430

additions of applicable Indian standards.

41.4 In accordance with the specific installation instructions, as shown on manufacturer’s

drawings or as directed by Site Engineer of MPLPDC, the erector shall unload, erect, install

wire test and put into commercial use all the electrical equipment included in the contract.

Equipment shall be installed in neat workman like manner so that if is in level and plumb,

properly aligned and oriented. Tolerance shall be established in manufacturer’s drawings or

as stipulated by an Engineer. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundation

or structure until the alignment has been checked.

41.5 Erector shall furnish all supervision, labour, tools, equipment, ribbing, materials

and incidental materials such as holts, wedges, anchors, concrete, inserts etc. required to

completely install test and adjust the equipment.

41.6 Where assemblies are supplied is more than one section erector shall make all necessary

mechanical and electrical connections between sections including the connection between

buses. Erector shall also do necessary adjustment/alignments necessary for

proper operations of circuit breakers isolators, and their operating mechanism. All insulators

and bushings chipped, cracked or damaged due to negligence or carelessness of erector shall

be replaced by him at his own expense.

41.7 Switchgear and control panels/desks shall be installed in accordance with Indian Standard

Code of Practice IS:3072 and manufacturer’s instructions. The switch gears panels shall be

installed on finished surfaces or concrete or steel sills. Erector shall be required to install

align any channel sills which from part of the foundations. In joining shipping suctions of

the switch gears/panels/control centres together, adjacent housing or panel section or

flanged throat sections provided shall be bolted together after alignment has been

completed. Power bus, enclosures, ground and control splices of conventional nature shall be

cleaned and bolted together, being drawn up with torque wrench of proper size or by other

approved means. Tapes or compounds shall be applied where called for as per

manufacturer’s drawings. Base of outdoor type units shall be sealed in an approved

manner to prevent ingress of moisture.

41.8 All switch gear, control panels, desks etc. shall be made absolutely vermin proof.

41.9 Induction motors shall be installed and commissioned as per IS Code of Practice ISS 900

and manufacturer’s instructions.

41.10 After installation of all power and control wiring, erector shall perform operating test on

all switch gear and panels to verify proper operation of switch gear/panels and correctness of

the interconnections between the various items or equipment. This shall be done by

applying normal AC or DC voltage to the circuit and operating the equipment. Megger tests

for insulations, polarity checks on the instruments transformers, operation tests shall be

carried out by erector, who shall also make all necessary adjustments as specified by the

manufacturer for the proper functioning of equipment.

41.11 Installation and testing of battery and battery charges shall be in strict compliance with the

manufacturer‟s instructions. Each cell shall be inspected for breakage and conditions of the

cover seals as soon as received at site. Each cell shall be filled with electrolyte in



Page 178 of 430

accordance with the manufacturer‟s instructions. Battery shall be set up on racks as soon as

possible after receipt, utilizing lifting devices supplied by manufacturer. The cells shall not be

lifted by terminals. Contact surfaces of battery terminals and intercell connections shall be

cleaned, coated with protective grease and assembled. Each connection shall be properly

tightened. Each cell shall be tested with by hydrometer and thermometer and result logged.

Freshening charge, if required, shall be provided. When turned over to MPLPDC the battery

shall be fully charged and electrolyte shall be at full level and of specified specific gravity. 42.0 Cable Installation :

42.1 Erector shall install, test and commission the suitable cables. Cables shall be

laid directly buried in earth on cable racks, in built up trenches, on cable trays and supports,

in conduits, and ducts or bare on walls, ceiling etc. as follows :

a) Outside the building premises :

The scope of installation of underground cables includes digging necessary trenches,

laying of the cables in the trench, covering them with sand and bricks and then

refilling the trenches. Necessary cable markers at appropriate points to indicate the path

of under ground cable should also be supplied and installed by the erector.

b) With in the building :

Under ground cables will be laid in GI light duty class pipes of not less than 37 mm. dia.

c) Cables above ground :

Cables above the ground shall be fixed either on wall or in cable trays of slotted angle

with necessary clamps, bolts etc. as directed by MPLPDC.

d) The main cables inside the building should be laid in hume pipes wherever provided by

MPLPDC. At the places where hume pipes have not provided the main cables shall be

laid as per 40.1 (c).

42.2 Installation and testing of proper insulated cables shall be in accordance with Indian

Standard Code of Practice IS:1255.

42.3 Inspection on receipt unloading, storage and handling of cables shall be in accordance with

IS:1255 and other Indian Standards Code of Practice. 42.4 Sharp bending and kinking of cables shall be avoided. The bending radius for various types

of cables shall not be less than those specified below unless specifically approved by the

Site Engineer of MPLPDC.



Page 179 of 430

Type of Cable Minimum bending radius

Voltage grade Single

Core Multi Core

Unarmoured

Armored

Paper insulated upto 11 kv

25 D*

20 D

15 D


32 D

25 D

20 D


38 D

32 D

25 D

PVC insulated 650/1100 V

10 D

10 D

10 D

Rubber insulated 600 V

-

8 D

15 D

Mineral insulated 300 V

-

-

8 D

* ( D – OVER ALL DIAMETER OF THE CABLE)

If shorter radius appears necessary, no bend shall be made until clearance and instructions

have been received from Engineer.

42.5 Where cables cross roads and water, oil, gas or sewage pipes, the cables shall be laid in

reinforced upon concrete or steel pipes to be supplied and laid by the erector. For road

crossing, the pipes for the cables shall be buried at not less than one meter depth. Cables laid

below railway tracks should be at a depth not less than 180 mm. unless otherwise approved

by the Engineer.

42.6 In each cables run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one or two

straight through joints to be made should be the cable develop fault at a later date.

42.7 Control cable terminations shall be made in accordance with wiring diagrams, using

Colour codes established by Engineer for the various control circuits, by code marked

wiring diagrams furnished to the erector for this purpose or other approved means of

identification. It is the intent that erector shall terminate the cables which he installs.

Additional work of testing and reconnecting and connected, but where on further testing

or other rearrangement of load turns out to be necessary. Additional work of

testing and reconnecting shall be performed by erector at no extra cost of MPLPDC

42.8 Special tools, clips and saddles, glands, seals, PVC sealing compound, locknut

etc. required for the connection and termination of insulated cables shall be supplied by

erector. During installation, connection and termination of insulated cables, care shall be

exercised to ensure that aluminium sheet is not damaged. Groups of mineral insulated

cables shall be bent neatly around the corners by using inner most cables as a form around,

which to bend the next cable. Cables shall not be fastened or clamped close to the point of

entry of the equipment which may vibrate severely. Special instructions furnished by the



Page 180 of 430

manufacturer shall be strictly followed.

42.9 After installation and alignment of motors, erector shall complete the conduit installation,

including a section of flexible conduit between the motor terminal box and

cable trench/tray. Erector shall install and connect the power, control and heater supply

cables. Erector shall be responsible for correct phasing of the motor power connections and

shall interchange connections at the motor terminals box if necessary, after each motor is

test run.

42.10 Connections shall be made to small electrically operated device on equipment installed as

accessories to or assembled with other equipment and requiring two wire or three wire

connection. Connections to recording instruments, float switches, limit switches, pressure

switches, thermocouples, thermostats and other miscellaneous equipment shall be done as per

Manufacturer’s drawing and instructions.

42.11 Metal sheets and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system.

42.12 All new cables shall be megger tested before jointing. After jointing is completed all LT.

cables shall be megger tested and HT. Cables (3.3 KV to 11 KV) pressure tested before

commissioning. The test voltage for pressure testing shall be as per

Appendix-F of IS:1255. 1100/650 Volt grade cable shall be tested by 1000 Volt Megger.

Cables cores shall be tested for :

a) Continuity

b) Absence of cross phasing

c) Insulation resistance to earth

d) Insulating resistance between conductors.

Erector shall furnish all testing kit and instruments required for field testing.

43.0 Cable Trays, Accessories and Tray Supports :

43.1 Cable trays shall either be run in concrete trenches or run overhead supported from

building steel, floor slab etc.

43.2 Cables shall be clamped to the cable trays in the horizontal runs and vertical runs.

43.3 All cable trays including perforated sheet trays and vertical raceways shall be hot dip

galvanized or primed with red lead and oil primer followed by a finish coat of grey lacquer

paint or aluminium paint as specified. 44.0 Conduits, Pipes & Ducts :

44.1 Erector shall supply and install G.I. light duty conduits, pipes and

ducts. All accessories/fittings required for making installation complete, including but not

limited to ordinary and inspection tees and elbows, check nuts, male and female

reducers and enlargers, wooden plugs, caps square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing

fittings, pull boxes, conduits, outlet boxes, splice boxes terminal boxes, glands gaskets and

box covers, saddles and all steel supporting work shall be supplied by Erector. Conduit fittings



Page 181 of 430

shall be of same material as conduits.

44.2 Conduits or pipes shall run along walls, floors and ceilings, on steel supports, embedded in

soil, floor, wall or foundation, in accordance with relevant layout drawings, under ground

portions of conduit installation to be embedded in the foundation or structural concrete

shall be installed in close co-ordination with collateral work. Exposed conduit shall be

neatly run and evenly spaced, with conduits parallel when in racks or in banks. Conduits

embedded in foundation or structural concrete shall be run as directly as possible among with

generally indicated route between two points with a minimum length and with a minimum

of crossing bending and cutting but without creating interferences with other installations.

44.3 When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running threads equal

to twice the length of coupling shall be provided on any one length to facilitate easy

dismantling of the two conduits whenever required.

44.4 When one or more cables are drawing through a conduit, cross sectional area of the cables

shall be 40% of the internal cross sectional area of the conduit.

44.5 Conduits and accessories shall be adequately protected against mechanical damage as well as

corrosion.

45.0 Earthing :

45.1 The scope of supply and installation should also include absolutely independent double

earthing of individual electric motors, control gears and switchboards, complete with

necessary copper/GI wire, copper strip, earthing plate, top funnel, salt, cola etc. The

earthing process include digging of earthing pit, filling the same with alternative layers of

coal and salt, refilling the pit and providing perforated GI pipe making housing pit and

cover as per IER & ISI code of practice No. ISI:3034-1966.

45.2 Erector shall install bare/insulated aluminium/GI Cables and strips, etc.required for system

and individual equipment earthing. All work such as cutting,bending, supporting soldering,

coating drilling, brazing, clamping, bolting and connecting into structures,

pipes, equipment frames, terminals, rails or other devices shall be in Erector‟s scope of

work. Unless otherwise specified, the excavation and trenching shall be done by Erector.

Erector shall also backfill and reinstate the trenches after installation of

earthing conductors.

45.3 Earthing shall conform to the Indian Standard Code of practice IS:3043 and

Indian Electricity Rules, 1956. All materials and fittings used in the earthing installation

shall conform to the relevant Indian Standards or approved by MPLPDC‟s Engineer. Any

change in routing, size of conductors etc. shall be subject to the prior

approval of MPLPDC Engineers.

45.4 Metallic frame of all electrical equipment shall be earthed by two separate and district

connections with earthing system.

45.5 All underground connections for the earthing system shall be brazed/welded. Connections to



Page 182 of 430

equipment and devices shall be normally of the bolted type.

45.6 On completion of the installation, continuity of all conductors and efficiency of all bends and

joints shall be tested. The earth resistance shall be tested in the presence of MPLPDC

Engineer‟s/representative. All equipment necessary for the test shall be furnished by

Erector.

45.7 EARTHING NETWORK

The entire ear thing installation shall be done in accordance with the ear thing drawings,

specifications and instructions of the Engineer-in-charge. The entire ear thing system

shall fully comply with the Indian electricity act and rules framed there under. The

supplier shall carry out any changes desired by the electrical inspector or the owner in

order to make the installation conform to the Indian electricity rules, at no extra cost. The

exact location of the earth pits, earth electrode and conductors and ear thing points of the

equipments shall be determined at site, in consultation with the engineer-in- charge. Any

change in the methods, routing, size of conductor etc. shall be subject to approval of the

owner/engineer-in-charge before execution.

45.8 Earth Pit with Electrode

1. Plate or pipe type earth electrode with earth pit shall be provided for this work unless

otherwise advised and pit shall be as per IS:3043 – 1966 (code of practices for ear thing).

All earth electrodes shall preferably be driven to a sufficient depth to reach permanent.

2. Earth pit centre shall be at a minimum distance of 2m distance shall be maintained

between centres of 2 earth pits

45.9 Earth Bus. Ear thing Lead & Earth wire /strip

All electrical equipment is to be doubly earthed by connecting two earth strips / wire

conductor from the frame of the equipment to a ear thing pit / main ear thing ring. The ear

thing ring will be connected via. Links to several earth electrodes. The cable armored will be

earthed through the cable glands. Conductor size for connection to various equipment shall

be as specified in the drawing or as instructed by the engineer-in charge. However the length

of the branch leads from equipment to ear thing grid/ring shall not be more than 10 to 15

meters.

All hardware for ear thing installation shall be hot dip galvanized. Spring washers shall be

used for all ear thing connections of equipment having vibrations.



Page 183 of 430

Size of earthing lead/wire shall be as specified in schedule of quantities/drawings.

Following may be considered as general guidelines:

Sr. No

Item Size

Control switches G.I. wire 14 SWG

Motor upto 10 HP G.I. wire 8 SWG

Motor above 10 HP upto 125 HP G.I. strip 25 x 3mm

Motor above 125 HP G.I. strip 25 x 6mm

Switch Board G.I. strip 25 x 6mm

Power control centre / LT panel of sub-station G.I. strip 40 x 6mm

When ear thing wire is to be drawn under floor / in underground, aluminium wire 10mm dia. With

PVC insulation shall be used. Instead of GI wire, PVC insulated copper conductor wires can also be

used.

However, while deciding type & size of earth lead the resistance between the ear thing system and

the general mass of the earth shall be as per IS code of practice. The earth loop impedance to any

point in the electrical system shall not be in excess of 1.0 ohm in order to ensure satisfactory

operation of protective devices.

G.I. wire/aluminium wire shall be connected to the equipment by providing crimping type socket/lug.

Wherever ear thing strip to be provided in cable tray, it shall be suitably bolted on cable tray and electrically bonded to the cable tray at regular interval.

Excavating & refilling of earth, necessary for laying underground earth bus loops shall be the responsibility of the supplier.

Wherever earth leads/strips/wire are laid in cable trenches, these shall be firmly and

suitably cleaned to the walls/supporting steel structure on which cable is clamped. The

neutral of the transformer shall be connected to earth pit independently and earth pit shall have

copper earth plate. Long runs of GI strip shall be connected at each end with lap type welding to ensure continuity.

Bureau of Indian Standards to be Followed for Electrical Erection

1. PVC insulated cables (light duty) for working voltage upto 1100 volts 694-1990 Part I & II

2. PVC insulated cables (heavy duty) for voltage upto 1100 volts 1554-1988 Part I

3. PVC insulated cables (heavy duty) for voltage 3.3 KV to 11 KV 1554-1988 Part II

4. Specification for polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed heavy duty electric cables for voltage not exceeding 1100 V

5959-1970 Part I

5. Specification for polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed heavy duty electric cables for voltage 3.3 KV to 11 KV

5959-1970 Part II

6. Guide for marking of insulated conductors 5578-1970 or 5575

7. Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables upto 33 kV

1255-1983



Page 184 of 430

8. Code of practice for earthing 3043-1987

9. Guide for safety procedures and practices in electrical work 5216-1982

10. Code of practice for installation and maintenance of AC induction motor starters

5214-1969

11. Code of practice for installation and maintenance of induction motors 900-1992

12. Code of practice for installation and maintenance of switchgears 10118 - 1982 Part I, II, III, IV

13. Code of practice for installation and maintenance of transformers 10028 – 1981 Part I

14. Code of practice for electrical wiring installation, voltage not exceeding 650 V

732-1989

15. Code of practice for electrical wiring installation (system voltage exceeding 650 V)

2274-1963

16. Guide for testing three-phase induction motor 4029-1967

17. Guide for safety Procedures & Practices in electrical works 5316

18. XLPE Cables for working voltage upto and including 1100 Volts 7098 – 1988 Part I

19. XLPE Cables for working voltage upto 33 kV 7098 – 1988 Part II

20. Boxes for enclosures of electrical accessories 5133

21. Electric Power connectors 5561

22. HRC Cartridge Fuse Link up to 650 V 2208

23. Code of Practice for Selection, Installation & Maintenance of Fuse up to 650 V

3108

24. Cables methods of testing 10810

25. Danger / Lattice Boards 3551

26. National Electric Code SP :30



Page 185 of 430

Recommended Cable Size for Industrial Wiring

The following selection table shall be followed for cables of motors unless otherwise specified:

3 Phase 415 V

Motor H.P.

Direct-on-line Star-Delta Starter

Supply side Motor side Supply side Motor side

Copper conductor Cable Size : Sq mm

Up to 7.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2 X 2.5

10 4 4 4 2 X 2.5

15 6 6 6 2 X 2.5

20 10 10 10 2 X 4

25 16 16 16 2 X 6

30 16 16 16 2 X 6

40 25 25 25 2 X 10

50 35 35 35 2 X 16

Aluminium conductor Cable Size: Sq mm

60 70 70 70 2 X 35

75 95 95 95 2 X 50

100 120 120 120 2 X 70

125 185 185 185 2 X 95

150 240 240 240 2 X 120

180 - - 300 2 X 150

200 - - 2 X 150 2 X150

250 - - 2 X 185 2 X 185

275 - - 2 X 240 2 X 240

300 - - 2 X 240 2 X 240

Note: Cables indicated above in the table shall be only armoured copper conductor cable

for DOL starter upto 50 HP motor. For motors rating 60 HP and above, armoured

aluminium cable should be used.

46.0 Supply, Fabrication, Erection and Testing of Piping :

46.1 Codes and standards :

All piping system including sub-contracted materials shall comply with the latest

editions of the following wherever applicable :

a) Indian Boiler Regulation

b) Regulation of Inspector of Explosives

c) All applicable Indian Standards

d) All applicable State Laws.



Page 186 of 430

46.2 Scope of Supply :

Erector shall supply all piping materials like pipes, fittings, flanges and other items as

shown in his scope in the flow diagrams/specifications.

46.3 Scope of erection to be performed by Erector is outlined below :

a) The scope of erection for piping includes all system covered under his scope of

work in the flow diagram/specification.

b) Erector shall also install small accessory, piping an any specialities furnished with

or for equipment such as relief valves, built is bypass, and other items of this type.

c) Erector‟s work terminates at the final tube or pipe connection at pumps, including

the final connection.

d) Erector shall install primary elements for flow measurement, control valves, and

on line metering equipment.

e) Erector shall perform necessary internal machining of pipe for installing crevices,

flow nozzles, straightening vances, control valves.

f) Erector shall install all valves and specialities being procured from others. g) Erector shall hydrostatically test all piping systems including valves and specialities

& instrument impulse line at suitable pressures.

h) All piping shall be internally cleaned and flushed by Erector before and after

erection in a manner suited to the service as directed by MPLPDC.

i) For hydrostatic testing and water flushing, erector shall furnish necessary pumps,

equipment and instruments, piping etc. Purchase will provide water at available

points of supply to which Erector‟s temporary piping will be connected.

46.4 Colour code shall be used to identify pipe material. Erector shall be able to identify on

request all random piping prior to any field fabrication.

46.5 All steam piping shall be fabricated in complete accordance with Indian Boiler Code and

all approval required shall be obtained by Erector from the inspecting authority.

46.6 Erector shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his organisation and shall

conduct tests to determine the suitability of the welding procedure used by him.

46.7 Erector shall employ welded construction for all black steel piping. All black steel pipes

50 mm. and below shall have socket welded joints unless otherwise specified.

46.8 All piping supports, guides, anchors, rod hangers, spring hangers, rollers with incidental

structural sub framing shall be furnished and erected by Erector.

46.9 All piping shall be suspended, guided and anchored with due regard to

general requirements and to avoid interference with other pipes, hangers, electrical

conduits and their supports, structural members and equipment and to

accommodate insulation to conform to purchaser‟s loading limitation. It is the

responsibility of the piping Erector to avoid all interferences while locating hangers and

supports.



Page 187 of 430

46.10 Anchors and/or guides for pipe lines or for other purpose shall be

furnished when specified for holding the pipe line in position or alignment. Hangers

shall be designed fabricated and assembled in such a manner that they cannot become

disengaged by any movement of the support pipe.

46.11 All piping shall be wire brushed and purged with air blast to remove all dust, mill scale

from inner surface. The method of cleaning shall be such that no material is left on the

inner or outer surfaces which will affect the serviceability of the pipe.

46.12 Effective precaution such as capping and sealing shall be taken to protect all pipes ends

against ingress of dirt and damage during transit or storage. The outside of the carbon

steel pipe (black) shall receive two coats of red lead paint.

47.0 Testing for :

1. HP Steam 4. Soft and Raw Water

2. LP Steam 5. Air

3. Glycol 6. SS Piping

7. Insulation 8. Electricals

9. Motors 10. Equipments.

Should conform to the latest ISI standards.

48.0 Service piping Installation guide lines :

48.1 Chilled water & Glycol piping (if mentioned in purchase order)

The scope of erection and installation if mentioned, comprises a set of GI „B‟ class pipes

and fittings for chilled water and glycol including supports, isolation and non-return

valves etc. for providing chilled water or glycol to all the equipment which would

require chilled water or glycol. All the necessary headers for interconnecting all the

chilled water and glycol pumps and auxiliary materials like adapters, reducers, flanges,

union, valves/cocks/ (of gun-metal/brass for valves upto 100 mm. dia),

strainers, gaskets, packing etc. required for the pipe should also be supplied and

installed by the erector. The pipeline should be insulated as per the specification

detailed.

48.2 Steam & Hot Water and molasses Piping (if mentioned in purchase order)

The scope of supply and installation of mentioned, comprises the following set of steam

pipes and fittings for providing steam connections from the indicated battery point to all

the equipments requiring steam in accordance with IBR, MS Class „C‟ pipes, fittings and

auxiliary items. The scope of supply and installation includes the necessary pipes

supports, isolation supports, isolation valves, nonreturn valves, safety valves, check

valves, pressure reducing valves steam traps, strainers, expanders, bends, gaskets, packing,

sight glasses, pressure gauges etc. The manufacturer‟s certificates that the

material conforms to IBR duly attested by concerned authority should be furnished for all



Page 188 of 430

items as per requirements. The necessary check valves(s) and other fittings required at the

sources of tapping at the battery point should also be supplied and installed by the erector.

Set of condensate pipes and fittings of MS Class „C‟ to interconnect the condensate return

line. The supply is inclusive of necessary pipe supports isolation valves, check valves,

bends, gaskets, packing etc.

48.3 Soft well water piping (if mentioned in purchase order)

The scope of installation comprises (if mentioned) a set of well water pipes and fittings

including supports, isolation and non-return valves etc. Pipes of GI Class

„B‟ for providing well water to sterlizer would be required. All the necessary headers

for interconnecting the water pumps and auxiliary material like adopters reducers,

flanges, union valves/checks (of gun metal/brass for valve upto 100 mm dia), bends,

strainers, gaskets, packing etc. required for the pipe should also be supplied and installed

by the erector.

48.4 Water distribution (if mentioned in purchase order)

The scope of supply and installation if mentioned comprises of the following:

Set of water pipes and fittings of GI Class „B‟ for providing water connection to the

various equipment/items and points requiring water (raw and soft water) from battery

limits. The scope is also inclusive of the necessary pipes and fittings, GI Class „B‟ for the

soft water from the softening plant to soft water overhead tank if specifically mentioned

and further to all the equipments requiring soft water and interconnections with suitable

valves etc. from all the compartments of the overhead tank. The supply and installation is

inclusive of necessary pipe supports, isolated valves, strainers, bends gaskets, packing,

polythene/copper tubes and all other necessary auxiliary items.

48.5 Air requirement (if mentioned in purchase order)

The scope of supply and installation if mentioned comprise of the following:

Set of air pipes and fittings in accordance with MS „C‟ Class for providing air to the

various equipments/items and controls and points requiring the same. The scope of supply

and installation is inclusive of necessary pipe supports, valves, filters, bends, gaskets,

packing, polythene, copper tubes and all other necessary auxiliary items.

48.6 All the above referred piping should generally be of welded execution and must be

removed of mill scales and properly cleaned before installation.

49.0 Important Note :

49.1 All the necessary materials, of a quality and make approved by MPLPDC required for

carrying out the installation mentioned in 46.2 shall be supplied by the Erector.



Page 189 of 430

49.2 Piping (SS) (if mentioned in Purchase Order)

The scope includes the installation and inter connection of a set of SS Pipes and fittings,

including cocks, valves, Tees, flanges, unions, bends, reducers, liners and other necessary

fittings SMS/IDF standards, for inter connecting all the equipment listed. Necessary pipe

supports shall be also installed by the Erector.

49.3 Pipe fittings at connection points

All the required fittings that would be needed in the piping at all the tapping, termination,

connection and intermediate points must be installed by the Erector.

49.4 The erector shall prepare and submit the piping layout drawing, details of supports, details

of tapping, termination interconnection etc. for approval. All the piping work shall be

carried out strictly in accordance with the approved drawings/details. The respective milk

flow diagram to which the piping layout correspondence must also be furnished by the

erector.

50.0 Insulation (if mentioned in Purchase Order)

50.2 Insulation of Steam condensate & Hot water pipe lines :

All the steam and hot water pipes shall be insulated with 50 mm. thick mineral wool or

equivalent. The insulation shall be carried out in the following manner:

1) Cleaning of surface to be insulated. Applying a coat of red oxide primer and fixing

glass wool/mineral wool of suitable thickness tightly to the pipe, butting all joints to

be tied with lacking wire.

2) The insulation should be covered with GI wire netting.

3) The steam and hot water lines, after insulation must be covered with

22 gauge aluminium sheet with proper grooves and overlaps and secured in

position with 12 mm. self tapping Parker screws.

4) In case the insulation does not have the desired insulation properties,

the entire insulation will have to be redone at the erector‟s cost to give the desired results.

5) In case of condensate return piping, all the steps mentioned above shall be executed

except that the thickness of insulation shall be 30 mm.

All the necessary materials of quality and make approved by MPLPDC required for

carrying out the insulation mentioned in 50.2 shall be supplied by the erector.



Page 190 of 430

SCHEDULE - IV

SITE LAYOUT

EQUIPMENT LAYOUT

FLOW DIAGRAM Note :

1. Set of drawings are separately enclosed with the tender document.

2. All the drawings show General Arrangement and scheme. The Tenderer is required to do detailed engineering and submit with his bid all the relevant drawings.

3. The scheme of all Civil Works and their final drawings shall be vetted by our appointed architect.



Page 191 of 430

SCHEDULE – V

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

OF CIVIL WORKS



Page 192 of 430

PART - A

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

FOR PRE-ENGINEERED BUILDING

PROJECT: CFP – KIRATPUR, ITARSI

Section 1. Scope

Section 2. Building Description

Section 3. Design Loads

Section 4. Standard Supplied Items

ANNEXURE-I MATERIAL SPECIFICATION

Section 1 Scope MPLPDC proposes to build a pre-engineered steel building (s) as described below. The building will consist of all components required to construct the primary and secondary framing (wind bents, wall & roof purlins) plus the wall and roof cladding. Hardware of the building are included. Interior partition walls, electrical, plumbing, cooling, heating, foundation, masonary walls, concrete floor or materials not specifically referenced in this proposal are not included.



Page 193 of 430

Section 2

Building Description

Refer enclosed literature for technical details.

Building – 1 RMG Warehouse

General Features:

Type : TCCS - (Tapered Column Clear Span)

Width : 30.00 m C/C of Steel Column

Length : 75.00 m C/C of Steel Column

Eave height : 7 m clear under the knee

Width module : 1 @ 30m

Roof slope : 1 in 10

Bay spacing : 2 @ 7.500 m

End wall spacing : 6 @ 5.00 m

Front End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System

Back End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System

Type of bracing on roof & wall : Diagonal Rod Bracing (as per design)

Roof panel : 26G(0.47mm) thick Tracdek Hi-Rib Bare

Galvalume 550 Mpa steel.

Wall panel : 26G(0.50mm) thick Tracdek Wall SMP coated


Girts : Sidewall girts and end wall girts are mounted

on the exterior face of the main column.

Fasteners :

Mechanically galvanized Hex-washer head

self-drilling fasteners with integral EPDM

seals.



Page 194 of 430

Accessories : Flashing, trims, eave gutters & downspouts.

Day Lighting panel

: 2 mm thick Polycarbonate day lighting panels of

size 1.0m x 3.0 m for roof area – 3%

Turbo Vents

600mm diameter turbo vents considered on roof

– as per requirement….. nos.

Framed opening

:

8 Nos. framed opening of size 4.0m(W)x4.5m(H)

considered on Side wall for Rolling shutters (by

others).

Paint Finish :

All primary and secondary members shall be

supplied with factory applied one coat of Zinc

Chromate red oxide primer finished with 2 coats

of synthetic enamel paint at site.

Special conditions

:

All walls(Peripheral) clad to full height above

3.0m high brick masonry wall (by others).

:

Canopy projection considered as mentioned

below –

5 m at all places

: One no. cage ladder considered for roof access.

Building condition : Enclosed.



Page 195 of 430

Building-2 FP Warehouse

General Features:

Type : TCCS - (Tapered Column Clear Span)

Width : 30.00 m C/C of Steel Column

Length : 30.00 m C/C of Steel Column

Eave height : 7 m clear under the knee

Width module : 1 @ 30 m

Roof slope : 1 in 10

Bay spacing : 2 @ 7.500 m

End wall spacing : 6 @ 5.00 m

Front End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System

Back End Frame : Standard Post & Beam System

Type of bracing on roof & wall : Diagonal Rod Bracing (as per design)

Roof panel : 26G(0.47mm) thick Tracdek Hi-Rib Bare


Wall panel : 26G(0.50mm) thick Tracdek Wall SMP coated


Girts : Sidewall girts and end wall girts are mounted

on the exterior face of the main column.

Fasteners :

Mechanically galvanized Hex-washer head

self-drilling fasteners with integral EPDM

seals.

Accessories : Flashing, trims, eave gutters & downspouts.

Day Lighting panel

: 2 mm thick Polycarbonate day lighting panels of

size 1.0m x 3.0 m for roof area – 3%

Turbo Vents

600mm diameter turbo vents considered on roof

– as per requirement….. nos.

4 Nos. framed opening of size 4.0m(W)x4.5m(H)

considered on Side wall for Rolling shutters (by



Page 196 of 430

Framed opening : others).

Paint Finish :

All primary and secondary members shall be

supplied with factory applied one coat of Zinc

Chromate red oxide primer finished with 2 coats

of synthetic enamel paint at site.

Special conditions

:

All walls(Peripheral) clad to full height above

3.0m high brick masonry wall (by others).

:

Canopy projection considered as mentioned

below –

5 m at all places

: One no. cage ladder considered for roof access.

Building condition : Enclosed.



Page 197 of 430

Section 3

Design Loads (Live / Wind)

The building is to be designed for the following Live Load and Wind Speed

Live Load : 0.57 KN/m2

Wind Speed : 39 m/sec (as per IS 875 Part III) 1987,

Exposure-B

Seismic Zone (Zone (Z) ) : II (as per IS 1893) 2002

Deflections:

Main frame

Vertical : L/180

Lateral : EH/100

Purlins : L/150

Applicable Codes :

Loads are applied in accordance with :

The 2006 Edition of Low Rise Building System Manual

Metal Building Manufactures Association (MBMA)

Hot rolled and Built up sections are designed in accordance with:

Manual of Steel Construction, 9th Edition

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)-2005

Cold-formed members are designed in accordance with:

1996 Edition of Cold formed Steel Design Manual

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI)

Welding is applied in accordance with:

American Welding Society (AWS D1.1.10)

Structural Welding Code – Steel



Page 198 of 430

Section 4

Standard Supplied Items

The following are included to supply:

Rigid frame structural for columns, rafters with end plates, purlins, girts.

All necessary flashings, trims, eave gutters & downspout

Roofing & cladding sheets

Structural hardware & sheeting fasteners

End lap sealant

Bracing

Anchor bolts and templates

All structurals shall be supplied with one coat of factory applied primer finished with 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint at site.

2 mm thick Polycarbonate day light panel on roof

Framed opening

Turbo Vents

Inclusions :-

Interior partition wall, Doors and fixtures

Rolling Shutters

Roof fans, pipe flashing, curbs

Wall vents, fans, doors, windows and louvers

Civil, mechanical and electrical design and materials

Concrete embed plates of weld plate of any kind

Foundation and masonry design / work / materials

Setting of Anchor Bolt – (Physical setting or fixing) .HEPL will only check dimensional accuracy of anchor bolt set out.

Grouting - Grouting under column base plates with high strength grout.

Electricity & Water required during work at site.

Note: All leftover and scrap material and Machinery at Sites belong to bidder and can be

removed by us any time



Page 199 of 430

PART B

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CIVIL

WORKS



Page 200 of 430

GENERAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS CIVIL WORKS

No. Particulars

1 Applicable Standards - Civil Works

2 List of Approved Make - Civil Works

3 List of Approved Make - Plumbing Works

4 Cement Consumption

5 Material Specification - Civil Works

6 Material Specification - Plumbing Works

7 Item Specifications - Civil Works

8 Item Specifications - Plumbing Works



Page 201 of 430

APPLICABLE STANDARDS – CIVIL WORKS

1 Conversion factors IS:786

2 Method of measurement of building works IS:1200

3 Code of practice for measurement of civil engineering works IS:3385

4 Materials and workmanship for earthwork and excavation IS:1200 (PART I)

5 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations IS:4081

6 Safety code for excavation work IS:3764

7 Moisture content in sand for filling IS:2720

8 Determination of moisture content IS:2720 (PART II)

9 Determination of moisture content & dry density relation using light compaction IS: 2720 ( PART VIII)

10 Determination of dry density of soils in-place by the sand replacement method IS:2720(PART XXVIII)

11 Determination of dry density of soils in-place by the core cutter method IS:2720 (PART XXIX)

12 Anti termite treatment IS:6313(PARTI TO III)

13 Construction water IS:456

14 Methods of sampling and test (physical and chemical water used in industry ) IS:3025

15 Ordinary (33 grade)/low heat Portland cement IS:269

16 Ordinary Portland cement (43 grade) IS:8112

17 Ordinary Portland cement (53 grade) IS:12269

18 White Portland cement IS:8042-E

19 ortland pozzolana cement IS:1489

20 Rapid hardening Portland cement IS:8041, IS:269

21 Portland(blast furnace) slag cement IS:455

22 Hydrophobic cement IS:8043

23 High alumina cement IS:6452



Page 202 of 430

24 Super sulphated cement IS:6909

25 Oil well cement IS:8229E

26 Standard for testing of cement IS:650

27 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement IS:4031

28 Specification for standard sand for testing of cement IS:650

29 Coarse and fine aggregates for concrete IS:383, IS:515

30 Gradation of coarse aggregates IS:383(TABLEII)

31 Gradation of fine aggregates IS:383 (TABLE III)

32 All-in-aggregates IS:383 (TABLE IV)

33 Method of tests for aggregates for concrete IS:2386 (PART I TO VIII)

34 Methods of determination the maximum qty. of deleterious materials in aggregate IS:2386 (PART II)

35 Limiting values of the maximum quantities of deleterious materials in aggregate IS:383 (TABLE I)

36 Flakiness index of aggregates IS:2396 (PART I), IS:5640

37 Moisture content test for aggregates IS:2386 (PART III)

38 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement.

IS:432 (PART I & II)

39 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire fabric for cement concrete IS:1566

40 Specification for cold twisted steel bars for concrete reinforcement IS:1786

41 Specifications for hot rolled mild steel and medium tensile steel deformed bars IS:1139, IS:1739

42 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement IS:2502

43 Mild steel binding wire IS:280

44 Code of practice for welding of mild steel bars used for RCC IS:2751

45 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete IS:456

46 Code of practice for general construction of plain and RCC for dams IS:457

47 Testing of reinforced cement concrete IS:516

48 Method of tests for strength of concrete IS:516

49 Methods of sampling & analysis of concrete IS:1199

50 Code of practice for concrete structures for storage of liquids IS:3370 (PART I TO IV)



Page 203 of 430

51 Code of practice for composite construction IS:3935

52 Code of practice for construction of reinforced concrete shell roof IS:2204

53 Criteria for the design of RCC shell structures and folded plates IS:2210

54 Specification for batch type concrete mixers IS:1791

55 Specification for portable swing weigh batchers for concrete IS:2722

56 Specification for roller pan mixer IS:2438

57 Specifiction for concrete vibrators immersion type IS:2505

58 Specification for screed board concrete vibrators IS:2506

59 Specification for concrete vibrating tables IS:2514

60 Specification for pan vibrators IS:3366

61 Specification for form vibrators for concrete IS:4656

62 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for consolidated concrete IS:3558

63 Air entraining agent ASTM:6260

64 Criteria for design and construction of precast concrete trusses IS:3201

65 Prest ressed concrete IS:1343

66 Specification for high tensile steel bars used in code of practice for pre- stressed concrete

IS:2090

67 Specification for plain hard drawn steel wire for pre-stressed concrete IS:1785 (PART I)

68 Specification for plywood for concrete

69 Shuttering work IS:4990

70 Code of practice for steel tubular scaffolding IS:4014 (PART I & II)

71 Specification for steel scaffolding IS:2750

72 Safety code for scaffolds and ladders IS:3696

73 Common burnt clay building bricks IS:1077

74 Classifi cation of burnt clay bricks IS:3102

75 Burnt clay building bricks, heavy duty IS:2180

76 Burnt clay facing bricks IS:2691,IS:1077

77 Method of sampling and testing clay building bricks IS:3495 (PART I - IV)

78 Mortar for brick work IS:2250



Page 204 of 430

79 Code of practice for brick work IS:2221

80 Masonry Woks IS:3466

81 Structural safety etc. Of building masonry walls IS:1905

82 Load bearing hollow concrete blocks IS:2185

83 Lime - cement - cinder hollow concrete blocks IS:5498

84 Lime - cement - cinder solid blocks IS:3115

85 Code of practice for construction of stone masonry IS:1597 (PART I)

86 Stone tests IS:1124

87 Code of practice for design and installation of joints in buildings IS:3414

88 Joint sealing compound IS:834

89 Pre-molded bituminous joint filler IS:1838

90 Timber door, window and ventilator frames IS:4021

91 Material & workmanship for wood work IS:883, IS:4021

92 Wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) IS:2202 (PART I)

93 Timber paneled and glazed shutters IS:1003 (PART I & II)

94 Method of tests for wooden flush doors, type tests IS:4020

95 Plywood & tests IS:303

96 General tests for wood work IS:1659

97 Red lead for wood knot IS:103

98 Oil type wood preservative IS:218

99 Particle board IS:3087

100 Transparent sheet glass for glazing & framing purposes IS:1761

101 Resin bonded fiber glass IS:3144

102 Putty for glazing IS:420

103 Steel door frames IS:4351

104 Steel window IS:1361

105 Steel doors IS:1038



Page 205 of 430

106 Steel ventilators IS:1081

107 Rolling shutters IS:6248

108 Primer for steel doors, windows & ventilators IS:102

109 Aluminum alloy for door/window frames IS DSGN. HEA-WP OF IS:733

110 Sections IS:1948

111 Anodizing BS:1616

112 Hydraulic lime & storage IS:712

113 General tests for lime IS:6932 (PART I TO X)

114 Field tests for lime IS:1624

115 Lime mortar preparation IS:1625

116 Slacked Lime IS:1639

117 Surkhi IS:1344

118 Code of practice for application of lime plaster finish IS:2394

119 Rough cast plaster IS:1661(CLAUSE-165)

120 Specification for integral cement water proofing compounds IS:2645

121 Water proofing asphalt/maxphalt IS:702

122 Bitumen saturated layer IS:1322

123 Bitumen felt IS:1322

124 Bitumen

IS:702

125 Code of practice for laying and finishing of cement concrete flooring tiles IS:1443

126 Material & workmanship for flooring IS:1197, IS:1344

127 Code of practice for laying in situ terrazzo floor finish IS:2114

128 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete flooring IS:2571

129 Mosaic Tiles

IS:1237

130 Glazed earthenware tiles IS:777

131 Marble chips & marble mosaic terrazzo IS:2114

132 Plain cement tiles & tests IS:1237



Page 206 of 430

133 Marble mosaic tiles IS:1237

134 Marble slab IS:1130

135 PVC flooring tiles & sheets IS:3461,IS:3462

136 Broken marble mosaic tiles IS:1257

137 Oxy-chloride

IS:658

138 Magnesium chloride

IS:657

139 C.I. grid tiles IS:210

140 Pigment for terrazzo flooring IS:459

141 Rivets IS:1148

142 Electrodes for welding IS:814

143 Code of practice for use of electric arc welding for general construction in Steel IS:813

144 Tests for welding works IS:1181

145 Welding works IS:816

146 Bolts and nuts IS:1367

147 Tests for bolts and nuts IS:1608

148 Structural steel sections & tests IS:226

149 Structural steel plates IS:2062

150 Defects in structural steel IS:229

151 Dimension & properties of steel section IS:808

152 Structural steel work IS:226, IS:4948

154 Expanded metal steel sheet IS:412

155 Mild steel wire gauze jail IS:280

156 Welding procedure & edge preparation IS:823

157 Washers IS:2016

158 Storage of welding wire & electrodes IS:816

159 Primer to structural surface for bolts IS:2074

160 Checkered plates IS:3502



Page 207 of 430

161 Code of practice for painting of ferrous metal in building and allied finishes IS:1477 (PART I & II)

162 Distemper and dry colour IS:427

163 Code of practice for painting concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces IS:2395

164 Distemper and oil emulsion IS:428

165 Enamel paints IS:2933

170 Coat of zinc chromate IS:104

171 French spirit polish IS:348

172 GI sheets IS:227

173 Ac sheets IS:459

174 Ac sheet fixing IS:730

175 Mangalore pattern tiles IS:654

176 Fiber glass reinforced polyester IS:4154

177 Galvanized steel for barbed wire IS:278

178 Insulation of hot water pipes, tanks & heat exchanger BS:476

179 GI pipes & MS tubes IS:1239 (PART I)

180 Screw down bib cocks & stop cocks IS:781

181 Vitreous sanitary fixtures(general) IS:2556 (PART I)

182 Gun metal wheel, globe, check, gate & non return valves IS:778

183 Wash basin IS:2556 (PART IV),

IS:771 184 European W.C. IS:2556, IS:771

185 Solid plastic seat & cover IS:2548

186 Orissa pan W.C. IS:2556 (PART III)

187 Squatting pans & traps IS:2556 (PART III)

188 Indian W.C. (wash down W.C.) IS:2556 (PART II),

IS:771 189 Urinals IS:2556 (PART VI)

190 Half round channels IS:2556 (PART VII)

191 Specific requirements of siphonic wash down W.C. IS:2556 (PART VIII)

192 Ss sink/C.I./flushing tank brackets IS:775



Page 208 of 430

193 C.I. siphonic flushing cistern IS:774

194 Lead pipes IS:404 (PART I)

195 Sand cast pipes & fittings IS:1729

196 C.I. spun soil pipes & fittings IS:3939

197 Gully trap IS:651

198 Glazed stone ware pipes & fittings IS:651

199 Ac pipe IS:1626,IS:1626

(PART I) 200 High pressure/crydon ball valve IS:1703

201 C.I. sluice valve IS:780

202 Cap stan head IS:1795

203 Malleable iron fittings IS:1879 (PART I TO

X) 204 C.I. pipes IS:1536, IS:1537

205 Molten (pig)lead IS:782

206 C.I. manhole frames & covers IS:1726

207 Concrete pipes IS:458

208 Threads for screwed pipes IS:554

209 Lead jointing IS:718

210 Carbon steel for pipes IS:9161

211 Low level ceramic cistern IS:774

212 Bowl pattern flat back urinals IS:2556 (PART IV)

213 S Showers IS:2064

214 Heavy C.I. pipes IS:1729

215 Concrete mix design IS:10262

216 Code of practice for construction of floor and roof with joists and filler blocks IS:6061 (PART I)

217 Code of practice for construction of light weight concrete block masonry IS:6042

218 Specification for load bearing light weight concrete blocks IS:3590



Page 209 of 430

219 Code of practice for construction of hollow concrete block masonry IS:2572

220 Specification for concrete masonry units (hollow and solid concrete blocks) IS:2185 (PART I)

221 Chemical composition of ordinary Portland cement IS:4032

222 Sulphate resistant cement BS:4027 & ASTMC-

150 TYPE II 223 Specifications for circular hollow sections IS:1161

224 Properties of rectangular & square hollow sections IS:4923

225 Cold formed welded & seamless carbon steel structural tubing ASTMA 500

226 Cold but not formed welded & seamless carbon steel structural tubing ASTMA 501

227 Hot formed welded & seamless high strength low alloy tubing ASTMA 618

228 Hot rolled structural steel hollow section BS:4848/



Page 210 of 430

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE / MANUFACTURER - CIVIL WORK MATERIALS

1) Ordinary Portland cement Ultrtech/Ambuja/Sanghi/JK Laxmi/binani/Jaypee

2)

White cement

Birla/J.K. brand

3)

Cold twisted Ribbed bars

Tata/Sail/Vizag/

4)

Structural Rolled Steel sections-beams, channels, tee, flats, angles, bars(round, square, hexagonal)

Tata/Vizag/Jindal/Sail brand

5)

Structural Hollow steel sections (Square & Tata Rectangular)

6)

Structural tubular sections

Tata/Jindal

7)

Coarse Aggregates 6mm to 40mm sizes

Approved quarry from Sevalia/Vadagam 8) Stone Rubbles & Gravels Approved

quarry from Sevalia/Vadagam

9.1)

Shuttering plywood

Century /Green /Kitply/Anchor brand

9.2)

Marine plywood

Century/Green/Kitply/Conswood brand

9.3) Comm ercial plywood Century /Green /Duro brand

9.4) Decorative ply (Veneer) Century /Green/Durian/Conswood brand

9.5) MDF Century/Duratuff/Nuwood brand

9.6) Prelam particle board Centu ry/Novapan/Bhutan brand

9.7) Laminate sheet Green /Century/Formica/Decolan brand

9.8) Bison Panel (cement bonded particle board) Euro/Bison/NCL Industries brand

10) Flush door Green doors/Kitplay/Anchor/Sitapur brand

11.1) Door and Window frames Cement pre-stress steel

11.2) Z - section steel window & Ventilators AGEW Steel Manufacture Pvt. Ltd.

11.3) MS & GI seamless flush door shutters NA Including door Frames

12) Locks Apex/Godrej /Vale/Armour brand

13) Float Glass Modi guard

14) Mirror Modi guard.

15) MS Rolling shutter NA 16) Precast terrazo tiles & skirting( Mosaic) NA



Page 211 of 430

17) Polished Kotah stone slab grey Approved quarry of Ramganjmandi.

18)

Bathroom tiles

Swastik/Cera/Johnson/Somani brand

19)

Flooring tiles

Swastik/Bell/Johnson brand

20) Construction chemicals Dr.Fixit/M.C. Bauchemie/Roffee/ Fosroc/Pidilite brand

21) Joint Filler GE silicone, Cibatul, STP

22) Pre-coated steel roofing/ walling sheets NA .

23) Paints Berger/Asian/ICI/Narolac brand

24) Polish MRF, Asian, ICI

25) Water stop Fixopan

26) Hardware Apex/Flora/Micromess/Pluspoint/Ferrari

27) Adhesives Fevicol, Kitcol, Araldite, BAL

28) Sanitary ware Cera brand

29) Sanitary fittings Aquel brand

30) Pipes Supreme

31) Cover blocks Astra brand

32) RMC Ultra tech/Johnson brand

33) Bricks Red brick

Note: All the Materials/Makes listed above cost and availability has been checked and other than as specified above shall not be used unless prescribed and approved in writing by the architect.



Page 212 of 430

LIST OF APPROVED MAKE / MANUFACTURER - Plumbing WORK MATERIALS

1) Sanitary Wares 1) Hindustan

2) Cera

3) Parryware

4) Neycer

2) CP Fixtures and Accessories 1) Jaquar - Continental

2) Ess – Ess

3) Half-Turn Flush-Cock 1) Prince

2) Crown

4) Flush-Valve 1) Nelson

2) Jaquar

3) Orient

5) GI Pipes 1) Tata, Class C, Class B

2) Jindal, Class C, Class B

6) GI Fittings 1) R Brand

2) Kranti , Isi

7) Valve With Gun Metal Construction 1) L & T Audco

2) Leader

3) Ittap

4) Acron

5) Fouress

6) Normex

8) Plastic Control Valve 1) Dpp

2) Prince

9) C.I. Pipes & Fittings 1) Bic

2) Neco

10) uPVC Pipes & Fittings 1) Wavin

2) Finolex

3) Supreme

4) Prince

11) Stoneware Pipes & Fittings 1) Soniya

12) Ss Sink 1) Amc

2) Krishna

3) Nirali

13) Electronics Water Level Control 1) Gelco

2) Saffle

14) Pump Set 1) Ksb

2) Kirlosker

3) Wasp

4) Crompton

5) Beacon

6) Johnson

7) Grundfos

15) PVC Seats 1) Commander



Page 213 of 430

16) C.I. La-Class Pipe

(A) With Rubber Gasket (Tyton) Joints 1) Iisco

2) Electro Steel Casting

(B) With Lead Caulked Joints 1) Iisco

2) Kesoram

3) Mysore

4) Bhadravati


(C) With Flanged Joints 1) Iisco

2) Bhadravati

3) Baroda Rolling Mills (Brm)

4) Premier


(D) With Screwed On Flanged Joints 1) Baroda Rolling Mills

2) General Tubes (Hawa)

17) C.I. La-Class Specials 1) Issco

2) Kesoram

3) Bhadravati

4) Baroda Rolling Mills

18) Tyton Types Specials For Rubber Gasket Joints 1) Iisco

2) Ms Traders

3) National Casting

19) C.I. Sluice Valves 1) Indian Valve Co.

2) Kirloskar

3) Crescent

4) Upadyaya

20) C.I. Reflux Valves Swing Type (Non -Return Valves With/Without Bypass) 1) Indian Valve Co.

2) Kirloskar

3) Crescent

4) Necet Trading Co.

5) Normex

21) Single/Double Air Valves 1) Indian Valve Co.

2) Kirloskar

3) Perfect Engg.

4) Associates

5) Necet Trading Co.

6) A.J. Traders

7) S.C. Trivedi

8) Shailesh Kumar & Co.

9) General Tube Co. (Hawa)

22) Fibre Reinforced Precast Rcc Manhole Cover And Frame For Chambers 1) Pratibha Industries

2) K.K. Co.

3) Alcock

23) Ci Manhole Cover, Frame And Grating 1) Neco

2) Bic

24) Float/Equilibrium Valves With Copper Floats 1) Hawa

2) Glenfield

25) Polyethylene Composite Pressure Pipe 1) Kitec

26) Copper Pipe 1) Ibp-Neco

2) Rajco



Page 214 of 430

27) Pressure Tank (Bladder Type) 1) Wellmate

28) Hdpe Pipe And Fittings 1) Hasti - Pil

2) Dutron, Wavin

29) Rcc Hume Pipe And Fittings 1) Indian Hume Pipe

2) Alcock

30) Pvc Water Tank 1) Sintex Note: All Materials Shall Conform To The Relevant Standards Or Code Of Bureau Of Indian

Standards And Shall Have ISI Mark Validated For The Period Of Installation And Take Over. They Shall Also Fulfil All Hydraulic Tests At Site And Shall Be Free From All Noticeable Deficiencies During The Guarantee Period As Well.



Page 215 of 430

CEMENT CONSUMPTION

Item Ration/ Grade Consumption

A. CEMENT CONCRETE

BBCC 01:06:12 2.3 Bags/m3

01:05:1 0 2.6 Bags/m3

01:04:0 8 3.4 Bags/m3

PCC 01:06:12 2.3 Bags/m3

01:05:1 0 2.6 Bags/m3

01:04:0 8 3.4 Bags/m3

RCC

01:03:0 6 4.3 Bags/m3

01:02:0 4 6.4 Bags/m3

01:1.5:0 3 8 Bags/m3

01:01:0 2 12.2 Bags/m3

01:02:0 5 5.4 Bags/m3

01:2.5:0 5 5.1 Bags/m3

B. MORTARS

Cement and Sand mortar

01:01

20.4 Bags/m3

01:02

13.6 Bags/m3

01:03

10.2 Bags/m3

01:04

7.6 Bags/m3

01:05

6.2 Bags/m3

01:06 5 Bags/m3



Page 216 of 430

01:08 4 Bags/m3

C. MASONRY WORK

Brickwork in Cement sand mortar

Modular (19 x 9 x

9)

01:03

2.55 Bags/m3

01:04

1.9 Bags/m3

01:05

1.56 Bags/m3

01:06

1.27 Bags/m3

01:08

0.95 Bags/m3

Brickwork in Guage Mortar

01:01:0 6 1.21 Bags/m3

01:01:0 8 0.96 Bags/m3

01:02:0 9 0.81 Bags/m3

Stone Masonry, Uncorsed

Random Rubble walling Conventional (23 x 11 x 7)

01:03

2.95 Bags/m3

01:04

2.29 Bags/m3

01:06

1.51 Bags/m3

01:08

1.18 Bags/m3

Stone Masonry in Gauged Mortar



Page 217 of 430

01:01:0 6 1.48 Bags/m3


D. PLASTERING

12 mm. thick plaster in Cement mortar, on Brick

masonry

01:02

0.24 Bags/m2

01:03

0.17 Bags/m2

01:04

0.14 Bags/m2

01:05

0.1 Bags/m2

01:06

0.09 Bags/m2

12 mm. thick plaster in Gauged mortar, on Brick

masonry

01:01:0 8 0.07 Bags/m2

01:02:0 9 0.06 Bags/m2

12 mm. thick plaster in Cement mortar, on Stone

masonry

01:02

0.31 Bags/m2

01:03

0.22 Bags/m2

01:04

0.17 Bags/m2

01:06

0.11 Bags/m2

12 mm. thick plaster in Gauged mortar, on Stone

masonry

01:01:0 8 0.08 Bags/m2

01:02:0 9 0.07 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick plaster in Cement mortar, on Brick

masonry

01:02

0.34 Bags/m2

01:03

0.24 Bags/m2

01:04

0.19 Bags/m2

01:05 0.13 Bags/m2



Page 218 of 430

01:06 0.12 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick plaster in Gauged mortar, on Brick masonry

01:01:0 8 0.10 Bags/m2

01:02:0 9 0.08 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick plaster in Cement mortar, on Stone

masonry

01:02

0.41 Bags/m2

01:03

0.29 Bags/m2

01:04

0.22 Bags/m2

01:06

0.14 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick plaster in Gauged mortar, on Stone

masonry

01:01:0 8 0.11 Bags/m2

01:02:0 9 0.09 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick Sand Face plaster

0.20 Bags/m2

20 mm. thick Water Proof Plaster in 1:4 Cement

mortar 0.15

Bags/m2

Neat Cement finishing

0.04 Bags/m2

E. POINTING

Flush, Grooved or Struck in Cement Brick masonry

0.06 Bags/m2

01:02

0.05 Bags/m2

01:03

0.03 Bags/m2

01:04

0.028 Bags/m2

Flush, Grooved or Struck in Cement Random Stone

masonry

01:02

0.01 Bags/m2

01:03

0.08 Bags/m2

01:04

0.06 Bags/m2

F. FLOORING

Precast Mosaic Tiles in cement mortar 0.2 Bags/m2



Page 219 of 430

Precast Mosaic Tiles dado in cement mortar 0.23 Bags/m2

Green and Brown Kotah Stone in flooring, skirting &

dado

0.36 Bags/m2


Green Kotah Stone in Risers and Treads

0.3 Bags/m2

Double Polished Kotah Stone

0.3 Bags/m2

Rough Kotah Stone

0.3 Bags/m2

Glazed Tiles

0.2 Bags/m2

Spartek Tiles

0.2 Bags/m2

China mosaic

0.22 Bags/m2

Marble Slab

0.25 Bags/m2

Granite Slab

0.25 Bags/m2

Jesalmer

0.25 Bags/m2

Red Mandana

0.35 Bags/m2

I.P.S. 40 mm. thick 0.35 Bags/m2

50 mm. thick 0.4 Bags/m2

Pinkish White Dholpur

0.15 Bags/m2

Red Dholpur

0.15 Bags/m2

Brick-on-edge

0.31 Bags/m2

Terrazzo

0.17 Bags/m2

G. STEEL WORK

Fixing Windows in C.C. Blocks 15 x 10 x 10 cm. in

C.C 01:03:06 0.03 Bags/m2

Fixing Holdfasts in C.C. Blocks

15 x 15 x 30 cm. in C.C. 01:03:06 3.3 Bags/100 nos.




Page 220 of 430


H. MISCELLANEOUS

Filling Zaris with

C.M. 01:3 5 Bags/100 nos.

C.C. 01:02:04 3.2 Bags/100 nos.

BBCC 1:5:10 Blocks, 30x30x50 cm. for wire fencing

5.1 Bags/100 nos.

C.C Blocks for flooring, 30 x 30 x 30 cm. 01:04:08 5 Bags/100 m2

I. ROADWORK

Precast Curbs of P.C.C. 01:02:04 21.5 Bags/100 m

J. SANITARY WORK

R.C.C. Hume Pipe jointed with Cement mortar 1:1

600 mm dia. 6.4 Bags/100 m

450 mm dia. 4.8 Bags/100 m

300 mm dia. 2.2 Bags/100 m

230 mm dia. 1.8 Bags/100 m

150 mm dia. 1.2 Bags/100 m

100 mm dia. 1 Bags/100 m

SW pipes jointed with Cement mortar 1:1

300 mm dia. 12.94 Bags/100 m

230 mm dia. 9.74 Bags/100 m

150 mm dia. 6.56 Bags/100 m

100 mm dia. 4.34 Bags/100 m

C.I. Waste water line, concealed including filling the zari with 75 mm dia. 8.6 Bags/100 m

Cement mortar 1:4 and joints in Cement mortrar 1:1 100 mm dia. 10.88 Bags/100 m



Page 221 of 430

C.I. Soil Pipe /Rain water pipe, concealed, including filling the zari with C.M. 1:4 and joints in Cement mortar 1:1

100 mm dia. 10.88 Bags/100 m


Fixing Europian type W//c

0.1 Bags/no.

Fixing Orrisa Pan

Fixing urinal/s.

0.2 Bags/no.

Fixing Hand Wash Basin

0.03 Bags/no.

Fixing S. S. Sink

0.05 Bags/no.

Brick Masonry Chambern 300 x 300 x 610 mm

1.7 Bags/no.

Half Round Channel 100 mm.

15.86 Bags/100 m.

Fixing 100 mm. dia. SW Gully Trap

0.5 Bags/no.

K. STORM WATER DRAINAGE & CULVERTS

R.C.C. pipe NP-2

230 mm dia. 1.8 Bags/100 m.

300 mm dia. 2.4 Bags/100 m.

450 mm dia. 5.4 Bags/100 m.

900 mm dia. 9.8 Bags/100 m.

Storm Water Gully Chamber 6 Bags/no.



Page 222 of 430

MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS – CIVIL WORKS

N.B.: Only the related specifications pertaining to the tender are to be considered.

M-1 Water:

1.1 Water shall not be salty or brackish and shall be clean, reasonably clear and free fro m objectionable quantities of silt and trace s of o il and in jurious alkalie s salts, organic matter and other dele terious material which will either weaken the morta r or concret e or cause efflorescence or attack the steel in RCC cont ainer for transport, storage and handling of water shall be clean. Water shall conform to the standards specified in IS : 456.

1.2 If required b y the Eng ineer-in-charge and Arch itects it shall be tested by co mparison with

distilled water . Comparison shall be made by means of standard cement tes ts for soundness, time o f se tting and mortar strength as specified in IS : 269. An y indication o f unsounding change in time of se tting by 30 minutes or more or decrease of more than 1 0 per cent in strength of mortar prepared with water sample when compared wi th the results obtained with mortar prepared with distilled water shall be sufficient cause for rejection of water under test.

1.3 Water for curing mortar, concrete or masonry should not be too acidic or too alkaline. It shall be free of eleme nts which sig nificantly affect the hydration reaction or otherwise in terfere with the hardening of mortar or con crete during curing or those which prod uce objectionable stains or other unsightly deposits on concrete or mortar surfaces.

1.4 Hard and bitter water shall generally be found unsuitable for curing mortar or concrete.

1.5 Potable water shall be generally found suitable for curing mortar and concrete.

Testing Standards :

A. Chemical Analysis :-

Sampling : Test shall be carried out only once for one particular source.

Result s :

a) TDS - 3000 mg/lit. e) Carbonic contents - 200 mg/lit.

b) Sulphates - 5000 mg/lit. f) Non-carbonic contents - 3000 mg/lit. c)

pH values - 6 to 8

d) Chlorides

P.P.C - 2000 mg/lit.

R.C.C - 1000 mg/lit.

M-2 Lime :

2.1 Lime shall be hydraulic lime as per IS : 712. Necessary test shall be carried out as per IS : 6932 (Parts I to X) .

2.2 The following fields tests for limes are to be carried out:

(1) A very rough idea can be formed abou t the type of lime by its visual e xamination i.e. fa t lime bears pure white colo ur, lime in for m of Porous l umps of dirty white colour indicates quick lime, and solid lumps are the unburnt lime stone.



Page 223 of 430

(2) Acid test for determining the carbonate c ontents in lime. Excessive amount of impurities and

rough determination of class of lime.

2.3 Storage shall comply with IS : 712. The slaked lime , if stored, shall be kept in a weather proo f and damp-proof shed with impervious floor and si des to pro tect it agains t rain, mo isture, weather and extraneous materials mixin g with it. All lime tha t has been damaged in any wa y shall be rejected and all rejected materials shall be removed from site of work.

2.4 Field testing shall be done according to IS : 1624 to show the acceptability of materials.

M-3 Cement :

3.1 Cement shall be ordinary Portland slag c ement, grade 33, as per IS : 269, grade 43, as per IS : 8112 and grade 53, as per IS : 12269 or Portland slag cement as per IS : 455.

Testing Standards :

A. Setting time :

Sampling :

(i) From a lot o f 50 tones of cement, 2 % of bags shall be picked out at random, fr om which one sample of 15 kg. shall be taken.

(ii) For a lot of 50 to 100 tones - 2 samples (iii)

For a lot of 100 to 200 tones - 3 samples (iv) For a

lot of 100 to 200 tones - 3 samples (v) For a lot of

200 to 300 tones - 4 samples (vi) For a lot of 300

to 500 tones - 5 samples (vii) For a lot of 500 to

800 tones - 6 samples (viii)For a lot of 800 to 1300

tones - 7 samples

Result s :

(a) Initial setting time - not less than 30 minutes

(b) Final setting time - not more than 100 minutes

B. Fineness test by Sieving :

Sampling :

Using any 5 samples, made as above, one test is carried out, using IS sieve no. 90 microns.

Result s :

90% or more should pass through the above mentioned IS sieve. C.

Fineness test by determination of specific surface :

Sampling :

Using any 5 samples, made as above, one test is carried out.



Page 224 of 430

Result s :

For O.P.C, the surface area shall be 225 cm2/gm. or more. For

P.P.C, the surface area shall be 3000 cm2/gm.

D. Consistency test :

Sampling :

Sampling shall be as in A. Result

s :

Consistency in all samples shall be about 30%. E.

Compressive strength :

Sampling :


s :

On 2nd day, compressive strength must be 160 Kg/cm2., for O.P.C

On 7th day, compressive strength must be 220 Kg/cm2., for O.P.C On

28th day, compressive strength must be 310 Kg/cm2., for O.P.C

F. Chemical composition (IS : 4032):

Sampling :

Using any 5 samples, made as above, one test is carried out. Result

s :

a. Magnesium oxide - less than 6%.

b. Sulphur as Sulphuric anhydride - less than 2.75%. c.

Loss on ignition - upto 5%.

The above is for ordinary Portland cement.

M-3A Rapid Hardening Cement (RHC) :

3A.1 Rapid hardening cement shall be from source like Gujarat High Tech, Ambuja, Birla or equivalent as approved by the Architect and Enginee r-in-charge. It shall c onform to IS : 804 1. Test certificates showing that the cement complies to the specifications must b e submitted t o the Architect.

3A.2 It shall have strength in one day equal to that of OPC in 3 days. It shall be used for products like hume

pipes, tiles, sleep ers, poles, pres tressed and precast concrete members. It shall a lso be used for fou ndations, brid ges, culver ts, causeway s etc. where q uick cons truction activity is



Page 225 of 430

required however, prior permission of the Ar chitect and Engineer-in-charge shall be taken before use.

3A.3 It shall capable of giving required workability, final strength and better surface finish.

M-3B Sulphate Resistant Cement (SRC) :

3B.1 Sulphate resistant cement shall be from source like Gujarat High Tech or equivalent as approved by the Architect and Engineer -in-charge. It shall conform to relevan t IS code or BS- 4027 & AST M C-150 Type-II. Test certificates sh owing tha t the cement c omplies to the specifications must be submitted to the Architect.

3B.2 It shall be us ed for structu res in or near s ea water, where the soil conditions ar e aggressive, where repeated cycles of drying and w etting are occur, and also for structure s which are exposed to Sulphate a ttack & salty wea ther like f oundations, bridges, dams, tunnels, industrial drains, sewage pipes.

3B.3 It should pos sess low hea t of hydra tion, mo re compressive strength at 3,7 and 28 days than OPC. It shou ld be capable of withs tanding attack of aggressive substances which damage concrete structure like Su lphates of Sodium, Magnesium, Calciu m etc. It should have low coefficient of expansion.

M-4 White Cement :

4.1 The white cement shall conform to IS : 8042-E

M-5 Coloured Cement :

5.1 Coloured cement shall be with white or gr ey Portland cement mixed with pigments as specified in the item of the work.

5.2 The pigmen ts used for colo ured cement shall be o f ap proved quality and its qua ntity shall not

exceed 10% of the cemen t used in the mix. T he mixture o f pigment and cement shall be properly ground to have a uniform colou r and s hade. The pigments shall have such properties as to provide for durability for colour under exposure to sunlight and weather.

5.3 The pigmen t shall ha ve the property such t hat it is neither a ffected by the cement nor

detrimental to it.

M-6 Sand :

6.1 Sand shall be medium/coarse natural sand, clean, well graded, hard, strong, dura ble and gritty. Sand particles should be fr ee from injurious amounts of dust, clay, kankar nodules, soft or flaky particles of shale, alkali, salts, organic matter loam, mica or other delet erious substances an d shall be got approved from the Engineer -in-charge and Architects. The sand sha ll not conta in more than 8 % of silt as d etermined b y field test an d 3% by labo ratory test , if necessary the sand shall be washed to make it clean. All sand to be used for plaster, brickwork , concrete shall be strictly sieved by 4.75 mm seive.

Testing Standards : A. Sil t

Content : Sampling :



Page 226 of 430

Test shall be carried out for every 150 m3

of sand. The sample taken for testing shall weigh 10 Kg. Result s :

Permissible content shall be 3% in laboratory test & 8 % in field Test. B.

Fineness Modulus :

Sampling :


s :

Fine sand : 2.2 to 2.6 shall be used as earth filling in plinth, zari, etc.

Medium sand : 2.6 to 2.9 shall be sued for Brickwork and plaster. Coarse sand

: 2.9 to 3.2 shall be used for concrete.

In general, the fineness modulus of sand shall not be less than 2.5 and shall not exceed 3.0. A sand having a fineness modulus more than 3.2 wi ll be unsuitable for making satisfactory concrete.

C. The sieve analysis of sand shall be as under

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

IS Sieve % By weight IS Sieve % By Weight

Designation Passive sieve Designation passive sieve

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4.75 mm 100 600 Micron 30-100

2.36 mm 90-100 300 Micron 5-70

1.18 mm 70-100 150 Micron 0-50

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

M-7 Stone Dust :

7.1 This shall be obtained from crushing hard black trap or equivalent. It shall not contain more than 8% o f silt as determined b y field tes t with m easuring cylinder. The method o f de termining sil t contents by fields test is given under:

7.2 A sample o f stone dust to be tested s hall be place d withou t drying in 200 mm. measuring

cylinder. The quantity of th e sample sha ll be such that it fills the cyl inder upto 100 mm. mark. Then clean water shall be added upto 1 50 mm. mark . The mixture shall be stirred vigorously and the contents allowed to settle for 3 hours.

7.3 The height of silt visible as settled layer above the stone dust shall be expressed as percentage of th e

heigh t of th e stone dust below. The stone dust conta ining more than 8 % silt shall b e washed so as to bring the content within the allowable limit.

7.4 The fineness modulus of stone dust shall not be less than 1.80.



Page 227 of 430

M-8 Stone Grit :

8.1 Grit shall con sist of crushed or broken black trap stone and be hard, strong, de nse, durable clean of prop er gradation and free from skin or coating likely to p revent proper adhesion o f mortar. Gr it shall generally be cubical in shape and a s far as possible flaky e longated piece s shall be avoided. It shall generally comply with the provisions of IS : 383 Unless special stone of particular qua rries is mentioned, grit shall be obt ained from the b est black trap or equivalen t hard stone a s approved by the Eng ineer-in-charge and Archite cts. The grit shall have n o deleterious reaction with cement.

8.2 The grit shall conform to the following gradation as per sieve analysis:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ IS

Sieve % passing IS Sieve % Passing Designation

Through sieve Designation Through sieve

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

12.50 mm. 100% 4.75 mm. 0-20%

10.00 mm. 85-100% 2.36 mm. 0- 5%

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8.3 The crushing strength of gr it will be such so as to allow the concrete in which it is used to build up the specified strength of concrete.

8.4 The necessary tests for grit shall be carried out as per the requirements of IS : 238 6 (parts I to VIII) ,

as per instructions of the Engineer-in-charge and Architec t. The necessity of test will be decided by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect.

M-9 Cinder :

9.1 Cinder is well burnt furnace residue whi ch has been fused or centered into lumps of varying sizes.

9.2 Cinder aggre gates shall be well burnt furnace residue obtained fr om furnace using coal fuel only. It shall be sound clean and free from clay, dirt ash or other deleterious matter.

9.3 The average grading for cinder aggregates shall be as mentioned below:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

IS Sieve Designation % Passing IS Designation % Passing

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

20 mm. 100 4.75 mm. 70 10 mm. 86 2.36 mm. 52

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Page 228 of 430

M-10 Lime mortar :

10.1 Lime shall conform to M-2. Water shall confor m to M- 1. Sand shall conform to specification M-

6.

10.2 Proportion of mix:

10.2.1 Mortar shall consist of su ch proportions of slaked lime and sand a s may be spe cified in i tem. The slaked lime and sand shall be measured by volume.

10.3 Proportion of mortar:

10.3.1 Lime mortar shall be prepared by wet process as per IS : 1625. Power driven mill shall be use d for

preparation of lime mortar. The slaked lime shall be placed in the mill in an even layer and ground for 1 80 revolu tions with a sufficient wa ter. Water shall be added as r equired durin g grinding (care being take n not to add more wate r) that will brin g the mixed material to a consistency of stiff paste . Thoroughly wetted sand shall then be ad ded evenly a nd the mixtur e ground for another 180 revolutions.

10.4 Storage :

10.4.1 Mortar shall always be kept damp , protect ed from sun and rain till used up , covering i t b y tarpaulin or open sheds.

10.5 Use :

10.5.1 All mor tar shall be used as soon as po ssible after gr inding. It should be used on the day o n which

it prepared. But in no case, mortar made earlier than 36 hours shall be permitted for use.

M-11 Cement Mortar :

11.1 Water shall conform to M-1. Cement shall conform to M-3. Sand shall conform to M-6.

11.2 Proportion of Mix:

11.2.1 Cement and sand shall be mixed to specif ied propor tion, sand bein g measured by measuring boxes. The p roportion of cement will be by volume on the bas is of 50Kg/Bag of cement being equal to

0.0342 m3. The mortar may be hand mixed or machine mixed as directed.

11.3 Proportion of Mortar :

11.3.1 In hand mixe d mortar. ce ment and san d in the specified proportio ns shall be th oroughly mixed dry on a clean impervious platform by turning over atleast 3 times or more till a homogeneous mixture of uniform colour is obtained . Mixing p latform shall be so arranged that n o deleterious extraneous material shall get mixed with mortar or mortar shall flow out. While mixing, the water shall be gradually added a nd thoroughly mixed to for m a stiff plastic mass of uniform colour so that each par ticle of sand shall be completely co vered with a film of wet ceme nt. The wa ter cement ratio shall be adopted as directed.

11.3.2 The mortar s o prepared shall be used within 30 minutes of adding water. Only s uch quantity of

mortar shall be prepared as can be used within 30 minutes.

M-12 Stone Coarse Aggregate For Nominal Mix Concrete :

12.1 Coarse aggre gate shall be of machine crushed stone of black trap and be hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from skin and coating likely to proper adhesion of mortar.



Page 229 of 430

12.2 The aggregate shall generally be cubic al/round in shape. Unless special stones of particular quarries

are mentioned aggregates shall be machine crushed from the black trap or equivalent black hard st one as appro ved. Aggregate shall have no deleteriou s reaction with cement. Th e size of the coarse aggre gate for plain cement co ncrete and o rdinary rein forced cement concrete shall generally be as per the table given below. However, in case of reinforced cement concrete, the maximum limit ma y be r estricted to 6 mm. less th an the mini mum lateral cle ar distance between bars or 6 mm. less the cover, whichever is smaller.

TABLE

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

IS Sieve % passing for single size IS Sieve % passing for single size

Designation aggregates of Nominal Size Designation aggregates of Nominal size

40 mm 20 mm 16 mm 40 mm 20 mm 16mm

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

80 mm. - - - 12.5 mm. - - -

63 mm. 100 - - 10 mm. 0.5 0 - 20 0.30

40 mm. 100 100 - 4.75 mm. - 0 - 5 0.5

20 mm. 0-20 85-100 100 2.35 mm. - - -

16 mm. - - 85-100

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note : This percentage may be varied some what b y the Engineer- in-charge when considered necessary for obtaining better destiny and strength of concrete.

12.3 The grading test shall be taken in the beginning and at the change of source of materials. The necessary te sts indicated in IS : 383 a nd IS : 456 s hall ha ve to be carried out to ensure th e acceptability. The aggregate sha ll be stored separately and hand led in such a manner as to prevent the intermixing of different aggregates. If th e aggregates are covered with dust th ey shall be washed with water to make them clean.

Testing Standards : A.

Flakiness Index : Sampling :

For every 200 m3. of aggregates, one test shall be carried out.

Result s :

The Flakiness index is taken as the to tal weight of the aggregates passing through the var ious thickness gauges, expressed as a percentage of the total weight of the sample taken.

Permissible is not more than 35% for aggregates used in concrete for wearing surfaces.



Page 230 of 430

B. Impact value :

Sampling :

For every 100 m3. of aggregates, one test shall be carried out.

Result s :

The impact value shall not be more than 45% by weight for aggregates used for concrete other than wearing surfaces.

For aggregates used for concrete to be used as w earing surface, th e impact va lue shall not be more than 30%, by weight.

C. Abrasion Value :

Sampling :

Sampling shall be as in B. Result

s :

The percentage of wear shall not be more than 35%. M-13 Black Trap or Equivalent Hard Stone Coarse Aggregates for Design Mix Concrete :

13.1 Aggregate for Design Mix Concrete : Coar se aggreg ate shall be machine crushed stone of black

trap or equivalen t hard stone and hard, strong, dense, durable, clean and free from skin and coating likely to prevent proper adhesion of mortar.

13.2 The aggregates shall generally be cubical in shape. Unless special stones of particular quarried are

mentione d, aggregates shall be ma chine crushed from the b est black trap or equivale nt hard stones as approved. Aggregates shall have no deleterious reaction with cement.

13.3 The necessary tests indicated in IS : 383 and IS : 456 shall have to be carried out to ensure the acceptability of the material.

13.4 If the aggregates are covered with dust, they shall be washed with water to make them clean. M-14 Brick Bats Aggregates :

14.1 Brick bat aggregate shall be broken from well burnt or slightly over burnt and dense bricks. It shall be homogeneous in texture, roughly cubical in shape, clean and free from dirt or any other foreign ma terial. The brick bats shall be less than 40 mm. size, un less otherwise specified in the item. The under-burnt or over-burnt brick bats and brick dust shall not be allowed.

14.2 The brick bats shall be hand measured by suitable boxes or as directed. M-15 Bricks :

15.1 The bricks shall be of first quality hand or machine moulded and made from suitable soils and kiln

burnt. Th ey shall be free from cracks, fl aws and modules of free lime. The y shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and sh all be of unifor m In colour. The bricks shal l be moulded with a frog of size 100 mm. x 40 mm., and 10 mm. to 20 mm. deep on one of its flat sides. The bricks shall not break when thrown on the ground from a height of 1 m.

15.2 The size of modular bricks shall be 190 mm. x 90 mm. x 90 mm.



Page 231 of 430

15.3 The size of the conventional bricks shall be (9"x4.5" x 3") 230 mm. x 110 mm. x 76.5 mm.

15.4 Only bricks of one standard size shall be us ed o n a particular work site. The following

tolerances shall be permitted in the conventional size adopted in a particular work site.

Length : + 1/8"(3.0 mm.). Width : + 1/6" (1.50 mm.). Height : + 1/6"(1.50 mm.).

15.5 The crushing strength of the bricks shall not be less than 50 Kg./cm2,. No unburned/over burn t bricks

shall be used for an y structure. The bricks sho uld have dimensional stability as per IS standards. The average water absorptio n shall not be more than 20% by weig ht. Necessary tests for crushing strength and water absorption etc. shall be carried out as per IS : 3495 (Part I to IV) .

Testing Standards : A.

Efflorescence : Sampling :

Test of 20 bricks is carried out from a stock of 20,000 bricks. Result s :

Moderate.

B. Water Absorption :

Sampling :

Test of 32 bricks is carried out from a stock of 35,000 bricks. Result s :

Absorption shall not be more than 20%. C.

Compressive Strength :

Sampling :

Test of 50 bricks is carried out from a stock of 1,00,000 ( 1 Lac) bricks. Result s :

On average the compressive streng th shall no t be le ss than 50 Kg/cm2. And e very result sh all not be

less than 20% of the IS standards.

M-15A First Class Bricks for Exposed brickwork :

15A.1 First class bricks are those wh ich strictly conform to the standard size of modular bricks, i.e. 19 cm. x 19 cm. x 9 cm. actual size, such that ten layers of brick laid in mortar shall form masonry of 1 m. height. Conventional bricks should have quality standard as per modular brick except size.

15A.2 These bricks are manufactured from good qua lity plastic earth , which is fre e from saline

deposits. They are o f goo d uniform colour. Th ey are well burn t, g iving a hard r inging sound when two bricks are struck together.

15A.3 They should have straight edges and even surfaces. They are free from cracks, chips, flaws and modules of lime.

15A.4 When immersed in water fo r an hour, they do not absorb water more than 1/6 th of their weight.

On drying, these bricks do not show any sign of efflorescence. M-15A First Class Bricks for Exposed brickwork :

15A.1 First class bricks are those wh ich strictly conform to the standard size of modular bricks, i.e. 19 cm. x 19 cm. x 9 cm. actual size, such that ten layers of brick laid in mortar shall form masonry of 1 m. height. Conventional bricks should have quality standard as per modular brick except size.



Page 232 of 430

15A.2 These bricks are manufactured from good qua lity plastic earth , which is fre e from saline

deposits. They are o f goo d uniform colour. Th ey are well burn t, g iving a hard r inging sound when two bricks are struck together.

15A.3 They should have straight edges and even surfaces. They are free from cracks, chips, flaws and modules of lime.

15A.4 When immersed in water fo r an hour, they do not absorb water more than 1/6 th of their weight. On drying, these bricks do not show any sign of efflorescence.

M-15B Calcium Silicate Bricks :

15B.1 The bricks sh all be machin e moulded a nd made fro m good quality an d clean silicious sand , lime and flyash (maximum content up to 30% in raw material composition) . The y shall be fre e from cracks, flaws, clay, free lime. They shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in size, colour and shape.

15B.2 The size of bricks shall be 228 mm. x 110 mm. x 72 mm. or as approved by the Architect. The

compressive strength of bricks shall be minimum 150 kg/m 2.

and the bricks shall have ver y high strength to weight ratio. The bricks shall hav e ver y good resistant capacity to atmospheric conditions, o ptimum build ing propertie s in rela tion to heat ins ulation, sound insula tion, absorption of water and fire protection.

15B.3 Calcium silica te products s hall con form to th e appropriate IS stand ards and ther e shall be no

change req uired in civil application techniques while using such products in the place of traditional clay bricks.

M-16 Stone :

16.1 The stone shall be of spec ified variety such as Granite/Trap Stone/Quartz or any other type of good

hard stones.

The stones s hall be obtained only from the approved quarry and sh all be hard, sound, durable and free from defects like cavities, cracks, sand hol es, flaws, injurious ve ins, patches of loos e or soft materials etc . and weathered p ortions and o ther structura l defec ts or imperfections tending to affect their soun dness and strength. The stone with roun d surface shall not b e used. The percentage of water a bsorption shall not be more than 5% o f dry weight, when tested in accordance with IS : 1124 . The minimu m crus hing strength of the s tone shall be 200 Kg/cm

2. unless

otherwise specified.

16.2 The samples of the stone to be used shall be got approved before the work is started.

16.3 The Khanki facing stone shall be dressed by chisel as specified in the item for Khanki facing in

required shape and size. The face of stone s hall be so dresse d that the bushing on the exposed face shall not project by more than 40 mm. from the general wall surface and on face to be plastered it shall not project by more than 19 mm. nor shall it h ave depressions more than 10 mm. from the average wall surface.

M-17 Laterite Stone :

17.1 Laterite stone shall be obtained from the approved quarry. It shall be uniform in texture, sound,

durable and free from soft patches. It shall hav e a minimum crushing strength of 100 Kg./cm 2. in its

dry condition . It shall not absorb water more than 20% of its own weight, when immersed for 24 hours in water. After quarrying, the stone shall be allowed to weather for some time before using in work.

17.2 The stone shall be dressed into regular rect angular blocks so that all faces are free from waviness and unevenness, edges true and square.



Page 233 of 430

17.3 Those type of stones in which white clay occurs should not be used.

17.4 Special corner stone shall be provided where so directed.

M-18 Mild Steel Bars :

18.1 Mild stee l bars reinforcement for RCC work shall conform to IS : 4 32 (Part-II) a nd shall be of tested quality. It shall also comply with relevant part of IS : 456.

18.2 All the rein forcement shall be clean and free from dirt, paint, grease, mill scale or loose or thick rust, at the time of placing.

18.3 For the purpo se of paymen t, the bar shall be measured correct upto 10 mm. length and weight

payable worked out at the rate specified below :

1. 6 mm. 0.22 Kg/m. 8. 20 mm. 2.47 Kg/m.

2. 8 mm. 0.39 Kg/m. 9. 22 mm. 2.98 Kg/m.

3. 10 mm. 0.62 Kg/m. 10. 25 mm. 3.85 Kg/m.

4. 12 mm. 0.89 Kg/m. 11. 28 mm. 4.83 Kg/m.

5. 14 mm. 1.21 Kg/m. 12. 32 mm 6.31 Kg/m.

6. 16 mm. 1.58 Kg/m. 13. 36 mm. 7.99 Kg/m.

7. 18 mm. 2.00 Kg/m. 14. 40 mm 9.86 Kg/m.

18.4 Procurement of Steel should be from author ised/approved rolling mills and te st certificates should be submitted with each lot.

Testing standards : Sampling :

For every 40 tonnes of steel, atleast one test shall be done. Result s :

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Thickness Ultimate Tensile strength Chilled state % Elongation

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

0 - 20 mm. 42 Kg/cm2. 26 Kg/cm

2. 23

20 - 40 mm. 42 Kg/cm2. 24 Kg/cm

2. 23

40 mm. & more 42 Kg/cm2. 24 Kg/cm

2. 23

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

M-19 A High Yield Strength Steel Deforms Bars :

19.A.1 High yield str ength steel d eformed bars be either cold twisted or hot rolled shall c onform to IS : 1739 and IS : 1139 respectively.

19.A.2 Other provision and requirements shall conform to M-18 for Mild steel bars.



Page 234 of 430

M-19 B Thermo-mechanically Treated Bars (TMT)

19.B.1 TMT bars shall conform to IS: 1786

19.B.1 Procurement of Steel sh ould be from author ized dealer and test certific ates should be submitted with each lot.

M-19 C Corrosion Resisting Steel (CRS)

19.C.1 CRS bars shall conform to IS: 1786

19.C.1 Procurement of Steel sh ould be from author ized dealer and test certific ates should be submitted with each lot.

M-20 High Tensile Steel Wire :

20.1 The high tensile wires for the use in prestressed concrete work shall conform to IS : 2090.

20.2 The tensile strength of the high tensile steel bars shall be as specified in the item. In absence of the given stre ngth, the minimum strength shall be taken as per par a 6.1 of IS : 1 785. Testing shall be done as per IS requirements.

20.3 The high tens ile steel shal l be free from l oose mill scale, rust oil , gre ase, or any other harmful

matter. Clea ning of stee l bars may b e carried out by immersio n in solven t solution, wire brushing or passing through a pressure box containing carborundum.

20.4 The high tensile wire shall be obtained fr om manufactures in coil ha ving diameter not less than

350 time the diameter of wire itself, so that wire springs back straight on being uncoiled.

Testing standards :

Sampling :

For every 40 tonnes of steel, atleast one test shall be done. Result s :

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Thickness Ultimate Tensile strength Chilled state % Elongation

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

For all sizes 49.5 Kg/cm2. 42.5 Kg/cm

2. 14.5

-------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- M-21 Mild Steel Binding Wire :

21.1 The mild ste el wire shall be of 1.63 m m. or 1.22 m m. (16 or 18 gauge) diameter and shall

conform to IS : 280.



Page 235 of 430

21.2 The use of black wire will be permitted for binding reinforcements bars. It shall be free from rust, oil

paint, grease, loose mill scale or any other undesirable coating which may prevent adhesio n of cement mortar.

M-22 Structural Steel :

22.1 All structura l steel shall conform to IS : 226. The ste el shall be well and cleanly rolled to the dimensions a nd weight sp ecified b y the IS, subj ect to the permissible to lerances as per IS : 1852. The finished materials shall be rea sonably fr ee from cracks, surface flaws, lamina tions, rough and imperfect edges and all other harmful defects mentioned in IS : 229 and shall have a smooth finish . The materi al shall be free from loose mill scale, rust pits or other defects affecting the strength and durability. River bars s hall conform to IS : 1148. The decision of th e Engineer-in-charge regarding rejecting any steel section on account of any of the above defects shall be final and binding to the Contractor.

22.2 Structural ste el shall con form to the following requ irements. Th e mechanical and chemical properties shall be as below :

MECHANICAL COMPOSITION OF STEEL

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Steel Class ofNominalTensile Yield stress %

designation steel thickness strengthmin. Kgf/mm2

elongation product

in mm. in Kgf/mm2

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ST-42 W & Plates, Below 6 mm. Bend test only shall be required.

ST-42 S flats,

bars. upto 20 & 42 to 5426.0 23

Vc

Over 20 upto 42 to 5424.0 23

Vc 40

Below 10 Bend test only shall be required

10 upto 20

& Vc 42 to 5428.0 23

Over 20 42 to 5424.0 23

ST-42 O Plates, Below 6 Bend test only shall be sections, required.

fla ts,Over 6 42 to 5428.0 23

Below 10 Bend test only shall be

required

10 & above 42 to 5428.0 23



Page 236 of 430

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF STEEL

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Steel designation Maximum percentage -----------------------------------------------------

Carbon Sulphur Phosphorous

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ST-42 W 0.23 0.06 0.06

ST-42 S 0.25/0.28 0.06 0.06

ST-42 O 0.07 0.07

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

22.3 The following variety of steel shall be used for structural purposes :

ST-42 S : It shall be used for all types of structure (riveted or bolted), including those subjected to d ynamic lo ading and wh ere fatigue, wide fluctua tions of stresses, reversal of stresses and great restrain t are in volved. It shall b e su itable fo r welded str uctures, provided tha t the thickness of the material does not exceed 20 mm.

22.4 When the steel is supplied by the Contractor, test certific ate o f the manufa cture shall be

obtained according to IS : 226 and other relevant Indian Standards.

M-23 Galvanised Iron Sheets :

23.1 The galvanised iron sheets shall be from Tata or equivalent of approved zinc coating class , as approved by the Architect a nd Engineer-in-charge. It s hall be plain or corrugated, of gauge as specified in item. The GI sheets shall confor m to IS : 277. The sheets shall be u ndamaged in carriage and handling e ither by rubbing off o f zinc co ating or other wise, the y sh all ha ve clea n and bright surface and shall be free from dents, holes, rust or white powdery deposit.

23.2 The width of GI sheet shall be as directed, as per site condition.

M-23.A GI Valleys gutter ridges :

23.A.1 The GI ridge and hips shall be of plain galvanised sheets, class-3, of the thickness, as specified in item. These shall be 600 mm. in wid th and properly bent up to the shape without damage to the sheets, in process of bending.

23.A.2 Valleys, gu tters and flashing shall also be of galvanised sheet, o f thickness, a s specified in item.

Valleys shall be 900 mm. wide overall and flashing shall be 380 mm. wid e overall. The y shall be bent to the required shape without damage to the sheet in the process of bending.



Page 237 of 430

M-24 Asbestos Cement Sheets :

24.1 Asbestos cement sheets plain, corrugated or semi corrugated and curved shall be from Everest or equivalent, as approved by the Archite ct or E ngineer-in-charge. It sha ll conform to IS : 459. The thickness of the shee t shall be as specified in the item. The sheet shall b e free from a ll defects such as cracks, holes, deformation, chipped edge or otherwise damaged.

24.2 It shall manufactured by reinfo rcing Asbe stos in cement, in such a manner that every fibre is

covered with fine particles of cement to ensur e maximum streng th. It shall be a lkali resistance and anti corrosive. It should not break during trans portation, handling, laying etc. and should be non- destructible, non-inflammable and non-organic. It shall have high tensile strength and high slenderness ratio.

24.3 The minimum nominal thick ness of sheets s hall be 6 mm., having covering efficiency of about

90% and weight 1518 kg/c m2. The sheet shall be free from al l defects such as cracks, holes,

deformation, chipped edge or otherwise damaged. The permissible bending stress shall be 130 kg/cm

2.

24.4 The accessories shall be s ame thickness that o f AC sheets. The y shall be suita ble for a ll the types of sheets and locations. They also shall be from approved manufacturer and shall be free from any defects. The fixing of AC sheets and accessories shall conform to IS : 730.

24.5 Ridges & Hips :

24.5.1 Ridges and hips shall be of same thickness as that of AC sheets. The differen t types of ridges shall

be suitable for its corresponding type of sheets and locations.

24.5.2 Other accessories to be used in roof such as fl ashing piece, caves, filler pieces, valley gu tters, north ligh t an d ventila tor curves, barge boards etc. shall be from standard manufacture an d shall be suitable for the different types of sheets and location.

M-25 Mangalore Pattern Roof Tiles :

25.1 The mangalore pattern tiles shall conform to IS : 654 for Class AA or Class A type, as specified in the item. Samples of th e tiles to be pr ovided shall be got approved from th e Engineer-in- charge and Architect. Necessary tests shall be carried out as directed.

M-26 Shuttering :

M-26A Timber/Wooden planking :

26A.1 The shuttering shall be either of wooden planking of 30 mm. minimu m thickness with or without steel lin ing o r steel plates stiffened by st eel angles. The shutter ing shall be supported on battens and beams and pro ps of vertical ballies properly cross b raced together, so as to make the centering rigid. In place of ba llie props, brick pillar of adequa te section built in mud mortar may be used.

26A.2 The form work shall be sufficien tly stron g and shall have camber, so that it assumes correct shape after deposition of the concrete and shall be able to resist forces caused by vibration, live load of men working over it and other incidental load s asso ciated with it. The s huttering shall have smooth and even surface and its joints shall not permit leakage of cement grout.

26A.3 If at an y stage of work, during or after placing concrete in the structure, the form work sags or bulges

out beyond the required shape of the structure, the concrete shall be removed and work redone with



Page 238 of 430

fresh concrete and adequate ly rig id form work. The complete form work shall be got inspected by and got approved fro m the E ngineer-in-charge and Architect, before th e reinforcement bars are placed in position.

26A.4 The props sh all consist of ballies having 100 mm. minimum diameter, measured at mid leng th and

80 mm. at thin end a nd shall be placed as pe r design req uirement. Th ese shall rest squarely on

wooden sole plate 40 mm. thick and minimum bearin g area of 0.1 0 m 2. laid on

sufficiently hard base.

26A.5 Double wedges shall further be provided between the sole plate and the wooden props so as to facilitate tightening and easing of shuttering without jerking the concrete.

26A.6 The timber used in shuttering shall not be so dry as to absorb water from concrete and swell or bulge

nor so green or wet as to shrink after er ection. The timber shall be properly sawn and planned on the sides and surface coming in contact with concrete. Wooden form work with metal sheet lining or steel plates stiffened by steel angles shall be permitted.

26A.7 As far as possible, clamps shall be used to hold the for ms together and use of nails and spike s shall be avoided.

26A.8 The surface of timber shut tering that wo uld come on contact with c oncrete shall be well wette d and coated with soap solution before the concreting is done. Alternatively coat of raw linseed oil or oil of approved manufa cture may be applied in place of soap solution. In c ase of steel shuttering, either soap solu tion or raw lins eed oil shall be applied after thoroughly cleaning the surface. Under no circumstances, black or burnt oil shall be permitted.

26A.9 The shutterin g for beams and slabs sh all have camber of 4 mm. per meter (1 in 250) or as

directed by Engineer-in-charge and Architect, so as to offset the subsequent deflection. For cantilevers, the camber at free end shall be 1/50 of the project length or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect.

M-26B Concrete Shuttering Plywood :

26B.1 It shall be made from strong and selected hard-woods. It shall b e bonded with high quality Phenol Formaldehyde s ynthetic resin a dhesive, hot pressed and then shall be further treated with a permanent type of preservative by vacuum-cum-pressure impregnation.

26B.2 Due to the bonding with Phenol Formaldehyde, it shall be mo isture and weather proof. The use of

selected h ard-woods re nder hard an d wear-resi stant faces and thereby it shall be reusable several times. It shall be highly resistant to rot, termites and other wood inhabiting insects. Due to complete penetration of the preservative, it shall be exceedingly durable.

26B.3 It sha ll ha ve high impact strength and therefor e shall be used successfully in place of timber planks

and steel sheets. It shall protect the concrete from rapid temperature changes and shall provide op timum conditions for se tting o f the concrete. As it shall p ossess remarkable design flexibility, it shall be ideal for curved formwork.

26B.4 Besides it shall be used as centering, shu ttering and formwork of concrete columns, beams, slabs, walls, tanks, bridges, fly-o vers, silos etc. It shall also be use d for structur al applica tions like ext ernal walling, roof ing, flooring, curt ain walls , work-site of fices, in cabins of t rucks, rail coaches etc.

M-26C Steel Sheeting and Steel Plates :

26C.1 Steel sheetin g and steel plates should be free fr om clinks, twists , offsets , warps, etc. The ir surface should be neat, clean and smooth. Before placing concrete, s teel forms shall be thoroughly cleaned off of all rust, dust and loose mate rials. Colourless oil or grease of approved quality shall be applied before placing steel.



Page 239 of 430

26C.2 The size of angles used for framing and bracing of steel plates should be sufficient to withstand the

weight of concrete without forming clinks, twists, offsets, warps, etc. in the steel plates. Also, the gauge of steel sheeting used should not be higher than 14 G.

26C.3 Minimum two bracing angl es should be prov ided along with angle framing while making the steel pla

tes. It should be riveted or weld ed to su it the requirement of finish conc rete surface. Minimum two rivets should be provided a t all Four Corners and at junction of ang le framing and bracing.

26C.4 If the plates are to be welded, steel sheet and angle framing/bra cing should b e welded from sides

and at back. Welding on sides should be buffed to make the sides smooth. Also , intermittent welding should be done to keep steel sheet and angle framing/bracing in one plane.

M-27 Expansion Joints-Premoulded Filler :

27.1 The item prov ides for ex pansion joints in RCC frame structure, for internal joints as well a s exposed joints, with the use of premoulded bituminous joint filler.

27.2 Premoulded bituminous joint filler , i .e. preformed strip of expansi on joint fil ler shall not get deformed or broken by t wisting, bend ing or other handling pressures, whe n exposed to atmospheric condition. Pieces of joint filler that have been damaged shall be rejected.

27.3 Thickness of the pre-moulded joint filler shall be 25 mm., unless otherwise specified.

27.4 Premoulded bituminous joint filler shall conform to BE : 1838.

M-28 Expansion Joints-Copper Strips & Hold fasts :

28.1 The item pro vided for e xpansion joints in RCC fr ame structure, for internal join t as well as for exposed joints, with the use of necessary copper strip and holdfasts.

28.2 Copper sheet shall be 1.2 5 mm. th ick and 1. 25 mm. wide and shall be of Ù' shape, in th e

middle. Cop per strip shall have hold fast of 3 mm . diameter copper rod, fixed to the pla te, soldered on the strip at intervals of about 30 cm. or as shown in the drawing or as directed. The width o f each flange (horiz ontal side) o f the copper p late, to be e mbedded in concrete work shall be 25 mm. Dep th o f ` U' to be provided in the expansion join t, in copper p late shall o f 25 mm.

M-30 Wooden Flush Door Shutters (Solid Core) :

30.1 The solid core type (water proof/ Commercial) flush door shutters shall be o f decorative face or non-decorative face type , as specified in the dr awing. The size a nd thickness of the shutter shall be as specified in dr awings or as directed. The timber species for core sh all be used as per IS: 2202- (Part-I). The timber shall b e free from d ecay and ins ect attack. Knots and kno t holes less than half the width o f cross-section of the members in which they o ccur, may be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmle ss pin holes shall be permissible except in the exposed edges of the core members. The co mmercial plywood, cross-bands shall conform to IS : 303. And waterproof plywood shall confirm to IS 710.

30.2 The solid core shall be of wood laminate, prepared fr om battens o f well seasoned and treated good quality wood, having straight grains. The battens shall be o f uniform size of about 2.5 cm. width. These shall be prop erly glued and machine pressed together, with grains of each pie ce reversed from that of the adjoining one. The longitudinal joints of the battens shall be staggered and no piece



Page 240 of 430

shall be less than 50 cm. in leng th. Ed ges of the co re shall be lip ped internally with 1st class teak wood battens o f 4 cm.(1- 1/2") minimum width , glued and machine pressed along with the core.

30.3 The core surface shall the n have two or th ree venee rs firmly glue d on each fa ce. The first veneer

(calle d cross hand) shall be laid with its gr ains at righ t angle s to those o f the core and the second and the third veneers with their grains parallel to those of the core.

30.4 The face pan el of the shu tters shall be formed b y gluing, b y the hot press process on both faces of

the core with eithe r plywood or cross-bands and face ven eers. The lipp ing, re veting, opening of glazing, venation etc. shall be provided if specified in the drawing.

30.5 All edges o f the door shutters shall be square. T he shutters shall be free from twist or warp in its

plane. Both faces of the shutters shall be sand papered to make smooth even texture.

30.6 The shutters shall be tested for -

(1) End immersio n test : The test shall be carried out as per IS : 2202 (part-I). Ther e shall be no delamination at the end of the test.

(2) Knife test : The face panel when tested in accordance with IS : 1659 shall pass the test. (3) Glue Adhesion test : The flush door shall be tested for glue adhesive test in accordance with IS

:2202 (Par t-I) . Th e shutte rs shall be c onsidered to have passed the test if n o delamina tion occurs in the glue lines in the plywood and if no single delamination more than 80 mm. in length & more than 3 mm. in depth has occurred in the assembly g lue lines between the plywood face and the style and rail. Dela mination at the co rner shall be measured continuously around the corner. Delamination at th e knots, knot holes and oth er permissible wood defects shall no t b e considered in assessing the sample.

30.7 The tolerance in size of solid core type flush door shall be as under : In

Normal thickness +1.2 mm. In Normal height +3 mm.

30.8 The thickness of the shutters shall be uniform throughout, with a permissible variation o f n ot more than 0.8 mm. when measured at any two points,

M-31 Aluminium Doors, Windows, Ventilators :

31.1 Aluminium a lloy used in the manufacture of extruded window sections shall conform to I S

designation HEA-WP of IS : 733 and also to IS designation WVG-WP of IS : 1285. The section shall be as specified in the drawing and design. The fabrication shall be done as directed.

31.2 The hinges shall be cast o r extruded Aluminium hi nge of same type as in window but of larger size.

31.3 The hinges shall normally be of 50 mm., openab le/projecting type. Non-projecting type o f hinges

may also be used, if directed . The handles of the door shall be of specified design. A suitable locks for the door , operable either from outside or inside shall be provided. In double shutter door, the first closing shutter shall have concealed aluminium alloy tower bolt at top and bottom.

M-32 Rolling Shutters:

32.1 The rolling shutters shal l conform to IS: 6248 . Rolling shutters sh all be supp lied of speci fied type, with accessories. The size of the rolling shutters shall be as specified in the drawings. The shutters shall be construct ed with interlocking lath sections formed from cold rolled steel strips not less than 0.9 mm.. th ick and 80 mm. wide, for shutters upto 3 .5 m. width and not less tha n 1.25 mm. thick and 80 mm. wide , for shutters 3. 5 m. in width and above , un less otherwise specified.



Page 241 of 430

32.2 Guide channels shall be of mild stee l, deep channel section and roll presse d or built-up (fabricated), with jo intless construction. The th ickness of the shee t used shall no t be less than 3.15 mm.

32.3 Hood covers shall be made of MS sheets, not less than 0.90 mm. thick. For shutters havin g width of 3.5 m. and abo ve, the thickness of MS sheet for the hood cover shall be not less than 1.25 mm.

32.4 The spring shall be o f be st quality an d shall be ma nufactured from tested h igh tensile spring steel

wire or strip of adequ ate strength to balance the shutters in all positions. Th e spring pipe

shaft etc. shall be supported on strong MS or malleable CI brackets. The brackets shall be fixed on or under the lintel as specified with rawlplugs and screws bolts, etc.

32.5 The rolling shutters shall be of self rolling upto 8 m2. clear area, without ball bearing and upto 12 m

2.

clear area, with ball bearing. If the rolling shutters are of large area, then gear operated type shutters shall be used.

32.6 The locking a rrangement shall be provided at the bottom of shutter at bo th ends. The shutters shall

be opened from outside.

32.7 The shutters shall be completed wi th d oor suspensi on shafts, locking arrangements, pu lling hooks, handles and other accessories.

M-33 Collapsible Steel Gate :

33.1 The collapsible steel ga te shall be in one or two leaves and size as per approve d drawings or as specified. The gate shall be f abricated from best q uality mild ste el channels, flats etc . and either steel pulleys or ball bearings shall be provided in every double channel, unless otherwise specified. The particulars of collapsible gate shall be as under:

(a) Pickets: T hese shall be of 20 mm. MS channels of heavy sectio n, unless o therwise shown on drawings. The distance, center to center of pickets shall be 12 cm. with an opening of 1 0 cm.

(b) Pivoted MS flats shall be 20 mm. x 6 mm.

(c) Top and bottom guides shall be from tee or flat iron of approved size.

(d) The fittings like stoppers, fixing hold fasts, locking cleats, brass handles and cast iron rollers shall be of approved design and size.

M-34 Welded Steel Wire Fabric :

34.1 Welded steel wire fabric for general purp ose shall be manufactured from cold dra wn steel wire "as drawn" or galvanised steel conforming to IS : 2 26 with longitudinal and tr ansverse wire securely connected at e very in tersection by a process of elec trical resistance welding an d conforming to IS : 4948. It shall be fabric ated and finis hed in workmanlike manne r and shall be free from injurious defects and shall be dust proof. The type of mesh shall be oblong or square, as directed. T he mesh sizes and sizes of wire for square as well a s oblong, we lded steel w ire fabric shall be as directed. The steel wire fabr ic in panels shall be i n one whole piece, in each panel, as far as stock sizes permit.

M-35 Expanded Metal Sheets:

35.1 The expanded metal sheets shall be free from fl aws, join ts, broken strands, laminations and other



Page 242 of 430

harmful surface defects. Expanded metal steel sh eet shall conform to IS : 41 2 except that blank sheets need not be with guaran teed mechanical properties. The size o f the d iamond mesh of expanded metal and dimensions of strands (width and thickness) shall be as specified. The tolerance on nominal weight of expanded metal sheets shall be of + 10%.

35.2 Expanded metal in panels shall be in o ne whole pi ece, in each p anel, as far as stock size s

permit. The expanded me tal sheets shall be coated wi th suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion.

M-36 Mild Steel Wire (Wire Gauze Jali) :

36.1 Mild steel wire may be gal vanised, as indicated. All finished steel wire shall be we ll sawn to the dimensions, and the size of the wire shall be as specified in item. Th e wire shall be sound, free from splits, surface flaw, ro ugh, jagged and imper fect edges and other harmful surface defects and shall conform to IS : 280.

M-37 Plywood:

37.1 The plywood for general purpose shall conform IS : 303.

Plywood is made by cementing toge ther thin boards or sheets of wood into panels. There are always an odd number of layers, 3,5,7,9 ply etc. The plies are placed so that grain of each layer is at right angles to the grain in the adjacent layer.

37.2 The chief advantages of plywood over a single board of the same thickness is that, plywood offers more u

niform streng th, along its le ngth and width and also offers greater resistance to cracking and splitting with change in moisture content.

37.3 Usually syn thetic resins are used for gluing, phenolic resins are usually cured in a hot pre ss which

compresses and simultaneously heats the pl ies between hot plates , which maintain a temperature of 900C

to 1400C and a pr essure of 11 to 14 Kg /cm

2., on the wood. The time o f heating may be anything from 2 to

60 minutes depending upon the thickness. 37.4 When water glues are used the wood absorbs so much water that the finished plywood must be dried carefully.

When synthetic resins a re used a s a dhesive, the finished plywood must be exposed to an atmosphere of con trolled humidity until the proper a mount of moisture has bee n absorbed.

37.5 According to IS: 303 , the plywood for g eneral purpose shall be of the grades namely BWR, WWR and CWR, depending upon the adhesives used fo r bondin g the veneers , and it will b e further classified into six typ es namely AA, AB , AC, BB, BC and CC based on the quality of the two faces, each face being of three kinds namel y, A,B and C. After pressing, the finishe d plywood shou ld be reconditioned to a moisture conte nt not less th an 8% and n ot more than 16%.

37.6 Thickness of plywood boards:

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Board Thickness Board Thickness Board Thickness Board Thickness

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

3 ply 3 mm. 5 ply 5 mm. 7 ply 9 mm. 9 ply 16 mm.

4 mm. 6 mm. 13 mm. 19 mm.

5 mm. 8 mm. 16 mm. 11 ply 19 mm.



Page 243 of 430

6 mm. 9 mm. 9 ply 13 mm. 22 mm.

25 mm.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Types of plywood:

M-37A Water Proof (Weather Proof) Plywood:

37A.1 The plywood shall be from Kitply, Wonder Wood, Anchor Board or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer -in-charge. It shall conf orm to IS : 710 a nd to the rele vant Defence and Navy specifications.

37A.2 Plywood shall be made fro m veneers of hard wood timbers and bonded with hig h quality BWP type

Phenol Formaldehyde Synthetic Resin Adhesive and hot pressed at high temperature and pressure, and further tre ated with a fixed type of preservative by vacuum-cum-pressure impregnation, to produce thin boards or sheet s o f w ood panels. There are always an odd number of layers. The plies shall be placed, so that , grain of each layer is at right angles to the grain in the adjacent layer.

37A.3 Plywood shall be wa terproof, weather pr oof, boilp roof, and highly durab le even against

strenuous vulnerable uses. It shall resis t the attack of termites, cockroaches, wo od burrowers, fungus, mould, rot, decay and other wood destroying insects and marine organisms.

37A.4 The tensile s trength of the plywood shall be minimu m 600 kg/cm2.

and bending strength above

400 kg/cm 2. The swelling of p lywood in water should be al most n egligible. Spe cific gra vity of

plywood should be 0.7 to 0 .75, ha ving screw and nail holding strength normal to face, atleas t 250 kg. and 60 kg., respectively.

37A.5 The moisture content shall be less than 10% and the plywood shall have high fire resistance and

shall be free from any cracks, wraps, split e tc., and shall have uniform streng th all over the panel surface. It shall be u sed for marin e structures, leather tanning tables, wall panelling, and underlayment for kitchen and other furniture, subjected to heat and moisture.

M-37B Commercial Ply:

37B.1 The plywood shall be from Mafatlal Plyw ood I ndustries Ltd. or equivalen t, as approved by th e Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to IS 303.

37B.2 Plywood shall be made from hard woo d timbers, finished with selected specie s of timber, suitable for veneers and bonded with strictly controlled and evenly spread adhesives.

37B.3 It shall be smooth and strong and shall be free from warping, cupping and twisting.

M-38 Glass:

38.1 All glass shall be of the best quality, fr ee from specks, bubbles, smokes, vein s, air holes, blisters, and other defects . The kind of glass to be used shall be as mentioned in the item o r specification or in the spe cial provision s or as shown in deta iled drawings. Thickness of the glass panels shall be uniform. The specifications for different kinds of glass shall be as under:

38.2 Sheet Glass :

38.2.1 In absence of any specified thickness or weight in the item or deta iled specifications of the item of



Page 244 of 430

work, sheet glass shall be weighing 7.5 Kg/m2. for panes upto 600 mm. x 600 mm.

38.2.2 For panes larger than 600 mm. x 600 mm and upto 800 mm. x 800 mm., the glass weighing not less

than 8.75 Kg/m2. shall be used. For bigger panes upto 900 mm. x 900 mm., glass weighing not less

than 11.25 Kg/m2. shall be used.

38.2.3 Sheet glass shall be paten t flattened glass of best quality and for glazing and framing purposes shall conform to IS : 1761 . Shee t glass of the specified colours shall be used, if so shown on the detailed drawings or so specified for important buildings and for panes with any dimensions over 900 mm., plate glass of specified thickness shall be used.

38.3 Plate Glass :

38.3.1 When plate g lass is specified, it shall be `Polished pa tent p late glass' of best qu ality. It shall have

both the surface grou nd flat and parallel and polished to obta in clear undisturbed vision and reflection. The plate g lass shall be of th ickness mentioned in the item or as shown in the detailed drawing or as specified. In absence of any specified th ickness, the thic kness of plate glass to be supplied shall be 6 mm. and a tolerance of 0.20 mm. shall be admissible.

38.4 Obscured Glass :

38.4.1 This type of glass transmits light so tha t vision is partially or almost c ompletely obscured. Glass shall

be plain rolled, figure, ribbed or flu ted, or fr osted, as may be specified or as required. The thickness and type of glass shall be as per details on drawings or as specified or as directed.

38.5 Wired Glass :

38.5.1 Glass shall be with wire ne tting embedded in a sheet of plate glass. Electrically welded 13 mm . Georgian square mesh sha ll be used. Thickness of glass shall not be less than 6 mm. Wired glass shall be of the type and thickness as specified.

38.6 Double Glazed units :

38.6.1 Double glazed unit shall c omprise of two glasses, of appropriate thickness and absolutely machine-cleaned on both sides, with an air gap of 12 mm .in-be tween. The space between th e two glasses is kept totally dr y, avoiding any condensation by sealing the space with elastomeric sealant. Thus in all, it is an insulating glass unit of around 20mm. thickness.

38.6.2 It shall be suitably used for any kind of Doors and Windows, in all areas of work and residences. It shall be absolutely and clearly transparent, giving the following advantages :

1) Total light penetration, but with dust and heat insulation.

2) Noise insulation.

3) 25% saving in electricity due to heat insulation.

4) Crystal clear transparency.

M-39 Acrylic Sheets :

39.1 Acrylic sheets shall be o f thickness as specified in the item and o f specified shape and size, as the case may be. Panels may flat or curved. It should be light in weight. It shall be colourless or coloured or opaque, as specified in th e item. Co lourless sheet shall be as transparent as th e finest op tical glass. Its ligh t transmissio n ra te shall b e about 95%. Transparency shall no t be affected for the sheets of larger thickness. It s hall be extreme ly re sistant to sunlight, weather and low temperatures.

39.2 It shall no t s how any sig nificant yellowing or change in ph ysical properties or loss of light



Page 245 of 430

transmission over a longer period of us e. The sheet shall be imp act resistant also, sheets should be of such quality that they can be cut, bent and join ted, as desired. So lution for the joints shall be used as per the requirement of manufacturer.

M-40 Particle Board :

40.1 The particle b oard used for face panels shall of best quality free from any defec ts. The particle boards shall be made with phenolmaldehyde adhesive. The particle boards shall conform to IS : 3087 "Specifications for w ood particle b oard for gene ral purpose". The size and the thickness shall be as indicated.

40.2 Particle board shall be mad e completely from Teakwood and shall be bonded with BWP type

Phenol Formaldehyde synthetic resin to give a flat, strong and homogenised panel.

40.3 It shall be durable and shall have smooth surface so as to take any type of surface treatmen t, like polishing, painting, laminating or veneers. It shall be fire resistant, weather resistant, termite and insect r esistant. It shall be d imensionally stable, s tructurally strong an d acoustically superior.

40.3 It shall be available in all standard sizes as that of the plywood.

40.4 Particle board may also be available in veneered form.

M-41 Expanded Polystyrene or Framed Styroper Slabs :

41.1 The expande d polystyrene ceiling boards and t iles shall be of appr oved make and shall be of sizes, thickness, finish and colour, as indica ted. The y shall be of high density an d suitable for use as insulating material. The insulating material shall be like slab of Thermocole etc.

M-42 Resin Bonded Fibre Glass :

42.1 The resin bo nded fibre glass tiles or r olls s hall be of appro ved make and sh all be of size s, thickness and finish, as indicated.

42.2 For test of mineral wool thermal insulation blanket, IS : 3144 shall be followed.

42.3 Insulation wool blanket shall be with the following coverings on one or both sides, as indicated. (1)

Bituminised h essain Kraft paper suitable fo r use in position wher e moisture h as to be excluded.

(2) Hessian cloth or Kraft paper, for keeping out dust.

(3) GI wire netting, suitable for surfaces to be plastered over.

M-43 Fixtures and Fastenings :

43.1 General :

43.1.1 The fixtures a nd fastenings, that is butt, hinges, tee a nd strap hing es, sliding do or bolts, tower bolts, door latch, bath-ro om latch, ha ndles, door stoppers, casement window fasteners , casement stays and ventilators catch shall be made o f the metal, as specified in the item or its specification.

43.1.2 They shall be of iron, brass, aluminium, chromium plated iron, chromium plate d brass, coppe r

oxidised iron, copper oxidised brass or anodised Aluminium, as specified.



Page 246 of 430

43.1.3 The fixtures shall be heavy types. The fixtures and fastenings shall be smoo th fin ished and shall

be such as will ensure ease of operations.

43.1.4 The samples of fixtures and fastenings shall be got approved by Engineer-in -charge an d Architect, as regards its quality and shape before fixing them in position.

43.1.5 Brass and anodised aluminium fixtures and fastenings shall be bright finished.

43.2 Holdfasts :

43.2.1 Holdfasts shall be made from mild steel flat 30 cm. length and one of the holdfasts shall be bent at right angle and two nos. of 6 mm. dia meter holes, shall be made in it for fixing it to the frame with screws. At the other end, the ho ldfast shall be forked and bent at right angles in opposite directions.

43.3 Butt hinges :

43.3.1 Railway standard heavy type butt hinges shall be used when so specified.

43.3.2 Tee and strap hinges shall be manufactured from MS Sheet.

43.4 Siding door bolts (Aldrops) :

43.4.1 The aldrops as specified in the item shall be used and shall be got approved.

43.5 Tower bolts (Barrel type) :

43.5.1 Tower bolts as specified in the item shall be used and shall be got approved.

43.6 Door Latch :

43.6.1 The size of door latch shall be taken as the length of latch.

43.7 Bathroom Latch :

43.7.1 Bathroom latch shall be similar to tower bolt.

43.8 Handle :

43.8.1 The size of the handles sh all be determined by the in side grip length of the han dles. Handle s shall have a base plate of length 50 mm. more than the size of the handle.

43.9 Door Stoppers :

43.9.1 Door stoppers shall be eith er floor door stopper type or door catch types. Floor sto pper shall be of overall size as specified and shall have a rubber cushion.

43.10 Door Catch :

43.10.1 Door catch shall be fixed a t a height of about 900 mm. from the floor level such that one part of the catch is fitted on the inside of the shutte r and the o ther par t is fixed in the wall with necessary wo oden plug arrangements fo r appropriate fixing. The catch shall be fixed 20 mm. inside the face for the door for easy operation of catch.

43.11 Wooden Door Stop with Hinges :

43.11.1 Wooden door stop of size 100 mm. x 60 mm. x 40 mm. shall be fixed on the d oor frame with a hinge

of 75 mm. size and at a he ight o f 900 mm . from the floor level. The woo den door sto p shall be provided with 3 coats of oil paint.

43.12 Casement Window Fastener :



Page 247 of 430

43.12.1 Casement window fastener for single leaf window shutter shall be left or rig ht handed as

directed.

43.13 Casement Stays (Straight Peg Stay) :

43.13.1 The stays shall be made from a chann el section having three hole s at appropriate positio n so that the window can be opened either fully or partially, as required. Size of the stay shall be 250 mm. to 300 mm., as directed.

43.14 Ventilator Catch :

43.14.1 The pattern and shape of the catch shall be as approved.

43.15 Pivot :

43.15.1 The base and socket plate shall be mad e from minimum 3 mm. thick plate, and projected pivot shall not be less than 12 mm. in diameter and 12 mm. in length and shall be firmly riveted to the base plate, in case of iron pivot and in single piece base plate, in the case of brass pivot.

M-44 Paints:

M-44A Oil Paints:

44A.1 Oil paints shall be of the specified colour and shade and as approved. The ready mixed paints shall only be used. However, if ready mixed paint of specified shade or tint is not available white ready mixed paint with ap proved stainer shall be a llowed. In such a case, the C ontractor shall ensure that the shade of the paint so allowed shall be uniform.

44A.2 All the paints shall meet with the following general requirements:

(i) Paint shall n ot show excessive setting in a freshly o pened full can and shall easily be

redispersed with a paddle to a smooth homogene ous state. T he paint shall show no curdling, levering, caking or colour separation and shall be free from lumps and skins.

(ii) The paint as received shall brush eas ily, possess goo d levelling pr operties and show no

running or sagging tendencies.

(iii) The paint shall not skin within 48 hours in a three quarters filled closed container.

(iv) The paint sh all dry to a smooth unifor m finish free from roughness grit, uneve nness and other imperfections.

44A.3 Ready mixed paint shall b e used exactly as received from the ma nufacturers and generally according to their instructions and without any admixtures, whatsoever.

M-44B Enamel Paints :

44B.1 The enamel paint shall sa tisfy all gener al requi rements in specific ation of o il p aints. Enamel paint

shall conform to IS : 2933. It shall be from Nerolac, Berger, Asian Paints or equiva lent. It shall offer variety of finishes like Glossy, Semi-glossy, Pearl lustre and Matt.

44B.2 It shall be applied either by brush, roll or spray. It shall have a covering capacity of 13 to 18 m 2. per

coat, dep ending on the surface to be pain ted. It shall be use d both on metal and woo d surfaces.



Page 248 of 430

44B.3 It shall have a viscosity of application of 60 to 65 seconds, if brush or rollers are used and 30 to

40 seconds, if spraying is d one. It shall have flash point at above 30 0

C. The drying time shall however vary with the ambient temperature and humidity.

M-44F Acrylic Emulsion :

44F.1 It shall be fro m Nerolac, Asian Pain ts, IC I, Berger or equivalent, as approved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS Codes.

44F.2 It shall be u sed on both inter iors an d exteri ors, on all differe nt types o f p laster, wooden surfaces, sto ne, brickwork, asbestos cement sheets, hard and soft boards , etc. It shall render rich smooth finish and shall provide a tough film that forms a suitable protectio n against all elements.

44F.3 It shall be water thinnable . It shall require no primer. On a well prepared surface, it shall be applied, after one coat of cement primer , in case it is an interior surface and waterproof cement coating, in case it is an exterior surface. On a new but highly a bsorbent surface, a thin coat o f the same sh all be app lied by add ing two parts o f water by volume to two parts of Acrylic Emulsion by volume. On previously pain ted surfaces, one coat of the same shall be applied by thinning four parts of the emulsion with one or tw o parts of water . It shall be applied by brush, roller or spray. It shall have a covering capacity of 25- 30 m

2/lit., depending on the surface and shade

used. It can be wa shed to remove the day- to-day d irt, a fter the surfa ce has been painted, minimum for a month.

M-44G Water Bound Distemper :

44G.1 It shall be fro m Berger, Nerolac, ICI, Asi an Pain ts or equivalent, as approved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS Codes.

44G.2 It shall be available in dry powder form and shall be prepared by adding preferably warm water, in the manne r and proportion, as described by t he manufacturer. It shall be a pplied by the conventional distemper brush to all plaster ed walls, ceilings and woodwork. It shall generally not require any primer, but if found necessary, a size coat made by an experienced painter from glue, soap, warm water and distemper powder shall be applied. It shall offer a covering capacity of 13-16 m

2 per Kg. depending on the surface and shade used.

M-44H Cement Paints :

44H.1 It shall be fr om Berger, ICI, Asian Pa ints or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS Codes.

44H.2 It shall b e ma nufactured from selected ra nge of raw materials and a special cement, so the it shall be suitable for both indoors and outdoors. It shall be suitably used on concrete renderings, cement/sand renderings, cement/lime/sand renderings, asbestos sheets, fibre boards, brickwork, etc. It shall offer matt finish. It shall require no primer and shall be wa ter thinnable. It shall offer a c overing capacity of 6-8 m

2 per Kg ., depending on the surface and shade used. It shall

preferably not be applied under direct sunlight to avoid patchy effect.

M-45 French Polish:

45.1 The French polish of required tint and s hade shall be prepared with ingredients and other necessary materials.

the below mentione d

(i) Denatured spirit of approved quality (ii) Chandras (iii) Pigment.

45.2 The French polish so prepared shall conform to IS : 348.



Page 249 of 430

M-46 Marble Chips for Marble Mosaic Terrazzo :

46.1 The marble chips shall be of approved quality and s hades. It shall be hard, so und dense and homogenous in texture with crystalline an d coarse grains. It shall be uniform in colour and free from stains, cracks, decay and weathering.

46.2 The size of various colours of marble chips ranging from the sma llest up to 20 mm. shall be used where the thickness of top wearing layer is 6 mm. size. The marble chips of approved quality and colours only a s per grading as deci ded by the Engin eer-in-charge and Architect shall be used for marble mosaic tiles or works.

46.3 The marble chips shall be machines crushed. The y shall be free from foreign matter, dust etc.,

except as above, the chips shall conform to IS : 2114.

M-47 Flooring Tiles :

M-47A Plain Cement Tiles :

47A.1 The plain ce ment tiles shall be o f general purpose type. For these tiles, no p igments are used, in their manufacture. Cement used in the manufacture of the tiles shall be as per IS

47A.2 The tiles shall be manufa ctured from a mixture of cement and natural aggregates, using pressure

process. During the manufactur e, the tiles shall be subjected to a pressure of not less than 140

Kg/cm2. The proportion of cement to aggreg ate, in the backing of the tiles shall be no t less than 1:3 ,

by weig ht. The wearing face, though the tiles are of plain cement, shall be provided with stone chips of 1 to 2 mm. size. The pr oportion o f cement to agg regate, in the wearing layer of the tiles shall be three parts o f ce ment to one part chips, b y weigh t. Th e minimum thickness of wearing layer shall be 3 mm. Th e colour and texture o f the wearing layer shall be unifo rm throughout its face and thickness. On removal fro m mould, the tiles shall be kept in moist condition, continuously atleast for 7 days and subsequ ently, if necessary, for such long period, a s would ensure their confo rmity to requirements of IS : 1237, regarding strength , resistance to wear and water absorption.

47A.3 The wearing face of the tile s shall be pla ne, free from projections, d epressions and cracks an d shall

be reas onably parallel to th e bac king of the tile. All angles shall be righ t angles and all edges shall be sharp and true.

47A.4 The tiles shall generally be square in sha pe, with a size of 30 cm. x 30 cm. The thickness of the tiles shall be 25 mm.

47A.5 Tolerance of length and breadth shall be + 1 mm. Tolerance of thickness shall be + 5 mm.

47A.6 The tiles shall satisfy the test as regard s transverse strength, resistance to wear and water absorption as per IS : 1237.

Testing Standards :

A. Water Absorption :

Sampling :

6 tiles out of every 3000 tiles are taken for testing. Result

s :

Absorption permissible, shall be at the most 10%.

B. Transverse strength test :



Page 250 of 430

Sampling :


s :

When wet :- 80 Kg/cm2.

When dry :- 120 Kg/cm2. C.

Abrasion test :

Sampling :


s :

Average abrasion shall not be more than 3.5 mm.

M-47B Plain Coloured Tiles :

47B.1 These tiles shall have the same specifications as plain cement tiles, as in 47A above excep t that they shall have a plain wearing surface, wherein pigments ar e used. They sh all conform to IS : 1237.

47B.2 The pigments used for colouring cement shall not exceed 10% by weight of cement used in the mix.

The pig ments, synthetic or otherwise, used for colouring tiles shall have per manent colour and shall not contain materials detrimental to concrete.

47B.3 The colour of the tiles shall be specified in the item or as directed.

M-47C Marble Mosaic Tiles :

47C.1 These tiles h ave the same specificatio ns as plain c ement tiles e xcept for the requirements stated below:

47C.2 The marble mosaic tiles shall conform to IS : 1237 . The wearin g face o f the tiles shall b e mechanically ground and filled . Th e wearing face of tiles shall be free from projections, depressions and cracks a nd shall be re asonably para llel to the ba cking of the tiles. All angle s shall be right angles and all edges shall be sharp and true.

47C.3 Chips used in the tiles shall be of the smallest size upto 20 mm. size. The minimum thickness of the

wearing layer of tiles shall be 6 mm. For pattern of chips required on the wearing face, a few samples with or without their full size phot ographs, as directed shall be presented to the Engineer-in-charge and Architect, for approval.

47C.4 Any par ticular sample, if found suitable shall be ap proved by the Engineer-in -charge and Architect, or he may ask for a few more samples to be presented. The samples shall have to be made by the Contractor till a suitable sample is fin ally appro ved for use in the work. Th e Contractor shall ensure that the tiles supplied for the work shall be in con formity with the approved sample only, in terms of its dimensi ons, th ickness of the backing laye r and wearing surface, materials, ingredients, colour shade, chips distribution, etc. required.

47C.5 The tiles shall be prepar ed from cement c onforming to IS or coloured Portland cement, generally depending upon the colour of tiles to be used or as directed.

M-47D Chequered Tiles :



Page 251 of 430

47D.1 Chequered tiles shall be plain cement tiles or marble mosaic tiles. The former shall ha ve the same specification as per 47A above , and the latt er as per marbl e mosaic tile s as per 47C, except as mentioned below:

47D.2 The tiles shall be of nomin al size of 250 mm. x 250 mm. or as specified . The c enter to cen ter

distance of chequer, shall not be less than 25 mm. and not more than 50 mm. The overa ll thickness of the tile shall be 22 mm.

47D.3 The grooves in the chequers shall be u niform and straight. The dep th of the grooves shall not be

less than 3 mm. The c hequered tile s shall be pla in, coloured o r mosaic, as specified. The thickness of the upper layer measured from t he top of the chequ ers shall not be less than 6 mm. The tiles shall be given the first grinding, with machine, before delivery to site.

47D.4 Tiles shall conform to IS : 1237.

M-47E Chequered Tiles for Stair Cases :

47E.1 The requirements of these tiles shall be the same as chequered tiles, as per 47D above, except in the following respects:

(1) The length of a tile including note, shall be 330 mm. (2)

The minimum thickness shall be 28 mm.

(3) The nosing shall also have the same wearing layer as that at the top. (4)

The nosing edge shall be rounded.

(5) The front portion of the tile , for a minimum length of 7 5 mm. from a nd including the nosing, shall have gr ooves runnin g parallel to the nosing a nd at cen ter not e xceeding 25 mm. Beyond that the tiles shall have normal chequer pattern.

M-48 Rough Kotah Stone :

48.1 The kotah sto nes shall be hard, even , sound and regular in shape and generally be uniform in

colour. The colour of the stone shall genera lly be green. Brown coloured stones shall not be allowed for use. The stones shall be without any soft veins, cracks or flaws.

48.2 The size of th e stones to be used for flo oring shall be of size 600 mm. x 600 mm. and or size 600 mm. x 4 50 mm., as d irected. How ever, sma ller sizes will be allowed to b e used to the extent of maintaining required pattern. Thickness shall be, as specified.

48.3 Tolerance of - 30 mm., on a ccounts of chisel dressing of edges shall be permitted for length as well as breadth. Tolerance in thickness shall be +3 mm.

48.4 The edges of the stones shall be truly chiselled and table rubbed with coarse sand before paving.

All a ngles and edges of the stones of shall be true, square and free from chipping and the surface shall be true and plain.

48.5 When machin e cut edges are specified, the exposed edges and the edges at j oints shall be machine cut. The thickness of the exposed machine cut edges shall be uniform.

M-49 Polished Kotah Stone :

49.1 Polished ko tah stone shall have the sa me specif ication as Roug h kotah ston e, e xcept as

mentioned below:

49.2 The stones shall ha ve ma chine polishe d su rface. When brought on site, the s tone shall be single



Page 252 of 430

polished or double p olished, depe nding upon it s use. Single polished kotah stone shall have sing le face of the stone polished whereas, double polished kotah stone shall ha ve bo th the faces polished. The s tones for pa ving shall gener ally be sing le polished. The stones to be used for dad o, skirting , sink, veneering , sills, steps , etc., where machine polishing after th e stones are fixed in situ , is n ot possible, s hall be polished more than once for the desired finish, before fixing.

49.3 When brought at site , the colour of the stone s hall be fairly uniform. It shall be ensured that the stones to be used in a particular work, shall not differ much in shade or tint, from the approved sample.

M-50 Dholpur Stone :

50.1 Dholpur sand stone shall be of best q uality, as approved by the Architect an d Engineer-in -

charge. The stone slab shall be without any veins, cracks and flaws. The stone slab shall be even, sound and durable, regular in shape and of uniform colour.

50.2 The size of th e slab shall be as specified in t he item or detailed dra wing or as ap proved by the

Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The thickness of the stone shall be as specified in the item of work, with the permissible tolerance of + 2 mm.

50.3 The stones shall ha ve ma chine polishe d su rface. When brought on site, the s tone shall be rough, single polished or d ouble polished, depending upon its use and as specified in the item or detailed drawing. The stones for paving sha ll generally be single polished. The stones to b e used for sills, steps, brackets, c oping, facias, bands, pillars, fabr icated railings , jali work etc., where machi ne polishing after the ston es are fixed in situ, is not possible, sh all be double polished or polished more than once, as required.

50.4 All angles and edges of the stone slab shall be fi ne chiselled or p olished, as specified in th e item of

work and all the four edges shall be machine cut. All angles and edges of the face of the stone slab shall be true and plane.

50.5 The sample of stone shall be go t appr oved by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect, for a

particular work. It shall be e nsured that the stones to be used in a particular work shall not differ much in shad e or tint, fro m the approved sample . No white, blac k or any other colour spots shall be there. Cheetah or tiger skinned stones shall not be allowed under any case.

M-50A Cobbler Stones (Interlock Pavers) :

50A.1 Cobbler ston es shall be o f best quality, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charg e and shall be obtained from reliable source. The make will be approved by the Architect and the source of supply shall not be changed without prior approval of the Architect. The stone shall be without any veins, cracks and flaws. The c obbler stones shall be even, sound, durable and regular in shape and of uniform colour.

50A.2 The size of the cobbler stone shall be as s pecified in the items or deta iled drawing or a s

approved by the Architect and Engi neer-in-charge. The thickness of the sto ne shall be a s specified in the item of work, with permissible tolerance of + 2 mm.

50A.3 The stone shall have machine polished surface. When brought on site the stone s hall be single

polished or double polishe d, depending upon its use and as spe cified in the ite m or detailed drawing. The cobbler stones to be used for walkways, roadways, parking, floors, docks, roofs, public squares etc., where machine polishing afte r the fixing of stones, is not possible, the stones to be fixed shall be double polished or pol ished more than once, as requ ired. All angles and edges of the cobbler stone shall be true and plane.

M-51 Marble Slab :



Page 253 of 430

51.1 Marble slab s hall be white or of an y other available colour and o f best quality, as approved by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect.

51.2 Slabs shall be hard, close, uniform and homogeneous in texture. The y shall have e ven

crystalline gr ain and shall be free from defects and cracks. The surface shall be machine polished to a n even and p erfect p lane s urface and e dges machine cut, true an d square. Th e rear face shall be rough to provide key for the mortar.

51.3 Marble slabs with natura l veins, if selected, s hall have to be laid as per the patter n given by the

Engineer-in-charge and Architect. Size of t he slab shall be min imum 450 mm. x 450 mm. an d preferably 600 mm. x 600 mm. However, smaller size s will be allow ed to be used to the e xtent of maintaining required pattern.

51.4 The slab shall not be thinner than the specified thickness, at its thinnest part. A few specimen of the

finished slab to be used, shall be deposited by the Contractor in the office, for reference.

51.5 Except as above, the marble slabs shall conform to IS : 1130.

M-51A Blended Marble tile/slab :

51A.1 It shall o f the best quality like Carara, M arbella or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

51A.2 It shall be predominantly a marble tile /slab, composed of 80% to 95 % of fines t grains of quality

selected marble aggregates, bonded together with 4% to 8% special resins, alongwith palette of colourants. It shall therefore offer a wide range of colour compared to natural mar ble. It shall be manufactured so, that its design goes right through the tile, insuring lasting designs.

51A.3 It shall be a vailable in pre- cut, pre-polis hed, chamfer ed and grooved upto sizes of 600 mm. x

600 mm. Sizes upto 2400 mm. x 1200 mm. shall als o be supplied. It shall ha ve indispensable mechanical strength,

Test Dry Wet

Compressive strength 1340 1317 in

Kg/cm2.

Flexural strength 308 453 in

Kg/cm2.

Modulus of Rupture 462 453 in

Kg/cm2.

It s hall o ffer flexibility, hig h wear res istance, impact resistance a nd on testing shall be 1.5 kgcm/cm., ha rdness on the Moh's scale shall be 3 to 4, abrasive w ear index shall be 22 and total water ab sorption shall be around 0.13%. It s hall not be easily affected by the freeze and thawing cycling.

51A.4 It shall be no n-porous and shall be used in all types of weather. It shall be used for internal an d

external surfaces. It shall be easily cut with a normal hand cutting machine, if req uired and shall be laid in the same manner as natural marble stone or with latexbased glues.



Page 254 of 430

M-52 Granite Stone :

52.1 Granite shall be of approved colour an d quality. It s hall be got a pproved b y the Engineer- in- charge and Architect, prior to procurement. The stone shall be hard, even, sound and regular in shape and generally uniform in colour. It shall be without any soft veins, cracks or flaws.

52.2 The thickness of the stone shall be as specified in the item.

52.3 All exposed faces shall be double polished to render truly smooth and even reflecting surface. The exposed edges and corners shall be rounded off, as directed. The exposed edges shall be machine cut and shall have uniform thickness.

M-53 PVC / Vinyl Flooring :

53.1 PVC sheets/tiles for PVC / Vin yl floor covering shall b e of the best quality like Wonderfloor, Indag or equ ivalent, as a pproved by the Ar chitect and Engineer -in-charge. It shall be o f homogeneous fle xible type , conforming to IS : 3462 . The PVC covering shall ne ither de velop any toxic effect while put to use nor shall give off any disagreeable odour.

53.2 Thickness of flexib le type covering tiles shall be as sp ecified in the description of the item. The flexible

type s hall be backed with hessain or other woven fabr ic. It shall be ava ilable in form of tiles, size upto 600 mm. x 600 mm. or rolls of 1.5 m. width , continuous length of 20 m. The thickness shall be appro x. 1.5 to 2 mm. The dimensional stability s hall be 0 .3%. The following tolerance shall be applicable on the nominal dimensions of the rolls or tiles :

(a) Thickness : + 0.15 mm. (b)

Length or Width :

1.300 mm. Square tiles, + 0.20 mm.

3.900 mm. Square tiles, + 0.60 mm

2.600 mm. Square tiles, + 0.40 mm

4 Sheets and roll, + 0.10 %

53.3 It shall offer colour fastness to daylight as per the relevant IS : 3462 . Allowance for curling shall be 0.6 mm. It shall be flexible and shall not break, crack or show any signs of failure.

53.4 It shall offer above average resistance to mild and diluted acids, alkalies, soaps and detergents. It shall have high abrasion resistance. At normal temperature, it shall develop an indent o f 0.15 mm., after one minute and 0.20 mm., after ten minutes. It shall offer insulation resistance as per the IS : 2259. It sha ll have a sound reduction fac tor of 3db for 2 mm. thickness and 2db for 1 .5 mm. thickness. It shall have self extinguish ing p roperty and water absorption a t room temperature for 24 hrs. shall be 0.1%.

53.5 It shall be a vailable in various designs and shall be recommended for floors and walls, in

homes, institutions, commercial establishments, clinics and hospitals. 53.6 Adhesive :

53.6.1 The adhesive for PVC flooring shall be of the type and make recom mended by the manufacture of PVC sheets/tiles.



Page 255 of 430

M-54 Facing Tiles :

54.1 The facing tiles (burnt clay facing bricks) shall be free from cracks and nodules and of free lime. They shall be thoroughly b urnt and shall have pl ane rectangular fa ces with para llel sides and sharp straight right angle faces. The texture of the finished surface that will be exposed when in place shall co nform to an approved sample consis ting not less than four stretcher bricks each representing the te xture de sired. The facing t iles shall have a p leasing appearan ce, sufficien t resistance to penetration by rain and greater durability than common br icks. The tiles shall conform to IS : 2691.

54.2 The standard size of facing brick tiles shall be 19 cm. x 9 cm. x 4 cm. The facing brick tiles shall be

provided with frog which shall conform to IS : 1077-1976.

54.3 The permissible tolerance in dimensions specified above shall be as follows :

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Size Tolerances for

----------------------------------------------------------------------

1st Class Brick 2nd Class Brick

----- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

19 cm. + 6 mm. + 10 mm.

9 cm. + 3 mm. + 7 mm.

4 cm. + 1.5 mm + 2 mm.

----- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

54.4 The tolerance for distortion or warpage of face or edges of individual brick from a plane surface and from a straight line, respectively, shall be as follows :

Facing dimensions Permissible tolerance

Max. below 19 cm. Max. 2.5 mm.

- do - above 19 cm. Max. 3.0 mm.

54.5 The average compressive strength obtained as a sample of five tiles when tested in accordance with the procedure laid in IS : 1077 shall not be less than 175 kg/cm

2. The average

compressive strength of any individual bricks shall be not less than 160 Kg/cm2.

54.6 The average water absorption for five br icks t iles shall not exceed 12% of average weight of brick

before testing. The absorption for each individual bricks shall not exceed 25%.

54.7 The brick tiles when tes ted in accordance with IS : 1077, the rate of efflorescence shall no t be more than `Slightly effloresced'.

M-55 White Glazed Tiles :

55.1 The tiles shall be of best q uality, as app roved b y the Engineer-in-charge and Ar chitects. They shall be flat and true to shape. They shall be free from cracks, cra zing spots, chipped edges and corners. The glazing shall be of uniform shade.



Page 256 of 430

55.2 The tiles shall be nomina l size of 150 mm. x 150 mm., unless otherwise specified . The maximum variation from the stated sizes, other than the thickness of tile shall be + 1.5 mm. The thickness of tile shall be 6 mm. Except for the above, the tiles shall conform to IS : 777.

M-55A Coloured Glaze Tiles :

55A.1 They shall be similar to white glazed ti les m entioned above, in al l respects, except tha t the y shall

be available in varie ty of colours and shades, from Johnson & Johnson or equivalen t, a s approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

M-56 Ceramic Tiles :

56.1 Ceramic tiles shall be of 1st quality such as Romano, Regency, Spartek, Stiles or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. They shall adequately meet the relevant IS

56.2 They shall be light weigh t, with thi ckness varying between 6 to 8 mm., depending on the

manufacturer. Therefore, th ey require thinner floor bedding compared to mosaic/stone flooring . On laying, they require no further polishing making th e floor ready to live in and use. They shall be suitably u sed for residences, offices, hote ls, hosp itals, auditoriu ms, restauran ts, canteens , commercial complex and such other public places . They shall be extreme ly str ong, breaking strength of the tile being 350 Kg/cm

2. and flexural strength of 350 Kg/cm

2. They shall offer good

resistance to abrasion, i.e. can withstand upto 5000 grindings. They shall be scratch resistance, their hardnes s on the Mo h's scale shall be 6.8 to 7. They shall be resistant to all acids and alkalies exce pt h ydrofluoric acid. In add ition, they sh all be bac teria free and fir e proof, as th ey are

fired a t @ 1160 0C. T hey shall have ver y high a coustic damping factor a nd their specific gravity

shall be 0.12, making them good insulato rs. Their resistance to thermal shocks shall be upto 10 cycles and their co-efficien t of linear ther mal expansio n shall be 9 from ambie nt

temperature to 1000C.

56.3 They shall be availab le in various sizes, 8" x4", 8"x8 ", 8"x12", 12 "x12" and 12"x1 6". The y shall have a

size tolerance of + 0.4% to 0.75%, in length and width and + 5% in thickness. Allowable warpage shall be + 0.5%. Allowable squareness wedging shall be + 0.4 to 0 .5%. The allowable straightness of edges shall be + 0.5% and allowable flatness shall be + 0.4 to 0.5%. Their water absorption rate shall be less than 5%.

56.4 Ceramic tile for Industrial p urposes, shall have a hardness of 8.6 on the Moh's scale and shall be non-skid, hard wearing, long lastin g and ac id and alkali resista nt. The y shall adequate ly meet the IS : 4457.

M-57 Vitrified Floor Tiles :

57.1 Vitrified floor tiles shall be of b est qua lity like Granamite or equivalent, as app roved b y the

Architect and Engineer-in-charge. They shall conform to the relevant IS Codes.

57.2 They shall be monolithic and available in smooth, mirror-polished and anti-skid finishes, in sizes 12"x12", 8"x8" and 8"x4". They shall have a size tolerance of + 0.5%, in length and width and + 5% in thickness. Allowable warpage shall be + 0.2%. Allowable squareness wedging shall be + 0.5%. The ir water absorption rate shall be less than 0.5%. The y s hall o ffer hard-working and hard-wearing floors for ho mes, public b uildings, apartments a nd airports. The tiles shall be o f ASTM or DIN standards.

57.3 They shall b e extreme ly strong, break ing strength of the tile be ing 1600 Kg /cm2., flex ural

strength, 200 Kg/cm2. and bonding strength of 2500 Kg/cm

2. They shall offer good resistance to

abrasion, i.e. greater than 100. The y shall be scratch resistance, their hardness on the Moh's scale shall be min. 7. They shall be able to resist thermal shock upto 10 cycles. They shall have a bond

strength of 2500 Kg /cm2. and shall have a density of greater than 2.2 gm/cc. They shall have 0.60 co-

efficient of friction for polished/unpolished surfaces.

M-58 Red Mandana Stone :



Page 257 of 430

58.1 Red mandana stone shall be of best q uality, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge. The stone shall be without any veins, cr acks and flaws. The stone shall be even, sound and durable, regular in shape and of uniform colour.

58.2 The size of the stone shall be as spe cified in the item or detailed drawing or as approved by the


58.3 The stones shall ha ve ma chine polishe d su rface. When brought on site, the s tone shall be rough,

single polished or d ouble polished, depending upon its use and as specified in the item or detailed drawing. The stones for paving shall generally be single polished.

58.4 All angles and edges of th e stone shall be fine chisel led or polished, as specifie d in the item of work

and all the four edges shall be machine cut. All angles and edges of the face of the stone shall be true and plane.

58.5 The sample o f stone shall be got approved by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect. It shall b e

ensured that the stones to be used shall not d iffer much in shade or tin t, from the approved sample.

M-59 Jesalmer Stone :

59.1 Jesalmer stone shall be o f best quality, as approved by the Architect and Eng ineer-in-charge. The stone shall be without any veins, cr acks and flaws. The stone shall be even, sound and durable, regular in shape and of uniform colour.

59.2 The size of the shall be a s specified in th e item or detailed drawing or as app roved b y the


59.3 The stones shall ha ve ma chine polishe d su rface. When brought on site, the s tone shall be rough,

single polished or d ouble polished, depending upon its use and as specified in the item or detailed drawing. The stones for paving shall generally be single polished.

59.4 All angles and edges of th e stone shall be fine chisel led or polished, as specifie d in the item of work

and all the four edges shall be machine cut. All angles and edges of the face of the stone shall be true and plane.

59.5 The sample of stone shall be go t appr oved by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect, for a

particular work. It shall be e nsured that the stones to be used in a particular work shall not differ much in shad e or tint, fro m the approved sample . No white, blac k or any other colour spots shall be there. Cheetah or tiger skinned stones shall not be allowed under any case.

M-62 Rubber Floorings :

62.1 It shall be of the best quality such as Flora or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS specifications.

62.2 It shall be available in 6 different colours wi th special colours supplied on minimu m order and in square and round pattern. It shall have a thickness of 2.5 mm., 3 mm., 3.5 mm. and 4 mm. and sizes of 600 mm. x 600 mm. It shall be able to withs tand the hea viest tra ffic a nd shall ha ve exceptional a brasion resistance, chemical re sistance, flame resistance and ci garette burn resistance. It shall have go od load bearing capacity, sound deadening characteristics and anti- slip surface. It shall be easy to clean and maintain.

62.3 It shall be successfully us ed in Hospita ls, Ai rports, C omputer roo ms, Hotels a nd Restaurants,



Page 258 of 430

Laboratories, Office and Shopping complexes, Lifts, Buses, Cinema halls and Residences.

M-63 Admixtures for Tile/Stone Cladding: M-

63A Waterproof Adhesive:

63A.1 Waterproof a dhesive, sha ll be of bes t qual ity and from manu facturer like Feb Roffe or equivalent, a s approved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The prior ap proval for the source shall be taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code. It shall be in powdered state, comp lying with BS : 59 80 Type 2, class AA and BS : 5385 Part 1. It shall comprise of selected Portland cements, graded sand and synthetic additives.

63A.2 It is useful for permanent a dhesion of ce ramic tiles, stone and marble cladding to surfaces that may

be subjected to extre me weather condi tions. It shall provide good tensile adhesion and shear adhesive strength, after applicatio n, in thick/thin layer beneath the tile /stone cladding. Its application and coverage shall be as specified by the manufacturer.

M-63B Rainbow Tile Mate :

63B.1 Rainbow tile mate, shall b e of best quality and from manufacturer like Feb Roffe or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The prior approval for the source shall be taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

63B.2 It shall be a special high gr ade compound, form ulated with organic a dditives and special blend of high grade cement fi lling compound. It shall be av ailable in various colours to match all types of glazed/cer amic tile. The organic colouring pigment, added in the compound shall not fade over the period of time.

63B.3 There shall be close adh esion of particl e in the c ompound which imparts water-resistant qualities to the compound and allows to render the join ts permanently water -tight, i.e. no seepage and no cracking o f joints. It shall have st rong bonding property so tha t the joint in the tiling shall never wear out.

M-64 Selected Earth :

64.1 The selected earth shall be that obtained from excavated material or shall have to brought from

outside, as in dicated in the ite m. If item does not ind icate an ything, the selec ted earth shall have to be brought from outside.

64.2 The selected earth shall be good yellow soil and shall be got approved fr om the Architect and

Engineer-in-charge. In no case, Black cotton soi l or similar e xpansive and shrinkable soil shal l be used. It s hall be clean and free from all rubbi sh and perishable materials , stones, or brick bats. The clo ds shall be b roken to a size of 50 mm. or less. Con tractor shall make his own arrangement, at his own cost, for land for borrowing selected ear th. The staking o f the material shall be done as directed by Architect and Engineer-in-charge, in such a way as not to interfere with any constructional activities and in proper stacks.

64.3 When excavated material is to be used, only selected stuff got approved from the Architect and

Engineer-in-charge shall b e used. It sh all be stacked separately and shall co mply with al l requirements of selected earth mentioned above.

M-65 Barbed Wire :

65.1 The barbed wire shall be of galvanised steel and it shall generally conform to IS : 278. The

barbed wire shall be of typ e-I, whose nominal di ameter for line wire, shall be 2.5 mm. and for



Page 259 of 430

point wire, shall be 2.24 mm. The nominal distance between two barbs shall be 75 mm., unless otherwise specified in the item. The barb ed wire shall be formed b y twisting toge ther two line wires, one of them contain ing the barbs. The size of line and point wires and b arbs spacing shall be as s pecified abo ve. The p ermissible devia tion from the nominal diameter of the lin e wire and point wire shall not exceed + 0.08 mm.

65.2 The barbs shall carry four points and sh all be formed by twisting two point w ires, each two turns, lightly round one line wire, making altogether four complete turns. The barbs shall be so finished that the four po ints are set and lock ed at rig ht angle to e ach other. The barbs shall have a length of not less than 13 mm. and not mo re than 18 mm. The points shall be sharp and cut at an angle not greater than 35

0 of the axis of the wire, forming the barbs.

65.3 The line and point wires shall be of circular section, free from scale and other defects and shall be

uniformly galvanised. The line wire s hall be in con tinuous length and shall n ot contend an y weld other than those in the rod befor e it is drawn. The distance between two successive splices shall not less than 15 m.

65.4 The length per 100 Kg. of barbed wire, IS type-I, shall be as under :

Nominal 1000 m.

Minimum 934 m.

Maximum 1066 m.

M-66 PVC Waterstops :

66.1 The PVC wa terstop shall b e of appro ved make, as ap proved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge.

66.2 It shall ha ve optimum resilience, h igh elasti city & stretch st rength ,immune t o corrosion,

excellent we ather resista nce. They shall be manufactured to sa feguard against hydrosta tic pressure, water seepage, expansion or contraction of joints and to take care of any deflection or displacement arising due to change in temperatur e or settlemen t of foundation to elimina te danger of cracks.

66.3 They shall be effective in tr opical climate having high mechanical strength, good ageing, longe r life,

shall be unaffected b y acids, alkalies, me tal salts and other chemicals. It shall not be hazardous and shall ha ve fire retardant p roperties. It shall absorb le ss water than rubber, shall work as water tight seal but shall allow safe passage of seepage water and shall withstand high hydrostatic pr essure. It sha ll be easily w elded and can be installed easily, ha ving high tensile strength and shall be capable of bearing heavy s hocks arising du e to turbines, earthquakes, floods etc.

66.4 It shall withstand a minimum hydrostatic pressure of 30 m. high column of water.

66.5 The selectio n criteria o f waterstop de pends upon the h ydrostatic pressure, however the

following points should be kept in mind :

1) Where substantial expansion/contraction of joints takes place, Dumb Bell type shall be used. 2) Where a firm grip in concrete is desired, Serrated types should be used.

3) The overall width of the waterstop should not be greater than the thickness of concrete.

4) The dista nce from the face of the co ncrete to the waterstop mu st not be less than half the width of the waterstop.



Page 260 of 430

5) The width of the waterstop must be atleast 6 times the largest aggregate used for satisfactory compaction.

66.6 The prior approval o f selected size and type of waterstop shall be taken from the Architect and Engineer-in-charge, before use.

M-67 Admixtures for Mass Concrete and Mortar: M-

67A Joint Sealant:

67A.1 The sealant shall be o f b est quality a nd from man ufacturer like CICO, MC- BAUCHEMIE, PIDILITE, HMP or equiva lent, as approved by t he Arc hitect and Engineer-in-charge. The prior approval for the source shall be taken from the Ar chitect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67A.2 It shall be a two component polysulphid e rubber joint sealant, based on a low molecular weight

polymer. It should not contain chlorides or other corrosive substances.

67A.3 It sha ll be us ed for sealing join ts in water reta ining structures, roo fs, external w alls, cladd ing, floors, par titions, ceilings etc. It shall have excellent property to adhere most of build ing materials like Alumin ium, Stainless Ste el, Gl ass, Co ncrete, Marble, Stone, Brick, Masonry block, Plaster , Ceramic an d quarry tiles, Timber etc. The modulus of e lasticity of the sealan t shall be less than 0.16 MPa, +10% at 1 00% elongation. The shore "A" hardness of the sealant shall be 22+=3 @ 25

OC. T he operating temperature r ange for the sealant shall be -25

OC to

800C. The permanent dynamic movement capability of the sealant shall be + 25%. The tensile strength of the sealant shall no t be less than 0.4 MPa. The optimum width/depth ratio shall b e 2:1. The Sp.gr. of the sealant shall be 1 .6 kg/lit. The s ealant should be capable to resist attack of water, sunlight, o xidation, corrosive fumes, o ils, petrol, dilu ted acids and alkalies, salt spray, aliphatic and aromatic solvents and shall not contain tar or bituminous ingredients.

67A.4 It shall posses the properties like 550% elongati on a t break, non-toxicity when fu lly cured, no

staining and s hrinkage less than 1%. The trafficable s trength shall b e achieved within 24 hours and

full at 7 d ays (at 25OC & 250% RH). It shall possess excellent coverage capacity and more strength at

low dry temperatures.

M-67B Abrasion Resistant Industrial Flooring Aggregate :

67B.1 The flooring a ggregate, shall be of best q uality and fro m manufacturer like CICO or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The prior approval for the source shall be taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67B.2 The flooring aggregate sh all be a fac tory pr ocessed and specially graded non-oxidising , no n-

magnetic and chemically inert metallic flooring aggregate, free from oil and grease.

67B.3 It shall be used as a surfa ce hardener to conc rete floors. It is reco mmended for Factory floor s, Warehouses, Hangers, Car parks and such other ar eas, subjected to heavy vehicular traffic. It shall also be used on open and continuously wet surfa ces. The flooring aggregate shall build in wear resistance and shall produce high abrasion resi stant floor surface. It shall impart e xtreme surface density and shall o ffer resistance to o il and water penetra tion. It shall p rovide a non- rusting floor surface which is easy to maintain.

67B.4 It shall be used with ceme nt in the ratio , as per the manufacturer's instructions and spread evenly on the surface to b e trea ted, at the rate depe nding on the type of floor. The flooring aggregate shall be spread when the surface of the conc rete floor is still fresh, i .e. as soon as the surface water has evaporated and then trawl ed, in stages, to bring about an uniform and smooth finish.



Page 261 of 430

M-67C Concrete Hardener and Dustproofer :

67C.1 The Concrete hardener and dustproofer , shall be o f best quality a nd from man ufacturer like CICO or equivalen t, as ap proved by the Archit ect an d Engineer-in -charge. The prior approval for the source shall be taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67C.2 It shall ha ve a specific gra vity of 1.18 a nd shall be a pplied on con crete floors , at the rate of atleast

25 lit.s per 100 m 2.

per coat. A total o f three coats shall be applied fo r permanentl y hardened concrete floor , with increased abrasi on resistance, increased su rface density, increased resistance to chemical a ttack and to e liminate dust accumulation. Drying time o f 4-6 hours for each coat shall be allowed before the floor is put to use or is applied with another coat of the produc t. Precautions shall be take n while using the product, to a void contact with e yes and open wounds and to work in good ventila tion. After application, the a ffected parts shall be washed copiously. It shall not be stored for a period of more than 2 months before use.

M-67D Water Repellent Coating:

67D.1 The Water repellent coating shall be of best quality and from manufacturer like CICO o r

equivalent, a s approved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The prior ap proval for the source shall be taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67D.2 Water repelle nt coatings for exterior e xposed surfaces shall be acrylic resin ba sed, havin g a

Flash point of approx. 400C and specific gravity of 0.95.

67D.3 It shall be suitably used for concrete, brick, stone and plaster ed surfaces preventing moisture

penetration and thus any d amage to th e interiors. It shall be quick acting, long lasting, invisible i.e. colourless so as to maintain the original colour of the surface treated. It shall impart sealin g characteristics so that the treated surface becomes stain and dust free. The coating itself shall not darken or turn yellow with age.

M-67E Accelerating, Water Reducing Admixture and Plasticizer:

67E.1 The Accelerating , Water reducing admixture and plasticizer, shall b e of best quality and from manufacturer like CICO or equivalen t, a s approv ed by the Architect and Engin eer-in-charge. The prior ap proval for the source shall be tak en fro m the Architect. It shall c onform to th e relevant IS Code.

67E.2 It shall be in liquid state with a specific gravity o f 1.30 and complying with ASTM C-494 Type E, IS : 9103 & IS : 2645 . It shall accelerate the se tting and hardening of the concrete mix, thereby achieving hig her early age strengt h. It shall reduce th e water c ontent of the concrete without affecting i ts workability. It is useful for pre-cas t/pre-stressed works, structural concrete works, floors, roads, runways, pa ving etc. It shall be used at the rate instructed by the manufacturer, with cement, depending on the amount of accele ration of hardening required. It should be compatible to all types of cement.

M-67F Retarding, Water Reducing Admixture and Plasticiser :

67F.1 The Retardin g, water red ucing admixture and plasticiser, shall b e of best qu ality and from manufacturer like CICO, Feb Roffe or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge. The prior approval for the sourc e shall be tak en from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67F.2 It shall be in liquid state with a specific gravity of 1.22 and complying with ASTM C-494 Type B & D, IS : 910 3, CRD-C87 Type B & D, BS 5075 Part 1. It shall be added to the concrete mix during the mixing process, at the same time as th e w ater or the a ggregates. No extension o f normal mi xing ti me is nec essary. It shall e xtend the period of t ime as to placing the concrete and compacting, i.e . de lay the initia l an d fina l se tting time. It shall help to spre ad the heat o f



Page 262 of 430

hydration ove r a longer period of time . It shall give a highly workable concrete with a low W/C ratio. It shall b e used at the rate instructe d by the man ufacturer, with cement, de pending on the amount of acceleration of hardening required. It should be compatible to all types of cement.

M-67G Water & Weather Proof Compound :

67G.1 The water & weather pro of integra l cem ent admixture shall be of best quality and from manufacturer like Feb Roffe's Roff Hyse al, Ro ff h yproof, Algiproof or equiva lent, as approved by the Archite ct and Engine er-in-charge. The prio r approval for the s ource shall b e taken from the Architect. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

67G.2 It shall be us ed as an excellent ceme nt admixtu re in all types o f concrete/pla ster mortars, pointing mortars, masonry works, guniting works and pressure grouting works. It shall improve resistance of concrete surfaces to weathering and chemical attack. It shall be non-toxic so as to use for waterproofing wate r tanks, reservoirs, bio-gas tank, leaking ceiling, basements, tunnels, lift wells etc.

67G.3 It shall be mixed to concrete or plas ter mortar, wh ile mixing. First, w ater is added and then the

admixture, at the rate instructed by the manufacturer. For use of the admixture, pr ecaution shall be taken to use clean materials for preparation of mortar.

M-67F Plaster Admixture :

67F.1 An admi xture which gives the plaster w orkability, durabili ty a nd qu ality a t an ec onomical rate shall be of best quality from manufacturer like Feb Roffe (product name - Roff plaster master) or equivalent, as approved by the Architec t or Enginee r-in-charge. It s hall comply to the relevan t IS Codes.

67F.2 It shall keep the plastering mortar plastic for a longer time, giving h igher strength on prolonged curing. It shal l provide coh esiveness, w orkability and elim inate effl orescence. It shall reduce shrinkage, cracking and crazing to the minimum.

M-68 Asbestos Septic Tank :

68.1 It shall be from Everes t or equivalent, as appr oved by the Architect and Enginee r-in-charge. It shall be of required size as shown in detailed draw ing or as per specified in the item. It shall be of single piece in width and length but if required to match the specified size in depth, no t more than four compartments shall be allowed (which includes top and bo ttom pieces and extension pieces). It shall be made from finest raw materials.

68.2 It shall be fre e from any joints in side walls, bo ttom piece, top cover and baffle walls. It shall be of two compa rtments separ ated b y a baffle wall in a h orizontal section. No leakage should be there from joints between pieces, dep th wise . Th e side walls shall be capable of withstand ing the earth pre ssure and the top co ver shall be designed to carry the traffic loa d and surfac e covering load.

68.3 It shall be air tigh t and de signed to disintegrat e the sewage by b acterial ac tion in absence o f

oxygen gas. It shall con tain two in lets ( one for regular connection and other fo r alterna tive connection) and one outle t. The inlet shall be of 100 mm. dia. and the outlet shall be of 75 mm. dia. All such connection shall be leakproof. Rejected materials shall not be used.

M-69 Asbestos Cement Building Boards:

69.1 Asbestos Cement boards shall be from Everest or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and

Engineer-in-charge. It shall be made fr om blend of high quality asbestos min eral fibre and cement. It shall conform to IS : 2098, amended 1981.



Page 263 of 430

69.2 It shall be lig ht weigh t, ea sily workable usi ng ordina ry carpentr y tools and it s hall be s trong

enough, so a s not to be b roken or chipped during h andling. It sh all be durable , flexible, free from rot, rust and shall be termite proof, impervious to weather. It shall not sag, w rap, swell or crack and also satisfy the fireproof requirements. The thermal conductivity va lue `k' shall be @ 0.214 kcal/hr.m

0C. It shall have adequate properties of ac oustics, having absorption co-efficient

between 0.01 to 0.14 and noise resistance co-efficient @ 0.03.

69.3 It shall be eas ily jointed using open or bu tt joint. Its surface shall be e asily painted. It shall be o f uniform thickness, as specified in detailed drawings or as approved by the Architect.

M-70 Expanded Polystyrene :

70.1 The Expande d Polystyrene shall be from Ther mocole, Cooline or equivalen t, a s approved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

70.2 It shall be pro cessed from styropor expa ndable polystyrene beads. It shall ha ve lower thermal

conductivity, excellent shock absorption, be tter mechanical strength and high resistance to the moisture. It s hall possess good acoustic properti es, snow white appearance, and lightness. It shall easily be cut to any shape, size and can be fixed by any mechanical means or adhesives. It shall be painted easily.

70.3 It shall have high, dynamic load bearin g capac ity, e xcellent resistance to wa ter vapour . The

density o f Polystyrene shall be 20-25 kg/ m3., having thermal conductivity va lue 0.025 Kcal/hr m

OC.

The service tempera ture range sh all be -150 OC to +80

OC. When soaked i n water for 7 days, it shall

not absorb water more tha n 2% by volume. The co-efficien t of resis tance to wate r vapour diffusion shall be 40 to 100.

70.4 The compressive streng th at 10% defor mation a nd cross breaking strength shall not be les s than

1.0 kg /cm2.

and 1 .6 kg/cm2.,

respective ly. It sh all have resis tance to soa ps, bleaching agents, d ilute acids, alkalie s, silicone oi l, fresh & sea water, alcohol , liq uid para ffin, petro leum jelly etc.

M-71 Phenotherm :

71.1 Phenotherm shall be from Bakelite Hylam or equiva lent, as approved b y the Architect a nd Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to BS : 4370 and BS : 3927, wherever applicable.

71.2 It shall have s uperior fire resistance and thermal conductivity. There shall be no deterioration of K

value on ageing, no emission of toxic fumes in an event of fire. It shall have goo d adhesion to facings and there shall be no shrinkage. It shall conf orm to the hig hest fire ratin g, Class Ì' fo r surface spread of flame, Class `P' for ignitability and Class Ò' for building regulations.

71.3 It shall no t be flammable and shall retain its shape, during and after fire. It shall generate negligible

smoke, so the obscuration shall remain les s than 5% an d shall emit n on-toxic fumes during fire . It

shall have K value less than 0.016 Kcal/hr m OC and the working range of

temperature shall be -196 OC to +130

OC. It shall easily be used on L SHS, fuel oil, low pressure steam

and hot water lines for containers.

71.4 It shall have the closed cell content not less than 90% to result in very low water absorption, very low water vapour transmission and reduce c ondensation. It shall be una ffected by mos t aromatic and aliphatic solvents. It shall be odour less, non-colour a bsorbent. It s hall no t a ttract rodents/insects, resist fungal and bacterial growth, most organic solvents and chemicals. It shall be anti-corrosive , non-abrasive and hydr ophobic. It shall possess g ood acoustical properties

and electrical insulation. The density of the Phenotherm shall be 40-50 kg/m3.



Page 264 of 430

M-72 Ex-foliated Vermiculite :

72.1 The Vermiculite shall be from Bhara t He at Insulating & Refractory Industries or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

72.2 It shall be hydrated lamina r natural mineral having, Alumin ium-Iron, Magnesium Silica tes as content and shall consist of th in flat flakes, contain ing innumera ble microscopic voids an d layers. It sha ll have ph ysical propertie s like c hemical inertness, light weigh t, fire and rot proofness, porosity, non-abrasive nature, flakiness etc.

72.3 It shall have sintering temperature and melting poin t about 2300 OF and 2400

OF, respective ly.

The specific heat and specific gravity of minerals shall be 0.2 and 2.6, respectively. The mineral should posse ss pH value of 7.0 and cation e xchange rate 90 to 100 milli equ ivalent per 100 grams. The thermal conductivity K shall be 0.43-0.45 Btu.

72.4 The mineral should be incombustible a nd capable to withstand temperature u pto 1100 OC to give

effective insulation. It shall be insoluble and inert to organic solvents ha ving cold crushing strength atleast 250 Psi. The air contraction at maximum service temperature shall be less than 1%.

M-73 Cement Concrete Hollow Blocks :

73.1 Hollow concrete blocks shall be of size such that they can be bonded wi th br ick masonry, if necessary. The blocks are generally referred by their nominal sizes which include the block and an allowance for joints. The nominal sizes are

a) 39 x 30 x 19 cm. b) 39

x 20 x 19 cm. c) 39 x 10 x

19 cm.

The block shall ha ve one or more large holes or cavities which either pass through the block or do not effectively pass through (in case of closed cavity) and shall have the to tal solid material between 50 to 75% of the total volume of the blo ck, calculated from the overall dimensions. In case of solid blocks, the solid material shall not be less than 75 % of the total volume of th e block.

73.2 The shell thickness of the blocks shall be not less than 65 mm., in any part, however based on the strength requirements, the thickness can be varied between 20 mm. to 50 mm., as follows :

Nominal block face Shell thickness Web thickness width.

minimum. minimum.

100 or less 25 25

Over 100 to 150 25 25

Over 150 to 200 30 25

Over 200 35 30

All the above dimensions are in mm.

73.3 The volume of concrete shall not be less than half the gross volume of the block. The total width of the

cavities shall not be less than 2/3r d of th e over all th ickness of the block. The maximu m variation in



Page 265 of 430

the length of the blocks shall not be more than + 5 mm. and ma ximum variation in height and width shall not be more than + 3 mm.

73.3 Hollow blocks are manufac tured by special ma chines. Casting is done in a single operation.

Concrete shall be thoroughly compacted in the moulds with blunt end steel rods or vibrators or by using vibr ating tab les. Ordinary con crete mix 1:2:4 of ver y low water/cemen t ra tio is use d and shall be mixed as d escribed in the section n o. 2.00 of p lain and rein forced concre te. Additives or admixtures shall be used such as a) Accelerating , water-reducing and air- entraining ad mixtures, b) Water-proofing agents, e tc. High compressive strength and very dry consistency enables to remove the blocks for curi ng, immediately after ca sting. In case of manual compaction, the mixture shall be placed into the mould, in layers of about 50 to 75 mm. and each layer is thoroughly tamped un til the whole mould is filled up and struck off level with a trowel. In case of mechanical compaction, the m ould shall be filled up to overflo w, vibra ted or mechanically tamped and struck off le vel. Steel wire may be e mbedded in e ach block while casting. Rapid hardening cement may be used. After demoulding, the blocks shall be protected untill they ar e sufficiently hardened to permit handling without damage. The blocks shall be thoroughly cured for atleas t 14 days an d shall be dried out for a period of 4 weeks, before placing. The y shall be stac ked with vo ids horiz ontal to facilita te th orough passa ge of air . The blocks shall be allowed to complete their initial shrinkage before placing. Water absorption shall not be more than 10% by mass.

73.4 Hollow blocks have better thermal properties than s olid blocks. Further hollow blocks made from

ligh t weight concrete have still better in sulation against heat. They shall conform to the following three grades:

Grade A - They shall be used as load bearing units and shall have a min. block density of 1500

Kg/m3. They shall possess min. averag e compre ssive strength of 35, 45, 55 and 70 Kg/cm

2.

respectively, for its sub-category, at 28 days.

Grade B - They shall be us ed as load bearing units and shall have block density less than 1500

Kg/m3. but not less than 1000 Kg/m

3. They shall possess min. average compressive strength of

20, 30 and 50 Kg/cm2. respectively, for its sub-category, at 28 days.

Grade C - Th ey shall be us ed as non-loa d bearing units and shall h ave block density less tha n

1500 Kg/m 3. but not less than 1000 Kg/m

3. They shall possess min. av erage compressiv e

strength of 15 Kg/cm2. at 28 days.

Grade D - Solid Concrete Blocks - They shall be us ed as load bearing units and s hall have block density not less than 1800 Kg/m

3. They shall possess min. average compressive strength of 40 and 50

Kg/cm2. respectively, for its sub-category, at 28 days.

73.5 They shall ha ve a varie ty of surface textures ranging from ver y fin e close texture to a coarse open

te xture, by proper s election, grad ing and proportioning of the aggregate s. Further the texture shall be developed by treating the surface while the units are still green . Colour shall be rendered by adding non-fading mineral pigments.

73.6 Well made units shall not require plaster, in case of unimportant buildings. Two or three coats of cement pain t shall be sufficien t to ren der the masonry resistan t to rain wa ter. However, if plaster is intended, the un it shall ha ve a suffic iently rough surface to a fford go od key to the plaster. Water-proofing admixtures shall be used in the plaster.

M-74 Silicone paint :

74.1 It shall be of the best quali ty, like Hydro seal - Silicon ate Epo xy or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS Codes.

74.2 It shall be pre pared by mixi ng Silicone a nd E poxy. It shall be appli ed on dry as well as damp

surfaces. It shall be non-to xic and odourless, so s hall be suitable fo r drinking water structures also. It shall render the sur face impervious to water and shall prevent water penetration. It itself shall



Page 266 of 430

penetrate into the str ucture and shall form a strong film on the por es of the structure surface, making the surface water-tight, non-toxic and erosion free.

74.3 It shall be water thinnable. Before use, the hardener of the Siliconate Epoxy shall be mixed with resin

and thinned with water, in the proportions described by the manufacture r. It shall be applied with a suitable spray gun with a fine nozzl e. An overla p of 25 to 3 0 cm. shall b e preferred. It shall be semitransparent but on drying it shall become transparent.

M-75 Curved Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets :

75.1 It shall be o f the best quality such as Everest or equivalent, as appr oved b y the Architect an d Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS specifications.

75.2 It shall be available in no minal thickness of 6 mm. with an o verall wid th o f 10 50 mm. and laid width of 876 mm. It shall b e availab le in standard lengths of 2743 mm. and 3048 mm. It shall have a nominal radius of 2743 mm.

75.3 It shall pro vide an arch roo fing system of whic h the se mi-circular arch shall be the most stable . It shall provide a self-sup porting roof construction and shall be used for wide varieties of structures for agricultural, industrial and domestic uses, garages and for temporary site o ffices and for storage of implements. It shall be easily erected without any need of expertise and as temporary sheds without any foundation requirements.

M-76 Red Mud Plastic (RMP) Sheet :

76.1 RMP sheet shall be of Regal, Ele phant, Rita or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

76.2 It shall no t be hazardous to health. It sha ll have min imum thickness of 1.0 mm. a nd minimum

tensile streng th o f 400 kg/cm 2. It shall have h igh impact streng th and it shall not be easily

breakable.

76.3 The roofing sheets shall withstand the effect s o f s un, wind , ra in, snow, larg e tempera ture variations without any loss of smoothness and lustre. It shall be smoothly & attractively finished and opaque in nature. It should be extr emely flexible, so as to be bent a t any angle withou t cracking, stretching or becoming soft.

76.4 It shall be durable, free from any cracks and verm ite & termite proof. It shall be very light in

weight, @ 2.5 kg/m2. It shall be easily handled and installed . It shall not break during cutting or drilling.

76.5 The roofing s heet shall ha ve good ther mal insula tion and shall be resistant to heat, acid an d alkali.

It shall be of uniform colour, as approved by the Architect.

M-77 Polyethylene Sheets :

77.1 Polyethylene sheet shall be from Profeel, Ramplast or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

77.2 It shall be produced by using a continuous, smooth chemical process, at constant pressure and temperature. The Polye thylene sheets should be light weight, soft, smooth and flexible , which can be easily hand led an d laid . It sha ll be 100% water proof, acid proof, alkali proof, fire resistant and fully opaque.



Page 267 of 430

77.3 It shall be resistant to fun gus, moth, toxic gas es an d agents having affin ity to water. It shall have

excellen t bonding strength and th ermal conductivity shall be 0.023 kcal/m hr OC. It s hall conform to

IS : 5913 and IS : 3792 , wh erever appl icable. It shall prevent corrosion, chemica l action, leakage, seepage, pollution.

M-78 Aluminium Corrugated Building Sheets :

78.1 It shall be of the best qu ality and from reputed manufacturer like Indal or equivalent, a s approved by the Architect and Enginee r-in-charge. It shall conform to IS : 1254, in all respects. The aluminium alloys used in the manufacture of the sheets shall conform to IS : 737.

78.2 The sheets shall be ligh t in wei ght, having a density of abou t 2.70 gms/cm 3. Due to th e

formation of a thin transparent hard film of inert a luminium oxide, o n the surface of the shee t, it shall possess high corrosion resistan ce. The she ets shall be non-fragile and shall be exceptionally durable. As a luminium re flects a high proportion of the radiant he at, the sheets provide exce llent insulation when use d for cladding/roofing. T he sheets shall be non- combustible, non-flammable and non-sparking. As al uminium is elastic, the she ets shall o ffer high resistance to dentin g and shall be shatter-p roof. Co-efficient of linear expansion of aluminium is 0.000024 per

oC and therefore the la teral expansion of the sheets shall be readily

accommodated in the corrugations. The sheets shall offer no health hazard and shall be totally hygienic.

78.3 It shall be a vailable in trapezoidal and r ounded corrugations and shall be exten sively used for various Industrial buildings, Warehouses, Aircraft hangers, Power plants, Storage sheds, Bunk houses etc. It shall be innovatively used as interior partitions, wall panels, flase ceiling etc.

M-79 Fibreglass Translucent Roofing :

79.1 It shall b e of the be st qu ality such a s Gl ass poll or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge. It shall conform to BSS : 4154.

79.2 It shall be a combination of glass fibre mat and polyester resin, suitably modified to resist ultraviolet

degradation. It shall disperse light rays, allowing uniform diffused light penetration. It shall absorb the heat ra ys and so helps to save el ectricity. It shall be ava ilable in (1) Clear grade - where ligh t transmission shall b e 87% to 90%. an d (2) Natural white/green/blue/yellow/red - where light transmission shall be 60% to 70%. It shall be available in leng ths o f 1.5 m. to 3 m. The width shall be equivalen t to that of asbestos /galvanised a nd aluminium co rrugated sheets. It shall have a th ickness of 1.2 mm., with a to lerance of += 0.2 mm.

79.3 It shall have a coefficient of linear expansion of .000012 per oC. Its heat distortation temperature shall

be approximately 75˜C. It shall h ave thermal conductivity of 0.22 Kcal/mhOC. It shall have an impact

str ength of 14 .5 Ft, hardness of 40 - 50 Barcol and Brinell 26. It shall have a tensile strength of 600 -

800 Kg /cm2.

and compressive strength of 1200 - 1 400 Kg/cm2. On soaking for

24 hrs., at 25 OC, its water absorption shall be 0.24%. It shall have effective resistance to most

chemicals except strong acids.

79.4 It shall be suitably used for industrial and residential roof coverings, where light tr ansmission is desired. It shall also be used to cover swimming pools, gardens and terraces, if desired. It shall be normally s elf cleaning type but when used in i ndustrial areas, it shall be clean ed with water and soap.

M-80 Poly-carbonate Sheet :

80.1 Polycarbonate sheets for versatile glazing shall of the best quality such as Lexan or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engine er-in-charge. It shall mee t all the requ irements of BS :



Page 268 of 430

6262. For impact performance, it sha ll meet the BS : 6206 requirements and for anti-bandit requirements, it shall conform to BS : 5544.

80.2 It shall be as transparent as glass, but s hall ha ve h alf its weigh t. It shall be tough and ye t flexible. It shall have strong impact strength and shall offer thermal and sound insulation. It shall resist the effe cts of weathe r, shall be un breakable and shall provid e protection a gainst forced intrusion. It s hall be used for roof glazin g, door and w indow glazing as well as privacy glazing , on many different types of buildings. As light weight, it shall be feasible to use it on wider spans. It promotes natural light and shall impart an impression of spaciousness.

80.3 It shall have tensile st rength greater than 70 N/mm 2. Its flexural modulus shall be 2500 N/mm

2. and fle

xural yield streng th shall be 100 N/mm2. It sh all ha ve an impact strength (falling dart) greater than

200 Nm. It shall have an in dentation hardness - H358 10 of 98 N/m m2. and H358

60 of 93 N/mm 2. Its coe fficient of lin ear expansio n shall be 0 .00067 per

oC and thermal

conductivity shall be 0.21 W/m.K. It sh all have a specific gravity of 1.2 gm/cc. and water absorption @ 24 hrs. 23

OC shall be 10 mg. Its elong ation at break shall be greater than 100 %.

It shall have a higher coefficient o f thermal ex pansion. It shall allow ligh t transmission of between 82 % and 90 %, depending o n the thickness of the sheet. It shall not transmit UV radiation upto 385 Nm. It shall resist the effect of chemicals. It shall have self-e xtinguishing, low flame spread characteristics and low fire propagation indices.

M-81 Bullet Resistant Laminate :

81.1 It shall be of the best quality such as Lexgard or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

81.2 It shall be po lycarbonate sheet, laminated together using a paten ted general electric inter layer film

with a mar-resistant finish. It shall be bullet -resistant, shall not spall, splinter or cra ck a nd shall have a long las ting glazing for surface appearance. It sh all be 60 % less in weight compared to bullet-

proof glass. It shall have a K-value of 3.06 W/m2

K for thermal insulation and allow light transmission of 63%, when 33 mm. thick.

81.3 It shall be suitably used in Banks, Police stations, Cash counter etc., wherever there is a risk o f

deliberate attack. M-84 Gypboard :

84.1 It shall be of the best quality from India Gypsum or equivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

84.2 It sha ll be formed by enclosing and bo nding toge ther a core of s et g ypsum plaster by two sheets of heavy paper. It shall offer high standard of safety, thermal efficiency and aesthetics. It shall be light in weigh t, shall o ffer good fire re sistance and shall r ender faster construction. It shall be suitably used in areas subjected to continuously damp or we t conditions , exce pt bathrooms, w here gypboard partitions shall be prope rly protec ted by tiles or oth er impervious materials. It shall be a non -resonant ma terial, rendering sound insulation . It sha ll be s trong, durable and d imensionally stable. It shall offer a smooth surface which can be pa inted, tiled or wall papered. It shall b lock the passage of heat and s hall retard the spread of fire . It shall hide upto 60 db of sound, when erected in the proper manner.

M-85 Ceiling Tiles :

85.1 It shall be o f the best qua lity, such as Gypboard, Sitate x or equivalen t, as ap proved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall adequately follow the IS : 3129.

85.2 They shall be made either from gypboard or from sugarcane fibres, as specified in the item.



Page 269 of 430

85.3 They shall be resistant to fire, ter mites, fungu s, woodborin g, insects a nd other wo od deteriorators. They shall b e resistant to delamina tion due to moisture and cyclic changes in weather and humidity. T hey shall ha ve high s tructural strength, good th ermal insula tion

properties, thermal conductivity at mean temperature shall be 4.2 K.cal/cm./m2./hr./

OC and good fire

retardan t properties. It shall have a density o f 288 Kg/m 3. + 10% and shall weigh 3.71

Kg/m2. Whenever, P.F resin shall be used in bonding, good weather and boiling-water proof properties

sh all be rendered under ISS and BSS sp ecifications. T hey shall favourably absorb sound, rendering good acoustic properties.

85.4 They shall be availab le in r eady-to-fix, re ady-cut stand ard sizes of 610 mm. x 6 10 mm. x 12 mm.,

in various design and plain tiles shall be a vailable in sizes, 2440 mm. x 1220 mm. x 12 mm., 1220 mm. x 1220 mm. x 12 mm., 1220 mm. x 610 mm. x 12 mm. and 610 mm. x 610 mm. x 12 mm. Th ey shall be suitably used in resi dences, public place s, bank buildings, studios , showrooms, computer centres, telecommunication buildings etc.

M-88 Sliding Door Tracks/Channel :

88.1 It shall be fr om Agend, Coburn System or equivalent, as approved by the Architect a nd Engineer-in-charge.

88.2 It shall be made with hig hest quality precision engineering to gi ve the u ltimate in smooth , frictionless action and to move the doors silently, a t the touch o f a finger. It shall carry a load upto 100 lbs., to ensure life time trouble free operation from all comp onents. It shall be in three classifications :

Straight sliding :

When a clear wall space equivalent to the area of one leaf should be available to the right of the opening either inside or outside the opening.

Sliding and Folding, end hung :

Where clearance is restricted, such arrangem ent is recommended. It shall pro vide maximum possible free space when folded to the open position.

Sliding and Folding, center hung :

It shall be provided where there is restriction of space. It shall pro vide smooth r unning action and unobtrusiveness of fittings. It shall enable the leaves to fit closely between the jambs of the opening.

88.3 All these slid ing gears are top hang ing with bo ttom guides. All movements shall be on ba ll

bearing so that friction is reduced to minimum.

Track : It shall be made from sturdy steel with protective zinc coating. The shape of the track shall ensure true, smooth running and prevents doo r from jumpin g off. It shall be adjusted horizontally to compensate for minor irregularities in floor level.

Roller Hangers : It shall be made from 16 gauge zi nc plated steel, housing containing tough Nylon rollers with exclusive differential movement. No lubrication shall be required. The hanger platter fitted to the top o f the doors shall ha ve la teral adjustmen t feature, to co mpensate for minor irregularities in surface by positioning the door at slightly varying distances from wall.

End Stops : It shall be made from stur dy zi nc p lated steel angle , shaped to e nsure positive stopping action and prevent door in conjunction with rubber buffers or hangers.

Floor guide : It shall be manufactured from tough nylon, shaped, to allow smooth movement of grooved doors or non-grooved doors.



Page 270 of 430

M-89 Sand Stone Grills/Baluster :

89.1 It shall be from Dilpasand Shilp or equ ivalent, as ap proved by the Architect a nd Engineer-in- charge.

89.2 It shall be ma de from best quality Ba nsipahadpur/Sandstone, ha ving uniform co lour (no other colour spot shall be a llowed) and te xture. The sand stone shall b e even , sound, durable an d free from any veins , cracks and flaws. T he thickness of the stone used shall be as specified in item of work, with the permissible tolerance of 2 mm.

89.3 The grills/Baluster shall be produced by fine ch iselling. All edges, faces and angles of fine hand

chiselled grills, columns, baluster shall be machine polished, as specified in item.

M-90 Anti-Corrosive Paints : M-

90A Ferroshield :

90A.1 It shall be fr om STP Limited or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge.

90A.2 It shall be a high build bituminous emulsion, spe cially formu lated for pro tection agains t

corrosion. It shall form a dry film, 2 mm. thick, which shall not crack at low temperatures nor crocodile at very high temperatures. It shall also be used as waterproofing material on flat, sloped and steeped roofs. It shall be applied by brush and by heavy duty airless spraying.

M-90B Tankmastic :

90B.1 It shall be fr om STP Limited or equiva lent, as approved by the charge. It shall conform to IS : 158-1982 and IS : 9862.

Architect and Engineer-in-

90.2.2 It shall be sp ecial bitumino us paint, which s hall have no harmful re action on drin king water. It shall be used to protect the inside of w ater tanks an d pipe connections, agains t corrosion. It shall be

applicable on steel, wood, concrete, iron etc. It shall ha ve a covering capacity o f 12 m2/lit..

M-90C Pipekote :

90C.1 It shall be fr om STP Limited or equiva lent, as approved by the charge. It shall conform to IS : 158.

Architect and Engineer-in-

90C.2 It shall be a heavy du ty bitu minous paint, which shall not impar t any odour or taste to water , carried in the steel water pipelines, tanks and pen-stocks. It shall be applied on the inside surface of the water pipeline, tanks and pen-stocks. It shall be resi stant to mild acids, alkalis and shall with stand heat up to 150

OC. It shall render a heavy bod y protective film. If zinc-rich,

epoxy primer shall be used, better results of pipekote shall be obtained.

M-90D Silvershield :

90D.1 It shall be fr om STP Limited or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge.

90D.2 It sha ll be a bituminous aluminium- finish pai nt formu lated for application over anti-corrosive

paints. It shall have a covering capacity of 10 m2/lit..

M-90E Shalimastic HD :

90E.1 It shall be fr om STP Limited or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge. It shall comply with the US Dept. of interior bureau of reclamation specification CA-50.



Page 271 of 430

90E.2 It shall be a viscous, heavy-duty, anti-corrosive waterproof coal tar paint. It shall offer resistance to

acids and alkalis. It shall be used for protection of all types of iron and steel structures.

M-91 Powder Paints:

91.1 Powder paints shall of sup erior quality such as Hawcoplast of Hardcastle & Waud Mfg. Co. Ltd. or equivalen t, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to th e relevant IS specifications.

91.2 It shall be available in the following types : Epoxy

:

It shall be tough and resistant to chemicals. However, it shall have poor exterior durability. Epoxy

polyester :

It shall provide a decorative finish and shall have better overbake resistance.

Polyester - TGIC :

It shall provide exterior durability but it shall form a slightly thicker film.

Polyurethane :

It shall provide exterior durability and shall form a thin film coating.

M-92 MDF (Medium Density Fibre) Wood :

92.1 The MDF wood shall be from Nuwud or equiva lent, as approved by the Architect and Enginee r- in-charge and shall conform to IS : 12406.

92.2 MDF wood shall be manu factured from wood fibres and syn thetic resin binde r to produce

homogenous sheet materia l, ha ving min imum density about 600 to 900 kg/m 3. It shall have

moisture content less than 8% and water absorption less than 12% at 24 hours soaking. It shall have

modulus of rupture and tensile strength atleast 50 N/mm2.

and 0.8 N/mm2., respectively.

92.3 The screw wi thdrawal stre ngth shall be minimum 30 00 N. for face and 1800 N. for edge . I t

should be hig hly resistant against termite, insects and it should possess good h eat and soun d insulation. It should be ea sily workable for mou lding, carpentry, ro uting etc. It should be free from any cracks, wraps, splits etc. and should possess uniform strength in all direction.

M-93 Polyurethene Foam Insulation:

93.1 Polyurethane foam shall be from SDC, F GP, Excilite , VCM or equivalent, as appr oved b y the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to the relevant IS Code.

93.2 It shall ha ve high strength to weight ratio alongwith excellent ther mal insulation and acousti c absorption. It shall be based on the exothermic, ca talytic reaction o f polyisocynates with polyol molecules containing hydr oxyl groups in the pr esence of blowing agent. It sha ll be per fectly homogenous and having u niform characteristics like perfect adhesion to meta l surfaces, high er insulation ca pacity, ma ximum resistance and light ness. It shall be perfect n on-hygroscopic, completely water proof having dimensional stability, optimum thermal insulation, fire retardancy.

93.3 It shall be o f low foam den sity, not more than 40 Kg/m3. The thermal conductivity shall be 0 .02

Kcal/m hr˜C. The compressive streng th shall not be less than 2.5 Kg/cm2.

and 1.2 Kg/cm 2., in



Page 272 of 430

direction para llel to rise an d perpendicular to rise respective ly. Th e close cell content o f the

foam shall be 90 to 95 % a nd it sha ll be workable within the temp erature range of -150 OC to

+80OC. The water vapour permeability shall be 2.0 perms/in.

M-94 Fiberglas Reinforced Plastics (FRP):

94.1 Fiberglas Reinforced Plastic shall be fro m C EAT or e quivalent, as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. It shall conform to relevant IS Code.

94.2 It shall be either unidirectional rein forced or sheet moulded or filament wound epoxy to match the purpose of work and i tem of tender . It shall ha ve versatile chemical inertn ess, electrical resistance and mechanical strength , ea se of proc essibility, repea tability and p redictability. It shall have desirable characteristics like light wei ght, high strength, stiffness, toughness, thermal insulation properties, superior weather resistance, complete elasticity, fatigue, creep, resistance to corrosion, rot, swelling, insects, fungus etc.

94.4 There shall be no yield point beyond which buckling or denting of the FRP occurs, to reduce the

possibility of irritating damages for minor stresses or impacts. The density, flexural strength and

flexural modules shall not b e less than 1.5 mg/m 3., 1000 MPa and 40x10

3 MPa, respectively. It shall

have minimum tensile str ength, tensile modulus and comp ressive strength of 1000 MPa, 40x10

3 MPa and 250 MPa, respective ly. The FRP shall have thermal conductivity about 0 .2

w/mOC. Thermal coefficient of expansion shall be less than 10x10

-6 per

OK.

94.5 The minimum glass content shall be 60%. The weig ht index for stiffn ess and tensile strength at yield shall not be less than 0.6 and 0.9 respectively. No damage should be there while testing at impact energ y of 8 jou les. The level o f trans lucency should be greater than 80% of d iffused transmission that o f direct light. It shall prov ide superior aesthetic value with incorporated colour. It shall be good fire retardant, durable and impermeable to water.



Page 273 of 430

MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS – PLUMBING WORKS

M-p1 GI pipes and fittings:

GI pipe shall be of the r equired diameter and clas s conforming to is:1239. The specified diameter o f the pipes shall refer to the inside di ameter of the bore. GI fittin gs shall be of th e standard `r' or equivalent make and clamp and screws shall be as per specifications.

M-p2 bib-tap, stop-cock and angular stop-cock:

A bib-cock is a draw off tap with a horizo ntal inlet and free outlet. A stopcock is a valve with a suitable means of connection for inser tion in a pipe line for controlling the flow. All cocks shall be of CP brass construction, of heavy duty, first quality and of approved make or its equivalent.

They shall be of the first quality, screw down type and CP brass, po lished bright conforming to is:781. The diameter shall be as specified in the description of the item.

the minimum finished weight in kg of a tap/cock shall be as under:

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Diameter bib stop diameter bib stop in mm

tap cock in mm tap cock

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8 0.25 0.25 15 0.40 0.40

10 0.30 0.35 20 0.75 0.75

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

M-p3 CP brass pillar-tap:

The capstan head of a sp ecified dia of CP bra ss co nstruction sh all be of the first qua lity o f approved make conforming to is:1795.

M-p4 vitreous chinaware basin:

Wash basin shall be of the first quality w hite/coloured porcelain conforming to is:2556 (part-iv) and is:771.

The size of the washbasin shall be a s s pecified. The washbasin shall be of one piece construction with a contin ued over-flow arrangem ent. All interna l angles shall be designed so as to facilitate cleaning. It shall have a single t ap ho le or two hole s, as specifie d. Each basin shall ha ve a circular waste hole whic h is either riveted or be velled internally with 65 mm diameter at top and 10 m m depth, to s uit the wast e fitting. The ne cessary stud slot to receive the bracket o n the under side of the basin shall be pro vided. The b asin shall ha ve a recessed



Page 274 of 430

internal soap holder which shall fully dra in into the bowl. The washbasin shall be provided with a CP brass chain and rubber plug.

white/coloured glazed ped estal of the quality and colour as tha t of the basin, shall be provided where specified in the item. It shall be complete ly recessed at the back for reception o f supply and wash pipe. It shall be capable of su pporting the b asin rigidly an d adequately and shall be so designed as to make the height from the floor to the top of the rim of basin, 7 50 mm to 80 0 mm, as directed.

M-p5 European type water closet (EWC):

The EWC shall be white /coloured glazed porcelain , first quality floor mounted, w all mounted or double sipho n coupled clo set, o f wash down type , c onforming to is:2556 and is :771. The size and type shall be as specified in the item.

`P' or `S' trap shall be provided as required with a water seal not less than 50 mm.

The solid plastic seat and cover shall be of the first quality, black, white or coloured, conforming to is:2548 . It shall be mad e of molded s ynthetic ma terials which shall be tough a nd hard with high resistan ce to solven ts and shall be free from blisters and other sur face defects an d provided with chromium plated brass hinges and rubber buffer of suitable size.

M-p6 Orissa type water closet:

the specification of Orissa type white or colour ed glazed WC of the first quality shall conform to is:2556 (part iii) e xcept that the pan shall be with the integral squatting pan o f size 580 mm x 440 mm, or 530 mm x 410 mm with raised footrests.

M-p7 Indian type water closet:

The Indian type white or coloured glazed WC of t he first quality shall be of size specified in the item and conforming to is:7 71 and is:2556 (part-ii). Each pan shall have integral flushing ring of suitable type with adequate number of holes around to have satisfactory flushing. It shall als o have an in let at the front for connecting flush pipe, as directed. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall ha ve suffic ient slope from the front towards the ou tlet an d surface shall be uniform and smooth. The pan shall be provided with 100 mm dia `p' or `s' trap with appr oximately 50 mm water seal and with or without 50 mm dia vent horn.

M-p8 Footrests:

A pair of white glazed porc elain rectangular foot rests of minimum size 250 mm x 130 mm x 20 mm shall be provided with water closet.



Page 275 of 430

M-p9 Stainless steel sink:

The ss sink shall be of a specified size and qua lity of approved make or equivalent certified b y the consultants. It shall be made out of Salem st ainless steel AISI 304 18/8. It shall be polished in an easy clean finish. The brackets for sinks shall conform to is:775.

the sink comprises of 40 mm dia waste coupling with a rubber plug and a CP chain of approved quality of approved make or its equivalent as certified by the consultants.

M-p10 vitreous chinaware urinal:

The lipped type vitreous u rinal, e ither large fla t back, small flat back or angular, shall be as specified in the item conforming to is:771. It shall be of the first quality free from any defects.

The urinals shall have fixing arrangement fo r 15 mm dia spreader, 32 mm dia CP domicile waste and C P pipes with a wall flange. The urinal s hall be fixed to the wa ll by one C.I. brack et and two C.I. wall clips, as approved by the manufacture complete as directed.

M-p11 Low level vitreous chinaware flushing cistern:

the low level vitreous chinaware flushing cistern shall be of 10 to 12.5 litres capacity and of 5 to 6.5 litres capacity conforming to relevant is code. The flushing cistern shall:

a) Be of the first quality free from any defects, b) Have an outlet dia of 32 mm to be connected with a WC pan with a pipe, c) Be provided with an inlet and an outlet for fixing an incoming and an over flowing pipes, d) Be provided with a cp handle for flushing, e) Be pro vided with a ci bra cket (conforming to is:775) for wall mounting at th e

specified height, and f) Consist of the main body, a lid, a ceramic siphon and valve less fittings.

M-p12 Cast iron flushing cistern:

The C.I. flushing cistern of 15 litre capacity shall conform to is:774. The flushing cistern shall be of the first quality and free from any defects and have an outlet of 32 mm dia meter. The ou tlet shall be connected to a le ad pipe of 32 mm diam eter. The lead pipe shall conform to is:404 (part-i). For fixing inle t p ipe and o verflow pipe , a 20 mm dia inlet an d outlet shall be provided . The flushing cistern shall be provided with a GI cha in allowing a movement of the le ver to a sufficient length. The C .I. flushing cistern shall be pain ted with one coat of antico rrosive pain t and two coats of paint. Th e flushing cistern sha ll be fixed on two C.I. brackets conforming to is:775.

M-p12 a ABS plastic flushing cistern:

Raw material of cistern bo dy shall b e of virg in polypr opylene with critical and functional par ts moulded from engineering grade ABS, acetyl, n ylon a nd nylon glas s. The float s hall work on clock valve mechanism with concealed air pocket to give upward thrust of 75 gm by archimedes principle. Derlin valve made from an acetyl compound shall withstand an inlet pressure upto 20

kg/cm2. Main rubber valve shall be o f pa rabolic design on ball and socket join t for better seal.



Page 276 of 430

Valve seat sh all be o f engineering grade ABS plasti c for long scratch free life . Cistern shall be of 10 litre capacity and flow can be adjusted from 7 to 10 litres. It shall conform to is 7231.

M-p13 Flush cock:

Heavy type h alf-turn flush-cock conforming to relevant is code shall be chromiu m pla ted gun metal ha ving diameter sp ecified in th e description of the item. The flush-cock shall be concealed type or exposed.

M-p14 Cast iron pipes and fittings:

All soil, waste, ven t and a nti-siphon pip es and fi ttings shall conform to is:17 29 for sand cast pipe. All spun soil pipe shall conform to is:3989. All r ain water pip e shall conform to is:1230 . The pipe sha ll ha ve a spigot and socket end . T he pipes and fittings shall be true to shape , smooth, cylindrical and their inner and outer surfac es being as nearly as pr acticably concentric. They shall be sound and nicely cast, shall be free from cracks, laps, pinholes or other imperfection, neatly dressed and carefully fitted.

The end of pipes and fittings shall be reasonably at right angle to their axis.

The sand cast iron pipes s hall be o f the diameter sp ecified in the description a nd shall be in lengths of 1.5 m, 1.8 m, an d 2.0 m including socket ends of the pipe , unless shorter lengths are either specified or required at junc tions. The pipes a nd fittings shall be supplie d withou t ear s unless specified.

The spun cast iron pipes of the diameter specified in the description shall be in

lengths of 3.0 m and 2.5 m including socket ends of pipe, unless shorter lengths are specified or required at the junctions.

Tolerances:

The standard weights and thickness of pipes shall be as shown in the fo llowing table . A tolerance upto -10% however, shall be allowed.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sr. NB dia thickness overall weight in kg of pipe excluding ears in mm

in mm 1.5 m long 1.8 m long 2 m long

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

1. 75 5.0 12.83 16.52 18.37

2. 100 5.0 18.14 21.67 24.15

3. 150 5.0 31.91 - -

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

A tolerance upto 15% in thickness and 2 0 mm in length shall be a llowed. For fittings tolerance in lengths shall be +25 mm and -10 mm.



Page 277 of 430

The thickness of fittings and their socket and spi got dimensio ns shall con form to the specifications for the corr esponding sizes of st raight pipes. The tolerances in weights an d thickness shall be the same as for straight pipes.

M-p15 `P' trap or Nahni trap:

The ‘p’ trap s hall be of C.I. and free from porosit y or other defects , which affec t serv iceability. The thickness of the base metal shall n ot be less tha n 6.5 mm. Th e surface shall be smooth and free from cracks, chips and other flaws or any other kind of de fects which affect serviceability. The size of ‘p’ trap shall be as specified with self-cleansing design.

The Nahni trap shall be of quality approved by the consultants conforming to the

relevant is code.

The Nahni trap shall be with a deep seal of minimum 50 mm. Places where the trap with a deep seal can not be accommodated, the s ame with a shallow seal shall be use d with a prio r permission of the consultants. The cover shall be of C.I. or ss grating with a perforated cover of appropriate size.

M-p16 Gully trap:

The gully trap shall con form to is:651 and be fr ee from defects. The glaze o f the traps shall b e free from crazing. They shall give a sharp clear tone when struck with light hammer. There shall be no broken blisters.

The size of the gully trap shall be as specified in the item.

Each gully trap shall have a square C.I. grating of proper dimensions at its inlet. It will also have a water tight cover with a frame of inside dim ensions 300 mm x 300 mm. If the cover is of C.I., the weight sh all not be less than 4.53 kg and of the frame not less than 2.72 kg . The grating cover and frame shall be sound and truly square with machined seating faces.

M-p17 Salt glaze stoneware pipe and fitting:

The pipes an d fittings shall be of the fir st quality manufactured from fire cla y, thoroughly salt glazed, burnt through the whole thickness, of a close even textur e, free from air blows, fire blisters, crack and other imperfections which effect the serviceab ility. The inn er and outer surfaces shall be smooth and perfectly glazed. The pipe shall b e capable of withstand ing pressure of 1.5 m head without showing sign of leak age. The thickness of the wall shall no t be less than 1 /12th o f the in ternal dia . Th e depth o f so cket shall no t be less th an 38 mm. The inside of the socket shall be sufficiently large to allow a joint of 6 mm around the pipe.

the pipes shall generally conform to a relevant is:651.

M-p18 Wall peg rail:

The aluminu m wall peg-rail shall have three alumin um pegs of approved quality and size. It shall be fixed on teakwood plank of size 450 mm x 75 mm x 20 mm. The teakw ood shall be french-polished or oil painted, as specified.



Page 278 of 430

M-p19 GI water spout:

The GI p ipes of specified dia shall be o f medi um qu ality and specials shall be of `r' brand or equivalent.

The pipe shall have leng th, as required for the thickness of wall in which it is fixed and at th e outside end a tee and a bend cut at half the leng th shall be pr ovided. At the other end a coupling shall be provided to have better fixing. Wate rspout shall b e provided as per deta iled drawing or as specified.

M-p20 Asbestos cement pipe (A.C. pipe):

The asbestos cement pipe specified in the descr iption of the item shall conform to is:1626 . Specials like bends, shoes, cowls, etc., Shall conform to the relevant is code. The interior of the pipe shall have a smooth finish, regular surface and regular internal diameter. The tolerance in all dimensions shall be as per is:1626-part-i.

M-p21 Crydon ball valve:

Ball valve of screwed type including polyethylene floa t and necessary lever e tc., Shall be of the size mentioned in the description of item and conform to is:1703.

M-p22 Bitumen-felt for waterproofing and damp-proofing:

Bitumen felt shall be of type 2 with -self finished felt grade-2 conforming to is:1322.

M-p23 Brackets/ clamps:

Pipes in shafts and other locations shall be supported by aluminium, C.I. or ms brackets/clamps of approved design. Pipe i n wall chases sha ll be anchored by iron hooks and a t ceiling level shall be supp orted on s tructural brackets /clamps, fabricated from ms or aluminu m flat bar of 6 mm thickness as per drawi ng and detail. However, only when specified, slo tted angles shall be used. The 6 to 8 mm dia ms or GI bar sh all be bent to required shape and size to fit well on the pipe when tig htened with nut-bolt and washer on t he brackets/clamps. Clamp shall also b e formed out of 2 semi-circular pieces hinged with 6 mm dia ms pin on the side and provided with flanged ends on the o ther side with ho les to fit in the screw bolt an d nut o f 40 mm leng th. The clamps shall be provided with a hook made out of 275 mm long 10 mm dia ms bar riveted to the ring at the centre of 1 semi-circ ular piece. The brackets or clamps shall be fixe d to the walls keeping 25 mm clear off th e finished face of the wall to facilitate cleaning and p ainting of the pipes.

M-p24 Unions:

Contractor shall provide adequate numb er of uni ons on all pipes to enable dismantling later . Unions shall be provided near each gunmetal valve, stop-cocks or check-valves and on straight runs,



Page 279 of 430

as necessary, at appropriate locations.

M-p25 Flanges:

Flanged con nections shall be pro vided on pipes ru nning throug h shafts as shown on th e drawings and at all equipment connectio ns. Connections shall be m ade by the correct number and a 3 mm thick gasket. Where hot water or steam connections are made, insertion gaske t shall be suitable for high temperature grade and quality, approved by th e consultant. Bo lt hole dia for flanges shall conform to those of C.I. sluice valves.

M-p26 Gun metal gate/wheel/non-return valve (swing type):

ISI marked valves of required size shall be of heavy gun metal full way type or globe valves

conforming to is:778 tested at 20 kg/cm 2. Valves above 65 mm dia shall be flanged mou nt tested

at the manufacturer's works and their name stamped on it.

M-p27 CP brass bottle trap:

The bottle tra p shall be as per the specified di a and of the first qua lity. The bottle-trap shall be provided with a cp brass extension piece to the wall flange on one hand and on the other with a rubber adopter for waste connection.

M-p28 uPVC pipes and fittings:

They shall b e of the first quality o f approv ed make or equivalen t conforming to is:4985 and :7834 in all r espects. uPVC pressure pipes and fittin gs, uPVC SWR drainage system, u PVC threaded plu mbing syste m and uPVC casing pipes shall be use d as per the dia and rele vant specification specified under items.

They shall be extremely light in weight and shall have a minimum wall thickness of 3.2 mm the y shall be injection molded from selected raw materia ls having a w orking pressure-rating o f 4, 6,10 and 15 kg/cm

2. Pipe dia of 20 to 400 mm shall be ava ilable in working pressure as

specified above. uPVC SWR drainage system are exclusively suitable for soil, waste, rain-water drainage. The pipes and fi ttings shall b e res ilient an d shall ha ve good impact strength. uPVC shall be resistant to oils , fa ts, alcohols an d ar omatic free petrol bu t s hall be unsuitable for use with aromatic and chlorinated hydrocarbons, ketones, esters and ethers.

PVC pipes and fittings shall remain stable upto 60 oc PVC with a the rmal co-efficient of 0.00007

mm/m/oc. Th erefore, due to thermal e xpansion, a gap of 10 mm fro m the surface is approved during

laying of the pipes and fittings . They shall be fixed to the walls/surfaces with the help of PVC clips. Further, they can be connected to the co nventional ac, GI or C.I. pip es with the he lp of special adapters. The jointing shall be done with special care and as specified b y

manufacturer. Further, all fittings shall have their ends chamfered at 15o.

uPVC pipes and fittings:

All uPVC pipes and fittings shall conform to is:4985.

they shall be light weigh t, resilient, stro ng, seamless, resistant to chemicals, electrolytic and galvanic corr osion, odorle ss, and of h ygienic- and self-exti nguishing quality. The therma l

expansion sh all be 0 .0004 cal./hr. Cm 2/oc/cm. The c oefficient of linear expansion shall be

0.00005-0.00006 mm/m/oc. uPVC pip es and fittings shall be a vailable in dia varying from 20 to

400 mm with a working pressures varying from 2.5 to 15 kg/cm2.



Page 280 of 430

M-p29 High density polyethylene (HDPE) pipes and fittings:

All pip es and fittings shall conform to is :4984 and shall be from reputed manufac tures like PIL or EIL approved.

The pipes shall be capable of withstan ding a working pressure of 2 kg/cm 2

to 10 k g/cm2

at

50oc. All the fittings and be nds shall be factor y made moulded or manufactured from the same

material as the pipes.

M-p30 Asbestos septic tank:

It shall be fro m Everest or equivalen t, a s approv ed by the consultants. It shall be of required size as shown in detailed drawing or as specified in the item. It shall be of single piece in width and length but if required to match the specified size in depth, not more than four compartments shall be allowed (which incl udes top and bottom p ieces and extension pieces). It shall be made from the finest raw materials.

it shall be fre e from any joints in side wa lls, bottom pie ce, top cover and baffle wa lls and be of two compartments separated b y a ba ffle wall in a h orizontal section. No leaka ge should be there from joints between pieces depth-wise. The sidewalls shall be capable of withstanding the earth pressure and the top cover shall be designed to carry the traffic load and surface covering load.

It shall be air tight and designed to disintegrate the sewage by putrefaction. It shall contain two inlets (one for regular connection and other for alternative connection) and one outlet. The inlet shall be of 100 mm dia and the outlet shall be of 75 mm dia. All such connection shall be leak-proof. Rejected materials shall not be used.

M-p31 C.I. and spun cast pipes and fittings: water supply Pipes and specials:-

The cast iro n pipe s shall confirm to is 1537 while sp un cast pipe s sh all confirm to is:1 536. The pipe s sh all be either with spig ot and so cket e nds or flang ed end s. T he cast i ron pip es shall be vertically either class a or class b as specified. The spun iron pipe s shall be of cla ss a, cla ss b a s sp ecified in t he item. T hese pipe and special shall be u sed for water p ressure upto half of the hydraulic test pressure of various pipes as given below:

Hydraulic test pressure for vertically cast iron pipes:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nominal diameter test pressure in kg/cm2

Socket & spigot pipes flanged pipes Class A

class B class A class B

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Upto and including

300mm 20 25 20 25



Page 281 of 430

Over 300mm but upto

600mm 20 25 15 20

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Hydraulic test pressure for centrifugal spun cast iron pipes:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nominal diameter test pressure in kg/cm2

Socket & spigot pipes flanged pipes

Clas s LA A B A B

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Upto and including

300mm 20 25 30 20 25

Over 300mm but upto

600mm 20 25 30 - -

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Specials:

The spe cials shall co nform to is 1538 a nd shall be of medium or heavy class depe nding on their thickness. The hydraulic test pressure of each class shall be as follows:

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

test pressure in kg/cm sq

Nominal special with/without branches specials with branches

Diameter not greater than half the main dia. Greater than half the main dia.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Medium heavy medium heavy

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Upto and including

300mm 20 25 20 25

Over 300mm but upto

600mm 20 25 15 20

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Page 282 of 430

All C.I. pipes shall be capable of easily working a drill or file. Pipes and specials shall be sound with smooth inner and outer surface, nearly dressed and carefully fitted free from laps pinholes, and other imperfections and shall ring clearly when struck with a light hammer, the end of the pipes and the specials shall be reasonably square to their axis.

All pipes and specials before they are affected by rust shall have been coated with an approved anti-corrosive treatment or by heating and dipping in Dr. Agnus smith's solution at the factory.

M-p32 C.I. manhole covers and frames:

C.I. manhole covers and frames shall confirm is:1726. The general requirements for material, manufacture & workmanship, sampling, testing, key holes & key shall confirm to is:1726.

M-p33 Anti-corrosive paints: M-

p33a Ferroshield:

it shall be from STP limited or equivalent, as approved by the consultants.

it shall be a high build bituminous emulsion, spe cially formulated for prote ction against corrosion. It shall form a 2 mm thick d ry film wh ich shall not crack at low temperatures no r become crooked at high temperatures. It shall also be used as waterproofing material on flat, sloped and steeped roofs. It shall be applied by brush and by heavy duty airless spraying.

M-p33b Tankmastic:

It shall be from STP limite d, conforming to is:158 an d is:9862 or equivalen t ap proved by th e consultants.

This special bituminous paint shall ha ve no harmful reaction on drinking wate r, be used to protect the inside of wa ter tanks and pip e connections against corro sion, and be applicable on steel, wood, concrete, iron etc. It shall have a covering capacity of 12 m

2/litre.

M-p33c Pipekote:

It shall be fro m STP limite d or equivalent as approved by the consultants . It s hall conform to is:158.

This heavy d uty bituminou s paint shall not impart an y odour or taste to water , carried in the steel water pipelines, tanks and pen-stocks. It s hall be applied on the inside surface of the water pipeline, tanks and p en-stocks be resistant to mild acids, alkalis and withstand heat upto 150

oc. It shall render a he avy bod y pro tective film . If zinc-rich, epo xy primer sha ll be used to better

results of pipekote.

M-p33d Silvershield:

It shall be from STP limited or equivalent, as approved by the consultants.

It sha ll be a bituminous aluminium- finish paint formu lated for application over anti-corrosive paints. It shall have a covering capacity of 10 m

2/liter.



Page 283 of 430

M-p33e Shalimastic hd:

It shall be fro m STP limite d or equivale nt, as appr oved by the consultants . It shall comply with the standards of the us dept. Of interior bureau of reclamation specification ca-50.

It shall be a viscous, heavy-duty, anti-corrosive waterproof coal tar paint and offer resistance to acids and alkalis. It shall be used for the protection of all types of iron and steel structures.

M-p34 Co-extruded polyethylene composite pressure pipe and approved brass fittings:

Co-extruded polyethylene composite pressure pipe shall conform to ASTM f:1282-95, specifications having welded aluminum tube reinforcement between inner and outer polyethylene layers being bonded to aluminum tube by a melt adhesive with welded aluminum tube of itself being capable of sustaining internal pressures. It shall be from reputed manufactures like kitec or equivalent, as approved by the consultants.

Nominal pipe size

Mm

Id:od

Equivalent

Nb size

Inch

Total wall thickness mm

12:16

16:20

20:25

25:32

½

¾

1

1 ¼

Minimum Maximum

1.75

2.00

2.45

2.80

2.00

2.25

2.70

3.20

M-p35 Expanded polystyrene or framed styroper slabs:

The expande d polystyrene ceiling boards and tiles shall be of appr oved make and shall be of sizes, thickne ss, fin ish and colour, as indica ted. The y shall be of high density, suitable for insulating application like thermoplastic slabs.



Page 284 of 430

ITEM SPECIFICATION – CIVIL

EARTH WORK

1.0 General :

1.1 Any soil whic h generally yields to the applicati on of pickaxes and shovels, phaw aras, rakes or any such

ordinary excava ting implement or organic soil, gravel, silt, sand turf loam, clay, peat etc . falls under this category. For materials a nd workman ship for earthwork and e xcavation, relevant specifications of IS 1200 (Part I) and IS: 3764 shall be followed.

2.0 Clearing the Site :

2.1 The site on which the structure is to be built shall b e clea red an d all obstru ctions, loo se stones, materials and rub bish of all kin d, bu sh, wood a nd all type tree s shall b e remo ved, as directed. The materials so obtai ned shall be the p roperty of the Client an d shall be conveyed and stacked as directed, within 100-m. lead. The roots of the trees coming in the sides of the trenches shall be cut and coated with hot asphalt.

2.2 All types of trees, woods etc. which requires pr ior p ermission of Govt./Fo rest Authority, before

cutting shall be cut after obtaining s uch permission from the m. It shall b e the Contractor's responsibility to obtain such permission from the respective authorities.

2.3 The rate of site clearance is deemed to be included in the rate of ea rthwork, for which no extra will be

paid.

3.0 Setting out :

3.1 After cleaning the site , the centerlines will be g iven by the Consulta nt and Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall assume fu ll re sponsibility for alignme nt, e levation and dimensio n of each an d all parts of the work. Contractor shall su pply labours, materia ls, e tc. required for settin g ou t the reference marks and bench marks and shall maintain them as long as required and directed.

4.0 Excavation :

4.1 The excavation in the foundation shall b e carried out i n true line and level and shall have the width and

depth, as shown in the drawings or as directed. The Contractor shall do the necessary sh oring and strutting or shall provide necessary slopes to a safe angle or steps, as required or directed, at his own cost. No extra payment shall be made for such precautionary measures, taken. The bottom of the excavated area shall be leveled both longitudinally and transversely, as directed, by removing excess soil and watering, as required. No earth fi lling will be al lowed for bringi ng it to le vel, if b y mistake or any other reason, excavation is made deeper or wider than shown on the drawings or as directed. The extra depth or width shall be made up with concrete of the same proportion, as specified for the foundation concrete, at the cost of th e Contractor. The excavation depth as per item no 1.1.1 to 1.1.6 shall be measured under this item.

4.2 The Contractor shall at hi s own expense and without extra ch arge make provision of supp orting all

utility service s, lighting the trench es, sep arating and sta cking servi ceable material s ne atly, shoring, timb ering, st rutting, bailing out water eithe r sub-soil o r rainwater, incl uding p umping at any stage of the work. Tre nches shall be kept free of water whil e masonry or concrete works are

in prog ress and till th e Consultant a nd Engi neer-in-charge co nsiders it n ecessary, i.e. till the concrete is sufficiently set.

4.3 The rates for excavation items shall include for clearing of site, surface dressing, making layout of

building, fixin g pe rmanent grid points with MS a ngle iro n po sts and e mbedding them i n C.C. 1:2:4, placed sufficiently away from the building lines, establishing bench marks etc. complete.



Page 285 of 430

5.0 Disposal of the Excavated Stuff : 5.1 The excavate d stuff of the selected type shall be used in filling the trenches and plinth or leve ling the

ground in layers, including ramming and watering etc. complete. 5.2 The Contractor shall remo ve the b alance of the excavated q uantity from the site of wo rk, to a place,

as directed, within a lead up to 100 m. and for all lift.

6.0 Mode of Measurement and Payment : 6.1 The mea surement of excavation in t renches for f oundation sh all be mad e according t o the

sections of trenches shown on the drawing or as per sections given by the Consultant and Engineer-in-charge. No payment shall be made for surplus excavation made in excess of above requirements or due to ste pping and sloping back as found necessary, on acco unt of conditi ons of soil and requirements of safety.

6.2 The rate shall include for clearing the site, surf ace dr essing, makin g la yout of th e build ing, fixin g

permanent gr id poin ts with MS iron posts, embedded in C.C . 1 :2:4, placed su fficiently away from the building and establishing bench marks etc.

6.3 The rates shall include for necessary shoring, timbering and strutting for pr otection of sides of th e

excavated trenches and pits, pumping out rain or surface water at any stage of construction so as to keep the trenches/pits dry, to the satisfaction of the Consultant /Engineer-in-charge.

6.4 The rate shall include le veling and ramming the bottoms of exca vations to receive concrete , etc.

including trimming to slope wherever necessary etc. complete.

6.5 In filling and refilling, clo ds bigger than 50 mm. shall not be allowed. Only consolidated measurements of filli ng shall be paid. Consolidat ion to be done by mechanical compactor as per item no. 1.2.0.

6.6 The rate shall be for a unit of one m3.

1.1.1 Excavation for foundation up to 1.5 m. depth, including sorting out and stacking of useful

materials, disposing of the excavated stuff up to 100 m. lead in any type of soil (excluding hard rocks), including refilling as per item no. 1.2.1 the trenches etc. complete, as directed.

The relevant specifications of item no. 1.1.0 shall be followed except that the depth of excavation will be up to 2.5 m. The excavation work up to 2.50 m shall be measured and paid under this item.

1.1.2 Excavation for foundation for a depth of 1.5 to 3.0 m., including sorting out and stacking of useful materials, disposing of the excavated stuff up to 100 m. lead, in any type of soil (excluding hard rocks) including refilling the trenches as per item no. 1.2.1 etc. complete, as directed.

The relevant specifications of item no. 1.1.0 shall be followed except that the depth of excavation will be from 2.5 to 5.0 m. The excavation work from 2.5 m. to 5.0 m. shall be measured and paid under this item.

1.1.3 Excavation for foundation for a depth of 3.0 to 4.5 m., including sorting out and stacking of useful materials, disposing of the excavated stuff up to 100 m. lead, in any type of soil (excluding hard rocks) including refilling the trenches as per item no. 1.2.1 etc. complete, as directed.

The relevant specifications of it em no . 1.1.0 shall be followed exce pt tha t the de pth of exca vation will be from 5.0 to 7.5 m . The excavation work from 5.0 m. to 7.50 m. shall be measured and paid under this item.

1.2.1 Filling with available excavated earth (excluding rock), in plinth & general development in layers

not exceeding 15 cm. in depth, including consolidating each deposited layer by mechanical compactor and watering etc. complete as directed.

1.0 Workmanship :

1.1 The earth to be used for filling shall be free from salts, organic or other foreign matter. All clo ds of earth

shall be broken to a size not bigger than 50 mm.



Page 286 of 430

1.2 As soon as the work in foundation has been completed and measured, the sides of foundation shall be

cleared of all debris, bric k bats, mortar dropping etc. and filled with earth in la yers not exceeding 15 cm. Each layer shall be adequately watered , r ammed well and consolidated before the succeeding la yer is laid. Th e earth shall be ramm ed with mechanica l rammer of different capacity as per site condition.

1.3 The plinth shall be simi larly filled with earth in layers not exceeding 15 cm. adeq uately watered and

consolidated by ramming with iron rammers. When filling reaches finished level, the surface shall be flooded with water for atleast 24 hours and allowed to dry and then rammed and consolidated.

1.4 The finished level of filling shall be kept to shape and gradient, intended to receive any floor finish.

1.5 In case of lar ge heavy du ty flooring like factor y flooring, the consolidation ma y be done by p ower

rollers, where so specified or as directed. The e xtent of consolid ation require d shall also be as specified or as directed.

1.6 The excavated stuff of the selected type only shall be allowed to be used for filling the trenches and

plinths. Under no circumstances, black cotton soil shall be used for filling the plinths.

2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment :

2.1 The payment shall be ma de for filling in plin th and sides of foundations. No deductions shall b e made for shrinkage or voids, if considered as in structed above. On ly cons olidated measurements shall be paid.

2.2 The rate includes the cost of mechanical compaction by compactors.


1.3.1 Filling, in foundations and plinths & general development with murrum or selected soil

obtained from outside (Contractor's earth) in layers of 15 cm. thickness, including watering, ramming well and consolidating etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Materials :

1.1 Murrum or selected ear th brought from outside shall be clean, of good bin ding quality and of

approved quality obtained from approved pots /quarries of disintegrated rocks which contain silicones materials and natural mi xture of clay of ca lcareous origin. The size of m urrum shall not be more than 20 mm. and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge, before use. It shall conform to M-64.

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 The relevan t specifications of item n o. 1 .2.1 shall be followed exce pt that the murrum or selecte d soil shall be filled in founda tions and plinths in 15 cm. layers, including consolidating, ramming well, watering, dressing etc., complete.


3.1 The relevant specifications of item no. 1.2.1 shall be followed.

3.2 The rate includes cost of collecting and carting murrum or selected earth of approved quality with all lead,

lift and labour required for filling in foundations and plinth.

3.3 The rate shall be for n unit of one m3.

1.4.1 Filling, in foundation and plinth (under floors), with good quality sand, obtained from

outside, including watering, ramming well, consolidating and dressing etc. complete, as directed.



Page 287 of 430

1 Materials: Sand shall conform to M-6

2 Workmanship :

2.1 The relevant specification of item no.1.2.1 shall be followed except that sand shall be filled in foundations and in plinth, under floors, including watering, ramming well, consolidating and dressing etc., complete.

3 Mode of Measurements and Payment :

3.1. The relevant specification of item no. 1.2.1 shall be followed.

3.2. The rate includes cost of collecting , carting good quality sand, with all lead, lift an d labour for filling the

same in foundations and in plinth, mechanical compaction.

3.3. The rate shall be for a unit of one m3.

1.5.0 Providing and laying rubble soling in a compact manner, in plinth and for plinth protection, using

suitable cut size stones 150 to 230 mm, as per the thk. of soling, covering and leveling the surface with a layer of murrum after filling the voids with smaller size of stone/metals or stone chips, including watering, ramming well and consolidating each layer.

1.0 Materials :

1.1 Stone and stone chips sh all conform to M-16 and Murrum brought from outside shall be clean, of good

binding quality, and of approved quality obtained from approved pots/quarries of disintegrated rocks which contain silicones materi als and natural mixture of clay of calcareous origin. The size of murrum shall not be more than 20 mm. and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. It s hall conform to M-64.

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 The relevant specification of item no. 1 .2.1 shall be followed e xcept tha t first la yer of stone , o f average size 150 to 230 mm. shall be laid in plin th an d for plin th pr otection. Ther eafter, the voids between the stones laid in the first layer shall be filled by hand packing the stones of smaller size or stone chips of the same stones, as directed. The vo ids shall be filled with smaller sized of stones. The layers then shall be rammed well and consolidated.

2.2 The surface o f the stone layer then shall be cover ed and leveled with a la yer of murrum. This s hall then be wate red and well consolidated using power driven rammers or rollers, as directed . The consolidated thickness of the above layers, totally, should be average 15/23/30 cm. thick.


3.1 The relevant specification of item no. 1.2.1 shall be followed.

3.2 The rate includes the cost of collecting, carting stones and murrum, with all leads, lifts and labour for

laying, hand packing and consolidating the same in plinth.

3.3 The rate shall be for a unit of one m2

1.5.2 Do- as above for 230 thk rubble soling

The relevant specifications of item no. 1.6.0 shall be followed except that the thickness of rubble soling will be from 230 thk.

1.6.1 Disposing of the surplus excavated earth and/or debris etc. including loading at site, transporting & disposal, unloading, spreading and dressing etc. complete, as directed beyond the initial lead of 100 m. to 500 m.



Page 288 of 430

1.0 Workmanship :

1.1 The surplus e xcavated earth shall be disposed off as and when directed by the Engineer-in-charge and

the C onsultant within 500 m. lead. The site to w hich the e xcavated earth s hould be disp osed off shall be sp ecified by the Engineer-in-charge. The disposal of the stuff includes loading the e arth in vehicle , conveyance to the specified site, unloading and spread ing the same. The Contra ctor should contact the Engineer-in-charge be fore disposing the material, i.e. when the trucks are bei ng loaded for dis posal. Every time the truck is loaded, the Engineer-in-charge shall check whether it is loaded properly to the pre- decided leve l and then note its number in the register used to keep the record of the trips made by the same truck.


2.1 The work shall be measured as 75% of the quantity, in m 3, loaded in a single tru ck. The total no. of trucks

shall be taken from the register and the quantity shall thus be calculated. The total measurement shall be in m

3.

2.2 The rate includes for sprea ding, dressing etc. co mplete, at the specified site and shall be for a unit of one

m3.

1.7.1 Carrying out pre anti termite treatment with anti termite chemicals like aldrin, heptachlor,

chlorophyriphos 20 EC in three parts i.e. at foundation level, at plinth level and at periphery of the building as per IS : 6313 (Part I - III)-1981, 1st revision, as directed.

1.0 Materials :

The chemicals used for the soil treatment shall be only one of the following, with concentration shown against each, in aqueous emulsion.

Chemical Concentration: 1. Aldrin or Termex or equivalent 0.50% (by weight)

2. Heptachlor 0.50% ( " " )

3. Chlordane 1.00% ( " " )

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 The chemical barrier shall be complete and continuous under whole of the structure to be protected.

2.2 The bottom a nd the sides of founda tion up to a height of 30 cm. from the bo ttom of excava tion made

for masonry founda tion and for basement, and also for plinth level be fore floor concrete shall be treated

with the chemical emulsion at the rate of 5.0 liters/m2 20 EC

of the surface area. Periphery treatment before plinth protection at the rate of 7.5 lit chemical emulsion 20 EC per meter length as per IS code or PCI standards.

2.3 The chemical treatment shall be carried out when the surface is quite dry. Chemical treatmen t shall not be

carried out when it is raining or when the soil is wet with rain water or sub soil water.

2.4 Once formed, treated soil barriers shall be not disturbed. If dis turbed, immedia te steps shall be taken to restore the continuity and compactness of the barrier system.

2.5 The trea tment agains t termite in fection shall re main effective for a period no t less than 10 years, from

date o f issue of the final cert ificate of completion of work. If at any time during this period , any defects in treatment are revealed or any evidence of infection in any part of the building or structure is noticed, the Contractor shall rectify the concerned defects within 15 days on receipt of notice from Engineer-in-charge. On Contractor's failure to do so, the Eng ineer-in-charge may get the same rectified through any other agency at the Contractor's risk and cost, and the decision of C onsultant or Engineer-in-charge as t o the cost payable b y the Contractor fo r the same shall be fina l and binding



Page 289 of 430

to the Contractor.

2.6 A guarantee bond on Twenty Rupee stamp paper shall be gi ven by the Con tractor to the Client, in the manner form described below :

2.7 Reconciliation of chemicals brought on s ite and treated area shall be submitted on completio n of job.

FORM OF GUARANTEE BOND

"I/We ......................(Contractor) hereby guarantee that work will remain unaffected and will not be in any way dam aged by term ite or any o ther germs of similar types, for a period of 10 years a fter completion o f the work of anti-termite, as per the te rms and conditions o f the contract and the Contractor he reby inde mnifies and agre es to sa ve the Clien t from any loss an d or damage tha t might be caused on account o f termite and or other similar type of germs and hereby guarantees to make good any loss or damages suffer ed by the C lient and furth er guarantees to redo the affected work without claiming any extra cost."

2.8 This guarantee shall remain force for the period of 10 years, from th e completion of the work u nder the

contract and it shall remain binding to the Contractor for period of 10 years.

2.9 The deposit at th e rate o f 50% o f the cost of this item from the running and final bills shall be recovered and retained for the first one year after virtual completion of the work.


3.1 The plan are a shall be measured and paid. No deduction shall b e made nor extra pa id for any

opening for p ipes, etc ., up to 0.1 m 2.

T he rate shall include the c ost of all lab our and mate rials required for the operation involved for satisfactory completion of this item.


1.8.0 Supplying the following : -

1.8.1 JCb excavator including operator and all consumable

1.8.2 Tractor trip including all labour for loading /unloading, spreading, driver & all Consumable.



Page 290 of 430

PCC AND RCC WORK

2.1.0 Providing and laying CC (cement Concrete) and curing etc. complete, excluding the cost of formwork in foundations and plinth.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Sand to M-6. Cement to M-3. Stone aggregate 40 mm.

nominal size to M-12.

1.0 Workmanship :

1.0 General: Before commencing concretin g, the bed o f foundation / trenches / Plin th shall be cleared off of all loose materials, leveled, watered and rammed, as directed.

2.0 Proportion of mix: The proportion o f cement, sa nd and coarse aggregate shall be as per

proportion and shall be so measured by volume.

3.0 Mixing: The concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer at the site of work. Hand mixing, may however be allowed for smaller quantity of work, if approved by the consultant and Engineer-in- charge. When hand mixing is permitted by the Arch itect and Engineer in-charge, in case of break down of machinery and in the interest of the work, it shall be carried out on a water tight platform and care shall be ta ken to ensure that t he mixing is continued until the ma ss is uniform in colour and consistency. However in such cases, 10% more cement than otherwise req uired, shall have to be used wi thout any extra co st. The mixing in mechanical mixer shall be done for a period 1.5 to 2 minutes. The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of required workability for the purpose.

4.0 Transporting & placing the concrete

1.4 The concrete shall be handled from the place of mixing to the final position within 15 minutes by the

method, as d irected and shall be place d in to its final position, compacted and fin ished within 30 minutes of mixing with water i.e. before the setting commences.

1.5 The concrete shall be laid in layers of not exceeding 20 cm in thickness.

5.0 Compacting: The concrete shall be rammed with h eavy iron rammers and rapidly to ge t the

required compaction and to allow all the interstices to be filled with mortar.

6.0 Curing: After the final set, the concrete shall be kept continuously wet, if required by ponding, for a period of not less than 7 days from the date of placement.


4.0

The concrete shall be measured for its length specified on plan or as directed.

, breadth and depth, limiting

dimensions to those


2.1.2 Providing and laying CC 1:4:8 (1 cement: 4 coarse sand: 8 graded stone aggregate 40 mm. nominal size) and curing etc. complete, in foundations and plinth.

1.0 Materials: As per item no. 2.1.0.

2.0 Workmanship: Relevant specifications of item no . 2.1.0 shall be followed e xcept that CC shall b e mixed

in the proportion of 1:4:8 instead of 1:3:6 by volume.



Page 291 of 430

3.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment : Relevant specifications of item no. 2.1.0 shall be followed

2.2.0 Providing and laying machine mixed and machine vibrated controlled CC grade for RCC work

as per the drawing, at all floors, heights, locations and shapes & sizes for all structures, footing, slabs, beams, columns, lintels, coping, arches, sloping-curved roof, staircase, landing, Machine Foundation ,Cable Trench etc, and curing, etc. complete. The item shall exclude the cost of formwork & reinforcement.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement to M-3. Sand to M-6. Grit to M-8. Coarse aggregate

M-13.

2.0 General :

2.1 The relevan t specifications of item no. 2 .1.0 o f ordina ry concrete shall be fo llowed except that the concrete mix shall be desig ned from preliminary tests the proportioning of cemen t and aggregates shall be done by weight an d necessary precautions shall be taken in the production to ensure that the required work cube st rength is atta ined and ma intained. The controlled concrete shall be in grades of M-200, M-250, M-300, M-350 & M-400, with prefix controlled added to it. The lette r "M" refers to mix and numbers specify 28 da ys works cub e compressive strength of 150 mm. cub es of the mix expressed in Kg/cm

2.

2.2 The proportion of cement, sand and coa rse aggregates shall be determined by w eight. The weight batch

machine shall be used for maintaining proper control over the proportion of aggregates as per mix design. The strength requirements of different grades of concrete shall be as under : -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Grade

of Compressive strength of 15 cm. cubes in Kg/cm2.

Concrete

28 days conducted in accordance with IS : 516-1959.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Preliminary test Work test min.

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- M-20

260 200

M-25 320 250

M-30 380 300

M-35 440 350

M-40 500 400

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

In all cases, the 28 da ys compressive strength s pecified in a bove table b e the criteria for acceptance or rejection of the concrete.

2.3 Where the strength of a co ncrete mix as indicated b y tests, lies in b etween the strength of an y two grades specified in the above table, such concrete shall be classified in for all purposes as concrete belonging to the lower of the two grades between which its strength lies.

2.4 To secure go od exposed and normal concrete surf ace necessary care in formwork and concrete shall

be take n. For an y sub-standard results of e xposed and normal surface concrete formwork and steel shall be treated as one item even though they are two separate items in bills of quantities.



Page 292 of 430

MIX MINIMUM CEMENT/Cum. MIX MINIMUM EMEN

M-7.5 170 Kg. M-25 360 Kg.

M-10 210 Kg. M-30 420 Kg.

M-20 325 Kg. M-35 460 Kg.

2.5 The Contractor shall take necessary care to avoid sand streaks, air holes, honey combining etc., on finished concrete surface.

3.0 Workmanship :

3.1 The proportio ns for ingredients chosen shall be such that concrete has adequate workability fo r

conditions prevailing on the work in question and c an be properly compacted with means available except where it can be shown to the satisfac tion o f the Architect and Engineer -in-charge that the supply of properly graded aggregate of uniform quality can be maintained till the completion of work. Grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtain ing the coarse ag gregate, in different sizes and blending the m in the right proportions as required. Aggregate of differen t sizes shall be stocked in separate stock piles. The required quantity of mater ial shall be stock piled several hours, preferably a day before use. The grading of coarse and find aggregate shall be checked as frequently as possible, the frequency for a given job being deter mined by the Architect and En gineer-in-charge to ensure that th e suppliers are maintain ing the uniform grading, as approved for samples used in the preliminary tests.

3.2 In proportion ing concrete, the quantity of both cement and aggregate shall be determin ed by weight.

Where the weigh t of cemen t is determined b y accepting the maker's weight per bag a reasonable number of bags shall be weighed separately, to check the net weight, where cement is weighed from bulk stocks at site and not by bags. It shall be weighed separately from the aggregates. Water shall either be measured by vo lume in c alibrated tanks or weighed. All measuring equipment shall be main tained in clean and serviceable condition . Their accuracy shall be periodically checked and calibrated in standard laboratory.

3.3 It is most imp ortant to kee p the specifie d water cement ratio constant and at its correct value . To this

end, moisture content in both fine a nd coarse aggregates shall be de termined by the Architect and Engineer -in-charge, according to the weather conditions . Th e amount of mixing water shall then be adjusted to compensate for va riations in the moisture content. For th e determination of moisture content in the ag gregates, IS : 2386 (Par t III) shall be referred to. Suitable adjustments shall also be made in the weights of aggregates due to variation in their moisture content.

3.4 The minimum cement content for the various mix es s hall be as un der. Cement shall be Ordinary

Portland Cement only.

T/Cum.

3.5 All RCC works shall be ca rried out as per the de tailed drawings and direction of Architects and

Engineer-in-charge.


4.1 The relevant specifications item no. 2.1.0 shall be followed ex cept that the controlled concrete RCC work for work as specified in item shall be m easured under this item. The rate excludes co st of formwork and reinforcement and is for any cross sectional area of the members specified in the



Page 293 of 430

item. Minimum cement content 325 kg/m3


2.2.1 Do-as-above for CC M-20

1.0 Materials & Workmanship: The relevant specifica tions of item no. 2.2.0 shall be followed e xcept that the grading of concrete shall be controlled conc rete M-20 gra de, for the w ork as specified in item. Minimum content :- 1) cement -260 kg/m3. 2) Fly ash 65 kg/m3.

2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment:

2.1 The relevant specifications of item no.2.2.0 shall be followed and rate excludes the cost of formwork and is

for any cross sectional area of the members, at any floor, height, level and in any position.



1.0 Materials and Workmanship: The relevant specifications of item no. 2.2.0 shall be followed except that

the grading of concrete shall be co ntrolled concrete M-25 grades for the works a s specified in the item. Minimum content :- 1) cement -290 kg/m3. 2) Fly ash 70 kg/m3.


2.1 The relevant specifications of item no. 2.2.0 shall be followed. The rate shall be for a unit of one m3.


1.0 Materials and Workmanship: The relevant specifications of item no. 2.2.0 shall be followed except that

the grading of concrete shall be co ntrolled concrete M-25 grades for the works a s specified in the item. Minimum content :- 1) cement -340 kg/m3. 2) Fly ash 80 kg/m3.


2.1 The relevant specifications of item no. 2.2.0 shall be followed. The rate shall be for a unit of one m3.

2.2.4 CC M-20 :- Do as above but with ready mix concrete (RMC)



2.3.0 Extra for providing and mixing chemical additives & admixtures, as approved by the Consultant & Engineer-in-charge, as per the specifications stipulated by the manufacturer. (The make and its technical specifications must be specified herein.)

1.0 Materials: The additives and admixtur e materials s hall be as per the manufa cturer's standards.

They shall conform to M-67.



Page 294 of 430

2.0 Workmanship: The additives and admixtures used for differe nt purpose shall be as spe cified by manufacturer.

1.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: The rate shall be for a unit of one Kg.

2.3.1 Concrete adhesives for old & new concrete joint.

2.3.2 Concrete Water proofing additives

2.3.3 Concrete Plasticizer

2.3.4 Concrete Rapid hardening additives.

2.3.5 Concrete Curing compound.

2.3.6 Non shrink grouting

2.3.7 None shrink grouting material for pocket of foundation bolts & under base plate.

1.0 Materials: The additives and admixtur e materials s hall be as per the manufa cturer's standards. They shall conform to M-67.

2.0 Workmanship: The additives and admixtures used for differe nt purpose shall be as spe cified by manufacturer.

1.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: The rate shall be for a unit of one m3.

2.4.0 Charges for making holes in RCC beam/slab with diamond core cutter.

1.0 Workmanship: The work shall be carried out in true line and level and shall have the dia, as shown in the drawin gs or as directed. The Contractor shall at his own expense and without extra charge make provision of supporting all ut ility services. If th ere is any damage to the adjoining pro perty, injury to workers etc. due to the neglige nce of the Contractor, he will be responsible and liable to all the consequences, including compensation.


2.1 The rate shall be for a unit of rmt

2.4.1 100 mm dia

2.4.2 101.0 mm dia to 200mm dia



Page 295 of 430

2.4.3 201 mm to 300 mm dia

2.5.0 Drilling And fixing reinforcement dowel of following diameter by using chemical grout of HILTI-HY 150or equivalent. Fixing shall be carried out though authorized applicator of the company, and as per supplier specification.

1.0 Workmanship & Mode of Measurements and Payment: The relevant specifications o f item no.

2.5.0 shall be followed exc ept tha t the Chemical used for grout purpose shall be as specified by manufacturer. The rate shall be for a unit of per no.

2.5.1 8mm dia

2.5.2 10mm dia

2.5.3 12mm dia

2.5.4 16mm dia

2.5.5 20mm dia

2.6.0 Providing and fixing in expansion joints, Capcell HD 100, of specified thick Supreme or equivalent ( Polyethylene foam filler) of the best quality, including cutting to required size and shape, at all levels as per suppliers specifications, etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Materials & workmanship: The work shall be carri ed out in good workmanshi p. The rate shall be for a unit of sqm.

2.6.1 Do-as-above for 25 mm thk Supreme or equivalent ( Polyethylene foam filler)

1.0 The relevant specification of item no 2.6.0 shall be followed except that the 25 mm thk supreme or equivalent (Polyethylene foam filler) shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of sqm.

2.6.2 Do-as-above for 50 mm thk Supreme or equivalent ( Polyethylene foam filler)

1.0 The relevant specification of item no 2.6.0 shall be followed except that the 50 mm thk supreme or

equivalent (Polyethylene foam filler) shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of sqm.

2.7.0 Providing ,Laying & filling the expansion joints of specified size with polysulphide sealant as per supplier's specifications including cleaning, scraping the joints, filling with necessary back up PU rod of supreme or equivalent, repairing the broken edges with polymer mortar(PLASTER) /epoxy mortar(RCC)& abro tap to line level complete as directed.

1.0 The relevant specification are as per item no 2.6.0 the shall be for a unit of rmt

2.7.1 Do-as-above for 10 x 25 mm with polysulphide sealant.

1.0 The relevant specification are as per item no 2.6.0 the shall be for a unit of rmt

2.7.2 Do-as-above for 15 x 50 mm with polysulphide sealant.



Page 296 of 430

1.0 The relevant specification are as per item no 2.6.0 the shall be for a unit of rmt. CENTERING & FORMWORK

3.1.0 Providing formwork of ordinary timber planking, shuttering plywood and/or steel plates so as to give rough finish, including centering, shuttering, strutting and propping, etc. complete, at (0 to 6, 6 to 12, 12 to 18,18 to 24 & 24 to 32m height) and removal of the same for in-situ reinforced concrete and plain concrete work, in foundations, footings, bases of columns, retaining walls, columns, beams, flat slab, stair, lintel, chajjas, Machine Foundation water retaining structure etc. and mass concrete.

1.0 Materials:

1.1 The shutteri ng to b e p rovided shall be of o rdinary timber plan ks shall conform to M- 2 6A.

Shuttering plywood shall conform to M-26B. 1.2 The dimensions of scantling and battens shall conform to the design. The strength of the wood shall

not be less than that assumed in the design 2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as shown on the drawings and shall be so constructed so as to remain suffi ciently rigid and water -tight, during the placement and compaction of the con crete. Adequ ate arr angement shall be made by the Contractor to safe guard against any se ttlement o f th e form work during the course of concreting and afte r concreting. The formwork of shuttering, centering, scaffolding, bracing, etc. shall be as per the design. False staging should be erected with Acro-props or H frames only.

2.2 Cleaning & Treatment of Forms : All rubbish, particularly chipping, shaving and saw dus t shall be remo ved from the interior o f the form before the concrete is placed and the form work in contact with concrete shall be cleaned and thoroughly wetted or treated. The surface shall be coated with soap solution, applied before concreting is done. Soap solution for the oil or from oil of approved manufacture may be applied, incase st eel shuttering is used. Care shall be taken that the coating is not applied on the construction joints surface and steel reinforcement bars.

2.3 Stripping Time: In normal circumstances and whe re ordi nary Portland cement is used, form work

may be struck after expiry of the following periods:

(a) Sides of walls columns and vertical faces of beams 24 to 48 hours. (b)

Beam soffits (Props left under) 7 days. (c)

Removal of props for slabs - (i) Slabs spanning upto 4.5 m. 7 days. (ii)

Slabs spanning over 4.5 m. 14 days.

(d) Removal of props to beams and Arches - (i) Spanning upto 6 m. 14 days. (ii)

Spanning over 6 m. 21 Days.

2.4 Procedure while removing the form work : All form work shall be removed without suc h shocks or v ibrations as would damage the reinf orced concret e surf ace. Before the sof fit form work and struts are removed, the soffits and the concrete surface shall be exposed where necessary, in order to ascertain that the concrete has sufficiently hardened.

2.5 Centering :



Page 297 of 430

2.5.1 The centerin g to be pro vided shall be got appr oved. It shall be sufficiently s trong to ensure absolute safety of the form work and concrete work before, during and after pouring concrete till it achieved full strength. Watch should be kept to see that behavior of centering a nd form work is satisfactor y during concreting . Erectio n shoul d also be such that it would allo w removal of forms in proper sequence without damaging either the concrete or the forms to be removed.

2.5.2 The props of centering shall be provide d on firm fou ndation or base of sufficie nt strength to carry the loads, without any settlement.

2.5.3 The centerin g and form work shall be in spected and approve d by the En gineer-in-charge, before

concreting . Bu t th is will not reli eve the Contractor of his responsibility for strength , adequacy and safety of form work and centering . If there is a failure of form work or centering , the Contracto r shall be responsible for the damages to the work, injury to life a nd damage to property.

2.6 Scaffolding:

2.6.1 All scaffold ing, hois ting ar rangements and ladders, etc. required fo r facilitating of concretin g shall

be provided and removed on completion work by Contractor , at his own expense. The scaffolding, hoisting arrangement, ladders etc. shall be strong enough to withstand all live, dead and impact loads expected to act and shall be subj ect to the approval of the Architect an d Engineer-in-charge. However, Con tractor shall be solely respon sible for the safety o f th e scaffolding, hoisting arrangement, ladders, work and workmen, etc.

2.6.2 The scaffolding, hoisting arrangements a nd ladders shall a llow easy approach to the work spo t and

afford easy inspection. 2.7 Reuse: Befo re re-use, all forms shall be inspecte d by the En gineer-in-charge and their

suitability sha ll be ascertained. If, an y o f the forms are found to b e unsuitable , they shall be immediately removed from the site. The forms ascertained for re-use, shall be scarred, cleaned, and joints gone over and repaired, wher ever required. The inside surface shall b e retreated to prevent adhesion to concrete.


3.1 Form work shall be measur ed as an area in m

2. of shuttering in contact with concrete except in the

case of inclined members and portion o f curv ed pro-files, in which case, only area of underside shall be measured for payment.

3.2 Form work to secondary beams shall be measured upto the sid es of main b eams but no

deduction shall be made from the form work of t he main beam at the inner section point. No deduction shall be made from the form work of a column at inner section of beams.

3.3 The rate is applicable to all conditions of working and height up to 6.0 m.. The rate shall includ e the

cost of materials, its tr ansportation at si te and labour for vario us operations involved suc h as :

(a) Spla yed edges, no tching, allowanc e for o verlaps and passing at angles , ba ttens centering, sh uttering, stru tting, proppin g, bolting, na iling, wedgin g, easing, str iking and removal.

(b) Filleting to form stop chamfered edges or splayed external a ngles not exceeding 20 mm. width to beams, columns and the like.

(c) Temporary opening in the forms for pouring concrete.

(d) Scarring, removal o f ru bbish, dressing with o il to prevent adh esion of con crete with



Page 298 of 430

shuttering,

(e) Raking or circular cutting.

(f) Making necessary grooves, gissis, Architectural cut-outs, pockets and drip moulds. The

rate is for the completed item.

3.4 The rate shall be for an unit of one m2.

3.1.1 Do-as- above but height of propping and centering below supporting floor to celling not

exceeding 6.0m

The relevant specifications of item no. 3.1.0 shall be followed.

3.1.2 Extra over item no 3.1.1 for further additional height of propping and centering by steel H frames only where the height of propping and centering exceeds 6.0 m. between supporting floor to ceiling, including temporary masonry work/stone pillars for supporting as required. (Height more than 6.0 m. and up to 12.0 m.)

1.0 Material and Workmanship: The rele vant specifica tion o f item n o. 3.1 .0 shall be followed except that the height of propping and centering between supporting floor to ceiling exceeds 6.0 m. upto 12.0 m.


2.1 The paymen t shall be ma de for the false staging work. This will be paid onl y if there is no

slab/platform in between a nd extra s taging is necessary. Extra o ver and above the payment made

for form work of slab in relevant items. The work of false staging shall be measured is m2.

The relevan t specification of item no . 3 .1.0 s hall be followed. The rate include s the cost o f providing stone or masonry temporary pillars for supporting, as required without any extra cost.


3.1.3 Extra over item no 3.1.1 for further additional height of propping and centering by steel H frames only where the height of propping and centering exceeds 12.0 m. between supporting floor to ceiling, including temporary masonry work/stone pillars for supporting as required. (Height more than 12.0 m. and up to 18.0 m.)

The relevant specification of item no . 3.1 .0 shall be followed ex cept that the heigh t of propping and centering between supporting floor to ceiling exceeds 12.0 m. up to 18.0 m.

3.1.4 Extra over item no 3.1.1 for further additional height of propping and centering by steel H

frames only where the height of propping and centering exceeds 18.0 m. between supporting floor to ceiling, including temporary masonry work/stone pillars for supporting as required. (Height more than 18.0 m. and up to 24.0 m.)

The relevant specification of item no . 3.1.0 shall be followed ex cept that the height of propping and centering between supporting floor to ceiling exceeds 18.0 m. up to 24.0 m.

3.1.5 Extra over item no 3.1.1 for further additional height of propping and centering by steel H

frames only where the height of propping and centering exceeds 24.0 m. between supporting floor to ceiling, including temporary masonry work/stone pillars for supporting as required. (Height more than 24.0 m. and up to 32.0 m.)



Page 299 of 430

The relevant specification of item no . 3.1 .0 shall be followed ex cept that the heigh t of propping and centering between supporting floor to ceiling exceeds 24.0 m. up to 32.0 m.

REINFORCEMENT

4.1.1 Supplying and fixing in position TMT FE - 415 grade steel reinforcement for RCC structures as per design including transporting steel to the work site, handling, cutting, bending and binding with wires, welding if necessary etc. for all floors/levels complete as directed by Engineer. Measurement will be made on the length basis and converted into weight by using standard IS co-efficient (rolling margin's and wastage will not be paid). The rate shall be inclusive of PVC cover or Chairs, spacers, separators and binding wire-1 mm thick.

1.0 Materials: TMT Bar shall conform to M-19B. Mild steel binding wires to M-21.

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 The work sh all consist of furnishing an d plac ing reinforcement to the shape and dimensions, as

shown on the drawings or as directed.

2.2 Steel shall b e clean and free from rust and loos e mill scale, at the time o f fixing in position and subsequent concreting.

2.3 Reinforcing steel shall conform accurately to the dime nsions given in the relevan t drawings. Bars shall

be bent cold to specified shape a nd dimens ions or as directed using a proper bar bender, operated by h and or power to atta in proper radius of bends. Bars shall not be ben t or straighten ed in a manner that will inju re the material. Ba rs bent during transportation or handling shall be straightened before being used on the work. They shall no t be h eated to facilitate bending . The radius of the bend shall no t be less tha n twice the d iameter o f th e round bar and the leng th o f straight part of the bar be yond the end of the curv e shall be a t least 4 times the diame ter of the round bar. In case of bars which are not round and in case of defor med bars, the diameter sha ll be taken as the diameter of circle having an equivalent effective area.

2.4 All the reinfor cement bars shall be accu rately placed in exact position shown on the drawings and shall

be securely held in po sition during placing of concrete by anne aled binding wire not less than 1 mm. in size and by using stay blocks or meta l chair spacers, metal hangers, s upporting wires or other approved devices at sufficien tly close intervals . Bars sha ll not be allowed to sag betwee n supports nor displaced during concreting or any o ther operations of the work. All devices used fo r positioning shall be of non- corrodible material. Wooden and metal supports shall not extend to the surface of concrete, except where shown on drawing. Placing bars on layers of freshly laid concrete as the work progresses for adjusting bar spacing shall not allowed. Pieces of bro ken stone or brick and wooden blocks shall not be used. Layers of bars shall be separated by spacer bars, Pre cast mortar blocks or other approved devices. Reinforc ement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a clean condition un til complete ly embedded in co ncrete. Special care shall b e exercised to prevent an y displacement of rein forcement in concrete alread y placed. To pr event reinforcement from corrosion, concrete cover shall be provided as indicated on drawing. All the bars projecting from concrete and to which other bar s are to be splic ed and which are likely to be exposed for a period exceeding 10 days shall be protected by a thick coat of neat cement grout.

2.5 Bars crossing each other where required shall be se cured by binding wires (annealed) of size not less

than 1 mm., in such manner than they do not slip over each other at the time of fixin g and concreting.

2.6 As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case this is not possible, o verlapping of bars shall



Page 300 of 430

be done as directed. Where directed, where practicable, overlapping bars shall not touch each other, bu t be kept apart b y 25 mm. or 1.25 time s the maximu m size of the coarse aggre gate, whichever is greater by co ncrete betwe en them . Wh ere not feasible, o verlapping bars shall be

bound with annealed wires not less than 1 mm. thick, twisted tight. The overlaps shall be staggered for different b ars and located at points a long the span where neither shear nor b ending movement is maximum.

2.7 Whenever indicated on the drawi ngs or d esired by the Architec t and Engineer-in-charge, bars shall be joined by couplings which shall have a cross se ction sufficien t to transmit the full stresse s of bars. The ends of the bars that are joined by coupling shall be upset for sufficient length so that the effective cross sectional the base of threads is not less than normal cross section o f the bar. Threads shall be standard threads. Steel coupling shall conform to IS : 226.

2.8 When permitted or specified on t he drawings, joints of reinforc ement bars shall be butt-weld ed so as to

transmit their full stresses. Welded joints shall p referably be located at points when steel will not be subjec t to more tha n 75 % o f th e maximu m p ermissible str esses and welds so staggered that any one section not more than 20 % of the rods are welded. Only electric are welding u sing a process which excludes a ir from the molten metal and confor ms to an y o r all o ther special provisions for the work shall be accepted. Suitable means shall be provided for hold ing b ars securely in p osition during welding . It shall be ens ured tha t no vo ids are le ft in welding and when welding is do ne in 2 or 3 s tages, previous surface shall be cleaned properly. Ends of the bars shall be cleaned o f all loose scale, rust, gre ase paint and other foreign matter before welding. Only competent w elders shall be employed on the wo rk. The M.S electrodes used for welding shall conform to IS: 814. Welde d pieces of reinforcem ent shall be tested . Specimen s hall be taken from the actual site and their number and frequency of test shall be as directed.


3.1 Reinforcement shall be me asured in length includ ing overlaps, separately for different diameters as

actually used in the work. Where welding or coupling is resorted to in place of lap joints, such joints shall be measured for payment as equivalent length of overlap as per design requirement. From the length so me asured, the weight o f reinforcement shall be calculated in tones on the same basis of as per M-18. Length shall include hook s at the ends. The wastag e and annealed steel wire for binding shall not be measured and the cost of these items shall be needed to be included in the rate for reinforcement.

3.2 The rate for reinforcement includes cost of mild steel binding wires and its carting. Cutting, bending,

placing, binding and fixing in position as shown on t he drawings and as direct ed. It shall also include all de vices like chairs, pins etc. for keepi ng reinforcement in approved position , cost o f joining as per approved method and all wastage, covers and spacer bars.

3.3 The rate shall be for a unit of one Kg.



Page 301 of 430

MASONARY WORK

5.1.1 Brick work using common burnt clay conventional building bricks, having crushing

strength not less than 50 Kg/cm2., in foundations and plinth, in CM 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand),

including curing, scaffolding, etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Materials: Water shall con form to M-1. Cement to M-3. Sand to M-6. Bric k to M-15. Cemen t mortar to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Proportion: The proportion of the CM shall be 1:4 (1 cement: 4 sand), by volume.

2.2 Soaking of bricks: The bricks required for masonry s hall be thoroughly we tted with clean water for about 4 hours before use or as dire cted. The cessation of bubbles, when the bricks are wetted with water is an indication of thorough wetting of bricks.

2.3 Laying:

2.3.1 Bricks shall be laid in English bond unless di rected otherwise. Half or cut bricks shall not be used

except when necessary to comple te the bond ; closer and in such case it shall be cut to required size and used near the ends of walls.

2.3.2 A layer of mortar shall be spread on full width for suitable length of the lower course. Each brick shall

first be properly bedded and set h ome by gently tapping with the handle of the trowel or wooden mallet. Its inside face shall be flushed with mortar be fore the ne xt brick is laid and pressed against it. On co mpletion o f the course, the vertical join ts shall be fully filled from th e top, with mortar.

2.3.3 The walls sh all be taken up truly in p lumb. All cour ses shall be laid truly horizontal and all

vertical joints shall be truly vertical. Vertical joints in a lternate courses shall generally be in on e vertical plane. The thickness of brick course shall be kept uniform.

2.3.4 The bricks shall be laid with the frog facing upwards. A se t of tools comprising of wooden straight edges, manson's spirit level, square half meter rub, pins, string and plumb shall be kept on the site of work for frequent checking during the progress of work.

2.3.5 Both the faces of walls, ha ving thickness greater than 23 cm. shall be kept in pro per plumb. All the

connected brick work shall be kept n ot more than 1 m. over the rest of the work. Where this is not possible, the work shall be raked back a ccording to bond ( and not left toothed) a t an angle not

steeper than 45O.

2.3.6 All the fixtures, pipe outlets of water, holdfasts of doors and windows, etc. which are required to be

built in the wall shall be embedded in CM, as per the drawings or as directed.

2.4 Joints:

2.4.1 Bricks shall be so laid t hat all joint s are quit e flush wit h mort ar. Thickness of joint s shall not exceed 12 mm. The face joints shall be raked out as directed by taking tools d aily, during th e progress of work, when the mortar is still green so as to provide key for plaster or pointing to be done, subsequently.

2.4.2 The face of bricks shall b e cleaned everyday on w hich the brick work is laid and all mortar

dropping shall be removed.



Page 302 of 430

2.4.3 At the end o f day's work or on holida ys the t op of unfinished masonry shall be k ept wet. If the mortar becomes dry, white or powdery, for want of curing, work shall be pulled down and re - built at Contractor's expense.

2.5 Curing : Fresh work shall be protected from rain suitably. Masonry work shall be kept moist on all the

faces for minimum period of 7 days. The top of masonry work shall be kept well wetted at the end of the day's work.

2.6 Preparation of foundation bed : If the foundation is to be laid directly on th e excavated bed, the

bed shall be leve lled, cleared off o f a ll loose ma terials, cleaned and wetted b efore starting masonry work. If masonr y is to be laid on concre te footing, the top of con crete shall be roughened, cleaned and moistened. The Contractor s hall ob tain ap proval o f the Engineer-in- charge for the foundation b ed, before foundation masonry is started . When pucca flooring is to be provided flush with the top of the plin th, th e inside of the plin th wall shall be lowered down having an o ffset of the same thickness of the flooring with respect to the outside plinth wall top or as directed.


3.1 The measurement o f th is item shall take n fo r the brick masonry fully comple ted in founda tion upto

plinth. The limiting dimensi ons not exceeding those shown on the drawing s or as directed shall be final. Battered, tapered and curved portions shall be measured net.

3.2 No deduction shall be ma de from th e quantity o f brick work, nor any extra pa yment shall be made

for embedding in masonry or making holes in respect of following items :

(1) End of joists beams, posts, girders, rafte rs, purlins, trusses, co rbel, steps etc. where cross sectional area does not exceed 500 cm

2.

(2) Architectu ral openings in walls, para pet and compound walls, not exceedin g 1.0 m 2. area.

(3) Wall plate s and bed plates, bearing of slabs, ch hajjas and th e like whose thickness does not exceed 10 cm. and the bearing does not extend to the full thickness of wall.

(4) Drainage holes, recesses for cemen t concrete blocks to embe d hold fasts for doors, windows etc., forming too things, grooves et c. and providing cramps for hold ing ston e lining.

(5) Iron fixtur es, pipes up to 300 mm. d ia.; hold fasts and doors and windows built in to masonry and sanitary and water supply pipes, etc., for concealed electrical wirin g and any other fixtures or inserts.

(6) Forming chases of section not exceeding 350 cm2. in masonry.

3.3 Apertures for fire places shall no t be deducted nor sha ll extra labour required to make splaying of

jambs, thro ating and making arches o ver the aperture be paid for separately. The rate sha ll include for w ork of any sh ape e.g . pillar s of any size and shape, c urved or tap ered walls, drip courses, projections, para pets, load be aring walls , sills, o ttas, step s, tank walls, platforms and counter walls, ducts, channels and architectural moldings like corbelling, pattas, etc.




Page 303 of 430

5.2.1 Brick work using common burnt clay conventional building bricks, having crushing

strength not less than 50 Kg/cm², in super structure above plinth, for all floor levels, at any height and level, in any position, in C.M. 1:6, including curing, scaffolding, etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Materials: Brick shall conform to M-15. Cement mortar to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The relevant specifications of item no . 5.1.1 shall be followed exc ept tha t the masonry work shall be carried out above plinth level upto floor leve ls i.e. for heigh t as specified in the special conditions & brick masonry work shall be carri ed out with conventional bricks using CM in proportion 1:6.

2.2 The frames of doors, windows, cupbo ards, et c. shall be housed into the brick wo rk at the correct location and le vel, as directed. The heavy steel doors, windows frames, etc. shall b e built in with b rick work, but for ordinary steel doors and windows, required opening for frames , hold-fasts, etc. shall be left in the wall and frames shal l be embedded later on in order to avoid damage to the frames.

2.3 Necessary scaffolding shall be provided by the Contractor. The supports of the scaffolding shall be

sound and strong, tied together with horizontal pieces over which the scaffolding planks shall be fixed. Normally simple scaffolding only shall be allowed. In this case horizontal pieces of th e scaffolding sh all rest in the holes, made in the header coarse only. Minimum nu mber of holes shall be left in brick work for supporting horizontal member of the scaffolding.

2.4 The Contractor is responsible for providing and maintaining sufficiently strong scaffo lding so a s to withstand all loads likely to come upon it.

2.5 For the face of brick work, where plastering is to be d one, joints sh all be racked out to a depth not less than the th ickness of the join ts. The face o f brick work sh all be cleane d off of mortar dropping and other foreign matters at the end of day's work.


3.1 The masonry work above plinth level to floor levels shall be measured and paid under this item.

3.2 Brick work in parapet shall be measured in the corresponding masonry item.

3.3 No deduction shall be mad e from quan tity of brick work, nor extra payment shall be made for embedding in masonry or making holes in respect of following items:

(1) Ends of joists, beams, posts, rafter s, purlins tru sses corbel, step etc. wh ere cross sectional area does not exceed 500 cm

2.

(2) Architectural openings in walls, parapet and compound walls, not exceeding 1000 cm

2. area.

(3) Wall plate, sand bed plates, bearing o f slab, chhajjas and like whose thickness does no t exceed 10 cm. and the bearing does not extend the full thickness of wall.

(4) Drainage holes, recesses for cemen t concrete blocks to embe d hold fasts for doors, windows, etc., forming too things, grooves etc. and providing cramps for holding stone lining.



Page 304 of 430

(5) Iron fixture, pipes upto 300 mm. dia h old fasts of doors, and windows built into masonry and sanitar y and water su pply pipes e tc., for conce aled elec trical wiring and any o ther fixtures or inserts.

(6) Forming chases of section not exceeding 350 cm2.

In masonry.

(7) Apertures for fire places shall not be deducted nor shall extra la bour required to mak e spraying of Jambs, throatin g and making trenches over the aperture be paid for separately. The rate shall include for work of any shape e.g. pillars, curved or tapered walls, drip courses, projections, para pets, load w alls, sill s, o ttas, steps, ta nk walls, pla tform and counter walls, ducts, channels and architectural mouldings like corbelling, pattas, etc.


5.3.1 Half brick, 4½" thick masonry in common burnt clay conventional building bricks,

having crushing strength not less than 50 Kg/cm², for all floors, at any height and level, in any position, in C.M. 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand), including curing, scaffolding, etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Materials: Bricks shall conform to M-15. Water to M-1. Cement to M-3. Sand to M-6. Cement mortar to M11.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Relevant specifications of bricks, wetting and laying of brick, joints, curing, etc. shall conform to item no. 5.1.1 except that the brick wor k of half bricks, 115 mm. thick shall be carried out, in foundation and plinth.

2.2 Cement mortar used in ma sonry work shall be in proportion of 1 part of cement and 4 parts of sand, by volume.

2.3 All bricks shall be laid stretcher wise, breaking joints with those in the upper and lower courses. The wall shall be taken truly plumb. All courses shall be laid truly horizontal and all vertical joints shall be t ruly vertical. The bricks shall b e laid wit h frogs upwards. A set of mas on's tools shall be maintained on work site as required for frequent checking.

2.4 The joints in course where reinforcement is placed shall allow sufficient mortar cover to the reinforcement.


3.1 The half brick masonry wo rk in founda tion and plinth shall be me asured under this item, th e

limiting dimen sions shall n ot e xceed those shown in the plan or as directed. Any work done extra over the specified dimensions shall not be measured and paid for.

3.2 The rate shall be for a unit of m2.

2.5.6 Charges for making holes in brick work with drilling machine.

1.0 Workmanship & Mode of Measurements and Payment: The relevant specifications of item no. 2.5.0 shall be followed. The rate shall be for a unit of per no.

2.5.7 100 mm dia

2.5.8 101 to 200 mm dia



Page 305 of 430

2.5.9 201 to 300 mm dia

DOORS WINDOWS & ROLLING SHUTTER

6.1.0 Providing and fixing Steel Doors, Windows and Ventilators of approved manufacturer and of required ssize, as per approvsed drawing, design and direction.

1.0 Materials: Hot rolled stee l sections for the fabricat ion of steel door s, windows a nd ventila tors shall

conform to IS: 7452 , which are sui table for, sing le glazing.Pre ssed steel door frames for steel flush d oors shall be out of 1.25 mm thi ck mild steel sheets of profiles as per IS : 4351.Transparent sheet glass shall con form to the r equirements of IS : 2835 . Wired and figured glass shall be as p er IS : 5437.Builder’s hardware of fittings and fixtures shall be o f the best quality from the approved manufacturers.

2.0 Workmanship: All steel doors, windows and ven tilators shall be o f the type as specified in the

respective items of work and of sizes as indicated in the Drawings prepared by the Contractor.Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall conform to the requirements as stipulated in IS : 1038. Steel windows shall conform to IS : 1361, if so specified.

2.1.1 Doors, windows and ventilator s shall be of an approved manufactu re. Fabrication of the unit shall be

with rolled section, cut to correct lengths and metered. Corners shall be welded to form a solid fused welded join t conforming to the require ments of IS : 10 38. Toleran ce in overall dimensions shall be within ±1.5mm. The fram es and shutters shall be free from wrap or buckle and shall be squar e and truly p lain. Al l weld s shall be dre ssed flush on exposed and contact surfa ces. Punchin g of ho les, s lots and other provisions to install fittings and fixtures later shall be made at the correct locatio ns as per the requirements. Samples of the units shall be got approved by engineer before further manufacture/purchase by the Contractor.

2.1.2 Type and de tails of shutter s, hinges, gla zing bar requirement, couplings, locking arrangement,

fittings and fixtures shall be as des cribed in the respective items of work and / or as shown in the Drawings for single or composite units.

2.1.3 For windows with fly proo f mesh as pe r the item of work prepare d by the Con tractor, rotor

operator arrangement, for the operation of the glazed shutters from the inside shall be provided

2.1.4 Pressed steel door frames shall be pro vided with fixing lugs at each jamb , hinge s, lock-strik e plate, mortar guards, angle threshold, sh ock-absorbers of rubber or similar ma terial as per the requirements of IS : 4351 . Pressed steel doorframes shall be fixed as `built-in’ as the masonry work proceeds. After placing it plu mb at the specified location, mas onry walls shall be built up solid on eith er side and each course grouted with mortar to en sure solid contact with the doorframe, without leaving any voids. T emporary struts across the width shall be fixed, during erection to prevent bow/sag of the frame.

2.1.5 Door shutters of flush we lded construction shall be 4 5mm thick, fabricated with two outer skills of

1.25mm thick steel sheets, 1mm th ick steel sheet stiffeners and steel channels on all four edges. Double shutters sh all have meeting stile edge beveled or rebated. Provision of glazed viewing pane l, lou vers shall be made as per the items of works an d/or Drawings prepared by the Contractor. Shutters shall be suitab ly reinforced for lock and other surface hardware and to prevent sagging/twis ting. Single sheet steel door sh utters shall b e fabrica ted out o f 1 .25mm thick steel sheets, mild steel angles and stiffeners as per the Drawings.

2.1.6 Doors, windows and ventilator s shall be fixed in to th e prepared openings. Th ey shall no t b e

‘built-in’ as th e masonry work proceed s, to avoid distortion and damage of the units. Th e dimensions of the masonry opening shall have 10mm clearance around the overall dimensions of the frame for this purpose. Any support of scaffolding members on the frames/glazing bars is



Page 306 of 430

prohibited. 2.1.7 Glazing of th e units shall be either with flat transparent glass or wired / figure d glass of the

thickness as specified in the items of wo rks prepared by the Con tractor. All glas s panels shall have properly squared corn er and straigh t edges. Glazing shall be provided on the outside o f the frames.

2.1.8 Fixing of the glazing shall be either with spring glazing clips and putty conformin g to IS:419 or with

meta l be ads. Pre-for med PVC or rubber gaskets shall be provided for fixing the beads with the concealed screws. The ty pe of fixing the glaz ing shall be a s indicated in the items of work and/or in Drawings prepared by the Contractor.

2.1.9 Steel doors, windows and ventilators shall be provided with finish of either pain ting as specified or

shall be hot dip galvaniz ed with thickness of the zinc coating as stipula ted all as described in the respective items of works.

2.1.10 The material of the Bu ilders hardware o f fi ttings and fixtures of ch romium plate d steel, cast brass,

brass copper oxidiz ed or anodiz ed aluminu m shall be as specified in the ite ms. Th e number, size and type of fittings and fixtures shall be as in the Drawings /items of works.

2.1.11 Installation of the units with fixing lugs , screws, mastic caulking compound at the specified

locations shall generally conform to the requirements of IS:1081. Necessary holes etc required for fixing shall be made by the Contra ctor and made good after installa tion. Workmanship expected is of a high order for efficient and smooth operation of the units.

3.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: The item shall be measured and pa id in m2 . No hidden measurements shall be measured and paid. Only actua l visible measurement shall b e measured and wastage shall not be permitted.

6.1.1 Providing and fixing 38 mm. solid core flush type door with heavy Z section frame

complete of approved manufacturer and of required size, as per approved drawing, design and direction. The rate shall also include 4 nos. of heavy M.S. oxidized parliamentary or butt hinges, necessary fixtures and fittings of heavy quality., as directed and as approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge, including 3 coats of painting.

1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.1.0 shall be followed.

2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: The item shall be measured and paid in m2.

6.2.0 Providing and fixing aluminum Doors, Windows and Ventilators with approved 50

micron pure polyester powder coating of uniform shade and finish as mentioned in drawings /approved the rate shall also include for required pre-treatment to sections such as cleaning, buffing, chromating etc. complete as per approval of architect /consultant .The rates quoted shall be inclusive of manufacture supply and installation at site, and inclusive of all the necessary accessories siliconised rubber gaskets, loacks, transport, lobour charges, insurance, storage and safe custody ,etc complete. The rates shall also be inclusive of providing and applying neutral grade sealant of approved make weather or structural with ordinary gun or compressed air operated gun as per the requirement and making the joints around aluminium doors, windows curtain wall glazing ,ventilators etc. watertight as directed by the architect and site engineer. Kg based aluminium items specified in the BOQ will be paid only measuring the weight of the aluminium sections. However the rates shall be inclusive of all the items specified in the item description .



Page 307 of 430

1.0 Preamble: P roviding a nd applying a pproved 25 mi cron color a nodized se ctions /50 micro n pure p

olyester po wder coating of uni form sh ade and finish a s mentio ned in dra wings /approved. the rate shall also include for required pre-treatment to sections such as cleaning, buffing, chromating etc. complete a s per approval of architect /consultant .The Tenderer has to su bmit their p owder coa ting / an odizing /p rocess by whi ch the y wish to pe rform th e work. Arrangement for the equi pments to m easure the thickne ss of anodi zed / powe r coatin g sections to be made by the contractor.

The contra ctor shall have to give a guara ntee bo nd, for powde r co ating / amnodi zing, o n appropriate stamp paper for a period of 10 yea rs .In this period he shall attend to and rectify all complai nts witho ut casi ng a ny incon venience to t he o wner / client .The fo rm of gu arantee bond shall be as prescribed below:

‘’I/We………… (contractor) hereby guarantee that work shall remain unaffected and shall not be in any way damage d by atmosph eric conditions, For a pe riod of 10 years after th e completion of wo rk of p owder coating / anodizing the alumin um d oors a s per t he terms an d conditions of the contract and guarantees to redo the affected work without claming any extra cost.’

1.1 In case of alteration ite ms of M.S wi ndows standard “Z” sections, M.S. rolle d or fab ricated sections to a ny shape including bending as per requirement are t o be u sed matching to the respective al uminium sections. The windows shal l be painte d with minimu m two coats of spray enamel paint (of approved make and shade) over zinc chromate yellow oxide and with steel putty etc. Complete as per design, direction and approved sample.

1.2 The windows and d oors are to b e fix ed with the external finished su rface (eithe r stone

cladding /ext ernal plaster ) an d he nce all the n ecessary EP DM rub ber or wood pa ckings /rough ground, fastners of fisher / hilti, pol yurethane backer road of the minimum 10mm size. Neutral g rade sili con wea ther sealant minimum 10 x 6 mm (between the f rame an d wall or other surface all around) shall be provid ed within the rate quoted so as to make the junctio ns fully water tight /air tight as per the drawings.

1.3 Approved make selected clear glass (clear /frosted) / wired gl ass of specified thickness (5 to

12mm) a s m entioned in t he d rawings shall be used in do ors. Wired gla ss /frosted glass louvers shall be provided wherever shown in the drawings after grinding the edges.

1.4 Necessary h ardware li ke locking arra ngement wit h pin cylinder l ocks, mortised lo cks, S S baby

latch (o ccupied /vacant) SS push /pull or morti sed h andle, heavy quality hinges /pivot, concealed tower bolts ,etc of approved make & design (by architect) as per the drawings and as per SOQ . floor sprin gs and door closer shall be measured and paid as per mentioned in BOQ/SOQ.

1.5 All gasket s u sed shall b e 100% EPDM / silic onised rubbe rs gaskets of app roved colo ur for long

life guarantee. 1.6 Necessary operating devise (as per design ) fo r operation of louvers of wi ndows, ventilators, sky

lights ,including necessary, rods shall be provided without any, extra cost. 1.7 The rate s quoted sh all be inclusive of manufacture supply a nd in stallation at site, an d

inclusive of all the necess ary accessories EPDM rubber strips/siliconised rubber strip, loacks, road, excise, taxes, VAT, transport, l obour charges, insurance, storage and safe custody ,etc complete.

1.8 The rates shall also be in clusive of pro viding and ap plying neutral grade sealant of approve d make

we ather or structural with ordina ry gun or co mpressed air operated g un as per the requirement and making the joints around aluminium doors, windows curtain wall glazing etc.



Page 308 of 430

watertight. O n the exte rnal periphery of the buil ding at the jun ction of two diffe rent m aterials as directed by the architect and site engineer. The contractor shall have to give a guarantee bond, for water tightness, on appropriate stamp paper for a period of 1 0 years in thi s peri od h e shall attend to and rectify all co mplaints without causing any inconvenience to the ow ners/client. The form of guarantee bond shall be as prescribed below:

‘’I”/ We … ……… (co ntractor) h ereby g uarantee that work shall remain u naffected a nd shall not be in any way damaged by atmospheric conditions for conditions, for a period of 10 years after the completion of th e work of a pplying sealant and making the joints around aluminium doors watertight on the e xternal pe riphery of t he building at the junctio n of two differen t materials as per the te rms and conditions of the contrite and guarantees to redo the affected work without claiming any extra cost.”

1.9 Necessary p rovision for rain water disposal shall b e don e in th e bottom gui des /fram es a s

directed and approved by architect. 1.10 Offer must be in accordance with detailed drawings with dimensions of aluminium sections in frames

a nd shutters an d sh utters a s sh own in d rawing. It sha ll be acco mpanied by the detailed drawings if any deviation is proposed.

1.11 The quantities are provisional and may vary to any extent .no claim will be entertained on this

account for any reason.

All the door shutters shall have double action hydraulic floor springs of approved make with minimum on e year gu arantee. The flo or sprin gs shall be of lea st possibl e thickne ss. Th e contractor shall have to give a guarant ee bond, for the hydraulic floor springs, on appropriate stamp paper for a p eriod of 1 year. In th is period he shall attend to and rectify all compl aints without causing any inconvenience to the ow ners/client .The form of guarantee bond shall be us prescribed below:

“I/We…………..(contractor) hereby ,gu arantee that the floor sprin gs shall remain unaffecte d and shall n ot be in any way damag ed by normal usage, pull s an d pu shes, for a peri od of 1 year afte r th e completio n of the work of s upplying & fixing the hydra ulic flo or springs to aluminum do ors a s pe r t erms an d co nditions of th e co ntract a nd gu arantees to redo th e affected work without claiming any claiming any extra cost”

1.12 Details /arrangements for after sales /maintenance services shall be furnished. 1.13 Work shall be carried out in co –operation and in coordination with all other agencies working at site.

1.14 The civil work a s required for fixing of floor springs, hold fast or other works required for the

erection and compl etion of doors/windows etc. s hall be do ne by the cont ractor without any extra cost.

1.15 Any damage if caused to the exi sting work done by other agencies shall be reinstated by th e

contractor to its original condition without any extra cost. 1.16 During the course of work the contractor shall pay due care to avoid any stains on the powder

coating work and if req uired, the contra ctors shall provide shall provide ne cessary protective arrangement as directed b y the archite cts fo r which no extra payments shall be made. After the installatio n is complet ed, if require d by the architects, the aluminium work shall be washed with mild solution of non alkali soap and water.

1.17 The contractor shall be responsible for the windows/doors/curtain wall glazing/grills etc. being set

straight, in plumb level and for their satisfactory operations after the fixing is completed.



Page 309 of 430

1.18 Wherever re quired a nd as di rected strengthening of membe rs shall be do wn by providing

steel/M.S concealed members without extra cost. 1.19 The door shutters may have hydrauli c door closer of approved ma ke with mini mum one ye ar

guarantee as and where shown in drawings and as directed. The contractor shall have to give a guarantee bond, for the hydraulic door closer, on appropriate

stamp paper for a period of 1 year. In this period he shall attend to and rectify all complaints wi thout ca using any inconve nience to the own ers /cli ent. The form of gua rantee bond shall be as prescribed below:

“I”/We………….. (contractor) hereby gua rantee that th e hydra ulic door clo sers shall remain unaffected a nd shall not be in a ny wa y dama ged b y norm al usage, pull s and pu shes, fo r a period of 1 y ear after th e com pletion of t he work of supplying & fixing the hydrauli c doo r closers to al uminum do ors a s per terms and conditions of the contract and guarantee s to redo the affected work without claiming any extra cost’”

2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: Kg based aluminum items specified in the BOQ will be pai

d only mea suring t he weight of the alumin um se ctions. However th e rate s shall be inclusive of all the items specified in the item description.

6.2.1 Providing and fixing aluminum partly glazed partly solid Doors with all necessary

fixtures and fittings of heavy quality & locking arrangement with locks etc and with door closer of approved manufacturer and of required size.

1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.2.0 shall be followed. The ite m shall

be measured and paid in kg. 6.2.2 Providing and fixing aluminum fully glazed clear glass Windows with all necessary

fixtures and fittings of approved manufacturer and of required size. 1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.2.0 shall be followed. The ite m shall

be measured and paid in kg 6.2.3 Providing and fixing aluminum Ventilators with fixed glass louvers of approved

manufacturer and of required size. 1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.2.0 shall be followed. The ite m shall

be measured and paid in kg 6.2.4 Providing and fixing 5mm thk clear glass in aluminum doors, windows & ventilation..

1.0 Materials & workmanship: Glass shal l be of best quality. The item shall be measured and paid in

one m2 6.2.5 Providing and fixing 12 mm th pre-laminated particle board shall be used for solid

portion for item no. 6.2.1 1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.2.0 shall be followed. The ite m shall

be measured and paid in one m2 6.3.0 Providing and fixing interlocking rolling shutters with push pull arrangement of

approved make made of 80mm. wide M.S. Laths 18 gauge interlocked together through their entire length and jointed together at the end locks mounted on specially designed pipe shaft with bracket plates guide channels 10 gauge and out side locking



Page 310 of 430

with push-pull operation including the cost of Hood cover of 16 gauge and spring etc. complete. Guide rail shall be fixed to the wall with the help of continuous angle of 25x25x4 mm and anchor fasteners including 2 coat of zinc chromate yellow oxide primer and 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make etc. as directed..(Measurements considered for payments shall be clear size of opening plus guide channels on both the sides for width and 450mm on top for drum height).

1.0 Materials & workmanship: Rolling shutter shall co nform to M-3 2; Enamel pa int shall confo rm to M-

44.Rollin g shutters sh all be of an approved manufacture, conforming to the requirements specified in IS: 6248.

1.1 The type of ro lling shutter shall be self coiling type (manual) for clear areas up to 1 2 sq.m, gear operated typ e (mechanical) for clear areas up to 35 sq.m and electrically ope rated type for areas up to 50 sq.m. Mechanical type of rolling shutters shall be suitable for o peration from both inside and outside with the cra nk handle or chain gear operating me chanism duly considering the size of wall/column. Elec trical type of rolling shutter shall also be provided with a facility for emergency mechanical operation.

1.2 Rolling shu tters shall be su pplied du ly consideri ng the type, specifie d clear width /height o f the

opening and the location of fixing as indicated in the Drawings prepared by the Contractor.

1.3 Shutters shall be built up of interlocking lath s 75 mm width between rolling centers formed from cold rolled steel strips. Th e thickness o f t he steel strip shall not be less than 0.90 mm fo r shutters up to 3.50m width and not less than 1. 20 mm for shutters above 3.50 m width. Each lath section shall be continuous single piece without any welded joint.

1.4 The guide channels out of mild steel sheets of th ickness not less than 3.15 m m shall be of either

rolled, pressed or built up constr uction. The c hannel shall be of size as stipula ted in IS:6248 for various clear widths of the shutters.

1.5 Hood covers shall be of mild steel sheets not less than 0.90 mm thick and of approved shape.

1.6 Rolling shutters shall be provided with a central hasp and staple safety device in addition to one pair of

lever locks and sliding locks at the ends.

1.7 All compone nt par ts of the steel ro lling shu tter (excepting springs and in sides of gu ide channels) shall be pro vided with one coat o f zinc chrome primer c onformity to IS: 2074 at th e shop before supply. These surfaces shall be giv en an additional coat of primer a fter erection at the site along with the number of coats and type of finish paint as specified in the respective items of works prepared by the Contractor.

1.8 In case of galvanized rolling shutter , the lath sections, guides, lock plate, br acket plates,

suspension shaft and the hood cover shall be hot di p galvanized with a zinc coating containing not less tha n 97.5 percent pure zinc. The wei ght of the zinc coating shall be at least 610gms/sq.m.

1.9 Guide channels shall be installed truly plumb at the specified loca tion. Bracket plate shall be rigidly

fixed w ith necessary bol ts and holdfasts. Workmanship of erection shall e nsure strength and rigidity of rolling shutter for trouble free and smooth operation.

2.0 Mode of measurement and payment:

2.1 Measurement considered for paymen t shall be clear size of opening, be tween the jambs plu s guide

channels on both the sides for width and 450mm on top for drum height shall be added to the height of the opening, the clear distance between the sill and the soffit of the opening.

2.2 The rate shall include for all ma terials, its transportation a t site, labour etc. in volved in the



Page 311 of 430

operation described as above. It shall include for a primer coat and 2 coats of enamel paint.

2.3 The rate shall be for a unit of one sq. m.

6.3.1 Shutter shall be and pull and push type.

1.0 Materials & workmanship: The relevant specific of item no. 6.3.0 shall be followed.

6.3.2 With mechanical device with a pair of handles.

1.0 The relevan t specifications of item no . 6 .3.0 s hall be followed e xcept that the shutter sha ll b e

operated with a mechanical device with a pair of handles. 6.3.3 Shutter shall be partly grilled and partly paneled, and pull and push type.

1.0 The relevan t specifications of item no . 6 .3.0 s hall be followed e xcept that the shutter sha ll b e partly

grilled and partly panelled, operated with pull and push type arrangement. 6.3.4 Shutter shall be partly grilled and partly paneled, mechanically operated with a pair of

handles. 1.0 The relevan t specifications of item no . 6 .3.0 s hall be followed e xcept that the shutter sha ll b e partly

grilled and partly panelled, operated with a mechanical device with a pair of handles.



Page 312 of 430

PLASTERING & POINTING WORK

7.1.1 20 mm. thick Sand face cement plaster on any surface like RCC, Masonry etc. up to any height above ground level consisting of 12 mm. thick backing coat of C.M. 1:4 (1 cement : 4 sand) and 8 mm. thick finishing coat using Gutka, in C.M. 1:2 (1 cement : 2 sand), etc. complete.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Scaffolding: Wooden ballies, bamboo , planks, trestles and o ther Stee l scaffolding shall be sound. These shall be properly e xamined before erection and use. Stage scaffolding shall b e provided for ceiling plaster, which shall be independent of the walls.

2.2 Preparation of back ground:

2.2.1 The surface shall be cleaned of all dust, loose mortar droppings, traces of algae, efflorescence and other for eign matter b y water or b y brushing. Smooth surfac e shall be roughened by wire brushing if it is not hard and by dens e hacking if it is concrete. In c ase of concre te surface, if a chemical reta rder or shuttering oil has been app lied to the form work, the s urface shall be roughened by wire brushing and all the resulting dust and loose p articles shall be cleaned of f and care shal l be taken tha t none of the retarder is left on the surface. Trimming o f projections on brick/concrete surface wherever necessary shall be carried out to get an even surface.

2.2.2 Raking of joints in case of masonry wherever necessary shall be a llowed to dry out for sufficient period

before carrying out the plaster work.

2.2.3 Scaffolding for carrying out plastering work shall be double scaffolding having two sets of vertical supports so that the scaffolding is independent of the walls.

2.3 Preparation of Surface :

2.3.1 All putlog holes in brickwork and junction between concrete and brickwork shall be properly filled in

advance . Joints in bric k work shall be raked about 12 mm. an d concrete surface shall b e hacked to pro vide grip to the plaster. Projecting burrs of mortars for med due to gaps at joints in shuttering shall be remove d. The surfac e shall be scrubbed clean with wire brus h/coir brush to remove dirt, dust etc., and the surface thoroughly washed with clean water to remove efflorescence, grease and oil etc., and shall be kept wet for a minimum of tw o hours before application o f plaster . Th e work shall be carried ou t in two coats. The backing coat (base coat) shall be in CM 1:4 and The thickness of the back coat shall be 12 mm. average. Be fore the first coat hardens its surface shall be beaten up by edges of wooden tapers and close dents shall be made on the surface. The subsequent c oat shall be applied after th is coat has been allowed to set for 3 to 5 da ys depending upon the we ather conditions. The surfa ce shall no t be allowed to dry during this period.

2.3.2 The second coat shall be completed to average 8 mm. thickness in CM 1:2 as de scribed

above. The s urface shall then be tapered to uniform grained texture by using Gutka only, as specified. The sample of sand face shall be got approved before the work is started. The whole work shall be carried out uniformly as per the sample approved.

2.3.3 Curing: The curing shall be started over night after finishing of the plaster work. The plaster shall be

kept wet for a period of 7 days. During this period, it shall be protected from all damages.



Page 313 of 430

2.3.4 For external plaster, the p lastering oper ation shall b e started from the top floor and carried

downwards. For internal plaster, the p lastering operations may be started wherever the building frame and cla dding work are ready and the temporary supporting ceiling resting on the wall o f the floor have been removed. Ceiling plaster shall be completed before starting plaster to walls.

2.4 Applications of Plaster :

2.4.1 The plaster a bout 15 cm. x 15 cm., shall be firs t ap plied horizontally and vertically at not more than 2 m. in tervals over the entire surface to serve as gauge. Th e surfaces of these gauge s shall be truly in plane o f the fin ished plastered surface. The mor tar shall then be applied in uniform surfa ce slightly more than the specified th ickness, t hen brought to a true surface b y working a wooden straigh t edge reaching across the gauges with s mall upwards and sideways movements at a time. Finally, the surface shall be finished off true with a trowel or wooden flo at according to the texture, smooth or sandy granular, as may be required. Excessive Trowelling or over working the float shall be avo ided. All cor ners, a rises, angles and junctions etc. shall be carried out with proper templates to the size required.

2.4.2 Cement mortar shall be used within half an hour after addition of water. An y mortar or plaster which

is partially set shall be rejected and removed from the site. 2.4.3 In suspending the work at the end of the day , the p laster shall be left ou t, cle an to line both

horizontally a nd vertically. While recommencing t he plaster, the edges of the old work shall be scrapped clean and wette d with cement putty be fore plaster is applied to the adjacent areas to enable the two to properly join together. Plastering work shall be closed at the end of the day on the bod y of the wall and s hall no t be n earer than 15 cm. to any corners or arises. Horizontal joints in plaster work shall not also occur on parapet tops and copings as these invariably lead to leakage. No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be patched up later on.

2.4.4 Each coat shall be kept damp continuously till the next coat is applied or for a minimum period of 7 days. Moistening shall commence a s soon a s plaster is hard ened sufficie ntly. Soaking of walls shall be avoided an d only as much wate r as can be read ily absorbed shall be used, excessive evaporation on the sunny or windward side of building in hot a ir or dry weather sh all be prevented by hanging mats or gunny bags on the outside of the plaster and by keeping them wet.

3.0 Mode of Measurements & Payment:

3.1 The rates shall include for work at an y heigh t, po sition, and floor and for all necessary scaffolding, e tc. as ma y b e required. T he rates shall also include for hacking and/or bus h hammering to form key for plaster and fo r spatter dash treatment, as specified, as and where necessary.

The rates sh all also include for all work in narrow width, arises, rounded ang les, chamfere d external angles, drip moulds, grooves and for making good after all trades.

The rate shall also include for groove with ce ment fin ish upto 12 mm. x 6 mm. to be formed in plaster at junction of slab and beam an d slab and br ick without an y extra charge. The rate shall also include for similar gr ooves in pla ster at the junction of m asonry and wood or steel door/window/ventilator frame or at bottom of beam/lintels as drip moulds without extra charge.

3.2 All plas tering shall be measured in m

2., unless otherwise specifi ed. Length , breadth or height shall

be measured correct to a centimeter.

3.3 Thickness of the plaster shall be exclusive of the thickness of the key i.e. grooved or open joints in brick work, stone work, etc. or space between laths.



Page 314 of 430

3.4 The measurement of wall plastering shall be ta ken between the walls or partitio ns (dimensions before plastering being taken) for length and from the top of floor or skirting to ceiling for height. Depth of cover of cornices if any shall be deducted.

3.6 Soffits of stairs shall be measured as plaste ring o n ceilings. Flowing/fo lding soffits shall be

measured separately.

3.7 For jambs, s offits, sills , e tc., open ings exceeding 0 .5 sqm and not exceed ing 3.0 sqm, area deductions and additions shall be made in the following manner: -

(a) No deduct ions shall be made for end joints, beams, posts, etc. for openings not exceedin g 0.5 sqm. each and no addition shall be made for reels, jambs, soffits, sills, etc. of these opening for finish to plaster around ends of joints, beams, posts, etc.

(b) Deduction for openings exceeds 0.5 sqm. but not exceeding 3.0 sqm. each shall be made as follows and no addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills, etc. of these openings.

(i) When both faces of any wall are plastered with same plaster, deduction shall be made for one face only.

(ii) When two faces of any wall are plastered with d ifferent types of plasters or if one faces is plastered and the other pointed, deduc tions shall be made from the plaster or p ointing on the side of frame for door, windows, etc. on which width of reveals is less than that on the other side but no deductions shall be made on the other side. W here width of reveals on bo th faces of a ll are equal, de ductions of 5 0% of area o f opening on each face shall be made from area of plaster and/or pointing as the case may be.

3.8 For openings having door frames equal to projection beyond the thickness of wall, full deduction for

opening shall be made from each plastered face of the wall.

3.9 In case of op enings having area above 3.0 m2. each, deduction sh all be made for the open ing but jambs, soffits, and sills shall be measured additionally.


7.2.1 Providing & laying 20 mm. thick cement plaster in two coats. First base coat in C.M. 1:4 with rough finishing and second coat in C.M. 1:2 in cement mala finish (finished with steel trowel) including scaffolding, curing, making grooves, forming pattas and drip mould, etc. complete, as directed. Rate shall be inclusive of the chicken mesh to be provided at the junction of brick and RCC works.

1.0 Materials & Workmanship: The relevant specifica tions of ite m No. 7.1 .1 shall be fo llowed except that the thickness o f the plas ter shall be a verage 20 mm. and shall be carried out a s specified in the item. The base coat shall be carried in CM 1:4 having average 12 mm. thickness. Before the p lastered surface hardens roughing shall be done to receive the second coat. Second coat shall be applied on ly a fter minimum curing of 72 hours. Th e second coat shall be carried out in CM 1:2 having average 8 mm thickness. The surface shall be finished smooth with steel trowel (Mala finish).


2.1 The relevant specifications of item No. 7.1.1 shall be followed.


7.3.1 Providing & laying 12 to 15 mm. thick cement plaster in single coat, in C.M. 1:3 with

cement mala finish (finished with steel trowel) including scaffolding, curing, making



Page 315 of 430

grooves, forming pattas and drip mould, etc. complete as directed. Rate shall be inclusive of the chicken mesh to be provided at the junction of brick and RCC works.

Materials & Workmanship: The relevant specifications of item no. 7.1.1 shall be followed same except that the proportion of mortar shall be CM 1:3 instead of CM 1:4 and thickness shall be 12 to 15 mm. instead of 20 mm.

2.2 Mode of Measurements & Payment:


2.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one m2

7.5.0 Providing cement vata of specified size, quarter round in PCC (1:1.5:3) with 6 mm down size

grit with neat cement finishing, watering, etc. complete. Item of making coving shall be considered in this item only. Coving shall be at floor between floor to wall junction, at ceiling between ceiling and walls and at wall corners between wall to wall. Rate shall be inclusive of the for all heights and final finish of the coving shall be equivalent to the adjacent plaster finish surface.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship: The work of cemen t vata o f specified size shall be carried out a t junc tions of

parapets and terraces as di rected. The vata sha ll be finished in quarter round sh ape. The work shall be carried out in the b est workman-like manner. The internal portion of rain water pipe shall be rounded off properly during constructing the vata. The work shall be cured for 7 days.

3.0 Mode of Measurement and Payment :

3.1 The work shall be measured for finished item in rmt.

3.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one rmt.

7.5.1 Cement vata of 10 cm. x 10 cm. size.

1.0 Materials & Workmanship: The relevant specifica tions of ite m No. 7.5 .0 shall be fo llowed except

that the Size of cement vata shall be 10 cm X 10 cm. 2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment:

2.1 The relevant specifications of item No. 7.5.0 shall be followed. 2.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one rmt..

7.5.2 Cement vata of 15 cm. x 15 cm. size.

1.0 Materials & Workmanship: The relevant specifica tions of ite m No. 7.5 .0 shall be fo llowed except

that the Size of cement vata shall be 15 cm X 15 cm. 2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment:





Page 316 of 430

WATER PROFFING WORK

8.1.1 Providing and laying cement water proofing of average 125mm thick for terrace slabs using cement slurry & waterproofing chemical after cleaning, arranging brick bats in cement mortar 1:5,according to the slope, adding suitable chemical for water-tightness and again after 3 days ponding with water and testing same, providing on top cement mortar 1:3 including addition of waterproofing compound and finishing the top with neat cement @ 2.75 kg/m2 and as per direction and instructions, complete at all levels and floors, including furnishing a guarantee bond for 10 years. The work should be carried out through an approved specialized agency like India Water Proofing Co. or equivalent. (Wall to wall measurement will be considered only including vata up to 300mm height)

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement shall conform to M-3. Sand shall conform to M-

6. Stone grit shall conform to M-8. Bric kbats shall conform to M-14. Appro ved waterproofin g compound shall be adde d in cement mortar as per manufactu rer's specification and shall conform to M-67. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Unless otherwise specifie d proprietar y waterproofing treatment shall be e xecuted through M/s. India Waterpr oofing Co. or approved eq uivalent, who should give a guarantee of 10 years o n stamp paper to the employer directly and the tender rate shall be inclusive of the same.

A guarantee bond on appr opriately stamp paper shall be given by the contractor to the client in the manner form prescribed below:

FORM OF GUARANTEE BOND

"I/We ......................(Contractor) hereby guarantee that work will remain unaffec ted and will not be in an y way damaged b y water or an y other form of humid condition, for a per iod of 10 years after comple tion of the wor k of water-proofing as per the terms an d conditions of the contra ct and the Contractor hereby indemnifies and agrees to save the C lient from an y loss and or damage that might be caused on account o f water and or other similar form of hu mid conditions and hereby g uarantees to make good any loss or damage suffere d by the Clie nt and further guarantees to redo the affected work without claiming any extra cost."

2.2 This guarantee shall remain in force for a period of 10 years from the completion of the work under

the contract and it shall remain binding to the Contractor for period of 10 years.

2.3 While tender ing the con tractors should clearly stipulate the type o f treatment pr oposed to be provided by them and the name and particulars of firm through whom the y propose to carry o ut the treatment.

2.4 The surface to be treated shall ha ve a minimum slope of 1 in 120. The grading s hall be carried out

prior to the applicatio n of water pr oofing treatment by cement mortar . Th e brickbats o f varying size as per requirement shall b e arr anged in proper gradient using ce ment mor tar 1:5 according to the desired slope. Suitable waterproofing chemical shall be added to make the CM water tight and then cement mortar 1 :3 shall again be provided on top of the bric kbats, including the waterpro ofing compou nd which shall be added in the CM an d fin ishing on top w ith nea t cement @ 2.75 kg/m2. The top surface shall be finished rough surface as per the direction so as to receive the next finishing item.

2.5 The testing shall be done by ponding for atleast 72 hours.



Page 317 of 430

2.6 Well defined cracks other than hair cracks in the treated structure shall be cut to `V' section, cleaned and then filled up flush with cement sand slu rry or with bitu men conforming to IS : 702 - 1961.

2.7 The surface under treatment, part o f parapet (inc ase of balcony or terrace) an d gutters, drain

mouths etc . over which th e water proofing tr eatment is to be applied, shall be cleaned of all foreign matter such as fungus, moss and dust by wire brushing and dusting.

2.8 Drain outle t shall be suitably p laced with re spect to the surfac e gradient to ensure rapid drainage and prevention o f local accumulation o f water on the treated surface. Masonry drain mouth, shall be widened sufficiently and rounded with cement mortar.

2.9 For cast iron drain outlets, a groove shall be cut all around to touch the treatment.

2.10 When a pipe passes through a roof on which water proofing treatment is to be laid , a ceme nt concrete angle fille t shall b e built round it and the water proofing treatment shall be taken o ver the fillet.

2.11 In case of parapet wall over 450 mm. in hei ght, for tucking in the water proofin g treatmen t, a

horizontal groove 75 mm. wide and 65 mm. deep at minimum height of 300 mm. above terrace level shall be left in the ver tical face at th e time of construction, the horizontal face of the groove shall be shaped with cement mortar 1:4.

2.12 In case of low parapet where the height does not exceed 450 mm. no groove shall be provided and the water proofing treatment shall be carried right over the top.

2.13 In case of existing R.C .C. and stone wall cu tting the chase for tacking in the water proofin g treatment is not recommended.

2.14 At the junctio n between th e roof and ve rtical face o f the parapet wall, a fillet 75 mm. in radius shall be constructed.

2.15 At the drain mouths the fi llet shall be suitably cut ba ck and round ed off for eac h application of water

proofing treatment and easy flow of water.

2.16 Outlet at every low dividing wall about less than 300 mm. in height s hall be rounded smooth and corners rounded off for easy application of water proofing treatment.


3.1 The rate shall include providing water proof ce ment concrete terracing of adequa te thickness to give desired slope for drainage of rain water from terraces.

3.2 The measurements for this item shall be taken as under:

(a) Water pr oofing of roof shall be measured in m2.

Pla n are a of trea ted surface shall be measured correct to a centimeter.

(b) Measurement shall be taken for the plan area of roo fing/terrace. Flashing treatment including flashing over the parapet wall up to 300 m from te rrace. Low dividing walls and e xpansion joints and at the pipe projection s etc. O verlapping and tucking into flashing groove s shall not b e measured extra.

(e) In measurements, no deduction shall be made for either openings or re cess for chimney stacks, roof lights etc . having areas upto 0.4 m2. Deduction shal l be made in measurements for full open ing but noth ing e xtra shall be paid for extr a labour and materials in forming such openings.



Page 318 of 430

3.3 The rate includes cost of a ll ma terials an d labour required to carry the works as per the abo ve

specifications. The rate also includes cl eaning of surface and treating the cracks shall not be paid separately. Cutting of horizonta l g rooves in par apet walls for tucking in water proofin g treatment shall not be measured or paid separately.

3.4 Measurements shall be based on the drawings or as executed on site, the lesser of the two shall be given. No extra pa yment shall be made for rounding and vata a t the junction o f slab & parapet. A deposit at the rate of 50% of the cost of this item from the running and final bills shall be recovered and retained for the first one year a fter completion of the work and 10% o f the same shall be retained for the balance of the guarante e period and shall be refun ded only after the completion of the guarantee period.

3.5 This item shall be measured and paid in m2.

8.4.1 Providing & laying broken white china mosaic flooring for plain and curved surfaces,

comprising of 20 to 25 mm. size broken pieces of glazed tiles (one or more colours, as directed), laid over cement mortar 1:6 bedding including applying cement slurry at the rate of 2.75 kg per sq.m. , on plain or sloped surfaces. and filling joints with white cement. The flooring shall be tampered to bring the mortar cream up to the surface, including rounding of the junctions and extending them upto 15 cm. along the parapet wall. The rate shall include bands, if different colour is used, any pattern or design as per drawing and direction, curing, cleaning with water and oxalic acid, etc. complete. (Wall to wall measurement will be considered only including vata upto 150mm height)



8.6.0 Providing and laying specified dia rain water down take PVC pipe with bends & joints etc.

complete.

1.0 Materials:

The specified dia PVC pipe shall be of the best qu ality of ap proved ma ke o r equival ent a s approved by the consultants & also bends reducer. Tees, Elbow as per requirements.

2.0 Workmanship:

All pipes shall be laid as per proper slope, level and gradient specified on the drawing.

PVC pipes shall be of the specified diameter and in full length including socket ends of the pipes unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fitting.

2.1 Fixing: The pipes and fittings shall be fixed in ver tical alignment, unless otherwise specified and shall

be secured to the walls at jo ints with bra ckets/clamps. They sh all be o f MS or Aluminum, bent to the required shape and size to fit tightly on the pipe when tightened with MS bar, nut, bolt and washer. The brackets/clamps shall be fixed to the walls and kept about 25 mm clear off the finished face of the wall so as to facilitate cleaning and painting of the pipes. Joints shall be with good workmanship & in proper manner.

2.3 Painting:

PVC pipes shall be painted with two coats of bitumen paint covered with polyethylene tape and a final coat of bitumen paint.

3.0 Mode of Measurement and Payment:



Page 319 of 430

The length of pipe shall b e measured including all fittings along its length in running meters , correct to a c entimetre. No allowance sh all be made for the por tion of pipe length entered in the sockets of th e adjacent pipe or fi ttings. The rate shall be inclusive of all materials, labour, tools and plant e tc., required for satisfactory c ompletion, testing and co mmissioning of th is ite m. The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.

8.6.1 100 mm dia & Pressure of 4 kg/m2

1.0 Material, Workmanship & Mode of measurement & payment: The relevant s pecification of item no. 8.5.0 shall be followed except that the dia pipe shall be 100 mm & pressure of 4 kg/m2.

8.6.2 160 mm dia & Pressure of 6 kg/m2

1.0 Material, Workmanship & Mode of measurement & payment: The relevant s pecification of item

no. 8.5.0 shall be followed except that the dia pipe shall be 160 mm & pressure of 6 kg/m2.



Page 320 of 430

FLOORING WORK

9.1.1 Providing and laying cement concrete smooth finish floor 125mm. thick with M20 concrete-Min Cement content 325 kg/cum including giving a floating coat of 1:1 cement mortar, with nominal temperature steel etc. complete as specified by the Architect/Engineer-in-charge. The rate shall be exclusive of reinforcement steel the same shall be paid in relevant tender items. The suitable size of panel should be approximately 5.0 x 6.0 m or as directed by Engineer. The Construction joints to be formed at every 5m distance by grooving with mechanical saw within 48 hrs. Groove/sawed joints shall be made of 6mm width and 25 mm depth min (1/3 rd depth of the pavement) as shown in the drawing and shall be filled with silicone sealant/Elastomeric Sealant/Epoxy Sealant. The sawing operation should be carried out as soon as concrete is ready to accept the saw cut without trowelling etc as directed by Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The construction joint is formed by square edge and painted with bitumen. The rate shall be inclusive of labour, grooves, sealant and machinery cost.

4.0 Materials and workmanship: The rele vant specifications of item no. 2.1 .0, 4 .1.1 shall be

followed.


1.0 The rate shall be including of labour, grooves, sealant and machinery cost.

The rate shall be for a unit of one m2

9.3.1 Providing & l aying in position, ceramic tiles of approved make & colour, of first quality of a ny size as pe r d esign, set in ceme nt slur ry ov er a minimum 12 mm. thick ce ment mortar 1:4 bedding a nd laid to p roper slo pe a nd l evel. Join ts shall be fille d with self m atching colour (white cement plus pi gment). Cu ring & clea ning with mild oxali c acid etc. co mplete to b e done fo r floo ring, d ado or cha nnel wo rk, a s directed by the A rchitect a nd Engineer-in- charge.

1.0 Materials: Water shall c onform to M-1. Cemen t mortar shall conform to M-11. Ceramic tiles shall

conform to M-56 and shall be of the make as specified in the item. The ceramic tiles shall be of first quality and make as specified in the item. The ceramic tiles shall be of Regency or Bell make. The pigment used for mixing with white cement for pointing shall be of Rainbow Tile Mate from `Roffe' or equivalent, conforming to M-63

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Bedding:

2.1.1 The sub-grade shall be cle aned, wetted and mopped. The bedding shall then b e laid e venly over the surface, as descr ibed above, tamped and corrected to desired level and allowed to harden enough to offer a rigid cushion to tiles and to enable the mason to place wooden planks across and squat on it.

2.1.2 The white/coloured tiles sh all then be laid on the cement mortar be dding of 12 mm. thickness, in CM

1:4. The mortar shall have sufficient plasticity for laying and there shall be no hard lumps that would interfere with th e evenness of the beddin g. The base shall be clea ned and well wetted, before laying. The mortar shall then be spread in thickness not less than 10 mm. at an y



Page 321 of 430

place and a verage 12 mm. thick. The proportion of the cement mor tar shall be a s specified in the item.

2.2 Fixing tiles:

2.2.1 The tiles befo re laying shall be en mallet till they ar e properly be dded and in

level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or join ts. The join ts between the tiles shall be as thin as possible in straight line or as per pattern.

2.2.2 The tiles shall not have staggered joints. The joints shall be true to center line both ways. The Nahni trap coming in the flooring shall be so pos itioned that its grating shall re place only one tile as far as possible. Wh ere full size tiles cannot be fixed , they shall be cu t (Sawn) to the required size and the edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. After the tiles are laid, the join ts shall be cle aned of grey cement grout with a wire b rush to a dep th of about 5 mm. and the n grouted with white ceme nt with or without pig ment to match the shade of the topping of tiles. The same cement slurry shall then be spread over the whole surface in a thin coat to protec t the surface from abrasive damage and to fill up pin h oles that ma y exist on the surface. White cement with or without matching pig ment shall be used for pointing the join ts. After fixing the tile finally in an even plane the flooring shall be kept wet and allowed to cure undisturbed for 7 days.

2.2.3 While laying, any chiselling which may be required for making the skirting or dado flush with the

plaster and/or other finishes shall be done. Necessary grooves of required size in cm., between plaster and/or other finishe s, dado or skirting (i f required) shall be p rovided. Forming machine- cut/rounded e dges, gutters, sills, pla tforms, channels, curbing, e tc. if any, i f req uired shall be provided as per the drawing and design.

2.2.4 In places where full tiles cannot be fixed, the tiles shall be cut to the size and smoothened a t the

edges to give straight and true joints.

2.2.5 All necessary slopes, gradients and levels shall be truly maintained as required and directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

2.3 Cleaning:

2.3.1 The surplus cement grout that may ha ve come out of the join ts shall be cleared off be fore it sets. Once the floor has se t, it shall be carefully washed and clean ed by dilu te acid and dried . Proper precautions and measures shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are n ot damaged in any way till the completion of the construction.

2.3.2 If any tile is disturbed or damaged it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished.


3.1 The work don e shall be me asured in m 2. for the visible area of work done in floo r and dado.

The length and width of the flooring shall be measured between the faces of skirting or dado or plastered fac e of walls as the case ma y be. The pa ving under d ado or skirtin g shall not b e measured. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for any opening in the floor of area upto

0.1 m2.

Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floors at different levels in the same room. The dado will be measured from the finish floor level to the top of tile fixed.

3.2 The rate shall include the cost of all materials (inclusive of all taxes, levies, and delivery at site), labour

& sundry involved in all the operations, at all floors, at any height and level, as described



Page 322 of 430

above. It shall also include for breakage and wast age. Floa ting materials and ma rgin of pro fit shall also be included. All material samples shall be got approved by the Architect/Engineer-in- charge before placing orders.

3.3 No extra shall be paid for any small quantit ies like narrow widths, mitred & returned ends,

rounds & cutting, fixing and making good upto & around pipes, fittings and fixtures etc.

3.4 The rate shall include for fixing the flooring in compo site pattern a s per the drawings, using different materials and sizes. The me asurements of the different ma terials shall be taken category-wise separately and paid accordingly.

3.5 The basic rate if at all provided or agreed upon includes cost of material, all taxes, levies & cost of delivery at site.


9.4.1 Providing & laying 25 mm. thick green polished kotah of approved quality, selected and

sorted for uniform colour, in floor, otta, sill, skirting, dado etc., in required sizes up to 60 cm. and as per design with normal pattern (square, rectangular) as per drawings, including cement mortar 1:6 bedding of required thickness, joints & pointing as specified, three or more coats of polishing (with oxalic acid) up to mirror finish surfaces with different grades of Emery, curing, daily moping with water & kerosene as directed for at least 15 days or up to the satisfaction of the Architect & Engineer-in-charge, with selected brown kotah to form bands etc. complete. (NO WAXING WILL BE PERMITTED).

1.0 Materials: Water shall con form M-1. Lime mortar shall conform to M-10. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11. Po lished kotah shall c onform to M-49 and shall be of reason ably un iform colour. The size of the kotah shall be upto 60 cm. only. Waxing shall not be permitted.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Each slab shall be cut to the required size and shape and fine chisel, dressed at all the edges . the work shall be carried ou t in normal pattern (square or rectangular), with or without bands of selected brown kotah stone etc. as pe r drawi ng and as directed by the Architect. The side s thus dressed shall ha ve full con tact if laid along a straight edge. The sides s hall be tab le rubbed with coarse sand, before paving. All angles and edges of the slabs shall be truly square and free form chipping and shall g ive a plane surface . The th ickness of the slab shall be 25 mm. (average) as specified in the item but not less than 20 mm. at any place of the slab.

2.2 Bedding for the kotah slab flooring shall be of cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement: 6 coarse sand) of average thickness 20 mm. as given in the description of the item. Sub grade shall be cleaned, wetted and mopped. Morta r of the specified mix and thickness shall be then be spread on an area sufficient to receive one kotah slab. The sl ab shall be washed clean before laying . It shall be laid on top pressed, ta pped gently to bring it in level with the other slabs. It shall then be lifted and laid aside. Top surface of the mortar shall then be corrected by adding fresh mortar at hollows or de pressions. The mortar shall then be allo wed to harden a bit. Over this surface, cement slurry of honey-like consistency shall be applied. The slab shall then be gently placed in position and tapped with wooden mallet till it is properly padded in level with and close to the adjoining slab . The join t sh all be as fine as possible. The slabs fixed in the floor adjoining the wall shall en ter not less th an 10 mm. un der the pl aster, skirting or d ado. The junction between the wall and floor shall be finished nea tly. T he finish ed surface shall be true to levels and slopes, as directed.

2.3 While laying, any chiselling which may be required for making the skirting or dado flush with the

plaster and/or other finishes shall be done. Necessary grooves of required size in cm., between plaster and/or other finishe s, dado or skirting (i f required) shall be p rovided. Forming machine-



Page 323 of 430

cut/rounded e dges, gutters, sills, pla tforms, channels, curbing, e tc. if an y, i f requ ired, shall be provided as per the drawing and design.

2.4 In places where full tiles cannot be fixed, the tiles shall be cut to the size and smoothened a t edge to give straight and true joints.

2.5 All necessary slopes, gradients and levels shall be truly maintained as required and directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

2.6 The floor sha ll be kept we t for a minimum period of 7 days, so that bedding and joints set properly.

2.7 Polishing sh all be normally commenced after 14 da ys of la ying the slab. First polishing shall be

done with carborundum of 60 - 120 grade grit fitted in the hea vy machine and then second polishing shall be done with carborundum of 220 to 350 grade grit fitted in the heavy machine. Water shall be properly used during polishing. The flo oring shall th en be washe d clean with water and oxalic acid. As directed by the Architect and as specified in the item, no waxing will be permitted.

2.8 If any tile is disturbed or damaged it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished.

2.8 The holes required for Na hni traps, pip es any other fittings shall be made with out an y extra cost.


3.1 Kotah slab flooring shall be measured in m2.

for visible area of work done.

3.2 No deductions shall be m ade nor extra paid for any opening in the floor area upto 0.1 m 2.

Nothing e xtra shall be paid for use of cut tiles or for laying the floors at differen t leve ls in the same room or court yard. Kotah slabs laid in floor bo arders and bands etc. shall be measured in the same item and noth ing extra shall be payable on account of these or similar bands formed of half or multiples of half size standard tiles/or other uncut tiles.

3.3 The treads of stairs and steps paved with t iles withou t nosing shall also be measured under this item.

3.4 The rate shall include the cost of all materials (inclusive of all taxes, levies, and delivery at site), labour & sundry involved in all the operations, at all floors, at any height and level, as described above. It shall also include for breakage and wast age. Floa ting materials and ma rgin of pro fit shall also be included. All material samples shall be got approved by the Architect/Engineer-in- charge before placing orders.

3.5 No extra shall be paid for any small quantit ies like narrow widths, mitred & returned ends, rounds & cutting, fixing and making good upto & around pipes, fittings and fixtures etc.

3.6 The rate shall include for fixing the flooring in compo site pattern a s per the drawings, using

different materials and sizes. The me asurements of the different ma terials shall be taken category-wise separately and paid accordingly.

3.7 The basic rate, if a t a ll pro vided or agreed upon in cludes cost of material, all taxes, levies &

cost of delivery at site.

3.8 The risers of steps, skirting or dado shall be measured in m 2. Length shall be mea sured along the

finished faces of risers, skirting or d ado. Heigh t s hall be meas ured from finished leve l o f treads or floor to top. Lining of pillars shall be measured under this item.



Page 324 of 430


9.5.1 Providing & fixing green double polished kotah of 25 mm. thick of uniform size and colour for platforms, staircases, sinks, shelves, morry etc. in floor, dado or facia etc. up to 1.0 m. long, including necessary machine-cut edges (uniform thickness) rounded edges, necessary cement mortar bedding in C.M. 1:2 of required thickness. Cement joints and pointing as specified with polishing (with oxalic acid), curing, daily mopping with water and kerosene as directed for at least 15 days or up to the satisfaction of the Architect & Engineer-in-charge etc. complete.

1.0 Materials & Workmanship: The rele vant specifications of item n o. 9 .4.1 shall be fo llowed

except that the thickness of kotah shall be 25 mm. and the kotah shall be double polished. The size of the ko tah shall be u pto 1.0 m. on ly. Waxing shall not be per mitted. The p olishing shall be done manually instead of machine polishing and bedding shall be in CM 1:2.

2.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment: The relevant specifications of item no . 9.4.1 shall be

followed. The rate shall be for a unit of one m2.

9.6.1 Providing and laying 63 mm. thick I.P.S (Indian Patent) 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand :

4 graded aggregate 20 mm. nominal size), laid in one layer finished with trowel finish with using 1:1 cement mortar for filling the minor holes etc. complete.

1.0 Materials: Water shall c onform to M-1. Cemen t sh all conform to M-3. Sand s hall conform to M-6.

Aggregate 20 mm. no minal size shall conform to M-12. Cement concrete 1:2:4 proportion measured by volume shall conform to relevant specification of ordinary grade 1:2:4 concrete.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Preparation of Surface: Before the operation for laying the topping is started , the surface of the base co ncrete shall be thoroughly cleaned o f all d irt, loose particles, caked mortar droppings and laitance, if any, by scrubbing with coir or steel wire brush. Where the concrete has hardened so much tha t roughening of surface b y wire brush is not possible , the surface shall be roughened by chipping or hacking at close intervals. The surface shall then be cleaned with water an d kept wet for 12 hours and surplus water shall be removed b y mo pping before the topping is laid.

2.2 Laying:

2.2.1 The screed strips shall be fixed o ver the base concrete dividing it into suitab le pa nels. Be fore

placing the c oncrete for topping, nea t cement slurry shall be thoroughly br ushed into th e prepared surface of the base concrete just ahead of the finish. Concrete of specified proportion and thickness shall be laid in alternate panels to re quired leve l and slope and thoroughly tamped and cement concrete 1:2:4 shall conform to relevant specifications of section 2.00.

2.2.2. The cement concrete flooring of 63 mm. thick (Average) is to be laid as per the site condition. The concrete shall be mixe d in a mechanical mi xer at the work. Hand mixed ma y however be allowed for smaller quantities of work an d in case of failure of mac hines or as p ermitted by the Architect. It shall carried be out on a wa ter tight platform and care shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the mass is u niform in colour and consistency. However, in such cases 10% more cement th an otherwise required shall have to be used without any extra cost. The mechanical mixing sh all be do ne for a period o f 1.5 to 2 min utes. The qu antity of wate r shall be just sufficient to produce a den se conc rete of required workability for the purpose. Flooring of specified thickness shall be laid in accordance with approved pattern or as directed. Finishing operation shall start shortly after t he cessation of beating and shall be spread over a period of one to six hours depending upon the tempe rature and atmospheric co nditions. Th e surface shall be le ft for some time till moisture disappears from it. Fresh quan tity of cemen t shall be mixe d with water to form a thick slurry and spread over the surface while the concrete is still green. Use of dry cement or cement and s and mixture sprinkled on this surface to sti ffen the concrete or absorb excessive moistu re shall not be permitted. The cement slurry shall then



Page 325 of 430

be properly p ressed twice by means o f iron floats , on ce, when the slurry is app lied and the second time when cement starts setting and is to be fin ished smo oth. The surface shall be marked with string or B.R.C . fabric ja li to make the surface non-slippery as and when directed. The junction of floors with wall plaster, dado or skirting shall be rounded off wher e so required upto 25 mm. radius. Flooring in la vatories and bath r ooms shall b e laid a fter fixing o f water closet and squatting pans and floor trap s which shall be plugged while laying the floors and opened after the floors are completed . Any damage , done to wa ter supply or sanitary fitting s during execution of work shall be made good.

2.2.3 After the final set, the concrete shall be k ept continu ously wet, if r equired by p onding, for a period of not less than 7 days from the date of placement.

2.2.4 The form work shall be provided if necessary as directed by Architect. Concreting shall be done as per

alternate ba y method with necessary center ing either b y mastic or ce ment mor tar as directed.

2.3 Finishing the Surface: After the con crete has be en fu lly compacted it shall be finished b y trowelling or floating wi th n eat cemen t r endering. Finishing operati ons shall star t shortly after the compaction of concrete and the surface shall be trowelled three times at in tervals so as to produce an uniform and h ard surface. The satisfac tory resistance of floor to wear and tear , depends largely upon the care with whi ch trowelling is carried out. The time interval a llowed between successive trowelling is very important . Immediately a fter placing cement rendering, only just suffi cient trowelling shall be do ne to gi ve a l evel surface . Excessive trowelling in the earlier stage s shall be avoided as th is tends to bring a layer in cement to the surface. Sometime, a fter the first trowelling, the duration depending u pon the te mperature and atmospheric conditions and the rate of setting of the cement used, the surfa ce shall be retrowelled to close any pores in the surfac e and to bring to surface and to scrape off any excess water in concrete or any laitance. No dr y cement shall be used directly on the surface to absorb moisture or to stiffen the mix. The final trowelling shall be done well before the concrete has become too hard but at s uch a time th at considerable pressure is required to make any impression on the surface.

If directed by the Architect & Engineer-in-charge, approved minera l pigment shall be added to the rendering to give desired colour and shade to the flooring at no extra cost.

When 1:2:4 mix is specified th e topp ing shall be re ndered with 1 :1:2, (1 part cement mor tar with a suitable mineral pigment (if directed) , 1 part sa nd and 2 part s grit - 6 m m. and down size), instead of cement o nly. If specified in the sch edule o f qua ntities, the flooring shall be machine polished as per Architect & Engineer- in-charge's instructions.

Wherever the paten t flooring is used as a finish ing on roof, the joints shall be filled with an approved bitumastic filler in a workman-like manner.

Ironite Topping: Instead of finishing the top with rendering coat of 1:1 cement mortar, the top shall be finished with ironite topping. Unless, other wise specified , o ne part o f ironite an d four parts of ordin ary cement b y weigh t shall be mixed dry thoroughly. This dry mixture shall be mixed with gr it 6 mm. (1 /4") and down size or as otherwise directed in the ratio of 1 :2 b y volume and well turned o ver. Just eno ugh water sh all be added to this dry mix and mixed thoroughly well and laid to u niform thickness of 12 mm. and compacted. After the initia l set has started the surface shall be finished as directed.


3.1 The rate shall include the cost of all materials an d labour involved in all the operation s

described above. No dedu ction shall be made or e xtra paid for a ny opening u pto 0 .1 m 2.

in area, in the floor, nothing extra shall be paid for la ying the floor at different levels in the same room or the courtyard.



Page 326 of 430


9.8.1 Providing and laying interlocking paver blocks of high density 60 mm thick M-40 grade

for footpath, parking areas, service lanes and other areas as mentioned in the drawing. The metalling and sand bedding shall be done as per the drawing and it shall be paid in relevant item. The work of the paving blocks shall be executed in line and level. It should be laid in such a way that the no cutting of the paver block to be necessary. Paver blocks shall be compacted and shall be re-laid if necessary.

1.0 Material: T he com pressive stre ngth of t he in terlocking pave r blo ck shall be mi nimum 4 00

kg/sq.cm. and water ab sorption shoul d be le ss th an 6% by weight. Abrasi on resistance should be le ss than 2 (ma ximum permi ssible value 3 mm ) Same shall be m anufactured by automatic press and compaction must include vibration and pressing force not l ess than 200 tones. The blocks should be steam cured.

2.0 Base on whi ch th e p aver blo cks to b e laid shall be levell ed and well co mpacted with

mechanical compa ctor. Sp ecial care of con solidation shall be taken to assure a perma nent laying. The d epth of the b ase shall be as per the design and drawing. Base shall be level ed properly. It shall be done with long and strong skreed board. Pipes or skreeding bar may also be used. A frame of steel section shall be made to maintain the base. The skreed shall not be warped or twisted.

2.1 The pavers shall be placed in the pattern as per drawing and detail close together. The space

between the pavers should be minimum and consistent. The overall pattern shall be uniform. If require, then the stone shall be cut with a splitter chiesel or masonry saw as require.

2.2 The pave rs should then b e tamped do wn an d leve led with a vibrating plate co mpactor. Th is will

bring the pavers to their true grade as well a l evel the stones. Sand will be forced int o spaces to make stones firm and free of movement. Dry fine sand shall be sweeped above the paver block.

3.0 Mode of pay ment: Rate shall be incl usive of a ll types of material i ncluding handling charges, all

types if lead and lift, all types of labour charges, all types of taxes, duties, octroi et c. and transportation charges. It shall be in clsuve of wastage and over heads and profits.The unit of measurement shall be sq.meter.

9.9.1 Providing & fixing white p olished ma rble of 12 mm . thick of uni form si ze a nd colo ur fo r

window sill, sides and t op, as per design ,with recess, to re cive aluminum window , including necessary machine-cut edges (uniform thickness) rounded edges, necessary cement mortar bedding in C.M. 1:2 of require d thickn ess. Ce ment joints and p ointing as specified with polishing (with oxalic acid), curing, up to the satisfaction of the Architect & Engineer-in-charge etc. complete.

1.0 The relevant specification of item no. 9.4.1 shall be followed except that the 12mm thk white

polished marble to be used instead of green polished kotah.

9.10.1 Providing & laying in posit ion, vitrified tiles of approved make & colour, of first quality of any size as

per design, set in cement slu rry over a mini mum 12 mm. thick cement mortar 1:4 bedding a nd laid to p roper sl ope an d l evel. Joi nts shall be filled with self mat ching colour (white cement plus pigment). Curing & cleaning with mild oxalic acid etc. complete to be done for flooring, dado or



Page 327 of 430

channel work, as directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11. The vitrified tiles shall

be of first quality and make as specified in the item. The Vitrified tiles shall be of, Regency or Bell make. The pigmen t used for mixing with white cement for po inting shall be of Rainbow Tile Mate from `Roffe' or equivalent, conforming to M-63

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Bedding:

2.1.1 The sub-grade shall be cle aned, wetted and mopped. The bedding shall then b e laid e venly over the surface, as descr ibed above, tamped and corrected to desired level and allowed to harden enough to offer a rigid cushion to tiles and to enable the mason to place wooden planks across and squat on it.

2.1.2 The white/coloured tiles sh all then be laid on the cement mortar be dding of 12 mm. thickness, in CM 1:4. The mortar shall have sufficient plasticity for laying and there shall be no hard lumps that would interfere with th e evenness of the beddin g. The base shall be clea ned and well wetted, before laying. The mortar shall then be spread in thickness not less than 10 mm. at an y place and a verage 12 mm. thick. The proportion of the cement mor tar shall be a s specified in the item.

2.2 Fixing tiles:

2.2.1 The tiles befo re laying shall be soaked in water for at least two hour s. Neat gre y cement grout at 3.3

Kg ./Cement/m2.

of honey-like consistency shall be spread o ver the morta r bedding as directed. The edges of the tiles shall be smeared with neat cement slurry. The tiles shall then be well pressed and gentl y tapped wi th a wooden mallet till they ar e properly be dded and in level with the adjoining tiles. There shall be no hollows in bed or join ts. The join ts between the tiles shall be as thin as possible in straight line or as per pattern.

2.2.2 The tiles shall not have staggered joints. The joints shall be true to center line both ways. The Nahni trap coming in the flooring shall be so pos itioned that its grating shall re place only one tile as far as possible. Wh ere full size tiles cannot be fixed , they shall be cu t (Sawn) to the required size and the edges rubbed smooth to ensure straight and true joints. After the tiles are laid, the join ts shall be cle aned of grey cement grout with a wire b rush to a dep th of about 5 mm. and the n grouted with white ceme nt with or without pig ment to match the shade of the topping of tiles. The same cement slurry shall then be spread over the whole surface in a thin coat to protec t the surface from abrasive damage and to fill up pin h oles that ma y exist on the surface. White cement with or without matching pig ment shall be used for pointing the join ts. After fixing the tile finally in an even plane the flooring shall be kept wet and allowed to cure undisturbed for 7 days.

2.2.3 While laying, any chiselling which may be required for making the skirting or dado flush with the plaster

and/or other finishes shall be done. Necessary grooves of required size in cm., between plaster and/or other finishe s, dado or skirting (i f required) shall be p rovided. Forming machine- cut/rounded e dges, gutters, sills, pla tforms, channels, curbing, e tc. if any, i f req uired shall be provided as per the drawing and design.

2.2.4 In places where full tiles cannot be fixed, the tiles shall be cut to the size and smoothened a t the

edges to give straight and true joints. 2.2.5 All necessary slopes, gradients and levels shall be truly maintained as required and directed by the

Architect and Engineer-in-charge.



Page 328 of 430

2.3 Cleaning:

2.3.1 The surplus cement grout that may ha ve come out of the join ts shall be cleared off be fore it sets. Once the floor has se t, it shall be carefully washed and clean ed by dilu te acid and dried . Proper precautions and measures shall be taken to ensure that the tiles are n ot damaged in any way till the completion of the construction.

2.3.2 If any tile is disturbed or damaged it shall be refitted or replaced, properly jointed and polished.


3.1 The work don e shall be me asured in m 2. for the visible area of work done in floo r and dado.

The length and width of the flooring shall be measured between the faces of skirting or dado or plastered fac e of walls as the case ma y be. The pa ving under d ado or skirtin g shall not b e measured. No deduction shall be made nor extra paid for any opening in the floor of area upto 0.1 m

2. Nothing extra shall be paid for laying the floors at different levels in the same room. The dado

will be measured from the finish floor level to the top of tile fixed.

3.2 The rate shall include the cost of all materials (inclusive of all taxes, levies, and delivery at site), labour & sundry involved in all the operations, at all floors, at any height and level, as described above. It shall also include for breakage and wast age. Floa ting materials and ma rgin of pro fit shall also be included. All material samples shall be got approved by the Architect/Engineer-in- charge before placing orders.

3.3 No extra shall be paid for any small quantit ies like narrow widths, mitred & returned ends,

rounds & cutting, fixing and making good upto & around pipes, fittings and fixtures etc.

3.4 The rate shall include for fixing the flooring in compo site pattern a s per the drawings, using different materials and sizes. The me asurements of the different ma terials shall be taken category-wise separately and paid accordingly.

3.5 The basic rate if at all provided or agreed upon includes cost of material, all taxes, levies & cost of delivery at site.


9.11.0 Providing & laying in position acid - alkali resistance ceramic “ Endura” or Equivalent tiles

of approved colour, size and thickness of first quality as per design, set in cement slurry over a minimum 12 mm. thick cement mortar 1:4 bedding and laid to proper slope and level. Joint of 4mm wide x depth same as tile’s thickness shall be filled with CNSL resin based mortar as per manufacturer’s specification, including curing and cleaning with mild oxalic acid etc. complete, as shown and specified etc. complete, as directed by Architects and Engineer-in-charge.

The workmanship and material shall be as per manufacturer.The relevant specification of item no. 9.4.1 shall be followed except that the acid - alkali resistance ceramic to be used instead of

green polished kotah.The rate shall be for a unit of one m2

9.11.1 Do-as-above but tile 15mm thk

9.11.2 Do-as-above but tile 15mm thk



Page 329 of 430

9.12.1 Providing and laying 2mm thk Vinyl flooring using Wonderfloor vinyl flooring, Armstrong vinyl floor tiles or equivalent, as approved by the Architect, in desired pattern and design, in required shade and finish, over 63 mm thk IPS,with proper rubber based adhesive solution, such as Dunlop S-758 or equivalent. The rate includes making seamless joints and cleaning the flooring etc. complete, as directed.

1.0 Material : Vinyl flooring/floor tiles shall conform to M-53. The adhesive solution shall be rubber

based, such as Dunlop S-758 or equivalent.

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 The sub-grad e shall be even, hard, cle aned and we ll dried, be fore the commencement of laying, so as to provide goo d adhesion. Incase the sub grade is not properly le veled or even, a 63 mm thk IPS shall be provided for the tiles. The bedding mortar shall be as per item no 9.6.1

2.2 A coat of ap proved base binding agen t, a r ubber ba sed adhesive solution o f thickness a s

specified by the Manufactu rer, shall then be spread e venly over the bedding/su b grade. The tiles/roll shall be then fixed to the floor, in the pattern a nd colour arrangement ind icated in the Architect's dr awing or as instructed b y the Engi neer-in-charge. Th e join ts shall be join ted with the same ad hesive solu tion. After allowing it to become sufficiently dry, the tile s/roll shall b e pressed down with even pressure until it adheres well to the bed material. During application of pressure, if the adhesive solution rises from the joints, it shall be removed. Th ermo welding with vinyl ch ord or cold sealant weld ing ensures seamless waterproof surface . The flooring shall be laid in accordance with approved manufacturer's directions.

2.3 The floor sh all be cleane d with the tile fini sh wax and polished with muslin cloth, to the satisfaction of the Engineer -in-charge. The floor ing shall be inspected after 30 days for any adjustments, repairs or replacement.


3.1 The clear visible area of w ork done, floo ring, skirtin g and dado, sh all be measur ed and paid. The rate sha ll include all materials, la bour, tools an d equipmen ts required for satisfac tory completion of the item.


9.13.1 Providing and fixing in position, 25 to 38 mm. thick acid and alkali resisting Red Mandana stone of approved size and shape, for flooring, skirting and dado, including two coats of acid and alkali preventive primer, fixing on average 37 mm. thick cement mortar bedding 1:3 (1 part of cement and 3 part of coarse sand) with acid proof powder, keeping the joints 6 mm. to 10 mm. wide all around and filling the same with epoxy resin and hardener, including hand/machine polishing, wax polishing etc. complete, as directed.

The relevant specification of item no . 9.4.1 shall be followed same except tha t Red mandana stone shall be used instead of kotah as specified in the item. Approved quality of acid and alkali preventing primer shall be applied uniformly in two coats over the slab or concret e surface on which the flooring is to be laid. Acid-alkali proof powder shall be mixed with cement as per the manufacturer's specificatio ns, to prepar e the ce ment mortar for b edding. The c ement-powder mix and sand shall be mixed in the pro portion of 1 :3 and the mor tar shall be prepared. The stones of desired size



Page 330 of 430

shall be laid on the mortar bed of th ickness 37 mm. for flooring and 15- 20 mm. for dado/skirting , in proper line and level with joints of eve n thickness of 6 to 10 mm., all around.

The joints shall then be ra ked to 12 to 19 mm. deep and filled wi th epoxy base d resin. The resin shall be mixed with q uick drier and acid-a lkali proof powder. The stones shall be either hand polished or machine polished and cleaned with oxalic acid and then wax polished.

9.14.1 Providing and laying light coloured first quality Ceramic/glazed tiles in d ado on 10mm. thick

cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) fixed in 1:1 cement mortar behind the tiles, pointing in white cement and jointed with wh ite cement &pi gment with re sidues a s p er drawing &approved by Engineer -In charge or Architect complete.

1.0 Materials : The vitrified floor tiles shall conform to M-57. Cement mortar shall conform to M-11.

2.0 Workmanship: The relevant specifica tion of ite m no. 9. 3.1 shall b e followed. The joints shall be

filled with Roffe/unitiles or equivalent grouting materials, conforming to M-67 etc. complete. 3.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment : The relevant specification of item no. 9.3.1 shall be

followed.



Page 331 of 430

IRON & STEEL WORK

10.1.0 Providing, erecting and fixing in position structural steel sections confirming to IS:806:1968 and IS:1161:1979 for the work of sheds, canopy, space frame, industrial buildings including necessary RHS & SHS of TATA, rolled joists, channels, angles and angle cleats, gusset plates, chequred plate, position hips and jack lifters, purlins,etc. including cutting and welding the members as per detailed drawing and design. The rate shall include sand blasting of the steel sections, plates,2 coat of zinc chromate yellow oxide primer and 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make over all the surfaces of the steel sections.( Only standard measurements will be paid for). Shop drawings for the connection details shall be prepared for the approval of the architect. Gusset plates, Corner plates, joining plates etc. will be profiled and the rate of the profile cutting shall be including in the rate quoted.

1.0 Materials: The structural steel work shall conform to M-22. Zinc cromate yellow oxide/red oxide primer

to IS:102-1962. Enamel paint to M-44.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The steel sections, as specified or required, shall be straightened and cut square, to the correct lengths, as per drawings and design, measured with a steel tape. The sections shall be cold straightened and the finished goods shall be free from bending, twisting and other such defects. The cut ends, exposed to view shall be finished smooth. No two pieces shall be welded or otherwise jointed, to make up the required length or member, except as indicated in the drawing or as directed. All straightening and shaping, to form the specified shape and size shall be done by application of pressure and not by hammering. Any bending or cutting shall be carried out in such a manner, as not to impair the strength of the metal. All operations shall be done in cold state, unless otherwise directed/permitted.

2.2 Steel riveted or bolted, in built-up sections, frame work: 2.2.1 The steel structure as shown in the drawings or as per di rection of the Architect a nd Engineer- in-

charge shall be laid out on a level platform to full scale or in par ts. A steel tape shall be used for measurements to ensure maximum accuracy.

2.2.2 The rate shall include all means of hoisti ng to place s with scaffolding and equipments , etc., cutting

chases, etc. in walls and floors of R.C.C., neat finishing, concreting, etc. 2.2.3 Wooden templates 12 mm. to 19 mm. thick or metal sheet template shall be made to

correspond to each connecting gusset plate/member and rivet holes shall be accurately marked on them and drilled . The te mplates shall be laid on the steel members, and holes of the steel members sha ll also be marked for drillin g. The base of steel colu mns and the position o f th e anchor bolts shall be carefully set out.

2.2.4 All stiffeners shall be formed by pressure and where practicable, the metal shall no t be cut and

welded in making these. In major works or where so specified, shop drawings giving complete details and information for the fabricatio n of the component par ts of the structu re, includ ing location, type, size, leng th and details of rive ts, bo lts, or weld shall be prepared in advance of the actual fabrication. The drawings shall indi cate the shop and fie ld rivets and b olts. The stee l members shall be distinc tly marked or st enciled with paint with the identif ication mark, as given in the shop drawings.



Page 332 of 430

2.2.5 Great accuracy shall be o bserved in fabrication o f various members, so that these can be

assembled without being u nduly packed, strai ned or forced into p osition and when built-up , shall be true and free from twists, links, buckl es or open joints. Before making holes in individual members for fabrication, the steel work intended to be riveted or bolted together, shall be assembled or clamped properly and tigh tly, so a s to ensure c lose abutting or lapping o f surfaces of the differen t me mbers, with proper jig s and fixtures. All contac t surfaces shall be cleaned and given a coat of primer . All stiffener s sh all bear tightly, both at top and bottom, without being drawn or caul ked. The abutting joints shall be cut or dressed true an d straight, in the required manner, as per the details and fitted close together, properly and tightly.

2.2.6 Web splice plates and fillers under stiffe ners, shall be cut within 3 mm. to fit properly, or flang e

angles, web plates o f gird ers shall have their ends flush with the top o f angle s forming the flanges, unles s otherwise required. The web plates w hen spliced shall ha ve cle arance of, no t more than 6 mm.

2.2.7 The erection clearance for cleared ends of members connecting ste el to steel shall preferably be not

greate r than 1.5 mm. The erection clear ance at the ends of beams with out web cleats shall not be more than 3 mm. at each end but wher e for a practical reason gre ater clearance is necessary, suitably designed seating shall be provided.

2.2.8 Pins and rollers shall be accurately turne d to gauge. These shall be straight and smooth and free

from flaw s. The roller b earing shall be provided with adequate arrangement for holding the girders or trusses resting on it. In columns caps and bases, the ends of shafts tog ether with the attached gusset angles, channels etc., after riveting together shall accurately be mechanised so that the parts butt connected against each other ov er the entire su rface of conta ct, connecting angles or channels shall be fabricated and placed in position with gr eater accuracy so tha t they are not unduly reduced in thickness by machining.

2.2.9 The ends of bearing stiffe ners shall be mechanised or ground to fit tightly, both at the top an d

bottom. All h oles shall ge nerally be dr illed to the req uired size and at required position . Su b punching shall be permitte d, provided it is done 3 mm. or less in diame ter and reamered thereafter to the required size. The holes for rive ts an d bolts shall be larger tha n the nomina l diameter of rivets or black bolts, as allowable by IS : 800.

2.2.10 Holes shall have their a xis perpendicula r to the surfa ce bored through. The drilling or reamin g shall

be free from burrs an d the holes shall be cl ean and accurate, to the diame ter specified in the drawings. No enlargement of the holes by filling, man drilling or oxyacetylene flame shall be allowed. Maximum de viation for spacing of two holes shall be + 1 mm. Holes for counter sun k bolts shall be made in such a manner, that their heads fit flush with the surface after fixing. Hole reaming shall be allowed only if the nu mber of faulty holes do n ot e xceed 15 % o f the total number of holes for one joint.

2.2.11 The fabrication work shall be completed in wor kshop as far it is prac ticable to do so. Site jo ints shall be done with rivets and fitted bolts or black bolts, as shown in the drawings or as directed. Generally the following principles shall govern the u se of rive ts, turned and fitted bolts , and black bolts.

(i) Rivets and turned and fitted bolts shall be us ed where the connection required is of such a nature, that slip under load has to be avoided.

(ii) Black bolts may be used very sparingl y where a force is carried through a connection without impact, vibration or reversal of stresses.



Page 333 of 430

2.2.12 Assembly : The parts assembled for riveting shall be in close cont act with each other and the bearing stiffeners shall bear tightly, both at top and bottom, without being drawn or caulked. The abutting joints shall be cut or dressed true and straight and fitted close together. Members to be riveted shall b e properly p inned or bolted and rigidly held together while riveting. Hole for r ivets

and black bolts shall be of nominal dia meter plus 1.5 mm., for rive ts of nominal diameter less than 25 mm. and 2.0 mm., for r ivets o f nominal d iameter e xceeding 25 mm., un less specified otherwise. Drifting of ho les shall not be permitted exc ept to draw the parts toge ther and the drifting tools so used shall have maximum diame ter not e xceeding the no minal diame ter o f rivets or bolts. Drifting done during assembling shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes.

2.2.13 Riveting :

2.2.13.1 Rivets shall be used where the connection is such that slip under load has to be avoided.

2.2.13.2 Members to be riveted shall have all t heir parts firmly drawn and held together before a nd during riveting and special care shall be taken in this respect for all single rive ted connections. For multiple riveted connections, a service bolt shall be provided in every third or fourth hole.

2.2.13.3 The shanks of rive ts shall project beyond t he plate surface suffici ently so as t o fill the hol e

thoroughly and form the required head after riveting.

2.2.13.4 The riveting shall be done by hydraul ic or pneumatic process. Ho wever, where such facilitie s are not ava ilable, hand r iveting may be d one, if permitted by Archite ct and Engine er-in-charge. The rivet shall be hea ted red hot, care being taken to control the temperature of heating so as not to burn the steel. Rive ts of diameter less than 10 mm. may be fitted cold . R ivets shall b e heat finish w ith heads full and of equ al size. All loose, burnt or badly formed rive ts with concentric or different head s shall be cut out and replaced. The hea ds of rive ts shall be centra l to shanks and shall grip the assembled members firmly. In cutting out rivets, care shall be taken so as not to injure the rivets and the assembled members. Caulking or reoccupying shall not be permitted.

2.2.13.5 For testing rivets, hammer weighing app roximately 0 .25 Kg. shall be used. Both heads of the rivets

shall be tapped, slack rivets will give a hollow sound and a jar.

2.2.13.6 All rivet heads shall be painted with red lead paint, within a week of their fixing.

2.2.14 While bolting, all bolt head s and nuts shall be hexag onal and of e qual size, unless specified otherwise. The screwed threads shall conform to IS : 1363-1960 and the threaded surface shall not be tapered.

2.2.15 The nominal length of the bolt shall be the distance from the underside of the head to the farthest

end o f the shank. T he nominal diameter shall be the diameter at the shank above the screwed threads. Bo lts, nuts, washers shall be thoroughly cleaned and dipped in double bo iled linseed oil, before use. The bolts shall be of such length so as to project atleast 2 clear threads beyond the nuts when fixed in positions and these shall fit in the holes without any shakes. The nut shall be fit in the threaded ends of bolts properly, i.e by tightening them so as to trans fer the required tension. Where turned and fitted bolts are req uired to be u sed in place of rive ts, they shall be provided with washers not less than 6 mm. thick so that the nut when tightened shall not bear on the unthreade d body o f the bolt. Tapere d washers sh all be pro vided for all head s and nuts bearing on leve lled surfaces. The threaded portion of the bolts shall no t be within the thickness of the parts bolte d toge ther, it shall project through the n ut a tleast by 2 thread . The faces of the bolt he ads a nd nuts abu tting agains t steel members shall be ma chine finished . Where there is a risk of the nut being re moved or becoming loose due to vibrations or reversal of stresses, these shall be secured from slack ening by the use of lock nuts and spri ng washers of cross-cutting, as directed.

2.2.16 Bolts, nuts and washer s shall be thoroughly cleane d and dipped in double bo iled linseed oil before

use. The whole stee l work shall b e painted with a coat o f priming coat of red lead o xide and 3 coats of syn thetic e namel pain t a s per rele vant specification s of pain ting. However, the application shall be



Page 334 of 430

such that the first coat of paint shall be much lighter tha n the final coat, the second coat shall be slightly lighter than the fina l coat and the final coat shall be exactly of the

shade specified. Th is diffe rentiation is done to demarcate the no. o f app lication of pain ting coats.

3.0 Steel Work Welded:-

3.1 Workmanship:- 3.1.1 The relevant specifications of item No. 2 .2 shall be followed except that the steel work shall b e done

by weld ing. Straightening, shaping to fo rm, cutting and assembling shall be as per ite m no. 2.2 as far as applicable except tha t the wo rds `riveted or bolted ' shall be read as `welded' and holes sh all be made for the bolts used for tem porary fastening as shown in drawings. The definition of various terminologies in welding process shall be as follows:

3.1.1.1 Run: The me tal deposited during one p assage of the electrode or blow pipe , in making of a joint

3.1.1.2 Bead : A single run of weld metal deposited on a surface.

3.1.1.3 Weld : An union between two pieces of metal at faces rendered pl astic or liquid by heat or by

pressure or both. Filler metal may be used to effect the union. 3.1.1.4 Weld metal : All metal melted and/or made plastic in making a weld.

3.1.1.5 Butt weld : A weld in which the weld metal l ies substantially within the extensio n of the plane s of the

surface s of the par ts joined or within th e e xtension of the planes of the s maller o f the 2 parts, of diffe rent size. The edges of the metal pieces shall be bevelled or chiselled to th e required shape at the throat, for which no extra payment shall be made.

3.1.1.6 Crater : A d epression left in the weld metal where the arc was broken or th e fla me was

removed. 3.1.1.7 End crater : A crater at the end of a weld or at the end of a joint.

3.1.1.8 Fillet weld : A weld of approximately tr iangular cross-section joining tw o surfaces,

approximately at right angles to each other in a lap joint, tee jo int or corner joint. It shall be of two types 1) Continuous 2) Intermittent.

3.1.1.9 Fusion welding : Any welding process in which the we ld is made be tween metals in a state of fusion

without hammering or pressure. 3.1.1.10 Fusion Penetration :

3.1.1.10.1 In fusion welding, the depth to which the parent metal has been fused.

3.1.1.10.2 In spot, seam or projecting welding, the distance from the interface to the edge of the weld

nugget, measured in each case on a cross-section through the center of the weld and normal to the surface.

3.1.1.10.3 Non-fusion welding: A term applied to the deposition by Oxy-Acetylene process, of filler metal on

parent metal, without fusion of the latter. 3.1.1.10.4 Oxy-Acetylene pressure welding: Pressure welding in which an Oxy-Acetylene flame is used to



Page 335 of 430

make plastic the surface, to be united. No filler metal is used. 3.1.1.10.5 Throat: In a resistance welding machine , the distance from the center line o f the electrodes or

platens to th e nearest point of inter ference for fl at work or sheets. In case of seam-welding

machine with an universal head, the throat dep th is measured with the machin e arranged fo r transverse welding.

3.1.1.10.6 Throat thickness : The minimum thickness of weld metal in a fusion weld measured as under :

a) For a fillet weld or A, V, U, J or a bevel butt weld: Along a line passing through the roof.

b) For a close square-butt-weld: In the plane of the abutting faces.

c) For an open square-butt-weld: At the center o f the original ga p in a p lane parallel to the fusion faces.

3.2 Welding shall generally be done by electric process. The electric arc welding is usually ado pted and is econo mical. In absence of electricity, generators shall be used. Gas welding shall b e restored to using oxyace tylene flame with spec ific prior approval. Gas welding shall not b e permitted for structural steel work as it r equires heating of the members along with th e welding rod and temperature stresses are likely to be developed in the welded members. Precautions shall be taken to avoid distortion of the members due to temperature stresses.

3.3 The work sha ll be done as shown in the shop dr awings which sho uld clearly indicate var ious details

of the joints to be welded, shop and site welded as well as type of electrodes to be used. Symbol for w elding on pla ns and shop drawing shall be according to IS : 813-19 61. As far as possible, every effort shall be made to limit the welding that must be done after erection so that, improper welding that is likely to be done due to heights and difficult position on scaffolding etc., after erection, is avoided. T he maximum diameters of electrodes for welding any work shall be as under, unless otherwise specified.

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Average thickness of Maximum dia. of electrode plate

or section. to be used.

-------- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Less

than 5 mm. 3 mm.

5 mm. upto but not

including 8 mm. 4 mm.

8 mm. upto but not


10 mm. upto but not


16 mm. upto but not



Page 336 of 430


25 mm. and over 9 mm.

-------- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The welding work shall conform to IS : 816-1969.

3.4 Preparation of surface: Surfaces which are to be welded together shall be free from loose mill scale,

rust, p aint, grease or other foreign matt er. A coating o f b oiled linseed oil shall be permitted. 3.5 Assembly for welding: Before weld ing is commenced, t he p lates shall b e first broug ht

together and firmly clampe d or s pot welded, at specified dist ance. The temporar y connection has to be strong enough to hold the plates accurately in place without displacement.

3.6 Precautions: The operatio ns connected with welding and cutting equipment sh all conform to safety

requirement given in IS : 818-1968. 3.7 Welding process : The following points shall be borne in mind during the process of welding : (a)

Welds shall be made in flat position wherever practicable.

(b) Arc length, voltage and amperage shall be suited to the thickness of material, type of groove and other circumstances of the work.

(c) The sequ ence of welding shall be such that where possible, th e members which offer the greatest resistance to compression are welded first.

(d) Freedom of move ment of one member of t he jo int shall be allowed wherever possible. Wherever joints shall be welded allowance s hall be made for the mo vement of on e component to the order of 1.5 mm.

(e) The electr ode manipula tion dur ing w elding shall b e such as to ensure that (1) The base metal is in fus ed stage whe n the fil ler metal ma kes contact with i t. (2) The filler m etal does not overflow upo n any un fused base meta l. (3) The base meta l is no t under-cut a long the weld edges. (4) and that the metal floats, the slag, the oxides and the gas that bubbles to the surface behind the advancing pool.

3.8 Each time the arc is started , the electrode shall be moved in such a way that the fusion of the base

metal a t the starting point is assured. At the completion o f a run the movement o f electrode shall be adjusted or the electrode size changed.

3.9 After ever y in terruption o f the arc except at the completion o f a run, the arc shall be restarte d ahead

of previous deposit and then moved back to fill the cra ter or such alternative technique shall be used as will ensure comp lete filling of the crater or comple te fusion b etween the n ew and old depo sits and the base metal a t the po int of junction and result in con tinuous weld . Before the welding operation is completed, all traces of slag shall be removed from the deposit, by chipping if necessary a nd the deposit and t he adjoining base metal shall b e wire brushe d and cleaned at all poin ts. The requirements shall apply no t to su ccessive laye rs, but also to successive b eads and to the overlapp ing area wher ever a junction is made on starting a ne w electrode.

3.10 The weld shall be free from cracks, disconti nuity and other defects lik e under size, over size, under-

cutting etc. All the defective welds which shall be considered harmful to the strength shall cut out and re-welded.



Page 337 of 430

3.11 Finished weld s and adjacent part shall be prot ected with clean boiled linseed oil and after all slag has

been removed fr om the welds and adjacent parts, pain ting shall be d one after the same is approved.

2.12 All the members shall be thoroughly cleaned of rus t, cakes, dust e tc. and given a priming coa t of red

lead paint before fixing them in position.

2.13 Grinding to the finished level is to be do ne, if directed by the Architect and En gineer-in-charge.

All expose weld shall be ground smooth. Welds which have not been ground shall be scrubbed with a 10 % solution of H ydrochloric acid which shall be washed of with water before pain ting unless alkali resistant paint is used.

2.14 For erection the rele vant specifications of item no . 2.2 shall be adopted e xcept tha t while erecting a welding s tructure, adequa te means shall be emplo yed for temporary fasten ing the members together and bracing the framework until the joints are welded. Such means shall consist of bolts, tack weldin g or other positive de vices imparting sufficient strength and stiffness to resist all temporary loads and lateral forces including wind.


4.1 (a) All work shall be mea sured on the basis of finished dimensions, as fixed on site and

measured net unless specified otherwise.

(b) The weight of steel sections, steel s trips in fin ished works shall be calculated from standard weight on the same basis on which steel is supplie d to the Contr actor by the Client or thos e given in relevant IS Codes, if steel is arranged by the contractor.

(c) The weight o f steel plates and strips shall be taken from re levant IS Codes, based on 7.8 5 kg/m² for e very mm . s heet thickness, if s teel is su pplied b y the Contractor, otherwise, the weight shall be calculated on the basis on which steel is supplie d to the Contractor by the Client.

(d) Unless otherwise speci fied weight of cleats, brackets, packing pieces, bolts, nuts, washers, distance pieces, separators, diaphragm gusset (tak ing over all square dimension) fish plate s etc. shall be added to the weight of respective items.

(e) In riveted work, allowance shall be made fo r weight of rivet hea ds. No deductions shall b e made for rivet or bolt holes excluding holes for anchor or holding down bolts.

(f) For forged steel and steel castings, weight shall be calculated on the basis of 7850 kg/m3.

(g) Unless otherwise speci fied an add ition of 2.5 % of the weight o f structure shall be made for shop and site rivet heads in riveted steel structure.

(h) Dimensions other than cross sections and thickness of plates shall be measured to nearest 0.001 m.

(i) Mill tolerance shall be ignored when weight is determined by calculation.

4.2 The rate includes cost of all material, labour, erectio n, hoisting, s caffolding, sa fety measure s and sundry required for proper completion of the ite m of work, at all heights. This shall also include conveyance and delivery, han dling, loading, unload ing a nd storing etc. required fo r completion the item described above including necessary wastage involved.

4.3 The weight o f welding ma terial shall no t be added in the weigh t of members for payment and

nothing e xtra shall be paid for making a nd filling the temporary fas tening of me mbers during erection before welding.

4.4 The rate shall be for a unit of one kg.



Page 338 of 430

4.5 Only standard sectional weight will be considered and welding will not be considered in weight.

10.1.1 Rolled M.S.sections and M.S. Plates :YST 250 grade (I -

beams,Channel,Angle,M.S.plate)to be used for the fabrication of columns, beams,truss,rafter,tie box,tie,bracing etc.

1.0 The relevant specifications of item No10.1.0 shall be followed.

10.1.2 Pipes, squares, and rectangle hollow sections : Yst - 310 grade. (TATA BOX SECTIONS)

1.0 The relevant specifications of item No10.1.0 shall be followed.

10.2.1 Providing and Fixing 0.85 meter high MS steel railing in "B" class round

sections/RHS/SHS sections with vertical supports & pin connections with RCC with anchor fasteners as per drawing including one coat of metal primer & two coats of ready mix enamel paint, at all levels, complete as per the direction of Architect and Engineer- in-charge.

1.0 Materials: MS steel rail shall be of approved colour and make as specified in the item.

2.0 Workmanship, Mode of Measurements and Payment:

2.1 The railing sh all be fixed a s per the design, dr awing with necessary hardware. Work shall be

carried out with best workmanship and specification as per item no. 10.1.0. 2.2 The item shall be measured and paid in rmt. No hidde n measurements shall be measured and paid.

Only actual visible measurement shall be measured and wastage shall not be permitted

10.3.1 Providing, fabricating and fixing M.S. insert plates with lugs as per design of required sizes as per approved drawing, design and direction. Rate shall include the necessary arrangements in the shuttering works. Item includes the one coat of yellow oxide and three coats of enamel paint on outer surface etc. complete.

1.0 Materials, Workmanship &, Mode of Measurements and Payment: Work shall be carried out

with best workmanship and specification as per item no. 10.1.0. 1.1 The item shall be measured and paid in kg.

10.4.1 Providing, fabricating and fixing foundation bolts of required sizes as per approved

drawing, design and direction. Rate shall be inclusive of making pockets in RCC for foundation bolts, providing sleeve for foundation, making template for the same and grouting the sleeve with general concrete. If grouting with special chemical shall be done then it shall be supply (Considered in relevant item). Foundation bolts includes the necessary washers, nuts etc. including keeping the threads of the foundation bolts covered with grease and kerosene and plastic sheets etc. complete.

1.0 Materials, Workmanship &, Mode of Measurements and Payment: Work shall be carried out

with best workmanship and specification as per item no. 10.1.0.

1.1 The item shall be measured and paid in kg.



Page 339 of 430

PAINTING & POLISHING WORK

11.2.1 Providing & applying Distempering (3 coats) with oil bound washable distemper of approved manufacturer like Asian, Berger, Nerolac or equivalent and of required shade, on any surface to give an even shade, including a priming coat with alkali resistant primer and applying two coats of putty after thoroughly brushing the surface free from mortar dropping and other foreign matter and also including preparing the surface even and sand papered smooth etc., after applying of putty, complete, as directed..

1.0 Materials:

1.1 Oil bound washable distemper and cement primer if on plastered surfaces and woodorite, if on wood sur faces, sha ll be o f a pproved b rand an d ma nufacture. Th e dis temper shall be of required colour and shade and the same shall conform to IS : 428-1969. Paint shall conform to M-44.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Scaffolding:

Where scaffolding is r equired, it sh all be erected in such a wa y that as far as possible, no part of sca ffolding shall rest aga inst the surfac e to be dis tempered. A pr operly secure d stro ng an d well tied susp ended platform (Zoo la) ma y b e used for dis tempering. Wher e ladders are use d, pieces of old gunny bags s hall be tied at top a nd bottom to prevent scratches to the walls and floors. F or dis tempering to ceiling, prope r stage scaffolding shall be erected wher e necessary and the floor area shall be covered with plastic so that the flooring is not spoilt.

2.2 Preparation of surface:

2.2.1 The sur face shall be thoroughly c leaned o f all dust, d irt, mortar dropping and oth er foreign matter before white wash is to be applied.

2.2.2 The surface s poiled by smoke soot shall be scrapped with s teel wire brushes or stee l scrapers or

shall be ru bbed with over burnt surkhi or br ick bats. The surfac e shall be th en broomed to remove all dust and dirt and shall be washed with clean water.

2.2.3 Oil or greas e spots sha ll be remo ved by suitable chemical. Smooth surfaces sha ll be rubb ed with

wire brushes.

2.2.4 All unsound portion of the surface plaster shall be removed to full depth of plaster in rectangular patches a nd plastered ag ain a fter raking the mas onry join ts prop erly. Such p ortions shall b e wetted and allowed to dry. Any crevices, at any level shall be cleaned and filled with the plaster mortar and cured as above. They shall then be given one coat of white wash.

2.2.5 All unnecessary nails shall be removed; the holes, cracks, patches etc. shall be made good with

material similar in composition to the surface to be prepared.

2.2.1 The undecorated surface to be distempered shall be thoroughly brushed from dust, dirt, grease, mortar dropping and other foreign matter and sand papered smooth. New plaster surface shall be allowed to dry for a tleast 2 months before app lications o f d istemper or one coat of white wash with white cement shall be done prior to painting with distemper.

2.2.2 All unnecessary nails, hook s etc . shall be removed. Pitting in plas ter shall be mad e good with plaster again and papered with a fine grade sand paper and made smooth. A coat of distemper shall be ap plied over the p atches. The s urface sh all b e allowe d to dry thoroug hly be fore the regular coa t of d istemper is applied . T he su rface affected b y mo ulds, moss, fungi, a lgae lichens, e fflorescence etc . shall b e tr eated in accordance with IS : 2395 (Part- 1)-1966. Be fore applying distemper, any unevenness shall be made good by applying putty made out of plaster



Page 340 of 430

of par is mixe d with wa ter, on en tire sur face, including filling up the undulation a nd the n sand papering the same after it has dried.

2.3 Priming coat :

2.3.1 A pr iming co at of ceme nt primer o f ap proved man ufacture sh all be applied o ver th e pa pered surface in case of new wor k or undecora ted surface. If the distemper priming is done after the plastered wall surface dries completely, the distemper primer shall be avoided.

2.3.2 Application of primer and putty shall be done as under:

The pr imer s hall be app lied with a brus h on the clea n, dry and s mooth sur face. Hor izontal strokes sha ll be given firs t and vertical s trokes sha ll be applied immediately a fterwards. T his entire operation will co nstitute one coat. The surface shall be finished as un iformly as possib le leaving no br ush marks. A coat of putty (lapi) shall be applied to the entire surface. Putty shall be used o f re adymade or brought o f the compan y like Asia n as directed b y the Eng ineer-in- charge and Architect. The second coat of prim er a nd pu tty shall then be app lied and it sha ll thereafter be allowed to dry for at least 48 hours before oil bound distemper or paint is applied.

2.3.3 Oil bound distemper is not recommended to be applied within six mo nths of the co mpletion of wall plaster.

2.4. Preparation of oil bound distemper: 2.4.1 The dis temper shall be d iluted with mineral tu rpentine oil or a ny o ther prescribed thinner in a

manner recommended by the manufacturer only. Sufficient quantity of d istemper required for a day's work shall be prepared.

2.5 Application of Distemper coat :

2.5.1 On any surfaces, after the primer coat has dried for atleast 48 hours, the surface shall be lightly sand

papered to make it s mooth for rec eiving the dis temper, takin g care not to rub out the priming coa t. All loose particles sha ll be dus ted o ff after r ubbing. Minimum two coats of distemper sh all be applied with brush es in horizontal strokes fo llowed immediately by ver tical strokes which together shall constitute one coat. The subsequent coats shall be a pplied after a time interval of a t least 24 hours betw een 2 c onsecutive coats to allow proper drying of the preceding coat. The fin ished surface shall be e ven and uniform withou t patches, brush marks, distemper drops etc.

2.5.2 Sufficient quantity of distemper shall be mixed to finish one room at a time. The application of a coat in

each r oom shall be finished in one operation and no work shall be started in an y room which cannot be completed on the same day.

2.5.3 15 cm. doub le bristled dis temper brush shall be used . After a da y's work, brush es shall b e

thoroughly wa shed in ho t w ater with soa p so lution and hung down to dr y. Old br ushes which are dirty and caked with distemper shall not be used on the work.

2.6 Protective measure:

2.6.1 The surface of doors, windows, ventilators, floors, articles of furniture etc. and such other part of the bu

ildings which are no t to be d istempered shall b e protec ted from bein g splashed upon . Such surfaces shall be cleaned of distemper splashes, if any.


3.1 Priming coat of distemper primer, scraping of surface spoiled by smoke soot, removal of oil and

grease spots, treatment for infection of efflorescence, mould, moss, fungi, algae and lichen and patch repairs to plaster shall be included in this item for which nothing extra shall be paid.



Page 341 of 430

3.2 All the work s hall be measu red net in this item as in place subject to the following limits unless

otherwise stated hereinafter:

(a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m.

(b) Area in individual items shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 m2.

All work shall be measured in m2. No deductions shall be made for ends of joints, beams, posts etc.

and ope nings, no t exceeding 0 .5 m2. each and no addition shall be made for re veals, jambs,

soffits, sills etc. of these openings nor for finish around ends of joints, beams posts etc.

3.3 Deductions o f opening e xceeding 0 .5 m 2.

but no t e xceeding 3 .0 m 2.

each shall be made as follows and net addition shall be made for reveals, jambs, soffits etc. of these openings :

(a) When bo th the faces o f walls ar e pro vided with sa me fin ish, de ductions sha ll be mad e for one face only.

(b) When each face o f is provided with d ifferent finish, deduction shall be made for that side of frame for doors, windows etc. on which width o f reveal is less than th at of the other side but no deduction shall be made on the other side. Where the width of reveals on the bo th the faces of wall are equal, deduction of 50% of area of opening on each face shall be made from area of finish.

(c) When only one face of wall is tr eated and the ot her face is not treated, full deductions shall be made if the width o f the reveal on tre ated side is less than th at on untreated side but if the width of the reveal is equal or more than that on untreated side neither deductions nor additions to be made for reveals, jambs, soffits, sills etc.

3.4 In case o f op ening o f area exce eding 3 .0 m

2. each, deduction shall be ma de for openings but

jambs, sills and soffits shall be measured.

3.5 No deduc tions shall be ma de for a ttachments such a s casings, co nduits, pipes, electric wir ing and the like.

3.6 Corrugated s urfaces sha ll be measure d flat as fixed and no t g irth. The qua ntities measured shall b e incre ased by the follow ing p ercentage and the resultan t shall b e inc luded with the general areas:

(a) Corrugated steel sheets 14% (b)

Corrugated A.C. Sheets 20%

(c) Semi corrugated A.C. Sheets 10% (d)

Nainital pattern roof (Plain sheeting with rolls) 10% (e)

Nainital pattern roof (with corrugated sheets) 25%

3.7 Cornices and other wall fe atures, when they ar e p icked out in a differen t finish/colour sha ll be girthed and included in the general area.

3.8 Item includes removing nails , mak ing good holes, cr acks, patc hes with mater ials similar in composition of distemper.

3.9 The rate includes cost of all mater ials, labours, scaffolding, protective measures etc. involved in all the op erations described above, carried out at all floor heights, in any position , at all levels. This shall also include conveyance, delivery, handling, unloading, storing work etc.



Page 342 of 430


11.3.1 Providing & applying three coats of Glossy or Matt/luster enamel paint of desired shade, of

approved make, shade, brand and manufacture, on any surfaces, at all heights, to give an even shade, including thoroughly brushing the surface free from mortar droppings and other foreign matter and sand papering smooth. The paint shall be applied after applying a coat of primer and metal putty.

1.0 Materials: Glossy, Flat, Pearl Lus ter and Matt enamel paint sha ll conform to IS: 1932-1964 and

M-44B. 2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 General

2.1.1 The ma terials require d for work of painting work s hall be o btained dir ectly from appro ved manufacturers or approved dealer and brought to the site in maker's drums, cage etc. with seal unbroken.

2.1.2 All ma terials not in actua l use shall be kept properly protec ted, lid of con tainers shall be kep t closed and surface of paint in open or par tially ope n con tainers covered with a thin layer o f turpentine to preve nt formation of skin . T he mater ials which have become sta le or fla t due t o improper and long s torage shall n ot be used. The paint sha ll b e stirr ed thoroughly in its container be fore pour ing into small c ontainers. W hile app lying also , the p aint sha ll be continuously stirred in sma ller con tainer. No left o ver pain t shall b e pu t b ack in to s tock tins when not in use. The paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its con tainer before pouring into small containers.

2.1.3 If for a ny r easons, thin ning is nece ssary, the b rand o f thinner recommended b y th e manufacturer shall be used.

2.1.4 The surface to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt and grease shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. No painting on exterior or other exposed parts of the work shall be carr ied out in we t, damp or oth erwise unfavorable wea ther and all the surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before painting work is started.

2.1.5 For Gloss y, F lat, Pearl lus ter and Matt finish, pain ting of same spe cification sha ll be followed except that the type of paint shall be changed as per the direction of Architect and Engineer- in- charge, to give the desired finish.

2.2 Application:

2.2.1 Brushing operation are to be adjusted to the spreading capacity advised by the manufacturer of particular paint. The paint shall b e app lied evenly a nd smoo thly by me ans o f crossing and laying off. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time o ver a nd then brus hing a lternately in o pposite directions two or three times a nd the n fina lly brush ing lig htly in di rection at righ t a ngles to th e same. In this process, no brush marks sh all be left after the laying off is fin ished. The full process of crossin g and laying off will constitute one coat.

2.2.2 Each coat sh all be allowed to dry comp letely and lig htly rubbe d with very fine grade of sand paper and loose particles brushed off before next coat is applied. Each coat shall vary slightly in shade and shall b e got a pproved fr om Architec t & Engineer-in-charge be fore next coa t is started.



Page 343 of 430

2.2.3 Each coa t sh all b e ligh tly r ubbed down with sa nd pa per of fine p umice s tone a nd clean ed o ff dust

before the next co at is applied. No h air marks from the brush o r clogging of paint puddles in the corners of panels angles of mouldings etc. shall be left on the work.

2.2.4 Special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps etc.

2.2.5 Approved best quality brushes shall be used.


3.1 The new steel and other metal surface shall be measured under this item.

3.2 All the work shall b e measured net, in th e decimal system as executed, subject to the following limits unless otherwise stated herein after:

(a) Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m. (b)

Areas shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 m2.

3.3 No deductions shall b e made for openings not exceeding 0.5 m2

each and no a ddition shall be made for painting to beading, mouldings, edges, jambs, soffit etc. of such opening.

3.4 In case of fabricated structural steel and iron work, primer coat of oil paint shall be included with

fabrication. In case of trusses, if measured in m2, compound girders, stanchions, lattices, girder and

similar work, actual area shall be measured in m2

and no extra shall be paid for painting on bolts, h eads, nuts, washer s etc. No a ddition sh all b e made to the weigh t calc ulated for the purpose of measurements of steel and iron works for paint applied on shop or at site.

3.5 The differe nt surfaces sha ll be grouped into one gene ral item, ar eas of une ven s urface b eing

converted into equivalent plain areas in accordance with the relevant I.S. code for payment.

3.6 The rate shall inc lude the c ost of all materials, labour, scaffolding, protective measures etc but is excluding priming coat. required for the above specified operation, at all floors, at any height, in any position. Scrapping of surface, wa shing etc. of surfaces spoiled by smoke, soot, removal of o il and gre ase spots , treatment for in fection with e fflorescence, moulds , moss , fungi, a lgae and lich en shall n ot b e p aid e xtra. This sha ll also include con veyance, de livery, hand ling, unloading, storing work etc.

3.6 The rate shall be for an unit of one m2..

11.4.1 Providing and applying, 100% Acrylic paint of approved shade, on any surface (3 coats) to

give an approved brand or manufacture (Apex or equivalent) and of required even shade after thoroughly brushing the surface to remove all dirt and remaining all loose powdered materials.

1.0 Materials :

1.1 The water shall conform to M-1. Ceme nt water proofing paint shall conform to IS : 5410-1969, M-

44.8.(H) and shall be of approved shade.



Page 344 of 430

2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 Scaffolding : The relevant specifications of item No. 11.1.1 shall be followed.

2.2 Preparation of surface :

he relevant specifications of item no. 11.1.1 shall be followed except that the work white wash, colour wash shall b e sub stituted w ith water pro ofing cemen t pa int. Th e surfa ce shall be thoroughly wetted with clean water before cement water proofing paint is applied.

2.3 Preparation of paint : Portland cemen t pain t sha ll b e prepared b y ad ding pa int powd er to water

and stirring to obtain a thick paste, which shall then be diluted to a brushable consistency. Generally, equal volumes of paint powder and water make a satisfactory paint. In all cases, the manufacture's instructions shall be followed. The paint shall be mixed in such qua ntities as can be used up with in an hou r of mixin g as otherwise the mixture will set an d th icken, a ffecting flowing and finish. The lids of cement paint drums shall be kept tightly shut when not in use.

2.4 Application of Paint :

2.4.1 No painting shall be done when the paint is likely to be exposed to a temperature of below 70C

within 48 hours after application.

2.4.2 When wea ther cond itions are such as to cause damage, the w ork shall b e carried out in shadow as fa r as possible . This helps the proper har dening o f the pain t film b y keeping the surface moist for a longer period.

2.4.3 To maintain the uniform mixture and to prevent segregation, the paint shall be stirred frequently in the bucket.

2.4.4 For undecorated surfaces, the surface sh all be treated with minimum two coa ts of water proof

cement paint. Not less th an 24 hours s hall be a llowed betwe en two consecutive coats . Ne xt coat shall not be started until the proceeding coat has become sufficiently hard to resist marking by the brush being use d. In hot dr y we ather, the pre ceding coa t s hall b e sligh tly mo istened before applying the subsequent coat.

2.4.5 The finish ed surface shall be even an d uniform in shade, with out patches , brus h marks, pain t drops etc.

2.4.6 The cement paint shall be applied with a brush with relatively short stiff hog or fibre bristles. The paint

shall be brushed in uniform thickn ess and shall be free from excessively heavy brush marks. The lumps shall be well brushed out.

2.4.7 Water pr oof c ement pa int s hall no t be a pplied on surfaces alrea dy treated with white wash , colour

wash, distemper dry or oil bo und varnishes, paint etc. It shall not be applied on gypsum, wood and metal surfaces.

2.5 Curing: Painted surfaces shall b e sprinkled with wa ter two or thr ee times a day. T his shall be done be tween coats and for at least two da ys fo llowing the final coat. Th e cur ing sha ll be started as soon as the paint has hardened so as n ot to be da maged by the sprinkling of water say about 12 hours after the application.

2.6 Protection measures shall be taken as per item No. 11.2.1, Para 2.6.






Page 345 of 430

ROOFING WORK

12.1.1 Supply of Bare Zincalume/Galvalume Roofing or cladding sheets made out of 0.5 mm , 550 MPA yield stress and having coating grade AZ-150 confirming to ACTM 1397. the sheet. The sheet shall be fixed with SDST screw confirming to grade-1 to be fixed on the crest of the rib the screw shall be have integral EPDM washer for cladding sheets. SDST screw shall be fixed in the valley near the rib. Each rich / valley shall be fixed with SDST screw every purlin. The overlaps in the length shall be applied with one raw of silicon sealant (exterior grade-glass to metal grade) lining. The accessories like ridge shall be fixed with SDST screws and gap between ridges and shall be close with turn bend of the ridge. The sheet below ridge shall be turn up to avoid leakage. There should be anti capillary flute on side overlapping end and each sheet shall have male & female ribs for overlapping

1.0 Materials: Bare Zincalume Sheets shall conform to M-95.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Spacing of the purlins shall be provided such that one purlin rests a t the r idge and one at the caves. The o ther purlins for 0.5 mm. thick B.G. sh eet shall no t exceed a center to center distance of 1.4 to 1.6 m. The purlin shall coincide with the centre line of the end lap. The ridge purlins shall be placed in such a way that t he ridg es can be fixed properly. The portion overhanging the wall support shall not be more than one fourth of the spacing of purlins.

2.2 The top surface of the p urlins shall b e pai nted be fore the she ets are fixed over them. Embedded portions of purlins shall be finished with two coats of coal-tar.

2.3 Laying of Sheets:

2.3.1 The sheets shall be laid o ver the purlin s, to a true p lane with the line of corru gations tru ly

parallel or no rmal to the sides of area to be co vered. The sheets shall not gen erally be built into the gable s and parape ts. The y shall be bent up along their sid e edges close to the wall and the junction shall be protected by suitable flushing or by projecting drip course.

2.3.2. The laps a t the end shall be provided , 200 mm. min imum, The s ide lap shall be provided

between two ridges of corrugations, at each side. 2.3.3 The sheets shall be cu t to the d imensions and to the shape of the roof, e ither along the ir

lengths or their width and in slan t acro ss t he line of corrugations, at h ips and valleys. The sheets shall be cut carefully with a straight edge and chisel, to give a straig ht fin ish. The sheets shall be laid such that the laps are turned away, from the usual direction o f local heavy rain.

2.4 Fixing of Sheets:

2.4.1 Sheets shall be fixed to th e purlins or other roof me mbers such a s hips and va lleys, rafters , etc.,

with SDST (Self drilling & tapping screws) of approx. 400 to 600mmdistance. The vertical lap is stitched with speciall y designed aluminum roofing rivets with EPDM washers at 500 to 600 distances approx. Rain direction is to be checked & the sheeting is to be fixed from bottom to top, in the opposite d irection o f rain. Th e position of shee t should be such that the anticapillary grooves end corrugation is overlapped by the other sheets first plain corrugation

2.4.2 Holes for all bolts shall be drilled and n ot punched in the ridges o f the corrugations from th e under

side, while the shee ts are on the ground. T he holes in the s heets shall b e at least 50 mm. from the edge. Sheets drilled wrongly shall be rejected. The holes in the washers shall be



Page 346 of 430

of the exact diameter of ho ok, bolts or th e seam bolts. The nuts sha ll be tightened from above to give a leak-proof roof.

2.4.3 The roof when complete shall be true to lines and slopes and shall be leak-proof.


3.1 The measurements of the sheets, both at their end s and along the side edges shall be measured. The overlaps of t he sheets over the valley pi ece and their under lap under the ridge, hip and flashing piece shall be included in the measurements.

3.2 No deductions in measure ments shall be made for o penings like chimney stacks, sky-light, etc., ha

ving a rea upto 0.4 0 m2.

nor e xtra be paid for extra labour in cutting and for wastag e, etc., in forming such openings.

3.3 The rate shall include the cost of a ll materials and lab our involved in all opera tions described above.

The r ate also inclu des the cost of pr ovision, erection and removal o f th e scaffolding , benching, ladders, templates and tools r equired for the proper erection and completion of the work. The rate excludes the cost of purlins, rafters and trusses.


12.2.1 Providing and fixing 0.50 mm thick Bare Zincalume matching accessories like corner piece,

flashing, ridge etc. with SDST bolts etc. complete.

1.0 Materials: Bare Zincalume matching accessories shall conform to M-95.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Fixing Accessories:

2.1.1 The sheets shall be secured to the purlins and other roof member s by means o f 8 mm. dia . galvanized ir on bolts `J' type hook bolts, in ca se of angles, iron purlins and `L' type bo lts, incase of R.S. jois ts, pre c ast concrete or timber purlins, and nuts, bearing on th e galvanized iron washers and bitumen washers. The grip of `J' or `L' bolts on the side of purlins shall not be less than 25 mm. Each galvanized iron `J' or `L ' hook bolts shall ha ve a bitumen washer and galvanized iron washer placed over the s heets before the nuts are screwed down from above. On each purli n there shall be one hook bolt, on t he crown adjacen t to the side lap, on either side. Bitumen washer shall be of approved quality. Th e G.I. flat wa sher shall be 25 mm. in diameter and 1.60 mm. th ick and bitumen washer shall be 35 mm. in dia and 1 m m. thick with a hole to suit the required size of fixing accessory. Each nut shall be screwed lightly a t firs. After a dozen or more sheets are laid , the nuts shall be tightened to ensure a le ak-proof joint and the nu ts shall be tightened only to an extent so as to prevent d amage to the sheets. The length of the `J' bolts or crank bolts shall be 75 mm. more then th e depth of pu rlins for single sheets fixing and 90 mm. more , w here two sh eets over lap or where ridges or oth er accessories are to be fixed. The minimum length of coach screw for timber purlins shall be 110 mm.





Page 347 of 430

12.3.1 Providing and fixing Polycarbonate sheets 3 mm thick embossed of profile equivalent to

roof sheets/ or as a part of trapezoidal sheets with SDST bolts or as recommended by the manufacturer of polycarbonate sheets, of approved make and design as per Architect's instructions. (Structural fabrication shall be as per drawing and design and shall be measured and paid under relevant item of work)

1.0 Materials: Polycarbonate sheets for roof glazing shall conform to M-80.

2.0 Workmanship: The sheet shall be fixed as per the manufacturer's instructions using silicone sealant and dry rubber profiles or setting blocks, as instructed.


3.1 The rate shall be for a unit of one no.

12.4.1 Providing, fixing & commissioning Turbo Ventilator of size 600mm of Aluminum Finish of Mbient Turbo make or equivalent or equivalent in line level and plumb on top of roof/ slab, over the cut outs provided in roof slab etc. complete as per the suppliers specifications and instructions of Architect/Engineer-in-charge.

1.0 Materials: Aluminum turb o ventilator o f 600 mm di a made of 42 nos spinning vanes & of double ring.

2.0 Workmanship: The turbo ventilator shall be fixed as p er the manufacturer's instructions using silicone sealant and dry rubber profiles or setting blocks, as instructed.


3.1 The relevant specifications of item no. 12.1.1 shall be followed.

3.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one no.

12.6.1 Providing, fabrication & fixing 1.25mm Metal Deck Sheet with end closed & with support of Structural steel.(Structural fabrication shall be as per drawing and design and shall be measured and paid under relevant item of work.)

1.0 Material & workmanship: The relevant specifications of item no. 12.1.1 shall be followed. The rate

shall be for a unit of rmt



Page 348 of 430

PILLING WORK

13.1.0 Providing and laying cast-in-situ Under reamed with single bulb pile, with M-25 grade controlled cement concrete, having a depth up to 5.0 m. from original ground level of specified dia etc. complete, as directed. The item shall exclude the cost of reinforcement.

1.0 Materials : Water shall conform to M- 1. Cement to M- 3. Sand to M-6. Grit to M-8. Coarse

aggregate to M-13. 2.0 Workmanship :

2.1 General : Under-reamed piles shall be provided when black cotton soil is encountered .

Construction equipment fo r the piles shall be of s tandard make and shall c onform to the C.B.R.I. standards.

2.2 For concretin g with con trolled cemen t concrete mix, the re levant specification s of Section - 2.00, Deta iled specificatio n for plain & reinfo rced cement concrete, shall be followed. Th e cement concrete shall be machine mixed and vibrated.

2.3 Pile Work : 2.3.1 Under-reamed piles shall be bored and cast-in-situ by enlarging the bore at regular spacing, by

suitable method, as per the detailed dr awing and design of the pile foundatio n. The dia . of under-reamed bulb shall be 2.5 times the dia. of the pile.

2.3.2 After setting out the pile g rid, b y markin g the pile po sition, using pegs, boring guide shall b e fixed

on each location in tu rn. The boring guide s hall be fixed to the ground with four spikes, keeping the p ile position p eg in cen ter. Initially some soil shall be r emoved from the collar b y digging with a cutting tool. Then the guide shall be hammered and its lower frame shall be leveled and d esired angular adjustment shall be made. Both the sets of flap of the guide shall rest on extension rod of the Auger, keeping it in required position. Fixing shall be done carefully and shall be checked from time to time during the initial stage of boring.

2.3.3 For starting the bore, flap s of the boring guide sh all be opened and the Auger shall be introduced, p ressed down and rotated making a bor e hole. A straight ver tical bore hole of specified dia. shall be drille d to the required depth. As the Auger goes down the upper flaps o f the guide an d thereafter the lower flap s shall be clo sed. For easy rota tion, th e length of the handle shall be increased by joining e xtension pieces. If the soil is dry and stiff, it shall be first loosened by a cutting tool and shall be removed wi th the Auger . In dry wea ther, the top soil shall be wa tered overnight. If the soil is not self supp ortive in na ture, a casing pipe of suitab le length and dia. shall be placed in position, before fixing the bor ing guide. The casing pipe shall be withdrawn after concreting. Care shall be tak en to keep the top 1 m. length o f the bore hole truly vertical. Drilling mud also shall be sprayed round the walls of the bore hole, when the soil is non-supportive or water percolation into the bore is high and water is for substantial length of bore hole. Th e rotation o f the Auger shall be sl ow an d with consta nt downward pressure. Fo r smooth and c onsistent ope ration, the Auger shall be taken out when it is just full. Incase the Auger is stuck up, it shall be given a few anti-clockwise turns and pulled out.

2.3.4 Then, the un der-reaming tool, a ttached wi th a bucket, a t its low er end, shall be lowered vertically

down with the help of the boring guide. The process of cu tting the soil with the help of opened out blades shall be done and th e bucket, when filled with soil, shall be pulled ou t an d emptied. The process shall be repeated till the required size of under -reamed bulb is obtained. Boring guide shall then be removed. The depth of each bore shall be checked and approved by the Engineer-in-charge, before inserting the under-reaming tool.



Page 349 of 430

2.3.5 If there shall be any obstruction, it shall be broken down with a cutting tool or a h eavy crow bar.

If it cannot be broken and removed , the bore si ze shall have to be increased. A suitable tong shall be used for removing the obstruction. If this also fails, the bore shall have to be abandoned and position of the pile shall be changed, as per the revised design.

2.3.6 For single under-reamed piles, the bore shall be taken down to the full depth by the Auger and the base shall be enlarged by the und er-reaming tool. In double and multi-reamed piles, borin g shall be done first to the required depth for first under-reaming and then extended further for the second under-ream and the process shall be repeated, for multi-reamed piles.

2.3.7 For boring de eper than 3 .5 m. and a lso for bore holes larger than 37 .5 cm. dia ., portable tripod hoist

with manually or mechanically operated winch shall be used.

2.3.8 Boring in Unstable strata :

2.3.8.1 In strata below the water table, water shall be encountered in the bore holes. When the water is confined to a smaller dep th at the bo ttom of the bore hole, stabiliz ation shall no t be required and just before concreting the water shall be ba iled out and the bore shall be concreted quickly. However, if the water percolation is h igh and wate r is for substa ntial dep th o f the bore hole, concreting shall be done by termie method, described below.

2.3.8.2 In cohesionle ss sandy stra ta below water table or ve ry loose deposits even abo ve the water table,

the bor e holes have a tendency to cave in . In such situations, stab ilization of bore holes shall be nec essary with the help o f d rilling mud . When the incidence of c aving in is o nly moderate, to overcome it, drilling mud i s poured from top while a dvancing the bore hole. Th e level of pouring of the drillin g mud shall be the level below which the caving occurs. For boring, the tools used for dry strata shall also b e used alongwith the drillin g mud. As in dry bore holes, after completing the under-reaming, the Auger shall be lowered to ensure the correct depth and if any loose m aterial is found, it shall be remo ved. Any muck still remaining at the bottom of the bore hole, sh all be remove d by fur ther circulating the drilling mud through the steel pipe, in the form of jet which ejects out the slurry. F or this purpose the top of the pipe shall be connected with a deliver y pipe o f ma nually or mec hanically oper ated reciprocating pis ton p umps. During the curse of this operation the pipe shall be mov ed down, thus fin ally filling the bore hole with drilling mud . The washing of the holes shall be done just before concreting and it may b e continued for 10-15 minutes.

2.3.8.3 When the incidence of caving in, is e xcessive and/or greater depths of boring are required, th e

stabilization o f the bore hol e shall need continuous circulation o f d rilling mud. In such cases, modified Aug er and under-reamer shall be used. The mud slurry shall be p ushed up by manually or mechanically operated reciprocating piston pumps, through a swivel which permits the rotation of tools and wh ich has a hollow rod. A fter a few turns of the tool, it shall be pulled up a little and pressed do wn few times. The slu rry flowing out of the hole shall be led to a settling tank which in turn shall be joine d to the tank from which it shall be pumped again. It shall be occasionally checked for its consist ency and any loss sha ll be made g ood by addin g more bentonite to the tank.

2.3.8.4 As the cut soil is washed up, the coarser ma terial settles down which shall be collected in the Auger

bucket. When the bucket is sufficiently full, the rate of boring slows down, pumping shall be stopped a nd the Auger shall be re moved from the bore. On emptying the bucket, th e operations shall be repeated till the desired depth of boring is achieved.

2.3.8.5 The under-reaming tool sh all next be lo wered down and drilling mud shall be pumped in. Th e tool shall be pressed down and slowly rotated . A fter a few turns, the pressure on the tool is released but the rotation sh all be continu ed so as to facilita te the w ashing out o f the cut soil . The other operations shall be repeated till the completion o f under-reaming. Th e formation o f the under-reamed bulb to the full size sh all be indicated by the tool, in the same manner as in normal soils. On completion of the bulb, the Auger shall be lowered and pumping of drilling mud



Page 350 of 430

shall be continued to clear any muck and the correct depth shall be ensured. The final cleaning by circulation of drilling mud shall always precede immediately before concreting by termie.

2.3.8.6 The bore hole fu ll o f dr illing mud shall not be left unconcreted for more than 24 hours,

depending on the stability of the bore hole. The concre ting of the same, shall be done as soon as possible.

2.3.9 In the final, measured and checked bulb, a c oncreting funnel shall b e placed on top of the bore hole.

Concrete of specified mix, mixed as per the relevant specifications and as described, shall then be plac ed in the ho le, so tha t a layer of 10 c m. shall be d eposited at the botto m. T he reinforcement cage shall th en be lowered and pos itioned centrally with extreme care and held in position. F urther concreting s hall fill th e bore hole to the top. Concrete shall b e properly an d sufficiently compacted. While compacting, care shall be taken so as not to damag e the sides of the bore ho le. For dry bore holes, the slump shall be 10 to 15 cm. a nd for concreting by termie a slump o f 15 to 20 cm. sh all be required. Water cement ra tio shall not be grea ter than 0.45. If required, app roved adm ixtures shall be used to increase the wor kability of the concrete. Fo r termie concrete, 10% extra cement shall be used (For M-150 grade concrete, not less than 350 Kg/m

3. of ce ment and for other concrete grades, as directed). Piles which are in aggressive

surroundings shall have richer mix with appropriate type of cement, as mentioned below :

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Concentration Concentration Qty. of Sulphate Qty. of Ordinary of

SO3 of Sulphate portland portland

in ppm. cement cement

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

More than 1% 2500 400 Kg/m3. ---

0.5 to 1.0% 1200 to 1500 350 Kg/m3. 400 Kg/m

3. Less

than 0.5% Less than 1200 350 Kg/m3. 400 Kg/m

3. Less

than 0.2% Less than 300 --- 350 Kg/m3.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

NOTE : The above cement quantities a re with the a ssumption th at termie con crete shall be used.

2.3.10 For placing c oncrete in bo re holes full o f drilling mud or subsoil water, a termie pipe shall be used, whose internal diame ter shall normally be 15 cm. The termie pipe shall be lowered in the bore hole full of drilling mu d with its valve cl osed. A tripod winch sh all be used for handling the termie. The valve shall no t permit an y leakage of drilling mud . Th e termie shall be filled with concrete and the bottom va lve shall be o pened. This shall permit th e concrete to pour out and displace the mud upward in process. As the pourin g of the concrete continues, th e termie shall be lifted up gradually b y means of a rop e passing over a pulley, a ttached to the tripod. The bottom open ing of the ter mie shall always remain in concrete. Care shall be taken that the drilling mud is displaced upwards and not mi xed with the concrete. In the fina l stages, the quantity o f concrete in ter mie shall be enough so that on withdra wal from the bore hole so me concrete spills over the gr ound. Clear c over to the re inforcement shall be g iven by providing cover blocks of PVC or concrete.

2.3.11 The work shall be carried o ut as per the procedure and details give n in IS : 2911-(Part 3)-1973 and C.B.R.I digest no. 56. Great care shall be taken in case of single pile or group piles under a



Page 351 of 430

column. The angular devia tion shall no t exceed 2% for vertical p iles and 4% fo r batter piles. Group piles shall not de viate more than 75 mm. or one quarter of the stem diameter, whichever is less, from their designed position, a t the worki ng level. In case of single pile , deviation shall not be more than 50 mm. or one quarter of the stem diame ter, whicheve r is less. The permissible deviation, in the overall length of the pile and position of bulbs on the stem shall b e upto + 10 cm. Also, the shift of the pile shall not be more than 3 mm., in position.

2.3.12 The load test of two piles, a t random plac e, shall be ca rried out by th e Contractor to check the safe

load plu s 25% load . These tests shall be carried out as p er I.S. specifications. The Contractor shall carry out these tests at no extra cost.

2.3.13 In case the Contractor de sires to ge t the pile work done through a Sub-Con tractor, he shall submit the names and get an approved from the same, for the Sub-Contractor.


3.1 The piles shall be measured per number. Reinforcement shall be paid separately as per section 2.00 for Plain and Reinforced cement concrete work. The bore holes of different diameters shall be measured separately from the ground leve l and shall be paid in rmt. The le ngth shall be measured accurately upto the accuracy of a cm . The rate shall include preparation of one bulb for various diameters of the bore holes.

3.2 The rate shall include e xcavation of the bore hol e in cluding bulbs, cost of labo urs, materia ls, tools and eq uipments req uired, for all necessary op eration for making a pile. The rate of preparation o f bulbs shall b e for a ll le vels. The ra te s hall include cleaning o f drilling mud after concreting of piles.

3.3 For multi-reamed piles ea ch extra bulb, prepared at all levels other than the first bulb, shall b e

measured and paid accordingly. 3.4 The rate shall be for a unit of one rmt.

13.1.1 Do- as –above for 300 mm. dia.

1.0 All relevant specification shall be as per item no 13.1.0. the rate shall be for a unit for rmt. The pile

diameter shall be 300 mm. 13.1.2 Do- as –above for 400 mm. dia.

1.0 All relevant specification shall be as per item no 13.1.0. the rate shall be for a unit for rmt. The pile

diameter shall be 400 mm.



Page 352 of 430

GENERAL DEVELOPMENT & ROAD WORK

14.1.1 Box cutting the road surface, to proper slope and camber, for making a base for road work, including rolling, removing the excavated stuff and depositing on road side etc. complete, as directed, upto 100 m. lead.

1.0 Workmanship:

1.1 The land width required for road way, gutter side slope and catch water gutter shall be cleared off all trees, having a girth of 30 cm. and less. The loose stones, vegetation, bushes, stumps and other objectionable materials shall also be removed. The roots of the trees and stumps shall be removed upto 30 cm. below the grade formation. All the materials cleared will be the property of the Client. Useful material shall be arranged in convenient stacks, along the road boundary or as directed, at places within 50 m. lead and handed over to the Client, in convenient sections. Unsuitable materials shall be burnt or otherwise disposed off by the Contractor, at his own cost without causing any nuisance, inconvenience or damage to the work, property or the people in the neighborhood. If the material is disposed off outside the road length, necessary permission of private land owner shall be taken by the Contractor and royalty etc. if any, shall be paid by him, without claiming any compensation. All the material shall be disposed off in neat manner.

1.2 After clearing the site, the alignment of the road shall b e properly se t out, true to lines, curves, grades and sections shown on the plan or as directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall provide all l abours and materials such as lime , string , pegs, nails, bamboos, sto nes, mortar , concrete etc. required for s etting ou t, es tablishing ben ch mark and giving profile s. The Contr actor shall b e re sponsible for main taining bench mark's profile, alignments and other stacks and marks, as long as they are required for the work, in the opinion of the Engine er-in-charge. If the Contractor defaul ts in this respect even a fter th e direction of the Engineer-in-charge, within th e specified t ime, they ma y be re stored by the Engineer-in- charge, at the cost of the Contractor. Le vels and the sections of the ground shall be taken and recorded in the presence of the Con tractor or his authorised representative before the excavation is started, so as to serve as t he basis of measure ment. The Contractor or his representative shall sign the field book in token of his acceptance of the levels, etc. If there is any disagreement, the Contractor shall inform it in writing to the officer concerned, with specific representation before starting further work. Once the work is started, no cognisance of any complain shall be taken. Merely not signing shall not be deemed as a disagreement.

1.3 Profile of sections including the road sid e gu tters to b e excava ted, shall be line marked at th e

interval of 10 m. to 15 m. or as directed by the Architect & Eng ineer-in-charge, to conform the curved or stra ight alignments, sections, g rade and side slopes. The center line shall clearly be marked and profile o f embankment shall be set-up with the line marked on each side. The roadway section shall first be excavated with vertical side for each lift and the side slope for that lift shall be e xcavated in s teps. The steps shall be smoothened to the required slope, when the excavation re aches the ro ad formation . Contra ctor shall on no account excava te beyond th e slope or belo w the specifie d grade unles s so dire cted by the Archite ct & Engineer-in-charge. If the excavation is done below the specified level or outside the specified sections, it shall not be paid for and the Contractor shall be requ ired to fill up at his own co st such extra excava tion in the road portion, with appr oved materials of t he embankment grade in layers, watered and fully compacted, so as to obtain the maximum density laid down for the emba nkment. The Contractor may require to keep the measuremen t, ridges and dead man to be left, at specified intervals or places and ke pt in tact, till ordered by th e Engineer-in -charge to remove, for the purpose of ch ecking the measurements. The e xcavation shall be finished neatly, smoothly and evenly to the correct lines, curves, grades, sections and side slopes as shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The sub-gr ade if loose, shall be scarified, watered and compacted to the same de nsity as that of embankment. The section, side slop es and catch water gutter shall be maintained b y the Contractor at his own c ost in such a way th at the



Page 353 of 430

formation o f the gutter will be well dra ined by pr oviding necessary diversion, etc. Necessary passages shall be provided for leading away seepage, springs, surface flow or rain water safely without dama ging the wor k. If any da mage occurs due to de fault o f the Contractor in this respect, he shall make good the damag e at his own co st. If it is necessary in the excavation of the work to interrupt existin g surface drai n, sewer or u nder drainage, temporary a rrangements shall be pro vided till such time as and w hen necessa ry or as d irected. The Contractor, a t his own cost shall make the interrupted drainage and sewer etc. unless separately s pecified in the tender. Any damage to the existing work or work in hand caused as a result of his operations or negligence, shall be made good by the Contractor at his own co st. Road side gutters shall be excavated to the specified sections and shall be measured along with the main cutting in m

3.

1.4 Care shall be taken to see that excava tion is carried out in a safe manner so that, there will not be any

risk to the work or workman, by landsli des or falling mater ial, boulders a nd collapsing sides, etc.

1.5 If a landslide occurs in the cutting, it shall be removed as directed by the Eng ineer-in-charge. If the finished slopes, slides into the roadway before final acceptance of the work, such slide shall be removed by the Con tractor and shall be paid extr a for, a t the contract rate for the class of excavation in volved, provid ed the slides are not due to any neglige nce of the Co ntractor. The classification of th e ma terial in slides shall c onform to its condition, at th e time o f removal an d payment shall be made accordingly regardless of its prior condition.

1.6 If there is a traffic nearby or if there ar e villages or towns in the neighbourhood barricades, the traffic signals shall be provided for day a s well as night for the duration of the work, in such a way to prevent accidents. Warning signals shall be displayed on both sides, 7.0 m. away from the poin t of d anger, giving sufficient warning. Necessary signalers shall be stationed at each end to regulate traffic wherever necessa ry or as directed. Measure shall be taken to see that the excavation does not affect to the adjoining structu res or pr operties. If there is any damage to the adjoining property, injury to workers, t he public, animals, etc. due to the negligence of the Contractor, he will be responsible and liable to all the consequences, including compensation.

1.7 All the excavated materia ls shall be the proper ty of the Client. When the useful exca vated materials is to be reused in the emban kment, within a lead o f 2 00 m., it sha ll be d irectly deposited in the required location, in specified layers. No handling or conveyance charges shall be paid, if material is temporarily deposited elsewhere and subsequently conveyed to the site of deposition. The sequence of the operation shall be arranged properly. Ma terial required for the item other than the bank shall be arranged in neat stacks at convenient places without interfering with the dra inage, in any way. If no area of land is available on site and the excavated useful stu ff is to be stacked te mporarily before being reused und er the same agreement, the Contractor shall make his own arrangement for stacking of these materials temporarily o n private land by paying re nts, etc., with out claiming any compensation . Surplus materials not required for reuse may be used o f his own, to uniformly widened the embankment, to flatten the slope and to fill lower pl aces in the road l and, if so permitted by the Engineer-in-charge. Ma terials not requir ed for th e reuse, whatsoever, may be disposed off b y the Contractor, at his own cost in manner approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

1.8 If the Con tractor does not wish to u tilize the quantity of cutting w ithin the specified lead for any

reason, then he may do the embankme nt work with the earth brought from the other sources. But in that case, the full or the part of acceptable quantity of stuff for which payment is made or to be made will be deducted from net quantity of the earth work in embankment arrived at within chainage measured as above.

1.9 The contract rate shall be for an unit o f one m 3. Excavation shall be measured in its origina l

position by taking cross se ction before the work starts and after its completion. The quantity shall be worked out by the average area method . When the classification of the strata changes, the Contractor shall bring this to the notice of the Engineer-in-charge, who will then verify and if necessary, take levels for the changed strata for the purpose of the measurement.



Page 354 of 430

14.2.1 Filling, in foundations and plinths & general development with murrum or selected soil obtained from outside (Contractor's earth) in layers of 15 cm. thickness, including watering, ramming well and consolidating etc. complete, as directed.

The relevant specifications of item no. 1.3.1 of civil section - 1.0 shall be followed. The rate shall be for a unit of one m

3

14.3.1 Providing and laying rubble soling in a compact manner, under RCC road , using suitable cut size stones as per the thickness,covering and leveling the surface with required camber with a layer of murrum/filling sand after filling the voids with smaller sized stones or stone chips, including watering, ramming well and consolidating each layer by roller, as directed

1.0 Materials:

1.1 Using suitable cut size ru bble stones shall be collected by the Contractor to th e site of work. Stacking shall be done in systema tic way so as to allow easy inspe ction and in such a place a s will not cause any loss. The metal shall be collected from approved quarry si tuated place near to the site as approved by the Architects and Engineer-in-charge.

1.2 Murrum or selected ear th b rought from o utside s hall b e clean, of g ood binding q uality, and of

approved quality obtained from approved pots/quarr ies of di sintegrated rocks which contain silicones materials and natural mixture of clay of calcareous origin. The size of murrum shall not be more than 20 mm. and shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge before use.

1.3 The control on quality o f material sha ll be exercised by the Engineer by carrying out the

required tests at the frequencies as per IS norms from time to time as directed by the Engineer- in-charge.

1.4 The sample of the meta l collected shall be got tested at Govt. recognized laboratory or as

approved by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge. T he cost of the same shall b e born by the Contractor.

1.5 Materials for the purpose shall be o f ap proved qual ity. Any ma terial which is fo und of in ferior quality shall be rejected and the Contractor shall re move such rejected material from the site a t his own cost immedia tely. The mater ial shall be co llected from quarries approved b y the Engineer-in-charge.

1.6 The material shall be go t approved by Engineer-in-charge prior to collection on site. It shall b e free

from all rubbish, dust and an y org anic mater ials as well as clods of b lack cotton soil . Material shall not be allowed to be collected within the road boundary.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Regular stacks shall be done by the Contractor on a fairly level ground. Stacking of the metal shall be done in a manner as directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

2.2 Stacking of material as per requirement s hall be carried out. The metal stack shall be checked by the Engineer-in-charge before spreading. The collection shall always commence at one en d of the road and carried out continuo usly towa rds the other e nd unless the Architect a nd Engineer-in-charge shall direct otherwise.

2.3 It shall be sp read evenly on the prepa red su rface in required grade and camber by using camber

broads etc. so as to ensure that the su rface is in true camber and grad e. At least tw o camber boards shall be in use on site. The surface shall be checked at every 50 ft. by means of templates, while the corre ctness of the camber in b etween shall be tested b y str ings and



Page 355 of 430

corrected as required. Be tween the straight l engths and the curves and the meeting poin ts of the convex and concave portions of reverse curves the change in camber of the road and super elevation shall be made very gradually as directed by the Architect and Engineer-in-charge.

2.4 Metal shall n ot be spread without per mission of the Architect a nd Engineer-in-charge. Metal should

be spread under careful supervision and by trained collies only. Contractor shall see that uniform spreading as per collection o f metal is done. The Contractor shall spread the metal fully from the s tacks without keeping any balance unl ess directed by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge to ke ep some stacks in balance for making unevenness or depressions good during rolling work.

2.3 To ensure th at the ma terials are spread to the requ ired thickness, the road su rface shall be marked out o n to the length over wh ich the contents of heaps are to be spread. The bounds o f earth or mur rum (one on either side) s hall be made along the outer edge of me talling simultaneously with spreading of me tal. These bounds shall be laid with a distance equal to the width of the road to be metalled and shall be enough to prevent the loose metal from spreading out during consolidation and to retain water used for consolidation as well.

2.4 The spreading of metal shall proceed only 200 m. (maximum) advance of the rolling operations.

At the time o f rolling , a ll su rface irregular ities ho llows, depressions, humps, shall be set righ t. The spreading of metal in required layer shall be done by the Contractor.

2.5 Immediately after the spreading of the stone ro lling shall be star ted with three wheeled power roller

8 to 12 ton capacity or tandem roller or equi valent vibrator roller. The weight of the roller shall depend upon the type of the aggregate and as i ndicated by the Architect and Engineer-in- charge.

2.6 Except on su per elevate d portions where t he rolling shall proceed from inner e dge to outer , rolling

shall begin from the edges gradu ally pr ogressing towards the center. First the edge/s shall be compacted with roller running forward and backward. The roller shall then move inward parallel to the center line of the road, in su ccessive passes uniformly lapp ing preceding tracks by at least one half way width.

2.7 Rolling shall continue until the aggregate is thoroughly keyed and the creeping of the aggregate ahead

of the roller is no lo nger visible . During rolling slight sprinkli ng of water may be done . If necessary, rolling shall no t be done. When the sub-gr ade is soft or yielding or when it causes a wave like motion in the sub-grade or sub-base course.

2.8 The roller surface shall be checked transvers ely a nd longitud inally with templates and a ny irregularities corrected by loosening the surf ace, adding or removing necessary amounts of aggregate and rerolling until the entire surface conf orms to desired camber an d grade. In no case shall be use of screening be permitted to make up depressions.

2.9 The blindage material where it is required to be use d shall be ap plied, successfully in two or more thin la yers at a slow and unifor m rate . After each application , the su rface shall b e continuously sprinkled with water, the re sulting slurr y shall be swept in with ha nd brooms or mechanical brooms to fill the voids properly and rolle d, during which water shall be applied to the wheels of the rollers if necessary to wash down the bind ing materials sticking to the m. These operations shall continue until the resulting slurry after filling of vo ids, forms a wave ahead of the wheels of the moving roller.


3.1 Payment shall be made on m3

basis without deduction for voids.



Page 356 of 430

3.2 The rate includes digging the murrum, supplying, co nveying with all lead and lift on the road side

and stacking the same in regular stacks and making side shoulders. Material shall be collected in required quantity only at any stage of work.

3.2 The contract unit rate for collecting, carting and spreading shall include:

1. Obtaining metal and murrum from approved quarry.

2. Transporting at site.

3. Storing, stacking, protecting and spreading.

4. Keeping record of supply and use.

5. Rolling the metalled surface with 8 to 10 ton capacity power driven roller.

6. Testing the samples in the approved laboratory.

14.4.1 Providing and laying controlled 125mm thk C.C. M-25 and curing complete, excluding the cost of formwork & reinforcement, for R.C.C. work of roads and general development with broom finish.


3.

14.5.1 Providing the vacuum dewatering method for the RCC with broom finish or with power driven towel finish surface of the concrete.


2

14.6.1 Providing and laying bitu minous ba se roa d joint sealing compound specially rub berized to withstand ag ainst cra cking as pe r IS-1834, Grade – A, Density 1020 kg./cum and wo rking

temperature 1750C to 185

0C. This shall be re ady to use m aterial. Overheated material shall not be

u sed. Surface on which compound to be a pplied sh all be completely dry. It shall be overfilled and trimmed to level. Size of the groove shall be 15 mm W x 20 mm D. The

rate shall be for a unit of one rmt

14.7.1 Providing and fixing, chain link fencing of 50 x 50 x 10 g G.I. chain link, 1.83 m. wide fabric with vertical post of M.S. angle 50 mm. x 50 mm. x 6 mm. at 2.5 m. C/C., with G.I. tension wire at top and bottom, 8 g and with necessary U clips, etc. complete. The rate shall be inclusive of necessary fixing arrangement to M.S. post by M.S. flat 30 x 5 mm, nut and bolt. The rate shall include 3 coats of enamel paint as approved by Architect and Engineer-in-charge. The M.S. post shall be fixed in the cement concrete coping above the 9" or 14" brick wall.

1.0 Materials: Water shall conform to M-1. Cement shall conform to M-3. Sand shall conform to M-

6. Bricks bats aggregate sh all conform to M-14. Oil paint shall conform to M-44. G.I. wire shall be of best quality.

2.0 Workmanship:



Page 357 of 430

2.1 The pits o f the size 0.5 m. x 0 .5 m. x 0 .5 m. sha ll first be ma de either in brick work or

excavated, true to line and level, to receive the post at 2.5 m. C/C. The relevant specifications of item 1.01 shall be followed for excavation work.

2.2 The pits shall be filled with a layer of 0.1 5 m. thick lean concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 Sand : 10 graded

brick bat aggrega tes, 40 mm. no minal size). The M.S. angle 40 mm. x 40 mm. x 6 mm. shall be then placed over the concrete in true line an d plumb. The remaining po rtion o f block shall be filled in with ceme nt concrete 1:2:4 and rammed properly so as to form tota l 0.5 m. x 0.5 m. x 0.5 m. concrete block. The concrete shall be cured for 7 days to allow it to set.

2.3 The chain lin k shall be stretched and fixed as per drawing. The b ottom row sh all be 150 mm. above

ground. The chain link shall be stretched bet ween adjacent posts from to p wire of one post to the b ottom wire of the ne xt pos t. T he wires shall be fixed to the posts by means of staples.

2.4 The M.S. angle posts shall be painted with 3 coats of oil paint of approved tint and shade over a coat

of primer.


3.1 The work shall be measure d for the finished work from center to c enter of the posts. The ite ms of exca vation and 1:4 :8 C.C shall be measured a ccording to rele vant items an d the de tailed specifications for the same.

3.2 The rate shall include the cost of all labour and materials (its ta xes, levies , trans portation etc.)

involved in the operations described above.

3.3 The rate shall be for an unit of one rmt. Excavation and C.C 1:5:10 shall be paid extra under the head of the relevant items and as per respective unit.



Page 358 of 430

WATER SUPPLY WORKS

ITEM SPECIFICATION – PLUMBING

1.1.0 Providing and fixing galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Medium grade Class B) of Tata or equivalent make, conforming to IS: 1239, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flanges, check-nuts, tees, etc., complete (in proper line and level, with necessary supports viz., clamps, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens, if required) jointing with screw joints, using hold tight and jute for pipes and Teflon tape for fittings and fixtures, to wall, ceiling and floor including making them good, testing and wrapping the pipes and fittings with Hessian cloth and painting with 2 coats of approved paint etc., complete of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

1.0 Materials:

Galvanised mild steel tubes of specified nominal bore shall conform to IS: 1239 a nd be as per plumbing material specification and approved make.

The galvanised fittings, clamps, etc., required for the specified bore of pipes shall be of the first quality of ap proved make as certified by the C onsultants. Fitting s s hall conform to IS: 187 9 Part-1 to 10.

Paint shall conform to relevant civil specification.

2.0 Workmanship:

Cutting, laying and jointing:

When the tubes are to b e cut or rethread, t he en d shall be carefully filed out so that n o obstruction to bore is offered. The ends of t he tubes shall then be threaded conforming to the requirements of IS: 554 with pipe dies a nd taps ca refully, in such a manner as will not result in slackness of joints when the 2 pieces are screwed together.

The tapes an d dies shall b e used only for st raightening threads which have be come bent or damaged and dies shall not be used for turning of the threads so as to make them slack, as the later procedu re may no t r esult in a wa tertight joint. The threads for tube and fittings shall b e protected from edge until they are fitted, properly and as directed.

In jointing the tubes, the inside of the socket and the screwed end of the tube shall be oiled and smeared by using Teflon tape round the scre w end of the tube . T he end shall then be tightly screwed into the socket, tees, etc ., with a pipe wrench. Care shall be taken that all the pipes and fittings are properly tig htened to render the jo ints completely le ak proof. While fixing pipes shall be kept, at all times, free from dust and dirt . Bur r joints shall be removed after screwing . On laying, the open ends of the pipes shall be te mporarily plugged to prevent access of surface water, soil or any other foreign matter.

Any threads exposed after jointing shall be pai nted o r in the case of underground/concealed piping, thickly coated with approved anti-corrosive paint to prevent corrosion.

Fixing of the tube and fittings to wall, ceiling and floors:

The pipes and fittings shall be fixed in vertical alignment, un less otherwise speci fied and shall be secured t o the walls, at join ts, with bra ckets/clamps. The clamps shall be of MS or Aluminium, bent to require d shape and size so as to fit tightly on the pipe when tigh tened with



Page 359 of 430

MS bar, nut, bolt and washer. The brackets/clamps shall be fixed to the walls and shall be kept about 25 mm clear off the finished face of the wall so as to facilitate cleaning and painting of the pipes.

Smaller tubes and fittings shall run on the surf ace of the wal l o r ceiling, un less otherwise specified. Th e fixing shall be done by means of sta ndard pattern holder clamp s, keeping the pipes about 15 mm clear off the wall. When necessa ry to conceal the pipes or wh en specified so, chasing may be adop ted or the p ipe may be fixed in ducts o r recesses, etc., pro vided o f such dimensions that there is sufficien t s pace to w ork on the p ipe with the usual tools . Ordinarily, the pipe shall no t be buried in walls or solid floors but wh ere unavoidable, it shall be buried in one piece without any join t for s hort distances with adequate protection again st damage. In that case the pipe shall be painted with anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality and/or covered with black Japan and plastic or jute cloth soaked in tar. The pipe should not come in contact wi th lime mortar or lime c oncrete as the p ipe material is a ffected by lime . Under the floors, the chases for the pipe shall be filled with sand An MS sleeve shall be fixed at the place where a pipe is passing through a wall or floor to provide for expansion, contraction and other such movements .. The pipes which are laid open after wrapping with Hessian cloth shall be painted with 2 coats of paint, of approved quality.

All p ipes and fittings shall b e fixed truly vertical and ho rizontal, unles s unavoidable . The pip es shall be fixed to walls with standard pattern clamps of required size and shape, one end o f which shall be properly plugged or cemented into walls with C.M. 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand) and the other tightened ar ound the pipe to hold it se curely. These clamps shall be spaced at regular intervals in straight length, at 2 m. C/C interval, in horizontal run and 2.5 m. C/C interval, in vertical run. For pipes of 15 mm dia upto 25 mm dia, the holes in the walls shall be made by drilling and n ot by disman tling the brick work and in the floors with chisel or jumper. However, for bigger diameter pipes, the holes shall be carefully made only to the required size. After fixing the pipe the holes shall be made good with C.M. 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse san d) and properly finished to match the adja cent surface. All pipes shall be fixed in accordance with the layo ut and alignment shown on the drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pockets.

Testing of joints:

After laying and jointing , th e pipes and fittings shall be inspected u nder working conditions of pressure and flow. An y join t or fitting , fou nd leaking, shall be redone. And all pip es, which are leaking, shall be removed and replaced, without any extra cost.

The pipes and fittings , shall be tested to a hydraulic pressure of 7 Kg/cm

2. The pressure shall be

maintained for 2 hours and the pressure drop at the end of the period shall not exceed 0.5 Kg/cm

2. The pipe shall be slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all air to escape

and avoiding all shock and water hammer. The draw off taps and stopcocks shall then be closed and subsequently the specified hydraulic pre ssure shall b e applied gr adually. The pressure gauge must be accurate. The pipes and fittings shall be tested in sections as the work of laying proceeds, keeping the joints exposed for inspection during the testing.

A test registe r shall be maintained and a ll entries shall be signed an d dated by th e Contractor and Engineer-in-charge.

In addition to the sectional testing carrie d out dur ing the construction, the Con tractor shall te st the entire ins tallation after connections to t he overhead tanks and/or pumping system or mains have been co mpleted. He shall rectify le akage and replace defective materia ls in the s ystem. Any damage to the buildin g, furniture a nd fixtur es due to carelessness, open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, shall be made good during the defects liability period, without any extra cost.



Page 360 of 430


a) The description of each item shall un less otherwise stated , shall be held to include wherever necessary, conveyanc e, delivery, handling, unloading, s toring, fabrica ting and hoisting.

b) The length shall be measured on RM basis of the finished work. The length shall be

taken along the centre line of the pipe and fittings. The pipes fixed to walls, ceiling, floors, etc., shall be measured and paid under this item.

c) All the work shall be meas ured in decimal sy stem as fixed in its place subject to tolerance given below, unless otherwise stated:

(i) Dimension shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 m. (ii)

Area shall be worked out to the nearest 0.01 m2.

d) All measurements of cutting shall unle ss otherwise stated, be held good to include th e consequent wastage.

e) In case of fitting of pipe of unequal bore, the largest bore shall be measured for the test. f)

Testing of pipe lines, fi ttings and joints include for providing all plant and appliances necessary for obtaining access to the work to be tested and carrying out the tests.

g) The rate shall include the cost of GI steel tubing with screwed socket joints together

with all fittings (such as bends, sockets, elbows, tees, crosses, short pieces, clamps, reducer, nipples, checkouts and plugs, unions, etc.,) and fixing complete with clamping wall-hooks, wooden plugs etc., and also for cutting, screwing, for making forged (or hand made) bends on piping as required. Connector shall be inserted, where required or directed. The rate shall include cutting through walls, floors etc., and their making good, painting exposed threads with anti-corrosive paint and testing. Where tubes are to be fixed to wall, ceiling and flooring, the rate shall include painting of pipes with 1 coat of Hessian cloth and 2 coats of enamel paint, providing sleeves and sand filling under floor for which separate payment shall not be made. The rate shall be for all labour required for finishing to required shape and size, testing, fitting in position, straight cutting and waste return of packing.

h) The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.

1.2.0 Providing and fixing galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Heavy grade Class C) of Tata or equivalent make, conforming to IS: 1239, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flanges, check-nuts, tees, etc., complete (in proper line and level, with necessary supports viz., clamps, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens, if required) jointing with screw joints, using hold tight and jute for pipes and Teflon tape for fittings and fixtures, to wall, ceiling and floor and making them good testing and wrapping the pipes and fittings with Hessian cloth and painting with 2 coats of approved paint etc., complete of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

The relevant specification of item no. 1.1.0 shall be followed except the grade of pipe shall be

grade C instead of grade B.



Page 361 of 430

1.3.0 Providing and fixing galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Medium grade Class B) of Jindal, Prakash or equivalent make, conforming to IS: 1239, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flanges, check-nuts, tees, etc., (in proper line and level, with necessary supports viz., clamps, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens, if required) jointing with screw joints, using hold tight and jute for pipes and Teflon tape for fittings and fixtures, to wall, ceiling and floor and making the good testing and wrapping the pipes and fittings with Hessian cloth and painting with 2 coats of approved paint etc., complete of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

The relevant specification of item no . 1.1.0 shall be followed except the pipe shall be of Jindal, Prakash or equivalent make instead of Tata or equivalent make.

1.4.0 Providing and fixing galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Heavy grade Class C) of Jindal, Prakash or equivalent make, conforming to IS: 1239, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flanges, check-nuts, tees, etc., (in proper line and level, with necessary supports viz., clamps, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens, if required) jointing with screw joints, using hold tight and jute for pipes and Teflon tape for fittings and fixtures, to wall, ceiling and floor and making the good testing and wrapping the pipes and fittings with Hessian cloth and painting with 2 coats of approved paint etc., complete of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

The relevant specification of item no . 1.1.0 shall be followed except the pipe shall be of Jindal, Prakash or equivalent make, class C (instead of class B) in place of Tata or equivalent make.

1.5.0 Providing and laying in trench, galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Medium grade class B) of Tata or equivalent make, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flange, check-nuts, etc., wrapping with Hessian cloth and painting the pipes with 2 coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality, testing the pipes and specials, complete (Earth work and filling in trench to be measured and paid under relevant civil items) of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

1.0 Materials: Galvanised mild stee l tub es of specifie d nominal bo re shall confo rm to IS: 12 39 and as per plumbing material specification and approved make.

2.0 Workmanship: The relevant specification s of item 1.0 1.a shall be followed for cutting, laying,

join ting and testing of joints exc ept that the laying and fixing of tube shall be done in trench.

The width and depth of the trenches for different dia of the tubes shall be as under:

For 15 to 150 mm dia tube width of trenches shall be 30 cm. and depth of trenches 60 cm.



Page 362 of 430

At joints, the trench width shall be widen ed, w herever necessary. The work of excavation an d refilling shall be done true to line and gradient in accordance wi th general specifications of Earth work, trenches. For excavation, relevant civil specification of Earthwork shall be followed.

After wrapping with Hessi an cloth, the pipes s hall be painted with 2 coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality. The pipe shall be laid on a layer of 75 mm sand, filled upto 150 mm, abo ve the p ipe, as specified. T he remaining portion of trench shall be then filled with excavated ea rth. The surplus earth shall be dis posed of, as directed. For filling trenches with murum and earth, relevant civil specification of Earthwork shall be followed respectively.

When the excavation is done in rock the bottom shall be cut deep enough to permit the pipe

to be laid on a cushion of sand of 75 mm. In case of bigger dia of tube, where the shock is very high, a thrust block, if required, of C.C. 1:2:4 (1 cement: 2 coarse sand: 4 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm nominal size ) shall be constructed on all bends, to transmit the hydraulic thrust without impairing the ground and spreading it over a sufficient area.


a) The relevan t specification of ite m no. 1.01.a shall be followed . The authorised quantitie s shall be measured in volume.

b) For purpose of calcula ting cubic content, cr oss section shall normally be taken at suitable intervals i.e . at manho le o r wall chamb er inter vals, e xcept in abno rmal cases like sudden change in strata or undulating ground, etc., at clos er intervals as a pproved. In any case of discrepancy, the decision of Consultants shall be final, conclusive and binding.

c) Authorised width:

(1) Upto 1 m depth, the width of the trenches for the purpose of measurement of excavation shall be arrived at b y add ing 40 cm. to the e xternal d iameter o f the tube (no t the socket). When a pipe is laid on concrete bed/cushioni ng laye r, the author ised width shall be the external diameter of tube p lus 40 cm or the actual width of the co ncrete bed provided for layer, whichever is more.

(2) For depth s exceeding 1 m., an allo wance of 5 c m./m. of depth for each side of the trench shall be added to th e authorised width (i.e . external diameter of pipe of plus 40 cm.) . This allowance shall apply to the entire depth of the trench. The authorised width in such cases shall therefore be, eq ual to the depth of trench plus external diameter of tube plus 40 cm.

(3) Where more than 1 tube is la id, the diame ter shall be reck oned as the horizontal distance for outside to outside of the outermost pipes.

(4) Where sh eeting or e lse has been provi ded the au thorised width of the trenches at th e bottom shall be increased to accommodate for sh eeting, etc ., so that the c lear width available between faces of sheeting is as per above provision of (1), (2), and (3).

(5) If the sides of the trench are not ver tical, the toes of the side slopes shall end at the top of pipe and vertical sided trench of authorised width as per (1) (2) (3) and (4) above shall be excavated from these down to the bed of trenches.

d) Where the tu bes are laid in trench, the work of exca vation and re filling shall be paid for separately. T he rate also does not include s and filin g all round tu bes for which separate payment shall be made. The length shall be measured on RM basis.

e) The rate shall be for an unit of one RM basis.



Page 363 of 430

1.6.0 Providing and laying in trench, galvanised iron (GI) mild steel tube (Heavy grade class C) of

Tata or equivalent make, including tube fittings such as sockets, unions, reducers, long or short bends, elbows, nipple, flange, check-nuts, etc., wrapping with Hessian cloth and painting the pipes with 2 coats of anti-corrosive bitumastic paint of approved quality, testing of the pipes and specials, etc., complete (Earth work and filling in trench to be measured and paid separately) of the following nominal bore (NB) size:

1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

The relevan t specification of ite m no. 1 .5.0 shall be followed exce pt the grade of pipe shall be grade C instead of grade B.

1.7.0 Providing and fixing insulation of expanded polystyrene slab of approved quality, on GI pipe line for cold water, etc., complete, as directed to the following nominal bore (NB) size: 1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

1.0 Materials:

The relevan t specifications of item 1 .1.0 sha ll be followed except that the G I pipes shall be provided with insulation for cold water. The insulation shall be provided as under:

The pipes supplying cold drinking water shall be insulated with expanded polystyrene slabs. The

insulatio n shall be fir e inhibiting expanded polystyrene rig id sections, with density 15

Kg/m3., with a thermal conductivity value of not more than 0.028 Kcal/ohm.Deg.C at 10C mean

temperature. It shall be fir e inhibited (T F qualit y) an d solvent resistant and sh all be of c lose cellular structure and hence of negligible vapour permeability.

The insulation thickness shall be 50 mm.

2.0 Workmanship:

Application:

The pipe surface shall be thoroughly cleaned with a wire brush to remove a ll rust and othe r foreign ma tter. The cleaned surface shall be appli ed with a coat o f industrial bitu men 85/40 or 85/25. The insulation slab shall then be stuck over this with staggered joints. The joints shall be sealed with a vapour barrier of bitumen . The in sulation shall be held in position with 1 mm GI wire at 600 mm c/c. A coat of bitumen shall then be applied over the insulation.

Finish: The insulated surface shall be cladded all around with 24 gauge aluminium sheet.


The paymen t of insula tion to the p ipe shall be made o n RM basis, for the pipe in sulated. T he payment of pipe shall be made in the respective item of pipe.



Page 364 of 430

1.8.0 Providing and fixing insulation to pipes embedded in walls, with fibre glass resin

bonded, with wool crown 150, on GI lines for hot water supply, etc., complete, as directed of the following nominal bore (NB) size: 1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 10) 15 mm. 1.0 Materials:

The insulating material shall have a minimum density 32 Kgm/m3.

and the thermal conductivity shall not be more than 0.04 Kcal/ohm. deg.C at me an temperatu re. It shall be made from specially formed glass, p roducing a non-corrodi ng shot free and non-hygroscopic insulatio n with a minimum fibre diame ter o f 7 micrometer. The insulation sha ll be vermin pro of and sha ll not settle due to vibration. The fibre glass insulation shall be with aluminium foil face.

2.0 Workmanship:

The relevan t specifications of item 1 .1.0 and 1.7.0 sh all be followed except that the G I pipes carrying hot water embedded in walls shall be in sulated by applying insula tion in staggered joints, with fibre glass resin bonded with wool crown of speci fied th ickness, i.e., 28 mm thickness for pipes having dia of 15 to 4 0 mm and 50 mm th ickness for pipes of 50 to 150 mm dia.

The joints shall then be reinforced with GI wire knotting of 20 x 1.04 mm. The wire knotting shall be tightened further with GI wires. Sealin g with adhesive tape shall further render the join t leak- proof.

The pipes shall be pain ted with anti-corrosive, hea t re sistant bitume n paint o f ap proved make and all the joi nts shall be sealed with hot bitume n. Th e pipes in sh afts and above false ceiling shall be finish ed smooth with hard settin g compound in 2 layers of 6 mm thickness. The pipes in exposed p ositions shall be cladded w ith 24 gauge aluminium sh eet with 50 mm overla p a t the joints. Self- tapping screws shall hold the cladding in position.

The pipes shall finally be embedded in 12 mm thick plaster of proportion same as that of the

wall in which it is embedded.


The rate shall include all operations required for satisfac tory completion of the item. The payment o f insulation to the pipe shall be made on RM basis, for the p ipe insulated. Th e payment of pipe shall be made in the respective item for pipe.

1.9.0 Providing and fixing insulation to all pipes embedded in walls with 6 mm thick asbestos rope

on GI lines for hot and cold water supply, etc., complete, as directed of the following nominal bore (NB) size: 1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 m 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 m 10) 15 mm.

The relevant specifications of ite m 1.1 .0 and 1.1.0 shall be fo llowed except tha t the GI pipes carrying hot a nd/or cold wa ter embedded in walls shall be insula ted with 6 mm th ick asbestos rope closely wound and over wrapped with 2 layers of 500 micron PVC taping.



Page 365 of 430

1.10.0 Providing, fixing and testing, heavy quality gun metal or brass gate full way wheel valve, with

screwed/flanged ends, factory tested at 20 kg/m2., on GI lines of the following nominal bore (NB) size: 1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm. 1.0 Materials:

The gun me tal gate /full way valve o f specified dia shall confor m to IS: 778 and relevan t specifications of plumbing materials. Its fitti ngs shall conform to the relevan t IS Codes. All material shall be of 1st quality of approved make or equivalent, as certified by the Consultants

2.0 Workmanship:

The gun me tal gate valve shall be fully cleared of al l foreign matter, before fixing. The fixing of valve with flanged ends shall be done by means of bolts, nuts and 3 mm rubber insertions, with counter flanges drilled to the same specifications. The jointing shall be leak proo f. A union shall be provided near each screwed end GM valve, stopcock and/or check valve.


The rate includes all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item. The rate shall be for an unit of one number.

1.11.0 Providing, fixing and testing, heavy quality gun metal or brass non-return swing type valve,

with screwed/flanged ends, factory tested at 20 kg/cm2., of the following nominal bore (NB)

size: 1) 150 mm 2) 100 mm 3) 80 mm 4) 65 mm 5) 50 mm

6) 40 mm 7) 32 mm 8) 25 mm 9) 20 mm 10) 15 mm.

1.0 Materials:

The gun me tal non-return full way valve of specified dia shall conform to IS: 77 8 and rele vant specifications of plumbing materials. Th e non-return valve shall be of teste d quality. Its fitting s shall also co nform to I.S. C odes. All material shall be of 1s t q uality o f appr oved make o r equivalent, as approved by the Consultants

2.0 Workmanship:

The gun metal non-return valve shall b e fully cleare d of all foreig n matter , before fixing. Th e fixing of valve shall be done by means of bolts, nuts a nd 3 mm rubber insertions , with counter flanges drille d to the sam e specificatio ns. T he join ting shall be leak proof. A union shall b e provided near each screwed end valve, stopcock and/or check valve.


The rate includes all labours, materials, tools and plant etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item. The rate shall be for an unit of one number.



Page 366 of 430

1.12.0 Providing and fixing gun metal foot valve with the required accessories, of approved make,

as approved or its equivalent of the following nominal bore size:

a) 100 mm b) 80 mm c) 65 mm d) 50 mm

e) 40 mm f) 32 mm g) 25 mm.

1.0 Materials:

Foot valve shall open on ly in the d irection of the flow and shall au tomatically close down when the flow is reversed. They shall be of the firs t quality and of make ap proved by the Architect or the Engineer in-charge.

2.0 Workmanship:

They shall be placed in a vertical/horizontal pos ition as the case may be on the end o f the suction lines to the pump, to prevent the reverse flow of water when the pump stops.


The rate shall be inclusive of all accessories ma king a unit complete required for the satisfactory operation of a valve . The item shall be measured a nd paid in the unit of one number.

1.13.1 Providing and fixing Water Meter of Pricol or equivalent make as approved and directed by the

Consultants. 1.0 Materials:

The water meter shall be of the firs t quality as approved by the Con sultants. It shall conform to the relevant IS codes.

2.0 Workmanship:

It shall be fixed on the incoming water supply lines, as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. 3.0 Mode of Measurements and Payment:

a) The rate shall include all operations required for satisfactory completion of the item. b)

The item shall be measured and paid in the unit of one number.

1.14.1 Labour charges for fixing a Geyser, including delivery to site, providing and fixing couch/anchor bolts, CP copper pipes and angle valves for inlet and outlet with nut-bolts and 12 mm dia wheel valve in the inlet line, including fixing electrical accessories supplied/listed by the manufacturer, etc., complete, as shown on the layout.

The hot water geyser shall be fitted as p er the layout drawing, including all specials required for satisfactory completion of the item and as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.

The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

1.15.1 Supplying and fixing a Water Purifier from Eureka forbes or equivalent, including fixing angle valve, CP copper pipe inlet and outlet connections, including all other electrical accessories supplied/listed by the manufacturer, etc., complete, as per the layout.



Page 367 of 430

Water Purifier from Eureka Forbes or equivalent shall be fitted as per the layout drawing, including all specials required for satisfactory completion of the item and as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.


1.16.1 Labour charges for fixing a Water Cooler, including fixing angle valve and CP copper pipe inlet connection and GI outlet pipe, including fixing electrical accessories supplied/listed by manufacture complete, as directed.

2.0 Workmanship:

The work shall be carried out in best manner of a workmanship, as directed by the Consultants.


The rate shall cover all material and labour required for the satisfactory operation of the unit.

1.17.1 Supplying and fixing, PVC water tanks of the following capacities such as Sintex or equivalent, on terraces, lofts, in bathrooms, etc., at all heights including all accessories such as inlet, outlet, over flow, drain pipe sleeves of the specified size, with necessary neoprene gaskets/packing/ washers, GI washers and check nuts etc., all complete, as directed. a) Upto 1000 litres, b)

Upto 2000 litres, c) Upto

5000 litres.

1.0 Materials:

The PVC Water tank shall be of the first q uality of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The PVC water tanks shall be fitted as per t he instructions furn ished by the ma nufacturer on purchase of the tank. Wherever staging is requir ed for installation, designs and drawings for the same upto 30 m height sha ll be furnishe d against pla cement of or der. Insta llation can also be done through the trained personnel of the dealer. The work shall be carried out in best manner of workmanship directed by Consultants.


The rate shall be inclusive of a ll ma terial and la bour required to complete the work in satisfactory manner. The rate shall be for a unit of one litre . The rate shall includ e for fixing o f any addition al accessorie s supplied by the supplier. The necessary pedestals/supporting structures shall be measured under the relevant items:



Page 368 of 430

1.18.1 Labour charges for fixing only, PVC water tanks of the following capacities such as Sintex or equivalent, on terraces, lofts, in bathrooms, etc., at all heights including all accessories such as inlet, outlet, over flow, drain pipe sleeves of the specified size, with necessary neoprene gaskets/packing/ washers, GI washers and check nuts etc., all complete, as directed. a) Upto 1000 litres, b)

Upto 2000 litres, c) Upto

5000 litres.

The relevan t specifications of item no. 1 .17 shall be followed exce pt that the PVC water tan k shall be supplied by the client.

1.19.1 Supplying and fixing electronic water level control, to start and stop the pump automatically at the present water level, of an approved make. The unit is to be supplied with 3 sets of stainless steel electrodes and wiring between the main unit and electrodes as directed.

1.0 Materials:

Electronic wa ter le vel control shall be of the first q uality o f appr oved make or equivalen t approved by the Consultants. The unit shall be supp lied with 3 sets of stainless steel electrodes and wiring between the main unit and electrodes.

2.0 Workmanship:

The work sh all be carrie d out in bes t manner of workmanship as per the drawings and instructions. The electronic water level co ntrol shall be tested and proved satisfac tory for atleast 1 year. The Contractor shall give 1 yea r guarantee for the same. The pump sh ould start and stop automatically at specified levels of water.


The rate includes all materials, labour, e quipment etc., required for the satisfactory completion of the installation of the unit. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

1.20.1 Charges for taking connections from the mains.

2.0 Workmanship:

The service connection fro m the mains shall be ta ken with the help of the authorities in charge by drilling an d tapping a h ole in the sid e of t he main . A brass ferrule shall then be screwed in within a wate rtight bo x. Th e service pip e shall then b e attached to the ferrule. T he size of th e hole in the main shall not exceed 1/3rd the diameter of the main.

A stopcock shall generally be inserted on the service line.


The rate shall include the cost of all labour, tools and equipment e tc., required fo r satisfactor y completion, testing and commissioning of this item as described above. The rate shall be for an unit of one number.



Page 369 of 430

2.21.0 Providing and fixing uPVC threaded pipes (schedule 80) of approved make; open, complete, including making airtight joints, with necessary specials, couplers, elbow, equal tees, tail piece, adapter (both male and female), reducer (single stage, double stage and triple stage), end cap, fabricated bend, etc., in proper line and level (with necessary support like clamps, clips, brick masonry pedestals and battens, if necessary) to wall, ceiling and floor, approved quality, and lubricant or jointing material, including testing, cutting, making good the wall, ceiling and floor etc., complete of the following (outer diameter) OD size: 1) 200 mm 2) 160 mm 3) 140 mm 4) 110 mm 5) 90 mm 6) 75 mm

7) 63 mm 8) 50 mm 9) 40 mm 10) 32 mm 11) 25 mm 12) 20 mm.

1.0 Materials:

The threaded pipe (schedu le 80) o f spec ified diam eter with working pressure shall conform to IS: 7834. Th e specials and fi ttings required shall be of best qua lity and UV sta bilised so as to facilitate open fixation, conforming to IS: 4985 and relevant specifications of plumbing materials.

2.0 Workmanship:

The uPVC pipes of specified di ameter shall be fixed as directed. Due to thermal expansion of uPVC pipes d ue allowances about of 10 mm of thermal gap shall b e made partic ularly in case of o ver the g round pipe lines for an y c hange in length o f p ipe line which ma y occur durin g installation or when pipe line is in serve stress developing from thermal expansion.

Generally, in horizontal runs, uPVC pipes shall be supported at an interval of not more than ten times the outside diameter of the pipe. In vertical lines, uPVC pipes shall be supported at an interval of 1 m. to a maximum of 2 m. Closer support spacing shall be provided, if approved by the manufacture.

The guide lin e indicated b y the manu facture regarding handling, transporting, s torage, la ying and join ting o f pipes shall be kept in view duri ng exe cution. Pro vision for e xpansion join ts, a ir vents and proper anchorage shall be made.

uPVC pipes shall be fixed on wall with wooden plugs and suitable clamps.

Jointing the pipes:

The pipes and sockets sha ll be accurately cut. Care shall be taken to cut the pip e square. The

shortened pipe end shall b e chamfered to an angle o f 15O

with a medium file . The ends of the pipes and fittings should be absolut ely free from dir t and dust. The outside surfa ce of the pipes and the inside of the fittings shall then be roughened with emery paper and then solvent cement shall be applied to the ma tching surface i.e , to the spigot end an d the sealing ring and then push the spig ot end in to the socket containing the s ealing ring u ntil p ushed home fully an d joined. Mark the position of the socket edge on t he pipe and then withdraw the pipe from the socket for the necessary th ermal gap. Since solvent cement is aggr essive to uPVC, care must be taken to avoid app lying excessive cement to the inside of pipe sockets as any surplus cement cannot be wiped off a fter join ting. Ver y old, hard, dense solvent ceme nt shall no t b e used. Empty solvent ceme nt tins , brushes, r ags of paper impregnated with cement should not be buried in the trenches. They should be gathered, not left scattered about, as they can prove to be a hazard to animals, which may chew them.



Page 370 of 430

Threaded uPVC pipe-fittings shall not be over tightened, as the threads may get damaged. The pipes shall never be threaded but suitable threaded fittings shall be used.

If an y manufa cturer recommends its own methods of jointing , the same shall be adopted after necessary approval from the Engineer-in-charge or Architect.

Laying the pipes in trench:

The pipes shall be laid o ver uniform relative ly soft fine-grained soil, found to be free from presence of hard object s such as larg e f lints, rocky project ions, large t ree root s, et c., While laying the pip es undergrou nd, care shall be taken so that the trench shall be as narrow as possible as required for working and its bottom shall be free of stones, sharp objects etc.

The pipes laid underground shall not be less than 1 meter from the ground level. The pipe shall be positioned in the trenches so as to avoi d any induced stresses due to d eflection. An y deviation required shall be obtained by using proper type of rubber ring joints.

3.0 Mode of Measurements and payment:

The relevan t specifications of item No . 1.1. 0 o f wate r supply insta llations, shall be followe d except that the uPVC pipes of specified dia shall be paid under this item. The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.

2.22.0 Providing and fixing uPVC threaded pipes (schedule 80) of approved make; consealed,

complete, including making airtight joints, with necessary specials, couplers, elbow, equal tees, tail piece, adapter (both male and female), reducer (single stage, double stage and triple stage), end cap, fabricated bend, etc., in proper line and level (with necessary support like clamps, clips, brick masonry pedestals and battens, if necessary) to wall, ceiling and floor, approved quality, and lubricant or jointing material, including testing, cutting, making good the wall, ceiling and floor etc., complete of the following (outer diameter) OD size: 1) 200 mm 2) 160 mm 3) 140 mm 4) 110 mm 5) 90 mm 6) 75 mm

7) 63 mm 8) 50 mm 9) 40 mm 10) 32 mm 11) 25 mm 12) 20 mm.

The relevan t specifications of ite m no. 1.21.0 shall b e followed e xcept tha t the pipe shall be concealed. All pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on struct ural adjustable clamps o f special design as shown on the dr awings or as directed. Horizo ntal p ipes shall be laid to uniform slope and the cla mps adjusted to the proper levels so th at the pipes fu lly rest on them. All pipes running along the sunken floor shall be encased in 10 cm b rickwork leaving 5 cm. gap all around the pipe. This 5 cm shall be filled wi th sand and top shall be covered with cement mortar in ratio of 1:2. Rele vant specification of civil ite ms shall be followed. Horizontal pipes in sunken floor shall be laid to uniform slope and gradient.

The rate for a ll necessary civi l work viz ., brickwork, sand fi lling, cem ent bedding e tc., required for concealment of the pipes shall be measured and paid under relevant civil items.

2.23.0 Providing and fixing in proper line and level (with necessary support like CI clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), cast iron LA class pipe, open to wall, ceiling and floor, of approved make, including tube fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., complete including making good the wall, ceiling, and floor, jointing with lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in- charge. The diameter of pipe shall be of the following NB:



Page 371 of 430

1) 200 mm 2) 150 mm 3) 100 mm 4) 75 mm.

General:

The CI L A class Spun soil pipe and fittings shall be o f the required diameter, size and type, as specified in the item. The pipe shall be fixed in full lengths, as far as possible. All the pipes shall be fixed on wall face at locations indicated on the drawings or as instructed by the Consultants. Pipes shall b e secured to the face of the wall, bel ow a ll join ts, e ither by CI or MS clamps with wooden wall plugs/duties or on a bracket with 6 mm dia MS threaded bar bent to a required dia shall be nut-bolted with washer.

The connection between the main pipe and laterals, valves etc., shall be made by using flanged end thimble piece.

It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts, etc., whereve r required, fo r providing the va rious services. Damag es caused while providing this shall be made good by the Contractor.

1.0 Materials:

The specified dia CI LA class Spun pipe fittings and clamps shall conform to relevant plumbing material specification. The lead s hall conform to IS: 782. All CI LA class pipes and fittings shall be truly cylin drical of the clear internal diameter spe cified, of uniform thickness, smooth and with strong deep sockets free from flaws, air bubbles, cracks, pinholes and other defects. They shall not be brittle but shall allow ready cutting , chipping and drilli ng. E ach pipe, before it is laid, shall b e examine d a nd te sted with a hammer to prove its soundness and washed to remove all soil or dirt.

2.0 Workmanship:

Trenches for C.I. pipes and Specials: The trenches for the pipes shall be excavated to line s and level s as directe d. The bed of th e trench shall have to be truly and evenly dressed.

All pipes shall be laid as per line and level specified on the dra wing. The pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned of all d ust and dirt and special care shall be taken to clean the inside of the socket and outside of the spigots.

The pipes shall be lowered into the trenc h by means of suitable chain pulley blocks, shear legs, chain, ropes etc., The pip es shall be laid as per line and level s pecified on the drawing in position so th at the socket of all pipes fa ce the direction of flow . (This shall not apply to doub le socket end specials as per IS).

CI pipes shall be of the spe cified diameter and in full length, includ ing socket end s of the pipes unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings.

Where so directed, the pipes and specials may be laid on masonry or concrete pillars. The pipe laid on the level ground, shall be laid with socket facing the direction of flow of water. In all other cases, the socket shall be laid facing up hill.

After all join ts have been caulked with lead, cem ent concrete thrust blocks of approved design shall

be provided at 45 oand 90

o bends of the pipes a nd also at places where there is likeliho od of thrus t so

as to withstan d the dynamic and static forces developed due to w ater made after the joints have been caulked with load.



Page 372 of 430

At the end of each day, the last pipe laid shall have its open end securely closed with a wooden plug to prevent entry of water, soil, rats and any other foreign matter into the pipe.

Preparation of Joints: Yarn

Joints:

The in terior o f the socket a nd the exterior of the spigo t shall be clea ned thoroughly and dried. The spigot of the upper pipe shall be pro perly fitted into the socket of the lower pipe such that there is unifor m annular space for fitting with the jointing material. Yarn of require d length shal l be placed aro und the spigot of the pipe to centre the spigot in the socket. Knotting of the yarn shall not be p ermitted. Required length of the yarn shall be in on e piece. When single strand of yarn material is used, overlap at the top shall not be more than 50 mm. When more than single strand is required for a joint, each s trand shall be cut to the requir ed length so that the ends shall mee t o n the opposite sides of the pipe and not on top or bottom. Whe n the spigo t is shoved home, the yarn ma terial shall be driv en tigh tly against the inside base o r hub of the socket with suitable tools.

Lead Caulked Joints:

The pipes an d fittings shall be joined with lead caulked join ts. The angular space between th e socket and spigot shall be first well pac ked with spun yarn soaked in bitumen and then drie d, leaving space, as deta iled and specified in plumb ing material specification, from the lip o f th e socket, for lead. The joints may be leaded by wrapping a ring o f hemp rope, co vered with clay around the p ipes at the en d of the sockets by using special leadin g rings, ha ving a hole to which molten lead shall be poured in.

Leading: Lead used shall conform to IS: 782. Lead shall be heated to proper temp. in a melting vessel. Be fore pouring, all scum or d ress wh ich may appear on the surface of the lead during melting shall be skimmed off. Each jo int shall be filled in one con tinuous pourin g. Spongy or imperfectly filled joints shall be burnt out and re-poured. Care shall be taken not to overheat the lead.

Precaution for melting the lead:

i) The vessel and the ladle in which lead shall be put shall be clean and dry. ii)

Sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted.

iii) Lead shall not be overheated.

The approximate depth (with a tolerance of 5%) of pig lead for each joint of CI Pipes and fittings shall be as under:

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Diameter of Pipe Depth of lead Diameter of Pipe Depth of lead

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75 mm to 150 mm 45 mm 300 mm to 450 mm 55 mm

200 mm to 250 mm 50 mm 500 mm & 600 mm 60 mm

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Quantity of lead and spun yarn required for each joint shall be as under:



Page 373 of 430

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nominal Lead Spun yarn Nominal Lead Spun yarn

Dia of Pipe reqd. reqd. Dia of Pipe reqd. reqd.

in mm in kg in kg in mm in kg in kg

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75 1.8 0.10 300 7.2 0.48

100 2.2 0.18 400 9.5 0.60

125 2.6 0.20 450 14.0 0.95

150 4.0 0.20 500 15.0 1.00

200 5.0 0.20 600 16.0 1.00

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note: The quantitie s given in th e table are approximate and a variation of 20% is permissible. However, the depth of lead in the joints shall be adhered to within the permissible limit of ± 0.5% as specified above.

Before caulking, the lead ing ring shall be re moved and the projecting lead shall be removed by chiselling. Ca ulking shall b e done a fter a convenien t length o f p ipe has been la id and leaded . The joint shall then be caulked a ll around three times with proper caulking chisel of increasing thickness and a hammer, weighing 2 to 2.5 kg in su ch a manner as to make the join t sound . The joint shall be left flush and neat, e ven with the s ocket. Access doors to fittings shall be provided with 3 mm rubber insertion packing and se cured without screws to make them air and water tig ht, w herever required. Lead joints sha ll no t be covered till the pipe lines are tested under pressu re, but the rest of the pipe li nes may be covered to preven t expansion an d contraction due to variation in temperature.

Pipes shall b e ca refully skimmed of all scale. Sufficient lead shall then be melt ed in a pot; taken from the pot and ru n hot into the j oint and the joint filled at one run ning. The joint sh all then be caulked well when cool by a suitable caulking tool and a 2 Kg hammer and left n eat and smooth.

Flanged Joints:

The jointing materials inserted in between the flanges and the nuts shall be car efully tightened, in opposite p airs, until the joint ring is o nly just sufficiently compre ssed between the flanges to render the joint water tight under the desired pressure.



Page 374 of 430

Three-ply rub ber insertion cloth o f appro ved thickness and o f the full dep th o f the fla nge with proper pipe hole and bolt h ole meeting e ven at both the inner and outer edges shall be used. When the flange is not fully faced, the packing may be of the dimension of th e facing strip only. Its proper placing should be tested before another pipe is joined on.

Lead Wool joints:

Wherever it is impractical o r dangerous to use molten lead, cold ap plication shall be required . Then the join ts may be made with caulking lead wool or yarn. Joints caulked with lead wool or lead yarn shall withstand greater displacement than cast lead joints.

Approximate weights and dept hs of lea d wool required for each joint of various diameter of C I

pipes and fittings are given below. Just s ufficient quantity o f spun ya rn shall be pu t so tha t the

specified depth of lead wool is achieved. An allowance of 5% variation in the specified weights and depths shall be permissible.

-------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Nominal

dia Lead wool Depth of Nominal Lead wool Depth of

of pipe spun reqd. lead wool dia of spun reqd. lead wool

In mm in kg reqd. in mm pipe in mm in kg reqd. in mm

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75 0.80 19 300 3.50 25

100 0.90 19 350 4.65 29

125 1.25 20 400 5.70 31

150 1.60 23 450 6.70 32

200 2.05 23 500 8.30 33

250 2.95 25 600 10.00 35

-------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Jointing

shall be made with caulking lead wool or yarn inserted in strings not le ss than 5 m m thick and the caulking sha ll be repeated with each tu rn of lead wool or yarn. The entire lead wool or yarn used shall be compressed into a dense mass. When working with lead wool, it is very important to use ca ulking tools of appropria te thickness to fill the joint space and to thoroughly consolidate the materials from the back to the front of the socket.

Rubber Gasket Joints:

For spigot and socket joints using rubbe r gasket, pipes shall be of modified design suitable fo r the purpose.



Page 375 of 430

Spigot of pip es and portion of sockets engaging the bulb seating shall be scru bbed out of a ll dirt, dust, loose scales etc., and wiped clean.

A thin film of any approved lubricant shall be app lied to the bu lb seating inside the socket. The rubber gasket, a fter wiping clean, shall be fle xed an d placed inside the socket with the bulb towards back of the socket, ensuring tha t the gr oove in the gasket is located on the retaining head in the socket and retaining heel of the gasket is firmly bedded in the seat.

The chamfer ed portion of the spigo t an d the inside s urface of gasket shall be lightly smeare d with a th in film of lubrican t. Spigot o f the pi pe shall b e aligned and carefully e ntered into th e socket until it makes contact with the ga sket and the joint assembly completed b y forcing the spigot end pa st the gasket (which is thus comp ressed) until the spig ot reaches bottom of the socket.

If th e spigot cannot be forced home with the use of reasonable force, the spigot shall be removed and the gasket, in position, examined for any displacement or bulges.

Forcing home of the spigot shall be done by us ing appropriate too ls and tackle suitable for th e purpose.

Spigots in pipes to be used when rubber joints are adopted, shall have chamfered end. When it is found necessary to cut a pipe on site, the cut en d shall be ch amfered carefully removin g burrs and sharp edges before using.

The work sh all alwa ys be done under guidance of an e xperienced foreman by a skille d workman and shall not be left to unskilled hands for whatsoever reason.

Painting:

CI water supply pipes in e xposed location and s paces shall be painted with two or more coat s of bitumastic paint over a coat of primer.

Paint shall be of appro ved quality and shade and where directed, the pipes shall be pain ted in accordance with approved pipe colour code.

CI pipes in chase shall be painted with two c oats of bitumen pain t, covered with polye thylene tape and a final coat of bitumen paint.

CI water supply pipes below ground and covered by cement concrete shall not be painted.

Testing:

The lead jo ints shall be tested to a pres sure of 150 lbs/sq.inch minimum (10 k g/cm²) or such head as otherwise specified after being c aulked and should any lea kage occur, the same shall be remade and section retest a t the Contractor 's expense un til satis factory results are established.

A test regis ter shall be maintained and a ll entries shall be signed and dated by C ontractor and Engineer-in-charge.



Page 376 of 430


a) The leng th o f pipe shall be measured, incl uding a ll fittings a long its leng th in running meters,

correct to a cm. N o allowance shall be mad e for the portion of p ipe length entered in the sockets of the adjacent pipe or fittings.

b) The rate shall be inclusive of all ma terials, labour, tools, plant/equi pment, etc., required for

satisfactory erection, testing and commissioning of this item.

c) The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.

d) The road crossing shall be done by e xcavating one h alf of the road at a time. The second half being commenced after the pipes have been laid in the first ha lf and the trench refilled. Necessary safety measure for traffic as dire cted shall be adopted. All type o f pip es, water mains, cables , etc ., met within the cour se of exca vation shall be c arefully pro tected and supported. Care shall be taken not to dist urb the electrical and communication cable removal of which, if necessary, shall be arranged for by the Employer.

2.24.0 Providing and fixing cast iron LA class pipe including tube fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., approved make, in proper line and level (with necessary support like CI clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required) ) concealed into wall, ceiling and floor and making good, jointing with lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The nominal bore of the pipe shall as under:

1) 200 mm 2) 150 mm 3) 100 mm 4) 75 mm.

All the re levant specificatio ns of item no . 1.23 .0 shall be follow ed e xcept that the cast iron LA class pipes and fittings shall be concealed instead of keeping open.

2.25.0 Providing and fixing flanged mount CI sluice valve of approved make with GM seats, high

tensile brass spindle with cap, conforming to standard water-works pattern and flanges as per IS: 15381, flat faced and drilled, complete with accessories of the following pipe dia:

a) 200 mm b) 150 mm c) 100 mm d) 80 mm.

1.0 Materials and Workmanship:

CI Sluice valves shall be cast iron double flanged, with non-rising spindle. E ach sluice valve shall b e prov ided with wheel for valves in expo sed position s an d cap top fo r undergroun d installation. Contractors shall p rovide suitable op erating keys for slui ce val ves with top s. Sluice valves shall be of approved quality conforming to IS 780 of class-I.

The body, domes, covers, wed ge/gate and stuffing box shall be of good q uality cast iron, th e spindle of b ronze, the nut and valve seats l eaded t in b ronze. T he bo dies spindle a nd other parts shall be truly machi ned with surfaces sm oothly finished. Th e are a of the water way o f the fittings shall be at least equal to the nominal bore of the pipe.



Page 377 of 430


The rate shall include all the operations requir ed for satisfactory c ompletion of the item. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

2.26.0 Providing and fixing flanged mount CI non-return valve (swing type) of approved make, conforming to standard water-works pattern and flanges as per IS: 15381, flat faced and drilled, complete as per specification of the following NB:

a) 200 mm b) 150 mm c) 100 mm d) 80 mm.

The relevan t specifications of item no . 1 .25.0 shall be followed exc ept tha t the c ast iron NRV shall be used instead of CI sluice valve.

2.27.0 DRY-PIT INSTALLATION:

1.27.1 Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning, specified horizontal/vertical single/multi stage centrifugal electric motor driven pump sets (with 80 % efficiency in case of i and 70% in case of ii), to handle: (i) 2500 LPM of clean cold water against 35 M total head or, (ii) 1250 LPM of clean cold water against 35 M total head; motors to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 440 volts AC supply, a suitable approved make star-delta starter making connections for starter, pumps, earthing, etc., complete with accessories.

1.0 Materials:

Pump set sha ll be o f approved make or equivalent certified by the consul tants. General output requirement of LPM at required head sha ll be as spe cified in the respective l ine item in Bills o f quantities. Motor should b e suitable for three phase 50 cycles, 4 00 volts AC supply. Pump

related p iping with va lves a nd necessary fittings, cable, electrical contro ls e tc., sh all fall under the scope of the contractor and shall be treated as a part of the entire job.

The electrical work shall be carried out as per relevant electrical specification.

The necessary civil work related to the pump foundation, bolting, making a hole in the top slab of the sump, and making it good after c ompletion of work as speci fied, etc., shall be arranged for by the contractor. However, in case of punc turing a wall of the sump on side/s, shall no t be under the sco pe of the contractor. Nonetheless, if una voidable, the contractor shall be obliged to carry out the job as per instruction. at an extra cost.

2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be connected a pump. The e arthing shall be done by t he contractor as per stan dard electrica l engineering practice.


The rate includes cost of all labour , material , tools and plants e tc., required for satisfactor y completion, testing and commissioning of this i tem as described a bove. The rate shall be for a unit o f one n umber of pu mp set with a ll accessories and labour involved in th e completion of job.



Page 378 of 430

1.27.2 Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning specified horizontal/vertical, single/multi stage

centrifugal electric motor driven pump sets, to handle 125 LPM of clean cold water against 35 m total head (the pump efficiency should not be less than 50 %); with motor (not more than 2.0 HP) to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 440 volts AC supply, a suitable D.O.L. starter and making connections for starter, pump, earthing, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

Pump set sh all be a o f a pproved mak e or equiva lent certified b y the consultants. General output requirement of LPM at required head shall be as specified in the respective line item in Bills of quantities. Motor should be suitable for three phase 50 cycles, 400 volts AC supply.

Pump related piping with valves and necessary fittin gs, cable, electrical controls etc., shall fall under the scope of the contractor and shall be treated as a part of the entire job.


The necessary civil work related to the pump foundation, bolting, making a hole in the top slab of the sump, and making it good after c ompletion of work as speci fied, etc., shall be arranged for by the contractor. However, in case of punc turing a wall of the sump on side/s, shall no t be under the sco pe of the contractor. Nonetheless, if una voidable, the contractor shall be obliged to carry our the job as per instruction at an extra cost.

2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be connected a pump. The e arthing shall be done by t he contractor as per stan dard electrica l engineering practice.



1.27.3 Providing, fixing testing and commissioning specified horizontal/vertical single/multi stage

centrifugal electric motor driven pump sets to handle 125 LPM of clean cold water against 25 M total head (the pump efficiency should not be less than 50 %); motor (not more than 1.5 H.P.) to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 440 volts AC supply, suitable D.O.L. starter making connections for starter, pumps, earthing of pumps etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:






Page 379 of 430


2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be connected a pump. The e arthing shall be done by the contractor as per standard engineering practice.



2.28.0 WET-PIT INSTALLATION (VERTICAL SUBMERSIBLE PUMPSETS)

1.28.1 Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning specified vertical single/multi stage

centrifugal electric motor driven pump (the efficiency should be 80 % in case of I and 70 % in case of ii) sets, to handle (i) 2500 LPM of clean cold water against 35 M total head,

(ii) 1250 LPM of clean cold water against 35 M total head,

with motors to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 400 volts AC supply, a suitable star/delta starter making connections for starter, pumps, earthing of pumps etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:







Page 380 of 430

2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be connected a pump. Earthing of pump sh all be done b y the contractor as pe r standard electrical engineering practice.



1.28.2 Providing, fixing testing and commissioning a specified vertical single/multi stage

centrifugal electric motor driven pump sets (with 50 % efficiency), to handle 125 LPM of clean cold water against 35 M total head, motor (not more than 2.0 H.P.) to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 440 volts AC supply, a suitable D.O.L. starter making connections for starter pumps, earthing of pumps etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:





2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be

connected a pump. Ear thing of pump shall be done by the contractor as per standard engineering practice..





Page 381 of 430

1.28.3 Providing, fixing, testing and commissioning, best Indian make vertical single/multi stage centrifugal electric motor driven pump sets, to handle 125 LPM of clean cold water against 25M total head (with 50 % efficiency), motor (not more than 1.5 H.P.) to work on 3 phase 50 cycles, 440 volts AC supply, a suitable D.O.L. starter making connection from starter pumps, earthing of pumps etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:





2.0 Workmanship:

The pump of approved make or equival ent shall be supplied erected and commissioned at site as per the in structions an d/or drawings given b y the Consultants . A suitab le starter shall be connected a pump. The e arthing shall be done by t he contractor as per stan dard electrica l practice.


The rate includes cost of all labour , material , tools and plants e tc., required for satisfactor y completion, testing and commissioning of this item as described above.

The rate shall be for a unit of one number of pump set with all accessories and labour involved in the completion of job.



Page 382 of 430

SANITRY INSTALLATION 2.1.0 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware Orissa pattern WC with back/front inlet

with 1 no. white glazed vitreous chinaware `P' or `S' trap with or without vent horn as under: 1) size 580mm x 440mm, 2) size 530mm x 410mm.

1.0 Materials:

Orissa type WC and rele vant civil spe cification for cement mortar and 1:2:4 CC shall be followed.

2.0 Workmanship:

The pan shall be sunk in to the floor or raised above the floor an d embedded in a cushion of average 15 cm thick CC 1:2:4 as specified. This concrete shall be left 115mm below the top level of the pan so as to allow for flooring and its bed concrete. The floor should be suitably sloped so that the waste water is drained into the pan. The pan shall be provided with 100mm 'P' or 'S' trap as specified in the item with approxima tely 50mm seal. The join t b etween the p an and the trap shall be made leak-proof with CM 1:1 (1 cem ent: 1 fine sand). The joint be tween WC and flush pipe shall be made with putty of white lead in linsee d oil and cau lked well or with approve d rubber joint. The WC shall be fixed in the best manner of workmanship.


The rate shall be for a unit including the cost of all materials and labour involved in the operations described under this item.

2.2.1 Extra over item no. 2.1.0, for providing and fixing coloured Orissa Pan instead of white.

The relevan t specification of item no . 2 .1.0 shall be followed but coloured WC shall be fixed instead white. The rate shall be over an d above that of item no. 2.1.0 for providing and fixin g coloured Orissa Pan instead of white.

2.3.1 Extra over item no. 2.1.0, for providing and fixing special coloured Orissa Pan instead of white. The relevan t specification of item no . 2 .1.0 shall be followed but special coloure d Orissa Pan shall be fixed instead of white . The rate sha ll be over and above that o f item no. 2.1 .0 for providing and fixing special coloured Orissa Pan instead of white.

2.4.1 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware wash down type floor mounted

European WC, with integral `P' or `S' trap including cutting and making good the wall and floor.

1.0 Materials:

European WC Pan, Cement mortar shall conform to relevant specification of civil materials.

2.0 Workmanship:

Closet shall be fixed to the floor by means of 75mm long 6.5mm diameter counter sunk bolts and nuts embedded in the floor concrete using rubber or fibre washers so as to prevent any lateral displacement. The joint between the trap of WC and soil pipe shall be made with cement and m-seal.



Page 383 of 430


The rate shall be for a unit of one numb er and includ e the cost o f all labour and mater ial for fixing the pan, etc., complete, including testing and commissioning.

2.5.0 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware double trap siphon pattern floor

mounted EWC, with integral `P' or `S' trap including cutting and making good the wall and floor.

The relevan t specifications of item no 2 .4.1 sha ll be followed e xcept tha t Double trap siphon pattern EWC shall be used instead of wash-down pattern EWC.

2.5.1 Extra over item no. 2.4.1,2.5.1, for providing and fixing coloured EWC instead of white.

The relevan t specification of item no. 2 .4.1 shall be followed but c oloured EWC shall be fixe d instead of white. The ra te shall be over and above that of item no . 2.4.1 for providing and fixing coloured EWC instead of white.

2.5.2 Extra over item no. 2.4.1,2.5.1, for providing and fixing special coloured EWC instead of white.

The relevant specification of item no .2.4.1 shall be followed but spe cial coloured EWC shall be fixed instead of white. The rate shall be over and above that of item no.2.4.1 for providing and fixing special coloured EWC instead of white.

2.5.3 Extra over item no. 2.4.1, 2.5.1, for providing and fixing super special coloured EWC

instead of white. The relevan t specification of item no.2 .4.1 shall be followed but s uper special coloured EWC shall be fixed instead of white . The rate sha ll be over and above that o f item no.2.4 .1 for providing and fixing super special coloured EWC instead of white.

2.6.1 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware box rim type floor mounted

Railway carriage hopper WC including cutting and making good the wall and floor.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.4.1 shall be followed except that Railway

carriage hopper WC shall be used instead of wash-down pattern EWC.

2.7.0 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware wall mounted cantilever type EWC and

with integral `P' or `S' trap including cutting and making good the wall and floor as under: a) supported on CI floor mounted chair supports, and

b) supported on CI wall brackets.



Page 384 of 430

The relevant specifications of item no. 2 .4.1 shall be followed except that the WC shall be wall hung and supported either on CI floor mounted chair or on CI wall brackets of approved quality.

2.7.1 Extra over item no. 2.5.0 for providing and fixing coloured EWC instead of white.

The relevan t specification of item no. 2 .7.0 shall be followed but c oloured EWC shall be fixe d instead white. The rate shall be over an d above that of item no. 2.7.0 for providing and fixin g coloured EWC instead of white.

2.7.2 Extra over item no. 2.5.0 for providing and fixing special coloured EWC instead of white.

The relevant specification of item no. 2.7.0 shall be followed but special coloured EWC shall be fixed instead of white. The rate shall be over and above that of item no.2.7.0 for providing and fixing special coloured EWC instead of white.

2.7.3 Extra over item no. 2.5.0 for providing and fixing super special coloured EWC instead of white.

The relevan t specification of item no.2 .5.0 shall be followed but s uper special coloured EWC shall be fixed instead white. The rate shall be over and above that of item no.2.5.0 for providing and fixing super special coloured EWC instead of white.

2.8.0 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware Indian type WC pan with a 100mm

vitreous china ‘P’ or ‘S’ trap including cutting and making good the floor including a pair of the following footrest: 1) Size 510mm, 2) Size 580mm.

Specification for item no. 2.1.0 shall be followed except that the WC shall be Indian type with a pair of footrest.

2.9.1 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware Universal (Anglo-Indian) type WC with

an integral `P' or `S' trap including cutting and making good the wall and floor. Specification for item no . 2.4.1 shall be followed except that the WC shall be universal (Anglo- Indian) type.

2.10.1 Providing and fixing stainless steel Indian type WC Laxi Pan of Nirali, AMC or equivalent size

724mm x 578mm, back/front inlet, including cutting and making good the floor etc., complete, as instructed.

Specification for item no. 2.1.0 shall be followed except that the WC shall be stainless steel Laxi Pan of Nirali, AMC or equ ivalent. It shall be manufactured from thick stainless of 18 /8 h igh grade indestructible-chrome-nickel steel and polished in an easy-clean finish.



Page 385 of 430

2.11.1 Providing and fixing a jet spray for EWC with a CP copper tube with a flange of approved make.

Water jet spray with necessary speci als shall be provided and fitted on EWC with the concealed-stopcock. It sh all be fitted in form of b est workmanship as directed by the Consultants. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

2.12.0 Providing and fixing white glazed vitreous chinaware wash basin with single or double hole

for pillar-tap comprising of: a) White glazed vitreous chinaware washbasin, with supporting MS or CI brackets. b) 1 no. 40 or 32mm CP cast brass bottle-trap with extension piece to wall, wall flange with rubber adopter for waste connection and one waste coupling. c) 1 no. heavy quality CP brass angular stopcock, 15mm size. d) 1 no. 15mm NB heavy quality CP brass inlet connection with unions at end. The supporting bracket shall be painted with 3 coats of approved paint of approved shade in following size: i) 530mmx450mm, ii) 550mmx400mm,

type).

iii) 510mmx450mm (oval-counter top type) iv) 550mmx400mm (oval-under counter

1.0 Material s:

The washbasin, the CP brass pillar-tap, the CP brass bottle-trap the CP brass angular stopcock and inlet con nection shall conform relevant specif ications of plumbing materials . The bracket shall conform to IS: 775. All materia ls shall be of 1st quality, of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The washbasin shall be fixed on the wa ll or counter, as and where directed. The washbasin shall be supp orted on a p air of MS or CI bra ckets fixed in CM 1 :3 (1 cement: 3 sand). The brackets shall conform to IS: 775-1962. The wall pl aster on the rear shall be cut to rest the top edge of the w ashbasin. After fixing the b asin, plaster shall be mad e good and surface finishe d to match with the existing one.

The bracket shall be painted with 3 coats of approved ready-mixed paint of approved shade.

The CP bras s bottle-trap and union sh all be connec ted to 40 or 32mm dia wa ste pipe , whic h shall be suitably bent towards the wall. It shall discharge into an open drain leading to a galley- trap or d irect into it on the ground floor and shall be connected to a waste pipe through a floor trap on the upper floors. CP brass bottle-trap and union may not be p rovided where the surface drain or a flo or trap is placed directly under the basin and the waste is discharged into it vertically down.

The height of the front edge of the washbasin from the floor level shall be 80 cm or as spe cified in the drawing.

The necessa ry inle t, ou tlet connections and fitt ings such as pillar-cocks, CP brass wa ste coupling, waste pipe, stopcock, bottle-trap chain with rubber plug, etc., shall be fixed.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and includ e cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item as specified.



Page 386 of 430

2.13.1 Extra over item no. 2.08, for providing and fixing coloured WB instead of white.

The relevant specification of ite m no. 2.12.0 shall be followed bu t coloured WB shall be fixed instead white. The rate shall be over an d above that of item no. 2.8.0 for providing and fixin g coloured WB instead of white.

2.14.1 Extra over item no. 2.08, for providing and fixing Special coloured WB instead of white. The relevant specification of item no. 2 .12.0 shall be followed but special coloured WB shall be fixed ins tead white. The ra te shall be o ver and abo ve tha t o f item no. 2 .8.0for providing and fixing special coloured WB instead of white.

2.15.1 Extra over item no. 2.08, for providing and fixing super special coloured WB instead of white. The relevan t specification of item no . 2 .12.0 shall be followed bu t super special coloured WB shall be fixed instead white. The rate shall be over and above that of item no. 2.8.0 for providing and fixing super special coloured WB instead of white.

2.16.1 Providing and fixing a stainless steel sink, single bowl of size not more than 600 x 450mm and depth 200mm, comprising of: a) stainless steel sink supported on MS or CI brackets. b) 40mm NB CP brass waste coupling with rubber plug and CP chain. c) PVC waste pipe 40 or 32mm dia 1 for each sink upto top of a trap.

1.0 Materials:

Stainless steel sink, 40mm CP brass waste-coupling with a rubber plug and chain shall conform to relevant specification of plumbing material.

2.0 Workmanship:

The SS kitchen sink shall be supported on a pair of MS or CI brackets, fixed in CM 1:3 (1 cement: 3 coarse sand). The MS or CI brackets shall conform to IS: 775. The wall plaster on the rear shall be cut to rest the top edge of the sink over it. After fixing the sink, the plaster shall be made good and the surface finished to match with the existing one.

The CP brass trap and union shall be con nected to 40mm dia nominal bore waste pipe (as pe r drawing), which shall be suitably ben t towards the wall. It shall discharge into a ` P' trap leading to a gully- trap or direct in to the galley- trap on the gr ound floor an d shall be co nnected to a waste pipe through a flo or trap on the u pper floors. Surface drain or a floor trap when placed directly under the sink, the waste shall be vertically directly discharged down.

The height of the front ed ge of the sink from the flo or level shall be 80 cm or as sho wn in drawings.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools, plant and other equipment required for satisfactory completion of this item.



Page 387 of 430

2.17.0 Providing and fixing a Railway type stainless steel washbasin of Nirali, AMC or equivalent of specified size and shape, comprising of: a) stainless steel sink supported on MS or CI brackets. b) 40mm NB CP brass waste coupling with rubber plug and CP chain. c) PVC waste pipe 40 or 32mm dia 1 for each sink upto top of trap, of following size: 1) 535 x 345 x 150mm, 2) 460 x 305 x 127mm, 3) 400 ¼mm dia.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.16.1 shall be followed except that the washbasin shall be of railway type stainless steel construction of Nirali, AMC or equivalent of specified size and shape.

The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include co st of all lab our, materials, tools, plant and other equipment required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.18.1 Providing and fixing a maximum 700mm wide stainless steel trough having 2 or 3 bowls with decorative facia etc., as specified size and shape as per the drawing, comprising of: a) stainless steel trough supported on MS or CI brackets. b) 40mm NB CP brass waste- coupling a with rubber plug and CP chain for each bowl. c) PVC waste pipe 40 or 32mm dia 1 for each bowl upto top of the trap.

1.0 Materials:

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.10.0 shall be followed except that the sink shall be wide stainless steel trough with 2 or 3 bowls and shall be of specified size and shape.

2.0 Workmanship:

The rate shall include cost of all labour, materials tools and plant and other equipment required for satisfactory completion of this item, as described in item.


The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter and include cost of all labour, materials , tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.19.1 Providing and fixing screw down brass chromium plated heavy quality bib-taps of approved make on water supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange, as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

15mm dia CP brass scre w down shall conform to IS: 781 , as per relevant s pecification o f plumbing ma terials. The bib-tap shall be of 1s t quality, of appro ved make or equivalent as approved by Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The screw d own bib-tap of 15mm d ia as s pecified above shall be fixed as directed. T he threaded portion shall be smeared with white or r ed lead and provided with a fe w turns of fin e spun yarn ro und the screwed end o f the p ipe or the join t shall be done with a Teflon tape. The bib-tap shall be then screwed and fixed water tight.



Page 388 of 430


The rate shall be for a un it of one numb er and include c ost o f a ll l abour, ma terials, tools an d plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.20.1 Providing and fixing screw down brass chromium plated long body heavy quality bib- taps

on water supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange, complete.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.12.1 shall be followed except that long body bib tap shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.21.1 Providing and fixing push type brass chromium plated heavy quality bib-taps on water

supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange complete.

The relevan t specifications of item no. 2 .12.1 shall be followed e xcept tha t push type b ib-tap shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of one number a nd include cost of all labour , materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.22.1 Extra over item no. 2.19.1, 2.20.1 and 2.21.1 for providing and fixing Powder coated bib tap

instead of chromium plated.

The relevant sp ecification of item n o. 2.19.1, 2.20.1, 2.21.1 shall be follo wed but Po wder Coated bib tap instead of chromi um plated. The rate shall be over and above th at of item no. . 2.19.1, 2.20 .1, 2 .21.1 for providing and fixing Powder Co ated bi b tap-in stead of chromi um plated.

2.23.1 Providing and fixing brass chromium plated heavy quality pillar-taps/cocks on water

supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange, as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevan t specifications of item no2 .19.1 s hall be followed e xcept tha t pillar -tap shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit o f one number and include cost of all labour , materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.



Page 389 of 430

2.24.1 Providing and fixing brass chromium plated long neck heavy quality pillar-taps/cocks on water

supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange complete.

The relevant specifications of item no . 2 .19.1 shall be followed entirely excep t th at long neck pillar-tap shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.25.1 Providing and fixing push type brass chromium plated heavy quality pillar-taps/cocks on water supply pipe lines of 15mm dia with or without extension piece but with a flange complete. The relevan t specifications of item no . 2 .19.1 shall be followed en tirely e xcept that push type pillar-tap/cock shall be use d. The rate shall be for a unit of one nu mber and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.26.1 Extra over item no. 2.14.1, 2.14.2 and 2.14.3 for providing and fixing Powder Coated pillar-

tap/cock instead of chromium plated.

The relevant specification of item no. 2.23.1, 2.24 .1 and 2.25 .1 shall be fo llowed entire ly bu t Powder Coated pillar-tap /cock instead of chro mium pl ated. The ra te shall be over and above that of item n o. 2.12.1, 2.12.2 and 2.12.3 for providing and fixing Powder Coated pillar-tap/cock instead of chromium plated.

2.27.1 Providing and fixing central hole CP basin mixer with casted spout.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.12.0 shall be followed entir ely except that central hole CP basin mixer shall be used. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.28.1 Extra over item no. 2.27.1, for providing and fixing central hole Powder Coated basin mixer

instead of chromium plated. The relevant specification of item no. 2.27.1s hall be followed entirely but Powder Coated basin mixer instead of chromium plated . The rate sha ll be o ver and above that o f item no. 2.27 .1 for providing and fixing Powder Coated basin mixer instead of chromium plated.

2.29.1 Providing and fixing 15mm NB CP brass heavy quality wall or floor mounted sink tap,

swivelling type, with CP wall flange, casted spout. 1.0 Materials and Workmanship:

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.19.1 shall be followed except that the brass chromium plated wall or floor mounted sink tap, swivelling type, shall be fixed and the wall or floor shall be reinstated to its original condition, after fixation.




Page 390 of 430

The rate shall be for a unit of one number and includ e cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.30.1 Providing and fixing best Indian make mirror of specified size like Modifloat, Triveni, I.A.G

or equivalent silvered locally, with plain edge as required, with 12mm thick marine

plywood backing, with CP brass caps, etc., complete. Teakwood beading of 20mm x 32mm size, with French polish or 3 coats of paint shall be done as directed.

1.0 Materials:

The mirror shall be of Modifloat, Triveni, I.A.G. or equivalent as approved by the Consultants, with the edges rounded off as specified. The mirror shall be float glass, electroplated with silver. The mirror shall be free from waviness or distortion, from all angles of vision. Its thickness shall not be less than 6mm The back of the mirror shall be free from any silvering defects. Silvering shall have a protective uniform covering of red-lead paint. The 12mm thick marine plywood shall conform to relevant specification of civil materials and IS:710. Teakwood shall conform to relevant specification of civil materials.

2.0 Workmanship:

The mirror of a specified s ize, shall be mounted on wooden frame comprising of 12mm thick marine plywood and teak b eading, as per drawing and directed by the Architect o r Engineer-in- charge. The wooden frame shall be fixed in position by fixing wooden plugs in wall and the work shall be carried out in form of the best workm anship. For teakwood beading relevant civil wor k item specification shall be followed. The teakwood beading shall be of 20mm x 32mm size.


The rate shall be for a unit of number and include cost of all labour and materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item. The rate shall be for a unit of square meter.

2.31.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass towel-rod of approved make, 600mm long and 20mm dia with

concealed type brackets fixed to the wall with CP brass screws, etc., complete. 1.0 Materials:

The CP brass towel rod s hall be 600 mm long and o f 20mm diameter. The tow el rod shall b e provided with a pair o f CP bra ss brackets, fixed to the wall with CP brass screw with roun d head, using cup washers, screwed on to wall plug embedded in wall. The bra ckets shall be of concealed type CP brass. T he rod shall conform to IS:1068. All materials shall be of 1st qu ality of approved make approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The brackets of the towel r ail shall be fixed by means of CP brass screws fixed to wall p lugs, firmly embedded in the wall. The towel rod shall be fixed as per detailed drawing or as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge and Architect.




Page 391 of 430

The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour and m aterials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.32.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass Napkin-ring of approved make with concealed type

brackets fixed to the wall with CP brass screws, etc., complete. The relevant specifications of item no . 2.31.1 shall be followed for clauses 2.0 and 3.0 , except

that CP brass towel-ring shall be fitted.

2.33.1 Providing and fixing a CP towel-rack, 230 x 600mm size of approved make with

concealed type brackets fixed to the wall with CP brass screws, etc., complete. The relevan t specifications of item no . 2 .31.1 sha ll be followed for clauses 2.0 and 3.0 e xcept that CP towel-rack shall be fitted.

2.34.1 Providing and fixing CP brass Robe-hook, fixed to wall with CP screws etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The CP brass Robe-hook shall be fixed to the wall with CP brass screw with round head, usin g cup washers, screwed on to wall p lug e mbedded in wall. The bra ckets shall be of concealed type CP brass. All materials shall be of approved make, as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The Rob hook shall be fixed by means of CP brass screws fixed to wall plugs firmly embedded in the wall. The hook shall be fixed as per detailed drawing or as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge and Architect.

2.35.1 Providing and fixing a recessed type toilet paper-roll holder of approved make, size 150mm x 150mm, with wooden rod and spring, including cutting a recess in the wall, setting the roll holder in CM 1:3, reinstatement of the wall surface to original conditions etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The toilet paper roll ho lder shall be o f white glazed vitreous chinaware of specifie d size. It shall be of recessed type with wooden rod with sp ring a t one end for holding the paper roll. All materials required for satisfactory completion of this item shall be of 1st quality, o f the approved make or equivalen t as app roved b y the Consultants. The cement mortar 1 :3 sh all conform to relevant specification of civil materials.

2.0 Workmanship:

The toilet paper holder shall be fixed in the wall as per drawing, by cutting a recess in the wall, fixing the holder with CM 1:3 ( 1 cement: 3 fine sand) and rectifying the wall surface to original conditions.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of the item.



Page 392 of 430

2.36.1 Providing and fixing a screw-to-wall type toilet paper-roll holder fixed to the wall with CP

brass screws, etc., complete.

The relevan t specifications of item no. 2 .35.1 shall be followed e xcept tha t screw-to-wall type paper-roll holder shall be fixed to the wa ll with C.P brass screws, with round head, using cup washers screwed onto the wooden roll plugs, embedded in the wall.

2.37.1 Providing and fixing the first quality approved make (Chilly or equivalent) stainless steel liquid soap dispenser with SS cap and SS bracket, fixed to wall with CP brass screw, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The liquid soap dispenser shall be of stainless steel with SS cap and SS bracket. The screws for fixing sh all be of CP brass. All materials shall be of the bes t q uality, as app roved by th e Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The SS brack et for soap d ispenser shall be fixed in wa ll by providing wooden plugs in the wall. The work sha ll be carried out in th e best manner of workmanship and as per the drawing, as directed by the Consultants.



2.38.1 Providing and fixing a recessed type soap dish/tray of approved make of size 150mm x 150mm; setting the dish/tray, in CM 1:3, reinstatement of the wall surface to original conditions, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The recessed type soap dish/tray shall be of white glazed vitreous chinaware of specified size. All materials required for satisfactory completion of this item shall be of 1st quality, of the approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants. The CM 1:3 shall conform to relevant specification of civil material.

2.0 Workmanship:

The recessed type soap dish/tray shall be fixed in the wall as per drawing, by fixing the dish/tray flush with the finished wall surface (tile surface). It shall be achieved by cutting a recess in the wall and setting the soap dish/tray in CM 1:3 (1 cement: 3 sand) and reinstating the wall surface to the original conditions.





Page 393 of 430

2.39.1 Providing and fixing the first quality approved make (Chilly or equivalent) CP soap

dish/tray, fixed to wall with CP brass screws, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The CP soap dish or tray shall be of best quality and of approved make. The screws for fixing shall be of CP brass. All materials shall be of the best quality, as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The CP soap dish shall be fixed in wall by providing wooden plugs in the wall. The work shall be carried out in the best manner of workmanship and as per the drawing, as directed by the Consultants.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and i nclude cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of the item.

2.40.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass stopcock (male or female end) of 15mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The brass screw down stopcock, male end, of specified dia shall conform to IS: 781 and as per relevant specification of plumbing materials. The stopcock shall be of tested quality and of easy to clean variety. The stopcock shall be of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The stopcock shall be fixed in position by means of Jam nut and socket. The stopcock shall be fixed as directed. The joints shall be done with a Teflon tape. The joint shall be tested for any leak.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.41.1 Providing and fixing a heavy quality CP brass stopcock, male or female end, of 25mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.40.1 shall be followed except that the stopcock shall have a dia meter of 25mm. The rate shal l be for a unit of one nu mber and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.42.1 Providing and fixing a heavy quality CP brass stopcock (concealed with a casted cap)



Page 394 of 430

of 15mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevant spe cifications of item n o. 2. 40.1 shall be follo wed except that the CP b rass concealed stopcock with a casted cap, shall be used on G.I lines. The rate shall be for a u nit of one n umber an d in clude co st of all labour, materials, tool s an d plant, etc., requi red fo r satisfactory completion of this item.

2.43.1 Providing and fixing a heavy quality CP brass stopcock (concealed with sheet flange) of

15mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.22.1 shall be followed except that the CP brass concealed stopcock with sheet flange, shall be used on G.I lines. The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.44.1 Providing and fixing a heavy quality CP brass angular stopcock (male or female end) of

15mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.40.1 shall be followed except that the CP brass angular stopcock shall be used on G.I lines.


2.45.1 Providing and fixing a heavy quality CP brass push type stopcock (male or female end)

of 15mm dia on water supply pipe lines as approved by the Consultants etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no . 2 .40.1 shall be followed e xcept that the C P brass push type stopcock shall be used on G.I lines.


2.46.1 Providing and fixing a 15mm dia inlet pressure adjustable shower rose with cast shower arm of size 230mm and flange as approved by the Consultants.

1.0 Materials:

All ma terials shall be of the best quality, of approved make or equivalent certified by th e consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The shower set comprising of the adjustable rose an d shower a rm with flange shall be fixe d with a concealed cock so that the flange shall be cl ear of the finished wall, as per the deta iled drawings.



Page 395 of 430


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and in clude cost of all labour, materials, tools and plants, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.47.1 Providing and fixing a 15mm dia inlet telephonic shower as approved by the Consultants and

comprising of: a) 1 CP brass wall mixer, as per the drawing.

The relevant specifications of item no. 2 .46.1 shall be followed exce pt that a telep honic shower shall be used.


2.48.1 Providing and fixing a hot and cold water wall mixer with a telephonic shower arrangement of approved make as directed by the Consultants.

1.0 Materials:

All materials shall be of the best quality of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The hot and cold water wall mixer with a telephonic arrangement shall be fixed in position by means of Jam nut and socket. It shall be fixed near the outlet of the G.I water line or as directed. The joints shall be done with a Teflon tape. The joint shall be watertight.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plants, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.49.1 Providing and fixing a hot and cold water wall mixer with a non-telephonic shower system of approved make as directed by the Consultants.

The relevan t specifications of item no. 2 .48.1 shall be followed exc ept that wall mixer shall b e with non-telephonic shower system.


2.50.0 Providing and fixing a vitreous chinaware urinal, as approved by Consultants,

comprising of: a) CP brass heavy quality spreaders, 1 for each urinal. b) 32mm NB waste coupling, 1 for each urinal c) PVC flexible waste pipe 32mm dia 1 for each urinal upto bottom of channel shall be used, and d) Necessary connecting CP brass pipe between stopcock and spreader along with necessary connection; in size mentioned under: i) Large flat back wall hung urinal, 610mm x 400mm, ii)

Small flat back wall hung urinal, 456mm x 355mm,

iii) Angle back or spree flat back urinal, 430mm x 370mm.

1.0 Material s:



Page 396 of 430

The white vitreous chinaware fla t back wall hung urinal of specified size shall conform to relevant specifica tion o f plumbing mate rial. CP bras s heavy quality spreader a nd CP brass waste coupling shall be of appro ved quality. The CI bracket shall conform to IS: 775 . All materials shall be of th e b est quality, o f approved make or equivalent as appr oved b y the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The urinal shall be fixed in position by using wooden plugs and screws and shall be at a height of 65 cm, from the floor level to the top of the lip of urinal, unless otherwise directed. The wooden plugs shall be 50mm x 50mm at base tapering to 38mm x 38mm at top and 50mm in length and shall be fixed in wall in CM 1:3: (1 cement: 3 coarse sand). The urinal shall be connected to 32mm dia flexible P.V.C. pipe, which shall discharge into the channel or floor trap. The connection between the urinal, waste coupling and waste pipe shall be made by means of putty or white, clear white lead mixed with chopped hemp. Necessary connecting CP brass pipe between stopcock and spreader along with necessary connection shall be provided for flushing the urinal.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plants, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.51.1 Extra over item no. 2.50.0, for providing and fixing coloured urinal instead of white.

The relevant specification of item no. 2 .50.0 shall be followed e xcept that coloured urinal shall be fixed inste ad white . The rate shall be over and ab ove that o f item no. 2.50 .0 for pro viding and fixing coloured urinal instead of white.

2.52.1 Extra over item no. 2.50.0, for providing and fixing Special coloured urinal instead of white.

The relevan t specification of item no . 2.50.0 shall be followed bu t s pecial coloured urinal shall be fixed inste ad white . The rate shall be over and ab ove that o f item no. 2.50 .0 for pro viding and fixing special coloured urinal instead of white.

2.53.1 Extra over item no. 2.50.0, for providing and fixing super special coloured urinal instead of white.

The relevant specification of item no. 2.50.0 shall be followed but super special coloured urinal shall be fixed instead white. The rate shall be over and above that of item n o. 2.50 .0 fo r providing and fixing super special coloured urinal instead of white.

2.54.1 Reduction in rate of item no. 2.50.0, for not providing and fixing CP brass heavy quality spreaders.

The rate shall be for a un it o f one nu mber and for n ot pro viding and fixing CP brass heavy quality spreaders.



Page 397 of 430

2.55.1 Reduction in rate of item no 2.50.0, for not providing and fixing PVC flexible waste pipe.

The rate shall be for a unit of one numb er and fo r not providing an d fixing PVC fle xible waste pipe in item no. 2.50.0

2.56.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass bottle-trap 32mm dia of approved make.

The rate shall be for providing and fixing 32mm CP br ass bottle- trap and shall b e for a unit o f one number.

2.57.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass bottle-trap 40mm dia of approved make.

The rate shall be for providing and fixing 40mm CP br ass bottle- trap and shall b e for a unit o f one number.

2.58.1 Reduction in rate of item no. 2.50.0, for not providing and fixing a waste coupling.

The rate shall be for a unit of one numb er and fo r not provid ing an d fixing waste coupling in item no. 2.50.0.

2.59.1 Providing and fixing a domicile waste for each urinal of approved make.

The rate shall be for providing and fixing domicile waste and shall be for a unit of one number. 2.60.1 Providing and fixing a white glazed vitreous chinaware urinal division plate, including supporting clamps, CP brass screws, etc., complete of size 860mm x 315mm.

1.0 Materials:

Urinal partition shall be white glazed vitreous chinaware of specified size, CP brass screws and MS clip shall be provided as required. All materials shall be of 1st quality, of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The urinal partition shall b e fixed a t pro per height with CP brass screws with anchor fastener and MS clips, as approved by the manufacturer and as directed by Consultants.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour, materials, tools and plant,



Page 398 of 430

etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.61.1 Providing and fixing the first quality white glazed vitreous chinaware squatting urinal of

required size, 600mm x 350mm, of approved make, as approved or equivalent. 1.0 Materials:

The squatting plate pattern, white glazed vitreous chinaware urinal of 600mm x 350mm shall conform to relevant latest IS: 771. It shall be of 1st quality, of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Architect or Engineer-in-charge.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The squatting plate urinal shall be fixed as directed. 2.2 The top edge of the squatting plate shall be flush with the fin ished floor le vel ad jacent to it. It shall

be embedded on a la yer of 25mm thick CM 1:6 (1 cement: 6 fine sand), laid over a bed of BBCC in prop ortion of 1:5:10. The re levant specifications of civil work shall be followed for th e above work. There shall b e 100mm dia vitreous china channels as specified with inlet and outlet pieces suitably fixed in floor in CM 1:3 (1 ceme nt: 3 coarse sand) and joint finished with white cemen t. The earthe nware vitreou s china shall discharge in to 65mm CP brass outle t grating. The trap and fittings shall be fixed as directed.


The rate shal l be for a unit of one n umber and include cost of all materials, tools and plants and labo ur re quired for sat isfactory com pletion of this item. Providing and fixing short bo dy spout, 15mm dia with flange, as approved by the Consultants.

2.62.1 Providing and fixing a spout of 15mm dia a with flange as approved by the Consultants.

1.0 Materials:

The spout sh all conform to relevan t latest I. S. Codes and shall be of 1s t qua lity, o f appro ved make or equivalent as certified by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The work shall be carried out in the best manner of workmanship, as per drawing and as directed by the Consultants.


The rate sha ll be for a u nit o f one nu mber and inc lude for a ll labour, ma terials and too ls required to complete the work in satisfactory manner.

2.63.1 Providing and fixing a long body spout of 15mm dia with flange as approved by the

Consultants.



Page 399 of 430

1.0 Materials:

The relevant specifications of item no. 2.63.1shall be followed except that long body spout shall be fitted.

2.0 Workmanship:

The work sh all be carried out in the b est m anner of workmanship, as per drawing and as directed by the Consultants.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include cost of all labour and materials, tools and plant, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item.

2.64.1 Providing and fixing a white vitreous chinaware flushing cistern of approved or

approved make having 10 to 12.5 litre capacity with a lid, ceramic siphon and valves fittings, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The flushing cistern shall conform to relevant specifications of plumbing material. 2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The white vi treous chinawa re cistern sha ll be fi xed fir mly on 2 CI or mild steel brackets which shall

be firmly embedded in the wall in CM 1:4 (1 cement: 4 fine sand). 2.2 The height of the bottom o f the cistern from the top of the pan shall be 30 cm or as shown on

drawings. The low le vel flushing cistern of 10 to 12.5 litres shall be connected to WC pan with valveless fittings.


The rate shall be for a unit of one numbe r and s hall include the cost of all labour and material for fixing flushing cistern, including testing and commissioning.

2.65.1 Providing and fixing a white ABS plastic body flushing cistern of ‘Commander-

Champion’ or equivalent having 7 to 10 litre capacity with necessary fittings and PVC connection upto 1 meter length with angular stopcock, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

The flushing cistern shall conform to M-P12-A.



Page 400 of 430

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The ABS plastic body cistern shall be fixed firmly on wall with necessary sheet metal screws.

2.2 The height o f the top of the cistern from the t op of the floor shall b e 1.0 meter o r as shown on drawings The outlet of flushing cistern sha ll be of 32mm dia and connected to WC pan with specified pipe. The PVC connection upto 1.0 m length shall be connected to angular stopcock.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include the cost of all labour and material for fixing flushing cistern, including testing and commissioning.

2.66.1 Extra over item no. 2.65.1, for providing and fixing a coloured ABS plastic body flushing cistern instead of white. The relevan t specification of item no . 2 .65.1 shall b e followed except tha t coloured flushin g cistern shall be fixed instea d white. The rate s hall be over and above that of item no. 2.65 .1 for providing and fixing coloured flushing cistern instead of white.

2.67.1 Providing and fixing a CP brass exposed or concealed heavy duty half turn flush cock with a regulator etc., complete in following size: 1) 25mm dia, 2) 40mm dia.

1.0 Materials:

The half turn flush cock shall conform to relevant specification of plumbing material.

2.0 Workmanship:

The half turn CP brass flush cock 40 or 25mm dia shall be fixed as directed. The flush cock shall be made leak-proof by using teflon tape. The fixing work shall be carried out as per relevant specification of fixing of water supply lines.


The rate shall be for a unit of one numb er and includ e the cost o f all labour and mater ial for fixing flush cock, including testing and commissioning.

2.68.1 Providing a nd fixing a CP brass con cealed heavy duty push t ype flush co ck of ap proved make like ARK or equivalent with a flange etc., complete in following size: 1) 25mm dia, 2) 32mm dia.



Page 401 of 430

1.0 Material:

The relevant specification of item no. 2.67.1 shall be followed but push type concealed flush cock instead of half turn flush cock.

2.0 Workmanship:

The fittings shall be carried out in the manner of best workmanship adhering to specifications.



2.69.1 Extra over item no. 2.67.1 and 2.68.1, for providing and fixing a Powder Coated flush cock

instead of chromium plated.

1.0 Material:

The relevan t specification of item no. 2.67.1 shall be followed bu t Powder Coated flush cock instead of chromium plated.

2.0 Workmanship:

The rate shall be over and above that of item no. 2.67.1 for providing and fixing Powder Coated flush cock instead of chromium plated.


The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include the cost of all labour and material for fixing flush cock, including testing and commissioning.

2.70.0 Providing and fixing a 32mm CP brass flush valve with a CP flush bend of approved make

etc., complete of the following type:

a) Lever type with Elbow 32mm dia, b) Push type with Elbow 32mm dia, c)

Economy model 25mm dia, d) Economy model 32mm dia.

1.0 Materials:

The relevan t specifications of ite m no 2.67.1 s hall be followed en tirely e xcept th at flush valve shall be used instead of flush cock.

2.0 Workmanship:

The fittings shall be carried out in the manner of best workmanship adhering to specifications.



Page 402 of 430



2.71.0 Providing and fixing a solid plastic seat and cover, heavy quality of approved make with

rubber buffers and with CP brass pillar hinges, for any kind of EWC or Anglo- Indian WC, complete in following colours:

a) Black, b) White, c) Special colour.

1.0 Materials:

The plastic seat and cove r shall be co nnected with WC pan with CP brass pil lar hinges. In general, the work shall be carried out a s per the inst ructions of the Consultants. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

2.0 Workmanship:

The fittings shall be carried out in the manner of best workmanship adhering to specifications. 3.0 Mode of measurement and payment:

The rate shall be for a unit of one number and include the cost of all labour and material for fixing Flush-cock, including testing and commissioning.



Page 403 of 430

INTERNAL DRAINAGE

3.1.0 Providing and fixing CI spun/sand cast, soil type pipe including tube fittings such as

sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., of approved make in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), open to wall, ceiling and floor, including making them good having lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The diameter of pipe shall be as under:

1) 150mm NB 2) 100mm NB 3) 75mm NB.

1.0 Materials:

The specified dia CI Spun soil/Sand cast pipe and brackets/clamps shall conform to relevant plumbing material specification. The lead shall confirm to IS: 782.

The fittings shall be of ‘medium’ type cast iron conforming to material specification.

General:

1.1 The CI Spun soil/Sand cast pipe and fittings shall be of the required diameter, size and type, as specified in the item. The pipe shall be fixed in full lengths, as far as possible. All the pipes shall be fixed on wall face, at locations indicated on the drawings or as instructed by the Consultants. Pipes shall b e secured to the face o f th e wall, below all join ts, b y MS brackets/clamps with wooden wall plugs/duties or on a bracket with 6mm dia MS threade d bar bent to a required dia shall be nut-bolted with washer.

1.2 All soil pipes shall be carried up above the roof and shall have a cowl.

1.3 The ventila ting pipe or sh aft shall be carri ed up to a height of a tleast 1 m above the outer covering

of th e roof of the building . In th e case of windows in a gable wall or a dormer window, ventilating p ipe shall be car ried upto the ridge of the r oof or a tleast 2 m above the top o f the windows. In case of flat roof to which access fo r use is provided, it shall be carried upto a height of atleas t 1 m above the parapet or 2 m measured vertically from the top of a ny windows or opening which may exist upto a horizontal distance of 5 m from the vent pipe into such building. In case of open areas where buildings of other s tructures are not in immediate vicinity, the vent pipe shall be carried out to a height of at least 3 m.



Page 404 of 430

1.4 Where ventilating pipes are carried in shafts, they shall be of an ergonomically workable size.

If the shafts are also used to give light and air to rooms, at the roof level the ventilating pipes shall be carried out to a horizontal distance of not less than 5 m from the site of the shaft.

1.5 The sand cast iron pipes above parapet shall be fixed with MS brackets/clamps and stays. The brackets/clamps shall be made from 1.5mm thick MS flat bar of 30mm width, bent to the required shape and size to fit tightly, on the sockets, when tightened with screw bolts. It shall be formed of 2 semicircular pieces with flanged ends on both sides; with holes to fit in the screw bolts and nut 40mm long. One end of the stay shall be bent to from a hook to be fixed with brackets/clamps by means of bolts and the other end shall be bent for embedding in wall in CC block of size 200mm x 100mm x 100mm in 1:2:4 mix. The concrete shall be finished to match the surrounding surfaces.

1.6 The connection between the main pipe and branc h pipes shall be made by using fittings a nd specials (branches, tees, elbows and bends) with access doors for cleaning. Branch pipes shall be connected to stacks at the same angle as that of the fittings . No collars sh all be used on vertical stacks.

1.7 The waste from lava tories, kitchen basins, sinks, baths and other floor traps shall be separately connected to respective stacks of upper floors. The waste st ack of lavatories shall be connected dir ectly to manh ole while the waste stack of o ther shall be separately discharged over gully trap.

1.8 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts, etc.,

whereve r required by t he Consultants, for various services. Damages caused while providing this shall be made good by the Contractor.

2.0 Workmanship:

All pipes shall be laid as per proper slope, level and gradient specified on the drawing.

CI pipes shall be of the sp ecified diameter and in full length includ ing socket ends of the pipes unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings.

2.1 Fixing: The pipes and fittings shall be fixed in vertical alignmen t, unless otherwise specified and shall be secured to the walls at joints with brackets/clamp s. They shall be of MS or Aluminium, bent to the required shape and size to fit tightly on the pipe when tightened with MS bar, nut, bolt and washer. The brackets/clamps shall be fixed to the walls and kept about 25 mm clear off the finished face of the wall so as to facilitate cleaning and painting of the pipes.

2.2 Preparation of Joints: Yarn

Joints:

The in terior o f the socket a nd the exterior of the spigo t shall be clea ned thoroughly and dried. The spigot of the upper pipe shall be pro perly fitted into the socket of the lower pipe such that there is unifor m annular space for fitting with the jointing material. Yarn of require d length shal l be placed aro und the spigot of the pipe to centre the spigot in the socket. Knotting of the yarn shall not be p ermitted. Required length of the yarn shall be in on e piece. When single strand of yarn materia l is used, overlap at the top shall be not more than 50 mm. When more than one strand is required for a joint, each s trand shall be cut to the requir ed length so that the ends shall mee t o n the opposite sides of the pipe and not on top or bottom. Whe n the spigo t is shoved home, the yarning material shall be driv en tightly against the inside base or hub of th e socket with suitable tools.



Page 405 of 430

Lead Caulked Joints:

The pipes an d fittings shall be joined with lead caulked join ts. The angular space between th e socket and spigot shall be first well pac ked with spun yarn soaked in bitumen and then drie d, leaving space as detailed and as spe cified in plumbing material specification, from the lip of the socket, for le ad. The join ts may be lead ed by wrapping a ring of hemp rope covered with clay

around the pipes at the end of t he sockets by using special leading rings having a hole into which molten lead shall be poured.

Lead joints: Conforming to IS: 782, lea d shall be heated to proper temp. in a melting vessel. Before pouring, all scum or dress which may appear on the surface of the lead , during melting, shall be skimmed off. Each joint shall be filled in one continuous pouring. Spongy or imperfectly filled joints shall be burnt out and re-poured. Care shall be taken not to overheat the lead.

Precaution for melting the lead:

i) Lead shall be put in a clean and dry container. ii)

Sufficient quantity of lead shall be melted.

iii) Lead shall not be overheated.

The approximate depth (with a tolerance of 5%) of pig lead for each joint of CI Pipes and fittings shall be as under:

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Diameter of Pipe Depth of lead Diameter of Pipe Depth of lead

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75mm to 150mm 45mm 300mm to 450mm 55mm

200mm to 250mm 50mm 500mm & 600mm 60mm

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Page 406 of 430

Quantity of lead and spun yarn required for each joint shall be as under:

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nominal Lead Spun yarn Nominal Lead Spun yarn Dia. of

Pipe reqd. reqd. Dia. of Pipe reqd. reqd.

In mm in kg in kg in mm in kg in kg

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75 1.8 0.10 300 7.2 0.48

100 2.2 0.18 400 9.5 0.60

125 2.6 0.20 450 14.0 0.95

150 4.0 0.20 500 15.0 1.00

200 5.0 0.20 600 16.0 1.00

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Note:

The quantitie s given in the table are approximate and a varia tion of 20% is permissible. However, the depth of lea d in the join ts sha ll be adhered to within the permissible limit o f ± 0.5% of above values.

After caulking , the lead ing ring shall be remo ved and the projecting lead shall be removed by chiselling. Caulking shall b e done after a convenien t length o f p ipe has been laid and leaded . The joint shall be then caulked a ll around three times with proper caulking chisel of increasing thickness and a hammer, weighing 2 to 2.5 kg in such a manner as to make the joint soun d. The join t sha ll be le ft flushed and neat, eve n with the socket. T he pipes with ears shall be secured with steel or iron barrel pieces and st out 10 cm long galvanised iron nails of 10c m length driven into wood plu gs of 40mm thick ness fixe d on the wall on wall. Access doors to fittings shall be provided with 3mm rubber in sertion packing and secured without screws to make them air and water tigh t. Lead jo ints shall not be covered till the pipe lines are tested under pressure, bu t the rest of the pipe lines may be c overed to prevent deforma tion resulting from temperature effect.



Page 407 of 430

Lead Wool joints:

Wherever it is impractical o r dangerous to use molten lead, cold ap plication shall be required . Then the join ts may be made with caulking lead wool or yarn. Joints caulked with lead wool or lead yarn shall withstand greater displacement than cast lead joints.

Approximate weights and dept hs of lea d wool required for each joint o f various dia of CI pipe s and fittings are given belo w. Just sufficient quan tity of spun yarn shall be put so that the specified depth of lead wool is achieved. An allowance of 5% variation in the specified weights and depths shall be permissible.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Nominal dia. Lead wool Reqd Depth Nominal Lead wool Reqd Depth of pipe

spun reqd. of lead wool dia. of spun reqd. of lead wool

in mm in kg in mm pipe in mm in kg in mm

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

75 0.80 19 300 3.50 25

100 0.90 19 350 4.65 29

125 1.25 20 400 5.70 31

150 1.60 23 450 6.70 32

200 2.05 23 500 8.30 33

250 2.95 25 600 10.00 35

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Jointing shall be made with caulking lead wool or y arn inserted in strings not less than 5mm thick and the caulking sha ll be repeated with each tu rn of lead wool or yarn. The entire lead wool or yarn used shall be compressed into a de nse mass. Caulking too ls of appropriate

thickness shall be used to fill the joint space with lead wool to thoroughly co nsolidate the materials from the back to the front of the socket.

2.3 Painting:

CI drainage p ipes in expos ed location , in sha fts and pipe spaces shall be painted with two o r more coats of bitumastic paint over a coat of primer.

Paint shall be of appro ved quality and shade and where directed, the pipes shall be pain ted in accordance with approved pipe colour code.

CI pipes in chase shall be painted with two c oats of bitumen pain t covered with polyeth ylene tape and a final coat of bitumen paint.

CI water supply pipes below ground and covered by cement concrete shall not be painted.



Page 408 of 430

2.4 Testing:

Before use at site, al l CI drainage pipes shall be tested by fi lling up with water fo r atleast 1 0 minutes. After filling , pipes shall be gently st ruck with a hammer and inspected for blow holes and cracks. All defective pipes and joints s hall be r ejected and r emoved/redone as required, from the site within 48 hours.

Pipes shall be tested after installation, by filling up t he s tack with wa ter. All opening an d connections shall be plugged. The total head in the stack shall, however, not exceed 3 m.

Alternatively, the contractor shall test all water supply stacks by a smoke testing machine. Smoke shall be pumped into the stack after pl ugging all inle ts and connections. The top en d shall however be left open. The stack shall then be observed for leakage and all defective pipes and fittings removed or repaired as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Defective joints shall be redone.

A test regis ter shall be maintained and a ll entries shall be signed and dated by C ontractor and Engineer-in-charge.


The length of pipe shall be measured including al l fittings along its length in run ning meters , correct to a centimetre. No allowance shall be made for the portion of pipe length entered in the sockets of the adjacent p ipe or fittings. T he rate shall be inclusive of all ma terials, labour, too ls and plant etc ., required for satisfactory completion, testing and commissioning o f this item. The rate shall be for a unit of one running meter.

3.2.0 Providing and fixing CI spun/sand cast soil quality pipe of approved make, including tube

fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), open to wall, ceiling and floor including making them good, filling the joints and fittings with spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry and CM 1:1 (1 cement: 1 sand) and sealant like M-seal or equivalent, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc. complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The dia of pipe shall be as under:

1) 150mm, 2) 100mm, 3) 75mm.

1.0 Materials:

The specified dia C I Spun soil/sand cast so il quality pipe and clamp shall co nform to the plumbing material specific ation. The cement mortar 1:1 shall conform to r elevant civil specification.

All other re levant specification of item no . 3 .1.1 shall b e follow ed except tha t the joint shall be done as described in the next section.



Page 409 of 430

2.0 Workmanship:

Joints:

The pipe shall be fixed ve rtically. The s pigot of the u pper pipe shall be properly fitted in the socket of the lower pipe such that ther e is unifo rm annular space for filling with the jo inting materials. Th e annular space between the spigot and socket shall be filled with a few turns of spun yarn soaked in cement slurry or blown bitume n 85/25 grade. These shall be pressed home by caulking tools. Th e joints shall then be filled with stiff CM 1:1 (1 cement: 1 fine sand) and sealant like

M-seal or equivalent we ll pre ssed with caulking to ols and finish ed smooth at top at an angle of 45 sloping up. The depth of the sealant shall be approximately 1/4th the total depth of the joint. The join ts shall be kep t wet atleast for 7 days by taping 4 folds of gunny bag to the pipe and keeping it moist constantly.


The leng th o f pipe shall be measured, including al l fittings along its length, in RM correct to a centimetre. No allowance shall be made for the por tion of pipe length entered in the sockets of the adjacent pipe or fittings. The ra te shall be inclusive of all materials, labour, tools and plan t, etc., required for satisfactory completion and testing of this item. Th e rate shall b e for a unit o f one RM.

3.3.0 Providing and fixing CI spun sand cast soil quality pipe including tube fittings such as

sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., of approved make, in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), concealed into wall, ceiling and floor including making them good, having lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc. complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The dia of pipe shall be 1) 150mm NB 2) 100mm NB 3) 75mm NB

All the rele vant specificatio ns of item no. 3. 1.1 shall be followed except that the pipe shall be concealed instead of being kept on the wall face . All pipes running along ceiling shall be fi xed on structural adjustable br ackets/clamps of s pecial design as shown on the drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to uniform slope and the brackets/clamps adjusted to the proper levels so that the pipes fully rest on them. All pipes running along the sun ken floor shall be encased in 10 cm brickwork leaving 5cm gap all around the pipe. 5m bedding of CM 1:2 shall be provided below the pipe. Relevant civil specification shall be followed for masonry work and mortar. Horizontal pipes in sunken floor s hall be laid to un iform slope a nd gradient, as specified.

3.4.0 Providing and fixing CI spun sand cast soil quality pipe of approved make including tube

fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc. with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., , in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or Aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), concealed into wall, ceiling and floor, complete including making good the wall, ceiling, and floor, filling the joints and fittings with spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry and CM 1:1 (1 cement: 1 sand) and sealant like M-seal or equivalent, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The dia of pipe shall be of the following nominal bore: 1) 150mm NB 2) 100mm NB 3) 75mm NB.



Page 410 of 430

All the rele vant specificatio ns of item n o. 3. 3.1 shall be followed except that the join ts and fittings shall be filled with spun yarn soaked in neat cement slurry and CM 1:1 (1 cement: 1 sand) and sealant like M-seal or equivalen t in stead of lead ca ulked join ts. The relevan t specification 3.2.1 shall be followed for filling the joints with CM 1:1 (1 cement: 1 sand) and sealant like M-seal.

3.5.0 Providing and fixing a cast iron ‘P’ trap/Nahni trap/cast iron floor trap of self-cleansing

design with a water seal not less than 50mm, with or without vent, including setting the trap in 1:2:4 CC, etc., complete. The trap shall be `P' type/ Nahni trap/cast iron floor trap, with Following dia inlet and outlet as required.

1.0 Materials:

The cast iron(spun) ‘P’ trap shall conform to re levant plumbing material specifications. The CI hinged screwed down cover and all materials shall be of 1st q uality as app roved by the Consultants. CC 1:2:4 and formwork material shall confirm to relevant civil specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

The ‘P’ trap with 100mm dia inlet and 75mm dia ou tlet shall be fixed as per d rawing or as directed.

The ‘P’ trap shall be jointed with CI pipe with lead joints. The lead joints shall conform to IS: 782 and as described in item no. 3.1.1. The trap and waste pipes shall be set with 1:2:4 ( 1 cement: 2 fine sand: 4 coarse agg regate) CC firmly support ed on the structural floor . The concrete shall extend to 40mm below finished floor level. The contractor shall provide all necessary shutter ing and centering for the concrete. Size of the conc rete block shall b e 30cm x 30 cm of required depth.


The rate shall include the cost of all materi als, lab our, tools and plants, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item, including lead jointing and testing.


3.5.1 The trap shall be `P' type, with 100mm dia inlet and 75mm dia outlet.

All relevant specification of item no. 3.5 .0, above , shall be followed except tha t outle t of ‘P ’

trap shall be of 100mm dia..

3.5.2 The ‘P’ trap shall be with 100mm dia inlet and 100mm dia outlet.

All relevant specification of item no. 3.5.0, above, shall be followed except that outlet of ‘P’ trap shall be with 100mm dia inlet and 100mm dia outlet.



Page 411 of 430

3.5.3 The ‘P’ trap shall be with 150mm dia inlet and 150mm dia outlet.

All relevant specification of item no . 3.5.0, above, shall be fo llowed except that outlet of ‘P’ trap shall be of 150mm dia..

3.5.4 The Nahni trap shall be with 75mm dia. outlet.

All relevant specification o f ite m no . 3 .5.0above shall be followed e xcept that Na hni trap of 75mm dia shall be used instead of ‘P’ trap with 75mm dia outlet

3.5.5 The Nnahni trap shall be with 100mm dia outlet.

All relevant specification o f ite m no . 3 .5.0 above shall be fo llowed except that N ahni trap of 100mm dia shall be used instead of ‘P’ trap with 75mm dia outlet.

3.5.6 The Cast iron floor trap shall be with 100mm dia inlet and 75mm dia outlet.

All rele vant specification of item no . 3.5 .0, above, shall be fo llowed except tha t Floor trap with 75mm dia outlet shall be used instead of ‘P’ trap with 75mm dia outlet.

3.5.7 The cast iron floor shall be with 100mm dia.

All re levant s pecification o f item n o. 3 .5.1, above, sh all be followed except that Floor trap o f 100mm dia shall be used instead of ‘P’ trap with 75mm dia outlet.

3.6.1 Providing and fixing in position a Stainless steel grating, 150mm x 150mm or 150mm dia in

size, generally conforming to the drawings and fixed on the inlet pipe. 1.0 Materials:

SS grating shall be of the first quality of Chilly or equivalen t make, as approved by the Engineer-in-charge and Architect. The grating shall be fixed on inlet of the trap.

2.0 Workmanship:

The SS grating shall be fixed as and where directed. The fixing shall be carried out in best workman-like manner. The joint between grating and the trap shall be fille d in CM 1:1. The jo int shall be leak proof.


The rate shall include the cost o f all materials, lab our, tools, etc., required for satisfactory completion of this item as described above. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.



Page 412 of 430

3.7.1 Providing and fixing in position an Aluminium grating, 150mm x 150mm in size,

conforming to the drawings and fixed on the pipe inlet.

The relevan t specifications of item no. 3.6.1 shall be followed exc ept that Aluminium gra ting shall be used instead of Stainless steel.

3.8.0 Providing and fixing in position cast iron rain water inlets with gravel guard and dome type

grating, specially cast, conforming to drawings and fixed on the inlet of Following dia pipe.

1.0 Materials:

CI rain water inle t with gr avel guard and dom e typ e grating sha ll be o f the first quality an d make. The grating shall be fixed on inlet of specified dia.

2.0 Workmanship:

The CI gra vel guard shall b e fixed as an d where directed. The fixing shall be carried out in the best manner of workmanship. The join t between gravel guard and pipes shall be filled in CM 1:1. The joint shall be leak proof.


The rate sha ll include the cost of a ll material, labour, too ls, e tc., required for satisfac tory completion of this item as described above. The rate shall be for a unit of one number..

3.8.1 Do-As-Above and fixed on the inlet of 150mm dia pipe.

All relevant specification of item no. 3.8.0, above, shall be followed except that inlet pipe shall be of 100mm dia and grating of suitable size shall be fixed on 150mm dia pipe.

3.8.2 Do-As-Above and fixed on inlet of 100mm dia pipe.

All relevant specification of item no. 3.8.0, above, shall be followed except that inlet pipe shall be of 100mm dia and grating of suitable size shall be fixed on 100mm dia pipe.



Page 413 of 430

3.8.3 Providing and fixing in position cast iron rain water inlets, with gravel guard and dome type grating, specially cast, conforming to drawings fixed on inlet of 75mm dia pipe.

All relevant specification of item no 3.8.0, above, shall be followed except that inlet pipe is of 75mm dia and grating of suitable size shall be fixed on 75mm dia pipe.

3.9.1 Providing and fixing GI rain water spout of 50mm dia and 30cm length, as directed.

1.0 Materials:

GI pipe of 50mm dia shall conform to relevant plumbing material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

The GI pipe of required length as per wall th ickness shall be fixed as rain water pipe as directed. The pipe shall be fixed about 1 /4 dia below the floor le vel so as to make approach of water, easy. The inlet of pipe shall be rounded off for easy entry of rain water. The pipe shall be fixed in CM 1:3.


The rate sha ll include the cost of a ll material, labour, too ls, e tc., required for satisfac tory completion of this item as described above.


3.10.0 Providing and fixing CI spun/sand cast pipe, rain water quality of approved make,

including tube fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees etc., with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, R.CC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), , open to wall, ceiling and floor, complete including making them good, having lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The dia of pipe shall be as under: 1) 150mm, 2) 100mm, 3) 75mm.

1.0 Materials:

The specified dia CI Spun /sand cast pipe of RW quality and bracke ts/clamps sha ll conform to relevant plumbing material specifications. The ceme nt mortar 1:1 shall conform to relevant civil material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

CI rain water pipes shall be of the specified dia and shall be used in full length, including socket ends of the pipes unless shorter lengths are required at junctions with fittings.

The pipe shall be fixed ve rtically. The s pigot of the u pper pipe shall be properly fitted in the socket of the lower pipe such that ther e is uni form annular space for filling with the jo ining materials. Fo r join ting and all other details rele vant specification of item no. 3 .01.a shall b e followed.



Page 414 of 430


The leng th o f pipe shall be measured, including al l fittings along its length in RM, correct to a centimetre. No allowance shall be made for the por tion of pipe length entered in the sockets of the adjacent pipe or fitting s. The rate in cludes all Labour and materials, too ls and plant, etc ., required for s atisfactory completion and testing of this ite m. The ra te shall be for a unit o f one RM.

3.11.0 Providing and fixing CI spun/sand cast pipe, rain water quality, of approved make,

including tube fittings such as sockets, reducers, long or short bends, flanges, tees with or without inspection door, vents, cowls at top etc., in proper line and level (with necessary support like MS or aluminium brackets/clamps, MS flats, RCC or brick masonry pedestals and battens if required), concealed to wall, ceiling and floor, complete including making them good, having lead caulked joints, testing and painting the pipes and specials with minimum 2 coats of approved bitumastic paint over one coat of primer etc., complete as per the specification and as directed by the Engineer-in- charge. The dia of pipe shall be as under: 1) 150mm, 2) 100mm, 3) 75mm.

The rele vant specifications of item no . 3 .10.0 shall be followed e xcept that the p ipes shall be concealed within the walls/floors.

3.12.0 Providing and fixing an approved SWR quality, heavy duty, uPVC pipes with necessary

specials, bends, such as `Y' junction, `T' junction (both single and double), including plugs, shoes, cowls, flange compression type fittings, wall clips, in proper line and level with necessary support like brackets/clamps, clips, RCC or brick pedestals or battens, if necessary, to wall, ceiling and floor, open, complete jointing with rubberising and airtight joints, with ‘T’ shaped rubber ring, , etc., and lubricant or jointing material, including testing, cutting, making good the wall, ceiling and floor, etc. complete of the following OD: 1) 160mm, 2) 110mm, 3) 90mm, 4) 75mm.

2.0 Materials:

The uPVC pipe of specifie d dia shall co nform to IS: 7834. The sp ecials and fittings required shall be of the first qua lity and UV stabilised so as to facilita te open fixation, con forming to IS: 4985 and also to relevant plumbing material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The uPVC p ipes of specified di a shall b e fixed as dir ected. Due to thermal e xpansion of rig id uPVC pipes, due allowances, about 10mm of therma l gap provid e particularly in case of over- ground pipe lines for any change in length of the pipe that may occur during installation or when pipe line is in service.

2.2 Above groun d installation of rig id u PVC pipe sho uld be under taken after p recautions are

observed for their pro tection against d irt, s un rays an d mechanical damage. uPVC pipes are UV stabilised and may be adopted.

2.3 Generally, in horizontal runs, uPVC pipes shall be supported at an interva l of not more than 1 0 times the outside dia o f the pipe. In vertical lines, uPVC pipes shall be supported at an interval



Page 415 of 430

of 1 m to a maximu m of 2 m/. Closer support spacings shall be provided if approved by th e manufacture.

2.4 Manufacturer’s guidelines regarding handling, transporting, storing, laying and jointing of pipes shall

be kept in view, during execution. Provision for expans ion jo ints, a ir ven ts and proper anchorage shall be made.

2.5 uPVC pipes shall be fixed on wall with clips, wooden plugs and suitable brackets/clamps.

2.6 Jointing the pipes:

The pipes and sockets shall be accurately cut at right angle to the axis. The shortened pipe

end shall be chamfered to an angle of 15 with a medium file. The ends of the pipes and fittings should be absolutely free from dirt and dust. The outside surface of the pipes and the inside of the fittings shall then be roughened with emery paper and solvent cement applied to the matching surface, i.e., to the spigot end and the sealing ring. Then pass the spigot end into the socket containing the sealing ring until pushed home fully and joined. Mark the position of the socket edge on the pipe and then withdraw the pipe from the socket for the necessary thermal gap. Since solvent cement is aggressive to uPVC, care must be taken to avoid applying excessive cement to the inside of pipe sockets as any surplus cement cannot be wiped off after jointing. Very old, hard, dense solvent cement shall not be used. Empty solvent cement tins, brushes, rags of paper unpregneted with cement should not be buried in the trenches. They should be gathered, not left scattered about, as they can prove to be a hazard to animals which may chew them.

Threaded uPVC pipe fitting s shall not be over tightened, as the threads may get damaged. Th e pipes shall never be threaded but suitable threaded fittings shall be used.

If an y manu facturer recommends its own met hods of jointing the s ame shall be adopted after necessary approval from the Engineer-in-charge or Architect.

2.7 Laying the pipes in trenches:

The pipes shall be la id o ver uniform re latively so ft fine grained soil, found to be free from presence of hard objects such as large flints, rocky projections, large tree ro ots etc. Wh ile laying the pip es undergrou nd, care shall be taken so that the trench shall be as narrow as possible as required for working and its bottom shall be free of stones, sharp objects, etc.

The pipes laid underground shall not be less than 1 m from the ground level. The pipe shall be positioned in the trenches so as to avoid any induced stresses due to deflection. Any deviation required shall be obtained by using proper type of rubber ring joints.


The relevant specifications of item no. 1.1.0, of water supply installations, shall be followed except that the uPVC pipes of specified dia. shall be paid under this item. The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.

3.13.0 Providing and fixing an approved SWR quality, heavy duty uPVC pipes, concealed,

complete jointing with rubberising and airtight joints, with ‘T’ shaped rubber ring, with necessary specials, bends, such as `Y' junction, `T' junction (both single and double), including plugs, shoes, cowls, flange compression type fittings, wall clips, etc.,, in proper line and level with necessary support like brackets/clamps, clips, RCC or brick pedestals or battens, if necessary, to wall, ceiling and floor, lubricant or jointing material, including testing, cutting, making good the wall, ceiling and floor, etc., complete of the following OD :

1) 160mm , 2) 110mm, 3) 90mm, 4) 75mm.



Page 416 of 430

The relevant specifications of item no. 3.11.0 shall be followed same except tha t the pipe shall be concealed. Al l pipes running alo ng ceiling shall be fixe d on structural adjustabl e brackets/clamps of special design as shown on t he d rawings or as directed . Horizontal p ipes shall be laid to uniform slo pe and the brackets/clamp s adjusted to the proper levels so that th e pipes fully rest on them. All pipes running al ong the sunken floor shall be enca sed in 10 cm brickwork leaving 5cm gap all around th e pipe. 5cm bedding of CM 1:2 shall be provided below the pipe . Relevant specific ation o f civil work shall be followed for masonry work and mortar. Horizontal pipes in sunken floor shall be laid to uniform slope and gradient.

3.14.0 Providing and fixing an approved SWR quality, heavy duty, uPVC ‘P’ trap or Nahni trap with CP pressed steel grating, to wall, ceiling and floor, including cutting the walls and floors and making them good, testing, etc., complete having specified size inlet and outlet:

1.0 Materials:

The uPVC SWR ‘P’ trap or ‘P’ trap or Nahni trap shall be of th e first quality. It shall have minimum water seal of 50mm All ma terials shall be of 1st quality as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The ‘P’ trap or Nahni trap with 110mm dia inlet and 75mm d ia o utlet shall be fixed as per drawing or as directed. T he ‘P’ trap o r Nahni trap shall be jointed with uPVC Pipe wit h necessary solvent cement, as per the manufacturer's instructions.

The trap and waste pipes shall be set 1 :2:4 ( 1 cemen t: 2 fine sand: 4 coarse aggregate) CC, firmly

suppor ted on the str uctural floor. The c oncrete shall be upto 40mm below fin ished floor level. The co ntractor shall provide all ne cessary shuttering and centering for the concrete. Size of the concrete block shall be 30 x 30 cm and of required depth.


The rates shall be inclusive of the cost o f all ma terials, labours tools and plants, etc., required for the satisfactory completion of this item, including jointing and testing.

. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

3.14.1 Do-As-Above having 110mm inlet and 75mm outlet:

1.0 All relevant specifications of the item no. 3.14.0, except the change in the size, shall be followed.

3.14.2 Do-As-Above having 110mm inlet and 110mm outlet:

All relevant specifications of the item no. 3.14.0 except the change in the size shall be followed.



Page 417 of 430

EXTERNAL DRAINAGE

4.1.0 Providing and laying salt-glazed stoneware pipes of 230 mm diameter (to the line, level and

slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, depth as per 4.1.1 and 4.1.2, including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

Water and Cement mor tar of propo rtion 1 :1 shall conform to relevant civil materia l specifications. 230 mm dia . Glazed stoneware pipe shall conform to relevant plumbing-material specifications. All materials shall be of the 1s t qua lity of approve d make or equivalen t as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship: The relevant specification of item no. 1.5.0 shall be followed except that

stoneware pipe of 230 mm dia shall be laid. 2.1 Laying:

The pipes sh all be laid accurately and p erfectly true to line, levels and gradients. Care shall b e taken to pre vent sand, e tc., from en tering the pipes. The pipes between 2 manholes shall be laid truly in a straight line without vertical or horizontal undulation. All junctions and changes in direction and diameter shall be made in side m anholes by means of curved tap ered channels formed in CC finished smoo th and benched on both sides . All along its length, body of the pipe shall rest on an even level bed having grips to receive sockets of the pipes.

All inverts sh all be laid from sight ra ils fixed a t th e tr ue leve ls, wi th proper boning rods. The pipes shall b e laid , sockets facing up , the gr adient b eginning a t the lower end and with the socket resting in the socket holes cut in the concrete bed, if specified. Each p ipe shall be la id singly, and no pipe shall be laid until the trench has been excavated to the required depth for a distance of 20 m in front of the pipe to be laid. Fo r excavation relevant specification of civil ite m shall be followed.

2.2 Jointing: In each join t, a gasket of tarred yarn shall be paved ro und the jo int and inserted in it b y

means of suitable jointing tools. More strains of yarn shall b e added and well rammed home. The yarn will be m oistened to avoid absor bing water from the mixed cement mortar . Portland CM 1:1 shall be filled in the joint, as described hereunder:

The cement mortar paste shall be carefully inserted into the joint by hand and s hall be caulke d into the joint with wooden caulking tools. More cement shall be added until the space of the joint has been filled complete ly with tightly caulked c ement mor tar paste and fin ished as directed. Depths of yarn an d cement mo rtar paste for different size s of pipes joints are given below. All dimensions are in mm

-------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- Internal

Depth of Depth Depth of cement dia of pipe

socket yarn mortar paste

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

100 50 22 28

150 60 28 32

230 65 32 32

-------- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------



Page 418 of 430

2.3 Testing:

(1) Testing shall be done totally at the Contractor's expense inclusive of apparatus, provision of water, etc.

(2) After the cement mortar ha s set, the p ipes shall be te sted in leng th between ma nholes. In the lowest manhole, a plu g shall be ins erted. At the upper manhole, a c ircular disc to fit exactly the in side diameter of the pipe with a filling pip e with a right angle bend and an air cock shall be fixed. The length of the pipes shall then be filled with water by mea ns of pipe connection on the upper d isc. The air cock in the upper disc shall be kept open while th e pipe line is being filled, to permit the escape of air. When the pip es have been filled with water and air released, the air cock shall be shut and water shall b e poured into a conical filler attached to the filling tube o f the di sc in the upp er manhole u ntil the wa ter remains in the fil ler. T he fi lling level in the filler s hall be abou t 1.5 m abo ve the in vert le vel o f the highest pipe in that stre tch. A tolerance of l eakage of 2 litres/cm d ia of the drain for 1 Km length ma y be allowed during a period of 10 minut es only. If it is found that certain pipe joints are leaking, the water shall be drained off and the joints re-caulked.

(3) After the joints and pipes have been pr oved to be water tight, they shall be be dded or

enveloped in CC, if specified, to the extent necessary. Refilling shall be done with fines t selected material and shall be done in layers, as per the relevant specification of civil item.


The work of preparing the trench bed to fit the lower part of the pipe and `Gri ps' left to take

socket, collars, etc., shall be included in the rate of laying the pipes. he measurements shall be net without any allowance for cutting and waste. The length of bends, junctions and other connections shall be in cluded in the tot al length of the drai n pip es. Nothing e xtra shall be paid for the same. The necessary civil work lik e, excavation, refilli ng trenches, form work, B.B.C.C, etc., shall b e carried out, mea sured and paid as per relevant items of civil works. The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.

4.1.1 Providing and laying salt-glazed stoneware pipes of 230 mm diameter (to the line, level and slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, depth upto 1.5 m., including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

1.0 The relevant specification of item no 4.1.1, shall be followed except that the pipe shall be laid at a depth up to 1.5 m.

4.1.2 Providing and laying salt glazed stone-ware pipes of 230 mm diameter, (to level and slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, at a depth from 1.5 m to 3 m including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

The relevant specification of item no 4.1.1, shall be followed except that the pipe shall be laid at a depth from 1.5 m. to 3 m.

4.2.0 Providing and laying salt-glazed stone-ware pipes 150 mm diameter (to level and slopes) and

jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, depth as per 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.



Page 419 of 430


The relevant specification of item no. 4.1.0 shall be followed except that the pipe shall be of 150 mm dia.

4.2.1 Providing and laying salt-glazed stone-ware pipes 150 mm diameter (to level and slopes) and

jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, upto 1.5 m depth including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.




The relevant specification of item no. 4.1.1, above, shall be followed. The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.

4.2.2 Providing and laying salt glazed stone-ware pipes of 150 mm diameter (to the level and

slope) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, at a depth from 1.5 m up to 3 m including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

The relevant specification of item no . 4.1.2 shall be followed exce pt that p ipe shall be laid at a depth from 1.5 m to 3 m.

4.3.0 Providing and laying salt glazed stone-ware pipes of 100 mm diameter (to level and

slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, depth as per 4.3.1 and 4.3.2 including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

The relevant specification of item no . 4.1.0 shall be followed exce pt tha t the pipe shall be of 100 mm dia.

4.3.1 Providing and laying salt glazed stone-ware pipes of 100 mm diameter (to level and

slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, upto 1.5 m depth including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.




The relevant specification of item no . 4.1.1shall be followed. The ra te shall be for a unit o f one

RM.



Page 420 of 430

4.3.2 Providing and laying salt glazed stone-ware pipes 100 mm diameter (to level and slopes) and jointing with stiff mixture of CM 1:1, at a depth from 1.5 m up to 3 m, including testing of pipes and joints, etc., complete.

The relevant specification of item no . 4.1.2 shall be followed exce pt that p ipe shall be laid at a depth from 1.5 m. to 3 m.

4.4.1 Providing and fixing, glazed earthen ware half round channels, of 100 mm dia with or

without dead ends, laid to proper line and level, set in CM 1:3, with joints neatly finished with cement slurry.

Relevant spe cification of it em no. 4.0 1.a.1 shall be followed same except th at half round channel of 100 mm dia shall be used instead of S.G.S.W. pipe.

4.5.0 Providing and fixing a salt-glazed stoneware gully trap, class À', of specified dia inlet and outlet, with CI grating at top, etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

Water and Cement mor tar of propo rtion 1:5 shall conform to rele vant civil material specifications. The SW Gully trap of 100 mm x 100 mm size shall conform to relevant plumbing material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Excavation for gully trap shall be done true to dimensions and levels as indicated on plans or as directed. The excavation work shall generally be done as per relevant civil specifications.

2.2 Fixing: The gully trap sha ll be fixed o ver CC 1:2: 4 (1 cement: 2 sand: 4 coarse aggregate) foundation, 1 00 mm thick. The jointing of gully trap outlet to the branch drain shall be don e similar to the jointing of SW pipe, as described in the item of external drainage.

2.3 Brick masonry chamber: After fixing and testing the gully trap and branch drain, a brick masonry chamber, size 30 0 x 300 mm c lear inside, with 230 mm thick brick work in CM 1 :5 (1 cement:5 sand) shall be built round the g ully trap from the top of the bed concrete up to ground level. The space between the chamber walls and the trap shall be filled with C C 1:2:4 . Inside, outside and a ll exposed su rfaces of the chamber s hall be plastered with CM 1:3 (1 cement:3 sand) and finished with flo ating coa t of neat cement. The corners and bottom o f the chambe r shall be roun ded of so as to slope towards the gr ating. Relevan t civil specifications shall be followed respectively for masonry and plaster work.

2.4 CI cover with frame of spec ified size shall then be fixed on the top of the br ick masonry as per the

detail specification of relevant plumbing item.


3.1 The rate includes cost of all labour , material, tools, plants, e tc., r equired for the satisfactor y completion of this item as described above.

3.2 The necessary civil work like; excavation, CC 1:2:4, brick masonry, plastering etc., shall be carried out, measured and paid as per relevant items of civil works.

3.3 C.I cover with frame shall be measured and paid as per the relevant plumbing item

3.4 The rate shall be for a unit of one number.



Page 421 of 430

4.5.1 Providing and fixing a salt-glazed stoneware gully trap, class À', of 100 mm dia inlet and 100 mm outlet, with CI grating at top, etc., complete. The relevant specifications of item no. 4 .5.0 shall be followed except that the inlet shall be 15 0 mm instead of 100 mm.

4.5.2 Providing and fixing a salt-glazed stoneware gully trap, class À' of 150 mm dia inlet and 100 mm outlet with CI grating at the top, etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no. 4 .5.0 shall be followed except that the inlet shall be 15 0 mm instead of 100 mm.

4.5.3 Providing and fixing a salt-glazed stoneware gully trap, class À' of 230 mm dia inlet and

150 mm outlet with CI grating at the top, etc., complete.

The relevant specifications of item no . 4.5.0 shall be followed except that the size shall be 150 mm x 230 mm instead of 100 mm x 100 mm.

4.6.0 Providing and fixing the first quality salt-glazed stoneware Sewer (intercepting) trap of following size with cleaning eye cap and metal stopper chain, set in CC 1:4:8 etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

Sewer (intercepting) trap o f size 100 x 100 mm shall be of the first quality app roved by the Consultants. The trap shall be provided with cleaning eye and meta l stopper chain. Water and Cement shall conform to relevant civil material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

The sewer trap shall be s et in CC 1 :4:8, of adequate size, as dir ected by Engineer-in-charge. For CC 1:4:8, relevant civil specification shall be follo wed. The sewer trap shall be fixed in th e last man hole before septic tank/municipal connection. The trap outlet to the main external drain shall be joine d similar to the jointing o f SW pipe with cement mor tar. Pipe connection from the trap to the manhole of the external drain shall be of specified size of stoneware/RCC pipe.


The rate shall include the cost of all materials, lab our, tool s, pl ants, et c., re quired for th e satisfactory completion of this item as described a bove. The rele vant civil ite ms like; CC in 1:4:8 etc., shall be carrie d out, measured and pai d for as pe r rel evant items of civil works. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

4.6.1 100 mm x 100 mm The relevant specifications of item no. 4 .6.0 shall be followed except that the trap size shall be 100 mm x 100 mm

4.6.2 150 mm x 150 mm

The relevant specifications of item no. 4 .6.0 shall be followed except that the trap size shall be 150 mm x 150 mm.

4.6.3 230 mm x 230 mm

The relevant specifications of item no. 4.04.a shall be followed except that the trap size shall be

230 mm x 230 mm.



Page 422 of 430

4.6.4 300 mm x 300 mm

The relevant specifications of item no. 4.04.a shall be followed except that the trap size shall be 300 mm x 300 mm.

4.7.0 Providing and laying in trench reinforced concrete IS class NP-2 pipes of 500 mm

internal diameter, on RCC cradle, if specified (to the level and slope) and joining, depth as per 4.7.1, with collars and butt-ends prepared for collar joints, including filling the joints with CM 1:1 and testing of joints, etc., complete; (RCC cradle shall be measured and paid for separately):

1.0 Materials:

The reinforced concrete no n-pressure pipes of s pecified diameter shall confirm to the relevant IS: 458. Cement mortar shall confor m to relevant civil material specifications. All materials shall be of the 1st quality of the approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 The relevant specification of item no . 4.1.0, above, shall be followed except that the re inforced concrete pipes of specified diameter shall be laid.

2.2 Laying of RCC spun pipes:

No pipes shall be laid till the drain and its levels and gradients carefully checked and tested an d found correct by the Engineer-in-charge.

For excavation and refilling of trenches relevant civil spec ifications shall be followed respectively. After the concrete cradles hav e been laid properly, where specified in the schedule, RCC spun pipes shall be lo wered gradu ally into the trenches over the concrete cradle or be d. Holes for collars shall be made at every jo int. T hese holes shall be made depending upon the particular length o f the pipe being laid. The pipes shall be le velled properly to the requir ed slope an d gradient. T he pipe dr ain shall rest on the bed at ever y point throughout its length. To e nsure this, th e s pace between the under side of the pipes and the invert of the cradle shall be carefully grouted so lid with thin cement slurry consisting o f 1 cement:3 clean washed sand, in such a manner that no voids shall be left. This is to ensure that the load of th e pipes and t he superimposed load of the earth filling shall be evenly distribu ted on the cradle or on firm ground on which the pipe is resting.

All precautions shall be taken to the full satisfaction of the Architect/Consultants and the p ipes shall

be gradually lowered on the cradle or on fi rm ground. After the alignmen t of pipes is checked by the authorised representative of t he Clien t, the grouting shall be done without an y extra charges by the Contr actor. The cr adle of concrete shall be allowed to se t atleast for 3 days, before any pipes are placed in it and the contractor shall take due care in setting the pipe in the cradle so that no damage to the cradles shall occur. If any damage to the cradle occurs, it shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge and i n any particular case where the damage, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge has adversely affected the structura l strength o f the cradle. T he Contracto r sha ll remo ve the dama ged section of the cradle and replace it at his own expenses, to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

2.3 Joints:



Page 423 of 430

The join ts for the p ipes shall be made by loose colla rs and the co nnecting spa ce shall be a s minimum as possible. The collars shall be specially roughened inside to provide a better grip.

Two adjacent pipe ends when butted to gether concentricall y, a dowel will be left between the two ends. In this dowel, C M 1:1 or colla r shall then b e adjusted o ver the pipe so tha t its end s

are equidista nt from the p ipe ends and is conc entric with the pip e. The space between the collar and the outer barrel of the pipe can then be caulked with b itumen soaked hemp yarn in layers atleast upto 50 mm (and not e xceeding 80 mm ) from the joint on its e ither side. The remaining space on either side of the joint upto t he collar shall then be caulked with a stiff mix of CM 1:1 . Every joint shall be fin ished smooth at an angle of 45

O with the longitudinal axis of the

pipe on either side of the collars.

The interior of the pipe drains shall be cleaned off of all dirt, loo se mortar an d superfluous materials, after jointing.

2.4 Curing:

Every joint shall be kept wet for about 10 days for maturing. The section of the pipe line laid and joined shall be covered immediately to protect from weather effects.

The joints shall be left exposed for observation.

2.5 Testing of RCC spun pipes:

After joints have been allowed to settle sufficien tly, the pipe shall be tested under a head of atleast 0 .6 m above the top of the highest pipe in th e stretch and in no case under a head greater than 6 m of water column at the highest level.

Any defects found in the joints shall be immedia tely rectified or redone and any pipe which is found to be le aking, shall b e removed an d replaced. The defective pipe shall be removed from the site immediately, thereafter.


3.1 The relevan t specification of item No. 4 .1.0 shall be followed e xcept that the rate includes for laying to level or slope in trenches on RCC cradl e, if required etc., complete, including making the join ts an d testing as indicated. (R CC cradle sh all be measu red and paid for separately under respective item of Plain and Reinforced Concrete.)

3.2 The measurement shall b e net withou t any allowance for cutting and waste. The length o f

bends, junctions and othe r connections (measured along the cen tre line) shall be included in the total length of the pipes, the connections being numbered afterwards and paid for extra over pipes.

3.3 The size of bends, junctions etc., shall suit to the size of the pipe. The bore (internal diameter of pipe)

shall be the criterion for payment.

3.4 The relevant civil items like excavation, refilling etc., shall be carried out, measured and paid as per relevant items of civil works.

3.5 Nothing extra shall be paid separately for the use of mechanical appliances, where necessary.

3.6 The rate shall be for a unit of one RM.



Page 424 of 430

4.7.1 Do-As- Above but depth up to 1.5 m,

All relevant specification of ite m no . 4 .7.0 shall be fo llowed except that pipe sha ll be laid in trench of depth up to 1.5 m.

4.7.2 Do-As- Above but depth from 1.5 m to 3 m

All relevan t s pecification o f item no. 4.7 .0 s hall be followed except tha t pipe shall be laid in trench of depth 1.5 m to 3 m.

4.8.0 Providing and laying in trench reinforced concrete non-pressure IS class NP-2 pipes of 400 mm internal diameter on RCC cradle if specified (to the level and slope) and jointing at a , depth as per 4.8.1 with collars and butt-ends prepared for collar joints, including filling the joints with CM 1:1 and testing them etc., complete. (RCC cradle shall be measured and paid for separately.)

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 400 mm dia shall be laid in trench.

4.8.1 Do-As- Above but depth up to 1.5 m .

All relevant specification o f item no . 4 .7.0 shall be fo llowed except that p ipe o f 4 00 mm dia shall be laid in trench of depth up to1.5 m

4.8.2 Do-As- Above but depth from 1.5 m to 3 m.

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 400 mm dia shall be laid in trench of depth 1.5 m to 3 m.


All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 400 mm dia shall be laid in trench of depth 3.0 m to 5.0 m.

4.9.0 Providing and laying in trench reinforced concrete non-pressure IS class NP-2 pipes of

300 mm internal diameter on RCC cradle if specified (to the level and slope) and joining, depth as per 4.9.1 and 4.9.3 with collars and butt-ends prepared for collar joints; including filling the joints with CM 1:1 and them etc., complete (RCC cradle shall be measured and paid for separately).

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 300 mm dia shall be laid.



Page 425 of 430

4.9.1 Do-As- Above but depth up to 1.5 m .

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 300 mm dia shall be laid upto a depth of 1.5 m.


All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 300 mm dia shall be laid in trench of depth 1.5 m to 3 m.

4.9.3 Do-As- Above but depth from 3 m to 5 m.

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 300 mm dia shall be laid in trench of depth 3 m to 5 m.

4.10.0 Providing and laying in trench reinforced concrete non-pressure IS class NP-2 pipes of 230 mm internal diameter as per 4.10.1 on RCC cradle if specified (to the level and slope) and jointing with collars and butt-ends prepared for collar joints; including filling the joints with CM 1:1 and testing them etc., complete (RCC cradle shall be measured and paid for separately).

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 230 mm dia shall be laid

4.10.1 Do-As- Above but depth up to 1.5 m.

All relevant specification of item no. 4.7.0 shall be followed except that pipe of 230 mm dia shall be laid upto a depth of 1.5 m.


All re levant s pecification o f item no. 4 .7.0 shall be followed except that pipe o f 2 30 mm dia . shall be laid in trench of depth 1.5 m. to 3 m.



Page 426 of 430

4.10.3 Do-As- Above but depth from 3 m to 5 m.

All re levant s pecification o f item no. 4 .7.0 shall be followed except that pipe o f 2 30 mm dia . shall be laid in trench of depth 3 m. to 5 m.

4.11.0 Providing and laying in trench reinforced concrete non-pressure IS class NP-2 pipes of 150 mm internal diameter as per 4.11.1and 4.11.2 on RCC cradle if specified (to the level and slope) and jointing with collars and butt-ends prepared for collar joints, including filling the joints with CM 1:1 and testing of joints, etc. complete. (RCC cradle shall be measured and paid for separately.)

All re levant s pecification o f item no. 4.7 .0 s hall be followed except that diame ter of the pipe shall be 150 mm

4.11.1 Do-As- Above but depth up to 1.5 m.

All re levant s pecification o f item no. 4.7 .0 s hall be followed except that diame ter of the pipe shall be 150 mm


All re levant s pecification o f item no. 4 .7.0 shall be followed except that pipe o f 1 50 mm dia . shall be laid in trench of depth 1.5 m to 3 m.

4.12.1 Providing and fixing a cast iron Gully trap, manhole frame and cover of specified size, shape

and weight of approved make or equivalent including carting from store to site of work, fixing in CC and finishing with 3 coats of anti-corrosive paint etc., complete.

1.0 Materials:

Manhole frame and CI cover shall conform to IS:1726. All materials shall be of the first quality of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

The CI cover specified size, shape and weight sha ll be fixed, as and where directed. The frame shall be fixed in RCC slab in CM 1:3 (1 cemen t:3 fine sand) and shall be fin ished as per the details, specified in the dr awing. The cover and fra me shall be painted with 3 coats of anti corrosive paint.



Page 427 of 430


The rate shall be for a unit of one kg.

4.13.1 Providing and fixing a precast concrete Gully trap, manhole frame and cover of specified size, shape and weight, manufactured with concrete of M-350 grade and above and with suitable mild steel rims to prevent damaging of edges and provided with easy lifting hooks duly protected against corrosion of approved make or equivalent including carting from store to site of work, fixing in CC and making good complete.

All relevant specification of item no. 4.12.0 shall be followed exc ept that precast concrete cover and frame shall be provided instead of CI frame and cover. It shall conform to a load test as per IS: 12592 (part I).

4.14.1 Providing and fixing a cast iron grating frame and cover of specified clear size, shape and weight of approved make or equivalent including carting from store to site of work, fixing in CC and finishing with 3 coats of anti-corrosive paint etc. complete.

1.0 Materials:

Grating frame and CI cover shall conform to IS :1726. All ma terials shall be of first quality of approved make or equivalent as approved by the Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship:

CI cover with frame of specified size, sh ape and weig ht, shall than be fixed on the top of the brick masonry with CC 1:2:4 (1 cement:2 coarse sand:4 graded stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size), 40 mm thick and rendered smooth. The finished top of the cover shall be finished as per the d etails, specified in the drawing. All CI items shall be painted in 3 coats with approved bitumastic paint.


The rate shall be for a unit of one kg.

4.15.1 Providing and fixing a precast concrete grating frame and cover of specified size, shape and weight, manufactured with concrete of M-350 grade and above and with suitable mild steel rims to prevent damaging of edges and provided with easy lifting-hooks duly protected against corrosion of approved make or equivalent including carting from store to site of work, fixing in CC and making good complete.

All re levant s pecification o f item no . 4.14.1 shall be followed e xcept tha t prec ast concrete grating cover and frame shall be provide d instead of CI frame and cover. It shall conform to a load test as per IS 12592 (part I).

4.16.1 Constructing Drop connections of the required size, between branch sewer and main sewer

or in the main sewer itself, in step ground, when the difference in the invert level of 2, exceeds 45 cm.



Page 428 of 430

1.0 Materials:

CI pipes and fittings and stoneware glazed pipe sh all conform to relevant plumbing mate rial specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

2.1 Drop connections shall be provided be tween the bra nch sewer an d the ma in sewer or in th e main sewer itself, in step ground, when the difference in the invert level of the 2, exceeds 45 cm The size of the connections shall be as required.

2.2 Drop connections from gully traps to main sewer on rectangular manholes, sh all be made inside

the manholes and shall have H.C .I special type door bend on the top and h eel rest bend at bottom connected by a H .C.I pipe. This pipe shall be supported by holder bat clamps, at 180 cm intervals, with atleast 1 clamp for each drop connections. All joints shall be lead caulked and 25 mm deep.

2.3 Drop connections from bra nch sewer to main sewer shall be mad e outside the manhole wall with

glazed stoneware pipe tee connectio n, vertical pipe and bend at the bottom. T he top of the tee shall be finished upto the surface level and provided with a CI hinged type frame and cover,

size 30 cm x 30 cm. T he connection shall be e mbedded in CC 1:2:4 mixture o f 15 cm thickness all round the pipe and tee and also upto the surface chamber of the tee.

2.4 Drop connect ion made from vertical s tacks dire ctly into manholes shall not be considered as drop connection. They shall be paid for under the relevant soil and waste pipes.


3.1 The rate includes cost of all labour, mater ials, tools and plants, etc. r equired for the satisfactory completion of this item as described above.

3.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one number. 4.17.1 Extra rate for constructing drop connections for every additional depth of 0.1 m, or part

thereof, over item no. 4.16.1 where the difference in between the 2 connection is more than 0.6 m.

The relevant specification of item no.4.16.1 shall be followed except that the extra rate shall be paid for every additional depth of 0.1 m, or part thereof, provided over and above item no.4.07.a where the difference between the 2 connections exceeds more than 0.6 m.

The rate shall be for a unit of 0.1 m additional depth.

4.18.1 Providing and fixing a CI mica flap valve of 100 mm dia on ventilating pipe, complete as per the drawing.

1.0 Materials:

The CI mica flap valve, of 100 mm dia. sha ll be of the best quality and make, a s approved by the



Page 429 of 430

Consultants.

2.0 Workmanship and Mode of Measurements and Payment:

2.1 The mica flap valve shall be fixed as and where directed by the Engineer- in-charge on CI pip e of 100 mm dia CM 1:1.

2.2 The rate shall be for a unit of one number. 4.19.1 Providing and fixing, CI steps in manhole, water tank, septic tank, etc., of size 500 mm x

150 mm x 22.5 mm and painting with 3 coats of anti-corrosive paint, etc., complete. 1.0 Materials:

The CI steps of size 500 x 150 x 22.5 mm, shall con form to IS:54 55. Paint and cement mortar shall conform to relevant civil material specifications.

2.0 Workmanship:

The CI steps of size 500 x 150 x 22 .5 mm, shal l be fixed in man hole and such other simila r structures, as and where directed. The steps shall be staggered in vertical run, 3 00 mm apart and horizontally 380 mm a part. The top step shall be 450 mm below the manhole cover and lowest not more than 300 mm above the benching. The steps shall be embe dded in wall of

manhole, etc. with CC 1:3:6 or cast in-situ upto 200 mm depth and the surface sh all be finished with cement plaster 15 mm thick, in C M 1:5. The s teps shall be painted with 3 coats of anti- corrosive paint.


The rate includes all labours, materials, tools and plants, etc., required for the satisfactory completion of this item. The rate shall be for a unit of one number.

4.20.1 Providing and fixing Plastic footsteps in manhole, water tank, septic tank, etc., of

approved make like KGM or equivalent of size 263 mm x 165 mm x 25 mm complete in every respect.

All relevant specification of item no.4.20.1shall be followed except that plastic footsteps shall be provided instead of C I steps. The pla stic foo tstep shall be made out o f co-polymer o f polypropylene with stee l-reinforced, conformi ng to ASTM D-4101 specifications. It sha ll mee t the load requirement of 225 kg as per IS-5455.

4.21.0 Providing and fixing precast manhole/Gully trap/ rain water catch pit cover and frame of

Alcock make or equivalent. Rate per no. shall be quoted for following types :



Page 430 of 430

4.21.1 Heavy duty cover and frame giving clear opening of 560 mm dia. with combined weight of 181 kg.

4.21.2 Medium duty cover and frame giving clear opening of 450 mm dia. with combined weight of

124 kg. 4.21.3 Light duty cover and frame giving clear opening of 600 mm x 450 mm with combined

weight of 49 kg. 4.21.4 Light duty cover and frame giving clear opening of 525 mm x 350 mm with combined

weight of 51 kg.

4.21.5 Gully trap cover and frame giving clear opening of 165 mm dia. with combined weight of

9.5 kg. 4.21.6 Rain water catch pit cover and frame giving clear opening of 700 mm x 700 mm with

combined weight of 201 kg. 4.21.7 Rain water catch pit cover and frame giving clear opening of 460 mm mm x 460 mm with

combined weight of 161 kg.